ue “ ve ye PROCEEDINGS OF THE SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON FOR THE YEAR PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY, AND SOLD AT THEIR HOUSE IN HANOVER SQUARE, LONDON : MESSRS. LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO, PATERNOSTER ROW. Liss 7 OF THE COUNCIL AND OFFICERS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 1886. COUNCIL. (Bleted Aprit 29, 1886.) Proressor W. H. Frower, LL.D., F.R.S., President. Lrevr.-Gen. Tue Lorp Anincer, C.B. Wit11am T. Branrorp, Esq., E.R.S. Masor-Gun. Henry Crerx, R.A., F.R.S. Hoyry E. Dresser, Esq. Cuartes Drummonn, Esq., Trea- surer. F, DuCanz Gopmay, Esq. Lrevt.-Cot. H. H. Gopwin-Ats- TEN, F.R.S., Vice-President. ArtuuR Grote, Esa., Vice-Presi- dent. Das, AG. ie 6. GUNTHER, F.R.S. Dr. Epwarp Hamirton. E. W. H. Horpsworrn, Esq. Prorrssor Mrvarz, F.R.S., Vice- President. Proressor H. N. Mosetry, M.A., F.R.S. Hewry Pottock, Esq. Tre Lorp Artuvr Russet. Ospert Satvin, Esq., - F.R.S., Vice-President. W. Aysurorp Sanrorp, Esq. Howarp Saunpers, Esq., F.L.S. Paitre Luriey Scrater, Esq., M.A.,Ph.D., F.R.S., Secretary. Surenon-Gen. L. C. Srewarr. PRINCIPAL OFFICERS. P. L. Scrater, Esq., M.A., Ph.D., F.B.S., Secretary. Frank E. Brpparp, Esq., M.A., Prosector. Mr. A. D. Barrrerr, Superintendent of the Gardens. Mr. F. H. Warernovse, Librarian. Mr. Joun Barrow, Accountant. Mr. W. J. Witxiams, Chief Clerk. LIST OF TIE CONT RLBALTO BS, With References to the several Articles contributed by each. Page AnpeErsoN, R. J., M.D., M.A., Professor of Natural History, Queen’s College, Galway. On the so-called Pelvisternum of certain Vertebrates... .. 163 Bepparp, Frank E., M.A., F.R.S.E.,-F.Z.8., Prosector to the Society. Preliminary Notice of the Isopoda collected during the Voyage of H.M.S. ‘ Challenger.’—Part III. .........-.. 97 Note on the Air-sacs of the Cassowary..............-- 145 On the Syrinx and other Points in the Anatomy of the Caprimulgidz 147 Note on the Structure of a large Species of Earthworm from New Caledonia. (Plate XIX.) .................. 168 On some Points in the Anatomy of Ohauna chavaria.... 178 Observations on the Ovarian Ovum of Lepidosiren (Pro- faprerus). (Plates: MX VIII. & MXR) ones ct wie ew 22 Descriptions of some new or little-known Earthworms, together with an Account of the Variations in Structure exhibited by Perionyr excavatus, BK. P. .......0..00+0:- 298 Notes on the Convoluted Trachea of a Curassow (Notho- crax urumutum), aud on the Syrinx in certain Storks...... 321 Observations on the Development and Structure of the Ovum in the Dipnoi. (Plates LIT.—LIV.).............. 505 1V Page Bett, F. Jerrrey, M.A., Sec. R.M.S., F.Z.S., Professor of Comparative Anatomy in King’s College, London. Remarks upon the Species of Balanoglossus exhibited to the Society on November !7th last year .... ........ 4+: 154 Note on Bipalium kewense, aud the Generic Characters of Land-Planarians. (Plate XVIII.) .... 0.5.0 anceps 166 Exhibition of, and remarks upon, an object made from some portion of the skin of a Mammal....................-. 420 Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a specimen of Tenia nana 505 Buanrorp, Wittiam Tuomas, F.R.S., F.Z.S., &e. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a stuffed skin of Para- GOTUPUS JEVAGNE, js. z,e5n nde sidve aft sa Dao 5 Sie Se cineca ee Boutencer, G. A., F.Z.S. Description of a new Iguanoid Lizard living in the Society’s Gardens:, (Plate XO0UIL. )y 5. o9.08.0 oh 70 ae ee ete 241 Remarks on Specimens of Rana arvalis exhibited in the Society’s Menagerie. (Plate XXIV.) ........00050000 242 First Report on Additions to the Batrachian Collection in the Natural History Museum. (Plate XXXIX.) ........ 411 On two European Species of Bombinator. (Plate L.).... 499 On the South-African Tortoises allied to Testudo geome- trica.,, (Plates LVIL.. SoLVLL-) 2.0 .atesiciees Peake ah ee 540 Remarks on Prof. W. K. Parker’s paper on the Skull of the Chameleprigs,....2.-/./2% Satu teint eat Cee 543 Bourne, Atrrep Grpps, D.Sc. (Lond.), F.LS., Fell. Univ, Coll. Lond., Fell. Madras Univ., Professor of Biology in the Presidency College, Madras. On Indian Earthworms.—Part I. Preliminary Notice of Earthworms from the Nilgiris and Shevaroys ............ 662 Bourne, GitBert C., B.A., New College, Oxford. General Observations on the Fauna of Diego Garcia, Chagos Groupe...) sv Bae hl ccd s deeeet ae ee 331 Vv Page Brapy, GrorGe Stewarpson, M.D., F.R.S., F.L.S., Professor of Natural History in the Durham College of Science, Newcastle-upon-Tyne. Notes on Freshwater Entomostraca from South Australia. GB labes VETTE.) ois. 2 olin, ois ale) diacoiel MaMa: ow heal shnio\, 0 bo '> = §2 Butter, Artuur G., F.L.S., F.Z.S., &e. Note on Aporia hippia .....0cnceseccsesscesecsencs 80 On Lepidoptera collected by Major Yerbury in Western Todia: (Plate XXXV.)) 2.00. ~ 2% Craphen Baers tate te sian 855 CockERELL, T. D. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a living specimen of a Variety of Parmacella valenciennesi ........-.seeeeeee++ 137 Couett, Rosert, C.M.Z.S. Notice of a Memoir containing an Account of the External Characters of the Northern Fin-whale...........0---00- 82 On a new Pediculate Fish from the Sea off Madeira. ACPI INV.«)) a o)-1~vorearch ie ais o's: ob ala area ain. s s mimel ds +f oieFle 138 On the Hybrid between Lagopus albus and Tetrao tetrix. (Plates XXT. & XXIT.) «0 ce cade os we ven, s pase tip eee 224 On the External Characters of ihndblpht s Ror (Bale- noptera borealis). (Plates XXV. & XXVIL.)...........+ 248 On Phascologale virginia, a rare Pouched Mouse from Northern Queensland. (Plate LX.) .........0+eee00+2 548 Cornity, J. M., C.M.ZS. Letter from, respecting the breeding of Michie’s Deer in his Menagerie. ... 20.0.0 ce. es es eee ce cers te nees poet O20 Crane, AGNES. On a Brachiopod of the Genus Aéretia, named in MS. by the late Dr. T. Davidson .. 0... 2... eese eee eee re serees 181 vi Crow .ey, Purp, F.Z.S8. Exhibition of some Pupx of Nocturnal Lepidoptera from Natal ....... Cunnincuam, J. T., B.A., F.R.S.E., Fellow of University College, Oxford, and Superintendent of the Scottish Marine Station. On the Mode of Attachment of the Ovum of Osmerus eperlanus. (Plate XXX.).......+-. Dose, W. H. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a specimen of Sabine’s Gull (Xema sabinii), shot at Mostyn, on the coast of Flint- shires, Nonth, Wales A006 < sarin ees OE Oe Se Drucer, Hersert, F.LS., F.R.G.S., F.Z.S. Descriptions of some new Species of Heterocera from Tropical Africa. (Plates XXXVU.& XXXVIII.)........ E.wes, Henry Joun, F.Z.S. On Butterflies of the Genus Parnassius. (Plates I—LV.). Emin-Bey, Dr. Letter from, containing remarks upon the presence of an Anthropoid Ape in Eastern Equatorial Africa...........- Finscu, Dr. Orro, C.M.Z.S. &e. On a new Species of Wild Pig from New Guinea.... - Fiower, Wiiu1AmM Henry, LL.D., F.R.S., F.L.S., President of the Society, Superintendent of the Natural History Collection, British Museum. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a rare species of Armadillo belonging to the Museum of the Scarborough Philosophical Society S10, 68. 9 8 ke 6016 (6,e Se © a bs) bee bee hee were aslo +s, «iui GERRARD, Epwarp, Jun. Exhibition of specimens of the heads and skulls of two African Rhinoceroses (Rhinoceros bicornis and R. simus) .. Page . 296 . 292 81 409 418 217 419 125 Vii Page Gopman, FreoEericK DuCang, F.R.S., F.L.S., F.Z.S. Exhibition of a series of examples of Danais plexippus irate ValtoUN IOCRINIEN on soc Me ess esac ve eeene es 154 Goopcuixp, J. G., F.Z.S., F.G.8., H.M. Geological Survey. Observations on the Disposition of the Cubital Coverts in “BTC EY ale clea oA GREE 415 Abc Giay Stet aU enEne ee or ET Stee Be eae eee ere 184 Goruam, Rev. H. S., F.Z.S., F.E.S. On new Genera and Species of Endomychide. (Plate OW Os a, re ta Bee og ies PSE ges vate Seales 154 GutnrHer, Atpert C.L.G., M.A., M.D., Ph.D., F.R.S., F.Z.S., Keeper of the Zoological Department, British Museum. Second Note on the Melanotic Variety of the South- MARICH COWHER: 4. ecisaie ewe alee Sec nie ea st cee ti siess 20D Exhibition of a specimen of a small Fish of the genus Fierasfer imbedded in a Pearl-Oyster ...........-.. 0085 318 Kirsy, W. F., Assistant in Zoological Department, British Museum (S. Kensington). Remarks on four rare Species of Moths of tse Family Sreinine = CeAGe MOV LU )e gee a's Satake no's le by FB ese) Sane 269 On asmali Collection of Dragonties trom Murree and Campbellpore (N.W. India), received from Mejor J. W. Yerhury HoAs (Plate XRT )< 222 Sie ate em 325 Lankester, E. Ray, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S., Jodreli Professor of Zoology in University Coiiege, London. Exhibition of a drawing of a restoration of Archaeopteryx. 125 Layarp, Epear Leropoup, F.Z.S., H.B.M. Consul, New Caledonia. Exhibition of a rare Beetle, and of a series of Shells of the genus Bulimus 1.16. 16 cee cece nee weer ee eweeeee 267 viii Page Leecu, Joun Henry, F.L.S., F.Z.S. On a Variety of Anthocharis eupheno, from Mogador.... 122 Lenpenrexp, R. v., Ph.D., F.L.S., Assistant in the Biological Laboratory of University College, London. On the Systematic Position and Classification of Sponges. 558 Lirxen, Dr. Curistian F., F.M.Z:S. &e. Letter from, containing a notice of the habitat of Chiropo- domys penicillatus........00 ce sieescceas divosenewees 410 Lyprxxer, R., B.A., F.G.S., F.Z.S., &e: Description of three Species of Scelidotherium. (Plates RLV RAR) tell oe tis tl Martin, J. B., F.Z.S. Exhibition of a large Tusk of the Indian Elephant...... 176 Mariew, Gervase F., Staff-Paymaster Royal Navy, F.L.S., F.Z.8., &c: Descriptions of some new Species of Rhopalocera from the Solomon Islands. (Plate XXXIV.)............00 ceeees 343 Meyer, Dr. Apotr Bernuarp, C.M.Z.S., Director Royal Zoological Museum of Dresden. On a fourth Male Specimen of King William the Third’s Paradise-bird : i... 6i.e cusses aneneeee sbagee stua sans 297 Letter from, communicating remarks by Mr. K. G. Henke on a specimen of Hybrid Grouse in the Dresden Museum .. 419 Miuuais, Joun G., F.Z.8. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, specimens of the Ivory Gull (Larus eburneus), shot in Scotland .. :..... .-..08 +: 137 Minor Dr. C.8. Letter from, calling attention to the Elizabeth Thompson eG We ae, oe ee er hee Page Monricetyt, Fr. S., D.Se. Contribution to a Knowledge of the South-Italian Chiro- EGER Ot ee ee CNT eh Me Oo PR ee aes h ne bees whe see 93 Ocixsy, J. Dovetas, Department of Fishes; Australian Mu- seum, Sydney. On an undescribed Pimelepterus from Port Jackson .... 539 Ramsay, R. G. Warpuaw, F.Z.S., F.L.S. On a new Species of Bird of the Genus Copsychus ...... 123 Rosset, C. W. Exhibition of Photographs taken in the Maldive Islands, and remarks on his Zoological Collections ........+++2++ 299 Sauvin, OsBert, F.R.S., F.Z.S., &c: Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a living specimen of Bipalium kewense, found at Hawksfold, Sussex .......... 205 Saunpvers, Howarp, F.L.S., F.Z.S., &e: Exhibition of, and remarks upon, an adult specimen of the Sooty Tern (Sterna fuliginosa) caught near Bath ........ 6 On the Birds obtained by Mr. G. C. Bourne on the Island of Diego Garcia, Chagos Group........ s+ seee eee: oe atte 335 Exhibition of, on behalf of Mr. R. J. Howard, and re- marks upon, a specimen of a hybrid between the Tufted Dock gad thé Pochard:; 0). cess. owas esteem tude) O00 Sciater, Pure Luriey, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., Secretary to the Society. Report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie in Mecemberil'SS85: ~ syn oreays +519 > 9.09 Shen oe om wig me Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a specimen of a newly described Paradise Bird (Puradisornis rudolphi).......... Report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie in February AGG, of 2 awe ave ieee patel ee Note on the External Characters of Jhinoceros simus. (Plate XVI.) . Report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie in March: 1886, |. Gauge \ ae tol mah bos shaee's

esta sees. 79 Viran, Capt. J. A. M., F.Z.S. Letter from, on the mode of Nesting of a South-American Siluroid Fish (Callichthys littoralis) .......+-. 0.0.00. 330 Wuaitaker, Josrpsa, F.Z.8. Exhibition of a specimen of Wilson’s Phalarope shot in elauee ties ay ieee eae ee ate ae are Shee ot 297 Woopwarp, A. Smirn, F.G.S., British Museum (Natural History). On the Relations of the Mandibular and Hyoid Arches in a Cretaceous Shark (Hybodus dubrisiensis, Mackie). (PlateXX.) 218 Note on the Presence of a Columella Saath in the SR MULGE DeMphyOsAUrUe 6 ew cee an aw cae rin wd oivirenesige 405 On the Anatomy and Systematic Position of the Liassic Selachian, Squaloraja polyspondyla, Agassiz. (Plate LV.). . Woopwarp, Henry, LL.D., F.R.S., F.G.S., F.Z.8., &e. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, specimens of animals commensal or parasitic in the shell of Meleagrina margaritifera 176 Wrient, Cuarues A., F.L.S., F.Z.8., &e. Exhibition of a specimen of a Dove from Malta .,...... 81 Wricut, Professor R. Ramsay, F.Z.S. Note on an Ectoparasite of the Menobranch...........- 343 Plate \l2 Il. ue Te Ae vel AAS VII. IX. xe XI. XII. XII. XIV. —— XV. XVI. XVII. XVIII. XIX, XX. XXiI. XXII. XXII. XXIV. XXV. XXVI. | XXVII. XXVIII. XXIX. XXX. XXXI XXXII : XXXIII. XXXIV. XXXV. New Lepidoptera from Western India...........-.. 355 LIST OF PLATES. 1886. Page Structure and Development of Parnassius ........+++ 6 Mus humiu a tcrselalai casi sivini = TRIN oe Fein c's 2 L s54 Sciuropterus Aavisoni..... 0. +.see cee ce screen eeees \ Dafila modesta ....ccccvissvccerrecenverececseces 79 New Australian Entomostraca ....y0eeee ee creer 82 Skulls of Mustela pennanti ... seer cee ee ees . 125 Stephanotrochus moseleyanus ....+++0+--4-- 40sec ee 128 Linophryne lucifer oc cccc scene en rete een eenen es 138 Fig. 1. Head of Rhinoceros simus. Fig. 2. R. bicornis. 143 New Coleoptera of the Family Endomychide ........ 154 Bipalium kewense, in various stages of contraction .... 166 Acanthodrilus layardi .. 1.0 .e.scsee eee cseceseees 168 Hyhodus dubrisiensis, Mackie.......... 0:22: eres 218 Hybrid Grouse between Lagopus albus and Tetrao tetriz. 224 Ctenosaura erythromelas . ieee secuceeeecvnnerncnees 241 (UTNE COL LOGE ode OF or ADD Oe AOD OU Ia dnp Boom Omboge 242 Balenoptera borealis ........++. OTOL OFA 243 New or rare Sphingida........ cece cee eee ee eee eee 269 Ova of Protopterus .......5. cece re eecee ne cceeenes 272 Ohana OS Sagrosatdbo onbede ccoouorarcado 5 PRE Capra egagrus, 3 4 314 Leas ilies teu swash Dragonflies from N.W. India...... +. sere seen ees ». 325 New Butterflies from the Solomon Islands .......... 343 ! XvV1 Plate Page KOROOV Nee ehenicaptenus GOIMESt «leis sso ring gig-c 2 sient eaten ene 395 PRONOXGV ANG eA eLCUSTAIOLOUS spats ei pielats +. se sa-2)3 +'e o's. «lye le ame 409 1. Bunea pygela 2. Antherea dolabella .. “VIII. | pygela. a cra 3. Chrysopoloma rosea. 4. Chrysopoloma citrina.. ” XXXIX. 1. Jwvalus asper. 2. Geomolge fischeri ........-...++. 411 XL. Indi : ; XLL New Indian Lepidoptera ...,..-+++++0eererrree sees 421 XLII. XLII aot Z AfOrnianus.... <> vege 466 XLIV Anatomy of Geococcyx californianus daw 200 XLV. XLVI, Scelidotherium leptocephalum.......... Me one) XLVIi. Scelidotherium bravardt...., 0000+ 9+'seruccee nad | XLVIII. Scelidotherium chilense ....-..6.-5e0pss0 eee eers \ 49] XLIX. Fig. 1. Scelidotherium bravardi. Fig. 2. S. chilense, Fig. 3. S. leptocephalum. Fig, 4. ? 8. bravardi.. | L. Fig. 1, Bombinator bombinus. Fig. 2. B. igneus ..~ 499 NAN GO EILATASOS cc x: p.orei.s:s iota einai, «point sic Mao eRe ieee 504 LI. LIII. } Structure of Ovum in the Dipnoi ..........-+..06 5 505 LIV. DV x SG tsQlov Gj Gi sarazaihiele Hovelety ly ol wat lel emp iets lp fe ete fo tsaate ee 52 IDV (Contnus) TUBratOrguis: oss .)sp 6-510. mies Mot oc 538 DVD, ... 2.020205. eee 407 Muscles at the outer side of the elbow of the right wing of COprinnal GUS CUPOPEUS » 0 oe 7 W.Purisiss ath Hanhart imp NEW COLEOPTERA OF THE FAMILY ENDOMYCHIDZ. 1886. ] REV. H.S. GORHAM ON NEW COLEOPTERA, 155 Head with a few scattered but distinct: punctures; club of the antennze rather lax and dull. Thorax shining, not punctured, but with the surface uneven; anterior margin deeply excavated for the head, and with the anterior angles turned inwards; the sides much rounded in front; the disk with a short central elongate impression, and a round one on each side; the sides much puckered. Elytra smooth and waxy, impunctate ; all the disk of a pitchy-purple tint, which in life was, as Mr. Lewis informs me, of a most beautiful violaceous colour. They have a double, not much elevated, tumidity each side of the scutellum. The humeral callus is much inflated, to the extent of about a quarter of the length of the elytra; this tumidity is scarcely carinate and not spinose; the reflexed margin of the elytra is complete, running as a fine line beneath the callus up to the basal angle; the epipleural fold is black and shining. The anterior tibize are very faintly incurved, and compressed into a shallow spoon-shaped hollow at their apices, and the middle pair are more strongly incurved at their tips, the hind pair slightly so; all the tibie have the apices pubescent inwardly; the hair at the tips is golden. Of this very singular and beautiful Spathomeles a pair were beaten off a dead brauch in the jungle by Mr. Lewis at Dickoya, at 5000 feet elevation. 2. SPATHOMELES ORNATUS. S. decorato valde affinis, oblongus, niger, nitidus ; elytris sub- violaceis, maculis tribus elevatis, una basilari rotundata, una ante medium transversa in medio constricta, una subapicali sub- lunulata, lutets. Long. 13-15 millim. 3 9. Mas. Llytris spina dorsali brevi obtusa, femoribus anticis, tibiis mediis ante apicem dentatis, tibiis posticis ante medium angu- lariter late dentatis. flab. Assam. Very closely allied to 8. decoratus, Gerst., and perhaps not more than a geographical form ; the evident toothing of the hind tibiz is, however, very important, and the union of the two middle yellow spots, which in S. decoratus are, so far as I have observed, always separate, seems to point to a permanent specific difference. The spots are all rather more developed than in S. decoratus ; the basal one is round. One male and two female specimens. STICTOMELA, gen. nov. Corpus ovatum. LElytris convexis, maris haud spinulosis. Pro- thorax antice ampliato-rotundus. Prosternum apice truncatum, coxas anticas superans. Mandibule apice bidentate. Palpi mazillares articulo ultimo conoideo apice minute truncato. A genus very nearly approaching Spathomeles; the points in which it principally differs are, that in the males the elytra are not armed with a spine, and the prothorax is differently shaped, resem- bling more that of the Amphisterni of the second section without Li* 156 REV. H. S. GORHAM ON NEW COLEOPTERA. [Mar. 16, spines. The apex of the prosternum is not so widely rounded but sub- mucronate. The apex of the jaws is notched, much as in Eneymon and Engonius, the teeth being of equal length and the exterior one not bifid. The front tibie of the males have a very small tooth near their apex. Engonius, to which this genus approaches in some of its characters, has the apex of the elytra obliquely truncate, so that they are open at the sutural angle; in the present genus the elytra are together uniformly rounded. 1. SticTroMELA CHRYSOMELOIDES. (Plate XVII. fig. 6.) Oblonga, elytris apice equaliter rotundatis, nigro-enea, nitida ; capite prothoraceque inequalibus, crebre sat fortiter punctatis, hoc profunde canaliculato ; elytris crebrius subtiliter punctatis, perobsolete subsulcatis, callo humerali modice elevato, obtuse carinato, punctisque quatuor aurantiacis, duobus basalibus, duobus subapicalibus, oblique positis. Long. 9 millim. 3 Q. Mas. Tibiis anticis ad apicem intus excisis, intermediis leviter cur- vatis, apice mucronatis. Hab. Dickoya, Ceylon. Head brassy black, a little shining; epistoma thickly and strongly punctured, posterior part less thickly ; antennee as in Spathomeles, but the club rather lax, apical joint obliquely compressed at the tips. Thorax with the surface shining but uneven, the principal impression being a central channel with a punctiform pit on each side in the middle, a basal transverse line, and the ordinary basal sulci; the sides are, however, wrinkled; the lateral margins are much rounded in front, and the front margin rather deeply excavated and bisinuate, the front angles being acute. The humeral callus is raised into a blunt carina, terminating in the external one of two basal, orange, round spots; the two apical ones are placed somewhat obliquely, that nearest the suture being furthest from the apex, and oblong but irregular in shape. The femora are clavate and distinctly punctured ; the tibize are bent a little in both sexes, but more strongly so in the male, and in that sex terminate inwardly in a short mucro; they are pubescent at the tips. The tarsi and claws are pitchy, clothed with golden pile beneath. The intercoxal plate of the basal ventral seg- ment is sparsely but deeply punctate. Four specimens, three males and one female, of this beautiful species were captured by Mr. Lewis. 2. STICTOMELA OPULENTA. Oblonga, nitida, nigra ; elytris confertim crebrius punctatis, singulis maculis sex rubris, tribus basalibus, tribus subapicalibus irregu- laribus, quasi fasciam formantibus. Long. 10 millim. 6. Mas. Tibiis anticis dente parvo adjacente, juxta apicem infra dentem excisis ; segmento apicali ventrali, tuberculo instructo. Hab. Ceylon. Head strongly and deeply punctured, the epistoma especially so, with fewer and more scattered punctures; antenne as in Engonius, but with the club a little more lax. Thorax uneven but shining, 1886.] REV. H. S. GORHAM ON NEW COLEOPTERA. 157 with a marginal line round the entire edge uniting with the central channel in front ; front margin deeply bisinuate ; sides hardly so much rounded in front asin S. chrysomeloides. Elytra longer than in that species, thickly and distinctly punctured, hardly any trace of sulcation or striation ; shoulders with a callus well raised, ending in a deep red spot, another spot near the scutellum, and a third between these two ; posteriorly are two small oblong spots (united in the specimen described ) near the suture about one third from the apex, and another between these and the margin. There is a fine sutural stria for the whole length of the elytra, and the margin is narrowly reflexed. Legs and underside shining black ; femora punctate, but more finely than in S. chrysomeloides; anterior pair in the male compressed at the tip and with a very small fine calear above the spatulate compression. The tubercle on the apical ventral segment is squarish and impressed on its top so as to seem faintly bidentate. A single male specimen is all that Mr. Lewis secured of this Species. CyMongEs. Characteres plerumque ut in genere Encymon ; differt mesosterno haud transverso, prothoracis basi medio vie marginato, sulco transverso nullo, antennarum clava elongata, laxe articulata, articulis nono et decimo viz latioribus, maris tibiarum anticarum dente lato. I have no doubt that the species for which I propose this new genus is the Madagascar representative of Hneymon, with which it is associated in the form of the mandibles. It has, however, a different facies, principally owing to the form of the pronotum, which is more convex, with its margins even and scarcely at all reflexed. The longitudinal basal sulci are present, but the transverse one is quite obsolete. The mode of toothing of the front tibia of the male is, moreover, quite different to that of Hneymon; in the only species of that genus in which I have seen it take place, and which is figured by me (Endom. Recitati, tab. f. 10), the tooth is small and close to the apex ; here it is wide and strong and near the middle of the tibia. 1. Cymones sHArpi. (Plate XVII. fig. 4.) Piceus ; prothorace elytrorumque apicibus flavis, illo guttis duabus magnis oblongis, punctisque tribus parvis nigris, capite femori- busque saturatius nigro-piceis ; trochanteribus, femoribus basi, tibiis tarsisque ferrugineo-flavis. Long. 9 millim. 6. Mas. Tibiis anticis dente basi latissimo, apice acuto infra medium, tibiis intermediis et posticis apice leviter incurvatis. Hab. Madagascar, Betsileo (Cowan). Head black, mouth and palpi testaceous, epistoma with a few indistinct punctures, crown smooth, antennal orbits raised. Antenne piceous, rufo-piceous at the base; the proportion of the joints as in Encymon till the ninth, which with the tenth and apical joints are elongate, only rather longer and more widened at their tips than 158 REV. H. S. GORHAM ON NEW COLEOPTERA. [Mar. 16, those preceding them. Thorax about as long as wide if the projecting front angles are taken in, widest a little below the front ; basal angles right angles, sides a little sinuate not angular, front margin rounded and a little prominent, basal margin nearly straight ; on the disk, which is very even and smooth, are two large inky-black oblong marks a little obliquely placed, a small dot on each side where the thorax is widest, and one in the middle, near the base. Elytra pitchy, inclining to brown, the apex is yellow, and this colour returns some way up the suture and the margins ; they are convex, evenly ovate, and rounded at the apex, narrower at the base, and with a very obsolete sutural stria and scarcely at all widened margin; the epipleural fold is yellow. There is no visible punctuation on their surface ; but it is not glabrous as in Hneymon angulatus, but very finely alutaceous, though the sculpture is hardly visible at all. Only two specimens of this insect have come under my notice ; both are males. One is in Mr. Lewis’s collection, and the other in Dr. Sharp’s, by whom they were obtained from Mr. Cowan. 2. Cymones cowani. (Plate XVII. fig. 1.) Nigro-subviolaceus ; capite, prothorace, antennis (clava excepta) pedibusque rufis, abdomine rufo-piceo. Long. 63 millim. 3 Q. Mas. Tibiis anticis dente acuto distantemediano, apicibus intermediis etiam leviter incurvatis. Hab. Madagascar (Cowan). More parallel than C. sharpi, and with the thorax not so convex above, and more quadrate, smaller, and differently coloured. The head and thorax are rusty red, very little shining, and without punctuation; palpi red ; antennee of moderate length, and with the club, which is black, abrupt, and with its two first joints transversely heart-shaped. The thorax is transversely quadrate, with the front angles a little prominent, the sides a little sinuate, nearly straight, base obsoletely margined, and the sulci distinct but not deep. Elytra dark blackish purple, their apex ferruginous, slightly shining but not bright. Legs in the male example pitchy, in the female clear rusty red. Although this species and the following one differ in several particulars of their structure from C. sharpi, I have not been able to find any characters of sufficient importance to warrant their separation generically. In the abruptly formed club of the antennee and in the form of the thorax these two species are nearer to Encymon, but the strongly toothed tibiz in the male, and the form of the body, less swollen, and with its sides more parallel than in any eastern species of that genus, indicate a radical divergence from that type. Only two specimens have come under my notice; they were obligingly placed in my hands by Dr. Sharp for description. 3. CyMones HELOPIOIDES. (Plate XVII. fig. 3, ¢.) Niger ; parum nitidus ; prothorace transversim quadrato, cum elytris subopacis. Long. 63-7 millim. 3. 1886. ] REV. H. S. GORHAM ON NEW COLEOPTERA. 159 Mas. Tibiis anticis dente acuto, adjacente, infra medium ; intermediis apice incurvato, posticis leviter sinuatis. Hab. Madagascar (Cowan). Entirely black, subopaque above, body beneath shining. Antenne rather short, a little longer in the male than in the female, their club not very wide nor abrupt; head rather uneven, with a few scattered obsolete punctures. Thorax half as wide again as long, opaque ; punctuation very obsolete, minute and scarcely visible, basal sulci distinct ; front angles very little produced, scarcely at all in the female, sides nearly straight, base finely margined. Elytra half as wide again as the thorax and slightly widened behind, callus only faintly raised. The male specimen has two minute red dots near the apex of the elytra, in the female they are wanting. Meta- sternum (in male) depressed between the hind coxee, and first ven- tral segment with scattered small punctures. Two specimens from Dr. Sharp’s collection. AniprytTUus, Gerst. 1. ANIDRYTUS QUADRIPUNCTATUS. Oblongus, parum ovatus, rufo-piceus, nitidus, crebre subobsolete punctatus, cupreo-pubescens ; antennis nigris, articulis quatuor basalibus et apice summo rufis; prothorace punctis quatuor discoidalibus nigris. Long. 8 millim. 2. Hab. Brazil, Blumenau. Head finely punctured, a little rugulose between the eyes ;_ basal and three following joints of the antenne pale ferruginous, the fourth joint being deeper in colour, and at its articulation with the third nearly black. Thorax just twice as long as wide, from the front angles the sides are very evenly rounded to near the base, where they become straight. The basal furrows are two distinctly impressed, converging, linear channels ; within them, where they end on the front of the disk, halfway between the base and the front margins, are two round black points (as in A, bipunctatus) ; more in front and more widely apart are two other black points. The disk and sides of the thorax are evenly, thickly, not confluently punctured, but the surface of the black spots is smooth, or in the external spots with one or two punctures only. The elytra are somewhat parallel, not strongly convex, evenly and more thickly punctured ; the punc- tures are (as is usual where they give rise to hairs) not pricked in, but irregular, somewhat linear, and flat-bottomed. Legs clear red, only a very little darkened at the base of the tibiz. The underside wholly ferruginous red. Although this appears to be a species very nearly allied to A, bipunctatus, Gerst. (a species also from Brazil), the description given above will show that it differs not only by the four black spots of the thorax, but by the colour of the underside and legs as well. I have only seen one specimen, a female, which was sent to me by Herr Reitter, with other Coleoptera collected in the same district, 160 REV. H. S. GORHAM ON NEW COLEOPTERA. [ Mar. 16 2. ANIDRYTUS LIQUEFACTUS, Gorh. Endom. Ree. p. 47. I have received specimens of both sexes of what I consider identical with this species, of which the type is now in Mr. Lewis’s possession from Peru, and one male from New Granada (?) ; but these have only three joints at the base of the antenne red, and the apical joint is quite black. The size is from 73-83 millim. 3. ANIDRYTUS HUMILIS, Gorh. Endom. Ree. p. 48. Further specimens were taken by Mr. Belt at Chontales, Nicaragua, and will be noticed in the ‘ Biologia Centr.-Amer.’ in due course. EPoPrTeRvs. 1. Epopterus EGANus. (Plate XVII. fig. 9.) Ovatus, rufo-brunneus, nitidus ; antennis nigris, articulis tribus basalibus testaceis ; elytris singulis maculis tribus sat magnis eburneo-albidis nigro-cinctis, duabus basalibus oblique sitis, una subapicali. Long. 5-53 millim. 3 Q. Mas. Tibiis anticis leviter curvatis, ad apices compressis. Hab. Amazon, Ega (H. W. Bates). Head and thorax rather pale castaneous red, not perceptibly punctured, very finely and very sparsely pubescent at the sides of the latter, narrowed to the front angles, and very narrowly margined ; basal sulci short, linear. Scutellum black. Elytra wider than the thorax, commencing to widen from the base to about one third from the base, whence they are evenly and ovally contracted to the apex ; each with three large yellowish-white spots edged with black. The underside is brownish red, the tibize darker at their bases than the rest of the leg, as are also (but only very finely) the inner epipleural margins of the elytra. Two examples from Mr. Bates’s collection are now in Mr. Lewis’s. 2. EPOPTERUS EPHIPPIGER. (Plate XVII. fig. 8.) Ovatus, rufo-piceus, nitidus ; elytris flavis macula magna discoidali communi nigra; antennis nigris, articulis tribus basalibus flavis ; prothorace crebre, elytris parcius leviter punctatis. Long. 6 millim. 3. Mas. Tibiis anticis ad apices interne compressis, leviter incurvatis. Hab. Amazon (H. W. Bates). Nearly of the same oval form and of the size of E. eganus, but distinctly punctured. Head red, nearly smooth; thorax twice as wide as long, not so wide as the elytra at their base, thickly and distinctly punctured ; basal sulci straight, a little converging, sides narrowing, slightly curved, margin distinct and faintly raised. Scutellum rufous, punctured. Elytra paler yellow than the thorax, punctures distinct, only a few scattered hairs at the sides ; epipleurz yellow, only very narrowly darker at their margins. Underside and legs uniformly pitchy red. I have only seen one example of this species, a male. It is very distinct from any Epopterus yet described. 1886. ] REV. H.S. GORHAM ON NEW COLEOPTERA. 161 3. Epoprerus LINEOGUTTATUS. (Plate XVII. fig. 7.) Ovatus, rufo-piceus, nitidus ; elytris pallide flavis,sutura margin ibus- que lateralibus piceis, puncto humerali, lineolisque septem in singulis, 3, 3, 1, saturate piceis ; antennis nigris, articulis tribus basalibus rufis. Long. 6 millim. 3. Mas. Tibiis anticis interne sat fortiter incurvatis, ad apicem com- pressis. Hab. Amazon (H. W. Bates). Head, thorax, underside, and margins of the elytra rather light pitchy red; punctuation of the thorax and elytra as in EZ. ephippiger, distinct. The curious marking of the elytra consists of a humeral small dot, two elongate dashes near the suture, two shorter ones in the middle of the disk, two still smaller near the margin above the middle, and one small one near the apex. These dashes are not placed regularly, but the three near the base form a sort of fascia, as do the three below the middle. The scutellum is pitchy black. One small example. Sava, Gerst. 1. SavLa NiGRIPES, Gerst. Mon. p. 224, t. 3. f. 2. Several specimens met with by Mr. Lewis, two of which were found im copuld, present no appreciable distinction between the sexes. STENOTARSUS. 1. SreNoTARSUS VALLATUS, Gerst. Mon. p. 342. Four specimens which J identify with this species were obtained by Mr. Lewis .in Ceylon at Dickoya. The antenne are clear red; the series of punctures are more regular and not so coarse as in S. russatus. 2. STENOTARSUS RUSSATUS, Gorh. Trans. Ent. Soc. 1874, p. 446. One specimen met with by Mr. Lewis fully confirms my opinion as to the distinctness of this species, and I would only remark, in addition to the characters already given, that the raised thoracic margin has its surface distinctly flat in both species, indeed the edges of this margin are themselves raised, so that concave is the correct term. The dark, stout, and gradually thickened antennee will easily prevent this being confounded with S. vadlatus. 3. STENOTARSUS SICARIUS. Ater, valde convexus, pubescens ; elytris basi thorace latioribus, distincte punctato-striatis ; thoracis margine laterali deplanato, haud bene elevato, antrorsum subito latiore. Long. 3 millim. Hab. Ceylon (Lewis). At once distinguished from any other Stenotarsus known to me by its entirely black colour. It is allied to §. vallatus and S. rus- satus ; but the form is different, the elytra suddenly widening from 162 REV. H. S. GORHAM ON NEW COLEOPTERA. [Mar. 16, the shoulder, and the thorax having the base narrower with the hind angles right angles, so that the insect is not so uniformly round as in its allies. The antenne are formed much as in VS. vallatus, the second to eighth joints being short and bead-shaped, but longer than wide, the club strong but laxly jointed, the apical joint quad- rate and much (fully twice) wider than the ninth. The thorax is wider than long, narrowed to the front angles, but with its sides nearly straight in the basal two thirds ; its fattened margin has its internal edge deeply impressed in front, where the flat part is widest, and it appears raised at the base only, where the disk is widely suleate; the disk is convex, minutely but distinctly covered with small points, but the puncturing is much obscured by coarse floccose pubescence. Only one specimen of this interesting species was obtained. PANOM@A. 1. Panoma@a cincatensis. (Plate XVII. fig. 2.) Rufo-testacea ; capite et thorace basi piceis ; antennarum clava, articulo basali externe, scutello, sutura elytrisque maculis quinque sat magnis nigris ; antennis articulis decem. Long. 5 millim. Hab. Ceylon, Hadley (Lewis). Antenne ten-jointed, the basal joint is stout, a little curved, the second is scarcely longer than broad, and the third is apparently longer than usual, and is possibly really composed of the third and fourth joints together, but I can see no suture; the fourth to the seventh very short, club lax, the eighth and ninth joints rather trigonal. Head pitchy, smooth; eyes coarsely granulate (as in typical Panomea). Thorax as in P. pardalina, but anterior angles rather more prominent, scarcely punctured, but a little uneven at the sides, finely margined, except at the middle of the base. Elytra more cordate than in other species, and viewed sideways rising to a point so as to appear more gibbous than in its allies, finely but closely punctured, with five largish black spots—one humeral, two near the suture, one marginal (larger than the others), one subapical ; this last in one example connected with the marginal one ; the under- side and legs are deep ferruginous red. Five or six examples were obtained. ENDOC@LUS, N. g. Mr. Lewis has met with a very curious small beetle in Ceylon, which apparently comes very near Panomcea, which itself is synony- mous with Cyclotoma of Mulsant, and of which a short description will be sufficient to render its identification certain. The antenne, however, appear to me to be ten-jointed, and the two basal joints to be stout, the third to the seventh to be very short, the three last forming an elongate lax club. The tarsi are four-jointed, almost linear, very similar to those of Rhymbus. 1886. ] ON THE SO-CALLED PELVISTERNUM. 163 1. ENDOCG&LUS ORBICULARIS. Rotundatus, ferrugineus ; elytris convewis, fortiter parce punctatis, setulosis, marginibus latius ewplanatis, apice subacuminato ; thoracis margine elevato deplanato, basi sulcis duobus puncti- formibus. Antennarum clava fusca. Long. 13 millim. Hab. Ceylon (Lewis). Orbicular, elytra subglobularly convex, with their lateral margin much expanded in the middle, but the widened rim vanishing in the apex, where they are conjointly deflexed and acuminate ; their disk is evenly and strongly punctured, the margins less distinctly ; the extreme limb of the expanded margin is itself finely reflexed. The head is exserted, with small prominent coarsely granulated eyes. The maxillary palpi have their apical joint subulate. The thorax is short, narrowed in front, with the margin raised, thickened and flattened as in Stenotarsus, the front angles being rounded in to form the emarginate opening for the head, than which it is much wider; the base is narrower than the elytra at their base, and is furnished with two very deeply impressed punctiform sulci, which are about halfway between the centre and the hind angle, on each side. One specimen, taken at Dickoya. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVII. Fig. 1. Cymones cowani, p. 158. 2. Panomea cingalensis, p. 162. . Cymones helopioides, p. 158. sharpi, p. 157. . Spathomeles? inflatus, p. 154. . Stictomela chrysomeloides, p. 156 . Epopterus lineoqguttatus, p. 161. ephippiger, p. 160. eganus, p. 160. SO COAT OH oo 2. On the so-called Pelvisternum of certain Vertebrates. By R. J. Anprerson, M.D., M.A., Professor of Natural History, Queen’s College, Galway. [Received March 1, 1886.] Prof. Paul Albrecht in 1883 described’ an interpubie bone which he found present in Dasypus sexcinctus, Bradypus cuculliger, and Cholepus didactylus. He compares the symphysial cartilage found in many animals and this bone with the parts of the sternum, shoulder-girdle, and os hyoides, and gives several very instructive and clear figures of specimens in the museums at Berlin and Kénigs- berg. The figures of the Lacertilian pelves are copied from the papers of Profs. Huxley and Wiedersheim, and the scheme of homology he represents in a table at the end of his note. 1 Bull. d. Académie royale de Belgique, nos, 9-10, 164 DR. R. J. ANDERSON ON THE [Mar. 16, PELVIC GIRDLE, SHOULDER-GIRDLE, 1. Pubis. 1. Procoracoid. 2. Ischium. 2. Coracoid. 3. Ilium. 3. Scapula. 4, Subilium. 4, Subscapula. 5. Wanting, 5. Olavicle. 6. Wanting. 6. Interclavicle. 7. Pelvisternum. 7. Omosternum. (Ischio-pubic symphysial carti- Coraco-procoracoid symphysial lage. Osseous pelvisternum of cartilage. Edentates. ) 8. Hemi-pelvisternum. 8. Hemi-omosternum. 9. Ischio-pubic symphysis. 9. Symphysis coraco-procoracoid. 10. Prepelvisternum. 10. Preomosternum. Preomosterna of Anoura. 11. Hemi-pelvisterna. 11, Hemi-preomosterna. Epipelvic ossicles of Chame- Substernal bones of mammals. leons. Marsupial bones of Monotremes and Marsupials. 12. Post-pelvisternum., 12. Post-omosternum. Os cloace of Lacertilians. The pelvis of Lacerta muralis is figured by Prof. Hoffmann in Bronn’s ‘ Thierreichs,’ and Brihl also gives figures of the Amphibian forms. In a specimen of Iguana tuberculata in this museum the pubis is a separate bone, and contains a preacetabular foramen as well as a well-marked supra- or prepubic notch. A copula (bone) reaches from the anterior part of the ischium to the pubis, wider behind than in front. The os cloacee fits into the ischial symphysis behind, and the ischial symphysis still shows the marks of union with the tuberosities. The ilia articulate each with two transverse pro- cesses, and the traces of union with the ischium are obliterated. In the Australian Monitor gouldii which we have, a prepubic nodule fits in between the pubes in front; all traces of union between the parts of the ossa innominata are obliterated. A small nodule is situated in front of the ischial symphysis, and a distinct os cloacze is present behind, and, as in the Iguana, fits in between the ischia. A prominent ischial spine behind is situated at the junction of the middle and outer third of the posterior border of that bone. In Lacerta viridis a prepubic nodule and a postischial are present. In the West-Australian Moloch horridus (marked 1845 in the catalogue ) the postischial bone is quite evident, and a large copula runs forwards to the pelvis. In our Chameleon the three pelvic bones are short, and the os cloacee seems to be cartilaginous ; the ischio-pubic copula is reduced to a thread-like structure. The os cloace and prepubic bone are thin in our specimen of Ameiva, but they are very distinct. Prof. Owen, in his ‘Anatomy,’ says that in the Potoroo there is a triangular ossicle developed at an early period, which is wedged into the posterior interspace of the ischio-pubic symphysis; and in his paper in this Society’s ‘Transactions’ he figures the posterior epiphysial bone. In the skeleton of a Kangaroo in our museum the following measurements were made :— 1886.] SO-CALLED PELVISTERNUM. 165 millim, Tengthvof slim 2208 Je BR). PO. 140 Grestien 53. “owas oe A. . .. secitieni GJ, 20 Breadth opposite the acetabulum ............ 35 Lensthy or pubis ig ac ca) os nade ieee 7 OD Interpubic bone, antero-posterior diameter .... 15 53 », breadth of one side ........ 35 In Phacocherus the bone occupies the position of the triangular ligament in man, and is three-cornered and wedge-like. The following measurements were made :— millim Length of os innominatum ................ 250 TESTE ES ce ate eke, isle ieee ate et leveie hare .. 120 Breadth of ilium above acetabulum .......... 32 i. meat. acctabalum 52) 7%. 8, Oe AO oe », below acetabulum.......... 34 Merch oP pubis reise desta si. Pas. RG Ns AS Interpubic bone, breadth .:....00.0). 2.03. | 24 ae #2) Geupenior depths.) 7 2RRne 15 Ff a) linferiomdepthe 05 ued Iss 30 - 4p" thickness at Base’ *..') 2. 2009 20 In the skeleton of the Beaver the bone is not so distinct as in Phacocherus. The following are the measurements :— millim. Length of os innominatum ................ 160 WRCHEHSS TS SSP ATS ee gt Se eee Breadth opposite acetabulum .............. 39 ATEHNOP pUbin A Leone Oe Shee ane tec es oe NA Deptly of pubic bones... cerns. . 22: 7. PONG Greadtlvot one Hall y)32 wl. oe Sete TN 25 I do not find the bone present in any other mammalian skeletons that I have examined. The bone occupies the position of the triangular ligament and the os cloace of Lacertilians. Ligaments and fascize are so often the seat of ossifications, and bones in one set of animals are so often represented by ligaments in another set, that one is almost tempted to regard the bones above referred to as, in whole or in part, homologous with the triangular ligament of the urethra found in the higher animals. The interpubic bone in Bradypus is mentioned by Prof. Flower in his ‘ Osteology.’ 166 PROF. F. J. BELL ON BIPALIUM KEWENSE. [ Mar. 16, 3. Note on Bipalium kewense, and the Generic Characters of Land-Planarians. By Professor F. Jurrrey BeE.x, M.A., Sec. R.M.S. [Received March 16, 1886.] (Plate XVIII.) In the descriptions given by writers on Land-Planarians especial attention is always directed to tbe form of the head or, as more than one author has called it, the tail. This, no doubt, is partly due to the fact that in a number of the species the head is often seen to have a remarkable hammer-shaped or cheese-knife form, which has three times led to the institution of a genus for the reception of such species. In other cases, where the worm has been assigned to other genera, the head is described as obtusely rounded, or as not sharply distinguished from the body. Having lately received from Mr. Osbert Salvin, F.R.S., a specimen of a Land-Planarian (apparently Bipalium kewense, Moseley), found by him among broken flower-pots in his garden in Sussex, of the origin of which nothing definite is known, I have been enabled to watch the creature exhibiting its activity. I had not long been study- ing it when I noted that the head varied considerably and almost constantly in form, so that I thought it well to at once enlist the skilful pencil of Mr. C. Berjeau to represent its various appearances. Figure A represents the worm, not indeed at its greatest length, but in a position which it is apt to assume when in full activity ; the head is carried a little higher than the rest of the body, its edges are sharp, its contour convex, and it is well marked off from the rest of the body. Figure B, on the other hand, shows the animal in a state ‘ of torpid quiescence ; the head is now contracted, obtusely pointed, only separated by a shallow depression on either side from the sur- rounding region of the body. Fig. C shows an intermediate condition between A and B. Figs. D—G show various stages in the form of the head '\—hammer-shaped, knob-like, tongue-shaped, or altogether irregular. The body may be not more than 2 inches long, when the creature looks like a leech or a slug, or it may extend itself to 6 inches and even more, when it has rather the appearance of a thread-worm. In fact, as one looks at it extended on a white dish, it calls to mind the Amcaba more than any other animal known to the zoologist. ] insist on the variations in the form of the body, and especially of the head, because all writers (even those who, like M. Humbert, Prof. Moseley, or, the latest of all, Dr, J. C. C. Loman, have had the opportunity of examining these forms alive or under natural condi- tions) direct, in their descriptions, especial attention to the form of the head ; indeed, land-planarians with cheese-cutter or hammer- shaped heads (cf. figs. A and D) have been by all naturalists ’ All the figures are of the natural size. Fo 2.S. 18867F)L Avil | Berjean & Highley del et hth Mintern Bros , imp. BIPALIUM KEWENSE. IN VARIOUS STAGES OF CONTRACTION. ie . zi 1886. | PROF. F. J. BELL ON BIPALIUM KEWENSE. 167 assigned to the genus Bipalium*. The only writer who seems to have remarked the variability in the form of the head is M. Hum- bert, who figures” the head of Bipalium diana,as living and when it is greatly contracted ; the differences are, however, quite slight as compared with those in the figures now given (Plate XVIII.). More- over, M. Humbert continues to use the form of the head as a distinctive character, and seems to have only incompletely appreciated the moral of what he saw. Referring to the paper of Prof. Perceval Wright, M. Humbert says:—‘‘Il donne une figure .... qui représente Pextrémité antérieure semilunaire et a du evidemment étre faite d’aprés un individu conservé dans alcool, tandis que celle de la D. grayia a été dessinge d’aprés le vivant. C’est sans doute 4 ces deux manicres d’observer, encore plus qu’d des particularités spécifiques qu'il faut attribuer les différences profondes que l’on remarque dans la forme des extrémités antérieures de ces deux espéces.”” But the differences shown in Prof. Wright’s woodcuts of the two species are not as ‘‘ profound” as those seen in the figures of the single living specimen here reproduced. So that, though M. Humbert recognized the difference between living heads and heads preserved in spirit, he does not seem to have recognized what is much more important—that the form of the head varies constantly during life. Ifa Planarian in a torpid condition (Pl. XVIII. fig. I) be then and there seized and put into spirit, it will be found, no doubt, to have an obtusely blunted head, hardly wider than the body*; on the other hand, some, at any rate, if killed while in full activity, will be found to have heads shaped like a cheese- cutter or some modification thereof. Hab. Mr. Salvin has lately received orchids from S. America and S. Mexico, and from Burmah ; but he has also had specimens from Kew Gardens, whence the originals came to Mr. Maseley. In 1883 Dr. Giinther received some specimens from Welbeck Abbey*, where they had been known for three or four years pre- viously ; Mr. Thiselton Dyer tells me that there is no history of any communication between the gardens at that place and Kew, and adds “‘ we have probably therefore been stocked from a common source.” A specimen found in a greenhouse in Clapham Park was sent to Dr. W. M. Ord, and is now in the possession of Prof. Ray Lankester ; the early history of this specimen is unknown. In the hope of being able to extend our knowledge of this worm, I have written a note to the editor of the ‘ Gardener’s Chronicle’ *®, which may result in some further information, and perhaps in the discovery of fresh examples ? The French translator of the latest authoritative work on General Zoology by converting ‘‘ Kopftheil durch Lappen-Vorsatze halbmondformig” into “ Région céphalique en croissant par la présence de deux appendices lobés,” shows that he too regards the lateral parts of the head as being constant in form and position ; nevertheless they are not so. > Mém. Soe. Genéve, xvi. p. 303, figs. 1, 1 a. 8 Fig. H in Plate XVIII. shows the form of the head in the specimen under description, now that it is dead and preserved in spirit. * See his letter in the ‘ Gardener’s Chronicle,’ xix. (1883) p. 415. 5 Published on March 18th, 1886. 168 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON A LARGE EARTHWORM. [ Mar. 16, and new localities’. I am inclined to think that such information will support Dr. Giinther’s supposition that the worm has become acclimatized in this country; Mr. Dyer tells me that it is still to be found in the Kew hothouses, where it has now lived since at any rate the beginning of 1878. Prof. Moseley was able to observe in Ceylon that Bipalium suspends itself by the tough slime which it secretes. My specimen had no opportunity of showing if it could so support itself ; but I noticed that minute offending objects could be got rid of by being entangled in the slime which it secreted, and which, being gradually secreted from a point, say, one inch behind the head forwards, was as a continuous sheet of mucus thrown off from the anterior end. A small earthworm which was placed near it, but which was not attacked, had the same mucous sheet thrown over it, to its obvious embar- rassment. There can be no doubt as to the sensitiveness of Bipalium to light. The specimen now under notice was sent by Mr. Salvin on February 7th, lived and was more or less active till February 26th; for this interval of time the town was either enveloped in fog, or surrounded by a darkness which needed not to be called back to our recollection. But on the 26th of February the sun shone, and though the room in which the Planarian had been placed was not illuminated by its rays, yet the exposure to diffuse light, which on other and earlier days had been harmless, was on this day fatal; the worm broke transversely into three pieces, and on being teuched fell into four. Had it been kept in darkness it is possible it might have lived longer. The temperature of the room varied from about 50° to 64° F. DESCRIPTION OF PLATE XVIII. Tilustrating the various forms assumed by Bipaliwm kewense. A. Extended and moving freely. B, ©. In various states of contraction. D-G. Some of the various forms taken’ by the head. H. Head and anterior end after contraction in spirit. I. The worm coiled and at rest. All the figures are of the natural size. 4. Note on the Structure of a large Species of Earthworm from New Caledonia. By Franx E. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S.E., Prosector to the Society. [Received March 15, 1886.] (Plate XIX.) Among a number of Earthworms forwarded to me from New Caledonia, through the kindness of Mr. E. L. Layard, F.Z.S., H.B.M. Consul at Noumea, were six specimens of a large worm several of which measured some 28 inches in length. All these specimens are referable to the same species, which belongs to the genus Acantho- 1 Specimens have been found in the Zoological Society’s Gardens, which have, and in gardens at Liverpool which have not had direct relations with Kew. P. Z.S*, 1686 2 Pie. Mintern Bros. imp. FEB del. P. Smut lith. ACANTHODRILUS LAYARDI. 1886.] | MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON A LARGE EARTHWORM. 169 drilus*. This genus is already known to inhabit New Caledonia ; M. Perrier bas described two distinct species from that region. The species which forms the subject of the present communication may be identical with one or other of these. The descriptions given by M. Perrier of Acanthodrilus obtusus and A. angulatus are necessarily insufficient, owing to the poor condition and immaturity of the specimens at his disposal ; but certain facts, such as the position of the generative apertures and of the clitellum, could hardly be mistaken even in specimens greatly injured through bad preservation ; in these points the present species differs from both of those de- scribed by Perrier, as will be apparent from the following notes on its structure. External Characters.—I have sketched (Plate XIX. fig. 1) the anterior segments of the body from the dorsal aspect to indicate the main external features which are visible upon that surface. The buccal lobe divides the first segment *, as also in A. dissimilis and A. nove zelundie, two species recently described by myself*. Ofa fourth species of the genus, viz. 4. verticillatus, M. Perrier writes *:— ‘La lobe céphalique n’entame pas le premier anneau et parait au contraire selargir asa base de manicre aressembler ala partiesupérieure d’un tréfle ; mais cette apparence tient peut-étre a un état particulier de conservation.” J mention these facts becanse the genus Lumbricus has been split up into other genera mainly on this account. It does not appear to me advisable, while there are so many internal structural differences, to make use of so small an external character for classificatory purposes ; but in the case of the genus Acanthodrilus this mark of difference between species appears to be correlated with other differences of structure, inasmuch as M. Perrier hesitates to include A. verticillatus in the same genus with A. odtusus; the male generative pores in the former species are upon the 17th and 18th segments and are not separated by an intercalated sezment as in the Jatter and all the other species of the genus at present known. On either side of the buccal lobe, and consequently between the first and second segments of the body, is a single pore; these may perhaps correspond to the single median dorsal pore which is the only orifice of the kind found in the Oligocheta limicole, The elitellum was fully developed in several specimens, and extended from the 13th to the 17th segments inclusive, with the exception of a portion of the 13th segment; the glandular tissue composing the clitellum was only visible on the posterior half of that segment ; the clitellum extends occasionally for a short distance on to the 18th segment. The anterior region of the clitellum down to the 15th segment completely encircles the body ; the 17th and 18th segments, on the contrary, have a very considerable median area upon which there is no glandular development ; the lateral margins of this 1 Perrier, “Recherches pour servir al’histoire des Lombriciens terrestres,” Nouv. Arch. d. Muséum, t. viii. (1872) p. 85. 2 I have reckoned the first seta-bearing segment as the second segment of the body, in common with the majority of naturalists who have studied this group. 3 P.Z.S. 1885, p. 813. * Loc. cit. p. 98. Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XII. 12 170 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON A LARGE EARTHWORM. [Mar. 16, area are bounded by the ventral pair of sete; this area, which is distinguished by its very pale colour, surrounds the male genital apertures, which are upon the 17th and 19th segments respectively (see fig. 2). In A. ungulatus the clitellum extends from 14-17 inclusive and the male genital apertures are upon the 18th and 20th segments; in A. obfusus the clitellum is unknown, the male genital pores are upon the 19th and 21st segments. Dorsal pores are stated by Perrier to be present in his two species ; in my species they are present and commence apparently at the 13th or 14th segment ; in one specimen the first dorsal pore was visible between the 12th and 13th segments, in a second specimen this pore was a segment further back. I have figured these apertures as extending over the clitellum, since they were visible on these segments in immature examples without a clitellum; when the clitellum was present they were apparently absent or, rather, perhaps rendered invisible by the swollen glandular integument. In Acanthodrilus multiporus (see P. Z.S. 1885, pt. iv. p. 810) I observed dorsal pores commencing after the clitellum, the first pore marking the posterior boundary of that region of the integument: In Acanthodrilus dissimilis and A. nove zelandie they appear to be present though very inconspicuous; I only noted them after the clitellum. In the furrows separating segments 7-S and 8-9 were a pair of distinct rounded apertures corresponding to the inferior pairs of setze ; these are the apertures of the copulatory pouches. ‘The pair of setee on segment 8 were in most instances greatly modified, being much larger and more conspicuous than the other setz of the body ; their appearance is very like that of the genital sete on segments 17 and 19. In describing the structure of the genital organs I shall call attention to those setze which correspond to internal structures entirely novel in this genus. The ordinary setze of the body are distributed in pairs as in other species of the genus. The apertures of the nephridia are very conspicuous and correspond in every case to the more dorsal pair of sete. The female generative pores are displayed in fig. 2; they are a pair of very minute pores situated on the 14th segment in front of and to the inside of the ventral pair of sete ; their position is nearly similar to the corresponding pores of A. nove zelandie ; they are on the same segment as in that species, where, however, the pores are placed in front of the outermost of the two ventral sete. In Acanthodrilus capensis I find the female generative pores are upon the 14th segment and the ovaries in the 13th segment, and not, as erroneously stated in my paper on that species ’, in the segment anterior to these; in the present species, however, the pores are placed in front of the innermost of the two ventral sete. Vascular System.—In fig. 7 of Plate XIX. isillustrated the main vascular trunks of the anterior region of the body. The dorsal vessel 1 Proc. Roy. Phys. Soe. 1885-6, p. 369. 1886.] MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON A LARGE EARTHWORM. 71 (d), which is a single tube, and not composed of two separate or incompletely fused halves as in A. multiporus* and other Earthworms, communicates with the ventral vessel by seven transverse hearts (/) situated in segments 8-14 inclusive—a pair to each segment. The first three pairs are of less calibre than the following four, and appear to arise simply from the dorsal vessel; the four ‘posterior pairs of hearts communicate also with a small supra-intestinal vessel, which, as shown in the figure (sz), lies beneath the dorsal vessel but above the intestine ; in the anterior part of the body a pair of lateral vessels (7) supply the body-wall; in the 11th or 12th segment these vessels pass beneath the intestine and unite to form a single subintestinal vessel. This vessel appears to be continuous posteriorly with a vascular space within the walls of the alimentary canal. Each of the two anterior pairs of hearts supplies the spermatheca of its own segment; a strong branch arises from the vessel just before it unites with the ventral vessel, and a corresponding branch from the latter is also distributed to the spermatheca. Body-cavity.—The body-cavity, as in all other Earthworms, is divided into segments by mesenteries which extend from side to side of the body ; in the six anterior segments the mesenteries are more or less distinct, but there are in addition a number of muscular bands and tendinous-looking threads which bend the pharynx down to the body-wall, often passing through the mesenteries on their way; the gizzard and a portion of the anterior region of the cesophagus are only attached to the body-wall by a very few slight threads, mesenteries being absent in this region of the body. The mesentery which bounds the tenth segment behind and the succeeding four mesentries are specially thickened and muscular. Nephridia.—There is a very considerable variation in the cha- racters of the nephridia in this genus, and I have already’ referred to what has been written on the subject. In the present species the nephridia (fig. 6, 2) are very conspicucus, especially in the anterior region of the body as far back as the 19th segment or thereabouts ; in the posterior segments they are present but appear to differ slightly, principally in size, from the anteriorly placed nephridia. The external apertures are plainly visible in front of the dorsal pair of sete in all the seta-bearing segments of the body ; that is to say, the first segment of the body appears to be without nephridia and cnly this segment. The glandular portion of the nephridium forms a closely packed tuft of tubules which has much the appearance of the nephridia in those species of Pericheta® in which these organs have been described; this glandular tuft lies in the region of the ventral pair of sete and close to the mesentery which forms the anterior wall of its segment ; the nephridium communicates with the exterior by a long, widish, thin-walled duct. 1 See F. E. Beddard ‘On the paired Dorsal Vessel of certain Earthworms.” Proc. Roy. Phys. Soe. 1884-5, p. 424. 2 P. Z.8. 1885, p. 822. 3-H. g. Pericheta indica, Horst, Niederl. Arch, f. Zool. Bd. iv. (1879), pl. vili. fig. 3, x. 12* 172 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON A LARGE EARTHWORM. [ Mar. 16, Generative System.—In the 12th segment are a pair of glands attached firmly to the mesentery which separates this segment from the one anterior to it; in two specimens these glands were paired, while in a third only the left-hand one of the two was present; in one specimen these glands have a racemose structure, and although a microscopic examination did not reveal any structure, I have little doubt that these glands are testes. Out of the seven examples at my disposal one specimen possessed a similar pair of glands in the 11th segment in addition to those found in the 12th segment ; in all the remaining specimens save one, which was small and immature, the 10th segment (that which follows the segment con- taining the posterior pair of spermathecee) has a pair of glandular- looking bodies which are very similar in general appearance to the structures which I have regarded as the testes; they are attached, however, to the posterior wall of their segment, which, as in other Earthworms, is not separated by a mesentery from the 9th segment; these two segments, which are thus fused, contain the gizzard. The fact that these glands are attached to the posterior and not to the anterior wall of their segment is perhaps against the view that they represent an anterior pair of testes; at the same time it happens that the segment in which they occur has no anterior wall, being fused with the preceding 9th segment; these glands were not present in the only specimen that had two pairs of testes. In Acanthodrilus capensis‘ there are three pairs of testes situated in segments 10, 11, and 12; but out of a number of examples that I dissected only one had the three pairs developed. There is therefore nothing unusual in supposing that the present species, like 4. capensis, has three pairs of testes, although all the other species that are known appear to have only two pairs. On the other hand, the gland in segment 10 is very similar to a curious structure which exists in 4, capensis ina similar position, ¢. e. attached to the posterior wall of the segment. In this species, however, the gizzard happens to be placed in front of the copulatory pouches, and not in the segment which contains them ; so that the two pairs of pouches are separated from each other and from the following segments by fully developed mesenteries, which, as already stated, is not the case with the species that forms the subject of the present communication ; in this species the gizzard lies in the 9th and 10th segments. If, however, these structures correspond to those recorded by me in A. capensis, it is no explanation of their nature ; in neither case is their function at all evident. The vasa deferentia were not visible. Each of the four male genital apertures are furnished with a long sac containing a number of penial sete which open on to the exterior in common with the duct of along coiled prostate gland, which appears to be similar in structure to the prostates of A. obtusus”; on the other hand, the characters ! Proc. Roy. Phys. Soe. doc. cit. p. 375. I have written 11, 12, and 13 in error ; the ovaries, as I have been able to assure myself by a subsequent examin- ation, are in segment 13, and so presumably the testes are in the three segments anterior to that which contains the ovaries, viz. in segments 10, 11, 12. 2 Perrier, loc, cit. p. 88. 1886.] MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON A LARGE EARTHWORM. 173 of the penial setz agree with those of A. ungulatus as described by Perrier *. The ovaries and oviducts I have been unable to find. There are two pairs of spermathece situated in segments 8 and 9 ; each consists of a spherical thin-walled sac communicating with the exterior by a long stout-walled duct which is often curved (see figs. 5 and 6, cp); at the upper extremity of the duct, where it unites with the sac, it becomes somewhat bulged out on one side, though there is hardJy so marked a diverticulum as is figured by Perrier in A. ungulatus°. A very characteristie and remarkable series of structures now remain to be described, before concluding the account of the genera- tive system. In describing the external characters attention was drawn to the modification of the lowermost pair of setze in segment 83 the ordinary sete, at any rate on one side of the body, have disappeared and are replaced by a conspicuous orifice through which protrude one or more stout long sete, which appear on a naked-eye inspection to be very similar to those which project through the male genera- tive pores. Fig. 5 of Pl. XIX. represents the internal structures which correspond to these peculiarly modified setze; the latter are con- tained in a thin-walled transparent sac (s) precisely as are the genital setee ; on either side of this sac is a lung somewhat sausage-shaped glandular body (g.6), which communicates by a slender duct with the orifice through which the sete project on to the exterior. The presence of these glands renders the whole structure more similar still to the male generative pore, except that the “ prostates” are paired. These structures were only present on the left side of the body in one specimen; in two others they were only developed on the right side; in two other specimens both immature, without a clitellum, these structures were entirely absent on both sides of the body; in a sixth specimen, which was also immature, with the clitellum undeveloped and with very minute spermathecee, the bundle of modified setee was plainly visible on both sides of the body, but without its accessory glands; in tie seventh specimen, also imma- ture, there was no vestige whatever of these structures ; wherever they were absent the setz of the segment were perfectly normal. I am not aware that any structures of this kind have been described in any other species of the genus or in any other Karth- worm; they appear to be novel to the group. At the same time Perrier figures some structures in 4. ungulatus* which may be identieal, though the figure and his description are insufficient ; the description (p. 92) is as follows :—“ Les poches copulatrices sont situées aux anneaux huit et dix. Chacune est munie d’un lobe postérieur, assez petit, et n’a pas d’autre appendice. Dans le neuviéme anneau se voient plusieurs sacs glandulaires, séparés par une glande multifide.”” The details are evideutly different from the structures that I have just described, but the similarity of position, between the two spermathecze, renders it possible that they are identical ; in 1 Loe. cit. p. 90, pl. ii. figs. 21, 22. ? Loe. cit. pl. ii, fig. 20. 3 Loe, eit. pl. ii. fig. 18, x. 174 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON A LARGE EARTHWORM. [ Mar. 16, my species, however, these structures are in the same segment as that which contains the anterior spermatheca and are not in a segment intercalated between those which contain the anterior and posterior pairs of spermathecz respectively. One of the sete is displayed in the drawing (fig. 3), and the lower extremity, more highly magnified, in another drawing (fig. 4); the general aspect of these setee is very similar to that of the penial setae. The seta is curved slightly towards the extremity; its thickness diminishes gradually until near to the distal extremity, where it becomes again thicker and terminates in a swollen brush-like extremity, the exact shape of which can be gathered from an inspection of the figure. The distal extremity of the seta is ornamented with delicate transverse ridges projecting like the edges of scales and denticulated. In Lumbricus Hering’ has described, and Vejdovsky* confirmed for other species, the modification of certain of the sete in the neighbourhood of the genital orifices; those of the ventral pair in “the 10th, 15th, or one of the neighbouring segments, and furthermore in the region of the 26th segment and on the clitellum from segment 31 to segment 38”: these sete are more slender than, and double the length of, the ordinary sete of the body. In the work referred to Vejdovsky goes on to point out that the penial setee in Acanthodrilus and other genera probably correspond to these and differ from the genital sete of Chetogaster &c., which are developed during the breeding-season in the neighbourhood of the ordinary locomotor sete, and in addition to them ; the penial sete of Acanthodrilus replace the ordinary locomotor sete. Since in Lumbricus the modified setae developed in the generative segments are not confined to a single segment or even to the segments bordering upon the male generative pores, it is perhaps not surprising to find that in the present species of Acanthodrilus there are additional sacs of penial setz besides those normally found in the 17th and 19th segments of the body. The modified sete of Lumbricus are also furnished with a gland which projects into the body-cavity; these are appar- ently the capsulogenous glands of D’Udekem and Lankester, which are the equivalents of the setigerous glands, being simply enlarged in order to assist in the generative function. In Acanthodrilus multi- porus I have figured a pair of glands * corresponding to the sete which are probably the homologues of these glands, and I imagine that in the species of which the present note treats the two large glands related to the modified sete of segment 8 are in all proba- bility to be referred to the same category and are not special structures. After the foregoing notes on the structure of this Earthworm I may briefly refer to those points which seem to indicate that it is a distinct species differing from both the other two Acanthodrili which inhabit New Caledonia. With regard to external characters it appears to agree with A. wagulatus in the segments occupied 1 Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool. Bd. viii. p. 418. 2 System und Morphologie der Oligochxten (Prag, 1884), pp. 156-7. * Ann. Se. Nat. 7° série, t. xix. pl. i. fig. 6 4. 1886.] MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON A LARGE EARTHWORM. 175 by the clitellum, but to differ from both this and A. odtwsus in the position of the male generative pores. The genital sete of the 17th and 19th segments are almost exactly like those of A. ungulatus, but the prostate glands, as in A. obtusus, are cylindrical coiled tubes and not multilobate glands as in A. ungulatus ; at the same time the prostate glands in several examples of my species are so closely coiled that they present an appearance which might easily be mistaken for that which has been stated by M. Perrier to be characteristic of A. ungulatus ; it is just possible that the condition of the specimen dissected by M. Perrier may be responsible for the lobed appearance of the prostate glands. Another difference between my species and A, ungulatus is in the spermathecee, which can hardly be said to have a diverticulum, and are in segments 8 and 9, not 8 and 10. The structures lying between the two spermathece of each side may, as I have already suggested, be identical with that described above, but evidently differ in detail. The most important difference between the species described here by myself and those of M. Perrier is undoubtedly in the position of the male generative pores ; inso many species—in fact in all except A. obtusus, A. verti- cillatus, and A. ungulatus—the male generative pores are upon the 17th and 19th segments ’. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIX. Fig. 1. Acanthodrilus layardi; anterior region of body, dorsal aspect. 2. Segments 13-20, from ventral side, to show position of female generative pores upon 14th, and the male generative pores upon 17th and 19th segments. The clitellum is indicated by shading. . Genital spicule from segment 8, magnified. . The lower extremity of the same, more highly magnified. . Spermathecwx and accessory genital glands: cp, spermathece ; v, ventral blood-vessels giving off branch to the spermatheca ; a corresponding branch is also given off from lateral heart; s, sac containing modified setee (figs. 3, 4); g.b, glandular bodies opening in common with seta sac; 2, glandular tufts of nephridium ; x’, duct of nephridium. 6. Anterior region of body dissected : cp, spermathecse ; ”, nephridia. 7. Principal vascular trunks of anterior region: d, dorsal vessel ; sv, supra- intestinal; v, ventral ; 7, lateral; 2, “ hearts.” or oo 1 Referring to my paper already quoted upon the New-Zealand species of the genus, I find that the male generative pores are there stated to be upon the 16th and 18th segments. A reexamination of the specimens has convinced me that that statement is wrong, and that they are, as in the present species, upon the 17th and 19th segments, while the spermathece are in the 8th and 9th seg- ments as indicated in the woodeut (P. Z. 8. 1885, fig. 1, p. 815). Should the specimens to which the present note relates prove to belong to a distinct species from either of those described by Perrier, I propose to term the species Acanthodrilus layardi. 176 ANIMALS COMMENSAL OR PARASITIC [Apr. 6, April 6, 1886. Prof. W. H. Flower, LL.D., F.R.S., President, in the Chair. The Secretary read the following report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of March 1886 :— The total number of registered additions to the Society’s Mena- gerie during the month of March was 121. Of these 6 were by birth, 58 by presentation, 11 by purchase, 1 by exchange and 45 were received on deposit. The total number of departures during the same period, by death and removals, was 127. The most noticeable additions during the month were :— 1. A second specimen of the Rough-billed Pelican of North America (Pelecanus trachyrhynchus)', purchased March 2nd. 2. An example of the White-tailed Ichneumon (Herpestes albi- cauda) from Lamoo, East Africa, presented by I’. J. Jackson, Esq., F.Z.S., March 4th. The Secretary exhibited, on behalf of J. B. Martin, Esq., F.Z.S., a large tusk of the Indian Elephant (Zlephas indicus) belonging to the executors of the late Charles Reade, of which the length was stated to be 6 feet, and the weight over 100 pounds. The tusk was stated to have belonged to a ‘‘ rogue Elephant ”’ which had ouly one tusk, and which had been killed at Goruckpore in 1836, when the late Charles Reade was magistrate there. Mr. Sclater exhibited the heads and horns of two species of Antelopes received by Lord Walsingham from Mr. F. J. Jackson, F.Z.S., having been obtained in the vicinity of Lamoo, East Africa. One of these belong to an adult specimen of Strepsiceros imberbis, Blyth; the two others to Damalis senegalensis, which, so far as Mr. Sclater knew, had not been previously obtained in this district. Strepsiceros imberbis had been already met with as far south as the Juba River on this coast °. Dr. H. Woodward exhibited specimens of animals commeusal or parasitic in the shell of Meleagrina margaritifera, the Pearl- mussel, from the north coast of Australia, and read the following notes :— “The Pearl-shell fishery is now a recognized and important branch ‘of the commerce of Western Australia, and also of Queensland and South Australia, which Colonies own the rights of the northern shores of that vast continent. “Mr. Thomas Harry Haynes has given me much interesting information regarding the pearl-shell fishery carried on by him and 1 For notice of previous specimen see P. Z. 8. 1883, p. 463, plate xlvi. 2 See P. Z. 8S. 1884, p. 45. 1886. ] IN MELEAGRINA MARGARITIFERA. 177 his partners on the N.W. coast of Australia, and has submitted many shells to me which had been attacked by lithodomous Mol- lnsea, or by worms and the burrows of Cliona. “Some of these I have now the pleasure to exhibit. I have, more- over, to-day been permitted by Prof. Flower to examine a still more interesting specimen which he has just received from Henry Willett, Esq., F.G.S., of Arnold House, Brighton. “Tt is that of as specimen of Pinnotheres which has been entombed in a cyst of pearl by a living pearl-mussel, into the shell of which he had ventured to intrude. “Tt seems extraordinary and beyond belief that the Meleagrina should of all the Conchifera be the one to resent the commensalism of the Pea-crab, which has been known since the days of Cicero, Pliny, Oppian, and Aristotle to inhabit the shell of the Pinna and the Oyster, and has been recorded from Astarte, Pectunculus, and at least some half-dozen other bivalves, with whom it appears to live on the most friendly terms. “Tt is the females, however, which constantly reside within the shells of the Conchifera, whilst the males. are said to avail them- selves of favourable opportunities to visit the females in their retirement. ‘** Whether or not in this case the unlucky male intruded himself upon Meleagrina at an unfavourable period, and finding no female Pinnotheres, penetrated so far beneath the mantle of the Pearl-mussel as to be unable to retreat, one thing is quite clear, namely that the Meleagrina entombed the intruder in a cyst of pearl from which the clever pearl-button maker alone liberated him. * There is alargeseries of Pinnotheresin the Museum: the one from Australia is referred to P. orientalis, but as these are all females comparison is useless. These are from shells of Pinna, Donawx, and Pectunculus. ‘There are others from Broken Bay. “ Prof. Dana, U.S. Expl. Expedition, 1852, part i. text, pp. 380— 381, and Atlas, pl. 24. fig. 3, describes a species under the name of P. obesa from Fiji Islands. The male, however, is said to be slightly broader than long, and the eyes (which in the adult female are quite hidden beneath the overreaching and protuberant carapace) can be seen in the upper view, and the front of the carapace is emarginated by the orbits. (Size 4? lines long, and 63 broad.) “Mr. Willett’s specimen is slightly longer than broad, and in size agrees very nearly with the male of P. pisum, which was formerly described by Leach as P. latreillei.” The following papers were read :— 178 MR.F.E.BEDDARD ON THE - [Apr. 6, 1. On some Points in the Anatomy of Chauna chavaria. By Frank E. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S.E., F.Z.S., Prosector to the Society. [Received March 15, 1886.] Prof. Garrod has contributed to the ‘ Proceedings’ of this Society some notes upon the anatomy, more particularly of the soft parts, of Chauna derbiana'. The recent death of one of the Society’s specimens of Chauna chavaria has enabled me to supplement Prof. Garrod’s observations by some notes on the structure of the second species of Chauna, As might have been expected, there are no great differences between the two species; and with the exception of the colic czeca and the distribution of the tracheal muscles, all the statements made by Garrod apply equally well to the present species ; with regard to the visceral anatomy I am not able to institute a detailed compari- son between the two species, since certain of the facts which I shall describe in the present paper have not been referred to by Garrod in his account of Chauna derbiana. To these facts I have paid particular attention in order to render more complete our know- ledge of this interesting bird. dir-sacs, §e.—On opening the body-cavity it was seen to be completely separated into a right and left half by a vertical septum attached above to the sternum and the ventral wall of the abdomen, and below to a horizontal fibrous septum which will be presently described. ‘his vertical septum anteriorly separates the two lobes of the liver and runs as far forward as the pericardium ;. it corresponds to the umbilical ligament, a structure which has not usually so great an extent in birds; more generally the umbilical ligament only extends as far back as the gizzard and terminates in a semicircular free posterior margin. In Chauna this vertical ligament bears a blood-vessel which joins the portal system anteriorly and posteriorly divides into two trunks, one of which passes further back than the other; this vessel is situated near the dorsal attach- ment of the septum. The horizontal septum is an extremely thick brown-coloured membrane which passes across the abdominal cavity from side to side, and completely covers the coils of the intestine, being attached laterally to the walls of the abdomen. This tough brown membrane corresponds to a structure described by Weldon (P. Z.S. 1883, p. 640) in the Storks, and by myself (P. Z. 5. 1885, p- 841) in the Cranes and other birds. This horizontal membrane when it reaches the gizzard splits into two layers which form a complete covering to that organ ; between it and the gizzard, on the inferior surface of the latter, are numerous air-spaces which were easily distended by inflating the air-sacs. The relations of the abdominal viscera are therefore, so far as the presence of this horizontal septum is concerned, indicative of an affinity with the Storks and Cranes, and more particularly with the * «Collected Papers,’ p. 318. 1886.] ANATOMY OF CHAUNA CHAVARIA. 179 former group, since the lobes of the liver are not shut off by septa from the space which lies between the horizontal membrane and the ventral abdominal walls. In the Cranes, as in the Struthious birds, the lobes of the liver are enclosed in separate compartments distinct from that underlying the horizontal membrane (cf. P. Z.S8. 1885, p- 836). There are other points in which Chauna approaches the Storks. In the paper already referred tc, Weldon has drawn attention to a peculiarity in the air-saes of the Storks which appears to be characteristic of this group, and is at any rate not to be found in the Ducks. The prebronchial air-sacs (in the Storks and Pheni- copterus) are divided by a complicated arrangement of transverse septa into smaller chambers. In Chauna chavaria this subdivision of the preebronchial air-sacs is very much more marked, and the subbronchial air-sacs, which in the Storks and many other birds are fused into a single cavity, are in the same way divided up into an immense number of extremely small chambers, so that the whole air-sac presents the appearance of a crowd of air-bubbles closely pressed together of various sizes. It was quite impossible on this account to distinguish the preebronchial from the postbranchial sacs, that is to say at the points where they come into contact. The prolongations of the subbronchial air-sacs into the axilla and into the space between the two pectoral muscles were similarly sub- divided by innumerable septa. There appeared to be nothing remarkable in the disposition of the abdominal air-sacs, and there were no indications of any subdivision of these charnbers; the anterior intermediate air-sac cominunicates with the bronchus by two apertures placed side by side and at some distance from each other near the anterior end of the chamber; in the posterior intermediate sac, which was considerably the larger of the two, there was only a single pulmonary orifice. The abdominal air-sacs present the usual character—the right being considerably larger than the left. It appears to be the general rule that the thoracico-abdominal air- sacs are not divided up in the way that the cervical air-sacs are in Chauna and in the Storks; but I have met with occasional variations in the structure of their air-sacs in some few out of the numerous birds which I have had the opportunity of dissecting. In Steatornis I have already (supra, p. 151) called attention to the fact that. the posterior intermediate air-sac was either completely separated into two distinct compartments or had indications of such a division ; in a specimen of Stria flammea there was a similar division of the posterior air-sac, at least on one side of the body. The third instance is Platalea leucorodia ; in a specimen of this bird, on both sides of the body there were three “intermediate ”’ air-sacs, the third being very small and interpolated between the anterior and posterior intermediate sacs. This may of course be an abnormality’; but the air-sacs of birds differ so little that any fact seems worth recording ; and the 1 A second specimen had the normal number of abdominal air-sacs, 180 ON THE ANATOMY OF CHAUNA CHAVARIA. [Apr. 6, Czeca of Chauna chavaria. 1886. ] ON A BRACHIOPOD OF THE GENUS ATRETIA. 181 fact that the modification of the posterior air-sacs in Platalea was carried out on doth sides of the body perhaps shows it to be a characteristic of the bird. Alimentary Canal.—The ceeca of Chauna chavaria appear to differ slightly from those of Chauna derbiana, the most noticeable difference being that they are not symmetrical in the former species ; the right cecum is slightly longer than the left, and is of a uniform conical shape, tapering slightly to the free extremity ; it measured 33 inches from the tip to the junction with the ilium ; the left cecum measured as nearly as possible 3 inches. The left caecum also differs in its shape, as may be seen by an inspection of the accompanying drawing (p. 180); its proximal half is about equal in diameter to that of the right ceecum, but instead of tapering gradually it narrows abruptly into the distal half, which is of about the thickness of the little finger. In the /iver the right lobe is larger than the left lobe, and, as in the other species, there is a large gall-bladder the duct of which opens into the duodenum below the hepatic duct ; the pancreatic duct is the most anterior of the three. Trachea.—The extrinsic muscles of the syrinx are somewhat differently disposed from those of Chauna derbiana; as in that species, there are two pairs ; the most anterior spreads out in a fan-like manner upon a tough membrane which connects the coracoid and clavicle ; this muscle is therefore attached exactly as is its homologue in Ch. derbiana. The posterior pair of muscles are, however, not attached to the costal process of the sternum as in Ch. derbiana, but terminate upon the aponeurosis of the lung just behind the exit of the pulmonary vein. The syrinx itself does not appear to me to be worth a special description or figure, as it agrees in every particular with that of Ch. derbiana. 2. On a Brachiopod of the Genus Afretia, named in MS. by the late Dr. T. Davidson. By Miss Acnes Crane. (Communicated by Prof. W. H. Flower, LL.D., F.R.S.) [Received March 15, 1886.] In July last the late Dr. Thomas Davidson, F.R.S., received from Mr. John Brazier, of Sydney, a gift of an interesting series of Brachiopoda dredged by him in the waters of Port Stephens and Port Jackson, New South Wales. When, in January 1886, it became my duty to select the remaining specimens from the Davidson collection necessary for the illustration of Parts 2 and 3 of Dr, Davidson’s forthcoming Monograph on Recent Brachiopoda, these Australian specimens were not found incorporated with his collection of living species. Possibly it was Dr. Davidson’s intention to describe them in a separate paper. In February, when the collection of recent and fossil Brachiopoda (which, in accordance with Dr. Davidson’s 182 MISS A. CRANE ON A BRACHIOPOD [Apr. 6, desire, were presented to the nation) were removed to the Geological Department of the Natural History Branch of the British Museum at South Kensington, where he wished them to be deposited, Mr. Brazier’s series was found apart from the recent specimens with the fossil collection. Each species had been placed ina separate box with a number inside, and this number was found to correspond with Mr. Brazier’s list, which Dr. Davidson had copied into bis letter- book with his remarks appended. The executor instructed me temporarily to retain the series for examination. One very interesting new species of the remarkable genus Atretia was discovered. This Dr. Davidson had named after his friend and correspondent Mr. John Brazier, of Sydney, who has dredged so extensively in Australian waters. The name Afretia brazieri was attached in Dr. Davidson’s handwriting. The specimens are so excellent that there can he no possibility of generic error on my part, and I have therefore thought it my duty to publish a short description of Atretia brazier’, Dav., n. sp. MS., to secure priority for his last species, which should be figured in Part IL. of the Davidson Monograph of Recent Brachiopoda which I am now engaged in editing for the Transactions of the Linnean Society. Atretia, as its name implies, is an imperforate genus. It may be as well briefly to recapitulate the history of the type species, first published by Dr. Gwyn Jeffreys under the name Cryptopora gnomon in ‘Nature’ for Dec. 1869. In the ‘Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist.’ 1876, Jeffreys gave the earliest description of the species, substituting the generic name Atretia for Cryptopora; Dr. Davidson gave the first figures in his Supplement to the “ Recent and Tertiary British Brachiopoda” (Pal. Soc. 1874), and again illustrated the species in one of the two plates he contributed to Dr. Jeffreys’s paper on *‘ The Mol- lusea (Brachiopoda) of the ‘ Lightning’ and ‘Porcupine’ Expeditions,” published in the Proc. Zool. Soc., April 1878. Atretia gnomon was dredged off the west coast of Ireland in from 1380-1443 fms. ; during the ‘Valorous’ expedition, 1100-1750 fms., in Davis Straits. It was found by Dr. Friele (during the Norwegian Arctic expedition) about 30 miles W. of Tromsé, in 650 fms., ‘fon the slope of the banks cold area.”’? It was dredged off Marocco and the Canaries at depths of 50-65 fms., by the ‘ Talisman’ and French expeditions. In all more than fifty examples of the European representative of this well-marked Rhynchonelloid have been obtained by Jeffreys, Friele, and the Marquis de Folin. M. Eugéne Deslongchamps, in his ‘Etudes Critiques sur des Brachiopodes nouveaux ou peu connus,’ p. 242 (Caen, 1884), expresses an opinion that Atretia gnomon, Jeffr., is probably only a very young stage of R. psittacea, Chemn. But the recent discovery by Mr. Brazier of eleven good specimens of the genus Afretia in the Southern Pacific Ocean, off the coast of New South Wales, tends to invalidate that assumption, the only hynchonelle in the Austrahan and Novo-Zelandian region being the deeply ribbed or furrowed RA. nigricans and its variety, 2. pyxidata, Boog- Watson. To these well-characterized forms Atretia braziert, smooth, flat, ~ 1886. | OF THE GENUS ATRETIA. 183 and compressed, bears no resemblance whatever, and exhibits at all ages definite generic characters’. ATRETIA BRAZIERI, Sp. nov. Description.—This pretty little Brachiopod presents all the well- marked characteristics of the genus, two short curved slender processes, denticulated at their extremities, descend from the small narrow hinge-plate of the smaller dorsal valve, and an elevated wedge- shaped projection rises abruptly from the central mesial septum of the same valve. The presence of this septum is indicated by a dark line visible from the exterior of the shell. The shell is small, generally longer than wide, triangular in shape, especially in the younger specimens. Dorsal valve rounder and not so large as the ventral one, slightly flexucus towards the centre at. the margins of the valves. The ventral valve, owing to the prolongation of the beak area, is longer and more triangular than the dorsal one raised towards the beak, which is slightly produced and incurved, with a triangular foramen commencing beneath its pointed extremity. Two elevated ridges extend from the shoulder of the shell nearly to the margins of the valves, and there seems to be a slight elevation corresponding with the well-marked exterior depression and sur- rounded by muscular scars (?) in the exteriors of the ventral valves of two specimens I have examined under magnifying-powers. The shell is shallow towards the margins, but rounded and deeper near the beak. Shell-substance imperforate ; surface smooth, glossy, and gleaming, marked with fine concentric lines of growth ; semitrans- parent. Horn-coloured or light grey. Length 22 lines; width 13 line; depth about 1 line. Another specimen measured 2 lines in length by 23 in width; this was more flattened and depressed, and the external mesial sinus in the ventral valve was less marked. Other specimens were about 1 line in length. Station and Depth.—¥leven specimens and odd valves were dredged in twenty-five fathoms in sandy mud off Cabbage-Tree Island, Port Stephens, N.S.W., by Mr. John Brazier, who sent five specimens to Dr. Davidson, with the remark that they differed from all other known Brachiopoda from Australian waters. Obs.—Dr. Davidson commemorated Mr. Brazier’s discovery by naming the species after him, and I have deemed it my duty to my old and vaiued friend to describe the species under the name he desired to give it, as well as I am able. In so doing I wish to call the attention of qualified conchologists thereto, and to place on record the wide geographical distribution of the genus Afretia, which we now know to range in from 25-1750 fathoms, from nearly 70° N. 1 Norz.—I communicated the discovery of the Australian A/retia to the Nor- wegian naturalist, Herr Herman Friele, who replied, April 19th, that my deseription of the skeleton of A. brazieri is quite typical of the genus Afretia, which he cannot consider to be the young of /?hynchonella. He adds the im- portant fact that he obtained some fifty specimens of the Atretia gnomon, Jetfr., during the Norwegian North-Atlantic Expedition, but no Rhynchonella oceurred on the same station or in corresponding depths.—Aanzs Crane, April 26th. baal 184 MR. J. G. GOODCHILD ON THE [ Apr. 6, lat., in the Arctic Ocean to the Canaries in the South Atlantic, and as far as lat. 32° south of the Equator in the Sonthern Pacific Ocean. The specimens will eventually be placed in the Davidson Collection in the British Museum. P.S.—Since my paper on Atretia brazieri was writtten, I have submitted with my friend Mr. J. E. Haselwood, F. R. Micr. Soc., all the specimens of Atreéia to microscopic examination. Under a ten-inch power the beak-area deltidial plates present some imma- ture features similar to those figured by Morse in his ‘ Embryology of Terebratulina.’ The scaly structure of the shell is very apparent ; there are no perforations. We observed two long slender narrow muscular scars, with a diamond-shaped central one in the interior of a ventral valve. The marginal borders of the largest specimen seemed raised or swollen. The most puzzling appearance occurs on some brown patches on the shell, consisting of circular and elongated sac- like aggregations. If these bodies are a feature of the shell-structure, it seems strange they should be visible in portions of the surface only’. I hope further to investigate the matter. 3. Observations on the Disposition of the Cubital Coverts in Birds. By J. G. Goopcuitp, F.Z.S., F.G.S., H.M. Geological Survey. [Received March 16, 1886.] The prominent position occupied by the cubital coverts in most living birds renders their correct delineation a point of so much importance in any figure intended for zoological purposes that it is perhaps hardly necessary to offer any apology for submitting a few observations upon that subject for the consideration of the Fellows of this Society. Both ornithologists and zoological artists have, of course, long been aware of the existence of considerable diversity both in the relative proportions and in the mode of arrangement of these feathers in various groups of birds; but it seems never to have occurred to any one that these variations are of such a nature as to admit of their being reduced to any system of classification. This oversight may be due to the fact that the specimens made use of for scientific purposes have necessarily been either spirit-specimens or else skins flat or mounted. In the case of the skins especially, such specimens cannot, as a rule, be at all depended upon as repre- senting the natural order of the feathers in a living state; and consequently ornithologists have been led to believe that the subject under notice was not worth any serious attention. But a careful 1 Norr.—More prolonged examination by daylight with different powers showed these appearances to result from the partial overlapping of the cycloidal scales of the shell-structure. The presence of parallel rows of spicular pro- jections was clearly revealed in the interior of the valves; these occur at regular distances from each other, running from the beak towards the margins of the valves.—Aanrs Orang, April 26th. 1886. ] CUBITAL COVERTS OF BIRDS. — 185 comparison of the features presented by a large series of living birds, in good health, or of freshly-killed wild birds, leads to a different conclusion. These show that a particular mode of arrangement, or a particular order of overlap, of the median cubital coverts is practically constant for all the individuals of the same species. More extended observations show that the same general mode of disposition is as a rule characteristic of all the species of a genus, and may even be found throughout all the members of groups larger than that. A reference to the wing of the Golden Plover, a central type, aud one that in itself represents all the leading modifications (see fig. 1, p. 186), may help to make the nomenclature herein used more intelligible. {In drawing up this scheme I have availed myself of several suggestions made to me by Prof. Flower, and by my colleague Mr. E. T. Newton, after the paper was read before the Society.] The terms used refer mainly to the relations of various parts of the wing to each other and to the body axis, when the wing is extended and is viewed from the dorsal or upper surface. The wing-surface is primarily divided into the manual (primary) region and the cubital (secondary) region, this last embracing all the feathers that originate from any part of the forearm or cubitus. Of the manual region I have nothing that need now be discussed. Inthe cubital region the Remiges, and the Greater Coverts that come on next above them, are uniform in disposition in all Carinate birds. In these feathers the overlap is uniformly distal ; that is to say, the several feathers are disposed in such a manner that the outer free edges of those nearer the vertebral axis overlap the inner edges of those originating nearer the distal extremity of the wing. The same observation applies also (but with some minor modifications of detail that will not now be taken into consideration) to the Lesser Coverts, or those feathers that mainly originate in the Patagium, and that extend along the anterior border of the wing from the humeral fold to the carpal jomt. The remaining feathers, which are generally comprehended under the term Median Coverts, vary considerably in both their direction of imbrication and in the number of rows that run parallel to the greater coverts in each case. The present paper is devoted to a consideration of the nature and the extent of the variation referred to, without regard to morphological details of any other kind soever. Many of the facts have either not been noticed, or else, if they have been noticed, their significance appears to have been missed. For convenience of deseription the tract occupied by the Median Coverts may be divided into three areas by lines parallel to the main direction of the cubital quills. The area nearest the vertebral axis will be referred to as the Proximal area, the next the Middle area, and the remaining third, up to the distal border next the manual region, the Distal area. The rows of feathers composing the median coverts range, in a general way, parallel with the greater coverts. ‘The number of rows varies from one to six, or even more, in different forms of birds; and the row nearest the greater coverts is the one most subject to variation in the disposition of the feathers composing it. Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XIII. 13 186 MR, Je G. GOODCHILD ON THE [Apr. 6, In dealing with the various modifications, I propose to take the birds as nearly as possible in the order adopted by Dr. Sclater in the Kighth Edition of the ‘ List of Vertebrated Animals now or lately living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London.’ re Se Cee f Uy net Illustrations of the terms used in the following description, as shown by the feathers of the Cubital Region in the Golden Plover. 1 to 1’, Posterior Border. 2 to 2'. Anterior Border. 2! to 1’. Proximal End. 2to 1. Distal Edge of the Cubital Region (shown by the thicker line), A. Cubital Remiges. B. Greater Wing-coverts. C. Supplementary row of Median Coverts, or Upper Wing-coverts. D. Posterior row of Median Wing-coyerts. E. Second row. F. Third row. The Posterior row of Median Coverts from D, near the Carpal joint, shows Proximal Overlap as far as the point marked with a small cross. Distal Overlap is shown by the mode of imbrication of the Greater Wing-coyverts, The Passerine style of imbrication represents one extreme of the range of modification observable, and is well exemplified by the wing of Turdus merula (fig. 2). In this the median coverts consist of a single uninterrupted row of feathers, whose free edges are regularly directed backwards along a curve extending from near the carpal joint towards a point near the elbow. The same figure shows also one of the simplest arrangements of the Lesser Cubital Coverts. Such an arrangement as obtains in the Blackbird may be traced, with modifications of only minor importance, through some thousands of 1886.] CUBITAL COVERTS OF BIRDS. 187 species of Passerine birds, and will probably, on further examination, be found to characterize the whole of the birds that are correctly referred to that Order. In the Corvidee an approach towards a somewhat different mode of -arrangement is made (fig. 3): another minor modification is seen in the Alaudide (fig. 3a). The Swallows (fig. 5a, p. 188) all appear to follow the normal passerine type. That of the Swifts and the Cotingas appears to me to be essentially different. There is some doubt also in regard to the Bower-birds and the Birds of Paradise in this respect. Following Dr. Sclater’s arrangement, the Swifts and the Humming- Turdus merula. Corvus. Alauda arvensis. birds fall next to be described. Living Humming-birds can very rarely be examined closely ; I have therefore been compelled to rely entirely upon the examination of museum specimens. After exa- mining the whole of the Gould Collection, and checking the results by comparing them with those made ona large series of other specimens, I am convinced that one general type of wing-pattern characterizes the whole of these birds; it is of a very simple character, and is represented in figure 4, p.188. By this it will be seen that the proxi- mal lapping row of median coverts found throughout all the Passeres is absent entirely in this. The Humming-birds might, indeed, be described as possessing no median coverts at all, the place of these being taken up by feathers having the same mode of imbrication as the Lesser Coverts. All the feathers of each series overlap outwards and backwards from the vertebral axis towards the distal end of the wing in these birds. Observations on the order of overlap in the wing of freshly-killed specimens of Cypselus apus, afterwards extended by an examination of the whole series of Swifts in the National Collection, showed that in these, as in the Humming-birds, no one series of feathers overlaps backwards. In fact the wing-pattern in the genera Cypselus, Acanthylis, Chetura, and Collocalia seems to me to differ in no essential respect from that found throughout the Trochilide. So far as the disposition of the wing-coverts is concerned, the Swifts and Humming-birds agree amongst themselves, and differ from all of the Passeriform birds, with the possible exception of the Birds of Paradise. Fig. 5, p. 188, taken from a freshiy-killed specimen of Cypselus apus, _will serve to make this point clear. A wing of Hirundo rustica is figured alongside for comparison (fig. 5 a). 13% 188 MR. J. G. GOODCHILD ON THE [Apr. 6, Following the normal Macrochires come the Caprimulgide. Of these, in the living state, I have examined only Caprimulgus europeus and Podargus cuvieri. The disposition of the cubital coverts in these is certainly not at all like that seen in the Swifts ; but it closely follows the arrangement seen in the Picarian birds. In these at least two series of the feathers next above the Greater Coverts show proximal overlap. An examination of the specimens Fig. 5 a. Hirundo. Cypselus. Trochilus. of Podargus, Batrachostomus, Aigotheles, and Caprimulgus in the National Collection, as well as of specimens of the same family else- where, confirms this view. The soft and downy nature of the feathers prevents satisfactory observation upon any feathers above the two lower rows of median coverts; but I have satisfied myself in regard to the point in question. While Caprimulgus and its allies seem to agree in this particular with Podargus, Steatornis (so far as one can judge by the unsatisfactory data furnished by skins) presents yet another type, which seems to follow that of the true Cuckoos rather than that of Podargus or its allies. In all the remaining Fig. 6. Fig. 6 a. Fig. 6 6. [EY uy Galt lec Chasmorhynchus. Dacelo. Rhamphastos. Picarian families enumerated in the List (except Cuculide, Muso- phagide, and Indicatoride ), at least the two rows of feathers next 1886. ] CUBITAL COVERTS OF BIRDS. 189 above the greater coverts, and often more, show uniform and uninter- rupted proximal overlap. This arrangement can be very conveniently studied in the Toucans (fig. 65), which are nearly always well represented in the Parrot House in the Society’s Gardens. The Cuckoos are associated with the Picarian birds in the List; but as their wing-pattern differs in some essential respects from that of the typical forms, they will be referred to in connection with another series. The transition from the Picarian type to the Psittacine is gradual ; indeed some of the smaller Parrots, especially Melopsittacus, might, so far as the wing-pattern is concerned, well stand within the confines of the Picarian group. The chief difference in the case of MJelo- psittacus lies in the further increase in the number of rows of back- ward-lapping feathers on the cubital area. Fig. 7 shows this form of wing, which can be easily compared with the living form in the case of so common a cage-bird. In the type of wing-pattern prevailing throughout all, or nearly all, the rest of the Psittacide, an additional modification may be observed. The row of feathers coming on next above the Greater Coverts, indicated by the letter C in the following diagrams, is seen to consist of a series numbering generally five or six, which are confined to the distal area of the cubital region, and form a distinct and separate series from the feathers that extend across the median area. They correspond in relative position to the Upper Wing-coverts (tectrices superiores) in the manual region of the wing; and it might be convenient for the present to refer to those extending over the distal area of the cubital region under the same term, as is done in the specimens Ulustrative of the structure of birds’ wings that Prof. Flower has arranged at the Natural-History Museum. ‘The feathers referred Fig. 7. Psitiacus. Melopsittacus. Calopsitta. to often form a conspicuous feature on the wing of the living bird, as they are frequently arranged in such a manner that the shafts of three or more of the feathers are ina line. The proximal edges of these feathers are generally as firm as those on the opposite side, and, as a consequence, the whole series slides between the feathers next them on the proximal side in much the same way as the 190 MR. J. G. GOODCHILD ON THE [Apr. 6, blade of a lancet closes into its sheath. The feature referred to can be better understood by reference to C, figure 8, taken from a living specimen of Calopsitta nove-hollandia, which represents the style prevailing throughout probably the whole of the Psittaci. Essentially the same pattern as is found in the Psittaci prevails also throughout the whole of the Striges, and also throughout the whole of the Accipitres, with the exception of Pernis, Pandion, Gypogeranus, and the Cathartidee. These exceptional forms will be referred to again in their proper places. Fig. 9, representing the wing Falco. Phalacrocorax. of a Merlin, well illustrates the whole of the normal Accipitrine forms. Mr. Wolf’s beautiful figures of the Birds of Prey all afford excellent illustrations of the same point, while, from a. part of the world where experience has led us to expect minute accuracy of detail, we have the Japanese figure in metal of a species of Spizaetus, now amongst the choicest treasures at South Kensington Museum, which affords a correct illustration of the Accipitrine style of cubital coverts. Of the Pelicans, in the present connection, nothing satisfactory can be made out, on account of the lax and drooping condition of their feathers, even in health. But Phalacrocorax (fig. 9a) gives us a style hardly distinguishable in any noticeable respect from that of the Accipitrines. On the other hand, Fregata, Sula, Plotus, and some other forms associated with them are widely removed, ptero- graphically, from the Cormorants. All the Herons and their immediate allies, Nycticoraw (fig. 10), Botaurus, and, I believe, also Cancroma, closely follow the Accipitrine mode of imbrication. The principal difference lies in the reduced prominence of the supplementary row of lancet-like feathers (upper wing-coverts) so characteristic of the Birds of Prey and the Parrots. Healthy Night-Herons in immature plumage exhibit the Ardeine style of median cubital coverts remarkably well. The Ciconiidee, in regard to the point under notice, will fall to be described in another part of this paper. 1886. } CUBITAL COVERTS OF BIRDS. 191 The remarks made in connection with the Pelicans apply also to the Odontoglosse. Passing over the Palamedez for the present, the last group whose style of cubital coverts brings them under notice here is the Anseres. Here, again, we have a group with nearly uniform pterographic WNycticorax. Querquedula. characters ; these, as will be seen by reference to figure 11, repre- senting Querquedula crecea, so closely follow the style seen in the Accipitres and the others mentioned as possessing the accessory row of median coverts, or upper wing-coverts (C), that it is difficult to point to any one character that would serve to distinguish them. It will be noticed that the birds characterized by possessing more than two rows of median cubital coverts with proximal overlap, together with a single supplementary row of upper wing-coverts also with proximal overlap, are further characterized by the Desmo- gnathous palate, are Homalogonate, and possess in addition several other deep-seated poiuts of structure is common. Meleagris. Near to the Accipitrine birds, and perhaps leading away from them somewhere near the Polyborine birds, a kind of transition may be traced in the direction of the Gallinze. In the case of Meleagris (fig. 12) proximal overlap characterizes nearly all the median cubital coverts, as in the Accipitrines, and in this respect these birds stand 192 MR. J. G. GOODCHILD ON THE [Apr. 6, alone amongst the Gallinze; but neither in Meleagris nor in any of the Alectoropods do any traces of the upper wing-coverts exist. In some respects the Peristeropod Galline, represented by Talegalla (fig. 13 a) and by Craz (fig. 13), stand nearest of the Gallinz to the Accipitres ; while Numida is hardly more removed. Talegalla. In the Peristeropods we find the commencement of a modification that is carried to a much greater length in other Galline birds, as well as in a large number of forms that have yet to be noticed. This consists in the increased prominence of distal overlap in the proximal third of the cubital area. In Crazx (fig. 13), for instance, it will be noticed that the distal overlap, whose commencement is indicated by the small cross, extends into the middle area in the case of the lowest ' row. The distal overlap at C is another noteworthy feature, as it has not yet been observed in any of the Galline except the Peri- steropods. f ; Taking the evidence afforded by the mode of imbrication of the wing-coverts alone, it is near to the Peristeropods, and not near to Columba the Pigeons, that Goura should be placed. The pattern is shown in fig. 14, which should be compared with Crew on the one hand and 1886. ] CUBITAL COVERTS OF BIRDS. 193 with any conspicuously-marked Pigeon of the normal type (Columba guinea, for example, fig. 14 a) on the other. The difference, to me, appears both striking and significant. Perhaps I, may be allowed to remark that the characteristic differencés between Goura and the normal Pigeons are represented in the very useful series of coloured illustrations now. posted up outside the Western Aviary in the Society’s Gardens. In addition to the difference already noted between the true Pigeons and Goura, the following points of agreement and of difference between the two groups may be considered :— In the normal Pigeons an oil-gland is present; but is absent in Goura. In the normal Pigeons the tail-feathers are 12 in number ; while there are 16 in Goura. In the normal Pigeons the pterylosis is columbine ; and is galline in Goura. In the normal Pigeons ceca are present; but are absent in Goura. _In the normal Pigeons a gall-bladder is present: no gall-bladder in Goura. In the normal Pigeons incubation lasts 16 days; but extends to 28 days in Goura. In addition to these peculiarities reference may be made to the bird’s pheasant-like habits, to certain peculiarities of the urosacral and of the caudal vertebre, to the number of the cervical vertebre, to the absence of pterygoid processes, and to other features referred to by Prof. Huxley (P.Z.S. 1868, p. 302) and by Prof. Parker (T. Z. S. v. p. 151, 1863). Dr. Sclater (Ibis, 1880, p. 407) refers to certain peculiarities of the tarsus, in addition to the differences just noted, as evidence in favour of separating Goura from the Pigeons. The main differences that distinguish the wing of the Peristeropod Gallinze from that of the Birds of Prey have already been pointed out. It remains to add that the prominence of distal overlap introduced by Talegalla, Crax and its allies, becomes more accentuated in Numida, and thence, through the Tetraonidee (fig. 15, p. 194), reaches its greatest development amongst the Gallinz in the typical Pheasants. A progressive increase of distal imbrication can be traced, in the first stages, only in the first, or posterior, row of median coverts, then in the second, and the third, and so on, until in Polyplectron all the more conspicuous feathers in the closed wing of the living bird seem to lap from the proximal towards the distal side of the wing. Excellent examples of the features referred to may be easily observed in the Society’s Pheasant Aviary, where Lophophorus impeyanus, Euplocamus swinhoii, Phasianus reevesi, and Polyplectron chinquis well display the feature referred to. A reference to the annexed figure of Euplocamus swinhoii (fig. 16, p. 194) will serve to make the general disposition clear. Pavo follows a slightly different pattern; and it is a point worth, 194 MR. J. G. GOODCHILD ON THE [Apr. 6, notice that there seems a constant difference of small amount between the individuals of P. eristatus and P. nigripennis now living in the collection. In P. nigripennis all the feathers of the posterior row of median coverts appear to lap distally. The Common Peacock is Fig. 16. Tetrao. Euplocamus. well represented in the particular feature under notice by one of the fine pieces of Japanese metal-work at South Kensington already re- ferred to under the head of Accipitres. In the pterographic characters of both the Hemipodii and the Crypturi, I have hitherto failed to discover any marked charac- teristie connected with the point under consideration that would serve to distinguish these birds from the Galline. In the case of the Tinamous, especially, the structural characteristics of the palate had led me to expect a wing-pattern of a much lower type. With the exception of Goura, already noticed, the pterographic characters of the Columb are remarkably uniform throughout. These characters are well displayed in the case of the Domestic Columba. Pigeon (fig. 17). Here it will be noticed that the proportion of feathers showing distal overlap, at the proximal end of the median coverts, remains much the same as in the Gallinz ; but that in place of the well-marked, uniform, and uninterrupted proximal overlap of 1886. ] CUBITAL COVERTS OF BIRDS. 195 the posterior, 2nd, and 3rd rows of median coverts in the distal area, which is nearly always seen in the Galline, the corresponding features of the Pigeon show a different and much more complex arrangement. In all the birds previously passed under notice (except the Birds of Paradise amongst the Passeres, and the Macro- chires) the feathers of both the middle and the distal area of the median coverts maintain a proximal imbrication from near the carpus backwards, various distances according to the zoological position of the bird under notice. In all the remaining birds, inclusive of the Columbex, the distal area of the median coverts is composed of feathers arranged in the opposite direction. It is somewhat difficult to reduce the facts to anything like an intelligible description ; but a study of the figures may help to make the mode of arrangement clear. It will be seen by this that several feathers on the distal area of each row overlap from behind forwards, or from the proximal towards the distal margin of the wing. The feature referred to can be easily studied in the case of Domestic Pigeons; although the general Columbine pattern can, perhaps, best be studied in the case of such conspicuously-marked exotic Pigeons as Columba guinea, Peristera geoffroii, Leucosarcia picata, and others commonly living in the Western Aviary. Pterocles arenarius, now (1885) living in the Western Aviary, shows an arrangement of the wing-feathers somewhat like that of the Pigeons, especially so far as the proximal and the distal areas of Péerocles. the cubital region are concerned. But the distal imbrication of all the feathers next the manual region is, in the Pterocletes, carried to excess. In this respect the Pterocletes stand as far removed from the Pigeons as these are from the Gallinze. In the stuffed specimens of Pterocles alchata in the National Collection this feature is remarkably well displayed (see fig. 18). Another point to be noticed in these birds is that the posterior row of median coverts show distal overlap throughout their entire length—an arrangement of 196 MR. J. G. GOODCHILD ON THE [Apr. 6, these feathers that is characteristic of a large number of the birds remaining to be described. Still following the plan of tracing out the various modifications of wing-pattern without reference to any other characteristics, however important, the place of the Coccyges should be somewhere near the confines of the Columbe. Carpococcys. Cuculus. : Coccystes. In passing in review a number of species belonging to the Coccyges, they seem to be naturally divisible into the Cuckoos proper, well represented by Cuculus canorus (fig. 19), and the Centropodine, represented by Carpococcyxr radiatus (tig. 20). The Cuckoos proper somewhat resemble the Pigeons, and where they differ from the Pigeons they seem to approach the Picarian birds. The Ground Cuckoos seem to make some approach to the Peristeropods; in other respects they remind one of the Musophagide. Judging from stuffed specimens alone, the wing of Opisthocomus closely resembles that of the Cuckoos. In the living Bustards, so far as I can judge, there seems again to be another variation on the general pattern of the Columbe ; but I have hitherto failed to obtain a satisfactory sketch of the wing-pattern in this bird. Of the remaining families of the Order Alectorides given in the List, I have also, so far, failed to obtain any good evidence, except in the case of the Gruidee, which will be referred to in mere detail presently. It is especially desirable to obtain good observations upon the point specially under notice in the case of the Cariamas ; but the lax texture of their wing-feathers renders any such observation a matter of considerable difficulty. So far as I ean judge at present, the style of coverts in the Cariamas agrees with that of the Bustards, and differs from that of Serpentarius. The specimens of Chauna chavaria living at the Gardens present a style of imbrication that’ seems to approach the Columbine type very closely. The disposition shown in fig. 21 is practically the same as Wolf has drawn in Ch. nigricollis (=derbiana), P, Z.S. 1864, pl. xi. Whether the feathers of the distal tract of the cubital region follow exactly the same disposition as do those of the Pigeons 1886. | CUBITAL COVERTS OF BIRDS. 197 I am at present unable to state definitely, but they appear to do so, judging from stuffed specimens. The pterographical characters of the Limicole, if we start with the Plovers as the representative of the Order, nearly approach those of the Pigeons. The principal difference lies in the fact that the proximal or backward overlap that characterizes the lowest two, or three, rows of median coverts in all the Desmognathe, and that is so nearly absent in the Pigeons, is again represented more or less perfectly in the majority of the Limicole. ‘The distal overlap of all Chauna. the feathers next the manual region of the wing, that serves to dis- tinguish the Pigeons from the Gallinw, is a well-marked and constant feature in all the Limicolz. There is one group of feathers, firm on each edge, that extends backwards from the carpal joint down to the greater wing-coverts ; on the distal side of this the median coverts all overlap towards the margin of the wings on that side, up to the alula, while on the proximal side of the same firm-edged feathers the median coverts overlap in the opposite direction as far as the point where they are met by that of the proximal area, which, again, lap forward. It is difficult to convey an exact idea of this somewhat complex arrangement except by means of a diagram, such as that of the wing of Gallinago celestis, fig. 22, p. 198, which well exemplifies the style current throughout not only all the Limicolz, but throughout nearly all birds with a Schizognathous palate. Variations of a minor character occur within the limits of this Order. Even in the case of two birds so closely related as the Common Snipe and the Woodcock (figs. 22, 23), such differences may be detected. The Snipe follows the normal Limicoline style, while that of the Woodcock more resembles aberrant forms such as @dienemus, which comes nearer to the Bustards. I was so much struck with the difference alluded to, that I sought for evidence of a deeper-seated and more reliable nature, with a view to getting further information upon this point. Such differences do exist, notably in the structure of the skull; but I have not yet had an opportunity of following 198 MR. J. G. GOODCHILD ON THE [Apr. 6, the subject far enough to speak with confidence in regard tu other differences noticed. Fig. 22. Fig. 23. Gallinago. Scolopax. From the central forms of the Limicole nearly all the modifi- cations of style observable in the Carinate could be traced without difficulty ; and the forms now remaining to be considered join on naturally enough to such types as that represented by the Plovers. In one direction, and at no remote distance from the Plovers, we come to the Rails, represented in fig. 24. In another direction, Rallus. Sterna. gradations equally gentle conduct us to the Gulls and the Terns (fig. 25). Along another line of modification we arrive at the Cranes. The Storks again stand at no great distance. Each of the forms here mentioned, in turn, leads to others more distantly removed from the central type. Beyond the Gaviz lie the Pygopods, represented by Alca (fig. 26). ‘These in turn graduate easily into the Tubinares, as represented by Puffinus and by Diomedea (fig. 27). Closely resembling these last in style of wing-coveris follows Sula (fig. 28) and Fregata (fig. 29), which lead the way to one of the extreme modifications of style observable in this particular, ex- emplified by Plotus (fig. 30). Starting from another point, the 1886. ] CUBITAL COVERTS OF BIRDS. 199 Fig. 28. Fig. 29. Plotus. 200 MR. J. G. GOODCHILD ON THE [Apr. 6, normal Ciconiine pattern, represented by that of Dissura maguari (fig. 31), leads the way through Mycteria (fig. 32), to Leptoptilus Disswra. Mycteria, (fig. 33), which, in respect of the feature under consideration, stands midway between the Ciconiine birds and the Tubinares. Between the style of the median cubital coverts in Leptoptilus and that of Fig. 33. Leptoptilus, the Cathartide (fig. 34), I have hitherto failed to detect any difference of importance in respect of the feature specially under notice. So far as the imbrication of the wing-coverts is concerned, Leptoptilus and the Cathartidee might even stand in the same family. How far the purely superficial feature at present specially under notice can be regarded as affording data of any value in corroborating the view advocated by Messrs. Garrod and Forbes that there is a close genetic affinity between the Storks and Petrels on the one hand and the Cathartidee on the other, must be left to competent zoologists to judge. After a careful examination of living specimens of Diomedea, Ossi- Sraga, Puffinus, Fregata, Leptoptilus, Cathartes, Sarcorhamphus, and 1886. ] CUBITAL COVERTS OF BIRDS. 201 Gypagus, I have been so much impressed with the uniform style - of wing-coverts prevailing amongst this group, that it seems to me difficult to believe that their genetic relationship amongst them- selves is more remote than Forbes regarded it. I cannot, after many years’ observation of the facts referred to in this paper, help re- garding this similarity of style of wing-coverts in birds so different, both in outward form and in their mode of life, as presenting us Fig. 34. Sarcorhamphus. with a certain amount of evidence of the transmitted survival, in an unmodified form, of a mode of imbrication of epidermic structures that at some remote period in the genetic history of the common Sauropsidan ancestors of these birds played some really important part in the economy of the wearer. During the differentiation of such parts of the creature’s organization as were directly affected by the struggle for existence, other parts, not so affected, either changed at a slower rate, or else were transmitted from generation to generation hardly modified at all. Habit, or mode of life, as birds now live, can at the most have played but a minor part in bringing about these diversities of style. We have but to compare the Swallows with the Swifts, the Sun-birds with the Humming-birds, and many other parallel cases, and we at once perceive that mode of life has had little or nothing to do with the origin of the features in question. The real cause lies deeper than that, and dates back far into the remote history of the Sauropsida. Reverting to the normal Ciconiine style of coverts, we find Plata/ea, with dis and its allied genera, differing but little from each other and from Ciconia. Tantalus, in this respect, stands nearer to the Limicole. The Cranes, again (fig. 35, p. 202), present another variation little removed from the central Pluvialine type. Somewhere near to the Cranes and the Storks, but connected in some way with the Gallinaceous style of coverts, stands the wing of the Secretary Bird (fig. 36, p. 202); it is quite unlike the true Accipitrine type. Proc. Zoou. Soc.— 1886, No. XIV. 14 202 ON THE CUBITAL COVERTS OF BIRDS. [Apr. 6, Lastly, come two birds whose wings I cannot refer satisfactorily to any one of the groups above described. One is the Osprey - Fig. 35. Gypogeranus, (fig. 37), whose wing seems to occupy an outlying position some- where between the style of the Pygopodes and that of the Accipitres. The other is represented by Pernis apivorus: several stuffed speci- mens of this bird showed the posterior row of cubital coverts lapping distally, somewhat as in the Ciconiine birds, and there were in addition some minor differences of less importance. Stuffed birds, at the best, afford data of a very untrustworthy character in this Fig. 37. Pandion. particular ; but on laying my difficulty before Mr. Gurney, who had some Honey-Buzzards alive, he courteously replied by sending me from the Norwich collection a skin that showed the feathers disposed as they were in his own living birds. This agreed exactly with the style observable in the stuffed birds, and differed from all the other Accipitrine birds as herein limited. Perhaps the nearest repre- sentative style is that presented by some of the Peristeropods, as, for example, Craw. In regard to any conclusions connected with taxonomy that may be drawn from a study of the facts herein referred to there will probably be much difference of opinion. The facts themselves ma be, in general, easily verified by a careful study of healthy living 1886.] DR. GUNTHER ON A VARIETY OF FELIS LEOPARDUS. 203 birds, and most of the views admit, I believe, of no reasonable doubt. There can be little doubt, also, that up to a certain point there is a remarkable correlation of particular styles of imbrication of the cubital coverts with certain structural cnaracteristics—osteological, myological, visceral, and pterographical; so that, within certain limits, the disposition of the cubital coverts may be taken as a kind of index to the presence, or the absence, of deeper-seated characters whose importance in relation to taxonomy is generally recognized. Nevertheless, until the facts here called attention to have been in- dependently considered by other observers, I feel sure that it would be premature to press the importance of the bearing that any of these may seem to me to have upon taxonomic questions: for the present it will probably be generally deemed advisable to lay more stress upon the bearing of the facts upon the correct delineation of birds for zoological purposes, than upon their value as furnishing addl- tiunal data as subordinate factors in any scheme of classification. 4. Second Note on the Melanotic Variety of the South- African Leopard. By Dr. A. Gunruer, F.Z.S, [Received March 26, 1886. ] By the last South-African mail T have received from Mr. N. Abraham, President of the Graham’s-town Natural History Society, a letter with photograph enclosed, which gives more positive infor- mation about the variety of the Leopard of the district of Albany, mentioned by Mr. Trimen in Proc. Zool. Soc. 1883, p. 535, and described by myself, ¢bid. 1885, p. 243, pl. xvi. The skin in Mr. Abraham’s possession leaves hardly any doubt that we have before us a case of incipient melanism, which, if the family in which the melanotic tendency showed itself had been left undisturbed, might have been developed into as complete a condition of melanism as is occasionally found in the Asiatic Leopard. Mr. Abraham writes as follows :— “ Graham’s-town, 8. A., March Ist, 1886. “°To Dr. A. Gunther, F.Z.S8. «Dear Str, “Knowing that you are interested in the black variety of Leopard found in the district of Albany, I write to tell you of a beautiful skin which I have in my possession and also to send you a photograph of the same. I had the flat skin photographed on purpose that I might send you a copy, as I thought a photo would convey a good description and save many words. It will, however, be necessary for me to say that the blackness of the skin is more dense than appears in the photo. The gloss upon the skin prevented the photographer from giving a true idea of the beautiful black, which is dense in many parts. ‘There are no rosettes or spots at all on the larger portion of the skin ; in this the photograph is quite correct. 14* 204 DR. GUNTHER ON A VARIETY OF FELIS LEOPARDUS. [ Apr. 6, The spots do not even show through the black as in the black Leopard of Java. ‘The tail has had its point taken off; this accounts for its shortness. “The measurements of the flat skin are as follows :—Head and Flat skin of Felis leopardus, var. melanotica, body 4 feet 1 inch; portion of tail 1 foot 4 inches; distance trom fore toes to central line of back 2 feet 3 inches. On the black portion of the skin the hair is short with a very thick underfur. The tail is not black, but very dark, and has a somewhat remarkable appearance. The markings on the front legs differ very much from the markings on the hind legs, being very tawny with 1886. ] ON OVIS HODGSONI AND OVIS VIGNEI. 205 scarcely any dense black, while the hind legs are slightly tawny with clear markings of black and white. ‘The whole skin is very handsome and remarkable. The specimen was caught by a native ina trap and then shot. The native took the tip of the tail and the claws for trophies. It was caught about twenty miles from Graham’s-town. I have made many inquiries respecting this peculiar variety with the hope of forming some good theory explaining this deviation from the ordinary type. I ean only trace four specimens, viz. :—The skin in the Graham’s-town Museum (this is a good specimen, but not nearly so black as the one in my possession); another was taken to England by Mr. Bowker, and is in the British Museum; a third was sold some time ago at a Church bazaar, but I cannot trace it; and the fourth I have. I do not know of any other for certain. All these have been shot in, or about the same district. The one I have came from Collingham near to Graham’s-town. I am told that there are two living specimens still in the district, and there may be more, but these two have been seen, but not captured. I ann still on the trail for more information ; at present I cannot give any certain or probable account of the origin of this variety, but I write this to you and shall be glad to forward you further information when I have completed my investigation. “J yemain, dear Sir, Yours sincerely, (Signed). Nenpick ABRAHAM, Pres. Graham's-town Natural History Society.” Apnil 20, 1886. Prof. Flower, LL.D., F.R.S., President, in the Chair. Mr. O, Salvin, F.R.S., exhibited a living specimen of an exotic Worm—Bipalium kewense (Moseley, Ann. & Mag. N.H. ser. 5, vol. i. p- 238), found at Hawksfold, Fernhurst, April 19, 1886, amongst the broken tiles at the bottom of a pot of Calceolaria, which had been in a cold frame the whole winter. This fact suggested that the true home of B. hewense was some temperate region. The following extract was read from a letter addressed by Mr. R. A. Sterndale, F.Z.S., to Sir Victor Brooke, concerning a case of hybridism between Ovis hodgsoni and O, vignet :— “In the mountain-range south of the Indus, near Lanskar (the precise locality being for obvious reasons withheld from publication), a herd of Ovis vignet were observed for some years to contain a large rain of Ovis hodgsoni, who drove out the weaker Shapoo rams and appropriated the ewes of the herd. The ram was ultimately, one winter, killed and eaten by Chankos or Tibetan wolves; but during his stay he produced a family of hybrids possessing greater size of horn and head, with characteristic colouring combining traits 206 MR. J. B. SUTTON ON DISEASES OF [Apr. 20, of both animals. In course of time these hybrids were crossed again with Ovis vignei, and the third generation shows signs of degene- ration from the larger sheep and of reversion to the type of O. vignei. “The skull of the half-bred animals, which the Tartars called Nyan Shapoo, the former being the name of the Ovis hodgsoni or Ammon, and the latter that of the Ovis vignei, is nearer in size to Ovis hodgsoni, which is double that of the other. The horns of these hybrids are rounded in front, resembling what has been figured of Ovis brookei, but hollowed out behind like those of O. vignei. The horns of the quarter-bred animal are square in front and hollowed behind like the true Shapoo-type, but are more massive than the pure- bred Shapoo. ** Now as regards the colour of the skin, the Nyan or Ovis hodgsoni has no black beard or throat-stripe, which O. vignet has. The half- bred animal shows no black, but the quarter-bred does in a modified but decided degree. The half-bred turns also in summer to the colour of O. hodgsoni, having more of a blue-grey or lavender tint and less of the fawn colour of O. vignei; with the white throat of O. hodgsoni, it also gets the dark patch at the side of the neck. The skin of a quarter-bred specimen before me is of a bright fawn above, sides and rump white, and a black stripe down the middle of the throat.” Sir Victor Brooke was of opinion that Ovis brookei, Ward, P. Z.S. 1874, p. 143, was probably established on a somewhat similar hybrid. The following papers were read :— 1. On some Specimens of Disease from Mammals in the Society’s Gardens. By J. Buanv Surron, F.R.C.S., Erasmus Wilson Lecturer on Pathology, Royal College of Surgeons, Lecturer and Assistant Surgeon to the Middlesex Hospital. [Received March 30, 1886.] During the past twelve months several specimens illustrating diseases of mammals in the Society’s Gardens have come to hand. Some of them present features of such exceptional interest that it is desirable they should be placed on record. Of the value of the systematic examination of the bodies of wild animals dying in the Scciety’s Gardens there can be no doubt whatever—not in the sense that it will enable us to deal with diseases occurring in them, but in the amount of light likely to accrue to pathological science in general if the investigation be carried on with the diligence and care its importance demands. The specimens to be described in this paper are of value, inasmuch as many of them are somewhat rare in 1886. ] MAMMALS IN THE SOCIETY'S GARDENS. 207 their nature, whilst others illustrate pathological conditions not before described in wild animals. In 1877 Mr. Garrod read a short paper before this Society ‘‘ On the Mechanism of the Intervertebral Substance, and on some Effects of the Erect Position of Man” (P. Z.S. 1877, p. 50) from which the following extract has been taken :— “The assumption of a vertical attitude by a creature originally differentiated for a horizontal position of its body, has produced but marvellously slight inconvenience. If it had resulted in many, man could scarcely have survived. ‘There are one or two, however, which are most clearly traceable to this cause, including the painful tendency to prolapse, antiflexion, and retroflexion of the uterus in women, as well as crural hernia in both sexes, and inguinal hernia in the male.” At the time the preceding paragraph was written, little was known, and far less recorded, concerning the abnormal conditions referred to by Mr. Garrod. The unusual opportunities which have occurred to me during the past five years of investigating diseases of wild animals will render necessary a reconsideration of this opinion. In the first place prolapse of the uterus occurs with tolerable frequency, not only in domesticated mammals, but in the lioness, tapir, Cape hunting-dog, the pygmy hog, deer, antelope, and others. These examples are sufficient to show that it is not entirely attribu- table to the erect position. With regard to flexions of the uterus, it is a remarkable fact that no fewer than one fourth of all the female Monkeys dying during the past two years presented extreme examples of this abnormal con- dition of the organ. In many the displacement far exceeded any- thing that I have seen in the human female. Well marked speci- mens of flexion of the uterus occur also in Deer. (For a detailed account of these cases and their etiology consult Path. Soc. Trans. vol. xxxvi. p. 502.) The frequency and severity of the cases show that the flexion is due to causes in addition to the erect. position. Concerning hernia, it has always seemed to me strange that Man, whose inguinal canals are, in the ordinary course of events, more or less obliterated, should be so liable to visceral protrusions at these spots, whilst Monkeys, in whom the inguinal canals in most species remain more or Jess patent, should escape. It is certain that Horses are liable to inguinal ruptures; and I have long known that the same defect occurs with tolerable frequency in Sheep. During the past two months I have been so fortunate as to meet with two cases of inguinal hernia in Monkeys. In the first, Macacus eyclopis, a large plug of omentum occupied the funicular pouch of the left side ; the second occurred on the right side in a Macacus sinicus, The details of the condition may be gathered from fig. 1, p. 208. This Monkey had also a large varicocele on the left side. These specimens are sufficient to show that such abnormalities are not peculiar to Man. Probably most individuals among the civilized races of mankind 208 MR. J. B. SUTTON ON DISEASES OF [Apr. 20, suffer at some period of their life from those troublesome thickenings of the skin of the feet and toes known as corns. Structurally a corn consists of thickening of the epidermis, due to pressure of an intermittent character, often the result of badly fitting boots. In many cases a small sac containing fluid may be detected between the thickened epidermis and the deeper tissues; this sac is techni- cally termed a bursa. In others the bursa is replaced by loose connective tissue which allows the corn to glide freely over the underlying structures. We find excellent examples of corns in the ischial callosities of the Cynomorpha and in the callous pads found on the feet of Carnivora. The right funicular pouch of peritoneum of Macacus sinicus, occupied by a plug of omentum, 0; the testis, z. Of late years the attention of surgeons has been directed to corns, in consequence of a very remarkable affection to which they are liable. Under certain abnormal conditions of the spinal cord and peripheral nerves, such as locomotor ataxy, sclerosis, and peripheral neuritis, the corus ulcerate, and at Jast the ulceration perforates not merely the corn, but the whole thickness of the foot; hence it is now familiar as the “ perforating ulcer.” It was to me a matter of no small interest to find the callous pad on the foot of a Civet Cat the seat of a perforating ulcer ; the interest was considerably heightened when, on opening the spinal 1886. ] MAMMALS IN THE SOCIETY'S GARDENS. 209 canal, the cord was found soft and almost diffluent. By careful hardening and manipulation, sections were obtained from the cord and submitted to the microscope. It exhibited a most marked degree of sclerosis. This was also seen in the nerves of the affected limb. The animal was supposed to be about seven years of age, and had been paralyzed for some time before it died. ‘The specimen was shown to a number of experts, who were unanimous as to the nature of the affection, viz. perforating ulcer, with sclerosis of the cord and nerves. I then ventured the opinion that more cases would come to hand. A few weeks later a second specimen came under my observation, also in a Civet Cat; and, lastly, a most interesting example in the Two-spotted Paradoxure (Nandinia binotata). In the case of the Paradoxure the affection of the callous pads is in an early stage, for the ulcers, one on each foot, are as yet shallow (fig.-2). "Fie. .2 . ate o 5 Perforating ulcers (wz) in an early stage affecting the feet of a Paradoxure, Nan- dinia binotata, secondary to sclerosis of the spinal cord. The ulcers were perfectly symmetrical on the fore and hind feet. F, the fore, and H, the hind foot. The most remarkable feature in the specimen is the perfect symmetry observed in the ulcers; in each fore foot the position and shape of the sores correspond exactly, and this is also to be observed in the hind feet. In this case only the lumbar and anterior portion of the spinal cord could be examined; for, after the animal died, its com- panion, much to my annoyance, had eaten the middle portion of its 210 MR. J. B. SUTTON ON DISEASES OF | [Apr. 20, back. However, an examination of such pieces of the cord as remained showed well-marked and indisputable sclerotic changes. In 1842 Sir James Paget and Dr. William Budd? almost simul- taneously directed attention to the frequent symmetry exhibited by disease of the tissues of the body.. For example, an eruption on the skin of one leg is occasionally imitated by an eruption on the opposite leg, symmetrical, not only in position, but often in the shape of the patch, in the grouping, and even in the number of spots in each group. This symmetry is not merely confined to skin eruptions, but to diseases of the joints, sense-organs, nerves, bones, tumours, &c. Examples of symmetry occur very frequently in animals as a result of disease; and the following cases will serve as striking instances. In the accompanying drawings (fig. 3) will be seen the scapula Fig. 3; Examples of symmetrical exostoses (c) in the skeleton of a Monkey, affecting the scapula, great trochanter, and coracoid process. ‘The tumours on the opposite side were exactly similar in shape and situation, and nearly equal in size. and femur of a Bonnet-Monkey that died of bronchitis complicating rickets. The inferior angle of the scapula is occupied by an osseous tumour containing tracts of cartilage: The base of the coracoid process presents a rounded projection, which would probably have grown into a tamour had the Monkey lived. The great trochanter of the femur presents also a rounded tumour similar to that of the scapula, but containing less cartilage. Each humerus presented a 1 Med.-Chir. Trans. vol. xxv. 1886. | MAMMALS IN TYE SOCIETY’S GARDENS. 219 curious deformity, for at the junction of the upper and middle third the shaft was bent almost at a right angle. The corresponding bones of the opposite side presented precisely similar lesions. The sebaceous glands of the skin very frqeuently in the human subject suffer obstruction of their excretory duct. The result is that the gland continues to secrete, but the outlet being closed, the sebaceous matter accumulates until at last a definite swelling results, which may remain of insignificant proportions, or attain a diameter of two or three inches in exceptional, cases. Technically such swellings form one of a group known as ‘‘ retention cysts.”’ The museum of the Royal College of Surgeons possesses some specimens of symmetrical sebaceous cysts growing from the wings of Wood-Pigeons. The specimens were presented by Mr. Tegetmeier. It appears that in certain seasons a large number of birds are found with swellings such as these on the wings, legs, and feet. A Cockateel, Culopsitta nove-holiandie, with’ symmetrical sebaceous cysts on its wings. An excellent example of this affection has recently come under my notice in a Cockateel, Calopsit/a nove-hollandie. In this pretty bird there has developed on the inner surface of each wing a seba- ceous cyst. The position, size, and shape of the ‘ swelling” in the two cases exactly correspond, as may be seen on reference to the drawing (fig. 4). The specimen serves as an excellent illustration of symmetrical disease. Malformations are frequently as symmetrical as tumours and skin eruptions. Mr. Forbes has recorded in the ‘ Proceedings’ of this Society (1882, p. 442) an example of webbed fingers in a Pithectu satanas. ‘The third and fourth digits of the manus on each side were completely connected down to their tips by a fold of nude skin, with their nails closely apposed, though not conneeted, along their 212 MR. J. B. SUTTON ON DISEASES OF [Apr, 20, contiguous margins; the remaining digits were normal.” [I re- member examining the specimen, at the time Mr. Forbes noticed it, in the Prosector’s room, and was impressed with the perfect sym- metry of the malformation. Since then one other example of malformation in the manus of a Monkey has occurred. A Gibbon (Hylobates leuciscus), which lived in the Gardens a few months, was found to have a supernumerary: finger on each hand. In this case the additional fingers possess a metacarpal bone which was attached to the ulnar side of the meta- carpal of the fifth digit, and it seems as though the supernumerary bone was formed as a result of bifurcation of the distal end of the fifth one. The carpal bones do not present any abnormality. So few examples of polydactyly in Quadrumana have been noticed that the case before us is worthy of record. A follicular cyst from a Prehensile-tail Porcupine, Sphingurus prehensilis. The upper figure represents the jaw after the removal of the cyst. v, the inferior dental nerve. The lower drawing is the cyst with the teeth eee ae ze y projecting into it. The arrow marks the position of the mental foramen. As an additional illustration of symmetry in disease, the following case is of value. A Prehensile-tailed Porcupine died from the effects of a large abscess on each side of the mouth, These had burst externally, giving rise to deep sinuses. A probe passed into each gave evidence of necrosed bone; and at first sight the case seemed to be one of alveolar abscess consequent upon diseased teeth, a condition of things exceedingly common in animals. On examining the mouth I failed to find the lower incisors; this was very sin- gular, because the bone at the symphysis was quite normal. On tracing one of the sinuses by dissection, it was found te lead into the mental foramen, and thence into a cavity occupying the body of 1886. } MAMMALS IN THE SOCIETY'S GARDENS. 213 the inferior maxilla. This cavity was filled with pus, but the abscess was limited by fibrous walls of considerable thickness. Feeling con- vineed that this was something more than a simple abscess, the bony walls were dissected and the sac removed and examined in detail. This cyst is represented of natural size in fig. 5. Projecting into its posterior aspect are portions of the fangs of two undeveloped teeth. This is sufficient evidence to show that we have to deal with a follicular cyst—that is, the walls of this sac are constituted by the greatly distended follicle of one of the teeth, probably the incisor. From some cause or other suppuration had occurred, and led to the necrosis of the maxilla and absorption of the fangs of the The tunica vaginalis and testis of a Lamb affected with a congenital parenchymatous hydrocele. ¢, cremaster; d, tunica albuginea; e, epididymis; ¢, secreting-tissue of the testis. molar teeth: a remnant of one may be seen projecting into the cyst. T ke inferior dental nerve, as a mere thread, was closely embedded in the walls of the jaw on the outer side of the sac. The opposite maxilla was affected in a precisely similar manner. The last example of symmetrical disease I shall describe in this communication is a singular affection of the testes of a Lamb, which, so far as my knowledge of testicular disease extends, is unique, The lamb was thought to be ruptured on both sides, but on cutting into the supposed hernial sac a large quantity of fluid escaped, but no gut or omentum were found. The remaining testis was removed entire with its coverings and sent to me. The enormously dis- t ended outer covering (fig. 6) is the tunica vaginalis and testis cut off 214 MR. J. B. SUTTON ON DISEASES OF [Apr. 20; from its connection with the peritoneal cavity. A few fibres of the eremaster muscle are spread over its upper limits. Inside this, and in close apposition with its walls, is the tunica albuginea, greatly distended, with the epididymis stretched over it like a strap. On cutting into it, a pint of straw-coloured fluid escaped. This liquid was alkaline in reaction (sp. gr. 1020), and contained one half its volume of albumen. The substance of the testicle presented a very remarkable appear- ance, for it looked like the roots of a tree in miniature. There wasa central main stem, and from it slender rounded rootlets composed of testicular substance, 7. e. seminiferous tubules and connective tissue, passed outwards to the sac-walls. ‘The appearances were the same in both testes. The condition is best expressed by saying that it resembled a hydrocele, except that the fluid was within the tunica albuginea instead of in the cavity of the tunica vaginalis. The occiput of an Ichneumon, with dislocation of the atlas and subsequent . ankylosis of that bone to the occiput. The specimen has been brought before the notice of the Society, with the hope of inducing others who have opportunities of seeing similar cases to place a description of them on record. In 1879 Prof. Flower gave an account of a very remarkable con- dition presented by the occiput of a Beluga. In this Whale the atlas had become dislocated from the occipital condyles, and dis- placed in such a manner that the passage for the spinal cord at the foramen magnum had become reduced to a very narrow chink, only three quarters of an inch in transverse measurement. The Whale had survived the accident some considerable time, for the displaced 1886. ] MAMMALS IN THE SOCIETY'S GARDENS. 215 atlas had become firmly ankylosed to the occiput, and it is very curious that the animal could have survived so serious an accident. A somewhat similar case came under observation in an Ichneu- mon. In this instance the atlas had been dislocated from its rela- tions to the occiput and axis, so as to occupy the situation shown in the accompanying drawing (fig. 7). In this instance the animal must have survived the injury a long time, because the occiput and atlas are firmly united by new bone. Concretions formed of insoluble or indigestible matters are of frequent occurrence in the alimentary canal of Horses and Cattle, and at times may attain to very large size without causing any incon- venience. This is more particularly the case when these egropiles, as they are termed, occur in the caecum of horses. In this situation they have been known to weigh more than fifty pounds. These heavier masses are composed of magnesium phosphates ; the lighter ones consist of hair which the animal licks from its body. This forin is fairly frequent in calves, and I have met with a specimen in a Hyena. Concretions of insoluble substances, such as magnesia, pins, seeds, &e., occur also in the human subject. Recently a ‘Tiger died in the Gardens, and its bowels were found empty until the rectum was reached. Here a large mass of solid material was found about two inches from the anus, measuring six inches in length and eight inches in girth, covered with mucus. The lower end was bluntly pointed, and had caused by its pressure ulceration of the mucous membrane. The rectum was much dilated. On breaking into the mass it was found to be composed entirely of sawdust, which the animal had licked from the floor of the cage. A cast of the abnormal mass was taken at the time by the assistant, Mr. Ockenden. During the past four or five years there is one fact more than any other which has impressed me in the course of my work at the Gardens, and that is the infrequency of neoplasms. In the many hundreds of animals coming under observation, a tumour has been a rarity, and this applies with still greater force to cancers. The only example of this terrible malady I have seen in wid animals was a medullary cancer in the viscera of a Python. ‘The infrequency of these growths makes the following case additionally interesting. A Short-headed Phalanger, Belideus breviceps, was found to have a large, hard nodular mass in its marsupium. On slitting open the pouch a tumour presented itself, having the appearance represented in fig. 8, p- 216. Microscopically it presented all the characters peculiar to scirrhous cancer as seen in the human subject—that is, there were alveolar spaces enclosing masses of cells. ‘The alveolar walls were composed of dense fibrous tissue. The structural details of the growth coincided with that of the gland from which it originated, except that the cells, instead of clothing the walls of the alveoli in a regular manner, were tumbled in confusion into the interior. This case is, so far as I know, the first authentic example of cancer in a marsupial. The last specimen on my list is perhaps as interesting as any. It is an intussusception of the ileum into the ceecum, through, but not 256 MR. J. B. SUTTON ON DISEASES IN MAMMALS, [Apr. 20, carrying with it, the ileo-ceecal valve (see fig. 9, p.217). The invaginated portion measures two and a half inches. The portion of gut above the constricted portion was very congested and almost gangrenous. ‘The intussusception was very acute, and probably killed the animal, a Lemur, very quickly. The case is further interesting, for the intussusception occurred at that part of the intestine which ‘ig. 8. Poo Bay GG The marsupium of a Short-headed Phalanger, Belidcus breviceps, opened in order to show a scirrhous cancer growing from the mammary gland. The microscopic characters of the growth are shown in figure B. is most frequently affected in this way in the human subject; but it is an example of the rarer form that occurs in this situation, viz: the ileo-czecal variety. The investigation into disease, structural aberrations, and mal- formations of animals is of considerable importance apart from its intrinsic interest. Darwin, in his ‘ Descent of Man,’ 2nd ed., 1874, page 6, writes :—‘* Man is liable to receive from the lower animals, and to communicate to them, certain diseases, as hydrophobia, variola, glanders, syphilis, cholera, herpes, ete. ; and this fact proves the close similarity of their tissues and blood, both in minute structure and composition, far more plainly than does their com- parison under the best microscope or by the aid of the best chemical analysis.” He then quotes Rengger to the effect that the Cebus azare in its native land is liable to catarrh, apoplexy, inflammation of the bowels, and cataract. This quotation seems to indicate beyond doubt that, had sufficient evidence been forthcoming regarding diseases of animals, Darwin 1886 .] DR. O. FINSCH ON A NEW WILD PIG. 217 would most certainly have taken them into account as arguments in favour of his doctrine of Evolution. So far as my own observations have extended, and each month adds new facts, there seem to be few forms of disease peculiar to Fig. 9. lleo-ceeal intussusception in a Lemur. ¢, colon; 7, ileum. Man. On the other hand, certain affections occur in some animals with much greater frequency than in him, whilst a few diseases are entirely confined to them; many are also modified by peculiarity in structure, mode of life, and environment of the affected animal. 2. On a new Species of Wild Pig from New Guinea. By Dr. O. Finscu, C.M.Z.S8. &c. [Received March 22, 1886.] The second species of true Sus from New Guinea is a very distinct one, and may be separated at once from the well-known Sus papuensis by the following characters :— Sus NIGER, sp. nov. Uniform blackish, even when young. These characters are suflicient, in all ages, to separate the present species from Sus papuensis, which is quite different, being in the adult brown, with a very distinet light-coloured mystacal stripe and legs, while the young is rusty brown with light rusty-yellow stripes, as in our Wild Boar. Proc. Zoo. Soc.—1886, No. XV. 15 218 MR. A. S. WOODWARD ON THE MANDIBULAR [Apr. 20) I was fortunate enough to bring home living examples of both these species, which are now deposited in the Zoological Gardens at Berlin. The specimen of Sus papuensis was obtained in the month of May, on the north coast of New Guinea, near the place noted on the charts “ Passir Point,” a point, however, which does not really exist ; it was then striped, but has now changed to the coloration of the adult animal. The Black Pig (Sus niger) I purchased at Hihiaura, a village some miles east of Bentley Bay; it was then very young (perhaps six weeks old), and of a uniform black colour, which it still retains. Sus niger is scarcer than Sus papuensis, but lives in the same localities ; it is of a more slender figure, higher on its legs and has a much longer head. It grows to a considerable size, and I have seen very huge animals of this species. I have observed Sus niger in a domesticated or semidomesticated state everywhere I have been in New Guinea along the south-east coast, and on the north-east coast from Milne Bay to Humboldt Bay, but always less common than Sus papuensis. The natives catch the young ones and feed them; they are pets of the women and often nursed at their breasts, and get very tame. This is the reason why it is so difficult to get them. I have seen some very large specimens in Hood-Bay district (village Kerapuno). Along the north-east coast I saw this species in all the native villages, especially in Chads Bay, in Village Island west of Fortification Point, in Astrolabe Bay, and in Humboldt Bay. It may be mentioned that along this coast I never saw any imported domestic pigs, but such pigs have been introduced into the Port-Moresby district and other piaces where missionaries have been sent. The only specimen of Sus niger in a Museum that I know of is a young one in the Museum of the Hon. William MacLeay of Sydney. 3. On the Relations of the Mandibular and Hyoid Arches in a Cretaceous Shark (Hybodus dubrisiensis, Mackie). By A. Smita Woopwarp, I’.G.S., of the British Museum (Natural History). (Communicated by the Secretary.) [Received March 23, 1886.] (Plate XX.) Exactly as in all other divisions of the Animal Kingdom, the rapid accumulation of morphological facts regarding the Selachian order is providing a sure basis for distinguishing the more archaic from the decidedly modern types. There can be no longer any doubt, for example, that among living Selachians the most primitive and ancient forms are the Notidanidee, the Cestraciontide, and the Chlamydoselachidee. And of all the characters by which these eroups are definitely marked off from the remaining members of the Order, none are of greater interest and importance than those relating P. Smit lth. Hanhavt imp. HYBODUS DUBRISIENSIS, Mackie 1886.] AND HYOID ARCHES IN A CRETACEOUS SHARK. 219 to the cranium and the cartilages of the visceral arches. Employing the terminology of Prof. Huxley, published in this Society’s ‘ Pro- ceedings’ for 1876 ', it may be said that the skull in each of the three families just mentioned exhibits a nearer approach to the primitive amphistylic type than does that of any other adult living vertebrate, the hyomandibular taking very little share in the support of the mandibular arch, and the union of that arch by direct articulation with the cranium being only slight and sometimes almost wanting. The superinduced modifications in the Notidanidz and Cestraciontidee are very evidently in the direction of an autostylic arrangement— the former having a postorbital articulation of the pterygo- quadrate, and the latter a more extensive preorbital connection ; and in the Chlamydoselachide there are somewhat similar tendencies, although the great extension of the pterygo-quadrate cartilage beyond the chondrocranium has apparently rendered the hyoman- dibular support of some importance. It would seem, in fact, that the oldest representatives of the Selachian order had skulls which were neither hyostylic nor autostylic, though their least altered descendants incline rather to the latter type; and that Motidanus and Cestracion especially, with Chlamydoselachus in a less degree, afford some slight glimpse into the early condition of the mandibular and hyoid arches from which the two later modifications have developed. Such being the conclusions based upon a study of living Selachians, it becomes of especial interest to determine to what extent they are confirmed or otherwise by the evidence of. fossils. The remaius of Sharks, Rays, and Chimeroids are abundantly scattered throughout most marine formations, from the Devonian to the latest Tertiary, and the biologist might thus be led to expect considerable information from this field of research. Unfortunately, however, “the imperfection of the geological record”’ presents its accustomed difficulties, and almost all the facts hitherto discovered relate merely to such hard structures as spiies and teeth. There are also a few instances in which the entire fish has been described in a general way; but Prof. Cope’s elaborate account* of some cranial fossils from the Permian of Texas appears to be the only contribution of importance that has yet been made to the morpholog of the skull. Under such circumstances, I venture to offer to the Zoological Society a brief description of a Cretaceous fossil in the British Museum, which is particularly remarkable from the simi- larity of the archaic features it presents to those of the existing types already mentioned. The fossil in question (no. 41675 of the B.M. register) was 17, H. Huxley, “On the Ceratodus forstert, with observations on the Classification of Fishes,” Proc. Zool. Soc. 1876, pp. 40-45. 2 B.D. Cope, “On the Structure of the Skull in the Elasmobranch genus Didymodus,” Proc. Amer. Phil. Soc. vol. xxi. (1884), pp. 572-590, with plate. See also further remarks by 8. Garman, “ Chlamydoselachus anguineus, Garm., a living species of Cladodont Shark,” Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard Coll vol. xii. no. 1 (1885), pp. 28, 29. ine 2 220 MR. A. S. WOODWARD ON THE MANDIBULAR [Apr. 20, obtained from the Chalk of Kent, and is in an excellent state of preservation. It agrees in all important respects with a less perfect specimen in the same collection, which forms the type of Hydbodus dubrisiensis, Mackie *—this fossil having been placed with the Hybodonts in the Museum series by Mr. William Davies, and subsequently figured by the editor of the ‘ Geologist’ under the name just quoted. And it may be added that the teeth are undis- tinguishable in general character from those of the typical species of Hyéodus of earlier date. The specimen (Plate XX.) exhibits the pterygo-quadrate and Meckelian cartilages of each side,’those on the right, however, being broken away for about the hinder third ; on the left side, the two elements of the hyoid arch are well shown in their natural position, and less complete remains of the corresponding cartilages are also seen on the right. Teeth and shagreen granules are abundant, and three well- calcified eae appear at the back. The pterygo-quadrate cartilage (figs. 1, 2, pg) measures 0°073 m. in length, and varies considerably in depth at different points. At the anterior end it is comparatively low and somewhat folded inwards above, but it soon begins to deepen by the rising of the upper border, which rapidly ascends to form a pterygo-trabecular process (p) ; this is placed at about one third of the distance from the fore to the hinder extremity. The process is almost pointed, and posteriorly the upper contour at once falls again to some extent, though soon re-ascending in the form of a gentle curve to a still higher prominence (of), which exhibits in front a very distinct, relativ ely broad articular facette. This occurs at about the end of the second third of the cartilage, and thus far the characters are shown on both the left and tight sides of the fossil; but the hindermost third is only preserved to the left. A little bey ond the summit of the facette, the upper border becomes thickened and turned outwards, and its edge torms a regular gentle curve down to the articulation of the lower jaw. The inferior border of the car- tilage is almost straight for its anterior two thirds, the dentigerous portion, and then there follows a curved hollowing ; next is a minute process, marking the commencement of the articular portion, which shows two small hollowings and a terminal convex condyle. The Meckelian cartilage, or lower jaw (mk), is preserved on both sides of the fossil, but is only perfect on the left. It measures 0:0685 m. in total length, being thus somewhat shorter than the pterygo-quadrate. The upper contour is almost straight from end to end, only a slight hollowing being perceptible immediately beyond the termination of the tooth- -bearing portion ; and this is sueceeded by a short, wavy articular edge, fitting into the corre- sponding irregularities at the hinder end of the pterygo-quadrate, and finally presenting a distinct concavity for the reception of the upper condyle. The cartilage is deepest just beneath the end of the dentigerous portion, from which point the lower border curves upwards both in front and behind ; posteriorly the curve is at first ’ 8. J. Mackie, ‘‘ On a new Species of Hybodus from the Lower Chalk,” ‘ The Geologist,’ vol. vi. (1863), pp. 241-246, pl. xiii. 1886.] AND HYOID ARCHES IN A CRETACEOUS SHARK. 221 gradual, but then very abrupt, while anteriorly the rise is much more uniform and produces a markedly tapering outline. Quite at the front, the cartilage has the appearance of being more robust than is the case further back; but this is perhaps chiefly due to the infolding of the lower edge for the production of a trough for the membrane bearing the undeveloped teeth. On comparing this form of mandibular arch with the various modifications observed among living Selachians, it is at once evident that none agrees so closely as that of the two genera of Notidanide. Heptanchus and Hexanchus', indeed, exhibit an arrangement that differs in no essential particular from that just described in the Cretaceous Hybodont. In both cases there is not only a well-developed pterygo-trabecular process—homologous (as shown by Prof. Huxley *) with the pedicle of the tadpole’s suspen- sorium,—but also a distinet postorbital prominence and articulation, corresponding to the otic process in the tadpole*. The mode of articulation of the lower jaw is also nearly identical in each case ; and though the fossil is at present much crushed, it requires very little careful study to discover that the hollows for the muscles for raising the mandible were quite as deep in the Cretaceous Shark as they are in the living genera under comparison; the upper border of the quadrate region, however, is much less thickened than in the Notidanida and agrees more closely with that of ordinary Selachians. In the hyoid arch, the upper or hyomandibular element (figs. 1, 2, hm, and fig. 4) is comparatively small and slender. Its length is 0-037 m., and the cartilage is considerably arched and flattened in what appears to have been an antero-posterior direction. The proximal extremity is imperfect, but was evidently somewhat expanded at its articulation with the cranium; this end is also slightly twisted with respect to the axis of the rest of the element. Just below the bend, the cartilage appears contracted a little when viewed from behind, but soon expands again, forming a_ blunt tuberosity (¢) on the side nearest the pterygo-quadrate ; and from this point it finally becomes gradually narrowed until its termination in the imperfectly-displayed articulation for the cerato-hyal. The cerato-hyal (figs. 1,2, ch) is 0°048 m. in length, and is com- pletely shown on the left side of the fossil, though somewhat mutilated at the distal end ; the lower part, however, is well preserved on the right. The cartilage is considerably arched in the ordinary manner, and is much less robust towards its upper eud than in the rest of its length. Compared with the hyomandibular, it is remarkably stout. A little below the proximal end it becomes comparatively large and 1 See figures by C. Gegenbaur, “ Untersuchungen zur vergleichenden Anatomie der Wirbelthiere.—U1I. Das Kopfskelet der Selachier,” pl. x. J am also indebted to the kindness of Mr. Howes and Mr. Martin Woodward for every facility for studying the beautiful preparations of Heptanchus, Cestracion, &e. in the Biological Laboratory of the Normal School of Science. 2 1. H. Huxley, loc. cit. p. 40. 8 Tt is interesting to note that Prof. Cope’s Permian Selachian skulls already referred to also exhibit this character. 222 MR. A. S. WOODWARD ON THE MANDIBULAR [Apr. 20, is much compressed from side to side, the superior edge thus formed being well marked and sharp, but the lower appearing thicker (fig. 2a). About two thirds of the distance from the upper extremity a gradual twist in the cartilage renders the remaining portion com- pressed almost from above downwards, and it ends distally in a triangular expansion, well shown on the right. The terminal edge was evidently articulated to a basihyal of considerable size, but of this no trace has been preserved. At one third of its length from the proximal end, the cerato-hyal exhibits a prominent tuberosity on the lower border (fig. 2, tu). This appears to be situated opposite a point corresponding to the attachment of the mandibulo-hyoid ligament of living Selachians’ ; but Ihave failed to discover indications of any similar prominence either in Heptanchus or the other specimens and figures to which I have been able to refer. It evidently represents a muscular insertion, and one of nosmallimportance. In Teleostean fishes, the well-developed genio-hyoideus arises from an equivalent point in the hyoid arch, and by its insertion at the symphysis acts as the main depressor of the mandible*. In the Selachii, however, the function is undertaken chiefly by the coraco-mandibulares arising from the pectoral arch, and a differentiated genio-hyoid appears to be wanting. The elabo- rate researches of Vetter ° in regard to the myology of the jaws and branchial arches in Heptanchus and Acanthias can leave no doubt that the tuberosity in question is that deep insertion of the great constrictor superficialis muscle which becomes the origin of the genio-hyoid in higher fishes ; and its marked character in the Creta- ceous Hybodont may perhaps indicate that in this form the differen- tiation had already taken place to a certain extent. On the whole, the form of hyoid arch just described bears a greater resemblance to that of the Notidanide than to that of any other living family. It agrees in the fact that the hyomandibular and cerato-hyal are most contracted at their point of union, but the elements are somewhat stouter than those both of Heptanchus and Hewxanchus. The type specimen of Hybodus dubrisiensis (B.M. 36908) is of somewhat smaller size than the fossil here described, and as its cartilages are apparently less calcified, it probably represents a younger individual. It is comparatively imperfect, and except in the characters of the teeth and the upper border of the pterygo- quadrate, it does not admit of any detailed comparison with the foregoing descriptive account. There are, however, unmistakable indications of an articular otic process, besides a well-marked pterygo- trabecular eminence ; and a small fracture shows the slight thickening of the overturned edge of the quadrate region (fig. 6). 1 W. K. Parker, ‘‘On the Structure and Development of the Skull in Sharks and Skates,” Trans. Zool. Soe. vol. x. p. 210, pl. xxxviii. fig. 2. 2 R. Owen, ‘ Anatomy of Vertebrates,’ vol. i. p. 206, fig. 135. 3 B. Vetter, “ Untersuchungen zur vergleichenden Anatomie der Kiemen- und Kiefermusculatur der Fische.—I ,” Jenaische Zeitschrift, vol. vii. (1874), pp: 403-458, pls. xiv., xv. 1886.] AND HYOID ARCHES IN A CRETACEOUS SHARK. 223 A third fossil in the National Collection (no. 49032) also belongs to the same species, and exhibits the remains of the anterior portion of what was evidently a complete fish at the time of its entombment. It agrees in size with the specimen here described, and exhibits traces of the articular facette on the otic process, in addition to part of the left cerato-hyal with its characteristic lower tuberosity. Fragments of the shoulder-girdle are also preserved, and a portion of the base of the chondrocranium; and the vertebral column is shown for a length of 0°16 m., comprising about 33 well-calcified asterospondylic centra. Unfortunately, all indications of dorsal spines are wanting. As the typical Hybodonts range throughout the whole of the Mesozoic strata, from the Muschelkalk to the Upper Cretaceous inclusive ', and as it has keen found impossible hitherto to recognize more than one generic type—Hybodus—on the evidence of spines and teeth, it would be interesting to compare the modifications in the skull of H. dubrisiensis with the corresponding structures in earlier species. As yet, however, no information in regard to these has been published, and the only deposits that have yielded satisfactory specimens are the Lower Lias of Lyme Regis and the Wealden of Pevensey Bay, Sussex. Of such fossils the British Museum contains an unrivalled series, and I hope to attempt the elucidation of the more important of these on a future occasion. It must suffice at present to add that, though there are well-preserved pterygo-quadrates from both the formations mentioned, there appears to be none but the most uncertain evidence of an articular facette on the otie process in any ; aud if this observation can be confirmed it will become of considerable interest when taken in connection with the fact, pointed out by Prof. Huxley *, that the postorbital articulation in the living Heptanchus is only acquired comparatively late in the development of the foetus. It is also inter- esting to note that one of the Liassic specimens (Brit. Mus. no. p340) exhibits traces of a persistent notochord, with the arches alone calcified, whereas in the Cretaceous form it has just been shown that there are well-differentiated ceutra. ‘ihe differences between the anterior and posterior teeth are likewise more marked in H.dubrisiensis than in any of the earlier species of which satisfactory remains are known. It would appear, indeed, that there is distinct evidence of specialization as the Hybodonts are traced through the Mesozoic period, and it is almost certain that future research in regard to structures other than teeth will lead to the subdivision of the multi- tudinous forms hitherto grouped under one generic name. ‘ Teeth indistinguishable from Hybodus, and originally described under this name, occur in the Carboniferous, but they have been proved to belong to a distinct genus, Ziristychius (T. Stock, “ On the Structure and Affinities of the genus T7ristychius, Agass.,” Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5) xii. 1883, pp. 177-190, pl. vii.). There are also other Palseozoic Hybodontide, e. g. Ctenacanthus, 2 Loc, cit. p. 44, fig. 9. 224 MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. [Apr. 20, EXPLANATION OF PLATE XX. Fig. 1. Side view of jaws of Hybodus dubrisiensis, Mackie. pg, pterygo- quadrate; mk, Meckelian cartilage; p, pterygo-trabecular process ; ot, otic process ; 2m, hyomandibular ; ch, cerato-hyal. (B.M. 41675.) Under view of the same: 7, tuberosity on cerato-hyal. 2, natural transverse section of right cerato-hyal. Teeth of the same, twice nat. size. 4, anterior tooth; 0, hinder tooth. Hyomandibular of the same, back view. 7, tuberosity. . Restoration of mandibular and hyoid arches of Hybodus dubrisiensis. . Section of the upper border of quadrate region of pterygo-quadrate of type specimen of Hybodus dubrisiensis, showing thickening. Figs. 1, 2, 4-6 are of the natural size. is i Co 4. On the Hybrid between Lagopus albus and Tetrao tetriz. By Rosert Cotuert, C.M.Z.S. [Received April 1, 1886.] (Plates XXI., XXII.) Introduction, p. 224. Young plumage, p. 251. Distribution, p. 225. Sex, p. 232. Propagation in Norway, p. 226. Supposed parentage, p. 252. Diagnosis and Configuration, p. 227. Other Hybrids of Lagopus, p, 236. Measurements of ¢ & @, p. 228. Habits, p. 238. Colouring, p. 228. , Food, p. 289. Winter plumage, p. 229. | Skeleton, p. 240. Summer plumage, p. 230. Introductory Remarks. The existence in Northern Europe of two kinds of natural hybrids amongst the Tetraonide was already known in the last century, and one form of these is rather common in the forests of Norway and Sweden, as well as in some other parts of Europe, being met with annually in many districts, where its hybrid character is, as a rule, well known tothe inhabitants. This is the “ Rakkelfugl,” the cross between the male of Tetrao tetrix aud the female of 7'etrao urogallus. The male of this hybrid, which has been known since 1744", in colour more nearly resembles the cock of Tetrao tetrix than that of Tetrao urogallus, whilst the female in this respect is less charac- teristic and resembles the hens of both species. In shape its hybrid nature is indicated by the form of the tail; in size it is intermediate between both parents, so that both sexes are larger than the father, and the male is even larger than the mother. The other hybrid, the result of a connection between Tetrao tetrix and Lagopus albus, which is called in Norway and Sweden “ Rype- Orre,” is much rarer, and specimens are still desiderata in most museums. The origin of this hybrid, its habits, and its places of resort are as yet partially, if not wholiy, obscure. Its winter plumage is the only one which is generally known, whilst the spring or summer plumage is all but unrecorded. 1 Kel. Vet.-Akad. Handl. Stockholm, 1744, p. 181. “XIMLAL OVULAL CNV SNETV SOdOSVT NAAMIAd ASNOYD CLXaAH “TX¥X Id S881 S Za ; Uy PUI if “XINLAL OVULAL GNV SAE1V SNdOOVT NAAMLAG ASNOUD CIXAAH WT Pus | dur qaeyueyy Li 1 1886. ] MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. 225 I will therefore endeavour to recount the most important features which have hitherto been noticed concerning this hybrid, which, on account of its rarity, as well as its pretty and peculiar external appearance, is well suited to attract the attention of naturalists. The earliest account of this hybrid dates from the year 1788, as Sparrman at that time gave an illustration of it and briefly men- tioned it as “ Vetrao tetriv, mas, varietas” in the third issue of the ‘Museum Carlsonianum’ (pl. 65), without, apparently, having suspected its hybrid character. In 1795 this was first noticed by Sommerfelt (‘ Topographisk Journal for Norge,’ 14 Hefte, p. 50, Christiania, 1795), who described two specimens from the districts about Mjésen in Southern Norway, which he regarded as a hybrid between Tetrao tetri« and Lagopus albus. From the description, which is comparatively detailed (see below), it is evident that the Specimens were males in winter plumage. Subsequently a male shot in Wermeland in Sweden in 1808 was mentioned and figured by Thunberg (Vet.-Akad. Handl. Stockholm, 1808, p. 195), and he also recognized its hybrid character. The first who gave a more detailed and elaborated description of it was Nilsson in his ‘ Ornithologia Suecica’ in 1817, and subsequently in his various editions of his ‘Skandinavisk Fauna.’ Since then it has been occasionally treated of' in different works on the fauna of Scandinavia, and here its winter plumage has also been given on plates, as in Nilsson, ‘ I]luminerade Figurer till Skandinavisk Fauna’ (plate 5); Lindblad, ‘Svenska Jiigareférbundets nya tidskrift,’ vol. xi. plate 4 (1873); Sundevall, ‘ Svenska Foglarna,’ plate 34 ; and Lloyd, ‘Game Birds and Wild Fowl of Sweden and Norway’ (London, 1867), &e." Distribution. The ‘‘ Rype-Orre” has hitherto only been found in Northern and North-eastern Europe, and is known from Norway, Sweden, and Northern Russia. According to a report which I have just received from Dr. Pleske (of St. Petersburg), these hybrids in Russia are not very unusual. Most of them are obtained in the game market; therefore no special information can be given concerning the localities in which they were procured. He believes that about eight specimens are at present preserved in the Museum at St. Petersburg, most of which are males in winter plumage. Dr. Meves, of Stockholm, informs me that in 1872 he saw two specimens in winter plumage in the Museum at Moscow, both males; whilst others, said to be females, were only partial albinos of the female Tetrao éetriv. Dr. Kolthoff, of Upsala, has also seen two male and one female Russian specimens. It is remarkable enough that as yet there is no proof of their occurrence in Finland ; for Mela says, “It has not been recognized ' In the ‘ Zeitschr. fir die gesammte Ornithologie, 2 Jahrg. 1885, p. 47, tab. iii. (Budapest, 1885), Herr Henke has figured and treated of a specimen from Archangel under the name of TZetrao albo-tetrix hybridus, fem. This specimen is clearly only a partial albino of 7. ¢efrix, fem. 226 MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. [Apr. 20, with certainty in our land, but it must surely be found if more care- fully sought after” (‘ Vertebrata Fennica,’ p. 164, Helsingfors, 1882). In Sweden several specimens have been captured, most of them in the northern counties (Helsingland, Jemtland, Norr- and Wester- botten), but a few as far south as Dalarne and Wermeland—as a rule amongst the mountain-ridges of the districts adjoining Norway. Dr. Kolthoft has informed me in a letter, dated Upsala, 7th March 1886, that, according to his knowledge, twelve specimens of this hybrid have been preserved in Sweden, of which the Upsala Museum possesses four (one male, three females). The Museum in Stockholm owns four, of which one is a female. Almost all were found, it may be said, accidentally, amongst the game which is forwarded during the winter from the northern counties to the towns for sale. Propagation in Norway. The first specimen preserved in any Norwegian collection was a male in winter plumage, forwarded from Rorés in 1837 to the late Prof. Esmark. Until 1870, hardly more than half dozen specimens were found or preserved in Norway, all of which were males obtained from the mountain districts in the southern part of the country (the provinces of Christianssand, Bergen, and Hamar); but during the years subsequent to 1870, 15 adilitional specimens have been obtained. Thus at least 22 specimens of this hybrid have been preserved in Norway during the last 50 years, among which only two were females. Almost all these have been obtained by the University at Christiania ; at present there are eleven specimens mounted (amongst which are the two females), one skeleton, and two skins. A few specimens have been sent abroad, and two are preserved in the museum of Bergen. Of these 22 specimens I have personally examined 13 in the flesh, having myself found some in the game- dealers’ shops, while the others have during the last few years been presented to or bought forthe museum. All the specimens were found in the southern districts of the country, with the exception of one, which was obtained in Saltdalen near Bod6, thus just within the Arctic Circle (65° N, lat.). The most southern specimen was caught in Sande, near the Christiania fjord (59° 35’ N. lat.). The greater number of the preserved specimens, both in Norway and Sweden, have been in their winter plumage. One reason for this is that the greatest capture of the Tetraonide takes place during the winter months, for during the summer they are protected by the game-laws ; and another is that the hybrids previous to the assumption of their winter plumage so nearly resemble the young males and the hens of the Tetrao tetrix that they are easily passed over unnoticed. In the winter, however, their plumage is so marked and peculiar, that this very seldom happens; but it is very probable that the greater number of individuals do not fall into the hands of naturalists, 1886. ] MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. 227 In giving the following account of the “ Rype-Orre”’ I have had an opportunity of examining, besides the Norwegian specimens, the four specimens which at present (March 1886) are preserved in the Museum at Upsala, and which, by the kindness of Prof. Tullberg and Dr. Kolthoff, have been forwarded to me for examination. Of these specimens one is a male, namely Thunberg’s individual of 1808 (see above), the other three are females. Besides these I have examined a fine male specimen in winter dress, captured in Wermeland (Sweden) in the middle of January 1886, which I found myself in the game-market at Christiania in February last. Diagnosis and Configuration. Tail slightly forked ; number of rectrices 18 ; toes semiclothed, the outermost joints bare ; claws long and broad; bill stout ; eyebrows covered with warts, and pectinated above. Colour of male in winter dress: white underneath, with black feathers on the breast and flanks; blackish above, with whitish edges on all the feathers. A white band through the eye, and a blackish beneath it. Tail-feathers black, tipped with white. The female in winter dress more or less whitish underneath ; the back, breast, and flanks (sometimes the entire lower surface) trans- versely banded with reddish brown and black, all the feathers with whitish edges. Tail black, faintly speckled with brown and whitish. Bill rather like that of Tetrao tetrix, strongly built, but the culmen is not so plainly ridged as in that species; its size in the male is nearly double of that of Lagopus albus. The side branch of the mandible strongly developed. Eyebrows covered with numerous small red warts, and with a fine- toothed ridge above. The height of the eyebrows is about half the diameter of the eye; the comb in winter specimens is not very high. Pe linis shaped like those of Lagopus, long and broad, and very slightly oblique, the inner edge being a trifle broader than the outer. They are less curved than in 7’. tetrix, and their colour is not so dark as in that species. Toes semiclothed with hair-like feathers, densely in winter; the innermost joint entirely feathered, the middle one naked above, but clothed on the sides, the outermost quite bare. The bare portions covered with horny rings, on the sides with one or two series of rounded scales ; under these there is a toothed comb (as in Teérao, unlike Lagopus). Hind toe short, as in Lagopus (proportionally much longer in Tetrao). Tail slightly forked, the outermost feathers very slightly bent outwards at the end, and (in the male) 12 to 24 millim. longer than the centralones. Its length is proportionally longer than in 7’. ¢etriz, and more like that of Lagopus. Under tail-coverts slightly shorter than the central rectrices (or 228 MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. [Apr. 20, about one diameter of the eye). In Lagopus they are still shorter, or one diameter and a half, in 7’. ¢e¢riv one or two diameters longer than the central rectrices. Male and Female.—Besides the markings and size the following differences occur between the two sexes—the tail of the female is nearly square, the side branches of the upper mandible are more developed, and the comb-like scales of the toes and the ridge of the eyebrows are considerably longer in the male than in the female. Measurements. Male. Total Win Outer tail- Centre tail- length 8- feather. feather. mm, mm. mm, mm. 1p: YAU) 242 142 122 Gudbrandsdalen, 7 Dec. 1870. 2.... 480 238 147 117 Saltdalen, Nordland, 30 Dee. 1871. Dinca i 237 138 106 Gudbrandsdalen, 8 Oct. 1872. 4.... 508 255 142 125 Osterdalen, 5 Noy. 1872. 5.... 480 252 140 ? Gudbrandsdalen, (?) Noy. 1872. 6.... 499 245 ? 130 Gudbrandsdalen, 28 Feb. 1873. (Ope )e 282 146 124 Hadeland, 27 Dec. 1879. 8.... 480 235 135 115 Tolgen, 3 Nov. 1881. 9..... 486 235 140 118 Sande Prgd, 9 Noy. 1881. 10s... i680 235 150 125 Réros, 10 Oct. 1882. Female. 11.... 4238 205 127 97 Gudbrandsdalen, Jan. 1875. 12.... 425 205 118 100 Roros, 7 Oct. 1876. It will be seen from these measurements that the male has an average length of 490 millim., about equal to that of the female Z’etrao tetri« (but with slightly longer outer tail-feathers). ‘The total length of the female is about 424 millim., being thus considerably less than the male; it is, however, somewhat larger than the male Lagopus albus. Colouring. Of the fourteen specimens of this hybrid at present preserved in the Museum at Christiania, one is a young bird of the year, on which the brown plumage almost entirely remains; four are young birds changing to winter plumage, the latter being predominant ; finally, are eight in full winter plumage, and amongst these are two females. Besides these there is one specimen (a male in winter plumage) exhibited as a skeleton. In winter plumage are also the specimens in the Bergen and Upsala Museums. The specimens at Stockholm are likewise, so far as is known, in winter plumage, or in the changing from autumn to winter. A long link in the series is entirely wanting in all these collections, namely—the spring plumage, which is probably unknown ; the summer plumage, which is in all cases known from 1886. | MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE, 229 the description of a single specimen in an old treatise (see below) ; and finally the young in down, which is also unknown’. Winter Plumage. The winter plumage develops itself in Norway during October, and as a rule is completed by the latter half of the month. Whilst one or two of the males had not moulted the last autumnal feathers in the beginning of November, one of the females was in full winter plumage on the 7th of October. This, however, was not an accidental circumstance, but has its analogy in Lagopus albus, in which the change to winter plumage takes place more rapidly in the females, although they begin to change later than the males. The tarsus and toes are then fully clothed, and the naked outer half of the toes is completely hidden by the overlying hair-hke feathers. The male in winter (Plate XXI. fig. 1) has the upper parts black with greyish-white, finely freckled edges to the feathers; the under surface is white, with an irregular black patch on the breast which may be of greater or less extent, occasionally parted in the middle, or so small that there only remain a few black feathers. On the flanks a few black feathers are always present, but sometimes hidden by the white ones. The wing-coverts are chiefly white, speckled with brown. The wing-feathers are brownish black, finely speckled with grey ; the outer web of the primariesis white. A more or less conspicuous white band passes through the eye, and under this a similar black one (including in most cases, but not always, the chin), with narrow white edges-to the feathers. The upper tail-coverts are black with broad white edges; under tail-coverts white. The tail- feathers are black with narrow white tips, which almost disappear on the cutermost ones. The front of the tarsus is greyish. The eyebrows are bright red; their height 11 millim., of which the upper toothed ridge is 43 millim. Although the winter garb is remarkably similar in its general appearance in the different individuals, a slight variation in some details will always be found. In some the unspotted white parts are more extended than in others, while in others the black feathers are predominant on the flanks and abdomen. One of the specimens in the University Museum (Nov. 1881) was unusually dark, with a very large patch on its breast, nearly black scapulars, and numerous black feathers on the abdomen. The female in winter (Plate XXI. fig. 2) has the upper parts banded with black and yellowish brown, and whitish freckled edges to the feathers. The ground-colouring of the lower parts is white, each feather blackish at base ; the breast and flanks barred with yel- lowish brown and black, and edged with white, The wing-coverts are speckled with white, greyish brown, and rusty yellow; the wing- ‘A more detailed account of the different plumages I have given in ‘ Videnskabs-Selskabets Forhandlinger, Christiania,’ 1872 (p. 238); and ‘ Nyt Magazin for Naturvidenskaberne,’ vol. xxiii, 1877, p. 159, and vol. xxvi. 1881, p. 324. 230 MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. [Apr. 20, feathers are brownish black, finely speckled with grey. A whitish stripe passes through the eye, under this a brown one. The upper tail-coverts irregularly barred with black, greyish brown, and yellowish brown, with broad white edges. The under tail-coverts white, sometimes a few feathers banded with rusty. The tail-feathers are black, with the outer web speckled brownish grey or whitish, and white-tipped; the centre pair entirely mottled. The front of the tarsus as in the male. Thus in winter plumage there exists this difference between the sexes, that those parts which in the male are black with white edgings to the feathers, are more or less mottled brown in the female, and instead of the male’s black spot on the breast the female has the breast barred with yellowish brown. Of the three females from Sweden which at present,are preserved in the Upsala Museum, two (Jemtland, Feb. 1886 ; Angermanland, Jan. 1861) are normal, and on the whole similar to the before-mentioned Norwegian specimens. The last is, however, rather light-coloured: thus the barred feathers on the flanks are quite covered with white ones, so that these portions seem to be unspotted ; the thrvat likewise is snowy white. Both are young individuals; this is seen by their slender and unworn beaks. The third female (Jemtland, January 1885) was somewhat different, and very dark in colour, without any part of its abdomen being entirely white. This was an old bird, the beak coarse and well-worn on the edges and point. The ovary was (according to Dr. Kolthoff) plainly visible. On the rump several well-worn autumnal feathers with brown cross lines remained amongst the white winter feathers. Its essential peculiarities were as follows :— On the upper parts, wings, and tail normal, though intermingled with a somewhat stronger reddish-brown colour. The whole of the lower half from the beak to the rump evenly furnished with broad brown and black cross bands; a few feathers quite white, others had white edges. In other respects like the former ones. Size normal. Although this specimen was decidedly more darkly coloured under- neath than the others, its general characteristics in markings and shape were otherwise quite in conformity with them. Summer Plumage. The period in the spring at which the individuals begin to change their winter plumage is unknown. All the specimens which I have examined were captured in the months October to February ; and on a specimen in the Museum at Bergen, shot in Voss (Bergen Stift) ahout the 1st March 1868, there is yet no trace of spring plumage visible. Whilst the spring plumage of the Rype-Orre is as yet unknown, there exists one account of a specimen in its summer garb. In 1823 Mr. Sommerfelt, jun.', in ‘ Magazin for Naturvidenskaberne,’ 1 A son of the Mr. Sommerfelt who is mentioned above (p. 225) as haying for the first time brought to notice its hybrid character. 8 a eeEEe————E———S se 1886. | MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. 231 1 Aarg. 2 B. p. 71 (Christiania, 1823), described a specimen in summer plumage which he obtained from Thoten (near the lake Mjésen in Norway). From the size of this specimen it appears to have been amale. The statement is as follows :— (Male? in summer (July)). ‘‘ Caput, collum, dorsum, pectus Tetraonis tetricis famine. Remiges primores et secundarie albe, plurium tectricum alba. Rhachis remigis 1™° fusca. — Rectrices nigre apicibus albis, duabus mediis nigris ferrugineo-undulatis ea- ceptis. Cauda non forficata. Abdomen et femora ut in T. tetrice feemina, modo pennis singulis albis ornata. Digiti sublanati. Mag- nitudo T'. tetricis femine.” The colouring of the summer plumage thus generally resembles that of the Greyhen, but is distinguished by a few white feathers on the abdomen. The tail-feathers also differ from the winter garb in that the central pair are transversely banded with brown, Au inaccuracy has probably been made in describing the wings as white instead of “ whitish,” as in summer it is not likely that the white colour would be more extended than in winter; (and the description “ digiti sublanati”” contradicts the possibility of the specimen being a partial albino of the female Tetrao éetriz). Young Plumage. The plumage of the young is, as one might expect, mottled brown like both parents, but the upper parts remind one more of Lagopus albus, the lower parts of Tetrao tetriv. I found a single spe- cimen, a male, in this garb amongst a parcel of game from Oster- dalen (South-eastern Norway) in the autumn of 1880 ; it had been probably shot or captured at the end of September. The plamage of the young on the whole is still retained, but a few winter feathers have already appeared amougst the brown ; the wings and the outer tail-feathers are also new, and belong to the winter plumage, and thus present a striking contrast to the other mottled brown feathers. Young male in autumn (Plate XXII. fig. 1).—The upper parts mottled and banded by rusty yellow and black, almost the same as in the young of Lagopus albus, the cross bands being narrower and closer than in the young of Zetrao tetriv. In the longer wing- coverts there is a discernible light elongated patch along the quills. The tail-feathers, as in Lagopus albus, jun., are transversely banded with black and reddish brown. On its lower parts the breast and sides, as in the young of the Tetrao ietriz, are closely and evenly banded with black and rusty yellow, and both colours are about the same extent. In this respect they more nearly approach the last species than Lagopus albus, as the young birds of Willow-Grouse have the rusty brown colour much more developed (so that the breast can be said to be a rusty yellow with irregular black patches or broken cross bands). The under tail-coverts are barred by greyish white and brown as in Jetrao tetriv. The throat is barred, but not so manifestly as the breast. 232 MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. [Apr. 20. The covering of the feet is still thin and incomplete, and the hair- like feathers have only appeared on the innermost toe-joint ; the claws are brown horn-colour, resembling those of the Blackgame, but their form is more like those of the Willow-Grouse. The change of the young to winter plumage (Pl. XXII. fig. 2) proceeds in about the same manner as in the Willow-Grouse; and, analogously with what takes place in them, the first plumage has not always time for development all over before it is dislodged by the winter garb. Asalready mentioned, the remiges with their longer coverts, the abdomen, and after them the tail-feathers, are the first parts which moult into the winter garb. In the beginning of October the young plumage of the male is half lost, and the winter plumage completed on the tail and belly, and partially on the back, whilst the head, neck, and upper breast are still mottled brown ; one or two brown autumnal feathers are also long retained on the flanks. The covering of the toes is still seanty. The Christiania Museum possesses several such specimens. Sez. As previously mentioned, amongst the twenty-two known specimens from Norway there are but two females. This may partly be for the reason that the hens even in winter plumage have on the whole a less attractive plumage than the males, and therefore might be more easily overlooked, or pass for a white-speckled Greyhen. But the main cause may probably be a different one. It is a well-known fact, confirmed by a majority of instances, that amongst hybrids an unusually large percentage of males are produced. If compared with the other aid better known hybrid of the Tetraonidee, the “ Rakkel- fugl” (Tetrao tetriv male + Tetrao urogallus female), it will appear that there are perhaps ten males to one female. However, it must be remembered that the female Rakkelfugl is even to a greater extent more likely to be overlooked than the hen of the Rype-Orre, as it exactly resembles a small female Tetrao urogallus, so that this proportion cannot be computed with accu- racy. = all the males dissected (in winter) the ¢estes have been found to be small, although not rudimentary or abnormally formed. Their colour was greyish white; the left was generally larger than the right, and measured in one specimen 5 millim. in length, the breadth about 3 millim. In another, and this towards the spring (28th February), they were unusually small, barely 2 millim. long. In the hens, which were also shot in winter, the ovary was visible on the left side like asmall whitish patch; the eggs were hardly discernible. Supposed Parentage. Which species contributes the father and which the mother to this peculiar hybrid is as yet unknown. Only exceptionally has it fallen to the lot of an intelligent sportsman to see it in its living state, and then only for the few seconds in which it rises, to fall 1886. | MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. 233 again to his gun. The knowledge of its life and habits therefore amounts to almost nothing, and no observations have been made in Norway which can give any information concerning its origin. The existence of this hybrid arises from the fact that both parents not unfrequently inhabit the same localities. Thus Tetrao tetrix in the southern valleys of the land, where most of these hybrids are met with, regularly ascends to the elevated birch-forests on the mountains, and establishes itself in the regions where Lagopus albus has its proper home. On the other hand, but more rarely, Lagopus albus descends and breeds in the upper portions of the conifer-woods, where the other species is still to be met with in numbers. In the northern portions of the country, however, where both species live almost at the same elevation above the sea, and still more commonly share the same place of residence, the T'etrao tetrix on the whole appears in much lesser numbers than the other species, and the hybrids are here apparently more rare. It is not easy to understand the true reason for the pairing between two species so different in their habits, appearance, and nature. One of the specimens obtained in Norway was shot at a place (Saltdalen in Nordland) where no want of mates of either species could be observed in the neighbourhood. Connections of this kind are repugnant to nature, and in many cases the only feasible explanation is to be found in imagining a violent and irresistible desire to breed out of the species. Concerning the question of the origin, it is first of all necessary to find out whether one or two sorts of such hybrids exist—the one bred between the male Lagopus albus and female Tetrao tetriz, the other between the male Zetrao tetriv and female Lagopus albus’. But as it is an established fact that all individuals hitherto found (with us) of the Rype-Orre, if obtained at the same season of the year, are on the whole singularly alike both in size and the colouring of their plumage, their origin cannot be ascribed to more than one of the two possible connections. When Prof. Nilsson in 1817, in his ‘ Ornithologia Suecica,’ treated of its descent for the first time, he mentions it (p. 303) as “ Hybridus a Tetrice patre et Tetr. subalpino femina”*. This assumption that it is the male of Zetrao tetrix which has formed an illegitimate connection with the female of Lagopus albus (as it is also the Blackcock that with the female of Yetrao urogallus produces the ‘‘ Rakkelfugl”), has always been and is still gene- rally accepted by most naturalists. Upon this theory it has received the names:—Tetrao lagopoides, Nilss. Skand. Fauna, Ist ed. (1828), and T'etrao lagopides, 2nd ed. (1855); Y'etrao lagopodite- tricides, Sundey. Svenska Fog]. p. 255 (186—?), (being the descendant of Tetrao tetrix, mas, it had to bear its generic name) ; and, finally, 1 A hybrid between Lagopus mutus and Tetrao tetrix is rather improbable, on account of the very different haunts of these species. 2 “ Qui vero videt (illas) varictates, non diutius dubitare potest de libidine Tetricis ad furtivos amores cum congeneribus instituendos semper paratissima,’’ (Nilss. 2. c.) Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XVI. 16 234 MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. [Apr. 20, Lagopotetrix lagopoides, Malm, (fv. Kgl. Vet.-Akad. Forh. 1880, . 30. : In opposition to this assumption respecting its paternity, in 1872, in a treatise “‘ Remarks onthe Ornithology of Northern Norway ”’ (Forhand].Vidensk. Selskabet i Christiania, 1572, p. 238), I advanced the opinion that the Rype-Orre was an offspring of the male Lagopus albus and female Tetrao tetrix, a theory which, singularly enough (although without any proof), was started by Sommerfelt so early as 1823 in his descriptions of the specimen in summer plumage! (cf. above). Insupport of this theory I certainly could not produce direct observations or positive proofs, but I stated some circum- stances which, according to my views, caused the descent from the male Lagopus albus to be more probable than from that of the Blackcock. In conclusion, I expressed the hope that intelligent sportsmen or naturalists might soon be fortunate enough to insti- tute observations by which this question might be clearly solved. Although this was written fourteen years ago, nothing has as yet appeared in northern literature to throw a light on the subject. I shall not here set forth at length the reasons which caused me to advance this hypothesis ; they will be found given in Dresser’s ‘ History of the Birds of Europe,’ vol. vii. p. 213. They are chiefly derived from a comparison with the second and _ better-known hybrid, the “ Rakkelfugl,’”’ concerning which it is an undoubted fact that it is descended from the male Yetrao ¢etrix and the female Letraourogallus. In this case, too, the father belongs to the smaller, the mother to the larger species; and the offspring is a hybrid in which the male is of about the same size as its mother. It is also a well-known fact that the male Willow Grouse is often found in the breeding-haunts of the Tetrao tetriv, and undoubtedly frequents them more often than is generally known. Every sports- man is aware that amongst the Willow-Grouse (and the Ptarmigan) an excess of males is to be met with, which throughout the summer ramble about on the mountains, and these are probably willing to form connections whenever an opportunity offers. My friend Prof. Friis has witnessed a remarkable proof of the eagerness of the male Willow-Grouse’s desire to mate. In the spring of 1857 he observed at one of the most elevated farms in Nordmdre (Bergen stift) a male Willow-Grouse which for several succeeding days kept near the house and endeavoured to form a connection with a white speckled domestic hen. Finally it is worth recording that two young male Rype-Orre, shot in October 1845, in Hedemora, Sweden, were accompanied by a female bird, apparently their mother, which was supposed to be a Greyhen*. This observation would have been of great weight in 1 “Af denne Slegts (Zetrao) hybride Yngel forekom mig paa Toten i Juli Maaneds Begyndelse folgende, som sygnes at vere en Affodning of Aarhénen og Rype-Hannen ” [| From the hybrid brood of this genus I obtained the following in the beginning of July, which appears to be an offspring of the Greyhen and the male Willow-Grouse] (Nyt Mag. f. Natury. Ist ser. vol. ii. Christiania, 1823, p- 71). 2 Cify. Kgl. Vet.-Akad. Forh. 1847, p. 201. 1886.] MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. 235 supporting the theory, if it had only been clearly proved, as probably the young hybrids continue to follow their mother for long. I again remark that for the theory of parentage here advanced there is indeed no positive proof, and that it is an hypothesis which may be wrong, but that it appears to me to have at least as much reason in it as the older one (which is also without proof) of the descent from the male Blackcock. On the whole it is remarkable enough that up to the present not one direct observation has been made (such as an observation of the two species in copuld in their wild state, or of the two species pairing in captivity), That such observations will not be wanting hereafter, is a matter of course. I have just received a fresh contribution to this question in a letter from Dr. Pleske, dated St. Petersburg, 16th March, 1886, in which he directs my attention to a communication from Mr. A. Rasin in ‘Journal fiir Jagd und Pferdezucht’ (‘Journal Ochoty i Konnosa- wodstwa), 1869, pp. 340-341, with the title “ Kine Siindenfall des Schneehuhnes.” From this it would appear to be proved that the Tetrao tetrix is the father, Lagopus albus the mother. This report, the original of which I cannot peruse, is referred to in the following terms by Dr. Pleske :— ‘‘Im Kreise Nowgorod, auf dem sogenannten Konewschen Moos- moraste, wurde eine Kette Hiihner gefunden, die von einem 9 des Lagopus albus, welches erlegt wurde, geftihrt wurde. Von den zwei erbeuteten Jungen hatte beide einen vollstandigen Habitus junger Birkhiihner, waren auch grosser als die Mutter, und unterschieden sich von echten Birkhiihnern nur dadurch, dass beim einen 4 Steuer- federn und zwei Schwungfedern des rechten Fliigels weiss waren, beim anderen der linke Fliigel vollstindig wie bei Lagopus albus gezeichnet war, nicht allein in Betriff der weissen Schwungfedern, sondern auch der rostrothen Deckfedern.” If the original commu- nication gives no further information upon the subject than the words cited above, no proof is given, in my opinion, that these two specimens were really hybrids. In the first place there is no description of the covering of the toes, which is the only feature in its diagnosis that is reliable at every age and in every plumage ; and, secondly, the true Rype-Orre has never, so far as I am aware, been known to have white feathers in the wing (even the young Lagopus albus, before they assume their autumn dress, have brown wing-feathers), and it is still less likely to have them on the tail. The fact that the two young specimens were not even similarly coloured, speaks also for the probability of their being only partial albinos of 7’ ¢etriv, which in so many instances have been and still are taken for the Rype-Orre. It may be open to question whether, upon the whole, it is necessary to designate a hybrid by a scientific appellation, even if, like those of the Tetraonids, it arises spontaneously, and, as it were, normally. The “ Rakkelfugl” has, as is known, received from Nilsson the name Tetrao urogalloides (1828) or urogallides (1835), which was altered by Sundevall to Tetrao urogallo-tetricides (186—"), and by me to Tetrao urogallo-tetrix (1872). In accordance with this, as I have 16* 236 MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. [Apr. 20, pointed out in my previously mentioned article of 1872, the “ Rype- Orre” should receive the name of Lagopus tetrici-albus, assuming that the descent is as above supposed. Other Hybrids of the Genus Lagopus. 1. Lagopus scoticus and Tetrao tetrix.—In the spring of 1877 I had the opportunity of examining a specimen in Mr. Dresser’s collection in London which was considered to be a hybrid between Tetrao tetrix and Lagopus scoticus. This specimen was a male, shot in Scotland on the 12th of September, 1876. Its hybrid nature was discernible at first glance from the formation of the tail and the covering of the toes, which were exactly like the northern ‘Rype-Orre.” The colour was brownish black, the back was finely mottled with brown on an almost black ground; the breast was black, the head and throat black with fine brown spots ; the abdomen had reddish-brown cross lines, the lower tail-coverts white edges, as also had several of the feathers on the sides of the rump. In conformity with the name which above is given to the North- European Rype-Orre, the Scotch specimen, provided the mother in both instances is Tetrao tetriz, has been named Lagopus tetrici-scoticus (Nyt Magazin for Naturv., Christiania, 1877, vol. xxiii. p- 163). Another specimen of the same hybrid, also a male, was described by Malm, from Gothenburg, in Sweden. This was found in December 1877, at a spot where Lagopus scoticus had been introduced in 1861 and 1862 (ify. Kgl. Vetensk.-Akad. Forh. 1880, p. 17). This bird was called by Malm Lagopotetria dicksonit. 2. Lagopus albus and Lagopus mutus.—As in the previous notes it has been supposed possible that the male Lagopus albus may be as desirous of forming an illegitimate connection as the male Tetrao tetrix, I shall touch upon another question affecting the same subject. It has probably appeared to be strange that, notwithstanding that Lagopus albus and Lagopus mutus often appear in considerable numbers in the same districts in Northern Europe, and generally share each other’s haunts, no evidence of across between them, so far as is known, has ever appeared. It is not probable that the cause of this should have its origin in a true repugnance in the two closely- allied species to form hybrids. Probably these hybrids are less rare than one imagines, as it requires an accustomed eye to discern them in the multitudinous garbs in which these two species appear from spring-time until the approach of winter. Even I myself have but once found one, which is now mounted in the University Museum at Christiania. It was shot at Roros in the middle of September 1883. This specimen is an old male in autumnal plumage, and is thus at a stage when the contrast between the plumage of the two parents is most marked and striking. At this time the old Lagopus mutus obtains its peculiar bluish-grey autumnal dress, in which each feather on a light ashy-grey ground is finely freckled with black, without forming distinct cross lines, whilst in Lagopus albus each feather has reddish-brown spots and cross lines on a black 1886. ] MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. 237 ground. In the hybrid specimen the colour and markings of the feathers are a complete mixture of the two species. The upper plumage most resembles Lagopus mutus, as the feathers there and on the flanks are finely speckled with black, but on a somewhat reddish ground, though this is not of so strong a colour as in Lagopus albus. The pattern on the feathers is almost similar to Lagopus mutus, and the long feathers on the flanks and the upper tail-coverts, which are wanting in distinct cross lines, especially differ from the corre- sponding parts of Lagopus albus. One or two feathers, however, resemble the last species. The cross bands on the head are also much the same as in Lagopus mutus, and thus more dense than in L. albus, but rather indistinct and irregular. The lores are speckled with traces of the black colour which is peculiar to Lagopus mutus. The under-plumage is borrowed most from Lagopus albus, especially in colour. The feathers are transversely barred as in Lagopus mutus, but the colour is red, almost similar to that of Lagopus albus. The fine cross lines are particularly sharply defined and numerous from the bill to the vent, an unknown feature in Lagopus albus. This hybrid has, on the whole, adopted the pattern of its feathers from Lagopus mutus, and the colouring (especially underneath) from Lagopus albus. The bill in size was intermediate. It is naturally impossible to state which of the two species supplies the father and which the mother. 3. Bonasa bonasia and Lagopus albus,—Amongst the specimens belonging to the Upsala Museum sent to me for examination there was a fifth specimen which appeared to be an example of quite a new combination. It was stated by Dr. Kolthoff to have been captured in Jemtland (Sweden) in November or December 1884. The covering of the toes is just the same as that of the normal Rype-Orre. The colour is lighter than any of them, the whole upper parts, and especially the tail-coverts, having broad white (not whitish) edges. The inner hidden parts of the back-feathers are particularly dark and somewhat mixed with brown. The tail-feathcers, especially at the root, are much mottled with whitish grey, and the outer feathers edged with white on their inner halves. The underside is white, with the throat biack, and with dark-coloured but not cross-lined feathers on the flanks hidden under the white. The head is unusually white, with small dark edgings on the feathers of the forehead, and greyish ear-coverts. The inner half of the under tail-coverts is blackish. Although the specimen was a male bird with well-defined testes, its size was even less than a female Rype-Urre (wing 181 millim.), and was about the same size as Lagopus albus. It is therefore impossible that this specimen could have been the produce of a cross between Willow-Grouse and Blackcock, Neither is its tail forked, but somewhat rounded (the outer tail-feathers 115 millim., the centre ones 118 millim.) and contains but 16 feathers. It is therefore more reasonable to suppose this individual to be a cross between Bonasa bonasia and Lagopus albus, even if one must 238 MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. [Apr. 20, recognize the fact that these two species but seldom meet; but such is by no means an impossibility. 4, Lagopus scoticus and Lagopus mutus—A supposed hybrid between the Red Grouse and the Ptarmigan was exhibited at the meeting of this Society, November 5, 1878, by Prof. Newton. The bird was shot in September, 1878, in Sutherland. ‘‘As will be seen, it bears some considerable resemblance, above, to a hen Ptar- migan in summer plumage; but its general appearance is much darker. Beneath, there is a greater resemblance to the young of the Red Grouse; and the primaries are much as in that bird, being, however, partially edged with white to a much greater extent than is commonly found in the latter.” (Proc. Zool. Soc. 1878, p. 793.) Habits. Concerning the habits of the Rype-Orre very little is known. Almost all the specimens which hitherto have been discovered have been brought to the towns with other game snared or shot in the autumn or winter by peasants, without attracting any notice. The peasants themselves, as a rule, regard them as a peculiar kind of Willow-Grouse. In the following instances only have I heard of its being shot by true sportsmen who well knew what it was they had brought down. On the 30th of November, 1871, a male bird was shot by my friend Herr Berbom, Inspector of Forests, in Saltdalen (within the Arctic Circle), the most northern spot in which this hybrid is known. The locality was a low hill covered with birch-woods, some tarns and marshes ; it was occupied by both Blackgame and Willow- Grouse. Mr. Berbom has just informed me, in reply to my in- quiries, that this specimen appeared to be solitary, keeping company with neither one nor the other species. The other case does not either throw any particular light on its habits. On the 7th of October, 1876, another friend, Engineer Oxaal, while shooting ‘‘ Li-Rype” (Willow-Grouse) at Réros, shot one (a female) in the usual haunts of the “ Rype,” about 2700 to 3000 feet above the sea. It was on the ground, and ran forward from behind a tuft of grass after the dog had pointed. It was therefore shot whilst running, and in this respect it appeared to Mr. Oxaal to differ from a Willow-Grouse, which at such a time would in all probability not have exposed itself. It was alone, and no Willow- Grouse or Blackgame were met with in the neighbourhood. Not- withstanding that the season was but little advanced, this bird had completely adopted its winter dress, and scarcely a feather remained of its summer plumage. An older account from Sweden gives a little more information concerning its habits. In October 1846 two young birds were shot in Dalarne which were accompanied by a hen, supposed to be their mother, and which appeared to be a female Zeérao tetriz. On this occasion one of the two young birds perched in the trees (unlike a Willow-Grouse, but like a Blackeock), They had a harsh cackling 1886. ] MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. 239 ery, “which resembled that of the Capercailzie.”’ (Levin, Gfv. Kgl. Vet.-Akad. Forh. Stockholm, 1847, p. 201.) Most of the specimens which have come into my hands in a fresh state had no gun-shot wounds, and probably had been snared ; but whether these were taken in snares together with Rype in districts frequented by the latter, namely in the regio alpina (the upper limits of the birch-region on the mountains), or with Tetrao urogallus and 7’. tetriz in the forest-regions, cannot be stated with any certainty. If remains of their food are examined it will probably be found that they more usually share the quarters of the Willow-Grouse than those of the other species. One of the specimens sent to the University Museum (from Sande Sogn, Nov. 9, 1881) was shot not far from the Christiania Fjord, in a district where the Lagopus albus certainly breeds, but in very few numbers, and this is hardly an annual occurrence, the locality being comparatively low. The sender of this bird, who regularly received game from that place, deemed it certain that it had been captured along with Blackgame, as it was forwarded to him in a bunch of these birds, and he never received Willow-Grouse from there. Food. In some of the individuals opened by me the food was still partially or wholly entire, and consisted of the following :— 1. Male, Dec. 7, 1870: a number of fragments of a Salix (15 millim. in length), fragments and numerous berries of Myrtillus nigra, tops of Calluna vulgaris (about 30 millim. in length), and a few leaves of Arctostaphylos alpina. 2. Male, Dec. 6, 1872: tops and seeds of Carex stellulata, a few berries of Oxycoccus palustris and Juniperus communis, some of the latter in an unripe state. 3. Male, Feb. 28, 1873: leaves of Vaccinium vitis idea, fragments and buds of a Salix and of Myrtillus nigra. 4. Female, Jan. 1875: a number of ripe and unripe berries of Juniperus, also a number of the peculiar bunchy leaves of that bush, in which Cecidomyia juniperina had formed their capsules; a large number of stalks of the Myrtillus nigra (about 12 millim. in length), some leaves of Vaccinium vitis idea, some old female and many young male catkins of Betula glutinosa (the mountain form, alpigena), and, lastly, the twigs of a haired Salix (S. glauca 2). 5. Female, Oct. 7, 1876: some berries of Empetrum nigrum, also stalks of Myrtillus nigra. 6. Male, Dec. 27, 1879: leaves and berries of Ozycoccus palustris. 7. Young male, autumn, 1880: berries of Ovycoccus palustris, also the top of a Carex. From these examples it will be seen that this hybrid both in winter and summer derives nourishment from about the same sources as the Willow-Grouse, namely stalks of willows and bilberries, 240 MR. R. COLLETT ON HYBRID GROUSE. [Apr. 20, also leaves and twigs of different plants, procured principally on the marshes, and occasionally (like Arctostaphylos alpina) from the true alpine district ; likewise from various berries, and occasionally from birch-catkins. Several of these articles of nourishment form the food of Blackgame ; nevertheless it is certain that most of them come from marshy places, from which it must be assumed that its diet most resembles that of the Willow-Grouse. Skeleton. In a skeleton of a male from Saltdalen (Nordland) the measure- ments are as follows :— raillim Length of the skull (bill included) .......... 63 Greatest breadth of the skull .............. 28 Length of scapula... ....: 2.0%» sin iene a 78 RSs ig! CT a PR re I aii Length OF fadins, . PCS eRe aL A | eo 65 Peet WGA! on. n,m otieteaa' 3a ss05 0 oS nss! Gaps in keee Leneth of os eoracoideum” .........6.0-s08 55 Length of metacarpus II. .... win te oop genet Length of the two phalanges of digitus 11 EES it eee Length of furcula (to the saceay of the Aaa 66 Length of sternum....... wis os DE Greatest height of crista sterni . sien . 34 Length of pelvis (to the first caudal vertebra) ae ee Greatest breadth of velvis (across ossa ischil). . 57 He 2 2 Ca ee Re eae een = 40 icra OE DUI nail omc 's, 0's Syaanye. arelmps sav a eyes 21 Length of tarsus. Petpet: |S Length of middle toe (claw not included) . . Me eae 45 As the skeletons of the two parents, Lagopus albus and Tetrao tetrix, resemble each other so nearly that, apart from their difference cf size, it would be difficult to find out the most trifling characteristic, this hybrid hardly has one distinctive feature in the structure of its skeleton beyond its difference in size. Christiania, March 1886. EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES. Prats XXI. Hybrid between Lagopus albus and Tetrao tetriz. Fig. 1. Male in winter dress. Fig. 2. Female in winter dress. Puate XXII. Hybrid between Lagopus albus and Tetrao tetrix. Fig. 1. Young male in early autumn dress. Fig. 2. Young male in late autumn dress. 4 _ ih wh fh en here ante, Orta oe a *chun: sou Ure patyy JX Tel SSC eee ee ee Ae eS eT -, deiel”« SWITAWOUHLAYA VENVSONALS i HTL} HP HMPA Md . 1886.] MR. BOULENGER ON A NEW IGUANOID LIZARD. 241 5. Description of a new Iguanoid Lizard living in the Society’s Gardens. By G. A. Bourzncer., F.ZS. [Received April 6, 1886.] (Plate XXIII.) Amongst the recent additions to the Society’s living collection of Reptiles is an example of Lizard of the genus Ctenosaura, which the Secretary has requested me to determine. It belongs to an undescribed species, which I propose to eall CTENOSAURA ERYTHROMELAS, sp.n. (Plate XXIII.) Body a little depressed. A slight indication of a dorso-nuchal crest. Scales on posterior part of back a little larger than ventrals, rhomboidal, indistinctly keeled. Upper surface of hind limbs with large spinose scales. Tail shorter than head and body, much de- pressed, except quite at the end; its upper surface with transverse series of very large, subequal spines, directed upwards and back- wards, alternating with series of very small scales; the series of small scales inconspicuous, at first glance, on the anterior half of the tail; lower surface of tail with smaller pointed keeled scales, the number of transverse series being the same as on the upper surface. Eight femoral pores on each side. Blackish olive above, with a large patch of vermilion-red on each side of the body, and variegations of the same colour on the sides of the head and neck ; lower surfaces grey, throat marbled with red; three oblique black bands on each side behind the fore limb; two black bands across the humerus. Tympanum yellowish. Iris golden. Length from snout to vent 100 millim., head 24, tail 88. The locality of the single specimen, acquired by purchase of Mr. W. Cross of Liverpool on the 3rd inst., is not known. This new species again lessens the gap between the genera Cteno- saura and Cachryz. I therefore propose to unite the two genera. In connection with this subject I must draw attention to an extra- ordinary statement to be found in one of Prof, Cope’s latest papers". He remarks :—“ This genus ( Cachryz, Cope) is of the type of Ctéeno- saura, differing only in the characters of its tail. It lacks the ter- minal portion, which is in that and other genera free from spinous seales. Jt is not in my opinion allied to Urocentron or Hoplocercus, as suggested by Bocourt, genera which belong to the terrestrial division of the family, or Humivage.”” Mr. Cope not only omits to add that I was the first to assign his genus to the correct place in the system, but forgets that he is himself responsible for the error now corrected, and not M. Bocourt, who simply endorsed his views; for on referring to Cope’s original (and unique) account of Cachryz* we read, ‘This genus is allied to Urocentrum and Hoplurus, dué differs in the possession of femoral pores.” 1 Proc. Amer. Philos. Soc. 1885 (1886), p. 270. 2 Proc. Acad. Philad. 1866, p. 124. 242 MR. G. A. BOULENGER ON RANA ARYALIS. [Apr. 20, 6. Remarks on Specimens of Rana arvalis exhibited in the Society’s Menagerie. By G. A. Boutenesr, F.Z.S. [Received April 14, 1886.] (Plate XXIV.) An interesting addition has recently been made to the series of Batrachians in the Society’s menagerie—the Oxyrrhine Frog, Rana arvalis, Nilsson, so often described and its specific validity discussed. It is, with the exception of Rana iberica, Blgr., the only European Batrachian as yet never figured. The accompanying illustration (Plate XXIV.) is intended to supply this desideratum. My friend Professor Born, of Breslau, favoured me this spring with about 50 breeding specimens of the Frog in question, some of which have been presented to the Society. Two years ago, I also received a number of these Frogs from the same gentleman, which have afforded me an opportunity of verifying the additional observations on the characters of the species recently made by Pfliiger and Smith’. These authors have shown that some of the characters hitherto regarded as diagnostic comparatively to A. tem- poraria are not constant. Thus the shape of the snout, often given as the principal distinctive character of the two species, is not absolutely constant; and specimens of 2. arvalis may be found with the snout less pointed than certain specimens of 2. temporaria. Also breeding males of the former species possess black rugosities on the thumb in every respect similar to those of A. temporaria. This statement I have been able to verify not only on the Breslau specimens, but on a Swedish one, for which I am indebted to Dr. Westerlund. However, the breeding specimens from Copenhagen, in M. Lataste’s collection, which I described in my monograph of the Rane temporaria, have grey, not black, asperities. It is therefore a question whether the colour of the copulatory asperities does not vary according to localities. Besides, the web between the toes is longer in the Copenhagen specimens. The character derived from the vomerine dentition has also been shown by these authors to be an unreliable one. I may add that the remark is not only true in this case, but applies to European species of Rana generally ; among the hundreds of specimens of Rana esculenta which have been examined by me, not a few have the vomerine teeth inserted behind the line of the choanz, and would as regards this character fall in the section R. temporarie! Differences in the dentition exist which may often assist in the discrimination of species, but are not sufficiently constant to be regarded as good characters. The criterion for the easy distinction of R. arvalis from R. temporaria is the metatarsal tubercle ; this character is an infallible one, and will remove any hesitation in the determination. Of greater importance still, but less easily ascertainable, is the character of the spermatozoa. Should any one still entertain doubts as to the specific validity of 1 Arch, f. ges. Physiol. xxxii. 1883, p. 525. “SIVA S WaSyeet “SITVERHOd VeAlLdONY IVa dun qaeyuey ae Se fe 24 “AXX Id 988L SZd ~SLIVAYOd VAFIMONY IVE duit qaeyury SEG es tie Z@ by [AMX Ic QSSL OAc 1886.] MR. R.COLLETT ON BALANOPTERA BOREALIS. 243 R. arvalis, let him read Pfliiger’s account of experiments on the crossing of the German frogs. Dissidents from the modern views on the specific distinctions of the forms of 2. temporaria have of late become very few. That there should be at the present day a naturalist to express the opinion that R. arvalis is the male and R. temporaria the female of the same species, and a herpetologist, who professes to know European Frogs, to reproduce such nonsense with the remark “should this discovery be confirmed it will afford an unexpected solution to the controversy,” may appear incredible, but is unfortunately true. APPENDIX. The following paper, originally intended for the ‘Transactions,’ has been ordered by the Committee of Publications (at the request of the Author) to be printed in this part of the ‘ Proceedings ’:— On the External Characters of Rudolphi’s Rorqual (Baleno- ptera borealis). By Roser Cotzert, C.M.Z.S8.* [Received January 4, 1886: read February 2, 1886.] (Plates XXV., XXVI.) Contents. I. Introductory Remarks, p. 243. X. Parasites, p. 255. II. General Characters, p. 246. XI. Time of capture, p. 259, III. Measurements, p. 248. XII. Fetus, p. 260. IV. Structure of the Body, p. 248. XIII. Food, p. 261. V. Colour, p. 249. XIV. Habits, p. 263. VI. Flippers and other external XV. Value, p. 263. characters, p. 252. XVI. Monstrosities, p. 264. VII. Baleen, p. 253. XVII. Synopsis of the four northern VIII. Blow-holes and furrows, p.255. species of Balenoptera, IX. Hairy covering, p. 255. p. 264. I. Introductory Remarks. Although our knowledge of Balenoptera borealis has been con- siderably increased during the last few years, still almost all researches have been confined to its anatomical structure, and no complete description has hitherto been given of its external characters. Even up to the year 1882 the species was only known from a small number of stranded specimens, the skeletons of which had found their way into different museums ; but of the external characters of * [Mr. A. Heneage Cocks, F.Z.S., has kindly added some footnotes, which are designated by his initials, —Ep., | 244 MR. R. COLLETT ON BALZNOPTERA BOREALIS. ([Feb. 2, these examples either no particulars were obtained, or at most a few scanty remarks by casual observers °. In 1882 a whaling-factory was established at Sorver near Hammerfest (West Finmark) for the purpose of catching the Blue- Whale (B. sibéaldi), under the management of Capt. Bull. It was soon seen that the greater number of the whales caught here were the so-called ‘‘Sejhval,” a species with which Capt. Bull was acquainted through his former whaling-expeditions in the Varanger- fjord, but in this Fjord, as well as along the whole of the East Finmarken coast, it had only appeared casually. Eight specimens of this “‘Sejhval”? were caught at Sdrveer the first year, 1882, and in the ensuing years it was also taken, though in varying numbers. In 1883 40 specimens * were caught, in 1884 only 3, this year (1885) 44. By gradually collecting together the scattered accounts respect- ing this whale it soon became evident that it was a species distinct from the three other Balenoptere ; and both Prof. Sars and I soon came to the conclusion that it might be ‘‘ B. laticeps,’ Gray=B. borealis, Lesson, or the same species to which the skeletons just referred to belonged, two or three of which (among the few hitherto known) had been brought from precisely the same region. Last year (1884) Dr. Guldberg, in a paper published in Bull. Acad. Roy. de Belg.’, finally proved by the researches he had been able to make, at Sorveer, upon some parts of the skeleton (now 1 These specimens are as follows :— 1811. One stranded in the Zuyder-Zee, Aug. 1811 (Hschricht, Kgl. D. Vid. Selsk. Skr. 5 R.1B.). Length 32’. The skeleton is preserved in the Leyden Museum. 1819. One stranded on the coast of Holstein in Feb. 1819, and described by Rudolphi as B. rostrata (Abh. kénigl. Acad. Wiss. Berl. 1820-21, p. 27). Length 323’. The skeleton is preserved in the Berlin Museum. 1861. A skeleton sent to the museum at Brussels from East Finmarken (Norway) through Eschricht (V. Beneden et Gervais, Ostéographie des Cét. viv. et foss. p. 201). Length 32’. 1861. One stranded, June 1861, in Altenfjord, West Finmarken (Norway). Length of the skeleton 50' 1" (Swed.) [about 29 feet 34 in. English.— A. H.C.]. Described by Lilljeborg (Ups. Univ. Aarsskr. 1862, p. 25, Sver. och Norg. Ryggr.-djiir, B. ii. p. 945, 1874). The skeleton is in the Bergen Museum. 1863. One stranded in Skogsvaag, near Bergen (Norway), July 1863. The skeleton not preserved. (Dr. Koren in a letter to Prof. Lilljeborg, dated Bergen, Jan. 24, 1864.) 1872. One caught in the Firth of Forth, September 1872, described by Turner (Journ. Anat. Phys. April 1882, p. 471). Length 58’ (English). The skeleton is in the Anatomical Museum at Edinburgh. 1874. One stranded in July 1874, at Biarritz (Basses Pyrénées). Length 7830 mm. (25' Rhen.), and described by Fischer (Compt. Rend. 1876, tom. 83, p. 1298, &e.). The skeleton is in the Bayonne Museum. 1883. One caught on the coast of Essex, Hngland ; described by Flower (Proce. Zool. Soe. Lond. 1883, p. 513). Length about 29' (Engl.). Skeleton prepared for the Sydney Museum. 1884. One taken at Goole, Lincolnshire. Skeleton in British Museum. 2 [I fancy there is some mistake about this number, and that 15 was the total of this species taken by Capt. Bull in 1883, and that 40 was his total take of all species during that season,—A. H. C.] 1886.] MR. R. COLLETT ON BALZNOPTERA BOREALIS. 245 preserved in the University Museum at Christiania), and a foetus from the same locality, that the Finmark “ Sejhval ’’ is identical with B. borealis. Thus, whilst B. dorealis, as has been stated, is a constant summer visitor on the coasts of West Finmark, where it has annually, although in varying numbers, occurred off Sérden, near Hammerfest, probably to gorge upon the ‘ Aate,” or the shoals of Crustacea which constitute its food, it has, as mentioned above, only exceptionally visited East Finmark, and on the coast east of the North Cape only a few specimens had been caught, and not every year. It does not, however, appear to have been altogether unknown even on this part of the coast. During a stay in Finmark in 1878 I received information that a shoal of 13 whales, of about 40 feet in length, had stranded in a bay of the Porsangerfjord to the east of the North Cape. I did not have an opportunity of visiting the place ; but as the baleen-plates of these Whales were described as being black, it seems very probable that they belonged to this species”. In the same month 5 similar small whales were stranded at Sdrveer, near Hammerfest (where the above-mentioned factory had not then been established). Moreover, several whalers have informed me that this species visited the Varangerfjord in 1879 and 1880, but was not caught; they also noticed that whenever this species came in, B. sibbaldi left the coast and went out to sea’, During the past summer, 1885, the Sejhval (B. borealis) came quite unexpectedly under land along the whole coast of Finmark, not singly or solitarily, but in such large numbers that, during the whole summer, most of the whales caught both in West and East Fin- mark consisted of this species. Of the other species, B. sibbaldi, B. musculus, and Megaptera boops, which in former years had formed the majority, only a comparatively small number were caught *. Of B. borealis 724 specimens were caught by 18 companies stationed in Finmark, and 47 specimens by 3 companies, on the Murman coast, making together a total of 771 specimens. In fact they were caught by all the companies along the whole 1 “Sur Vexistence d’une 4me espéce du genre Balenoptera dans les mers septentrionales de lHurope” (Bull. Acad. Roy. Belg. 3° sér. tome vii. no. 4, Avril 1884). This paper is translated (with a few additions) in Journ. of Anat. and Phys. 1885, p. 293. 2 Nyt Mag. f. Naturv. 27 B. p. 260 (1885). ° Tt was therefore said this year in Finmark that as B. borealis was under land, B. stbbaldi would not come, and this presumption proved to a great extent correct. B. sibbaldi was this year almost absent from the Norwegian coast as compared with the preceding years; but it was more common further east, as 5 whalers on the Murman coast killed almost exactly the same number of that species as all the 31 Norwegian whalers did together. * (Of Megaptera boops rather more examples were caught than in any previous year; this does not necessarily show that they were more numerous than in other years, but, in the absence of the two larger species, they were hunted in preference to B. borealis, as yielding three times the quantity of oil—A. H. C.] 246 MR. R. COLLETT ON BALEZNOPTERA BOREALIS. ([Feb. 2, coast from Sdréen, near Hammerfest, to Jarfjord in Syd Varanger, and on the Murman coast at least to Kildin. When, during a stay in the Varangerfjord in the month of July, I ascertained that specimens of B. borealis were daily brought into the factories at Vardd, I at once proceeded to that place, and in the course of a couple of days I had an opportunity of examining the external characters of six specimens, three males and three females, whilst I saw double that number towed in, but want of time prevented my examining them. Two drawings of this species have previously been produced. According to Van Beneden and Gervais (Ostéogr. des Cét. p. 201) the first known specimen of this whale (Zuyder-Zee, 1811) was figured, but these authors are unable to explain the fate of this figure, which never seems to have been published. Another figure was given of Rudolphi’s specimen (Holstein, 1819) in a lithograph published in Hamburg, 1819 ; this figure is copied in Brandt and Ratzeburg’s ‘ Medicinische Zoologie’ (B. 1. tab. xv. fig. 3); it is, however, very imperfect and confusing '. As our knowledge of this species is thus still very meagre, I have thought it right to give the principal results of my researches at the factories at Vardé and Mehavn this year, although I am well aware that my observations, based as they are upon only two days’ studies on the spot, are very incomplete. I am also indebted to Messrs. Castberg, Bull, Bruun, Bryde, Ellevsen, and Sérensen, all managers of the different factories, for communications chiefly relating to their life-history as observed during their “ fishing’’ this year *. II. General Characters. Compared with the three other northern Rorquals, B. borealis belongs to the smaller group, its length being somewhere between that of B. rostrata and B. musculus, or about 44 feet. Its body is less robust than B. rostrata, more like B. sibbaldi, and much better proportioned than B. musculus. The colour on the upper part of the body is dark grey-blue, something like B. sibbaldi. The belly is more or less white as far as the genitalia, but the remainder of the undersurface and also the flippers are of the same colour as the back. The flippers are small, smaller relatively than in the other species; the dorsal fin is large, curved, and situated far forward. The baleen-plates are black; the bristles are white and much curled, and comparatively long. In the sea the B. borealis may be recognized at the first glance by its large, high, dorsal fin, which most nearly resembles that of B. rostrata, also by its head being more slender, and its snout more rounded than are those of the other Arctic species. ' The colour is especially wrong, which is easily explained, as the animal was probably drawn a long time after death. * I have to offer my best thanks to my friend Mr. Alfred Heneage Cocks for the kind assistance he has rendered me by looking over the paper before it was printed. 1886.] | TAU OTIT (aren OGFI) EF (‘wut 0961) 49 (‘miu BOGS) 18 “TUL (QE “MUU OEST “ult O> Tat O¢8T (‘ut £6) .18 (-w £cT) .6F Cu ) “mau OTL (‘ut cost) Ly (‘uLu 88) iT urar Qg¢g-("T) O¢e weeeee (ut #9) 61 (‘mut 6266) 116 fi) FI (ut Fe A “TAU (169 (‘uit $241) FG (‘umd 6162) 26 (ure 6086) 18 (t™ 6) 6G (‘Wt $1) EFF “un GOST “WLU ()98 (‘cant $41) (uuu Gp Fz) By (yy) “uma oLe—-C T) ogg (‘mun ¢081) ES (roam QULF) .€ (arm C126) 0 ("ut #8) ae (ut £7) AST (ut OL) Ze (wu EPL) LF “SJUIUIANSDA Jy (‘wut T1PT) , (‘uu FSLT) if (uuu ate) “HUT OCS “MUL QGGT “UU QT “HUE O08 “THU O82 “WU 099 seeeee TAL OL SEE “mIMIOSE-OLE “WIUL OLG Bile ge) “TUL OOTS seneee a reeee ("w $8) 86 (a $81) SF Serisvseeeeteeeres guy JO LOJOUUICL aoe * + ayn qove jo yypvorg. Hreeseeeeteenmy Jo oNN YOUg ‘reese TB] JO JOO OTT} Fe IULSIO] "[re] Jo OTPpruroqy ye Apoq Jo ys} Ug [esLOp JO e8uq WHOA} Apoq jo yy ste] Sees ae suoddtpy, JO eIppru ayisoddo Lpoq Jo FYSLe saddyy yo yypveaq, 4se7ve.LH COOL (eye wioay) caddry ay treseesereseeees TIE TegLOp JO qU SOFT pacar es uy [estop Jo esvq Jo YoU] “o"" BATA JO PUB LOLTO}UE 0} FTA eee ee s'100 04 OAR s[iysou 0} mel toddn jo yutog ween BT[IXB 0} OAR “+ song 0} UT TesIop FO JUOL -soddig jo puo 07 mel camo] jo yULOg yynoui jo ejsue 0} al tomo] Fo JUIOg, qynout Jo epsur 04 al soddu Jo yurog Web olsivasnenescle sony 0} seddig jo pug aaddig. 07 noug ’ Ulf [Ustop 09 yuoug Adsebadorne or treereseeres CBUQT [BqIO, ete eweeee 248 MR. R. COLLETT ON BALENOPTERA BOREALIS. _[Feb. 2, III. Measurements. Most of the examples caught were between 40 and 50 feet in length. The usual length was 44-45 feet or thereabouts. The largest specimens measured 52 feet’ (16°3 metres). The 6 specimens which I examined thoroughly were 43 to 493 feet in length (see p- 247). The last of these (a male) was considered to be one of the largest caught ; so that it may be laid down as a rule that they rarely exceed 50 feet (15°6 metres). The smallest specimens this summer that I know of were 35-37 feet, but these were exceptional. A single specimen was caught in July at Mehavn (by Foyn), the length of which was said at the place to be 323 feet (10°1 metres). Both sexes seem to attain about the same size; the largest female specimen that I examined was 47 feet long (14°7 metres). One of the managers stated that if there were any difference, the female was the largest and fattest, at any rate during the whaling- season. The size appeared the same throughout the season, and it was remarkable to notice how uniform it was, and how evidently the whales were all of about the same age. IV. Structure of the Body. The Structure of the body seems to correspond with that of B. sid- baldi, which it on the whole resembles in its mode of living. The body is highest across the middle of the flippers, where, in the case of the living animal, the height is to the total length about as 1 to 53 (as in the case of B. sibbaldi). In the stranded animal, when the belly is compressed by the ground, the proportion is as about 1 to 6. The height of the body is thus not so great as in B. rostrata, which is at that point relatively the largest of all the four species. The form of the hinder part of the body does not differ essentially from that of the other species. Immediately under the dorsal fin the height is one eighth of the total length, and halfway between the dorsal fin and the root of the tail one tenth. From these proportions it will be seen that in this respect it also corresponds most nearly with B. sibbaldi, and is neither of the exceedingly slender ‘‘ emaciated ” form of B. musculus, nor of the comparatively stout form of B. rostrata. The breadth of the body can only be given approximately, and would seem across the flippers to be not very different from the height. From the vent to the root of the tail the body is strongly compressed, and the caudal part forms, as in the other species of Balenoptera, a thin ridge above and below, which is particvlarly sharp along the dorsal line. The breadth at the root of the tail at * [About 54 feet English, and so with the other measurements; the Norwegian foot almost = 123 inches English.—A, H. O.] 1886.] MR, R. COLLETT ON BALZNOPTERA BOREALIS. 249 the narrowest point (just where the flukes commence) was in the largest specimen 390 mm., or about 15 inches. V. Colour. The colour of the back is bluish black or occasionally some- what brown, much resembling the colour in B. sibbaldi, although the blue colour as a rule is less pronounced than in that species. The colour after death is darker than in the living animal. On the side of the body the colour becomes somewhat lighter; the belly is dark steel-grey with a white area running along the centre; the white colour begins at the symphysis of the lower jaw, and termi- nates at the genitalia, but occasionally it is interrupted or imper- ceptible on the middle portion of the belly. Considerable variations occur in the breadth, size, and form of this white part of the belly. The throat is always white, occasionally throughout its entire breadth. sometimes only for a couple of feet. On the breast the white becomes narrower, and in many indi- viduals is completely cut off by the bluish-grey colour of the sides, but it then reappears on the belly, and continues in a somewhat irregular width to the genitalia. Behind the vent the whole under- side of the tail is light bluish grey, about the same as the back. The white colour is not always symmetrical, but is occasionally broader on one side of the middle line than on the other; also the extent of it on the belly may be rather irregular. On the throat similarly the white colour is sometimes broader on one side than on the other. The white patch on the belly was never absent in any of the specimens examined; and this observation is confirmed by all the managers of the whaling companies, who state that it is always to be found, though it is sometimes only slightly developed. The white colour, especially on the throat, is pure and sharply defined. On the belly and in front of the genitalia there are, on the contrary, a large number of very fine bluish-grey lines, which are quite short and rmn parallel to each other ; these lines, which can only be distinguished when you are near to the animal, some- times, when they are very numerous and closely set, detract from the whiteness of these portions. The flippers are coloured on the outer side like the back ; on the inner side they are a trifle lighter, especially along the lower edge: a few individuals (such as No. 2 of the specimens examined) have large whitish spots on the inner side ; these are never, however, absolutely white. The flukes of the tail are also bluish grey underneath ; the dorsal fin is exactly the colour of the back. Distributed over the dark parts of all the specimens examined were a greater or less number of whitish oblong spots of peculiar form and colour, their length being about 100 mm., and breadth about 30 (Plate XXVI. fig. 2). Their outer edges are not always sharply defined ; their colour is in general whitish grey, occasionally almost white, and more rarely dark grey. Along the centre of the Proc. Zoo. Soc.—1886, No. XVII. 17 250 MR. R. COLLETT ON BALENOPTERA BOREALIS. _[Feb. 22 long axis there runs a dark line, from which to both sides and both ends run fine radii of similar lines’. These patches are most frequent on the sides of the body some- what below the middle, and occur also on the tail, but may be found, when they occur to any great extent, distributed singly right up the centre of the back, and extending as far as the end of the lower jaw. They occur on all examples, although they may not be equally apparent in all. They evidently are due to a peculiar matter in the skin, as they become more perceptible after the animal has dried for a time. Single small white spots of a normal form occur less frequently in the black portion of the sides, especially up to- wards the back. Among the markings of less constant occurrence may be noticed :—On one of the specimens examined there was a slightly lighter patch behind the ear-opening, which began just at its pos- terior margin, and extended backwards in a pyramidal form for about a foot. In order to show the variations of the white colour on the belly, I shall briefly explain its extent in the individuals examined by myself. No. 1. A female.—Throat entirely white ; on the breast the white area became narrower, though without being completely broken off. A larger white patch occurred at the end of the furrows, forming here an extension of the central stripe. On the belly the white colour was partly covered over by the fine light bluish-grey lines, which terminated as single white stains at the mamme. No. 2. A female.—The white area symmetrical and ample; throat white, about ten furrows on each side being included, though the upper ones were spotted with black. The patch became narrower backwards, so that between the flippers only three furrows on each side were included, while behind the flippers it spread out in an anchor-like form, the arms of which extended rather high up on the sides (and to about half a flipper’s length from the end of the flipper). Behind the furrows the white area was almost interrupted by the grey colour of the sides, but widened out again in front of the mammee, where it was whitish and not sharply defined. The fine bluish-grey lines were most frequent towards the dark portions of the sides. In this specimen the oblong whitish marks on the sides were com- paratively few and indistinct, although some of them were perfectly white. No.3. A female.—Throat white, the white commencing just behind the symphysis of the jaw, and including the eight furrows on each side of the central line; this white portion diminished as it passed backwards. Almost exactly under the distal end of the flipper, when lying parallel to the body, it was broken off by the colour of the sides, but it recommenced at the navel, and thence extended unbroken to the mamme. 1 The general form and design reminds one of the septa ina Fungia or Herpetolithus. 1886.] MR. R, COLLETT ON BALENOPTERA BOREALIS. 251 The oblong whitish marks occurred all over the animal, from the beginning of the flippers to the root of the tail, but did not, generally speaking, extend much higher than the middle of the sides; several small spots, however, of normal form occurred up towards the back. In this specimen the underside of the flippers had large whitish spots. ao. 4. Ad male.—Unusually dark. The white colour was com- paratively little extended, as in front it embraced only four furrows on each side, and even here was mixed with black. Backwards the white colour widened somewhat, so that six furrows on either side were included, though with black stripes from the sides extending obliquely into them. Behind the furrows the central patch was ter- minated by the colour of the sides, and there was but little white in the portion in front of the genitalia. In this specimen were noticed a large number of the peculiar oblong marks, some quite white, most of them, however, darker in hue, spread over all the dark parts of the belly, extending both downwards to the white stripe and upwards on to the back. They were most numerous about the middle of the sides and on the posterior portion of the body. No. 5. A male.—Throat white, extending over eight furrows on each side, from the front to between the ends of the flippers. Above these, six furrows on each side were mottled with white. Further back the white part was interrupted, so that the belly: behind the furrows was, for a short distance, of a uniform blue-grey tint like the sides, but again became whitish, sprinkled over with the narrow bluish lines as far as the genitalia. The oblong whitish marks were present, especially on the sides. No. 6. A male.—Colour almost similar to that of No. 2, the white having almost exactly the same extent. Here also the white patch be- tween the flippers extended in a somewhat irregular anchor-like form. Behind the furrows the white was almost terminated by the bluish- grey colour of the sides; it recommenced at the navel and extended to the genitalia, but was pencilled over evenly by fine short grey lineolze. ‘The oblong whitish marks were numerous, tolerably light- coloured, but none quite white, and extended almost to the end of the lower jaw. In a 7th specimen, which lay secured in the water with the belly exposed, the white colour was more decidedly asymmetrical than in any of the others. On the breast the white included six furrows on the right side, whilst the whole of its left side was black '. The white area extended as usual to behind the end of the flippers, where it became narrow or disappeared, but extended again back- wards to the genitals, and at this point it was symmetrical on the two sides. ' A similar asymmetry of colour (left side dark, right side white) has been noted on two occasions by Professor Sars as pervading the lower jaws in B. mus- culus (Forh. Vid.-Selsk. Christiania, 1878, no. 15, p. 9; 1880, no. 12, p.3). [A similar specimen was recorded by me in the ‘ Zoologist,’ April 1885, p. 188.— A. H.C.] i 252 MR. R. COLLETT ON BALENOPTERA BOREALIS. — [Feb. 2, VI. Flippers and other External Characters. The Flippers are relatively shorter than in any of the other species, somewhat slender and pointed. Their length, measured from the axilla, is about one eleventh of the total length, occasionally a little over and sometimes under this measurement. In form they do not differ materially from those of the other species. A little beyond the middle they present on the ulnar side a slight extension, an indication of the commencement of the manus. At this point the flippers have their greatest breadth, which is, compared to their length (reckoned to the axilla), as 1 to 3°5 or 3°6 (or to caput humeri as | to 4°7). Thus in its small flippers B. borealis differs essentially from B. stb- baldi, which it otherwise resembles in so many points, and approaches nearer to B. musculus. Their colour, as previously mentioned, is essentially the same on the outer and inner sides, and in this respect they differ from all the other species, in which the inner side is more or less white. The Dorsal Fin is situated far forward and is high. | The front margin is convex, with a slightly curved apex ; its hinder margin is deeply concave. In form and position it is quite unlike that of B. sibbaldi and B. musculus, and is most like that of B. rostrata, but it lies further forward than in any of them. The following are the proportions between the total length of the body and the distance from the end of the snout to the beginning of the dorsal fin in five of the specimens examined by me :— No. No. No. No. No. . As 1 to 0°65. . As 1 to 0°68. . As 1 to 0°65. . As 1 to 0°65. .As1to0°61. Son se Go The dorsal fin is thus constantly placed anterior to the com- mencement of the last third of the body, whilst that of B. rostrata (according to Sars) is placed at the beginning of this third; it is even further back in B. musculus, and furthest back in B. stbbaldi. Its height and size is on the whole considerable, especially in comparison with the length of the flippers. The height is in fact more than 13 times the greatest breadth of the flippers, and is to their length as 1 to barely 23. The dorsal fin is possibly higher in the male than in the female, although the difference cannot be great. The length of the anterior margin is about the same as that of the base. The Flukes, in a couple of specimens examined by me, were, com- pared to the total length of the body, as 1 to 4°2. Thus they were relatively somewhat smaller than in B. rostrata (3°4), but larger than in B. musculus (4°1—-5:1). Their colour is, as in B. sibbaldi, about the same on the upper and lower sides. The Anus is situated directly under the apex and posterior margin 1886.] MR. R. COLLETT ON BALENOPTERA BOREALIS. 233 of the dorsal fin. The genital opening lies almost immediately in front of the anterior edge. The Inferior Maxilla.—Vhe length of the lower jaw-bones (mea- sured to the angle of the mouth in the non-skeletonized animal) is, compared to the total length, as 1 to 43, viz. :— Woz Jee 4:0. No. 3.. 4:5. INO; 45/4 No. 6..4°4. In this last specimen the lower jaw-bones, probably on account of their weight, were displaced, which is often the case. The jaws have the same relative length as B. sibbaldi, and are longer than in the other two specivs. In these three species the proportions (according to Sars) are as follows :— B. sibbaldi, 4:5. B. musculus, 5:0. B. rostrata, 5:5. Their greatest breadth (measured between the eyes) is, compared to their length, as 1 to 1:7. ‘This was somewhat less ina skeleton in the Bergen Museum (total length 30); feet), where the breadth across the temporal bones (according to Lilljeborg) was, compared to the length of the skull, as 1 to 2°0. VII. Baleen. The colour of the baleen is usually black and the bristles white ; in some individuals, however, a small number of the foremost rows were white, or mottled with white, but not symmetrically in each ramus. Besides the baleen in the six specially examined specimens, I examined a considerable quantity of whalebone which lay heaped up on the beach at the different establishments. Amongst all this, I only found two specimens which differed from the others in having some white mottled pl.tes; in all the others it was entirely black. Of these two individuals, one had on the right side 58, and on the left 53-of the foremost baleen-plates mottled’. The second specimen had on the right side 52 white plates, on the left only 5°. The number of the plates was about 350 in each jaw, in some 1 Namely in the following manner :—On the right side the foremost 27 were white in their outer half, and the next 15 quite white, after which came 3 grey plates. ‘hen came 10 completely black, and finally 3 which were white with black edges. Total 58. The remainder were black. On the left side the colouring was somewhat similar. The first 31 were semi-white, and the next 9 quite white, then followed 3 blackish grey, after which came 3 white, then 2 greyish black, and finally 5 white. Total53. The rest were black. * In this specimen on the left side the 5 foremost ones were white, all the others black; on the right side the first 36 plates were mottled with white, after which came 16 quite white, the remainder being black. 254 MR. R. COLLETT ON BALZ NOUPTERA BOREALIS. — [Feb. 2, individuals 320, in others as many as 340. No. 2 for instance had on its right side only 318, on its left 328. The number appears to be rarely the same in the two jaws of the same individual. The front plates were small, almost rudimentary, and formed double rows; these were difficult to count. The greatest length was attained at the commencement of the latter third of the series, where as a rule they measured 550 to 600 millim.’ From these measurements it appears that the length and number of the plates are not constantly greater in the right than in the left jaw, also that there is no constant difference between the plates in the two sexes. The hair-like bristles in which each plate terminates, and which form the most effective part of the straining-apparatus, are in this species unusually fine, somewhat resembling silky wool, and white 1 T give here the measurements of the baleen-plates of 4 examples, viz. those of specimens Nos. 1, 3, and 5, and those of a fourth individual, the jaw of which lay on the beach. They are reckoned from behind forwards, so that No. 50 lies near the angle of the mouth, No. 250 nearest the symphysis of the jaw. They are measured from their base (in the freshly killed specimen) to the outermost point where the plates terminate and the bristles commence. No.1. Female. Left all black; on the right side, the first slightly lighter colour. Left side 328 plates. Right side 324 plates. millim, millim. Length of no. 50 ........... 460 ING) SOO. ae. ahace arco ee se aes 430 4 MO. LOO) sep eseeeee 590 px sO cacactenceenesae tmp rae 560 3 rt\o}y 1510) apmancesces |ar4u) ail ute cianwsaseoncveckn teens 510 _ NG: 2UO! asjcoceuc che 420 Wie POO). cas vceddnecaeecaneters 420 5 NO; 200). ceacpnneaes 240 Wha DON catvseatos tease acaceteaee 240 No. 38. Female. All black. Left side 334 plates. Right side 328 plates. millim. millim. Length of no. 50 ............ 430 ING: ACO. os secs ose-aherascetes 450 . NOs LUO oeecse sees 520 Pig ALD Ul samen, Area te Ce 540 s¢ mo! WHO tele 490 ° Armed 051 OM Na Ne peer te hice, <8 470 & MLO ZOOS Is) .2 Beet 380 5) LOD A ARS 370 “ NO. 250 ...ceceeseee LBD, iil: ila ABOU a: heph: lan tue Abert 210 No. 5. Male. Atl black, Left side 318 plates. Right side 521 plates. millim. millim. Length of no. 50 ............ 490 INO OO ix aisatoen was donee tebe oe 480 : TOs HOU. sarndtoess 640 $54 LOO’ gales Seva azeet ones 630 y me HOD oy. os eens 590 As: | ey - 590 iy NO-w0O! wh cocdetece 420 Bap, UW aeeee eer Rect Ae ea 440 rs Ose. eesiveemtatan 250 cay 215 (ORROE RS, Pome est ESS a0 ee 250 Another example (sex unknown). All black. Left side 333 plates. Right side 339 plates. millim, millim. NOL POU pattteeteeeoneh ates 450 INO... J00) eicttnncctsstarss- eter 500 sf MOO Ree ey. ae te oeee eee 570 590 OO ea... ater dena deiecbeoee 600 fi LOG sa antigen sche ae 520 afta DO Mrwansonppst etme: each 560 sy OO eehaaae dei hase ssibocane ose 400 ibe LU Os cake sanstie.seaean geet 450 1886.] MR. &. COLLETT ON BALZNOPTERA BOREALIS. 255 in colour. They form on the inner edges of the baleen-plates a dense, rather curly covering, which appears to indicate that the food of this species consists of only very small animals. VIII. Blowholes and Furrows. The Blowholes lie in two long furrows somewhat converging anteriorly ; their distance from the end of the snout, in a specimen having a total length of 43 feet, was somewhat over 63 feet (2100 millim.). The length of the furrows was from 370 to 410 millim., between these ran a shorter central furrow. The Furrows.—These run, as in the other species, along the whole length of the lower jaw, from the symphysis to the angle of the mouth, and extend to the middle of the belly. The upper 8 to 10 are short and terminate in the axilla, and are about 2 feet in length. The others, about 20 in number (from 15 to 34) on each side, are long and extend backwards to the centre of the belly about one foot beyond the end of the flippers. One or more short furrows wedge themselves in between the long ones. The total number of long furrows is thus from 30 to 44,to which must be added the 8-10 shorter upper ones; altogether 38 to 58. In addition, the eye is surrounded by two very short horizontal furrows, and in some examples there were also found (as in No. 4) traces of from 20 to 30 short, oblique furrows anterior to the dorsal fin. The furrows permit the body to expand to nearly double its normal - girth, IX. Hairy Covering. a This consisted in an adult female of 11 hairs on each side of the lower jaw, each about 10 millim. long, and two other hairs on each side, situated somewhat behind these; altogether 26 hairs. In the foetus the covering of hair was more plentiful. On the smallest of the foetuses described further on (No. 1), the total length of which was 14 metres, the hairs were visible, but quite short. In foetus No. 3, the total length of which was not quite 23 metres, they were arranged on the lower jaw in three rows, comprising 3 hairs in the upper and lower rows respectively and 11 in the central row ; altogether on each side 17 hairs. On the upper jaw there were only 7 hairs situated ina single row, the two first rather further from each other than the rest. Alto- gether this specimen was provided with 34 hairs on the lower and 14 hairs on the upper jaw. X. Parasites. Parasites of three different sorts have been up to the present time found living upon or in B. dorealis; one of these (not yet examined nor preserved) is a true ecto-parasite, one (Balenophilus unisetus) is an epizoon, aud two Eehinorhynchi are ento-parasites. I could find no trace of ecto-parasites on the specimens examined 256 MR. R. COLLETL ON BALEZNOPIERA BOREALIS. — [Feb. 2, by myself; and upon inquiry amongst the whalers, I was in- formed that only Capt. Bryde has noticed such parasites on a single individual captured off Vardé in July. As no specimen has been preserved, it cannot be stated whether they were Crustaceans (Pennellidee?), Discophora, or other forms. ‘They were worm-like animals, about 50 millim. long, and were attached to the edges of both flukes (caudal lobes), where they formed a row of free hanging threads. Some were also attached to the upper surface of the flukes. In a set of baleen-plates belonging to one specimen, and brought to the University Museum in Christiania from Sorveer (Hammerfest) in 1883 by Dr. Guldberg; most of the plates are infested on both sides with innumerable specimens of Ba/enophilus unisetus (figs. A, B, C, D), a Copepodous crustacean of the subfamily Harpacticine, described by Aurivillius ina pamphlet published in Stockholm in 1879, and discovered by him on the baleeu-plates of a specimen of Bale- noptera sibhaldi caught at Vadsé in July 1877. In 1884, Mr. A. Heneage Cocks found this parasite on a specimen of the same whale at Sérveer, near Hammerfest (‘ Zoologist,’ 1885, p. 135). So far as I know, it has never been found by other observers. Its occurrence on Balenoptera borealis is therefore of interest’. The fully developed specimens (figs. A, B) can only with difficulty be recognized in their dry state; but the larve in their Nauplius-stage (figs. C, D), which are attached to the plates in myriads, still retain most of their original form and appearance. These two parasites appear therefore to be of very rare occurrence. However, the intestines of all the specimens that 1 examined, inclu- ding those which 1 found on the beach, were, without exception, filled with thousands of Echinorhynchi, belonging to two different species, One of these, which was very much less numerous than the other, seemed to resemble very closely 2. porrigens, Rud. Its length was 100 millim. The rostellum was unarmed, the neck long, and the body formed an even continuation of the neck. As I unfortunately only brought one perfect specimen away with me, and as this has the proboscis half retracted, it cannot be decided with certainty whether the species is actually identical with 2. porrigens. The other species appeared in all the specimens examined, and in such vast numbers that in some places there were three or four upon each square inch, and they moreover thickly covered the inner coating of the intestines wherever an incision was made. The smallest speci- mens were thin, semi-transparent, and immature; theirlength wasabout 10 millim., the breadth 2 millim. From these up to the full-grown specimens, the length of which was about 25 millim., there were all gradations of size. While the majority of the specimens were of a white colour, the fully adult were of an intense red, as if their integument were impregnated with the colour of the red Crustaceans, which are the principal food of their hosts. ‘The species to which it approaches nearest is LZ. brevicollis, described by Malm in 1867, 1 IT sent some of the specimens to Dr. Aurivillius, and he has confirmed their identification with the species found on the Blue Whale (B. sibbaldi). 1886.] MR. R. COLLETT ON BALZNOPTERA BOREALIS. 257 Balenopterus unisetus. Fig. A. Female (nat. size 3:5 mu.). B. Abdominal segment of female, seen from above. C, D. Nauplius of female, second stage (nat. size 0-25 mm.), 258 MR. R. COLLETT ON BALZNOPTERA BOREALIS. _ [Feb. 2, from B. sibbaldi*; but as it differs in several respects (thus the neck is reduced to a short and quite thin peduncle, from which the body expands rather abruptly to its full size without any gradual transition), I think that the species has not been previously de- scribed, and I propose for it the name F. ruber (figs. E, E’). E. ruber bas on its proboscis about four rows of very thin, pointed, and quite transparent spines. The rostellum, the length of which (including the proboscis) is 2 millim., is pointed in front, and has, as a rule, a more or less distinct constriction a little in front of its centre, whence the anterior part narrows regularly towards the proboscis. The rostellum has about No, EY 4 y 4 1 hic, EE. ™ ! i Fig. E. Echinorhynchus ruber, sp. noy. (nat. size 25 mm.). EH’. Front part, magnified. 10 rows of spines, the concentric arrangement of which is not always plain. The collum is thick anteriorly, and still somewhat narrower than the rostellum, but rapidly narrows off to a_thread-like peduncle ; the neck is, however, quite short, and the total length from the rostellum to corpus is only 3 millim., and is thus even shorter than the breadth of the body. 1 «Monogr. illustr. Baleinopt..... cote occ. de Suéde’ (fol. Stockholm, 1867), p. 95. 1886.] MR. R. COLLETT ON BALZNUPTERA BOREALIS. 259 The corpus emerges almost without any transition from the neck, and hasa length of about 19 millim., making the animal’s total length about 25 millim. It is perfectly cylindrical, and has a regular breadth of about 33 to 43 millim., which is thus to the total length as 1 to about 63. Males and females were intermixed and seemed to be present in equal numbers. The two sexes do not appear to differ in length, colour, or general appearance ; though the males were at the first glance distinguishable on account of the two projecting folds in the skin encircling the outer orifice of the genitalia. The females were all full of myriads of eggs : these were of normal structure, and measured about 0-135 millim. in length; no trace of the row of spines which appears on the head of the embryo of the other species could be found when magnified 600 times. Neither were spiral threads to be seen, as described in Lehinorhynchus proteus (Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool., Bd. xiii. p. 418). It cannot of course at present be stated whence B. borealis obtains the larvee of H. ruber. As the species is decidedly different from E. brevicollis, described by Malm from B. sibbaldi, it is not probable that both species get their parasites from the same crus- tacean. We know that Huphausia inermis (a Thysanopod) is the species from which B. sidbaldi probably exclusively obtains its food in the summer months, and it is therefore not improbable that Echino- rhynchus brevicollis passes through its first stages with this species. Whether Calanus finmarchicus is the first host of EZ. ruber can only be conjectured as a possibility. It seems, however, more probable that a somewhat larger crustacean, which perhaps consti- tutes the food of this Whale at other seasons of the year, is the true transporter of this parasite. Its diagnosis will be as follows :— E. ruBER, n. sp. Total length 25 millim.; proboscis with about 4 rows of spines, rostellum with 10-12 rows. Neck shorter than the transverse diameter of the body, thread-like. Corpus short, emerging abruptly from the neck. Colour in adult brick-red. XI. Time of Capture. It has been previously stated, that in 1882 B. borealis first became the object of general capture, especially at the newly founded establishment at Sdréen, near Hammerfest, and it appears to “close the land” about there every year, although in varying numbers. In previous years the first specimen, according to Capt. Bull, was captured in the beginning of June. The 24th of June was about the best period for catching them, while after the 8th July they gradually disappeared, when other species generally appeared (B. musculus and B. sibbaldi). This year (1885) B. borealis coasted the land along the whole of Finmark, and formed such a considerable portion of the “Fishery,” that it surpassed the number of all other species com- bined. 260 MR. R. COLLETT ON BALZNOPTERA BOREALIS. [Feb. 2, The first specimens observed in shore in 1885 were captured near the establishments on Sdréen, near Hammerfest, on the west coast of Finmark, the first on the 14th May, by one of the steamers belonging to Bole (Capt. Foyn) ; the second on the 18th by one of the Sérver steamers (Capt. Bull). These two factories together obtained during May five specimens. Whales were under the land the whole time, but the fishery was hindered by bad weather. In the previous year this whale had never approached land so early. The first one captured by the whalers in East Finmark was killed on the 18th June off Nordkyn. Many were seen the same day, and they proceeded in an E.S.E. direction, keeping at about 4 Norwegian (over 28 English) miles from land. It was, however, some time before they appeared in any considerable numbers. First, towards the end of June, they began to be captured by several of the whalers, and even then only in small numbers. In the beginning of July, however, the numbers were greater; and during an entire month some were caught daily along the whole coast of Finmark by all the companies; and occasionally several individuals were captured in a day by the same company. The best period was the latter half of July. In the course of August their numbers diminished, but even towards the end of the month several were caught, but the ‘‘schools”’ appeared then to be more under the Murman coast or further out at sea. The last one ob- tained was by Capt. Sérensen on the 28th August’, but others were seen during the first week in September (the last time being the 8th September). XII. Fetus. All the managers agree that about an equal number of each sex were captured. The six specimens examined by me_ were three males and three females. One of the whalers believes from his observations that at the beginning of the fishing-season most of those captured were females. Most of the females were gravid. At the commencement of the season (in the beginning of July) most of the foetuses were 3 or 4 feet long, in the middle of the month they were often 6 or 7 feet - (1°8-2°2 m.), and towards the end of the season, in August, some were seen of from 8 to 10 or 12 feetin length. Although there was thus a somewhat regular increase in the size of the foetus as summer advanced, their growth increased apparently but slowly, and there were several instances of irregularities. Thus a foetus taken out at one of the factories at Vardd, on the 15th July, had a length of 8 feet (23 m.); whilst at the same place, on the 18th July, one was obtained which measured only 2 feet (0°6 m). Some whalers con- sider it difficult to lay down any fixed rule for the size, having often } [The last specimen of this species killed during the season of 1885 was brought in to Capt. Sorensen’s factory early on the morning of August 25. It was a male measuring 45 feet (Hnglish) along the curves, and was taken off Kildin Island on the Murman coast.—A. H. C.] 1886.] | MR. R. COLLETT ON BALANOPTERA BOREALIS. 261 obtained on the same day both large and small foetuses. So far as my knowledge goes, a foetus has never been met with under 2 feet in length. The four foetuses examined by me were taken out between the 16th and 19th July, and were from 5 to 9 feet (1°5 to 2°8 m.) in length, as will be seen by the following measurements :— 16 July. | 18 July. | ‘19 Truly. |18-July. | |No. 1,9..No. 2, 3.| No. 3,3. No.4. millim. | millim. = millim. | millim. Mctaalalen iy os. BB Heelktouhase:atehoatt, 3 sot soths eee 11 Shoulder to base of hoof .................. U5 Nose to forehead between base of ears ...... 9 ATS aps ods 0-CAe Mora sors ket hl st acetate It heltell a ai: “« Upper parts rich dark glossy brown, mixed with black, darkest along the middle of the back. Belly and inner sides of thighs pure white, the line-of demarcation very distinct except in the lower part of the thighs, where it merges gradually into dark brown. Tail above black, below pure white; a pale patch under the forearm; rest of the underparts dark brown. The brown of the neck gradually pales into reddish brown on the sides of the head; the nose-ridge dark brown; the longitudinal slits form a black Y, the colour between them is a bright reddish brown, which turns into a fiery orange-brown in the tuft of bristly hair, rather more than two inches long, which rises from the tip of the forehead. On each side of this is a very small bony pedicle surmounted by short tufts of hair of the same colour. Lars at the base of the same hue, but not quite so bright, and fading into brown on the upper parts. “In general appearance it much resembles both Elaphodus michi- anus and Cervulus lacryman s, having the dark-coloured Lee tufted 18 268 MR. F. W. STYAN ON CERVULUS CRINIFRONS. [May 4, forehead, and slender build of the former, and the yellow head and black slits along the face of the latter. It is, however, much larger than either, and apparently longer in the legs, compared with the size of body. Its fur is of a similar hard texture to that of Hlaphodus michianus, but the colour is much richer and more glossy. The skull is attached to the skin, but I have not taken it out to examine. This species appears to be very rare; ever since the description of it first appeared, the man I employed to hunt has been specially looking for it, but has only procured this single specimen. When I first gave him a description of it he was quite incredulous, and said no such animal was known, nor would he believe in it until he actually came across this one. «Last summer he procured for me two young of the Hlaphodus, which I am not aware have been described before. They are apparently not more than two or three weeks old, but are almost exact miniatures of the adult, similar in colour, with a very pronounced frontal tuft, but no pale eyebrow, ears marked with white as in adult. On each side of the back is a row of not very distinctly marked white spots, and outside that again just the faintest suspicion of another row. “‘T have also to record an interesting addition to the avifauna of China in the shape of Hirundo savignyi. Two birds, which I believe to be of this species, were killed at Pekin last October, one of which is now in the Shanghai Museum. David records having seen Swallows with reddish-yellow underparts in Upper Mongolia, which doubtless were of the same species, but no record of its occurrence in China exists. Both are males, one an immature bird, and measure respectively 7} and 7 inches—the tail in the former being 4 inches, in the latter 34, not fully developed. In the adult the forehead and throat are deep chestnut, the lower parts uniform rich chestnut-buff; the nuchal collar is broad and complete, but a little mixed with chestnut. In the younger bird the colour of the forehead and throat is similar to that of the lower parts in the adult, while its lower parts are again paler, a bright buff, and the nuchal collar is broken in the centre. " «Whether H. savignyi is now admitted as a distinct species or is regarded as only a variety of H. rustica I do not know; but if the latter, its range is remarkably wide, and it is strange to find it where the parent form is unknown and replaced by a distinct species, H. gutturalis. ‘*T am, Sir, « Yours faithfully, «FW. Sryan, F.Z.S. «P.S.—A friend tells me that when in Pekin in 1883 he saw Swallows with uniform brick-red underparts, but did not obtain specimens. It is probable the species is not uncommon there.” The following papers were read :— Reg Are ™“ S a ea tase P.2Z.5 .1886. Flee Mand Horman Fisher del et lth. Mintern Bros. imp. NEW OR RARE SPHINGIDA 1886. ] MR. W. F. KIRBY ON RARE SPHINGID. 269 1. Remarks on four rare Species of Moths of the Family Sphingide. By W.F. Kirsy, Assistant in Zoological Department, British Museum (S. Kensington). [Received April 16, 1886.] (Plate XXVIT.) I am indebted to Prof. V. Ball and Mr. Nichols, of the Dublin Museum of Science and Art, in which most of the species noticed in this paper are contained, for an opportunity of carefully examining and figuring some of the more interesting Sphingide in the collec- tion under their charge. 1. CHmRocaAMPA MACULATOR, Boisd. Lép. Hét. i. p. 274 (1874). C. meschleri, Ersch. Trudy Russk. Ent. x. p. 64, t. i. f. 1 (1876). The identity of these supposed species has been suggested from the first. There is a specimen in the Dublin Museum which agrees with Erschoff’s figure, except that it is not quite so dark, and the pale band of the hind wings is rather broader and has a slight pinkish tinge. This specimen was, I believe, received from Herr Moschler, labelled ‘‘ C. maculator, Boisd., Colombia.’”’ Boisduval’s type was from “ Veneziela,’” and Erschoff’s from “ Colombia,” the latter having been also received from Méschler. Boisduval’s description agrees well with the Dublin specimen, except that he calls the pale band of the hind wings “‘ jaune terreux,” and seems to imply that the dark blotch on the fore wings is nearer the centre than is actually the case. But I am not disposed to attach too much importance to these trifling discrepancies. 2. AmBULYx Eos, Burm. (Plate XXVII. fig. 1.) Philampelus eos, Burm. Desc. Rep. Arg. v. p. 350 (1878), Atlas, pl. 10. fig. 1 (1880). The British Museum possesses a male from Buenos Ayres, pre- sented by Walter de Rothschild, Esq., which differs so much from Burmeister’s figure of the female that I have thought it worth while to figure it. The vertex, thorax, and fore wings are of a dull green, slightly inclining to olive above; the face and under surface of the thorax are greenish yellow, the base of the labrum and the knees being narrowly white. The antenne are white behind, and reddish in front. ‘The sides of the thorax above are of amuch darker green than the centre, and are marked behind with a small white triangu- lar spot ; the first segment of the abdomen is also of a dark green, somewhat yellowish, the remainder being of a yellowish grey. ‘The 270 MR. W. F. KIRBY ON RARE SPHINGID. [May 4, fore wings are whitish at the base, this colour being narrowest at the costa; and rather below the costa is a small dark green spot near the base. On the inner margin, a dark green oblong mark curves upwards from the base, ceasing at one third of the distance from the costa, and rather beyond it is an oblong white spot with a dark-green centre. Below this, and beyond the oblong mark, the wing is obscurely marked with blackish, and from the upper curve of the oblong a dark obsolete mark curves towards the anal angle, before which it becomes more distinct, and is bounded outside by some whitish markings in the form of a W. In the middle of the wing are three obsolete transverse lines, ceasing at the subcostal nervure— the basal one dull green, the second obscurely blackish, and having an oblong black spot within its upper portion, and the outer one much waved, marked rather broadly with blackish above ; beyond it, just below the subcostal nervure, is another blackish mark, like a broad V. The hind wings are reddish tawny, the hind margin being olive- yellow, most broadly so at the anal angle, above which it is sur- mounted by an irregular blackish blotch enclosing two white dots. Wings beneath yellowish green or greenish yellow, the fore wings being pale orange-yellow at the base to beyond the cell, and brighter orange along the costa; at the extremity of the cell is a blackish spot. The outer portions of the fore wings are marked with three obsolete green lines, converging towards a blackish spot at the anal angle, and the hind wings with three similar lines, which do not quite meet ; the outer ones terminate in blackish blotches, between which stand two white dots. The obscure shades and markings of the fore wings of this and the next species render them difficult to describe satisfactorily. The fore wings are strongly falcate, and the anal angle is very strongly marked. The hind margin of the hind wings is bidentate beyond the anal angle. 3. AMBULYX TITHONUS, sp. n. (Plate XXVII. fig. 2.) Very similar to A. eos, but the upper surface is of a much duller olive-brown ; markings of the head and thorax nearly similar. Fore wings hardly white at the base and with a yellowish-olive band, slightly edged with white, running less obliquely from the inner margin just beyond the base to the median nervure, at which point it is broader than in A. eos; its outline is also more sinuous. Above the median nervure, and beyond it, is an obscure olive-green spot, flecked with white ; at the end of the cell is a black spot, beyond which is a sinuous black line (double above) curving down to the imner margin; beyond it are two more waved blackish lines (the first double) running from the subcostal nervure half across the wing; the hind margin and anal angle are shaded into olive. Hind wings orange-tawny, paler at the anal angle, above which is a black blotch marked with two white dots, from which runs an ill- defined submarginal blackish stripe ; the hind margin is also narrowly blackish. Wings beneath of a more uniform yellowish green than 1886.] MR. W. F. KIRBY ON RARE SPHINGID. 271 in A. eos and the fore wings paler yellow at the base; the black discoidal spot is less strongly marked, and is followed by three short dusky lines on the costa; the hind margin is grey in the middle, bordered by a suffused blackish line running from the tip to the anal angle ; on the inner margin, within the anal angle, is a short curved blackish line ; nearer the base the inner margin is reddish. Hind wings beneath with a black spot at the end of the cell, and three obsolete greenish lines beyond (the middle most obscure), terminating in a black blotch, on which stands a yellowish-white spot, the two seen above having become united beneath. The wings are rather less falcate than in A. eos, and the hind wings have only one tooth within the anal angle. The example of this species was received by the Dublin Museum as “ Ambulyx lycidas, Brazil;” but M. C. Oberthiir of Rennes, who has kindly compared the figure with the type of that species (described by Boisduval, Lép. Hét. i. p. 191) from Brazil, informs me that the outline of the wings (which I have reproduced here from his sketch, Plate XX VII. fig. A) is very different. 4. PROTOPARCE ABADONNA. (Plate XXVII. fig. 3.) Sphinx abadonna, Fabr. Ent. Syst. Suppl. p. 435 (1798). Protoparce abadonna, Kirby, Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond. 1877, p. 238, Sphinw godarti, Macl. King’s Survey of Coasts of Australia, ii. p-. 463 (1827). I am glad to have an opportunity of figuring this species, from a specimen from Queensland in the Dublin Museum ; it is singular that it has not yet been obtained for the British Museum. It is quite distinct from the common Australian P. distans, Butl. Macleay’s description is so good as to render it unnecessary to redescribe the species here. I believe it to be P. abadonna, described by Fabricius from the East Indies, and I therefore retain his name provisionally, though I do not feel quite so certain of the correctness of this identification. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXVII, Fig. 1. Ambulyx eos, 3, p. 269. 2. —— tithonus, sp. n., p. 270. 3. Protoparce abadonna, p. 271. A. Outline of wing of Ambulya lycidas, p. 271. 272 MR. F. E, BEDDARD ON THE [May 4, 2. Observations on the Ovarian Ovum of Lepidosiren (Pro- topterus). By Frank E. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S.E., Prosector to the Society. [Received May 3, 1886.] (Plates XXVIII. & XXIX.) I. Introduction, p. 272. II. Ege-membranes, p. 273. III. Germinal Vesicle, p. 276. IV. Follicular Epithelium and Development of Yolk, p. 279. V. Postembryonic Origin of Ova, p. 288. VI. Résumé, p. 291. I. Introduction. A recent memoir on the anatomy of the Dipnoi by Howard Ayers ' contains some account of the ovaries and the ova in Lepido- siren”, illustrated by several figures. The description of these organs is, however, mainly anatomical; and though in the figures some histological details of the ovary and the contained ova are to be found, their structure is not described. The author contents himself with remarking upon the similarity to the Amphibia, and all that I can find in his paper about the minute structure of the ovaries and ova is the following paragraph * :—‘“ Die Structur der Eiersticke ist direkt vergleichbar mit der der Urodelen. Die ver- schiedenen Stadien in der Entwickelung der Hier aus dem Keimepithel sind, soweit bei dem in Alcohol konservirten Material festgestellt werden konnte, wesentlich dieselben, wie sie fiir niedere Wirbelthiere constatirt sind. Wenn die Eier vollig entwickelt sind, so ist eine Hiilfte ihrer Oberflache pigmentirt (diejenige, welche gegen die freie Hiilfte des Hierstockes gerichtet ist), wiihrend die andere Hilfte farblos bleibt” *. Furthermore, in describing the anatomical relations of the different parts of the genital system, Dr. Ayers takes occasion to remark that the sexual cells (both ovaries and testes) are inclosed in two delicate sacs—an outer peritoneal, and an inner formed by the connective-tissue stroma. I shall refer more particularly to the appearances depicted in Ayers’s figures in considering the structure of the ovaries and ova as I interpret them from my own preparations. 1 « Beitrage zur Anatomie und Physiologie der Dipnoér,” Jenaische Zeitschr. vol. xviii. (1885), pp. 479-527, 3 plates. 2 The specimen studied by myself is from the Nile, and would therefore, according to some authors, be more properly termed Protopterus. Dr. Ayers shows reasons for assuming that there is really no generic distinction between the American Lepidosiren and the African Protopterus ; the former name should therefore, on grounds of priority, be retained. 3 Loc, cit. p. 508. * This is a curious point of similarity to the ova of the Frog (see Balfour, Comp. Embr. vol. ii. p. 99; Pfliiger, Arch, f. d. ges. Physiol. Bd. xxxi. 1883), not remarked upon by Ayers in his paper. West,Newman k Co imp. P. Z.5.1886.Pl. XXVIII oO 3 hs 0) os) Q, eo) ~~ é GH 1e) © & (S) « Coward ad nat del et lith. 9 tro. 1606), Pl, Rie RS) Osos es =) o 0 000 2950. 3 Ce 6,000 o 3 P0009 805, Garo. CoR0 000 O03 °Ss OPoo%%> 60 290% 5° 6 oy0 OQeBaqaades as, o 8998 ° 268900) '0%9099 09 09599 59090096 9'9,20 Ova of Protopterus. — - 4i - 1 ewe oh a 7 ‘+ ee a = 1886. ] OVUM OF LEPIDOSIREN. 273 Concerning the origin of the ova I have no observations to offer. I shall therefore at once proceed to the discussion of the different parts of the ovum and its follicular epithelium. Il. Egg-membranes. The question of the origin of the different egg-membranes and their homologies throughout the Vertebrate series has always been one of interest ; but the opinions held with regard to these points differ very much. Balfour considers it tolerably certain’ that in most Vertebrata there are two egg-membranes present—(1) an outer structureless vitelline membrane, and (2) an inner perpendicularly striate zona radiata, both of which are formed as a differentiation of the egg-protoplasm. Of these two membranes the vitelline is obviously the first to appear ; the zona radiata subsequently makes its appear- ance, but is reabsorbed into the ovum some time before the latter is mature ; the vitelline membrane persists for a longer period, but eventually disappears. In the youngest ova of Protopterus I could detect no trace of any membrane ; as development proceeds a very delicate homogeneous membrane encircles the ovum. This membrane probably corresponds to the vitelline membrane, but I have no exact observations to offer on its origin; judging from analogy it is a product of the egg-protoplasm, which at this stage (Plate XXIX. fig. 8) is of uniform granular appearance. At the same time the membrane was not at all firmly adherent to the ovum, but seemed to have a much more intimate relation to the follicular epithelium ; in sections that were less perfect than others this membrane was detached from the surface of the ovum. In more mature ova-—of the stage represented in Plate XXVIII. fig. 1—there was present, in addition to the vitelline membrane, a thick membrane lying beneath it, and evidently formed as a specialization of the peripheral layer of the ovum. For the most part this membrane was as distinct from the subjacent protoplasm of the ovum as is shown in Plate XXIX. fig. 2. Here and there it appeared to pass gradually and without any break into the substance of the protoplasm. ‘This membrane shows radial striations (Plate XXIX. fig. 2), and appears to me in all probability to correspond to the zona radiata of other Vertebrata. ‘The extreme thinness of the vitelline membrane as compared with the zona radiata is illustrated in Plate XXIX. fig. 2. In this stage there was no trace of any formation of yolk except that the egg-protoplasm has taken on a reticulate arrangement (see Plate XXIX. fig. 2) in preparation for the yolk-formation soon to commence. In the next stage, in which yolk-formation has already commenced, the conditions of the egg-membranes are slightly different, the dif- ference principally relating to the outer vitelline membrane. The vitelline membrane in this stage is very markedly thicker than in the previous stage ; it is also much more intimately connected with the follicular epithelium than with the zona radiata. The latter _ + Comp. Embr. vol. i. p. 50. 274 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [May 4, membrane shows signs of its subsequent reabsorption into the ovum, the lower margin being rather less distinct than in the earlier stage. At no time is the zona radiata so distinctly ‘‘ membranous” as the vitelline membrane; it always has a granular appearance, and if it were not for the fine vertical strie, which are presumably the expres- sion of pores, would be regarded as merely a superficial layer of the protoplasm appearing more deeply stained because of its firmer tex- ture. If the vertical striation be really due to protoplasmic processes traversing the zona radiata, this latter must be regarded as a distinct metamorphosis of the superficial layer of the ovum ; otherwise, if it really has retained its protoplasmic character, there would be no necessity for special protoplasmic filaments to pass through its substance: the whole layer would serve equally well as a conductor of nutritive material. The disappearance of this membrane, which commences with the commencing formation of yolk, is complete in the later stages of the maturation of the ovum ; and the disappearance is easier to understand on the assumption that the zona radiata is only but little changed from its original protoplasmic condition, its reabsorption being therefore a kind of solution. On the other hand, the thinning of the vitelline membrane in the later stages of egg- development is possibly purely mechanical, being due to the exten- sion of an elastic membrane through the increasing bulk of the egg- contents. The pores in the zona radiata are very generally believed to admit processes of the follicular epithelium, and where no imperforate membrane exists between the zona radiata and the follicular epithe- lium, as in Mammals, it has been actually demonstrated that such is the case. In Elasmobranchs Balfour * has described an enlargement of some of the follicular célls as the ovum approaches maturity ; these are doubtless concerned with the nutrition of the ovum, but they cannot (?) come into actual contact with it because the vitelline membrane divides them. It is a significant fact, however, that at this period the vitelline membrane becomes extremely thin, so that it would evidently favour osmosis. In this case the perforations of the zona radiata may still be the expression of pores which contain prolongations, not of the follicular cells, but of the egg-protoplasm, which thus takes an active part in its own nutrition, as in the lower forms, and is not merely passively fed by the follicular epithelium. This may well be the case with Lepidosiren, though I have been unable actually to demonstrate the protoplasmic contents of the pores in the zona. During this second stage of the egg-development, while the yolk is in process of formation, and there is therefore a special need of extra nutrition, not merely are these pores in the zona radiata, but in the more highly refracting membrane outside of this (Plate XXIX. fig. 5), which I believe to be the thickened vitelline mem- brane of earlier stages. These pores are very obvious indeed, and impossible to be over- 1 Quart. Journ. Micr, Sci, 1878, p, 405. 1886. ] OVUM OF LEPIDOSIREN. 275 looked in good sections. The vitelline membrane in earlier stages is so thin that I have found it impossible to detect any pores ; it may be that they are present, or that the nutrition of the ovum in the earlier stages is carried on, as suggested above, by osmosis, while during the later stages, when the formation of yolk is going on and the need for nutrition increased, direct contact between the follicular cells and the ovum is necessary to convey adequate nourishment. In the stage represented in Plate XXVIII. fig. 3, which is charac- terized by the extraordinary proliferation of the follicular cells and their migration into the interior of the ovum, there was no trace whatever of any membrane. The ovum lies within the follicular epithelium, and in actual contact with its cells. Indeed the very migration of the follicular cells into the ovum would necessitate the absence of such a membrane, and there were, at any rate, no traces of it except in the well-marked limiting membranes (see Plate XXIX. fig. 7) of the follicular cells, which, however, I never observed to be separated from the cells themselves, and were continuous all round them. The absence of any such membrane round the ova of this stage is one of the strongest arguments against regarding them as a stage intercalated between the last and the next to be described. Into this question I shall enter later. In the latest stages, in which the ovum is entirely occupied by yolk, the follicular epithelium is separated from the contents of the ova by an extremely fine and delicate homogeneous membrane (Plate XXIX. fig. 6); this membrane probably corresponds, in some ova at least, to the vitelline membrane which has persisted after the disap- pearance of the internal zona radiata. In some ova belonging to this stage, the occurrence of a few scattered cells through the substance of the yolk appears to indicate that they have been derived from ova belonging to the stage just referred to; in these also a thin delicate membrane lay between the ovum and the surrounding follicular epithelium. In this case the membrane must be regarded as a new formation, though perhaps still homologous with the vitelline mem- brane. In the number and structure of its membranes the ovum of Lepidosiren appears to be related much more nearly to the Elasmo- branchs than to the Amphibia, with which group the general anatomical structure of the reproductive organs more closely corresponds. In the Amphibia in fact, according to Waldeyer and Kolessnikow, there is only a single delicate membrane, developed comparatively late, and showing a radial striation, Gotte’s obser- vations on Bombinator * point to the existence of a single membrane, clear and structureless, which arises by a metamorphosis of the external layer of the ovum. In Triton Iwakawa? describes and figures a single structureless membrane surrounding the ovum. In these cases the single membrane evidently represents the membrane in Lepidosiren which I have termed vitelline. The discrepancies in the observations of these authors on the structure of the membrane, * Entwickelungsgeschichte der Unke, p. 19, 2 Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci. vol. xxii. (1882), p- 274, pl. xxiv. figs. 2, 4-26, 276 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [May 4, whether it is really structureless or radiately striate, are possibly to be explained by supposing that, as in Lepidosiren, it is structure- less at one time and striate at another. So also with the observations of Brock upon the Teleostean ovum. This anatomist figures (Joe. cit. pl. xxviii. tig. 7 f, pl. xxix. fig. 6 Be) two ova, both of which are provided with two egg-membranes: in the one the outer egg-membrane is striate, while in the other it is unstriate ; in the latter case it is considerably thinner than in the former, and the processes of the follicular cells, whether by acci- dent or design, are drawn as if stopping short at the outside of the membrane. Brock’s figures seem to me to point to the con- clusion that the outer egg-membrane (vitelline membrane) arises, as in Lepidosiren, as a differentiation of the outer layer of the egg- protoplasm, and is subsequently perforated by processes of the follicular cells as the ovura approaches maturity. On the other hand, the perforations in the zona radiata would seem in this case to be caused, as suggested above, by protoplasmic strands radiating outwards from the ovum. ‘The observations of Owsiannikow appear to contradict this explanation. Owsiannikow has figured (doc. cit. pl. i. fig. 3) the branching of the processes of the follicular cells after they have passed through the outer membrane, in which the pores are wider apart, to fit into the more closely arranged pores of the inner membrane. III. History of the Germinal Vesicle. My observations on the development of the germinal vesicle are unfortunately rather meagre. I have been unable to trace it con- tinuously from the youngest to the most mature ova. The principal lacuna in the history of the germinal vesicle is the very interesting stage characterized by the immigration of the follicular cells into the substance of the ovum. In this stage I could observe no appearance whatever of a germinal vesicle, which is much to be regretted, as it would be interesting to know what are its relations to the immigrating follicular cells ’. 1 observed two distinct stages in the development of the germinal vesicle which will now be described. The first stage is found in young ova, in which the yolk-formation has not yet begun. The germinal vesicle is of an oval form, and lies excentrically within the ovum; it is bounded externally by a very fine membrane in Ceratodus, according to Ayers’s figure (Joc. cit. pl. xviii. fig. 76). In my own preparations (Plate XXIX. figs. 3, 4) the limiting ! Dr. Balbiani has described in the egg of Geophilus (Zool. Anzeig. Nos. 155, 156) a formation of cells from the germinal vesicle which pass through the substance of the ovum, and ultimately range themselves round its periphery to forma follicular epithelium. These stages are depicted in aseries of woodcuts, some of which bear not a little resemblance to the stage in the maturation of the ovum of Lepidosiren described above. It is possible that the appearances described by Balbiani may ultimately be reconciled with those described by myself in the present paper. Balbiani’s observations have not, however, been confirmed by the recent researches of Heathcote (Quart. Journ. Mier, Sci. 1886), though in many insects’ ova other observers have noted similar processes. 1886.] OVUM OF LEPIDOSIREN. 277 membrane of the germinal vesicle is not always very obvious; but as there is a sharp contrast between the protoplasm of the germinal vesicle and the surrounding substance of the ovum (indi- cated by the much deeper staining of the former by borax carmine), there comes to be an appearance of a delicate membrane surrounding the germinal vesicle ; this membrane has not a double contour. In younger ova there is a very distinct membrane bounding the germinal vesicle externally ; this membrane is more easily to be distinguished in my: preparations from the fact that it is very deeply stained. Although the boundaries of the germinal vesicle are distinct enough, there is no cavity dividing it from the egg-protoplasm ; the granules of the latter are everywhere in contact with the germinal vesicle. In several preparations the germinal vesicle had shrunk ; but in every case observed by me the wall of the germinal vesicle was covered with egg-protoplasm granules, thus showing that the spaces surrounding the germinal vesicle in that figure are not natural, but due to alterations caused by the contraction of the ger- minal vesicle. The interior of the germinal vesicle is occupied by a finely- granular matter, which is almost homogeneous throughout. In certain tracts, however, the granules are more deeply stained and often larger ; these granules form a reticulum (Plate XXIX. fig. 3). In the ovum of Triton, lwakawa illustrates (loc. cit. pl. xxiv. fig. 27) a very similar condition of the nucleoplasm. The germinal spots are very numerous, and form a layer surrounding the germinal vesicle ; the latter is shown on a superficial view in fig. 3, and in transverse section in Plate XXIX. fig. 4. The germinal spots are of very varying size, and usually oval or circular m form ; borax carmine stains them more deeply than the surrounding nucleoplasm ; they are evidently not homogeneous, but appear to consist of an outer sheath of stout consistency, and very deeply stained by the reagent, and within this an apparently more fluid core which is not deeply stained. The presence of numerous germinal spots is figured by Ayers for both Ceratodus (plate xviii. fig. 76) and Lepidosiren (plate xvii. fig. 27). a8 is also characteristic of the Teleostean ovum *, and is mentioned by Messrs. Balfour and Parker? in Lepidosteus. Among Amphibia Triton shows the same condition of the germinal spots. In ova of the stage represented in Plate XXVIII. fig. 2, the substance of the ovum which immediately surrounds the germinal vesicle differs from the rest in being more loosely compacted. In ova which are distinguished by the enormously increased functional activity of the follicular epithelium, the germinal vesicle could not be found. In all probability, however, my failure to find the germinal vesicle is not due to its absence. 1 Brock, ‘“ Beitrige z. Anatomie und Histologie der Geschlechtsorgane der Knochenfische,” Morphol. Jahrb. Bd. iv. (1878) p. 505, pl. xxviii. figs. 8, 11. 2 “On the Anatomy and Development of Lepzdosteus,” Phil. Trans. 1884, 278 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [May 4, In older ova the germinal vesicle has altered somewhat from the characters which it presents in the earlier stages of the matu- ration of the ovum. In Plate XXIX. fig. 1, I have sketched a germinal vesicle precisely as it appeared in transverse section. It will be noticed, in the first place, that the germinal vesicle is very sharply marked off from the surrounding substance of the ovum, and in the section figured has become separated from it throughout a considerable area; this separation is no doubt due to shrinkage, but serves to show the very trenchant line of division which separates germinal vesicle and ovum, since no yolk-spherules were found to remain adherent to the germinal vesicle. The substance of the germinal vesicle in ova of this stage of develop- ment has become specialized into an outer peripheral portion and a central core. These two areas of the germinal vesicle are almost as sharply marked off from each other as is the outer layer of the ger- minal vesicle from the surrounding egg-protoplasm and yolk. This is clearly shown in the same figure (Plate XXIX. fig. 1), and, as in the first case, is probably due to shrinking of the germinal vesicle when plunged into the preservative reagent. Along the upper side of the preparation illustrated in the figure already referred to, the central core of the germinal vesicle has shrunk away from the external sheath ; along the lower margin of the germinal vesicle the con- traction has not caused a separation of the two constituents, but a split in the outer layer, which I have not indicated in the figure. The outer coat of the germinal vesicle is very easily distinguish- able from the inner core; it is much more finely granular in structure, appearing occasionally almost homogeneous, and has become stained a pale pink. The inner core is more coarsely granular, and has a yellowish tinge, hardly owing to the non- penetration of the staining reagent, since the imbedded nucleoli were deeply stained. The substance of the internal core contained elliptical spaces here and there, which are possibly themselves due to contraction. The boundary line between the central core and the peripheral layer is also marked by the nucleoli, which are for the most part situated in a single layer at the extreme periphery of the central core. A few, however, as indicated in the figure, are to be found in the more central regions of the core. The nucleoli were extremely conspicuous owing to their vivid staining with the reagent, and appeared to be solid, being uniformly stained throughout. In the earlier stages of the germinal vesicle mention has already been made of the annular appearance of the germinal spots. The germinal spots were very unevenly distributed and of varying size, but were never found in the peripheral layer of the germinal vesicle. In Triton, Iwakawa has described what appear to be very similar changes in the germinal vesicle, though there is some little difference in detail; as the egg approaches maturity the germinal spots move in towards the centre of the germinal vesicle, leaving a homogeneous, more deeply stained peripheral area, 1886. ] OVUM OF LEPIDOSIREN. 279 IV. The Follicular Epithelium and the Formation of Yolk. In the youngest ova (Plate XXIX. fig. 8) the protoplasm is dense and solid, staining deeply with borax carmine; the uniform appear- ance of the egg-contents indicates that no formation of yolk has at present commenced. In the next stage, where the zona radiata is well developed (Plate XXVIII. fig. 1), the protoplasm of the ovum is less dense and has acquired here and there a reticulate arrangement, which is well shown in the figure referred to. In ova slightly more mature (Plate XVIII. fig. 2) the formation of the yolk is in active progress, though for the present confined to limited areas of the egg-protoplasm. None of my sections display any ova which show the first beginning of yolk-formation. In Plate XXVIII. fig. 2, it will be noted that the yolk appears in patches usually spherical in shape and larger or smaller; the yolk has the form of minute spherules and aggregations of spherules, which are easily distinguishable from the surrounding protoplasm, which is also granular, by their more coarsely granular appearance. They have also been stained much more darkly by the borax carmine. The yolk-spherules invariably make their appearance in the inter- spaces between the reticulations of the egg-protoplasm. There is thus no doubt that the yolk is actually formed in the interior of the ovum at the expense of the egg-protoplasm ; the reticulation of the egg-protoplasm, invisible in earlier stages, but completed before the appearance of yolk, is probably a preparation for the formation of the latter, which is received when formed into the interspaces between the protoplasmic strands. Ova of the next stage (Plate XXVIII. fig. 4) show the yolk- spherules well developed and filling up the entire ovum; the sphe- rules themselves are small and of varying size ; occasionally numbers of yolk-spherules had run together to form irregular shaped masses ; these yolk-masses, owing to their size and impenetrability, were in- variably left unstained. The yolk at this period entirely fills the ovum, and is spread throughout it in a perfectly uniform fashion ; there was no indication of any peripheral layer free, or nearly free, from yolk. The ovum displayed in Plate XXVIII. fig. 4 is remarkable for the fact that the yolk is distinctly differentiated into two layers—a thin peripheral layer, and a central mass ; the boundary between the two was perfectly distinct, there being an absolute break, a narrow line perfectly free from yolk-spherules ; the outer layer was also rendered more conspicuous by the lighter staining of the reagent. I have noticed several ova among my sections which displayed this curious differentiation. Throughout its whole development the ovum is surrounded by a single layer of follicular epithelium-cells ; these cells are flattened as in the Amphibia, and have a large deeply staining nucleus. In most cases a membrana propria folliculi could be detected outside these cells. 280 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [May 4, It seems to me to be fairly certain that the ova represented in Plate XXVIII. figs. 1, 2, 4, are progressive stages in egg-development : there is a gradual increase of size accompanied by various changes in the egg-contents, the germinal vesicle, and the egg-membranes, which all tend to prove the truth of this supposition. All these different stages were frequently to be observed in a single section. In the same sections were a number of very peculiar ova, displayed in Plate XXVIII. fig. 3; these were for the most part intermediate in size between ova of the third stage (fig. 2) and the more mature ova (fig. 4); in a few cases, however, they were distinctly smaller than ova of the third stage. This last fact would be hardly sufficient of itself to prove that these ova do not form a stage intercalated between Stages 3 and 4, because there is often some irregularity in size ; larger ova, particularly if they are not much larger, could not be positively regarded as more mature than smaller ova. In the first place, however, the structure of these ova and the conditions of the follicular epithelium are so markedly different from ova of any other stage, that it seems difficult to assign them to the same series ; and, in the second place, I have been able to observe no transitional stages between these ova and those belonging to Stages 2 or 3. On the other hand, these ova eventually acquire the same appearance as ova that have evidently passed through Stages 2 and 3; to this point I shall return later. I must for the present leave it an open question as to whether these ova form part of the same series as those dis- played in Plate XXVIII. figs. 1, 2, 4, or whether the ovary of Pro- topterus contains ova of two kinds which follow a different course of development though they ultimately eome to be identical in appearance. These ova (Plate XXVIII. fig. 3) are surrounded by a follicular epithelium which, like that of the other ova, consists of a single layer of cells; these cells are long and somewhat columnar in form (Plate XXIX. fig. 7); they are limited by a distinct membrane and contain a darkly stained nucleus as well as a number of highly refracting round particles which resemble in every respect the yolk-spherules of the contained ovum. These follicular cells rest upon the surface of the ovum, and there is no trace whatever of any membrane separating them from the ovum. The connective-tissue sheath of the follicle was very distinctly marked off from the surrounding ovarian stroma; near to the peri- phery of the ovum were an immense number of blood-capillaries of large size and gorged with blood. These capillaries, although probably belonging to the stroma-sheath, were in many cases pressed down among the epithelial cells of the follicle, appearing as if they were actually lying between the cells; this remarkable appearance of the blood-vessels is illustrated in Plate X XIX. fig. 7, which represents a portion of the periphery of such an ovum very highly magnified. The interior of the ovum contained abundant yolk ; but in no case did I succeed in finding any trace of a germinal vesicle. The yolk consisted of highly refracting spherules which were for the most part of small size, but here and there were very much larger spherules. 1886. ] OVUM OF LEPIDOSIREN. 281 The structure of these ova and the surroundiug follicle is extremely remarkable, and quite unlike any other ova that I have seen in trans- verse sections of the ovary of Protopterus. But the peculiarities of these ova do not end here. Scattered throughout the substance of the yolk are an immense number of cells more or less spherical in form (Plate XXVIII. fig. 3, ¢c). These cells were limited in most cases by a very distinct external membrane; their contents are a mass of rounded bodies which are quite indistinguishable from the yotk-spherules of the ovum, and strands of granular protoplasmic substance ; furthermore there is a distinct and large nucleus deeply stained by borax carmine, and within this a number of nucleoli and granules. These cells appeared to be in a condition of active multiplication, the various stages of which are indicated in Plate XXIX. figs. 9-20. In fig. 10 the nucleus is constricted in the middle; in fig. 11 the nucleus has divided ; in fig. 12 the two cells have become distinct but lie close together ; in fig. 18 cell-division has evidently gone on very rapidly, as there is a nest of four cells pressed closely together aud occupying a common cavity in the yolk. In some cells the amount of yolk-granules present was considerably less than in others. Occasionally (figs. 19, 20) the yolk-particles had run together to form a single large droplet. In a few cases I observed (fig. 15) the nucleus to be thrust altogether without the cells ; and here and there within the substance of the ovum were apparently nuclei without any cells. I am not inclined, however, to lay too much stress upon the last mentioned fact, because it would be rather difficult in any case to detect the boundaries of one of these cells if it were packed quite full of yolk- spherules. In other cases (fig. 13) the nucleus had become paler in colour (Jess acted upon by the staining reagent) as well as more homogeneous. Nuclei of this kind might easily be mistaken for larger yolk- spherules ; indeed my only reasons for believing them to be altered nuclei are their similiarity in size and shape to the more normal nuclei, their occurrence in cells that have become emptied of their contents, and the fact that they are rather more deeply stained than the surrounding yolk. Concerning the nature of these bodies there appears to me to be three possibilities :—either (1) they are similar to the white yolk- spherules of the Fowl’s egg; or (2) they are follicular cells which have migrated into the interior of the ovum ; or (3) they are cells which have been formed anew within the substance of the ovum. The first alternative, that the structures in question correspond to the white yolk-spheres of birds, seems at first sight to bea likely explanation of their occurrence, especially since they are only to be seen in comparatively young ova. The white yolk-spheres of birds' are rounded bodies containing one or more highly refractive nucleus- like bodies in their interior; but these apparent nuclei are really * Foster and Balfour's ‘Elements of Embryology,’ p. 16. Proc. Zoo. Soc.—1886, No. XIX. 19 282 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [May 4, very dissimilar to true nuclei, and the sphere has no limiting mem- brane. It is doubtful therefore whether they can be regarded as cells, though it is probable that, as the segmentation of the ovum advances, the white yolk is directly converted into cells. Now in the cell-like bodies which I have described in the immature ovum of Lepidosiren there is a very distinct and obvious nucleus (figs. 9-20), which is in fact entirely similar to a nucleus of one of the follicular cells ; it is deeply stained by borax carmine and unevenly stained, so that it has the appearance of being formed of a meshwork of condensed protoplasm, the interspaces of which are filled by a homogeneous substance which is less acted upon by the reagent. In some instances there was more than a single nucleus to each of these cells, but it is quite impossible to confound these nuclei with the surrounding particles of yolk. Furthermore, in many cases the limiting membrane of the cells was distinctly visible (figs. 9 &c.) ; and the fact that the cell-contents were hardly acted upon by the staining fluid rendered the perception of this membrane easier. There seems to be but little doubt that these structures are veritable cells, and are not in any way comparable to the white yolk-spheres. The question then arises, What is the origin of these cells? Are they formed anew within the substance of the ovum, or have they migrated from the follicle into the interior of the ovum? The former supposition is supported by no facts that I have been able to note, and it is distinctly negatived by other facts. © In the first place, these cells are very closely similar to the cells of the follicular epithelium; like them they are bounded by a distinct limiting membrane; the contents of both consist of proto- plasmic strands and numerous highly refractive particles similar to the yolk-particles ; the nucleus is identical in shape and size ; and the behaviour of both to the staining reagent is precisely the same. This series of facts would, however, be hardly regarded as proof that these cells have originated from the follicular epithelium; it might be supposed that the cells have arisen within the ovum, and that some of them have migrated to the periphery to form the follicle, as has been stated by various observers to be the case in certain other ova (see p. 276); but the immense vascular development round the follicular epithelium that has been already mentioned seems to indicate that the main activity is centered in these latter cells; and this fact, coupled with the additional fact that in certain instances there were masses of migrating cells evidently in course of being budded off (Plate XXVIII. figs. 5,6) from the follicular epithelium, seems to indicate that the second supposition as to the origin of these cells is correct, viz. that they are formed by the proliferation of the follicular cells and migrate into the interior of the ovary. The migration of these cells also explains the absence of a limiting membrane to the ovum. A. “formed” membrane, however thin, would evidently prevent such a migration. It appears to me possible to make another statement as a deduction from the facts just detailed: that the follicular epithelium-cells secrete the yolk which is conveyed to the interior of the ovum by 1886. | OVUM OF LEPIDOSIREN. 283 means of the proliferating follicular cells. I do not mean to assert that these ova do not also form yolk endogenously, as I have observed in other cases (Plate XXVIII. fig. 2); but the similarity between the contents of the follicular cells and their derivatives which migrate into the interior of the ovum, on the one hand, with the yolk-spherules of the ovum, on the other hand, coupled with the fact of the subse- quent disintegration and disappearance of the immigrated cells, seems to me to necessitate the conclusion that at least part of the yolk is so formed. Unfortunately I am quite unable to record any observations as to the earlier stages of these ova; they may be a stage intercalated between Stages 3 and 4, as already suggested. In favour of this supposition are the following facts :—(1) that for the most part these ova are intermediate in size between the presumed earlier and later stages ; (2) that there is no proof of their independent origin ; (3) the unlikelihood (?) of there being two kinds of ova with a different process of growth. Against suchasupposition I may adduce the following arguments:— (1) the absence of any transitional stages between these ova and the presumed younger stages; (2) the disappearance of the vitelline membrane during this stage and its subsequent reappearance, or at least the appearance of a similar membrane. Whatever may be the origin of these ova, they come ultimately to resemble in every particular the ordinary mature ova. I have fortunately succeeded in obtaining sections of an ovum considerably larger than that just described, which presented the following characters :—The follicular epithelium was considerably reduced in importance, as was also the accompanying network of blood-capil- laries. Between the follicular epithelium and the ovum was a distinct membrane excessively thin; there were hardly any traces left of the immigrating follicular cells present in such great numbers in the earlier stages; I noted perhaps one or two in as many sections. It is interesting to observe that if these ova, characterized by the formation of the yolk from the follicular cells, are really different from the other ova, they are in certain respects more Amphibian like than the other ova; not in the immigration of follicular cells, but in the late appearance of a single thin membrane shutting off the ovum from the follicular epithelium with which it was previously in contact. Gdtte, in his ‘ Entwickelungsgeschichte der Unke,’ makes the following statement (p. 16):—‘ Ferner kann man bei der Anwendung des Wassers nachweisen dass der Follikelinhalt noch unmittelbar die Zellen beriihrt, dass aber die Grenze zwischen beiden Theilen eine sehr scharfe ist und sie durchaus nicht continuirlich zusammenhingen.” It is only later that a membrane surrounding the ovum and separating it from the follicular cells appears. Similarly [wakawa’s observations upon Triton’ show that in the young stages the follicular cells are in contact with the body of the ovum. In more mature ova a membrane comes to surround the © Quart. Journ. Mier, Sei. vol, xxii, p. 270. 19* 284 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [May 4, body of the ovum; this membrane does not appear until after the yolk has begun to be formed. Leaving the question as to the origin of these ova undecided for the present, the penetration of the follicular epithelium into the interior of the ovum and the formation of yolk by the follicular cells are in my opinion strongly supported by the facts that I have been able to bring forward. I will now compare these facts with similar observations on other ova. A migration of follicular cells into the ovum has been recorded by several writers, but other writers have thrown doubts upon the accuracy of these observations. In Elasmobranchs and Amphibia nothing of the kind has been recorded ; Balfour, in studying the ovarian ova of Scyllium, particularly directed his attention to this point, but was unable to find any trace whatsoever of cells such as have been described by His in the Teleostean ovum; he suggests indeed that His may have mistaken the white yolk-spherules for such cells ; the resemblance of white yolk-spherules to cells is not a little striking, and may easily have led to mistakes. With regard to the Teleosteans, however, there is some variety of opinion as to this point. His’ has described a migration of the follicular cells through the pores of the zona radiata into the interior of the ovum; but Brock (loc. cit. p. 558) doubts the truth of this observation, not merely because he did not himself succeed in seeing any such migration, but because it appeared to him inexplicable that if there were so general an immigration the follicular epithelium should yet maintain its continuity. The most recent writer on the subject whose memoir is known to me is Owsjannikow*. This author describes in detail a number of facts relative to the structure of the Teleostean ovum which are often somewhat difficult to understand. With regard to the supposed immigration of cells (leucocytes) into the interior of the ovum, believed by His to occur, this author states that it has not been observed by him, and that further the necessity for such a process of nutrition does not exist, since nutritive material is supplied to the ovum through the processes of the follicular cells, which are so universally admitted to pass through the egg-membrane. At the same time Owsjannikow describes in Osmerus and Acerina a peculiar condition of the yolk, also referred to by His, but denied by others, which in a certain degree is similar to the condition which I have described in the present paper in Lepidosiren. The yolk-bodies (*‘Dotter-Kugeln ”) contained in many cases nuclei often difficult to show and needing most complicated processes for their demonstra- tion; in these structures, which the author calls cells, the oil-drops take their origin. Without additional investigations it does not seem to me permissible to regard these bodies as true cells ; their appearance in Owsjannikow’s figures (pl. ii. figs. 22, 23) is very 1 « Bierstock der Knochenfische,’ p. 22, &e. 2 “Studien tiber das Ei, hauptsachlich bei Knochenfischen,” Mém. d. 1 Acad; Mm. Pétersh. t. xxxiii. no. 4. 1886. | OVUM OF LEPIDOSIREN. 285 much like that of the white yolk-spheres of Sauropsida. In any case these bodies are not supposed to have an extrinsic origin, but to arise within the ovum. On the other hand, a penetration of follicular cells through the micropyle (doc. cit. pl. i. fig. 6) appears really to occur in many osseous fish and to be comparable to the proli- feration into the ovum of the follicular cells in Lepidosiren. Kelessnikow! confirms the accuracy of His’s results as to the entrance of leucocytes into the ovum, but does not think this process to have much functional importance. In Mammals a number of observations have been published which tend to show that there is a migration of cells, which is evi- dently comparable to the facts which I have detailed above in Lepidosiren. Lindgren? has described such a migration of follicular cells, and figures an ovum which is half filled with unaltered follicular cells. Won Sehlen® and H. Virchow* have confirmed the accuracy of Lindgren’s observations. More recently Schater® has described a remarkable series of changes in the Rabbit’s ovum which do not altogether tend to the same conclusion. In young ova, which are as yet surrounded by a follicle consisting of only a single layer of cells, peculiar cells make their appearance in the peripheral regions, and ultimately form a single layer of cells which surround the ovum, lying beneath the follicular layer. Schafer believes that these cells are not derived from the follicular layer, but they originate in the ovum. He compares very justly his own observations with those of Kuppfer on Ascidia canina. Kuppfer* had shown that cells appear in the interior of the ovum and range themselves round its periphery. Kuppfer, however, believed that these cells originate in the ovum itself, and are not, as Kowalevsky supposed, a product of the follicular epithelium. His statements therefore are in complete accord with those of Schiifer; while Lindgren, von Sehlen, and H. Virchow describe a process in the maturation of the mammalian ovum which is more comparable to that described by Kowalevsky in the case of the Ascidians. The latest writer on the mammalian ovum, Mr. Heape, did not find any such migration of follicular cells, and concludes that the observations put on record by Lindgren, von Sehlen, and Virchow are based upon abnormal processes. It is to be noted, however, that the type studied by Heape” (Mole) was not studied by any one of these naturalists, and this fact may possibly account for the discrepancies in their statements. In the latest edition of Quain’s ‘Anatomy’ it is suggested that the entrance of follicular cells into the ovum described by Lindgren, von Sehlen, and H. Virchow may be an abnormal process and not a regular 1 Archiv f. mikr. Anat. vol. xv. (1878) p. 399. 2 Arch. f. Anat. u. Phys. 1877. 3 Arch. f. Anat. u. Phys. 1882. 4 Arch. f. mikr. Anat. Bd. xxiv. (1884). 5 Proc. Roy. Soc. vol. xxx. (1880) p. 243. 6 Arch. f. mikr. Anat. Bd. viii. See also the papers of many others (Sabatier, Roule, Fol) on the Ascidian ovum, and the facts referred to in footnote on p. 276, supra. These have been lately summed up in Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci., June 188¢, by Mr. Arthur Thomson. _ 7 Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci., Feb. 1886. 286 Mi. F, E. BEDDARD ON THE [May 4, occurrence. I would suggest myself that this migration of follicular cells in the Mammalia is a record of what occurred in their Dipnoan ancestors *, where the migration of follicular cells into the interior of the ovum was an important process in connection with the formation of yolk. it is, however, among the Invertebrata that the most striking resemblances to the immigration of follicular cells in Lepidosiren are to be found, and more particularly in the Cephalopoda. Some remarkable facts with respect to the nutrition of the ova of Sepia have been discovered by Lankester, which are analogous to the facts recorded by myself in Lepidosiren. In Sepia® the ova are surrounded by a single layer of follicular cells which are supplied externally with an abundant vascular network. The epithelial layer becomes folded in a complicated fashion, and the folds project into the interior of the ovum (Joc. cit. pl. 12. fig. 23); the cells of the epithelium take on a character resembling that of the goblet- cells, and pour out their contents into the ovum ; moreover the cells also proliferate and pass off into the interior of the ovary (loc. cit. pl. 12. fig. 25), becoming gradually absorbed. Kowalevsky * has described a proliferation of the follicular cells of Ascidians which migrate into the interior of the ovum, and eventually form (Joc. cit. pl. 10. figs. 2-4) a complete layer round it, so that the follicle comes to be two layers deep; the outer layer, which is made up of very much larger cells, represents the original follicular epithelium, while the inner layer consists of very much smaller cells. In many of the lower Invertebrata the ovum is largely nourished at the expense of the surrounding cells. In the Platyhelminthes a peculiar organ, the vitellarium, elaborates yolk-particles which are subsequently absorbed by the ovum ; analogous processes take place in many Insects. In all these cases the ovum retains the capacity, inherited from its Protozoan ancestor, of feeding by the intussus- ception of solid particles. All these facts seem to me to be directly comparable to what has been described above in Lepidosiren, The secretion of yolk by the follicular cells in the Platyhelminth and the absorption of this yolk by the ovum only differs in degree from the proliferation of the follicular cells in Sepia and Lepidosiren and their subsequent absorption by the ovum. I may say a few words with regard to the special fact that the yolk is largely elaborated with follicular cells and conveyed to the ovum by the proliferation of these cells and their subsequent disinte- gration In the interior of the ovum. Such a formation of yolk in the Vertebrate ovum has not been put beyond a doubt; indeed most observations on the subject seem to show that the yolk is generally * T imagine that few will dispute Prof. Huxley’s opinion that the Mammalia in the course of their evolution have passed through a Dipnoid stage (see P.Z.8. 1880, p. 661). * “On the Developmental History of Mollusca,” Phil. Trans. 1875, p. 43. * « Weitere Studien tiber d. Entwickelung d. Ascidien,” Archiy f. mikr, Anat. Bd. vii. (1871) p. 101. 1886. ] OVUM OF LEPIDOSIREN. 287 formed in the interior of the ovum itself and has not an extrinsic origin. Kolessnikow’?, however, concludes his paper on the Teleostean and Amphibian ovum with the statement that the yolk is chiefly a product of the follicular epithelium, which behaves in this respect like a gland. Apart from this fact, the follicular cells do, however, play an important part in supplying the ovum with nutriment in most Vertebrata; but this is not in the form of yolk, which is sub- sequently elaborated in the ovum itself. In Elasmobranchs Balfour has noted? that certain of the cells become larger than the others, and apparently communicate within the substance of the ovum into which they pour their contents. Heape* has described some- thing very similar in the ovarian ova of the Mole, as also have Lindgren*, von Sehlen’, and Virchow*. The part which the enlarged follicular cells of Elasmobranchs play in the nutrition of the ovum is not the direct formation of yolk. Balfour has shown that the yolk originates within the protoplasm of the ovum, and is not transferred thither from the follicular cells. The reasons for this statemeut are :—(1) that the yolk-spherules first of all appear in the deeper portions of the yolk and not in the more superficial layers, as they would naturally do if they were passed into the interior of the ovum ; (2) that there is no trace of yolk-particles in the follicular cells themselves. Iwakawa’s observations on the yolk in the egg of T’riton lead to a similar conclusion. Gdtte states that in Bombinator the yolk- spherules first make their appearance in the peripheral layers of the ovum, but is inclined to think that they are formed within the substance of the ovum, and that they are not extrinsic in origin. Brock (oc. cit. p. 560) quotes and confirms Gegenbaur’ to the effect that the yolk-spherules in Teleosteans originate by the fusion of minute yolk-particles, and that this formation takes place in the peripheral layers of the ovum; only exceptionally was the neigh- bourhood of the germinal vesicle the seat of yolk-formation. In Mammalia, according to Balfour the yolk is formed in the peripheral layer of the ovum. Lepidosiren therefore appears to be remarkable in that the yolk is often formed in the follicular cells and transferred thence to the ovum. Seeing that this is the rule in many of the lower Inver- tebrata, the occurrence of this method of yolk-formation in Lepido- siren would appear to be the retention of an ancestral character. 1 Loe. cit. 2 Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci, 1878. 3 Quart. Journ. Micr. Sci. Feb. 1886. 4 Arch. f. Anat. u. Phys., Anat. Abtheil. 1877. 5 Arch, f. Anat. u. Phys., Anat. Abtheil. 1882. 8 Arch. f. mikr. Anat. vol. xxiv. (1884). 7 “Ueber den Bau und die Entwickelung der Wirbelthiereier mit partieller Dottertheilung,” Miller’s Arch. 1861, p. 405. Gegenbaur describes (p. 524) a peculiar fatty degeneration of the follicular cells which serves to loosen them from the ovum when the latter is ready for extrusion. Possibly this is to be referred to a trace of yolk-formation comparable to that described in this paper. 288 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE [May 4, V. Postembryonic Origin of Ova. This section has been added after the rest of the paper was in type; it deals with the results of some further observations which tend to confirm the supposition hinted at above, that the ovary of Lepidosiren contains ova of two kinds which have a different mode of development. It should have been mentioned that the general surface of the ovary is, for the most part, devoid of any germinal epithelium, a condition which is often met with in adult ovaries ; in places, how- ever, the germinal epithelium is very conspicuously present and in a condition of active multiplication. These patches of germinal epithelium are only occasional, as has also been noticed by Spengel’ in the case of the Frog’s ovary ; I have only succeeded in discovering them after this paper was communicated to the Society. I have been able, however, to insert a figure into Plate XXVIII. (fig. 7), which illustrates the fact that the germinal epithelium has not entirely disappeared in the mature ovary. In every case that I observed, the germinal epithelium, where it was left, was in a state of very active cell-division; the cells on the surface of the ovary were closely crowded together, and had given rise to a mass of cells three or four deep, surrounding a cavity partly filled by another mass of cells of a somewhat different appearance. The central mass of cells was invariably connected at one side only with the surrounding sphere, as shown in the figure (Plate XXVIII. fig. 7), and, at this point, its cells gradually alter in appearance until they become indistinguishable from those of the surrounding hollow sphere, which is the future follicular epithelium. The in- vesting mass of cells (7) is connected by a pedicle with the germinal epithelium (e) on the outside of the ovary, and is clearly formed by a proliferation and inward growth of its cells. The arrangement of these, as shown in the figure, gives a strong impression of motion; the cells look as if they had been arrested in the act of rapid proliferation inwards. The cells of the germinal epithelium, both those on the surface of the ovary and those which form the investing mass of the central cells, are small, but with large, deeply-stained nuclei. On the other hand the cells which occupy the interior of the sphere are much larger, and of a somewhat irregular, angular contour, and often containing more than one nucleus. As already stated, these cells pass by gradations into the follicular mass at one side only, but this may be due to shrinkage. On the outside of the central mass of cells, and forming generally a complete peripheral layer round them, is an amorphous mass («) deeply stained by the reagent; here and there nuclei, with or without some surrounding protoplasm, were imbedded in this amorphous mass, which thus has the appearance of being formed by the fusion of the peripheral layer of the central cells. I have no observations to offer as to the origin of the central mass of cells ; but their position and attachment to the peripheral layer, more particularly at one point, would seem to suggest that they arise, like 1 Semper’s ‘ Arbeiten,’ Bd. ii. 1886. | OVUM OF LEPIDOSIREN. 289 the peripheral cells, from the germinal epithelium, but that they are first invaginated and subsequently surrounded by the peripheral layer. ‘in a later stage the formation of yolk has commenced, and the cells of the central mass are in places separated from each other by aggregations of yolk-particles, though for the most part the cells remain closely adherent ; these latter, however, contain yolk-particles in their interior, and the follicular cells, which still form two or three layers, are also filled with yolk. The later stages have been already referred to (p. 283). It is clear, therefore, that in Lepidosiren there are two kinds of ova; those which arise in the way just described may possibly be confined to the postembryonic period. The mass of central cells with the surrounding follicular layers is clearly comparable to the “ Ureiernester,”’ described by Balfour and others, in many Vertebrates, e.g. Elasmobranchs. But although there is this general similarity between the ovary of Lepidosiren and that of Scyllium, there is evidently a very great difference in detail. In the Elasmobranch-ovary the nest of primitive germinal cells is imbedded in a mass which consists of the general undifferentiated cells of the germinal epithelium ; there is no definite follicular layer at this period. The protoplasm of the primitive germinal cells fuse together, and the nuclei multiply ; some of the nuclei dege- nerate, while others undergo further development, and are eventually separated off from the rest, together with a certain amount of proto- plasm, to form ova; the degenerating nuclei are absorbed and aid in the nutrition of the ova. When the ovum is formed, some of the undifferentiated germinal cells range themselves round it and form the follicular layer. A nest gives rise to a variable number of ova. The yolk is formed much later. In Lepidosiren the nest is imbedded in a mass of cells which are definitely marked off from the surrounding cells of the ovary, and can be recognized as the future follicular epithelium ; the protoplasm of at least some of the primitive germinal cells fuse together, and the nuclei appear also to multiply, if not the cells themselves in many cases; some of the nuclei degenerate (show a paler colour under the influence of borax carmine) and become irregular in shape ; the formation of yolk commences extraordinarily early (as compared with the Elasmobranch) in the mass resulting from the fusion of the peripheral cells, in the remaining cells, and in the follicular layers ; the nest gives rise to but a single ovum. It seems to me impossible to deny that the whole structure (Plate XXVIII. fig. 7), which I have compared to the “nest”? of the Elasmobranch ovary, eventually becomes a single ovum ; the question that must first be answered is, does the ovum in this case represent a single cell or is it produced by the fusion of a number of cells? The only answer to this question that the facts at my disposal enable me to give is that these ova are formed by a coalescence of a number of cells out of the nest, the remainder serving as pabulum. ‘This opinion is so far confirmatory of Gétte’s observations on the deve- 290 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE | May 4, lopment of Bombinator’; but there are certain facts adduced by Gotte which require to be recorded in Lepidosiren before my opinion can be expressed without hesitation. Gdtte observed a fusion of the nuclei as well as of the protoplasm of the primitive germinal cells ; I have not been able to detect any such fusion in Lepidosiren ; on the other hand it is difficult to interpret my results so as to regard these ova as equivalent in each case to a single cell. As already mentioned, the series of ova between the earliest stage where a mass of follicular cells contained a nest of primitive germinal cells, and the latest stage when the ovum was surrounded by a single layer of follicular cells and separated from them by a delicate mem- brane, is fairly complete ; there seems to be no doubt that somehow or other the numerous primitive germinal cells of the nest result in the formation of one ovum. There were no signs of the separation of any of these cells to form a number of different ova, as Balfour has described in Scyllium; none of the central cells became larger than the rest, and the follicular epithelium, which was specialized as such in the earliest stage observed, showed no breaks in its continuity at any time; if the ovum really represents one of the primitive germinal cells, the rest serving as pabulum, it is remarkable to find that this cell shows no difference in size or structure from the rest as development proceeds. The appearance of a fusion of some of the cells, which strongly sup- ports my view of the case, is illustrated in Plate XXVIII. fig. 7, 2; the homogeneous mass depicted in that figure contains a few nuclei, and occasionally a certain amount of the cell-protoplasm still unaltered centrally, but peripherally shading off into the supposed protoplasmic mass. It might perhaps be supposed that this peripheral darkly- staining mass is really due to the coagulation of some fluid substance ; but in that case the appearance of nuclei, without any cell-protoplasm in its interior, would have to be explained, and more particularly the presence of yolk-particles which seem to be formed by its meta- morphosis. For the present I am unable to say any more about the develop- ment and maturation of these ova; the most important matter that requires further investigation is the mode of origin of the germinal vesicle; but there are obviously other points that remain to be dis- covered before the whole history of these ova can be cleared up. It might be supposed that the facts described in this section do away with the necessity of any immigration of follicular cells; the yolk has been shown to originate largely in the primitive germinal cells, and many of the free cells remaining in the interior of the ovum during later stages are no doubt derived directly from the primitive germinal cells. In the earlier stages the follicular cells, although forming a distinct layer, are not individually very different from the central cells of the nest; hence their proliferation and migration inwards is not surprising. It has been already mentioned that the yolk commences to be formed very early in the follicular cells as well as in the central cells, so that the former evidently takes a 1 « Entwickelungsgeschichte der Unke.’ 1886. ] OVUM OF LEPIDOSIREN. 291 large share in the building up of the ovum; in later stages, but before the follicular cells have dwindled down to a single layer, there is a considerable proliferation and migration inwards of these cells (Plate XXVIII. figs. 5, 6); finally, when the ovum is surrounded by ouly a single layer of follicular cells, there is still here and there a proliferation of these cells. VI. Résumé. The observations recorded in the present paper may be briefly summed up as follows. The ovum is in the earliest stages observed composed of a mass of deeply staining granular protoplasm; it contains a germinal vesicle limited by a distinct membrane, inside of which is a peripheral layer of germinal spots; the ovum is separated from the surrounding follicular epithelium by a thin structureless membrane. The follicular epithelium is composed of a single layer of cells, each with a large deeply staining nucleus, which retains the same character through- out the whole development of the ovum. In the second stage the protoplasm of the ovum is arranged in a reticulate fashion; the germinal vesicle is not defined by a limiting membrane ; within the vitelline membrane, which is still delicate and structureless, is a well- defined zona radiata with closely arranged vertical pores. In the third stage the external vitelline membrane is much thicker and shows a radial striation, the pores being further apart than those of the external zona radiata; the latter is commencing to disappear. The formation of yolk is in active progress and takes place within the ovum, though not necessarily in its peripheral layers. In the more mature ova the yolk occupies the whole extent of the ovum ; occasionally a peripheral layer is to be distinguished from a central mass; the vitelline membrane alone is present, and is excessively thin and apparently homogeneous, with no trace of radial striation. The germinal vesicle has. undergone certain changes, chiefly in the centripetal movement of the germinal spots. A single section frequently contained ova of all the above mentioned stages ; besides these there were present in the ovary a vast number of ova which undergo a different development; in size these ova were generally larger than those of Stages 2 and 3. The follicular epithelium of the ova is composed of a single layer of large, more or less columnar cells filled with granules exactly like the yolk-particles ; these cells proliferate and migrate into the interior of the ovum; eventually they disappear: the yolk of these ova appears to be, at least in a great measure, formed by these cells, whose contents are round granules quite indistinguishable from the yolk. The follicular epithelium rests directly upon the ovum and is separated from it by no membrane. The earlier stages of these ova seem to indicate that they are formed by the fusion of a number of germinal cells. At a later stage these ova were indistinguishable from other mature ova; the follicular epithelium decreases in importance, and a delicate membrane is formed between it and the ovum. MR. J. T. CUNNINGHAM ON THE [May 4, EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES. Prats XXVIII. Explanation of lettering: f, follicular epithelium ; v.m, vitelline membrane ; zr, zona radiata; g.v, germinal vesicle; b.v, blood-vessels ; g.c, germinal cells; e, superficial germinal epithelium; ¢, cells in interior of ovum; y, yolk-masses. Fig Fig. .1. Ovum of Lepidosiren (Protopterus) before commencing formation of olk. 2. ifs of Lepidosiren (Protopterus), to show the commencing formation of yolk. 3. Ovum, with cells in interior. 4, Nearly mature ovum, to show differentiation of yolk into a peripheral and central portion and modification of germinal vesicle. 5, 6. Two oya, belonging to the same series as fig. 3, to show the proli- ferating follicular cells. 7. Early stage in development of ovum, represented in figs. 3, 5, 6, to show the central mass of germinal cells which, at x, have com- menced to fuse, and the invaginated mass of cells which form the follicular layer: 0, immature ovum belonging to series represented in figs. 1, 2, 4. Puate XXIX. 1. Germinal vesicle of ovum (Plate XXVIII. fig. 4), more highly mag- nified, to show its specialization into an outer and inner layer: m, germinal spots. 2. A portion of ovum (Plate XXVIII. fig. 1), more highly magnified. 3. Germinal vesicle of same ovum, highly magnified, superficial view : m, germinal spots. 4. The same, in section; lettering as before. 5. Portion of ovum a little more mature than that shown in Plate XXVIII. fig. 2. 6. Nearly mature ovum. 7. Less mature ovum of same series as last, to show the follicular epithe- lium resting directly upon the contents of the ovum; y, yolk- particles in follicular cells. 8. Very young ovum. 9-20. Cells from interior of ovum (Plate XXVIII. fig. 3), showing various conditions of division and degeneration : y', yolk-particles in interior of cell; x, their nucleus; ¥, yolk of ovum. 8. On the Mode of Attachment of the Ovum of Osmerus eperlanus. By J. T. Cunninenam, B.A., F.R.S.E., Fellow of University College, Oxford, and Superin- tendent of the Scottish Marine Station. (Communicated by Mr. F. E. Bepparp.) [Received Aprit 20, 1886.] (Plate XXX.) In several works on Ichthyology and Pisciculture it is stated that the ovum of the Smelt is adhesive. The mode of attachment is described as differing from that which occurs in the Herring-ovum in the following manner :—In the Herring-ovum the whole of the outer surface of the egg-membrane at the moment of deposition is gluti- nous, and the ovum becomes attached at any part of the surface EA. o. 1886. PL. ee J.T.C. del. : Brqkern @Gounedith: West, Newman & Co. ump. Ovum of Osmerus. 18&6.] OVUM OF OSMERUS EPERLANUS. 293 which comes into contact with a solid object. The ovum of the Smelt is not fixed by the surface of the ege-membrane, but sus- pended by a short filament, the distal end of which alone adheres. No detailed account seems to have been given of the nature and development of the suspending filament. Alex. Agassiz ignores altogether the assertions which have been published concerning the attachment of the Smelt-ovum. In his beautiful memoir on Pelagic Teleostean Ova, he describes a certain well-characterized pelagic ovum, and identifies it as that of Osmerus mordax, Gill. The ovum in question, or one exactly similar, has been described by Victor Hensen in the ‘ Vierte Bericht der Commission zur Untersuchung der Deutschen Meere.’ The most conspicuous characteristic of this ovum, a feature which is unique among the Teleostean ova hitherto described, is the segregation of the yolk into polyhedral masses. Agassiz refers to this character as the segmentation of the yolk, as if he considered the ovum to be holoblastic ; but in all probability the subdivision of the yolk in this case is similar in nature to the more usual subdivi- sion into yolk-spherules, and the polyhedral masses are not cells or segmentation-spheres. The same ovum was taken by myself in the Firth of Forth in June 1884, and formed the subject of a short communication which I made to the Royal Society of Edinburgh. If it be true that the ova of Osmerus eperlanus are, during develop- ment, fixed to solid objects, it is in the highest degree improbable that the ova of Osmerus mordax are pelagic ; and as the adhesive nature of the eggs of the British Smelt is beyond all question, the correct identification of the peculiar pelagic ovum studied by Hensen, myself, and Agassizis a task for the future. The latest examination of the egg of Osmerus eperlanus, before my own work, was made by Owsjannikow’, whose results appeared only last year. Owsjannikow describes the condition of the ovum when taken from the parent a short time before complete maturity has been reached. He makes no mention of the attached condition of the deposited ovum, nor of the adaptation of the structure of the ripening ovum to the future process of adhesion, My interest in the ovum of Osmerus having been strongly excited by the confusion concerning it, indicated by the literature thus summarized, I obtained some living specimens of the fish from the neighbourhood of Alloa, in the Forth, and conveyed them to my aquarium. I also attempted to fertilize some ova artificially. This experiment was made at the riverside with the fish just taken from the seine. As the weather was very cold and the water very muddy, little could be made out concerning the ova at the time of the experiment. It was seen that very few of the ova became attached to the stones on which they were allowed to fall. The greater number sank to the bottom of the water, and remained quite free ; they became opaque white shortly after expul- sion from the fish; at first they are of a translucent yellow colour. On examining them next day in the laboratory, I found they 1 “Studien iiber das Hi, hauptsachlich der Knochenfische,” Mémoires de l’Aca- démie Impériale de St. Pétersbourg, 1885. 294 ON THE OVUM OF OSMERUS EPERLANUS. [May 4, had not been fertilized and were all dead. But they all possessed a kind of membranous appendage, and there were two or three which were suspended from the surface of the stones by means of this membrane, the distal end of which had become attached at the moment of extrusion. In the free eggs no power of adhesion any longer existed. It was obvious enough that the membranous appen- dage was the so-called suspensory filament mentioned in the existing literature. But the word filament is a very inappropriate term. The membrane is flexible, and in the form of a hollow truncated cone, the sides of which are thrown into irregular folds ; the narrow end of the cone is continuous with the envelope of the egg; the attachment between the enveloping and the suspensory membrane thus forms a ring on the surface of the former. Examination of the eggs in this condition does not afford evidence of the origin of the suspensory membrane. All that could be seen was that the suspen- sory membrane was dotted all over with pores of considerable size, and that the enveloping membrane was perforated everywhere by finer pores more closely crowded. The enveloping membrane is thus a zona radiata. Examination of the eggs freshly pressed from the female gave the complete explanation of all the facts. These eggs were nearly, and some of them quite, mature. They are enclosed in a thick zona radiata, which is differentiated into two layers, the outer of which is somewhat thinner than the internal. In the zona radiata externa the pores are larger and farther apart than in the interna. But the important fact, which I believe no one has previously observed, is that the external zona separates very readily from the internal, and, rupturing at one portion of the ovum, peels off, becom- ing turned inside out in the process, and, remaining attached over a small circular area, forms the suspensory membrane which I have already described. Slight pressure and rolling of the eggs by means of a cover-glass was sufficient to cause the rupture of the external zona, and the two membranes were examined in all stages of separa- tion. Owsjannikow has described the presence of the two layers of the zona radiata in the ovum of Osmerus, and his description agrees with mine; but the eggs he examined were less mature than those I had to deal with, and it is this fact which prevented him discovering the curious function which the external zona performs. Owsjanni- kow has also described the micropyle in the unripe ova he studied. I was unable to detect the micropyle, but I am inclined to think it exists in the centre of the area over which the suspensory membrane is attached. A comparison between the adhesive ova of Osmerus and other adhesive ova can now easily be made. In all adhesive ova the exterior surface of the zona radiata is glutinous ; it adheres to solid objects, and, setting hard after attachment, securely fixes the eggs to one another and to surrounding solids. In some adhesive eggs the external layer of the zona is different in structure from the inner. In the Herring-ovum there is no distinct differentiation into two layers ; in Perea fluviatilis, as described by Owsjannikow, there are 1886.] MR. ROSSET ON THE FAUNA ETC. OF THE MALDIVES. 295 two layers, the external of which has pores, which are larger and less numerous than those of the inner layer. The egg adheres by the surface of the external layer, but no separation of the two layers takes place. In Osmerus eperlanus the same differentiation occurs, and the external layer, after becoming attached by one point or other, detaches itself from the inner layer except at one circular area, thus forming a membrane by which the ovum is suspended from its attachment. It remains to be mentioned that in the unripe ova, which are forcibly expressed from the parent, there is a delicate structureless membrane external to the zona radiata. This is doubtless derived from the ovary; it is perhaps the connective-tissue layer of the follicle, which becomes reduced in thickness as the egg attains its mature size ; it is certain that the perfectly ripe ovum is enveloped only in its double zona radiata. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXX. Fig. 1. Nearly ripe ovum of Osmerus eperlanus, taken from female, and examined in fresh condition. a. Thin membrane derived from the ovary, not present in the naturally deposited mature ovum. 2.7. Zona radiata; its division into two layers is not shown. g.v. Germi- nal vesicle. (Zeiss A, Oc. 2.) 2. Outline of attached ovum of Osmerus, s.m. The suspensory membrane formed by the zona radiata externa. 2.7.7. The zona radiata interna. (Zeiss A, Oc. 2.) 3. The membranes of an almost mature ovum of Osmerus, as seen in the fresh state after rupture of the zona radiata externa by pressure of the cover-glass. 2.7.2. Zona radiata interna. 2.7.e. Zona radiata externa. (Zeiss A, Oc. 2.) 4. The zona radiata of egg of Osmerus, as seen in fresh condition in optical section, in process of separation of the two layers. 2.7.¢., z.7.7., as before. (Zeiss H, Oc. 2.) May 18, 1886. Prof. W. H. Flower, LL.D., F.R.S., President, in the Chair. Mr. C. W. Rosset exhibited and made remarks on a series of photographs taken during a recent visit to the Maldive Islands, and gave the following account of his collections in these islands :— “On my return from an eighteen months’ stay among the Veddas of Ceylon, I undertook a journey to the Maldives, in October 1885, in the course of which I passed seventy-five days on the Malé Atol. The principal object of my journey was to make a complete Ethno- graphical collection, as also to take a series of photographs of the people, objects and places of interest, and so on, and obtain full particulars about habits and customs, manufactures, trade, &e. I was also able to make a zoological collection. “JT was not able to carry out my original plan, as the Sultan absolutely refused to allow me to quit Malé Atol, so that I was unable to visit the southern islands of the group. It will therefore 296 MR. P. CROWLEY ON PUP FROM NATAL. [May 18, be necessary for me to revisit the islands, when I shall commence at the southernmost Atoll, and hope to gradually work my way north. I hope to leave next September on my second journey. The Ethno- graphical collection which I was able to bring back is now exhibited in the Ceylon Court of the Colonial and Indian Exhibition, and this has taken up so much of my time that I have so far been unable to classify and arrange my zoological specimens. A short paper descriptive of my stay on Malé Atoll will shortly be read before the Royal Geographical Society. “The zoology of the Maldives is not of importance so far as animals are concerned. Domestic animals have been imported from India ; and there are at present bullocks, cows, sheep, and goats on the islands ; the first named, however, are few in number, and all belong to the Sultan; but the last are reared by the Maldivians, and there are about five hundred of them on Malé Atoll. There are a few cats, and former writers on the Maldives mention the presence of the Mongoose; but I saw none on Malé Atoll, and all the natives with whom I came in contact told me they had never seen any. Flying- foxes are numerous and very destructive, but their ravages are eclipsed by those of the cocoa-nut rats, who destroy thousands of nuts yearly. I found a kind of musk-rat, with black-and-white fur and a pointed tail, in large numbers. **T brought with me a large number of lizards, ground-snakes, beetles, butterflies, fish, sea-animals, and corals, of which I am only able to show a small number to-night. “The fauna of the Maldives, i. e. of the Northern Atolls, is very similar to that of Indiaand Ceylon; IT have been given to understand, on the other hand, that on the Southern Atolls it resembles that of Mauritius, the Seychelles, and Madagascar. Birds and _ butterflies are only seen at certain seasons; the north-east monsoon brings these from India and Ceylon, which are then to be found on most islands of the Northern Atolls, whilst during the south-west monsoon species from Mauritius &c. are brought to the Southern Atolls. “The Maldive Islands are nearly all of coral-formation. I found several pieces of lava and pumice-stone on the sea-shore ; but these evidently came from Java at the time of the great eruption and earthquake there, as the natives assured me they had only been seen for the last two or three years.” Mr. Philip Crowley, F.Z.S., exhibited some pupz of Nocturnal Lepidoptera from Natal, and made the following observations :— ** Some few months since, when Mr. Thomson exhibited some large specimens of Saturniide hatched in the Gardens from pupz received from South Africa, I asked if any one present could tell me whether these species were subterranean in their pupa state, and I could get no satisfactory answer ; one or two said they believed they spun up in the leaves of the food-plant. My Natal correspondent was therefore asked to send me some cocoons. I received his reply some six weeks since, and a consignment of pupze on Monday the 18th, some of which { now exhibit. In_his letter he says :—‘ The larvee of all our big 1886. ] ON RHIPIDORNIS GULIELMI-TERTII. 297 Moths burrow into the soil to a depth of 2 or 3 inches, and there they remain, some for six months, some for ten. The way in which I manage is this: first I search in due season for the caterpillars, which having found I remove to bushes and trees as near my residence as possible. Ithen watch them carefully day by day, until I consider them large enough to remove into my breeding-cages, all of which have at least six inches of good soil at the bottom. When full-fed they burrow, as I have said before, and exactly six weeks after the disappearance of the last one, Idig up all the pupe and lay them care- fully side by side upon moss which is from time to time moistened.’ “IT may add I received last year pupz of the following species from this source, all of which hatched out well with the exception of six or eight :— Cyanissa maia. Bunea caffraria. Antherea tyrrhea. menippe. wahlbergit. Cirina forda. “The pupz which I now exhibit will, I think, by their general appearance, bear out the statement of my correspondent.” Mr. Joseph Whitaker, F.Z.S., exhibited a specimen of Wilson’s Phalarope, Steganopus wilsoni (Sabine), believed to have been shot some years ago at Sutton Ambion, near Market Bosworth in Leicestershire. Mr. Whitaker had found the bird stuffed in a case of local species of birds which had belonged toa Mr. Richard Bradfield, who stated that he shot the specimen in question on a small pond, into which the manure ran from his farm-yard, and the breast of the bird showed a stain which might have been so produced. The owner was quite unaware of the rarity of the species, looking upon it merely as a curiosity ; and unless there should have been some accidental exchange at the bird-stuffer’s, the evidence as to its genuineness seemed entitled to credence. The following papers were read :— 1. On a fourth Male Specimen of King William the Third’s Paradise-bird. By A. B. Meyer, M.D., Director Royal Zoological Museum of Dresden, C.M.Z.S., &e. [Received April 28, 1886.] In the year 1875 I described and figured (Mitth. Zool. Mus. Dresden, i. p. 3, pl. i.) Zehipidornis gulielmi-tertii, after a male and female specimen forwarded to me by my friend the late S. C. S. W. van Musschenbroek from Ternate, and a short time after- wards Gould figured a second male specimen (‘Birds of New Proc. Zoo. Soc.—1886, No. XX. 20 298 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON NEW OR [May 18, Guinea,’ pt. ii. pl. 2, 1876), which belonged to the Museum of Warsaw. Since then only one specimen has been obtained (see Proc. Zool. Soe. 1883, p. 252), which is now in the British Museum, but nothing trustworthy has been made out as to the supposed habitat of the species— Waigiou (ef. Salvadori, Orn. Pap. ii. p. 646, 1881). Quite recently I have procured for the Dresden Museum a male example of this rare species, therefore the fourth, offered by a merchant from Amsterdam together with other Papuan birds. This specimen resembles exactly those figured by Gould and my- self, but its origin is quite as obscure as that of the other speci- meus. The accompanying birds being apparently of species found in New Guinea, and not in Waigiou, perhaps Beccari’s supposition (Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen. vii. p. 710, 1875), that this Paradise-bird occurs on N.W. New Guinea and Salawati, may be right. As it is of importance to know where type specimens are preserved, Ladd the history of those of Rhipidornis gulielmi-tertw described by myself. Having kept them in the Dresden Museum since the year 1875, I one day in the year 1877 received a telegram from van Musschenbroek, who had returned home in 1876, telling me that he wished to show the birds to King William III. I sent the specimens to him, and never saw them again. They remained in the hands of the king, and we never succeeded in recovering these types for science, though supported by the late Prof. Schlegel of Leyden; but after van Musschenbroek’s death in the year 1883, the King of the Netherlands delivered the specimens to the Museum of the Zoological Society (Natura artis magistra) of Amsterdam, where they probably will remain. 2. Descriptions of some new or little-known Earthworms, together with an Account of the Variations in Structure exhibited by Perionyx excavatus, K.P. By Frank E, Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S.E., Prosector to the Society. [Received May 18, 1886.] ConTENTs. . Note on Pericheta indica, Horst, p. 298. . Pericheta horsti, n. sp., p. 800. . A new Species of Ludrilus, p. 302. . Additional note on Microcheta rappii, p. 306. . Remarks on the Variation of Perionyx excavatus, p. 308. DS — Cue Cob 1. Note on Peritcuazra npica, Horst. Pericheta, sp., Horst, Nederl. Arch. f. Zool. Bd. iv. 1879. Megascolex indicus, Horst, Notes from Leyden Museum, vol. v. p- 186. With the exception of Lumbricus and other forms affined to it which ought perhaps to be regarded as subgenera (Allolobophora 1886. ] LITTLE-KNOWN EARTHWORMS. 299 Dendrobena, &c.), there have been described more species of Pericheta than of any other genus. Rather more than thirty have been named, but several of these, as Dr. Horst’ has pointed out, are merely synonyms, while a large number have evidently been too imperfectly characterized to admit of recognition, In the majority of cases the number of the spermathecee and the absence or presence of variously - formed diverticula have proved useful as specific characters; but species have been distinguished on other grounds which happen to agree in the number and form of the spermathecee. The presence of genital papille is almost universal in the genus Pericheta, and these are placed either in the neighbourhood of the spermathecz or of the reproductive apertures; this character serves to differentiate P. indica from P. affinis, which otherwise agree pretty closely in structure. I have had the opportunity of examining a number of specimens of both these species as well as of an apparently new species which is closely allied to both. A few notes therefore, which will perhaps serve more clearly to define these species, may be worth adding to what is known about them. Of Pericheta indica I have received about half a dozen specimens from New Caledonia though the kindness of Mr. E. L. Layard, C.M.G. The specimens were of varying size, the largest individuals reaching a length of some 6 inches. Their colour (in alcohol) was a very dark brown, with an indistinct whitish line in the middle of each segment, marking the insertion of the sete. The latter are remarkable for the fact that one or more on either side of the ventral median line are very much larger than the rest: this fact has already been noted by Horst (Nederl. Arch. &c. Joc. cit.), and a similar variation in the size of the setee occurs in Perrier’s species P. luzunica and P. biserialis*. The two last-mentioned Perichete have up to the present been but briefly described ; but the description is sufficient to show that they cannot be confounded with P. indica. P. biserialis has only two pairs of spermathecze and several pairs of genital papillee in the segments following the 18th, while there are four pairs of spermathecee in P. indica. In P. luzonica the clitellum occupies four segments. Dr. Horst mentions two pairs of genital papille placed respectively upon segments 7 and 8; in one of my specimens there were three pairs, the third pair being upon segment 6. Another important variation is in the number of segments which compose the clitellum: in most of the individuals where the clitellum was developed, it was found to occupy segments 14—16 inclusive, as described by Horst for this species and as commonly found in the genus. In one specimen, however, the clitellum was a segment short, being developed only upon the 14th and 15th rings; the clitellum was fully developed upon these segments and sharply defined, as it usually is in this genus. It is of some importance to note this fact, since a species of Pericheta, P, bicincta, has been characterized mainly on account of the restriction of the clitellum to two segments. ' Notes from the Leyden Museum, vol. v. p. 186. * Comptes Rendus, t, Ixxxi. (1875) p. 2044. 20* 300 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON NEW OR [May 18, The individual in question agreed in every other respect with P. indica, and the difference in the number of segments constituting the clitellum appears to me rather as an indication that this structure is subject to some variation in the same species than a mark of specific distinctness. With regard to the dorsal pores, they are present in my specimens in all the segments following the clitellum, as stated by Horst; I find, however, that the posterior border of the clitellum is not only marked by a dorsal pore, but the anterior border also, and that there is yet another pore in front of this ; this latter appears to be the first. In all other respects my specimens agreed with Horst’s description of Pericheta indica, and I believe them to be identical. I need not describe the organs of the body severally, as I was unable to detect any points of difference. 2. PERICHEZTA HORSTI, N. sp. In a collection of Earthworms sent to me from Manila by my friend Mr. H. E. Barwell were a considerable number of specimens of a Pericheta which I regard as of a new species. I dedicate it to Dr. Horst, whose work in this department of Zoology is well known. It is a small species, the largest individuals measuring only about 2 inches in length. The external characters afforded by the genital papillz serve to distinguish the species; although the value of these characters is well known, it is often impossible to make use of them, as the genital papille are not always present to the full number even in worms which are in other respects sexually mature. Out of seven or eight individuals which I have examined and dissected, one or two had very many more genital papillee than the rest ; in the absence of evidence to the contrary, I regard these specimens as being in this respect fully adult. ‘The genital papille are placed in the neighbourhood of the male generative pores as in P. affinis; but instead of there being only a single pair to each segment, there are three distinct papille placed at equal distances from each other and within the circle of seta. These are present on the two segments which precede the eighteenth and on the four segments which follow it; on the eighteenth segment there is naturally only the median papilla present, the genital orifices themselves occupying the position of the outer papillee. In Pericheta biserialis and in P. juliani, according to Perrier’, there is some resemblance in the disposition of the genital papille to the condition which is characteristic of the present species; in both of the former there are a pair of genital papillee corresponding in position to the male reproductive pores and occupying a variable number of segments following the 18th. I have myself had the opportunity of examining a number of specimens of a Pericheta from the Philippine Islands, which I refer to the former species from the fact that the ventral setee are separated by a considerable interval and are of considerably greater size than the remainder, and that 1 Perrier, Comptes Rendus, Joc. cit. 1886. ] LITTLE-KNOWN EARTHWORMS, 301 there are three or four pairs of genital papillee, one to each of a corresponding number of segments following the 18th. There was, however, no indication of an additional median papilla on each of the segments as in P. horsti, nor does Perrier mention anything of the kind. The clitellum is not, as is so generally the case, restricted to three segments; but, at least in one specimen, extended from segment 14 to 17 inclusive; on the 17th segment, however, it was only developed on the dorsal region of the body. The orifice of the oviducts occupies the usual position on the ventral median line of the 14th segment’. The spermathecal orifices are between the 7th and 8th and 8th and 9th segments. The set are continuous all round the body and are everywhere of uniform size. With regard to internal structure, there are one or two features in which this species is peculiar. In the first place, the spermathecee are separated from each other by very stout mesenteries, which are also found between segments 8— 7, 7-6, 6-5; in front of the fifth segment the mesenteries are more or less indistinguishable, forming a mass of muscles which bind the pharynx to the parietes; behind the 9th segment the mesenteries are comparatively thin and delicate. The gizzard is situated in the 8th segment, that which contains the anterior pair of spermathece ; it does not, as isso commonly the case (e. g. in P. affinis) occupy two segments, the intermediate mesentery having disappeared. The spermathecze consist of an oval or sometimes cylindrical pouch communicating with the exterior by a narrow duct, to which is attached a short diverticulum of much the same shape as the pouch. The diverticulum appears never to lie in a different segment from the spermatheca. The ovaries and oviducts were very distinct, and appear to occupy the normal position. The vasa deferentia open on to the exterior in common with the duct of a compact prostate. The testes are to the number of two pairs and in the usual position. The cesophagus widens into the intestine at about the 20th segment ; 1 The extension of the clitellum over four segments, combined with the regularity and uniform size of the sete, makes it difficult, in the absence of additional information, to distinguish this species from P. ce@rulea, BH. P.; it is stated, however, that in P. cerulea the female generative orifices are paired. Nevertheless this latter difference is not perhaps of very fundamental value; it must at any rate be discounted by my own observations with regard to Megascolex (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist., Oct. 1883), where the female pore is sometimes single and sometimes double. Perichefa taitensis of Grube (Reise der Novara, Anneliden, p. 36, pl. iv. fig. 2) is a very doubtful species, agreeing with P. horsti in having only two pairs of spermathec situated in the 8th and 9th segments. It may possibly be identical with it. I may take this opportunity of remarking that several other species described by Grube (MB. Akad. Berlin, 1877, p. 553) are inneed of revision. Lumbricus kerqguelarum appears to me from his description to be undoubtedly referable to the genus Acanthodrilus, and perhaps to Lan- kester’s species A. herguelenensis; L. tongaensis is certainly not a Lumbricus, and perhaps belongs to the same genus as the last, 302 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON NEW OR [May 18, about five or six segments from its commencement, the intestine undergoes a remarkable change in its structure; in three or four segments the walls of the intestine are greatly thickened, but these specially thickened regions are separated by intervals where the intestinal walls have preserved their normal delicacy of structure ; these intervals are on either side of the septa. These appearances, which recall the moniliform structure of the cesophagus in Monili- gaster, can hardly have been brought about by the effects of the alcohol in which the specimens were preserved.. There were no cca present, unless these local thickenings represent the caca morphologically ; in other Perichete the ceca generally contrast with the intestine by their greater thickness. On several of the anterior mesenteries were bunches of glandular tubules similar to those found in other Perichete, and which may represent the nephridia. The foregoing brief description is, I think, enough to distinguish this species from any that is at all sufficiently known. 3. A New Species or Evprivus (Eudrilus boyeri). Among some Earthworms kindly sent to me from New Caledonia by Mr. Layard were about a dozen individuals which I refer to Perrier’s genus Eudrilus*. This genus is already known to inhabit South America and the West Indies, but has not been recorded from anywhere else. I am inclined myself to suspect that the New- Caledonian specimens may have been accidently imported, and may not be indigenous to that island. I name the species after M. Boyer of New Caledonia, who collected the specimens for Mr. Layard. At the same time I am not convinced that the species really is new. It appears to differ from all the three species described by Perrier in the long coiled oviduct, and in the termination of the vasa deferentia at the middle of the prostate gland. With regard to the first mentioned point of difference, I have elsewhere * expressed the opinion that M. Perrier has mistaken the relation of the ovary to the spermatheca. The oviduct in my specimens so unmistakably corresponds to what Perrier has described as a diverticulum of the spermatheca, that I cannot but think that they are really identical even if the species are distinct. M. Perrier did not make use of the method of section-cutting, which is so infinitely better than dissection for deciding an anatomical relation like that of the ovary and its duct. Still the difference between my species and his in respect of the vasa deferentia makes me hesitate in asserting that his conclusions are mistaken. With regard to the vasa deferentia, M. Perrier states that in his species they open directly into the bursa copulatrix, and not. indirectly by way of the prostate gland as in Hudrilus boyeri. With M. Perrier’s figure before me it appeared to me that in one instance, at any rate, Hudrilus boyeri agreed with Hudrilus decipiens ; but in two or three other specimens which I dissected the vasa 1 Nouy. Arch. d. Muséum, t. viii. (1872) p. 71. 2 Proc. Roy. Soc. Edinb. (forthcoming paper); Zool. Anzeig. Bd. ix. (1886) p- 342, 1886. ] LITTLE-KNOWN EARTHWORMS. 303 deferentia, although passing over the bursa copulatrix, did not open into it but into the prostate gland, as I have indicated in the drawing (fig. 1). The anterior section of the vasa deferentia (v.d) as far as the bursa copulatrix was very conspicuous, owing to the white colour of the tubes (white from the contained spermatozoa): the distal region of the vasa deferentia was far less conspicuous, and I mistook them at first for a mere ligament uniting the prostate with the surface of the Generative organs of Eudrilus. a, glandular appendix; 4, bursa copulatrix; v.d, vasa deferentia ; pr, prostate. bursa copulatrix ; a more careful examination has shown that the supposed ligament is really a continuation of the vasa deferentia. These tubes, although lying upon the bursa, are in no way adherent to it, and can be readily lifted up .with a dissecting-needle ; they are then seen to be continuous with the prostate (pr.). 304 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON NEW OR [May 18, In all the species described by Perrier there appears to be but a single vasa deferens on either side of the body, which opens directly into the bursa copulatrix and not, as in my species, into the prostatic glands. The single vas deferens of either side is figured by Perrier (loc. cit. pl. ii. fig. 26). In all the specimens of Hudrilus boyert dissected by me there were unmistakably two vasa deferentia on each side of the body, which after came to be separated by a considerable interval, owing perhaps to the contraction of the body- walls, though more usually lying side by side and in close juxta- position. The only other genus in which there are two vasa deferentia on each side of the body is Acanthodrilus, and this is in correspondence with the two generative orifices of each side ; where there is only a single pair of male generative pores, the vasa deferentia become fused directly behind the posterior funnel and pass down the body as a single tube. In Microcheta, however, Benham’ has described the two vasa deferentia of each side continuing separate for several segments, though they ultimately become fused some way in front of the male generative pore. The condition of the vasa deferentia in Eudrilus boyert forms another intermediate term in the series which connects Acanthodrilus with Lumbricus; in Acanthodrilus the two vasa deferentia are separate throughout their whole extent and their external apertures are each furnished with a prostate gland*. In Eudrilus boyert there is only a single generative opening, but the vasa deferentia remain distinct. In Microcheta, where there is also a single male generative pore, the vasa deferentia of each side are partially fused. Finally,. in Lumbricus and other genera the vasa deferentia unite immediately behind the posterior internal funnel. The nephridia of this species are well developed, and open in every case in front of the dorsal sete. The organs themselves are remarkable for the very large muscular duct. The alimentary tract presents certain features of interest. The cesophagus is furnished with three pairs of thick-walled whitish-coloured glands disposed in pairs in consecutive segments, viz. 11, 12, and 13; the posterior pair was smaller than the two anterior pairs. These glands appeared to have a lamellar structure, and the interior was filled with irregularly-shaped calcareous masses : there seems to me to be no doubt that these structures correspond to the calcigerous glands of Luméricus. Along the intestine are another series of glands, about 40-50 pairs, commencing in the 90th segment. There is a single pair of these glands to each segment, ‘which become larger towards the middle of the series, and 1 Quart. Journ. Mier. Sci. vol. xxvi. 2 In a species of Pericheta recently described by myself (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1886, xvii. p. 89) there are two prostates oneither side, whose apertures are, however, situated in the same segment, and not in different segments as in Acanthodrilus. The condition of the specimen was such that I could not detect the connection of these with the yasa deferentia, It seems very possible that each prostate may correspond to a single vas deferens, in which case the male generative organs of this worm will be in certain respects intermediate between those of Acanthodrilus and Eudrilus boyert. 1886. ] LITTLE-KNOWN EARTHWORMS. 305 diminish in size towards either extreme. These glands are situated on the dorsal wall of the intestine, close to and on either side of the dorsal vessel; each is supplied with a rich plexus of blood-vessels derived from the most anterior of the two vessels which arise from the dorsal trunk in each segment. These glands are probably of the same nature as those described by myself in a similar position in Megascolea' and Typhcus*, and by Dr. Horst* in Acanthodrilus. The female reproductive organs I have already described ; they are quite unique in that the ovary is directly continuous with its efferent duct, which opens on to the exterior in common with the Fig. 2. Generative organs of Eudrilus, with bursa copulatrix laid open. p, penial process ; ¢, pad-like process connected with glandular appendix, Other lettering as in fig. 1, spermatheca. The male reproductive organs are also remarkable ; they have been described by M. Perrier in all the three species of the genus ; my own dissections do not altogether bear out his state- ments, but of course the differences may be specific ; they are hardly individual, inasmuch as three or four specimens agreed perfectly. In most cases there were three pairs of vesiculee seminales, situa- ted in segments 10, 11, 12; with these are connected a pair of vasa ! Trans. Roy. Soe. Edinb. vol. xxx. pt. ii. p. 495. 2 Ann, &. Mag. Nat. Hist. 1883, xii. p. 222. 3 Notes from Leyden Museum, vol. vi. p. 103. 306 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON NEW OR [May 18, deferentia on each side, which were invariably extremely conspicuous ; the two vasa deferentia of each side remained perfectly distinct, and could readily be traced as far as the prostatic gland, into which they open. The latter structure is a tubular organ of a nacreous appear- ance, lying behind the generative orifice, and occupying some five or six segments ; it communicates with a large rounded pouch-like structure (figs. 1, 2, 6), which overlies the generative pores on either side, by anarrow duct. The prostatic gland is constricted at about the middle of its extent, and it is at this point that the vasa deferentia open into it. M. Perrier has accurately figured the appearance presented by the ‘ bursa copulatrix’ when its upper wall has been removed (Joc. cit. pl. ii. figs. 27, 28). I find that the duct of the prostatic gland is continuous with the curved penis (woodcut fig. 2), while the rounded pad (c) which lies behind the penis receives the duct of a peculiar glandular body (a), which is either horseshoe- shaped as in fig. 2 or Y-shaped as in fig. 1. This glandular appendix has been referred to by Perrier, who did not, however, succeed in making out its relations with the bursa copulatrix ; neither has M. Perrier figured or described the termination of the prostatic duct in the penis. 4. AppiT1onaLt Notr on Microcu#£ra rAprti, F. E. B. Since my paper on the structure of this Worm was communicated to the Society, Mr. Benham has published a careful and detailed account of its anatomy. The deseription of the female generative apparatus which Mr. Benham gives’ agrees in the main with my own description, which I have left unaltered in the paper. A structure which I identified with the oviduct—a pair of ciliated funnels on the posterior wall of segment 12—has appeared to Mr. Benham not to be really an ovi- duct but to be related to a glandular structure on the anterior septum of segment 12, possibly serving as the excretory duct of its products. On the other hand, the structure described by myself as an ovary, lying in the segment behind that which contains the presumed oviduct (Trans. Zool. Soc. vol. xii. pt. 3, pl. xv. fig. 4, 0), is also identified as such by Mr. Benham. I am now inclined to think that both Mr. Benham and myself were wrong in that identification, and that the supposed ovary really corresponds to what has been termed by Bergh* the recepta- culum ovorum. In the first place, Mr. Benham remarks that the ova which completely filled this supposed ovary exhibited no grada- tion in size among themselves such as is to be seen in the ova of Lum- bricus ; in the second place, I have observed this structure in another example of the worm, recently received at the Gardens from the Rev. G. H. R. Fisk, where it was entirely devoid of ova. Icuta careful series of sections through the ‘ovary’ and oviduct, and could ' Quart. Journ, Mier. Sei. 1886, p. 279, pl. xvi. figs. 7, 8, 14. 2 Zool. Anzeiger, no. 220, p. 252. 1886.] LITTLE-KNOWN EARTHWORMS. 307 find no traces whatever of ova in the former body, and its walls were comparatively thick and composed of muscular or perhaps connec- tive-tissue fibres. These two series of facts are very decidedly opposed to the view that this body is really the ovary, and I have no doubt whatever that it corresponds to the receptaculum ovorum. In Lumbricus the receptaculum ovorum was correctly described by Hering, as Bergh has pointed out. More recently the structure has been figured by Dr. Horst', who also quotes Hering’s observa- tions. I have myself observed an evidently similar structure attached to the oviduct of Acanthodrilus dissimilis. Dr. Bergh describes the origin of these bodies as being similar to that of the receptacula seminis ; they arise on the anterior wall of segment 13, and are at first independent of the oviducal funnels but subsequently unite with them. In Microcheéa these receptacula ovorum appear therefore more completely to retain their primitive position. It was obvious, however, from my sections that there was a communication through the mesentery between the receptacula and the oviduct. The identification of the supposed ovaries with the receptacula ovorum confirms so far the accuracy of my own determination of the oviducal funnel. I am bound to say, however, that a most searching examination of my sections failed to bring to light any traces of the oviducal canal. I see that Mr. Benham has also failed to detect any connection between the funnel and the exterior. Assuming, at least for the present, that the supposed ovary is nothing more than a receptaculum ovorum, the true ovary remains to be identified. This I believe to be a glandular-looking body in segment 12, noted by Mr. Benham but overlooked by myself at the time when my paper was written. Mr. Benham describes and figures (loc. cit. pl. xvi. fig. 8) this gland as consisting of a ‘‘ mass of rounded cells arranged in a band which is bent upon itself several times, the folds being close to one another.” It is attached to the anterior septum of somite 12. In the specimen of this worm more recently dissected by myself, I have found a structure which must correspond to that described by Mr. Benham, though it occupies a slightly different position and is somewhat different in structure. This gland in my specimen was elongated and composed of a mass of rounded in- different cells ; the anterior end of the gland was wider than the posterior extremity, which tapered gradually, and was attached to the anterior mesentery of segment 12; the main part of the gland lay along the ventral body-wall close to the nerve-cord. The reasons which lead me to suppose that this cellular mass represents an ovary in a state of functional inactivity are—first, that it occupies the right position; secondly, that it corresponds exactly in structure to certain glandular bodies in Acanthodrilus dissimilis”, in which I have observed the occasional development of ova. 1 2 Tijdschr. d. Nederl. Dierk. Vereen. Deel iii. afl. i. p. 28. P, Z.S8. 1885, p. 828, pl. lii. fig. 9. 308 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON NEW OR [May 18, 5. REMARKS ON THE VARIATION OF PERIONYX EXCAVATUS, E. Perrier. Hardly anything is at present known with respect to the varia- tions in structure which may occur in a given species of Earthworm ; and in order clearly to define the limits of different species it is evidently a matter of some importance to ascertain how far variation may take place. The description of by far the majority of exotic forms of Lumbricide has depended upon the dissection of a very few examples, so that many of these descriptions must be qualified by admitting the possibility that they relate only to what may be termed for convenience’ sake the normal conditions of structure. Such a criticism, however, can only be applied to those instances in which a species or genus has been created for the reception of a single individual, which may show well-marked divergencies in structure from its immediate allies ; if a number of individuals agree to differ from a second series of individuals in certain well-marked characters, it would be obviously necessary to separate the two groups either generically or specifically as the case demands. The Lumbricidz are a group which exhibit a most remarkable variability in internal structure, more especially of the generative system ; in accordance with this variability they have been divided into a considerable number of species and genera. It might well be expected that this group, which is apparently universally distributed and is at present no doubt as abundant, or even more abundant’, in individuals as well as in species as it ever was, is still in course of differentiation into new forms; any accidental variation may be the first term of a series which will ultimately lead to the formation of a new species, I have had the opportunity of examining, through the kindness or my friend Mr, Herbert Barwell, rather more than 400 individuals of a Philippine Earthworm belonging to the genus Perionyz ; this worm exhibits a number of variations which appear to me to be really variations, and not marks of specific distinctness. The reasons for this belief will be stated after the facts have been detailed, The Earthworm in question appears to be identical in every respect with Perionyx excavatus: it differs in no point from M. Perrier’s? description of that species. I need hardly therefore describe in detail its specific characters, as it would be merely repeating what Perrier has already said; it will be necessary, however, briefly to indicate the main features of its organization in order to render clear what follows. The sete are disposed in a continuous row round the middle of each segment ; they are not disposed upon a ridge as in Pericheta, 1 There seems to be a certain relation between the abundance of Earthworms and the cultivation of the soil; this fact is noted in a short article on Earth- worms in the ‘ Field’ of March 27, 1886. My friend Mr. James Cavan informs me that in California fishermen know well that if worms are required for bait they must be sought for in cultivated land. * Nouy, Arch. d, Mus. t. viii. (1872) p. 126, -1886.] LITTLE-KNOWN EARTH WORMS. 309 and this character serves to distinguish the genus from Pericheta in addition to those mentioned by Perrier. Between the 7th and 8th and the 8th and 9th segments are the orifices of the spermathecz, which lie in the 8th and 9th segments respectively ; the orifices are near to the ventral median line. On the 12th segment anterior to the circle of seta is the single median aperture of the oviducts. On the 18th segment are the paired apertures of the vasa de- ferentia, which lie close together upon two slightly raised papillee * situated in an oval depressed area (see fig. 5, p. 310). Among rather more than 400 individuals I observed the following varieties :— (1) The spermathecze were situated in segments 7 and 8; the female generative pore was upon segment 11; the male generative pores upon segment 16. ‘The clitellum occupied segments 12-15 inclusive (fig. 3). (2) The female generative pores were two, one upon each of the two segments 13 and 14; they were unpaired and median ; the male generative pores occupied the normal position upon segment 18. (3) The spermathecze were normal, viz. two pairsin 8 and 9. The female generative pores were paired as in the last variety, and occupied the same segments (viz. 13 and 14); the male pores were upon segment 17. The clitellum extended from segments 13-17. (4) The female generative pores occupy segments 15 and 16; the male pores are upon segment 20. (5) Of this variety there were two examples. In one the spermathece are normal, in segments 8 and 9. In both the feinale pores are paired, but situated close to each other on the 14th segment ; the male pores occupy the normal position upon the 18th segment. In one specimen the clitellum extended from 13-17. (6) The spermathecee are present to the number of two pairs, but are situated in segments 6 and 7; the single female generative pore is upon segment 10. There are apparently three pairs of male generative pores upon segments 14, 15, and 16; only the two first pairs were furnished with prostate glands ; the hinder pair therefore are probably to be compared to genital papillee (fig. 4). (7) The female pores are upon segments 15 and 16; the male pores ocenpy the normal position upon segment 18. (8) The female pores are upon segments 14 and 15; the male pores upon segment 18. (9) In this variety there are three pairs of spermathece, occupying 1 Ina description of a new species of Perionya (P. macintoshii, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. 1883, xii. p. 217) I have described the openings of the vasa de- ferentia as differing from those of P. excavatus in being placed in an area which is not depressed below the level of the surreunding integument. I find by an examination of a large series of P. excavatus that this supposed specific dis- tinction is probably due to the immaturity of the single specimen of P, macin- toshii ; in immature examples of P. excavatus the male genital appertures are precisely as I have described them in P. macintoshii, The latter species, however, seems to me to be distinct on account of the structure of the prostate glands and the thickened mesenteries of segments 6-9. 310 MR. F. KE. BEDDARD ON NEW OR [May 18, | segments 7, 8, and 9. The female pore is single and upon segment 14; the male pores are upon segment 17. (10) There are four pairs of spermathecze occupying segments 8, 9,10, and 11. The oviducal pores are two, upon segments 15 and 16. The male generative pores are uponsegment 19. The clitellum extends from segments 15-18 inclusive (fig. 6). (11) There are three pairs of spermathecz in segments 6, 7, and 8. The female generative pores are upon segments 13 and 14; the male generative pores are upon segment 16. (12) Of this variety I noted two specimens. The female and the male pores were perfectly normal, but the 18th and 19th segments were only separated from each other on the right side of the body ; on the left side they were fused. (13) There were also two specimens of this variety. The female pores were upon segments 14 and 15; the male pores occupied the normal position upon segment 18, Fig. 3. [55] 3] S| eal |ealte| |S] [c>[-1]e+ | |e9Ise[H4| Ons 5 tr > Figs. 3, 4, 6. Varieties of Perionyx excavatus. Fig. 5. Normal individual. (14) There were two pairs of spermathecz, occupying the ordinary position in segments 8 and 9. The female generative pores were upon segments 15 and 17; the male pores upon segment 21. Segments 11, 12, and 18, 19 were only divided from each other on the left side of the body. Viewed from the right side, the female pores were upon segments 14 and 15, the male pores upon segment 18. (15) The female generative pores were upon segments 15 and 16; the male pores upon segment 18. These different varieties may be tabulated as follows :— 1886. ] LITTLE-KNOWN EARTHWORMS. 311 Spermathece. © pores.| ¢ pores.| Clitellum. INOTIMAl’ co.cc sees: 8,9 14 18 14-17 Warr etn eer ce 7,8 11 16 12-15 Sper a 2 Sel ee ee 15, 14 18 jie ogh asses 8,9 13, 14 il 13-17 Ee A ET ee ee 15, 16 20 £5 icf 4 elas 8.9 14, 14 18 13-17 sen. Pa (oe 10 14, 15 TROL Missed 7, 8,9, 10 15, 16 18 Pomemrarar pb peters 14, 15 18 A mee: estes 7,8,9 14 17 Fale was secs 8, 9, 10, 11 15, 16 19 15-18 cabs Av TEES 6,7,8 13, 14 16 » 12(2) ...| 8,9 (right); 9, 10 (left) 14 18 » 18(2) ..| 8,9 (right); 9,10 (left) | 14,15 18 Sy lAee phates 8,9 15,17 2. pats LS yea al Raa eee 15, 16 18 In considering a series of variations like the present, it is necessary in the first place to discriminate between what are really variations and what are specific characters. I have stated at the commencement of this paper my belief that the anatomical differences between the individuals described here are variations, and not marks of specific difference. This opinion is based upon the following facts :—First, the exact correspondence in colour, size, and all anatomical charac- ters, except those liable to variation, between the different individuals. It may, perhaps, be objected that it is begging the question to assume that it is precisely those characters which are liable to variation in this “ species ” that are unimportant as marks of specific difference ; especially when it is remembered that these differences mainly concern the genital system, which is well known to exhibit constant and regular variation, serving as a basis of classification. It is indeed perfectly true that this is the case ; but then the variations in the genital system are constantly accompanied by equally regular, though perhaps inconspicuous, variations in other characters ; so that a naturalist acquainted with this group could probably easily determine any species known to him by external characters only. It is not meant to imply by this statement that external characters are sufficient to decide the systematic position of an Earthworm, but merely to emphasize the fact that when, after dissection, the relations of internal structure to external form are known, the latter charac- ters will serve as a guide to recognize the species. Secondly, the fact that the supposed variations are never represented by many specimens. Out of some 430 individuals I have recorded 15 variations, 12 of which are exhibited in as many specimens, while 3 are represented by two specimens apiece. The importance of this argument is in exact proportion to the number of specimens examined ; in the present instance it appears to me to be fairly sound. Thirdly, Earthworms are known to vary somewhat in structure, 312 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON NEW OR [May 18, though there has never, to my knowledge, been described so great a number of variations as I have been able to record in the present communication. Dr. Horst’ has recorded a variation in the form of the spermathecee of Pericheta indica and in the ceca of Pericheta musica, and Perrier* in the spermathece of Pericheta affinis. Fourthly, and lastly, the probability, suggested above, of the occurrence of variations must not be left out of sight. Assuming it to be proved that an actual variation does occur in the present species, it will be necessary in the next place to eliminate those variations that are mere monstrosities, and that can hardly be considered to have any importance. Such are the occasional doubling of segments on one side of the body, as the variations Nos. 4, 12, and 14; these are comparable to such monstrosities among Vertebrata as two-headed lambs, calves with five limbs, and so forth, which are not in any sense reversions to an ancestral type, but are owing to some accidental cause, such as defective or excessive nutrition. On the other hand, the remaining variations are to my mind of some importance. These will now be considered in some detail. It must be noted first of all that the variations occur in the generative system, and it is precisely the modifications of this system which have enabled systematists to classify the group. These variations affect all the parts of the generative system—the clitellum, the ovaries and their ducts, the spermathecee, and the male organs. I will commence with the clitellum. This organ and the relations which it bears to the male generative apertures has enabled M. Perrier to classify the whole group, after a fashion which is in the main satisfactory, though open to objections in certain cases. I have elsewhere urged that, in so far as it separates the Anticlitellians, 7. e. Ivmbricus and its allies, from the remaining genera of Earthworms, M. Perrier’s system is by no means artificial, but bears out other anatomical differences. To distinguish the Intra- and Postclitellians from each other is not so easy a task : in the first place, we have genera like Megascolex, whose affinities are clearly with Pericheta, and which yet possess Intraclitellian generative apertures ; in the second place, we find that within the limits of a single genus, i. e. Acanthodrilus, the male generative orifices vary in position, and may be either intra- or post-clitellian. If the relations of the clitellum to the male generative apertures be used for classificatory purposes, it appears to me necessary somewhat to alter Perrier’s definition, and to divide Earthworms into two groups, according as to whether the clitellum is placed far forward, and commences in front of the male generative orifices, or whether it is placed further back and commences behind the male generative orifices. That there is really a connection between the clitellum and the 1 Notes from the Leyden Museum, vol. v. p. 182. * Nouvelles Arch. &e. loc, cit. p. 106. These facts are of course liable to the same criticism as my own. 1886. ] LITTLE-KNOWN EARTH WORMS. 313 generative orifices is certainly shown by the series of variations in Perionyx described in the present paper. | When the male generative pores, as in var. no. I, are placed very far forward, the clitellum also moves forward ; on the other hand, when the male generative pores are situated further back, e. g. in segment 19, the clitellum likewise changes its position and occupies segments 15-18. In both these instances it will be noted that the relations of the male pore to the clitellum remain the same, although both struc- tures have shifted their position; in both cases, as in the normal condition, the male generative pore occupies the first segment after © the clitellum. This fact would at first sight appear to be a strong argument in favour of Perrier’s scheme of classification ; but in the first place the clitellum extends in var. No. 1 on to the left half of segment 16, and in the second place one variety (No. 3) was distinctly ‘ intraclitellian,’ through the shifting forward of the generative pores on to the 17th segment. Ovaries and Oviducts—I have been able to prove by dissection that the presence of two pairs of oviducts in consecutive segments is areality; the two oviducts of each side were quite obvious and were each furnished with their own ovary. Moreoverin var. No. 11 there was an additional (third) ovary in segment 11, on the right-hand side. In var. No. 10 I also noted three pairs of ovaries. The occasional occurrence of more than a single pair of ovaries in this Earthworm lends additional support to my identification in Acanthodrilus of certain glandular structures with rudimentary ovaries, and also to Prof. Lankester’s description in Chetogaster of two pairs of ovaries, which has been recently doubted by Vejdovsky’. In the present instance there can be no doubt of the presence occasionally of two or three pairs of ovaries, since they were extremely conspicuous on account of their large size, and contained abundant mature ova. In two varieties (No. 5) there were only a single pair of ovaries present, but with separate openings on to the exterior. I have already in the present paper (p. 301, note) referred to the fact that this variation also occurs in Megascolex. Spermathece.—The number and position of the spermathece have been so constantly made use of as a systematic character, that it is well to emphasize their variations in the present species. They vary from two to four pairs, and may be placed in any of segments 6-11. In most cases they get to be placed further forward when the male generative pores shift their positions forward, but this relation is by no means constant. The occasional symmetry of these organs (e. g. in var. No. 12 and 13) cannot be a matter of any importance ; it was only observed in two of the four specimens. Male Generative Pores.—The position of these pores varies from segment 14-21, but they were invariably behind the female generative ores ; there was particular relation between the positions of the male and female pores, except that the latter were always in front of the former. * System u. Morph. d. Oligochexten, p. 145. Proc. Zoox. Soc.— 1886, No. XXI, 21 314 MR. P. L. SCLATER ON WILD GOATS. [May 18, The variation in position of these apertures is of importance, because certain genera (e. g. Urocheta, Eudrilus, Rhinodrilus) are charac- terized by the different position of the male pores, which are almost always (Pericheta, Perionyx, Megascolex, Anteus, ard Microcheta) upon the 18th segment. In one instance (No. 6) there were two pairs of male generative orifices on following segments (14, 15), and on segment 16 a pair of orifices which appear to be papillee, since they are not furnished with the prostates of the anterior orifices. The presence of two pairs of male orifices, each with their own prostate, is of importance, since a genus (Acanthodrilus) is mainly distinguished on account of this very peculiarity. The normal individuals of Perionyx excavatus have no genital papilla, which are so charac- teristic of many species of Pericheta ; in the variety just mentioned, as well as in No. 8, there were a pair of similar papille. Nephridia.—In one instance I observed an alternation in the position of the nephridial pores, confined, however, to a single pore, which was placed considerably nearer to the dorsal median line than the pores on the preceding and ensuing segments. In conclusion I would again point out that the variations recorded in this paper mainly affect the generative system, which is known to exhibit such characteristic differences in various genera and species. I have not noticed any prominent variations in other organs. 3. Remarks on the various Species of Wild Goats. By P. L. Sctater, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., Secretary to the Soeiety. [Received May 17, 1886,] (Plates XXXI. & XXXII.) The male Sinaitic Ibex which we received as a present from Mrs. Laing in December 1884! has now become a fine animal. As the first of the species that has reached the Society’s Gardens, I have thought that a portrait of it would not be inappropriate to the Society’s ‘ Proceedings ;’ and I have accordingly had the accom- panying sketch (Plate XXXII.) prepared by Mr. Smit, which will give a good idea of the original. The animal stands about 31 inches high, and is generally of a dark rusty brown colour, with black dorsal stripe aud limbs, the latter being white on the inner sides and on the knees. I take this opportunity of offering a few remarks on the known species of Wild Goats and their distribution. I will mention them in geographical order, commencing with the westernmost species, and proceeding eastwards, alluding especially to those of which we have received living specimens. 1 See P.Z. 8. 1885, p. 2. P.Z.8. 1886. Pl. XXX] = PV OTL NS Vici dunt jueyuey SEL APaS “UXXX Id 988L SZd 1886. | MR. P. L. SCLATER ON WILD GOATS. 315 1. CAPRA PYRENAICA. Capra pyrenaica, Schinz, Neue Denkschr. d. allg. Schweiz. Ges. Nat. ii. p. 9, t. i1., ili, (1838). Capra hispanica, Schimper, Compt. Rend. xxvi. p. 318 (1848). The Spanish Ibex is now well known to occur not only in the Pyrenees but, under a slightly altered phase, in Central Spain and in the higher ranges of Andalusia and Portugal. It is curious that it is more nearly allied to the Caucasian Ibex than to the Ibex of the Alps. The only specimens of this species we have yet received alive are those presented by Major Howard Irby in 1868 and 1869. They were obtained in the Sierra Hermosura, north of Marbella, in the proviace of Malaga. 2. Capra 1Bex, Linn. Capra ibex, Linn. Syst. Nat. i. p. 95. So far as I know the Steinbok, or Bougquetin, is confined to the Alps of Switzerland, Savoy, and Tyrol, where it is now become nearly extinct, except in one or two places in which it has been specially cared for and artificially preserved for sporting purposes. Whether the pair of this species presented to us by the late King of Italy in 1862 were really perfectly pure was, I have always thought, a little doubtful ; at all events it is well known that the Alpine Tbex breeds freely with the Domestic Goat, and I have seen many such hybrids. 3. Capra zcacrus, Gm.? (Plate XXX1.) The Wild Goat, which was so abundant over the Grecian Archi- pelago in the time of Homer, seems now only to exist in Crete and some of the smaller Cyclades’. It appears, however, to be found throughout the mountains of Asia Minor and Persia, and to extend into Sind and Baluchistan’. There can be no question, I suppose, that the Domestic Goat is a derivative principally of this species, but with a probable mixture of other species in different localities. Mr. T. B. Sandwith, H.B.M. Consul for Crete, has sent us several examples of Wild Goats which must be referred to this species. Mr. Smit’s drawing (Plate XX XI.) represents a fine male of this animal, presented by Mr. Sandwith in March 1884. 4. CAPRA CAUCASICA’. Capra caucasica, Gild. Act. Petrop. 1779, pt. 2, p. 273 (1783). «Eigoceros ammon, Pallas, Zoograph. i. p. 229. ' See ‘List of Vertebrate Animals,’ ed. 8, p. 153. * For synonymy, see Blanford, J. A.8. B. xliy. pt. ii. p. 15. * Antimelos and Joura. See Erhard, ‘ Fauna der Cykladen’ (Leipzig, 1858), p- 32, where this species is described as Afgoceros pictus. + Blanford, ‘Eastern Persia,’ vol. ii. p. 89. ° The specimens called Capra caucasica in the British Museum belong either to Capra egagrus or to a closely allied species, with the horns compressed and angular in front. Ze 316 MR. P. L., SCLATER ON WILD GOATS. [May 18, goceros pallasi, Bouill. Bull. Soc. Imp. Nat. Mose. xiv. p. 908, t. xi. (1841). This species is restricted to the Caucasian range. I have never seen living examples of it, but there are two fine stuffed male speci- mens in the British Museum which are labelled yoceros pallasi. It is a very distinct form, of a generally dark brown colour, with the thick horns curving backwards and outwards, the tips finally turning upwards and inwards. It seems to be most nearly allied to Capra pyrenaica. 5. CapRA SINAITICA. (Plate XXXII.) - Capra nubiana, Geoffr. St.-Hil. et Cuv. Mamm. vii. t. 397 (1825). Capra sinaitica, Hempr. et Ehr. Symb. Phys. Zool. i. t. xviii. 1828). Capra arabica, Riipp. Neue Wirbelth. p. 17 (1835). Aigoceros beden, Wayner, Schreb. Saugeth. v. p. 1303 (1836). Capra beden, Tristram, Fauna of Palestine, p. 6, pl. ii. The Sinaitic Ibex is stated upon the best authority to be found only in the mountains of Upper Egypt and in the ranges of the Sinaitic Peninsula and Palestine’. It would be therefore perhaps better to drop the name nudiana, under which it was first described by F. Cuvier, and to employ instead ‘‘ sinaitica”’ of Hemprich and Ebrenberg, ‘These authors give Gebel Garab as one of its exact localities in Egypt, and Riuppell states most positively that it does not occur south of 24° N. latitude in that country. Our specimen was, I believe, procured at Suakim, on the western coast of the Red Sea, and was, no doubt, brought from the moun- tains lying to the north of that port. The Sinaitic Ibex belongs strictly to the same group as C. ibex,_ and C. sibirica, but has the horns rather more compressed and strongly knotted in front. 6. CAPRA WALIE. Capra walie, Rupp. Neue Wirbelth., Siugeth. i. p. 16, t. vi. This, it appears to me, is a very well-marked species, both as regards the shape of its horns and the curious bony protuberance in the middle of the forehead, pointed out by Riippell, by whom it was discovered in the highest ranges of Abyssinia. I am not aware that any specimens of. this animal have been obtained except those of Riippell, which are in the Senckenberg Museum at Frankfort. 7. CAPRA SIBIRICA. Ibex alpium sibiricarum, Pallas, Spicil. Zool. xi. p. 31, t. iii. Capra sibirica, Meyer, Zool: Ann. i. p. 397 (1794); Jerdon, Mamm. Ind. p. 292; Kinloch, Large Game Shooting, i. p. 145 (1885). Cupra himalayana, Schinz, Mamm. ii. p. 463 (1845). If seems to be now generally agreed that the Ibex of the Altai * Hempr. et Ehr. Symb. Phys. Z.s.¢.; Riipp. Neue Wirbelth., i. p. 17; Tris- tram, Fauna of Palestine, p. 6. a 1886. ] MR. P. L, SCLATER ON WILD GOATS. 317 Mountains and the Ibex of the Himalayas (which is found through- out that range from Cashmere to Nepaul) should be referred to one species; but I am not aware that any one has made an exact com- parison of specimens from these two localities. The animal certainly belongs to the same group as the Ibex of the Alps and that of the Sinaitic peninsula, We have never yet succeeded in obtaining living examples of it. In Siberia, Radde tells us, this Ibex is found only in the Altai and Sagan Mountains. 8. CAPRA FALCONERI. Aigoceros falconert, Wagn. Miinch. Gel. Anz. ix. p. 430 (1839), Capra megaceros, Hatton, Calcutta Journ. N. H. ii. p. 535, pl. xx. (1842); Sclater and Wolf, Zool. Sketches, ser. ii. pl. xx. Capra falconeri, Hiigel, Kaschmir u. d. Reich. d. Siek, iv. p. 579 (1848); Blanford, J. A.S. B. xliv. pt. i. p. 17 (1875). The Markhoor, although regarded by Blyth (at one time) and by Gray altogether as merely a variety of the Domestic Goat, is now universally recognized as a most distinct species, distinguished at once by its long massive spirally-twisted horns, which readily sepa- rate it from every other known member of the genus. It is not found in the Himalayas proper, but extends from the Pir-panjal range, south of Cashmere, into Afghanistan and Gilgit on the one side, and the Sulemani range on the other. Colonel Kinloch, the most recent writer on the larger game of India, states that four well-marked varieties of the Markhoor are easily recog- nizable. To two of these—in one of which the horns have a more open spiral (Capra megaceros), and in the other a closer spiral (Capra jerdoni)—he assigns distinct specific names’. The living specimens we have received have belonged, I believe, to the latter variety. A pair of this species, presented by Major Pollock in 1866, bred for several years in the Gardens; but we are now, I regret to say, without any representative of this fine animal. 9. CAPRA JEMLANICA. Capra jemlanica, Ham.-Smith, Griff. An. King. iv. p. 308. Capra jemlaica, Sclater and Wolf, Zool. Sketch. ser. i. pl. xxv. This species and the following have been separated from the true Goats by Dr. Gray as having “‘a moist naked muffle.’ But this is, I think, a question of degree, as there is certainly a small moist muffle, although not so well developed, present in some species of true Capra, for example in Capra sinaitica. These forms, how- ever, differ from the Goats in their short, thick, and much com- pressed horns. The “ahr,” as this species is usually called by Indian sportsmen, is found on suitable ground along the whole range of the Himalayas, from Cashmere to Bootan. We received our first specimen of this fine and most distinct species in 1852, from Capt. Townley Parker. It was a male, and * Kinloch, ‘ Large Game Shooting,’ 1835, pp. 136, 142. 318 THE SECRETARY ON ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE. [June], lived many years in the Society’s Gardens, where its portrait was taken by Mr. Wolf. In 1880 the Prince of Wales presented us with two female examples, mother and young, the latter of which is still living, and has paired with a male of the same species pre- sented to us by Colonel Kinloch in 1883. I am happy to be able to add that there is every appearance of the female Tahr being likely to increase her species in a short time. 10. Capra HYLOCRIUS. Kemas hylocrius, Ogilby, P. Z.S. 1837, p. 81. Capra (Ibex) warryato, Gray, Ann. & Mag. N. H. x. p. 267 (1842). The “ Neilgherry Ibex,” as this Goat is usually called by Indian sportsmen, has never, so far as I know, been imported alive into Europe. Although I have received many letters promising living specimens for the Society, these animals have always died in India after a short period spent in captivity. Although the horns of this species differ somewhat materially from those of Capra jemlanica in having the external angle in front much rounded off, I believe the two animals to be nearly allied. This species is found only in the Neilgherries, Anamallays, and other adjoining ranges of Southern India. June 1, 1886. Dr. A. Giinther, F.R.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. The Secretary made the following report on the additions to the Society’s Menagerie during May 1886 :— The total number of registered additions to the Society’s Mena- gerie during the month of May was 190, of which 123 were by presentation, 31 by purchase, 18 by birth, 4 received in exchange, and 14 received on deposit. The total number of departures during the same period, by death and removals, was 139. The most noticeable additions during the month were :— 1. An Orange-thighed Falcon (Falco fusec-cerulescens), presented by Captain W. M. F. Castle, R.N., May 5th, and stated to have been obtained in Chili, This is the first example of this elegant species which has been obtained by the Society. 2. Five Senegal Parrots (Paocephalus senegalus), presented by R. B. Sheridan, Esq., May 5th. Four of these are young birds bred in a large aviary at Frampton Court, Dorchester, under the management and care of the late Mrs. Sheridan. This is of interest, as these Parrots are rarely known to breed in captivity. Dr. Ginther, F.R.S., exhibited a specimen of a small fish of the genus Fierasfer imbedded in a Pearl-Oyster, and made the following remarks : — 1886.]. DR. GUNTHER ON A FIERASFER IN A PEARL-OYSTER. 319 The specimen, which is represented in the accompanying woodcut of the natural size, has been in my possession for many years. It is an old shell of Margarita margaritifera, in which there is im- bedded, behind the impression of the attractor mnscle, a perfect individual of a fish belonging to the genus Fierasfer. The fish is covered by a thin layer of pearl-substance, through which not only the general outlines of the body but even the eye and the mouth can be seen. The parasitic habits of Fierasfer are well known, and Putnam describes, in the ‘ Proceedings of the Boston Society of Natural History,’ vol. xvi. 1874, p. 344, a species, Fierasfer dubius, which is found on both coasts of Central America, but inhabits Holothurians on the Atlantic, and Pearl-Oysters on the Pacific side ; and he further mentions, in a footnote, an example belonging to the 320 ON ZOOLOGICAL SPECIMENS IN ROTTERDAM, ETc. [June], Museum of Comparative Zoology at Cambridge, in which also a Fierasfer has been imbedded in the substance of the shell. In this case, as well as in ours, the fish, instead of introducing itself into the cavity between the two halves of the mantle, penetrated between the mantle and the shell, causing irritation to the mollusk, which the latter resented by immediately secreting the substance with which the intruder is now covered. It is remarkable to note that the secre- tion must have taken place in a very short time, at any rate before the fish could be destroyed by decomposition. Mr. Sclater made some remarks on the most interesting objects noticed in the Zoological Gardens of Rotterdam, Amsterdam, Cologne, Antwerp, and Ghent, which he had lately visited. In Rotterdam a pair of Bar-headed Geese (Anser indicus) had nested and the female was sitting; and a pair of Black-footed Pen- guins (Spheniscus demersus) had twice laid eggs. Mr. Sclater had never known either of these species breed in captivity before, but believed that the former had bred at Antwerp. Specimens of a Leucopternis (sp. inc.), Epimachus albus, and Carpophaga goliath were seen in the aviaries. In Amsterdam the series of Cranes, Herons, and Storks were, as usual, very complete and the specimens in fine condition, particu- larly those of Ardea sumatrana and A. herodias. The Spoonbill was breeding in one of the aviaries. Other rare birds noticed were examples of Conurus luciani, Alauda tatarica, and Caca/lua gymnopis. At Cologne a fine young male Burchell’s Zebra, born in the Gardens 19 months ago, had been much admired, and would, it was hoped, be secured for the Society’s Gardens. The Gardens at Antwerp were in their usual excellent condition and very fully stocked. The flock of Barbary Sheep (Ovis trage- laphus) and herds of Lanias, Guanacos, Alpacas, and Vicunas were much admired. Amongst other noticeable objects were a pair of Isabelline Antelopes (Cervicapra isabellina), three young examples of Casuarius uniappendiculatus, and several specimens of Ara glauca, one of which had been obtained for the Society’s collection. At the small but well-kept Garden of the Société Royale d’ Histoire Naturelle at Ghent was observed a fine male example of the Ostrich of Somali-land (Struthio molybdophanes), distinguishable when alive by its naked bluish skin, and the large red plaque in front of the tarsus. A letter was read from Mr. J. M. Cornély, of Tours, C.M.Z.S., stating that his pair of Michie’s Deer (Zlaphodus michianus) had bred, and that a young one had been born on the 15th May. The young one was stated to be nearly of the same colour as the mother, showing only a few indistinct-spots. The following papers were read :— 1886.] ON THE TRACHEA AND SYRINX IN CERTAIN BIRDS. 321 1. Notes on the Convoluted Trachea of aCurassow (Nothocrax urumutum), and on the Syrinx in certain Storks. By Frank E. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S.E., Prosector to the Society. [Received June 1, 1886.] My predecessor in the office of Prosector to this Society, Mr. W. A. Forbes, has summed up all the facts that are known with respect to the convoluted trachea of Birds in a communication published in the ‘Proceedings’ for 1882(p.347)'. The present note is a supplement to that paper, and deals with the convoluted trachea of the male Notho- craw urumutum. Among the Cracidee it is the rule for the males to have a convoluted trachea, while it is very unusual for the female to resemble the male in this respect ; in every case when present the trachea makes a single loop on the right side of the carina sterni— sometimes very short, as in Crax globicera ; sometimes of great length, as in Pauxis galeata, where the loop bends up on the right side of the carina, terminating near to its upper margin. In Nothocrax urumutum the male has a trachea which makes a single loop extending to the end of the carina sterni, as shown in the accompanying drawing (fig. 1, p. 322); the female, as Mr. Forbes has already pointed out, has a simple trachea. On a Peculiarity in the Syrinx of Xenorhynchus and Abdimia. The Order Herodiones appears to be separable into two very distinct families—the Ardeids and the Ciconiids, which differ from each other in certain anatomical peculiarities ; thus the ambiens is always absent in the former, and generally, though not always, present in the latter; the pectoral muscle is separable into two distinct portions in the Storks, while in the Herons it is only incom- pletely separated by a tendious band. Another well-marked differ- ence is to be found in the structure of the syrinx. In the Storks” there are no intrinsic muscles; the lowest rings of the trachea are very slender and cartilaginous, often incomplete ; and the occasional presence of an upwardly projecting bony piece from the lateral portions of the last three tracheal rings gives to the syrinx an appearance not at all unlike that of the Tracheophonine Passeres. The bronchi are particularly long, ‘‘ the bifurcation of the trachea occurring at, or even a little above, the superior aperture of the thorax ’’°; the membrane which unites the two bronchi—which was termed by Garrod the bronchidesmus *—is complete in the Storks, that is to say, it commences from the very point where the bronchi diverge ; the rings which make up the bronchi themselves are quite . continuous, as in the Cathartide, Ostrich, &c. Forbes’s Collected Papers, p. 338. Garrod’s Collected Papers, p. 669. Loe, eit. p. 284. + Loe. cit. p. 479. 1 2 3 322 MR. F. E. BEDDARD ON THE >> [Sune a) Trachea of Nothocrax urumutum, 3. 1886. ] TRACHEA AND SYRINX IN CERTAIN BIRDS. 323 In the Ardeidze, on the other hand (including the Herons, Bitterns, and Scopus, which to this extent is a Heron’), the syrinx has what may perhaps be called a more typical form. The bronchi are short, and the rings which compose them are only half-rings, and are com- pleted on the inner side by membrane; there is a pair of intrinsic muscles arising beneath the sterno-tracheal muscles and inserted onto the first bronchial semiring ; the bronchidesmus only commences at about the level of the fourth or fifth bronchial semiring ; anteriorly, therefore, there is a free communication between the upper and lower surface of the bronchi: the first two bronchial rings are more or less ossified and closely connected with each other and with the preceding tracheal rings; the latter undergo no modifications such as those which exist in the Storks, but are of uniform thickness, closely Fig. 2. Syriux of Ahdimia sphenorhyncha. applied and often ossified. The foregoing account does not of course pretend to be a detailed description of the syrinx in the two families, but it is sufficient to indicate the main differences and to serve as a basis for comparison of them with the syrinx of Xenorhynenus sene- galensis and of Abdimia sphenorhyncha, which are in some respects intermediate between the two types. In Xenorhynchus there is a transition to the Ardeine syrinx in that the upper rings of both bronchi are incomplete and are (fig. 3) closed by membrane on the inner side. It appears therefore that the syrinx of Xenorhynchus agrees with that of other Storks in the peculiar arrangement of the lowermost 1 See F. E. Beddard, “ A Contribution to the Anatomy of Scopus umbretta,” P.Z.8. 1884, p. 543. 324 ON THE TRACHEA AND SYRINX IN CERTAIN BIRDS. [June], part of the trachea, while the presence of a membranous wall com- pleting internally the upper bronchial half-rings recalls the Ardeine syrinx. Mycteria americana has a syrinx which is again intermediate between that of Xenorhynchus and the typical Sturks; the bronchial Fig. 3. fyrinx of Xenorhynchus senegalensis. rings are complete internally as in the latter, but the rings, instead of being of uniform width, are considerably narrower on the inner side of the bronchus, which therefore becomes largely membranous. ° Abdimia sphenorhyncha (fig. 2) is another Stork which presents even a closer resemblance to the Herons in the form of its syrinx ; the mem- branous inner wall of the bronchi is more largely developed than in Xenorhynchus, indeed quite as much as in the Ardeidz; but there + ad Tae A abe aa P.Z.S. 1886. Pl. XXXII. Wee Mintern Bros . ump Mand Horman-Fisher del et lith FROM N.W. INDIA. DRAGON FLIES 1286. | ON DRAGONFLIES FROM N.W. INDIA. 325 are no intrinsic muscles, and the bronchidesmus is complete as in other Storks. In no other Stork that I have had the opportunity of examining does the syrinx depart from the type of structure characteristic of the Ciconie as in the two above-mentioned genera. Prof. Garrod basalready mentioned that Abdimia and Xenorhynchus also approach the Herons in the absence of the ambiens muscle; I have been able to confirm Garrod’s statement that this muscle is absent in Abdimia by the dissection of two specimens. 2. On a small Collection of Dragonflies from Murree and Campbellpore (N.W. India), received from Major J. W. Yerbury, R.A. By W. F. Kixsy, Assistant in Zoolo- gical Department, British Museum. [Received May 17, 1886.] (Plate XX XIII.) In a collection of insects recently received by the British Museum from Major Yerbury, which he had formed at Murree, Campbell- pore, and other neighbouring localities in N.W. India, between the months of August and November 1885, were a considerable number of Dragonflies in good preservation. ‘hey were numbered trom 1 to 15; but a few were not ticketed. In some cases more than one species bore the same number, while in others the sexes of a species bore different numbers. Allowing for this, the actual number of species exemplified in the collection proved to be 19, four of which appear to be new to science. Among these 19 species, the most interesting are, first, the European Sympetrum fonscolombei, De Selys, which has not been previously recorded from India, so far as I know; and, secondly, a new species of Micromerus resembling the common M. lineatus, Burm., but really forming a new section in the genus. LiBELLULID2. LIBELLULIN2. 1. PANTALA FLAVESCENS, Fabr. (No number or locality.) 2. PALPOPLEURA SEXMACULATA, Fabr. (no, 11). Hassan Abdal and Campbellpore, Oct. 14 and Nev. 14, 1885 (d 2). 3. Lrepruemis SABINA, Dru. (no. 8). Hassan Abdal and Campbellpore, Oct. 14 and 28, 1855. Two males. One bears a memorandum, “lavender abdomen”? ; but there is now no gloss over the black ground-colour. 326 MR. W. F.. KIRBY ON DRAGONFLIES [June 1, 4. SyMPETRUM FONSCOLOMBET, De Selys (no. 1). Murree, over water, Sept. 5 (¢). Undistinguishable from European examples. Major Yerbury remarks, “ ¢ (7) dull crimson; Q (?) yellowish” ; but the only Q specimens of Sympetrum in the collection are unlabelled, and appear to belong to an undescribed species. 5. SYMPETRUM SUBPRUINOSUM, sp.n. (Plate XXXIII. fig. 7.) Exp. al. 60-62 millim.; long. corp. 20-21 millim. Face olive-green, shading into dull orange above; underparts varied with yellow ; occiput with black and yellow markings, nearly as in S. fonscolombei; thorax dull olive-green above, and black (more or less pruinose) below; pleurze with two wide bright yellow bands, beneath the front band is a round yellow spot, beneath the second one or two, and behind, on each side of the median line, two more subtriangular yellow spots, coalescing in one specimen. Abdo- men black beneath and at the sides, and yellowish tawny above; the first six or seven segments are marked behind with a series of black lines, gradually coalescing with the more extended black markings on the hinder segments ; “below these the markings on the first three segments are paler yellow, and there is sometimes an additional yellow spot on each side on the under surface of the first segment ; the median crest is also narrowly black, expanding into spots on the two penultimate segments ; upper appendages black, rather pointed ; lower appendage convex, hairy. Legs black; tibie sometimes lined with yellow. Wings with black reticulation, very slightly yellow at the base; membranule white; 7 antecubital and 6 post- cubital nervures on the fore wings; pterostigma reddish brown, between black nervures, 3 millim. in length, Three females, without locality or date cf capture. The black neuration, unusuaily dark legs, and the pattern of the thorax are quite sufficient to separate this species at a glance from S. fonscolombei, De Selys, and striolata, Charp. 6. ORTHETRUM HYALINUM, sp. n. (nos. 6,7). (Plate XXXIII. figs. 5, 6.) Exp. al. 55 millim. ; long. corp. 33-35 millim. Male. Head pale straw-yellow, shading into greenish above; occiput yellow, with three black spots on each side; thorax and abdomen pulverulent blue, with a yellow spot at base of abdomen ; in less adult specimens the thorax is marked nearly as in the female (wide infra), but darker; legs striped with black, yellow, and reddish ; wings clear hyaline beyond the basal membranes ; membranule long and narrow, white edged with black ; 11-12 antecubital and 8 post- cubital nervures; pterostigma narrowly yellow, bordered by black nervures ; upper appendages moderate, smooth, curving downwards, and recurved and pointed at the tip; lower appendage curved upwards, about two thirds as long as the others; appendages of the second segment prominent, hairy, with the anterior lobe sloping backwards. 1886. ] FROM N.W. INDIA. 327 Female. Head yellow, the upper part greener ; occiput obscurely spotted ; thorax reddish brown, with two yellow lateral stripes edged externally with black, and two yellow pleural stripes edged in frout by the black sutural lines; legs varied with black, yellow, and red- dish ; between the wings runs a row of yellow markings similar to those found in many female Libel/uling; abdomen dull reddish tawny, with black lateral carinze and a black dorsal stripe, com- mencing on the second segment and narrowed at all the sutures. Wings nearly as in the male; one specimen has thirteen antecubital nervures. Campbellpore, Nov. 14(¢ 2); Murree (2), no date; upper slope of Nian Jani, above Kalabagh, about 9000 ft., Sept. 16 (9). Allied to the European OQ. ca@rulescens, Fabr., and O. ramburi, De Selys. 7. ORTHETRUM TRIANGULARE, De Selys (nos. 3 and 4). Murree, Aug. 10 and 16 (3), Aug. 16 and 18 (2). The male much resembles the inky-black O. carnaticum, Fabr., which we have from Nepal. The females differ considerably in the intensity of colouring of the thorax and abdomen. As in some allied species, the particoloured eyes are remarkable in both sexes, the upper portion being reddish and the lower parts dark brown. 8. ORTHETRUM NEGLECTUM, Ramb. (no. 3). Hassan Abdal and Campbellpore, Oct. 14(¢ 2) and Nov. 14 The female is very similar to that of O. triangulare, but it is lighter in colour ; the wings are clear hyaline (rarely the case in P. triungulare); and the plearz are uniform yellowish, with a small black ocellus on the mesopleura. 9. TRITHEMIS AURORA, Burm. (Plate XXXIII. fig. 3.) A somewhat undercoloured male, without date or locality. The species, which I take to be Z’. aurora, has only 10-11 ante- cubital and 6—8 postcubital nervures on the fore wings, placed rather widely apart. Like the next species it occurs both in India and Ceylon, but seems to be rarer. We have no specimens from the Philippines, the locality given by Burmeister, 10. TRITHEMIS INTERMEDIA, Ramb. (no. 13). (Plate XXXIII. fig. 4.) Hassan Abdal, Oct. 14 (3). May be distinguished from 7’. aurora by the more numerous and crowded nervures—14-15 antecubital and 8-9 posteubital; the markings of the thorax beneath resemble those of Z. rubrinervis, De Selys. 11. Trrruemis restiva, Ramb. (no. 12). Hassan Abdal, Oct. 14 (¢); Campbellpore, Nov. 14 (3). 328 MR. W. F. KIRBY ON DRAGONFLIES [June J, 12. CROCOTHEMIS RETICULATA, sp. n.(no. 13). (Plate XX XIII. figs. 8, 9.) Campbellpore, Nov. 21 (3). Exp. al. 5°8 millim.; long. corp. 36 millim. Head red, lower mouth-parts yellowish ; occiput reddish yellow, obscurely spotted; thorax and abdomen ochreous-yellow (perhaps reddish when living); thorax with a hexagonal figure bisected by the median line ; and from the three angles on each side, formed by the boundary lines, run similar narrow black lines, which are crossed by the narrow black sutural lines; abdomen with obscure blackish submarginal lines on its hinder portion; appendages moderate, recurved, and rather acutely pointed; legs black and ochreous ; wings hyaline, slightly yellow at the base ; neuration inclining to reddish ; pterostigma rather large, reddish, edged with black lines ; 11-12 antecubitals, 10 subcubitals. Allied to C. soror, Ramb. A somewhat similar reticulation is indistinctly visible in some females of Orthetrum triangulare. 13. CrocoTHemis soror, Ramb. (nos. 5, 13). Murree, Aug. 18 (¢ 2); Campbellpore, Nov. 14 (¢d 2). The Indian form of C. erythrea, Brullé. CorDULIUN. 14. Macromia moore!, De Selys (no, 10). (Plate XXXIII. fig. 2.) Chittar, Oct. 9 (¢). This species is remarkably similar to the N.-American JZ. cingu- lata, Ramb. AESCHNIINZE. 15. ANAx mmMaACULIFRONS, Ramb. (uno. 10). Campbellpore, Nov. 21, 1885 ( 3). AGRIONID&. CALOPTERYGINZE. 16. NeurosBasis CHINENSIS, Linn. (no. 9). Hassan Abdal. Taken over running water, Nov. 14, 1883 (dQ). 17. MicROMERUS OBsCURUS, sp. n. (no. 14). (Plate XX XIII. fig. 1.) Hassan Abdal, Nov. 14 (3). Exp. al. 36 millim.; long. corp. 19 millim. Resembles M. lineatus, Burm., but will form a new section in the genus, as there is neither pterostigma nor dark apical spot on the fore wings. Head black, behind much varied with dull yellow ; upper part of the eyes marked within with two large pale spots on each side, the 1886. ] FROM N.W. INDIA. 329 hindermost yellower and more distinct; between the hindermost pair runs a yellow stripe, nearly divided into three; between the front pair runs a series of four spots, of which the middle pair are the smallest and placed most forward; in front of these are two more yellow spots, edged with black ; the rest of the head is yellow, except the edges of the nasus; a Y-shaped mark running from between the two last-mentioned pair of yellow spots, and a short stripe running forward from their outer edges; prothorax black in front, with a triangle of three yellow spots in the middle, and yellow at the sides, beneath, and behind; mesothorax black above, with a V-spot and two yellow longitudinal lines; sides yellow, with two black sutural stripes, the upper one divided in front by a brighter yellow spot; abdomen dull reddish brown, the sutures darker, preceded by a yellow median spot, edged in front by two short dark lines ; anal appendages rather large, approximating, those of the second segment somewhat less prominent than in M. lineatus ; legs yellowish, darker above. Wings hyaline, yellowish towards the base; five antecubital ner- vures, the first two interstitial on all the wings ; hind wings with a yellow rhomboidal pterostigma, surmounting about 23 cells; the extreme base black. It isnot unlikely that in more brightly coloured or better pre- served specimens the back of the abdomen may be marked with yellow, nearly as in M. lineatus. AGRIONIN&. 18. MecGatesres masor, De Selys (no. 2). 3. Captured at Murree, over water, Aug. 7, 1885. Q@. At Kali Pani, Sept. 22, 1885. 19. IscHNURA SENEGALENSIS, Ramb. (no. 15). Hassan Abdal and Campbellpore, Oct. 14. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXIII. Fig. 1 Micromerus obscurus, sp. n., p. 328. 2. Macromia moorei, De Selys, p. 328. Trithemis aurora, Burm., var., p. 327, intermedia, Ramb., ’D. 327. Orthetrum hyalinum, sp. n., p. 326, A Sympetrum subpruinosum, sp. n., p. 326, . Crocothemis reticulata, sp. n., p. 328. —— ——, side view. $2. 91H GUyp 9 po} Proc. Zoot. Soc.—1886, No. XXII. 22 330 ON THE NESTING OF CALLICHTHYS LITTORALIS. [June 29, June 29, 1886. Osbert Salvin, Esq., F.R.S., Vice-President, in the Chair. The Secretary exhibited, on behalf of Mr. John Brazier, of Sydney, N.S.W., C.M.Z.S., a series of 55 eggs of the Pacific Porphyrio (Porphyrio vitiensis), and read a note forwarded by Mr. Brazier showing the extraordinary fecundity of the individual of this species which had laid them. The bird in question was obtained at Maré, Loyalty Islands, in May 1873, and had been kept in captivity in Sydney until December 1882, when she was accidentally killed by poison. She had laid eggs as follows :— 1876. June—December ...... .-.... 0-22 cere ecee 36 TRY 7. Gitte WCRERIREE ce ke we oir a b.c5s mcs oo a eeeeae eee 1878: June—Wecember ~.. 22. 2-606. cece gs ss 68 1879. January, February, and May—December. ..... 83 1880. January, and March—December ............ 93 1881. January, February, and April-December .... 101 1882. January, February, and April—October ...... 66 oA Ry, 72s ge ae oe eI! The Secretary read the following letter, addressed to him by Captain J. A. M. Vipan, F.Z.S., on the nesting of a South-American Siluroid fish (Callichthys littoralis*) in this country :— “ Stibbington Hall, Wansford. June 25th, 1886. “ Dear Dr. SCLATER, “‘Two Cascaduras (Callichthys littoralis), from Trinidad, that I have in my aquarium, commenced making a nest on June 6th; but that, and the one they made on June 9th, they soon pulled to pieces. On the night of the 11th they began a new one; it consisted of pieces of Valisneria, all the leaves of the Nymphea that were growing in the tank, which they bit off close to the roots of the plants, and a great quantity of river-moss (Fontinalis antipyretica), each piece being two or three times the size of the fish, so that they must have had hard work to bring them to the surface. They worked these materials together by some mucous substance until the outside was hard, the whole being under a quarter of aninch thick ; they next buoyed up the structure with a quantity of mucous foam until it was raised three and a half inches above the water. The whole nest was nine inches long and seven inches wide, and somewhat resembled a finger-glass turned upside down on the top of the water, with the interior filled with froth. The fish kept swimming close under it all the time on their backs and filling it with foam. When finished, on the 12th, the female 1 Giinther, Cat. Fishes, v. p. 227; Sclater, P.Z.8, 1885, p. 717. 1886.] MR. BOURNE ON THE FAUNA OF DIEGO GARCIA. 331 shed her spawn between her ventral fins, which were clasped tight together, and, when full, swam to the nest, and, turning on her back, deposited the spawn in it; this occurred several times, the male each time putting the spawn in its proper place and covering it with froth. As soon as the female had dropped all her spawn the male took entire possession of the nest and would not let his mate go anywhere near it, and treated her so badly that I had to place her in another tank to save her life. Unfortunately the spawn was not good, only a few eggs hatching, and the young fishes dying soon afterwards, “‘T have bred great quantities of the little Callichthys punctatus from the Amazons, but they never made the slightest attempt at making a nest, always depositing their spawn all over the tank, and even on the floating thermometer kept in it. “Yours faithfully, «J. A.M. Viean.” The following papers were read :— 1. General Observations on the Fauna of Diego Garcia, Chagos Group. By Gritzert C. Bourns, B.A., New College, Oxford. [Received May 15, 1886.] Diego Garcia is the southernmost atoll of the Chagos group in the Indian Ocean, lying in S. lat. 7° 13', and E. long. 72° 23'. It is of irregular shape, 13 miles long and 6 miles wide, consisting of a strip of land of an average breadth of a third of a mile, which nearly encircles the lagoon. The opening lies to the N.W., and is divided by three small islets into four channels, the largest of which is more than a mile wide, and deep enough to allow the largest ships to enter the lagoon. The formation is wholly of coral, and the land consists in different localities of sand, accumulated coral-boulders, and sand-rock or shingle-rock. It nowhere rises toa greater height than the waves have been able to accumulate fragments of coral, except in some places, where sand-dunes have been piled up by the wind to a height of 25 or 30 ft. above high-water level. As is usual in coral-formations, a reef some 60 yards broad encircles the shores ; this reef is nearly flat, is composed of a compact finely stratified coral-limestone, and is just left bare at the very lowest spring- tides. Growing coral is only found on the outer edge of the reef, but in some parts the Alcyonarian Heliopore and Tubipore are found in large numbers on its surface. Many Holothurians, Echinids, Ophiurids, and Sponges are to be found on the flat surface of the reef between the tide-marks, and large Tridacne are imbedded in it, showing the brilliant edges of their mantles above the rock. The naturalist who wades over the reef at low water will be abun- dantly rewarded in his search for Mollusca of all kinds, chiefly of the genera Cassis, Oliva, Turbo, Nerita, Aporrhais, Aplysia, and 22% 332 MR. BOURNE ON THE FAUNA OF DIEGO GARCIA. [June 29, Peronia; and, by searching among the holes in the reef-rock, tolerably large specimens of Octopus may be found. Small Scaroids and File- fishes of great beauty swim rapidly away from the approach of the observer, and Murznoids of various sizes, chiefly of the genus Ophichthys, are to be found lurking under the scattered boulders of the reef. A small species of Periophthalmus is very abundant, but is very difficult to capture, even in the pools which have been left by the retreating tide, for it escapes by leaping from pool to pool with great agility. This species of Periophthalmus appears to differ in habit from the Pacific species, in that its paired fins are not so well adapted for progression on land; it leaves the water but rarely, and is unable to sustain life in the air for a longer period than half an hour. The boulders at the edge of the sea are occupied by swarms of crabs of the genus Grapsus ; and the strip of dazzling white sand that borders the shore is often covered with small white or grey crabs of the genus Ocypus. The outer edge of the land is elways composed of a heap of coral- boulders, many of them of considerable size, which have been heaped up by the waves. This heap of boulders forms a sort of rampart all round the outer edge of the island, which slopes down to the lower- lying land, raised only two or three feet above the level of the lagoon at high tide. The whole island is densely covered with vegetation, the bushes known by the native names of ‘ Manioc”’ (Scevola kenigit), “ Velouté”’ (Tourneforlia argentea), and “ Bois de feu” (Guettarda speciosa) forming impenetrable thickets near the shores. The central and interior parts of the strip of land are covered with cocoa-nut palms, beneath which, from the continual decay of the fallen leaves, a rich peaty mould has become established. The im- ported animals of the island are donkeys, hogs, fowls, and rats; the last-named swarm on the main island and do great destruction among the cocoa-nuts, but, curiously enough, they have not yet found their way to the islets in the mouth of the lagoon. Cattle do not thrive, but sheep have been imported and appear to do well on the herbage which covers the more open spaces ; the first con- signment was unfortunately destroyed by the donkeys, to whom sheep were utter strangers. When I arrived at Diego Garcia on September 15th, 1885, Terns were breeding in countless numbers on some of the less frequented parts of the island. The dark grey Terns build rough nests, com- posed of a heap of sticks and leaves piled up in the forks of trees and bushes ; in each of these a single egg is laid, on which the female sits. The black-and-white Terns lay a single egg on the bare ground, which is apparently hatched by the heat of the sun, for I never saw one of these birds sitting. But it was difficult to make observations, for the negroes soon took all the eggs, and wantonly destroyed hundreds of the birds, which couid easily be knocked down with a stick as they flew screaming round one’s head. As soon as the breeding- season was over, the number of Terns diminished very considerably ; it seems that they assemble in these remote islands for breeding, and fly off to continents and larger islands for the remainder of the year. 1886.] MR. BOURNE ON THE FAUNA OF DIEGO GARCIA. 333 Gannets and Frigate-birds breed at the southern end of the island ; and although they are well known to be enemies on the wing, the Frigate-bird pursuing the Gannets and compelling them to disgorge the fish they have caught, yet they nest close together without molesting one another. The Gannets were hatching out on my arrival, but the Frigate-birds did not breed during my stay. The snow-white Tern, Gygis candida, breeds in considerable numbers ; the peculiar situation in which this bird lays its egg has been de- scribed by Mr. Forbes in his recent work (‘ Wanderings of a Naturalist in the Malay Archipelago’), and I have nothing to add to his account. Although Whimbrels, small Plovers, Herons, and Sandpipers are numerous on the island, they do not appear to breed there. I was assured by the negroes that their eggs were never found; and M. Spurs, a former resident on the island and a natura- list of no mean order, tried during a stay of fifteen years to obtain the eggs or young of these birds, but without success. There are no indigenous Mammalia or Amphibia. A species of Gecko (Platydactylus mauritanicus?) is common, and a Mud-Tortoise is abundant in some of the marshy pools. The former of these reptiles has probably come across in ships from Mauritius; but I cannot account for the presence of the latter, which is unlikely to have been brought over as a pet, for it is abundantly provided with stink-glands and emits a most unpleasant odour; it cannot have been brought over to serve any useful purpose, nor is it likely to have been accidentally imported. Yet, unless it was brought over by man, it is difficult to imagine how this animal can have found its way over the sea to so distant a spot as Diego Garcia. The insect life is not varied; huge cockroaches, mosquitoes, flies, and ants swarm everywhere and are a great pest. I found a few nests of Termites or White Ants in decayed cocoa-nut stems, but they are rare. Of Orthoptera there are two species of Locusta, one of Acridium, a Forficula, and a Gryllotalpa. Of Lepidoptera I found three species of Nocturnal and one of Diurnal Moths, and I noticed a few individuals of Vanessa bolini, and one individual of CGinone. Three species of A’schna were abundant in the marshes. Of Coleoptera I only found four species. Of Myriapods I found a Scolopendra, a luminous species of Geophilus, and an Iulus. The most remarkable inhabitants of the land are the Crabs. Hundreds of Land-Crabs of the genus Gecarcinus are to be found in any part of the island, and are a great annoyance to the inhabi- tants, for they do great destruction in gardens, and prevent the cultivation of the potato or vegetables. There are several species of these crabs, one of which attains to a large size and gives a formidable nip with its large claws ; it is so conscious of its power that it attacks any person who is walking through the grass in which it lurks, and is able to give the naked foot of a negro a severe wound. Large Hermit-Crabs of the genus Cenobita are found, some of them hiding their abdomens in broken cocoa-nut shells in lieu of the shells of mollusks, there being but few of the latter that are large enough. ‘The close relative of these Cenobite, 334 MR. BOURNE ON THE FAUNA OF DIEGO GARCIA. [June 29, Birgus latro, is also found and attains to a great size. I was never able to watch a Birgus opening a cocoa-nut, though I several times shut one up in a tub with a cocoa-nut for the purpose, but they will not feed in captivity. Being nocturnal in their habits, these animals are difficult to observe ; the account of them given by the negroes agrees in all respects with that of Forbes in the work above quoted. Many people have doubted that these ‘‘crabs”’ are able to climb palm-trees ; but I have seen them do so myself, and I have also seen one mount the slender stem of a “ Bois de feu”? till it arrived at a projecting branch, along which it then proceeded to climb, clinging underneath it like a sloth. Birgus, however, does not mount the palms in order to rob them of the cocoa-nuts, but to obtain shelter among the thick tuft of leaves at the summit. The large lagoon of Diego Garcia affords an excellent harbour, in spite of the coral patches which rise to the surface in many places, the courses for ships having been carefully buoyed out. The lagoon abounds with fish, which are all eaten; the most common sorts caught by hook and line are the well-known Surgeon Fishes, “‘Vielles”’ (ovacula), and some species of Percoids. Large Hammer- headed Sharks (Zyg@ena malleus) are found in some parts of the harbour, and specimens of the common Blue Shark (Carcharias glaucus) are very common. On one occasion we captured twenty- three young specimens of this species in a single haul of the net. The climate is very damp and oppressive; the thermometer rarely exceeds 86° F. by day, or falls below 78° F. at night; but although the heat is not excessive, the heavy moisture-laden atmo- sphere is very trying to European constitutions. An incredible amount of rain fell during my four months’ stay on the island ; it was only during the last three weeks of my visit that we had anything like fine brilliant weather. On such days the bright green foliage illuminated by the tropical sun, the dazzling white sand bordering the lagoon, and the clear blue or, in the shal- lower parts, green waters of the lagoon afford a striking picture of peculiar beauty which is well worth seeing. I have to express my thanks to the authorities of the Orient Steam Navigation Company, who faciliated my voyage in every way, and kindly permitted me to reside at their coaling-station during a large part of my visit; and to M. Jules Leconte, the kind and hos- pitable manager of the oil-stations on the main island, whose guest I was for a long time, and who spared no trouble in assisting me in my researches, 1886.] MR. H. SAUNDERS ON BIRDS FROM DIEGO GARCIA. 335 2. On the Birds obtained by Mr. G.C. Bourne on the Island of Diego Garcia, Chagos Group. By Howarp Saunpgrs, P.L.S., PZ, &e: [Received June 14, 1886.] I have had much pleasure in examining the small collection of birds obtained by Mr. Bourne on his visit, described in the preceding paper, to this little-known island or group of islets. As will be seen by the following list, the species are but few in number, and some of them are of either a pelagic or a regularly migratory nature ; the general character of the avifauna is, however, Indian rather than Ethiopian, with the exception of one (doubtless introduced) Madagascar bird. Mr. Bourne’s remarks are added in square brackets. 1. Foup1a MADAGASCARIENSIs (Linn.). ‘* Cardinal.” This species was no doubt introduced from Mauritius, (No. 4. ¢. Eye brown. Sept. 30th, 1885. One specimen in spirits. epreranas, They were building during my stay, but though I examined several nests I never found an egg. The negroes said that they could find me the eggs, but never did. The nest, loosely constructed of grass, is dome-shaped, with a circular entrance at the side. | 2. FreGata aquita (Linn.). “ Frigate.” [No. 2. g. Sept. 29th, 1885. Eye dark brown. Naked skin on the throat lavender-coloured. Common, and may often be seen chasing Terns and Boobies till they make them disgorge their fish, as described by Mr. H. O. Forbes in his recent work. I have never seen Frigate-birds fishing for themselves ; they are said to do so sometimes, but very rarely. Their flight is magnificent ; [ have seen one wheeling round and round in circles for at least five minutes without once flapping its wings, during which time it must have covered a mile of ground. ]} A bird in immature plumage, passing into the adult stage. A very similar example in this state is described in P. Z. S. 1880, p. 63. 3. Sua prscaTor (Linn.). [No. 15. ¢ adult. Common at the south end of the island. ] 4, ARDEA COROMANDA (Bodd.). ‘* Macaque blanc.” [No. ll. ¢. Eye lemon-yellow. Skin at base of beak yellow. Very rare on these islands, and appears only during the N.W. monsoons. It is supposed to come over from the Maldives. | This specimen presents some difficulty, as it is in winter plumage, but I think it is the Indian species and not the African Ardea bubulcus. The latter is found in Madagascar, and is believed to breed there in September, so that the African species would be in 336 MR. H. SAUNDERS ON BIRDS FROM DIEGO GARCIA. [June 29, nuptial dress at the date of Mr. Bourne’s visit, whereas this example is not so. 5. Buroripes saAvanica (Horsf.). ‘ Macaque.” [No. 1. go. Sept. 22nd, 1885. Eye light golden-yellow. Skin at base of beak yellow. No. 10. Q. East islet, 28th October, 1885. These birds are common, and may be seen any evening standing by the rock-pools, or on the beach at low water, on the look-out for fish. They are rather shy, and when alarmed fly off with a shrill ery like kac-kae kac-kac kac.] 6. Trinea suBArQuata (Giildenst.). [No. 14. ¢. Eye black. Tolerably common, frequenting spots where slimy mud is left bare at low water. | 7. NuMENIus PH#&opus (Linn.). ‘ Corbijeu.” [No. 13. ¢. Eye black. Common, but very shy and difficult to approach. I only got one shot during my stay. ] 8. STREPSILAS INTERPRES (Linn.). ‘* Alouette-de-Mer.” © [No. 6. 2. October 22nd, 1885. Eye dark brown. Common on soft marshy ground. They usually fly in flocks of twenty to thirty. ] 9. DRoOMAS ARDEOLA. [No. 12. go. Eye black. Common along the outer shores and in marshy places. Wary and difficult to approach. | The fact that the Crab-Plover breeds in burrows and lays a single white egg, similar to that of a Shearwater, has been known for some years. (See P. Z.S. 1881, p. 259.) 10. STERNA BERNSTEINI, Schlegel. ‘‘ Goeland.”’ [No. 9. g. October 9th, 1885. Eye black. Not common. | An immature specimen of this very rare Tern, the adult breeding- dress of which is still unknown. It is nearly of the size of Sterna bergit, from which it may be distinguished by the very light colour of the mantle and by the white tail-coverts. We have yet to learn whether the adult in nuptial dress has a white frontal band at the base of the bill, as in S. bergiz, or whether the black of the forehead comes down to the bill as in most other Terns. The present species is known from Halmaheira on the one side, and the Rodriguez waters on the other, and that is about all that can be said. The type from the first-named locality is in the Leyden Museum; there are two examples from Round Island and Ile de la Baleine, near Mauritius, in the collection of Messrs. A. and KE. Newton; two more from the island of Rodriguez are in the British Museum of Natural History ; the present is the sixth example I have examined. 1886.] THE INTERVERTEBRAL DISK OF THE AXIS IN MAN. 337 1]. SrERNA MELANAUCHEN, Temm. [No. 8. g. October 9th, 1885. Eye black. Common. I have seen this bird pursued by the Noddy Tern, just as they themselves are pursued by the Frigate-bird. | It would be interesting to know if this species breeds in Diego Garcia, because, if so, the locality would be the furthest S.W. as yet recorded. 12. Srerna FULIGINOSA, Linn. [No. 7. 2. October 8th, 1885. Eye black. Very common. These birds were laying when I arrived on Sept. 15, and single eggs were scattered on the bare ground. The negroes soon took all the eggs, and I could not make observations on the breeding. } 13. Gye1s caNDIDA (Gm.). [No. 3. do. Sept. 25th, 1885. Very common, perching in the cocoa-nut trees, and laying a single egg in the axils of the leaves, as described by Darwin in his ‘ Journal of Researches.’ ] 14. ANous srotipus (Linn.). [No. 5. 2. October 2nd, 1885. Eye black. Common on the island. It constructs a large rough nest of a heap of sticks and leaves, in the fork of a tree or bush, and on this it lays one egg, upon which it sits. } [A bird called by the inhabitants the ‘‘Mangeur des Poules” was said to visit the island frequently during the N.W. monsoons, but I never saw one. Perhaps it may be Tinnunculus punctatus, which goes by the same name in Mauritius; but if so it is not easy to see why it should visit Diego Garcia only in the N.W. monsoons. ** Fouquets”’ are abundant on the Ile des Vaches marines at Peros Bauhos, and are said to have been seen on the Ile des Oiseaux, Diego Garcia, but I never saw one. From the descriptions given me they seem to be a species of burrowing Petrel. | 3. On the Intervertebral Disk between the Odontoid Process and the Centrum of the Axis in Man. By J. Buanp Sutton, F.R.C.S., Lecturer on Comparative Anatomy, Middlesex Hospital Medical School. [Received May 29, 1886. ] There are few bones in the human skeleton which can boast a more extensive literature than the atlas and axis. Indeed so many investigations have been made concerning their nature, and so much has been written regarding the morphology of the first two vertebra, that most anatomists have abandoned them for more fertile regions of the skeleton. Yet, in spite of this attention, a new fact in con- nection with the axis has recently been disclosed by Prof. Cunningham 338 MR. J. B. SUTTON ON THE INTERVERTEBRAL [June 29, in a paper published in the ‘ Journal of Anatomy and Physiology’ for January of the present year. The object of this paper was to draw attention to the circumstance that if a section be carried vertically through the long axis of the second vertebra in an adult there will be found in the majority of cases a small strip of cartilage occupying the position indicated in the drawing (fig. 1). Prof. Cunningham states that whilst engaged in an investigation into the curves of the spinal column in Man and the Apes he made mesial sections of a large number of frozen human spines. His Fig. 1. A vertical section through the body of the axis to show the lenticular-shaped piece of cartilage, c. attention was attracted to a small lenticular-shaped plate of cartilage, which seemed in almost every case to be interposed between the os odontoideum and the body of the axis vertebra; on all sides it was surrounded by bone, so that it could only be brought into view by means of sections. The observations were made on eighteen axis vertebree, but three were eliminated on account of difficulty in ascertainmg the age of the subjects. The fifteen remaining specimens were divided into three groups according to their age. The first group comprised six axes, two from females and four from males, varying in age from twenty-four to fifty. In all the cartilage was present, measuring 4 mm. in length and 2 mm. in thickness. The second set comprised three specimens from females, varying in age from fifty to sixty years. The cartilage was present, and of the same dimensions as in the younger bones in the previous set. The third group consisted of six examples, two males and four females, the limits of age being from sixty to seventy. In four of the axes the lenticular disk was present, and measured in length 3 mm. and in width 13 mm. In the two oldest examples the disk was absent. The cartilage in the youngest specimen, a girl aged twenty-four years, was found to be of the hyaline type, with evidence in some of the sections of a sluggish ossific process around the margin; but remains of the notochord could not be detected. 1886. | DISK OF THE AXIS IN MAN. 339 On becoming acquainted with these observations of Prof. Cun- ningham, I lost no time in testing the statements by independent observation, and am able to confirm them in every particular. As in so many other instances, it is not remarkable that this piece of cartilage should exist, but that it has remained so long undetected. My intention in bringing the subject under the notice of the Society is not merely to confirm Cunningham’s statement, but to show that the presence of this piece of cartilage, in the midst of the axis, merely harmonizes with the condition of things found in situa- tions where other vertebree normally fuse together, as for example in the sacrum. Before discussing the question it will be desirable to briefly review the chief facts connected with the development of the axis. e. A diagram of the axis vertebra to show the various nuclei. The dotted portions represent cartilage. s, the suspensory ligament, marking the former position of the notochord; ¢, e, epiphyses. In common with the majority of the vertebrae, the axis ossifies from three primary centres—one for the centrum, and two lateral for the laminze and processes. Subsequently two nuclei appear for the odontoid process, arranged side by side as represented in fig. 2. After birth these centres fuse, and an additional nucleus, detected by Prof. Humphry, is deposited for the tip of the odontoid process, usually visible about the second year. Finally two epiphysial plates appear to complete the ossi- fication of the true centrum of the axis, as shown in the figure. As growth proceeds the various nuclei fuse, the cartilage becomes re- placed by bone, except the piece referred to at the commencement of the paper, and the growth of the bone is complete. The band of fibrous tissue passing from the summit of the odontoid process represents the thickened sheath of the notochord, and is known as the suspensory ligament. Turning our attention to the sacrum, we shall find in that bone an explanation of the persistence of the piece of cartilage which remains unossified in the axis. The sacrum in man is composed of five fused vertebrre. The body of each of the segments has its centre for the 340 MR. J. B. SUTTON ON THE INTERVERTEBRAL [June 29, body and two additional centres for the epiphysial plates, as in other regions of the spine. When the segments of the sacrum commence to ankylose, the adjacent epiphysial plates fuse with each other before they join the bodies of the vertebree to which they belong. This fusion of epiphyses is of a deceptive character, for it does not occur throughout the whole width of these bony menisci, but only around their circumferences. Hence if a section be carried through the sacrum, a piece of cartilage may be detected situated in a central cavity, the boundaries of which are constituted by the epiphysial plates; this piece of cartilage persists long after the various seg- ments of the sacrum have, from all external evidence, become Fig. 3. A section through the human sacrum, showing the epiphysial plates uniting with each other peripherally before fusing with their centra. firmly united. This remarkable arrangement of the epiphysial plates is represented in fig. 3. It is quite possible that this mode of fusion is applicable to the cervical vertebree of Whales; for an examination of this region of the column in a young Porpoise shows well-marked indications of peripheral union of the epiphysial plates, whilst they are still separate from the bodies of the vertebrz to which they respectively belong. My attention was first drawn to this question when examining the sacral vertebree of a young skeleton of the Great Anteater, Myrmecophaga jubata. After the skeleton had been macerated, the sacrum broke up into its component elements, the epiphysial plates separated from the vertebra, but the contiguous plates were firmly united in pairs. So far as my observations on other mammals have extended, this mode of fusion appears to be general. There are other points in the axis which demand some notice. 1 was unaware, until reading Prof. Cunningham’s paper, that any 1886. ] DISK OF THE AXIS IN MAN. 341 modern anatomist doubted the existence of two lateral nuclei for the main portion of the odontoid process; but if any one examine the axis of a human feetus at the eighth month of intra-uterine life, he will have all doubts as to the duplicity of this centre removed (see fig. 2). Another matter of considerable interest is the existence or non- existence of an epiphysial plate for the upper surface of the ¢rue centrum of the axis. Cunningham considers it to be absent ; but it is certainly present, and may be detected in section of the axis at the time the epiphysial plates make their appearance in other parts of the spine. In Cunningham’s paper reference is made to Macalister’s observation that the two epiphysial plates are present in the axis vertebra of Balenoptera rostrata, and that it can be detected in some cases in Man. Prof. Humphry has described and figured the upper plate in a Rabbit. On the other hand, Prof. Flower’ figures the axis of a man with Axis vertebra of a young Seal in section, showing the epiphysial plates of the true centrum of the axis, ¢, e. these plates present, as though it were an accepted fact, but describes the upper one as being represented by irregular ossifications. In order to test this point I have secured the axis vertebra from many young animals. Asa result of the investigation, I find two epiphysial plates for the axis present in the following :-— Primates.... Man. Spider-Monkey, Aéeles paniscus; Bonnet- Monkey, Macacus sinicus. Ungulata .. Horse. Axis Deer. Giraffe. Sheep. Carnivora .. The Leopard. The Domestic Cat. Seal. Other anatomists have reported it in :— Ungulata .. Foetal Horse (Macalister’*). Cetacea .... Balenoptera rostrata ( Macalister’). Rodentia.... Rabbit (Humphry ’). 1 © Osteology of the Mammalia.’ 2 Journal of Anat. and Physiology, vol. iii..p. 54; and Phil. Trans. 1868. 3 «The Human Skeleton,’ p. 129. 342 THE INTERVERTEBRAL DISK OF THE AXIS IN MAN. [June 29, As the upper epiphysis of the axis exists in forms so widely dif- ferent as a Cat and a Whale, or a Monkey and a Horse, there can be very little doubt that it is a very general condition which has been overlooked simply because it has not been sought. The reason why [ have been able to give an account of the axis in the specimens enumerated in the preceding list is explained by the fact that for some time past I have been collecting immature axes for another purpose ; thus, having a-goodly stock, I utilized them for the purpose of this paper. As a matter of convenience the following list of probable dates in the appearance of the individual nuclei of the axis is appended :— Centres for laminze, 8th week. Centres for body, 12th to 16th week. Nuclei for os odontoideum, 5th month. Centre for tip of odontoid process, 2nd year. Epiphysial plates, about 16th year. By the twentieth year all parts of the bone are consolidated, except the lenticular portion between the axis and the odontoid process. The interest of the question centres itself around the additional evidence afforded to the view that the odontoid process is the body of the atlas united with the axis, as was hinted by Cuvier, but first clearly made out by the admirable researches of Rathke', and subsequently confirmed by many competent observers. P.S. (July 30th, 1886).—In the discussion which followed the reading of this paper, Mr. J. W. Hulke drew attention to the im- portance of the above observations in so far as they independently confirmed Prof. Albrecht’s recent view expressed in a paper entitled, “* Uber die WirbelkGrperepiphysen und Wirbelkérpergelenke zwischen dem Epistropheus, Atlas und Occipitale der Saugethiere.”” (See ‘Die Comptes Rendus der achten Sitzung des internationalen medi- cinischen Kongresses, Kopenhagen,’ 1884.) At the time my paper was read I was ignorant of Albrecht’s re- search in this particular direction. However, a careful perusal of the paper in question convinces me that the epiphysis in the midst of the axis really represents, as Albrecht insists, two epiphyses, viz., that belonging to the cranial end of the axis and that appertaining to the caudal end of the atlas (odontoid process). Regarding the “‘centroidal’’ masses more observations are required, and the subject is one of great interest. 1 «Entwickelung der Schildkroten,’ 4 ‘ j Bi RyRy "| AM BEEP “ult [ in wl eile ees ayer bap ane Gh Tne to ph LAMBRA en) daa VAY ogy ib oa PA as 4 ‘owe 2 Ga oe ap ce : 7 Haar CHET nin) styitgdin vnien Lee Be OT eS ae ae 2 aie ear? P.Z.5.1886 PIL XXXIV W.Purkiss lith Hanhart imp NEW BUTTERFLIES FROM THE SOLOMON ISLANDS 1886.] ON RHOPALOCERA FROM THE SOLOMON ISLANDS. 343 4. Note on an Ectoparasite of the Menobranch. By Prof. R. Ramsay Wrieut, F.Z.8. [Received June 24, 1886.] The specimens of Menobranchus recently brought by me from Toronto and presented to the Society’s Collection were infested by an ectoparasitic Trematode, Sphyranuria osleri, mihi, which I first described in the ‘ Proceedings of the Canadian Institute,’ Toronto, 1878. The preserved specimens on which I founded my description enabled me to determine the zoological position of this parasite, which turned out to be an interesting form intermediate between Gyrodactylus and Polystomum ; but I was obliged to postpone any closer investigation into its anatomy till I had access to fresh specimens. I have recently had abundant opportunity of securing Be and I propose shortly to publish elsewhere the results of my studies. In view of the interest attaching to a certain parallelism between the phylogeny of the Polystomide and that of their hosts, I take the present opportunity of referring to the desirability of examining any Urodela which may die in the Reptile House, in case of possible additions to this interesting family of Trematoda. 5. Descriptions of some new Species of Rhopalocera from the Solomon Islands. By Gzrvase F. Maruew, Staff- Paymaster Royal Navy, F.L.S., F.Z.S., &c. [Received June 11, 1886.] (Plate XXXIV.) During nearly a four years’ Commission on the Australian Station, H.M.S. ‘Espiégle’ was employed for a greater part of her time among the islands of the Western Pacific, and, upon two occasions, paid brief visits to the Solomon Islands. It is to be regretted that she did not prolong her stay at this charming group, for, from the little seen of them, they appeared to be, entomologically speaking, a perfect paradise, being clothed from water’s edge to mountain’s peak with the most luxuriant and varied tropical vegetation. But a serious drawback to collecting was the hostility and treachery of the natives. At many places they were cannibals, and extreme caution had to be exercised when landing—indeed at some places collecting was quite out of the question, as it would have been almost certain death to have ventured into the forest alone. When the natives have had more intercourse with white men it is to be hoped that they will become more civilized, and discontinue their, at present, unpleasant customs. Now they look upon all white men 344 MR. G. F. MATHEW ON NEW [June 29, as their natural enemies, though it is a well-known fact that this state of feeling has to a great extent been created by the white men themselves, who have committed the gravest excesses, and often deliberate murders, while engaged in obtaining recruits for the labour vessels. Until this abominable traffic is abolished it would be unsafe to land at any of the larger islands, except under the escort of a strong and well-armed party. The natives are extremely revengeful, and recollect and treasure up an injury. Their notion of justice is blood for blood, a head for a head, so that in several instances in which white men have been murdered the innocent have suffered for the guilty. The first place we called at was Ugi, one of the smallest and easternmost islands of the group. Here, fortunately, the natives were all friendly, and an English trader (Mr. Stephens) had resided there for several years, being employed as an agent buying and collecting “ copra”’ for some Sydney firm. There is also a small depot for coal at this island, and our men-of-war occasionally call, and no labour traffic is permitted, so that the natives at this island were beginning to trust white men. Ugi is about twenty miles in circumference, for the most part hilly, and covered with dense forest. In the immediate vicinity of the villages there are small clearings where yams, taro (Caladium esculentum), and a little sugar is cultivated. Cocoa-nut palms grow all over the island, but especially near the beach, where, in some places, their waving crests form a graceful fringe. Bread-fruit trees are also plentiful near the villages. We anchored just off Mr. Stephens’s hut, at the back of which there was about a couple of acres of ground which had been cleared a year before, but which, at the time of our visit, was overgrown with a dense mass of weeds. Here Butterflies were numerous, especially Danais archippus and a species of Precis allied to P. ida, Hypolimnas bolina, H. alimena, &c. A very interesting case of mimicry occurred here. A dark-brown Euplea with broad white outer margins (E. brenchleyi, Butl.), and Danais insolata, Butl., with markings almost identical, were fairly plentiful ; but, to add to the confusion of things, a Hypolimnas, which on the wing might have been mistaken for either, was flying with them! Which mimicked which it was difficult to say, or the reason of the mimicry, as all three genera are avoided by birds both in the larva and perfect states. We remained at Ugi for three days, one of which was devoted to an expedition across the island to a large village on the other side. We breakfasted early and landed at 7 o’clock—a party of five of us, some being armed. On the beach we found a couple of natives, whom we had engaged the previous evening, waiting to show us the way. After leaving Mr. Stephens’s hut the trail led through the dense forest, and was so narrow that we were seldom able to walk more than one abreast. Everything at this early hour was reeking with moisture, and in some places the trees were so thick overhead that the path below was enshrouded in gloom. At first no Butter- flies were seen, but as the sun gained strength the heavy dew 1886.] RHOPALOCERA FROM THE SOLOMON ISLANDS. 345 disappeared, and a few were noticed flying high among the branches and quite out of reach. This was very tantalizing, and we must have walked nearly two miles before the first was captured. This was Drusilla phorcas, Westw., a low-flying but most conspicuous black- and-white species. Species of Danais and Euplaa were the next to appear ; and then, whenever we passed any open spots, Lycenidee of various kinds became rather numerous; but altogether Butterflies could not be called abundant in this shady forest. A great many more were seen than captured, for every now and then a large Papilio dashed across the path, and was lost in the forest before one had time to make a stroke at it. Overhead cockatoos and parrots were screaming, and pigeons and doves cooing among the branches ; but the trees were so lofty, and the leaves so thick, that it was almost impossible to see them, and only one of the latter was obtained. Upon nearing the village, about noon, our guides set up a great shouting to apprise the inhabitants of our approach, and upon entering it we were surrounded by a crowd of naked savages, who seemed to be very pleased to seeus. We walked through the village and examined the various huts, which were very well constructed, and were much better built than those we had previously met with at the New Hebrides. After seeing all there was to be seen, we sat down in the shade of one of the huts and discussed our lunch, the natives boiling our solitary pigeon and some yams which they gave us, and very good they were. After lunch [strolled about the clearings near the village, followed by a crowd of natives, who were much interested in my proceedings, and soon began to take an active part in the sport, and it was amusing to see them running madly after Butterflies with small bushes in their hands, with which they made frantic efforts to knock them down. Of course they very often succeeded, for they were extremely nimble, and then the broken fragments were brought to me in triumph, and I had to pretend to be much pleased. Butter- flies were fairly numerous in these clearings, and I captured among others several of the fine Papilio erskinei described further on. After the others had had an hour’s rest, we started back and got on board again about six o’clock, pretty tired with our day’s excursion, for in some places it was most fatiguing, especially up-hill, where the path frequently took us over slippery soap-stones, which made walking very difficult and unpleasant. We left Ugi the following day, and after stopping for a few hours off Tesemboko in the island of Guadalcanar, proceeded to the Duke of York Islands. Our next visit to the Solomon Islands was in September 1883, when we stayed for three days in Blanche Harbour, Treasury Island, at the entrance of the Bougainville Straits. The harbour is a very beautiful one, being almost landlocked by other small islands, all of which are hilly and densely wooded. Unfortunately it rained nearly the whole time we were there ; but during the intervals of fine weather, when I was able to get on shore, I could not go very far, as I was only just recovering from a severe attack of fever, and was too Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XXIII. 23 346 MR. G. F. MATHEW ON NEW [June 29, weak for much exertion. My hunting-ground was therefore confined to a slope on the hillside at the back of the native village, which had recently been cleared for yam-planting. Here Butterflies were more numerous than at Ugi; and if the weather had been more favourable, and I had been able to get about more, I believe I should have taken a large number. As it was I secured examples of several new species, Papilio bridgei being among them. The most plentiful were a Precis near P. ada, but very different to the Ugi form, Hypolimnas alimena, very fine, and several species of Euplea. Danais archippus was not seen at all in this place, although it was so common at Ugi; perhaps its migration had not yet extended so far in a north- westerly direction. From the little I have seen of the Solomon Islands, I feel quite convinced that when they are properly worked they will yield a large number of new and interesting Rhopalocera, and I hope on a future occasion to be able to describe some more new species. ARGYRONYMPHA, 0. gen. Head moderately large, hairy between the eyes; eyes rather prominent, smooth ; antennze long, slender, extending to beyond two thirds of costa, with a long, gradually-thickened club: palpi conspicuous, pea-green, porrect, ascendant, clothed outwardly at their base with fine short white hairs, the hairs less numerous towards the tip and dark grey; tip black, finely pointed: thorax rather short : abdomen almost as long as hind wings, slender, pinched in at base, and with a brush-like tuft of hairs at base of genital organs in male. Fore wings rather long and narrow in male, broader in female ; costa moderately arched, convex at base ; apex somewhat acute in male, truncated in female; hind margin entire, oblique; inner margin straight, hairy to beyond the middle; anal angle slightly obtuse ; nervures of fore wings dilated at base ; cell narrow, rather long ; first subcostal nervule emitted just before end of cell; discocellular nervules pointing outwards ; median nervure and first discocellular nervule forming a moderately acute angle. Hind wings: costa elbowed at base, very slightly concave at one third, and rounded off at apex; hind margin very moderately sinuate ; inner margin slightly grooved. First pair of legs imperfect, rather pubescent, pale green ; second and third pairs long, slender, smooth. This interesting genus does not appear to come very near any yet described, but bears some relationship to Hypocysta, Westw., and Nissanga, Moore. These beautiful little Butterflies were local in their habits and of retiring disposition, frequenting shady spots in the dense forest. When disturbed, they flew but a short distance and settled upon the leaf of some low shrub, always on its upper surface. They were rather restless, and generally walked several times round the margin of the leaf, and then flitted off to the next. While so engaged their wings were kept erect, and the bright metallic spots and stripes made them very conspicuous. 1886.] | RHOPALOCERA FROM THE SOLOMON ISLANDS. 347 ARGYRONYMPHA UGIENSIS, n. sp. (Plate XXXIV. fig. 3.) Male and female.— Upperside orange-red : primaries with a black marginal border extending on costa from end of cell to rather beyond middle of inner margin ; border very broad at apex, constricted and narrowest at second median nervule, widening out again at first median uervule : secondaries, costablackish brown, base and margins broadly clouded with dusky, and with some eee dusky markings across disk ; a black and rather indistinct submarginal line widening out between subcostal nervules into a linear- shaped blotch ; all the nervures dusky. Underside: primaries orange-red, not “quite so bright as upperside ; a submarginal silvery stripe bordered outwardly by a narrow very dark fuscous line; a short oblique silver stripe extends from inner margin near hinder angle to halfway between first and second median nervules, and with its apex almost touching the submarginal stripe: secondaries, basal half greyish ochreous, thickly irrorated with minute black dots ; an oblique reddish-brown stripe from near costa crosses the wing, and encloses upper part of cell and terminates near anal angle; this is bordered outwardly by a curved or double crescent-shaped silvery band, which is again bordered by a pale ochreous-yellow band; a narrow submarginal line of silver bordered outwardly by reddish ochreous, and inwardly, from submedian nervure to discoidai nervule, by reddish brown ; between the discoidal nervule and first subcostal nervule there are four jet- black and somewhat square-shaped spots, with their bases resting on the submarginal line ; between first and second subcostal nervules are two additional black spots, above the others, the space between them, which is ochreous, forming a complete St. George’s Cross, and the whole inwardly bordered by a silvery band; between submedian nervure aud two median nervules a silvery horseshoe-mark bordered outwardly and inwardly by reddish brown ; all the wings margined by a line of dark reddish brown. The silvery markings have opalescent tints in various lights. Exp. 42 millim. Hab. Ugi, Solomon Islands. ARGYRONYMPHA PULCHRA, n. sp. (Plate XXXIV. fig. 4.) Male and female.—Upperside dark brown; basal third of fore wings reddish brown. Underside: primaries, basal portion, including cell and a little beyond on costa and inner margin, grey, thickly irrorated with minute black dots ; a silvery submarginal band from rather before apex on costa to hinder angle, where it forms an elbow and turns back and runs parallel to itself as far as third median nervule, this is bordered inwardly by dark chestnut ; a pale yellowish stripe from near apex to first median nervule, its lower half between the silver bands ; beyond this to grey part of wing a broad band of chestnut : secondaries, basal part, including half of cell to near anal angle, grey, thickly irrorated with minute black dots ; beyond this a band of chestnut frcm inner margin two thirds across wing towards anal angle ; this is bc rlered outwardly by an elbowed stripe of silver 93* 348 MR. G. F. MATHEW ON NEW [June 29, which is continued round by anal angle, forming a submarginal stripe, to apex, whence it forms a curve as far as discoidal nervure; a silver A-shaped mark between second median and discoidal nervule, the bases nearly resting on submarginal stripe; a subcrescent-shaped silver stripe near anal angle divided by first median nervule ; four small square black confluent spots just above submarginal stripe, between discoidal and second subcostal nervules ; above these, two ochreous lunules bordered above, as far as outer edge of silvery curved band, by a large black irregularly-shaped blotch ; space between arms of A-shaped mark, and inner edge of submarginal stripe between second median nervule and submedian nervure, deep chestnut ; a large black lunular spot between first and seccnd median nervules, its inner edge touching the subcrescent- shaped silver stripe. Thorax reddish brown; some bluish-green hairs on collar and between eyes; eyes dark reddish brown, bright red when the insect is alive. Exp. 39 millim. Hab. Treasury Island, Solomon Islands. PAPILIO XENOPHILUS, Nn. sp. Male.—Upperside dark brown : primaries—a_ straw-coloured transverse marginal band slightly curved inwards towards the apex, straight on the outer edge and nearly parallel with hind margin, rather clouded on inner edge ; nervures crossing band dark brown and clouded at their edges: secondaries tailed, scolloped ; a straw- coloured transverse and somewhat outwardly dentated band from costa, near apex, to inner margin just above anal spot; anal spot indistinct, composed above of blue and below of pinkish-yellow atoms ; indentations whitish. Underside: primaries, same as above but band paler: secondaries, no band, but instead a series of seven whitish-yellow spots, the three near anal angle and one at apex near costa small and indistinct, the other three large and oblong-oval ; beyond these spots patches of bluish atoms; a marginal row of indistinct orange-yellow spots, above each of which is a cloudy pyriform blotch; an orange-yellow spot at anal angle, bordered above by a few blue atoms. Exp. 110 millim. Hab. Ugi, Solomon Islands. This species comes near P. capaneus, Westw., but differs in having the bands right across the wings, and in the markings of the underside. PAPILIO ERSKINEI, n. sp. (Plate XXXIV. fig. 1.) Male.—Upperside greenish black : primaries with a marginal band of eight large creamy-yellow spots curved inwards at the apex, extending from subcostal to submedian nervure, and with indications of another spot between submedian nervure and inner margin, and a short dash of the same colour between the subcostal nervure and costa, and just above the subcostal spot ; base of cell dusted with a 1886. | RHOPALOCERA FROM THE SOLOMON ISLANDS. 349 few minute yellowish atoms: secondaries not tailed, margins scolloped ; a broad transverse outwardly-sinuated greenish creamy- white fascia, its inner margin touching, but not extending into, discoidal cell; a conspicuous orange-red oval spot at anal angle. Underside black: primaries with four white apical spots, and a whitish streak at base of cell: secondaries with a row of seven orange-red marginal spots, the one at anal angle being much the largest, and above these a series of six lunules composed of pale- bluish atoms; indentations pale yellowish. Exp. 144 millim. Hab. Ugi, Solomon Islands. This fine Butterfly belongs to the Hrectheus group. It was tolerably common at Ugi in June 1883, but difficult to catch on account of its powerful flight, and its habit of keeping in the thick forest, where it could not be easily followed. I saw several of what I believe were the females of this insect; they were much larger than the males, of a dark brown, and with more white across the wings. I have named this species in honour of Admiral James E. Erskine, who commanded the Australian Squadron at the time I was on the Station. PaPILio BRIDGEI, n. sp. (Plate XXXIV. fig. 2.) Male.—Upperside deep black, appearing greenish black in certain lights: primaries, a marginal band of eight somewhat square-shaped pale greenish-white spots curved inwards at the apex, the apical spots being small and indistinct ; base of cell and apex dusted with a few whitish atoms: secondaries not tailed, scolloped; a broad transverse outwardly-dentated pale greenish-white fascia, its inner margin enclosing lower part of cell, and its upper portion running between costa and subcostal nervure nearly to base. Underside black: primaries, subcostal nervure inwardly bordered by a narrow whitish streak from base to near middle of cell; a few whitish atoms at apex: secondaries, a marginal row of seven pale pinkish- orange spots, the three nearest the apex small and obscure, the one at anal angle large and nearly square-shaped; above these a row of seven ill-defined lunules of pale-bluish atoms, the one at apex nearly obsolete ; indentations conspicuous, white, crescent-shaped. Exp. 118 millim. Hab. Treasury Island, Solomon Islands. This is another fine species, and also belongs to the Hrectheus group. It was not uncommon, but, like P. erskinet, frequented the thick forest and was difficult to capture. I only obtained one, a very perfect example. I saw a larger insect, of a dark brownish- black hue and with larger spots and fascia, which was probably the female of this. I have named this species in honour of Captain Cyprian A. G. Bridge, who commanded H.M. ship ‘ Espiégle’ during her long and interesting Commission of nearly four years, a great portion of which time was spent among the islands of the Western Pacific. 350 MR. R. B. SHARPE ON BIRDS FROM PERAK. [June 29, PAPILIO HICETAON, 0. Sp. Male.—Upperside deep olive-brown : primaries, an oblique row of nine spots from apex to inner margin, the spot contiguous to inner margin greenish yellow, the remainder paler ; a submarginal row of five small pale-yellow spots between subcostal, discoidal, and first and second median nervules ; two small spots outside upper end of cell, and another larger spot beyond, near the apex ; the cell contains six spots and streaks, at the base a long oblique streak pointing towards the apex, next a minute perpendicular dash, this is followed by two narrow subcrescent-shaped spots near subcostal nervure, and at end of cell two spots, the upper irregular in shape, the lower oval, all these spots yellow with the exception of basal streak which is pale green: secondaries, basal half light brown, dotted with golden- brown atoms, the rest deep velvety brown, the nervules paler; a small suboval and slightly raised patch of scales at upper end of cell ; inner margin and base thickly clothed with fine golden-brown hairs. Underside: primaries, same as above, but spots paler, and row of submarginal spots extends to inner margin ; a small crimson streak at base: secondaries, a large and somewhat square-shaped pale- green spot at base, bisected by subcostal nervure and bordered outwardly by black and crimson ; an opalescent lunule with dasky pupil at upper end of cell ; a discal band of dusky lunules, bordered below with some metallic-blue atoms, the lunule at: anal angle edged above with crimson atoms; apex with marginal patches of opalesceut atoms; fringes reddish. The primaries are narrow, and the costa is much arched. Exp. 100 millim. Hab. Ugi, Solomon Islands. Near P. browni, but quite distinct. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXIV, Fig. 1. Papilio erskiner, 2, p. 348. 2 bridget, @, p. 349. . Argyronympha ugiensis, §, p. 347. pulchra, 2, p. 347. Cok 6. Notes on some Birds from Perak. By R. Bowpirr Suarrr, F.LS., F.Z.S., &c., Zoological Department, British Museum. [Received June 15, 1886.] Thanks to the exertions of Mr. Davison, who explored the western side of the Malayan peninsula, we have a tolerably complete list of the birds of this portion of the Indian Region, and a list of his collections has been given by Mr. Hume (‘Stray Feathers,’ 1879, pp- 37, 151). The series of Malayan birds in the Hume Collection, now in the British Museum, is an extremely valuable one, and it is 1886. ] MR. R. B. SHARPE ON BIRDS FROM PERAK. 351 to be regretted that Mr. Davison was never able, through political obstacles, to reach the mountains on the eastern side of the peninsula and explore the high ridge or ‘‘ backbone ’”’ which runs down its entire length. Considerable speculation has been excited respecting the fauna of these Malayan mountains, because all the collections hitherto made in Malacca have proved that, as regards the birds, there are very few species which are not common to Borneo, Sumatra, and the Malayan peninsula. Sumatra, however, has always enjoyed a certain distinction from possessing at least one genus, Psilopogon, peculiar to itself; and, again, in the mountains several Himalayan genera have been found with species identical with, or only slightly differing from, those which occur in the Eastern Himalayas and extend down the mountains of Tenasserim. Many Malayan species range into the southern portions of the last-named province; but as regards the Himalayan genera, such as Niltava, Liothria, Pnoepyga, Sibia, &c., all traces of them are lost after leaving Tenasserim until they turn up again in Sumatra. Many prognostications have been made that when the mountains of the Malayan peninsula were explored, the above-named genera and many others common to the mountains of Tenasserim and Sumatra would be found to extend along the eastern side of Malacca ; but of this the first actual proof has been furnished by Mr. L. Wray, who has sent a small parcel of birds from the mountains of Perak to the British Museum. Although so few in number, the_ revelations which they disclose are of the greatest value, for they show that in Perak, at least, and probably throughout the mountain-range, there is a curious mixture of Himalayan and high-Sumatran forms. Thus the Psilopogon, hitherto supposed to be a peculiar Sumatran genus, is accompanied by Rhinocichla mitrata (Ianthocincla mitrata, auct.), another species hitherto believed to be confined to Sumatra ; and the Stéza is also the Sumatran S. similliima, and not S. picata. The affinities of the Perak species being therefore so markedly Sumatran, it is not a little surprising to find that the Mesia is MM. argentauris of the Himalayas, and not M. laurine of Sumatra as one would have expected. The following is a list of the specimens sent by Mr. Wray, who informs us that they were mostly obtained at an elevation of 3000 feet, and that his native collector, after an experience of 30 years’ work, had not met with some of the species before. Fam. Muscicarip. Nixtava GRANpIs, Hodgs.; Sharpe, Cat. B. iv. p. 404. “No. 11. Male. Irides red; legs and feet nearly black ; beak black. The female is brown, with a blue spot on each shoulder and a patch of ash under neck ; head blackish and slightly glossed with blue. Specimens obtained at 4000 feet.” Compared with males from Sikhim and 'Tenasserim in the Hume Collection, and apparently identical in every respect. 352 MR. R. B. SHARPE ON BIRDS FROM PERAK. {June 29, Rurnocicuta mitrata (8. Miill.); Sharpe, Cat. B. vil. p. 452. Tanthocincla mitrata, Bp. Consp. i. p. 371. “No. 12. Males. Irides brown; beak orange ; legs yellow; skin under eye pure white. Common above 3000 feet.’’ Two specimens sent, identical with others in the Museum from Sumatra, to which island the species has hitherto been supposed to be confined. Fam. TiMELIIDe. HyprocicHLa RUFICAPILLA (Temm.); Sharpe, Cat. B. vii. p- 319. Henicurus ruficapillus, Yemm. Pl. Col. iii. pl. 534. “No. 17. Female. Irides brown ; legs nearly white ; beak black ; Rocky streams in the jungle on the hills.” Agrees with the females of this species as described by Messrs. Hume and Davison. S1p1A SIMILLIMA (Salvad.); Sharpe, Cat. B. vol. vii. p. 402. Heterophasia simillima, Salvad. Ann. Mus. Civic. Genov. xiv. “No. 13. Female. Iris brown; beak black; legs plumbeous. Flies about among the tops of trees in parties of from 20 to 30. Above 3000 feet.” The two specimens sent agree precisely with a Sumatran example in the British Museum collected by Mr. Carl Bock. MesIA ARGENTAURIS, Hodgs. ; Sharpe, Cat. B. vii. p. 642. “No. 10. Female. Iris brown; feet and beak of same colour as throat of female. Male bird has red under tail-coverts; throat orange. From the hills of Perak over 3000 feet. Flies about in small parties of 10 or 12.” The female sent is absolutely identical with Himalayan specimens, . and the note given by Mr. Wray as to the colouring of the male also suits the Himalayan bird and does not agree with the Sumatran M. laurine, Salvad. (Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen. xiv. p. 231), which is the species one would have expected to find along with Szbia simillima. Fam. Capironip&. PsILOPOGON PYROLOPHUS, S. Miill. ; Marshall, Monogr. Capit. p- 133, pl. 53. “No. 14. Male and female. Iris brown; legs dull green; bare skin under eye green. On the hills over 2000 feet.” This species has only been recorded from Sumatra up to the present time. Fam. ALCEDINID4. CARCINEUTES PULCHELLUS (Horsf.) ; Sharpe, Monogr. Alced. p. 251, pl. 96. “No. 16. Male. Irides white; bare skin under eye pale brown ; 1886.] MR.SHARPE ON BIRDS IN THE HUME COLLECTION. 393 beak crimson-red. Had just caught and partly eaten a large spider.” Fam. TrRoGONIDS. Harpactes puvaucett, Temm.; Gould, Monogr. Trogon. 2nd ed. pl. 40. “No. 15. Male. Irides brown; bill pure cobalt-blue. Hills up to about 2000 feet.” 7. Notes on Specimens in the Hume Collection of Birds. By R. Bowpter Suarez, F.L.S. &e. [Received June 18, 1886.] (Continued from p. 97.) ConTENTS. No. 2. On some Rose-Finches, p. 353. No. 3. On Lalage melanothoraz, p. 354. No. 4. On some Flycatchers of the Genus Siphia, p. 354. No. 2. On some Rose-Finches. In 1881 Colonel Biddulph (Ibis, 1881, p. 156, pl. vi.) noticed the differences between the large Rose-Finches of Yarkand and those of the Gilgit district, in which he had been resident for some time, and named the former bird Propasser rhodometopus. Having lately had occasion to examine the series of Rose-Finches in the Hume Collection, I was able to discriminate the P. rhodometopus of Biddulph as distinct from P. rhodochlamys of Indian authors, from the Himalayas. The two species are very nearly allied, but the Yarkand bird has silvery pointed feathers on the forehead, which the Himalayan bird has not. At the same time Colonel Biddulph has, I believe, fallen into an error in his identification of the true P. rhodochlamys of Brandt, which was described from the Altai Mountains, and appears to me to be identical with the Yarkand bird, but net with P. rhodochlamys (so-called) from the Himalayas. Brandt in his original description (Bull. Phys.-Math. Acad. Sci. St. Pétersb. 1843, p. 362) distinctly says ‘“ Penne /rontales, verticis, gutturis &c. acuminate ;’’? and this seems to point undoubt- edly to the species afterwards called P. rhodometopus by Biddulph. Consequently the Himalayan species must require a separate desig- nation, which is forthcoming in Propasser grandis (Blyth, J. A. S. Beng. xviii. p. 810). Mr. Seebohm has lent me specimens of Carpodacus rubicillus from the Caucasus, and on comparing them with examples of so- called ©. rubicillus from Turkestan and Yarkand, which have the back almost entirely uniform, and narrow black shaft-streaks on the under tail-coverts, I find that the two species are not identical. 354 ON BIRDS IN THE HUME COLLECTION. [June 29, Both races are figured by Gould in the ‘ Birds of Asia,’ but, like other ornithologists, he considered the differences between them to be of insufficient specific value. They are, however, so well marked that I propose the name of Carpodacus severtzovi for the Central- Asian bird, and Mr. Seebohm agrees with me that it ought to have a different name from that of the Caucasus form (C. rubicillus of Gildenstidt). No. 3. On Lalage melanothorax, Sharpe. In registering and arranging the splendid series of Campophagidze in the Hume Collection, I naturally looked out for additional specimens of the fine Lalage which I described in 1879, from Madras, naming it Lalage melanothorax (Cat. B. iv. p. 91). Not finding any additional specimens in the Hume Collection, I had another look at the type in the British Museum, and at once recognized that it must be an artefact! The body is that of Lalage sykesi, but the head and neck are those of Buchanga atra. That L should not have noticed this before is as surprising as the fact that I have shown the specimen to many ornithological friends, most of them intimately acquainted with the two species above mentioned, and that none of us have detected the fraud. On re-examining the specimen, as I have done many times before, it is impossible to detect where the birds have been joined together. Lalage melanothorax, however, is a name to be suppressed. No. 4. On some Flycatchers of the Genus Siphia. Seven specimens of Siphia olivacea (Hume) are in the Hume Collection, and I find that I had rightly identified the species in the ‘Catalogue of Birds,’ vol. iv. p. 458. Cyornis albo-olivacea, Hume, Str. F. 1877, p. 488, is Setaria pectoralis, Salvad. Ucc. Born. p. 233, and Rhinomyias pectoralis of my ‘Catalogue,’ vol. iv. p. 368. Cyornis poliogenys, Brooks, Str. F. 1878, p. 469, seems to be a good species, and is closely allied to S. olivacea (Hume), but has a grey head and face, and is orange-rufous on the breast, the throat also being washed with the same colour and not white as in C. olivacea. This species will have the following synonymy :— SIPHIA POLIOGENYS. Cyornis poliogenys, Brooks, Str. F. 1879, p. 469. Siphia cacharensis, Madarasz, Zeitschr. ges. Orn. 1. p. 52, Taf. 1. fig. 2 (1884). Hab. Sikhim Terai (W. £. Brooks) ; Bhootan Dooars (Mandelli) ; Dibrughur, Assam (J. R. Cripps) ; Shillong ; Cachar (4. O. Hume) ; Manipur (4. O. Hume) ; Tippera. The plate of Siphia cacharensis does not agree with the description, The latter, however, is very good, and leaves no doubt as to the identity of the species. - P. Z.S.188G. Pl. XXXV. inyp. Mintern Bros - Maud Horman-Fisher del et lith. NEW LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 1886. ] ON LEPIDOPfERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 355 8. On Lepidoptera collected by Major Yerbury in Western India. By Artruur G. Butter, F.L.S., F.Z.S., &c. [Received June 25, 1886.] (Plate XX XV.) Major Yerbury has recently presented to the Museum a fine series of Lepidoptera collected by himself at Campbellpore ; along with the specimens he has forwarded numerous notes of considerable interest ; therefore it is the more desirable that an account of the collection should be published. Unfortunately some of the specimens were pinned, and amongst these were several specimens of Caligula simla ; the usual result naturally followed—the abdomen of one of these large Saturniids broke off, and not only more or less damaged the other specimens of this species, but made such havoc amongst some of the smaller Moths as to render their identification hopeless. Major Yerbury has sent the following notes on the various loca- lities mentioned by him :— “ Campbellpore. A military station about 40 miles from Rawal Pindee. Height above sea-level, 1200 ft. ; situated on a cultivated sandy plain. The river Haro flows past the cantonment at a distance of about 2 miles to the southward and eastward ; the country across the river is very much broken up by water-courses and with rocky spurs running down to the river. ** Attock. A military station to the N.W. of Campbellpore and 12 miles off ; situated among barren hills on the banks of the Indus. “ Khairabad. Railway-station across the Indus, opposite Attock ; barren hills all round. “ Lawrencepore. An abandoned military station 9 miles from Campbellpore, on the banks of the Haro. “Chittar Pahar. A range of hills running east and west; the nearest point to Campbellpore about 7 miles across Haro. The highest peak of this range is about 3600 ft., but Kala Dilli, Lum- bahdun, and other places mentioned are probably only from 1500 to 1800 feet above sea-level. Limestone, thickly covered with vegeta- tion to the north; barren, with scattered bushes of baubul and jin- netta, on the south side. “ Thundiani. Hill-station near Abbottabad (8700 feet ?). “Kala Pani. Stage between Thundiani and Abbottabad (6000 feet ?). * Bugnoter. First stage from Abbottabad on the Abbottabad and Murree road (6000 feet ?). “Murree and Rawal Pindee road.—T7ret, 5000 feet ?, first stage from Murree ; Chittar, 3000 feet?; Barracoo, 2500 feet, second stage; Rawal Pindee, 1800 feet ? ** Dewal, 6000 feet ; first stage on Murree and Cashmere road. “* Hassan Abdal, 1600 feet ?; midway between Rawal Pindee and Campbellpore. 356 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29, ** Nisan Jani. Mountain near Kalabagh, Abbottabad and Murree road ; highest point nearly 10,000 feet.” The collection contains examples of 178 species, many of them represented by a fair series of specimens, mostly identified for the collector (but frequently erroneously) by Mr. de Nicéville. Six of the Butterflies and nineteen of the Moths are described as new, and several other species probably new to science, but in bad condition, are indi- cated in order to show that there is still much to be done in that part of India by any one who will take the trouble to collect Lepidoptera. NYMPHALID2. EvrPLain&. 1. LIMNAS CHRYSIPPUS. Papilio chrysippus, Linneeus, Syst. Nat. 1758, p. 471. 3, Campbellpore, 19th and 26th July, 1885; 9, 20th June and 26th July, 1885; Dewal near Murree, 24th August. One of the females has a tawny subapical patch beyond the white band on primaries, exhibiting a slight tendency to modification in the direction of L. Alugii. 1a. LiMNAS ALCIPPOIDES. Limnas alcippoides, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1883, p. 238, pl. xxxi. fig. 1. 9, Campbellpore, 17th and 21st June and 18th July, 1885. The specimens of this form obtained by Major Yerbury tend to confirm my expressed opinion that it is a reversional sport of L. chrysippus ; the three specimens differ as follows :— a. Primaries as in ZL. alcippus; secondaries with the veins, internal area, and centre of median interspaces snow-white. 6. Primaries as in L. chrysippus; secondaries with the veins, internal area, and centre of median interspaces whitish. c. Primaries as in L. chrysippus ; secondaries above pale, below white. Major Yerbury says of L. chrysippus :—‘ Very common, May, June, July, October, November, December. Caterpillar common in July, feeds on Calotropis gigantea; agrees with the description given in ‘ The Butterflies of India,’ and appears to be the same as that reared at Aden, where it fed on either this or some closely allied plant.” Of L. alcippoides he says :—‘‘ Some eight specimens taken in all during May and June 1835; varies greatly in the amount of white on the hind wing.” 2. LiMNAs KLUGII. Limnas klugii, Butler, P. Z.S. 1885, p. 758. n. 2. Euploa dorippus, var., Klug, Symb. Phys. pl. 48. fig. 5. 2, Campbellpore, 11th June, 1885. ‘Not so common as ZL. alcippoides; only four specimens taken during May and 2nd to 11th June, 1885. All these specimens have curious leprous-like spots on their wings.” —J. W. ¥. 1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 357 I am surprised to find that this species extends so far to the east as Campbellpore; that it is rare (where I. chrysippus is common) is only natural, if this is the limit of its range eastward from Afghan- istan. I cannot agree at all with Col. Swinhoe’s statement that typical L. dorippus is variable ; I never saw a doubtful specimen. SaTYRIN#. 3. AULOCERA SARASWATI. Satyrus saraswati, Kollar in Hiig. Kasehm. iv. 2, p. 445, pl. 14. figs. 3, 4 (1848). 2, Dewal, 26th August; ¢ 2, Murree, 5th September, 1885. “Common at Murreein August. Some of those obtained towards Thundiani, though under this number (42) were noted by De Nicéville as A padma.”’—J. W. Y. The four examples sent to us by Major Yerbury are all typical A, saraswati. A. padma is so perfectly distinct from that species, that Mr. de Nicéville can hardly have mistaken one for the other ; at the same time I cannot include it without proof. 4. AULOCERA SWAHA. Satyrus swaha, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 444, pl. 14. figs. 1, 2 (1848). 3, Murree, 8th and 28th August and 8th September; Atabul, 9000 feet, 16th September ; Thundiani, 24th September. ““Common at Murree in August and September; found higher up the hill than A. saraswati.’—J. W. Y. The six specimens received are all males. 5. HipparRCHIA PARISATIS. Satyrus parisatis, Kollar, Denkschr. Akad. Wien, math.-nat. Cl. i. p. 52. n. 7 (1850). 3 2, road between Bugnoter and Abbottabad, 4000-5000 feet, 20th September; @, between Abbottabad and Kala Pani, 25th September, 1885. ‘* Common between Bugnoter and Abbottabad ; also on the lower slopes of Thundiani ; seen near Tret, 8th October, 1885.” —J. W. Y. 6. LeTHE pyRTA. Debis dyrta, Felder, Reise der Nov., Lep. p. 497. n. 860 (1867). 3, Bugnoter, 19th September, about 4000 to 5000 feet ; between Bugnoter and Abbottabad, 20th September ; Kala Pani, about 5000 feet, on 24th; Tret, 8th October, 1885. 9, between Murree and Tret, on same day. “« Two specimens taken at Dewal, 26th August ; afterwards found commonly below Bugnoter, 20th September, and between Abbottabad and Kala Pani.”-—J. W. ¥. The specimens sent are all males excepting one dwarfed example. 358 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29, 7. AMECERA SCHAKRA. Satyrus schakra, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 446, pl. 15. figs. 3, 4 (1848). 3 2, Murree, 4th, 5th, and 11th August, and 7th September ; do, between Abbottabad and Kala Pani, 25th September, 1885. “Very common in August and September. Found all along the hill as far as Thundiani, and as low as Tret and Bugnoter ; probably not above 5000 feet.”-—J. W. Y. 8. CALLEREBIA ANNADA. Erebia annada, Moore, Cat. Lep. E.I. Co. Mus. i. p. 226. n. 475 (1857). 3 Q, between Abbottabad and Kala Pani, 25th September, 1885. ‘*Not uncommon about Kala Pani; here its habits appeared different from those of Callerebia in general, as it was flying about over stones and low bushes, not affecting the shade ; near Tret (8th etober), however, it affected the shade much like C. nirmala and C. daksha.’—J. W. Y. It is an interesting fact that Major Yerbury sends the above species under the name of “ C. hybrida;” because his identifications are, to a great extent, derived from Mr. de Nicéville. A short time since I was severely taken to task for having described C. hybrida as a species (not that I ever did so, for I distinctly stated my opinion that it was a hybrid and an inconstant one); now if the gentleman who attacked me obtained his identification from the same source, it is clear that what he considered a very bad species is C. annada. Who shall decide this point? 9. CALLEREBIA NIRMALA. Erebia nirmala, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1865, p. 501. n. 91. 3 2, Murree, 6th, 9th, and 12th August, 1885. ** Callerebia daksha and nirmala. These two species appear to me to merge into one another. They were common at Murree in shady places in August 1885.”—J. WV. Y. Major Yerbury sends seven specimens, some of them rather worn, but all perfectly typical C. nirmala; whether the female bas been identified for him as C. daksha or whether he actually possesses the latter species,-I cannot say; but I am much inclined to accept the first as the more probable explanation of his note. I should be glad to obtain specimens of C. duksha for our collection, as we only have one male labelled by Mr. Moore and received from him in 1877; from this one specimen it is impossible to decide how far the differ- ential characters of the species can be relied upon ; if constant, they are amply sufficient to distinguish it from C. nirmala. 10. YerHiMA ORDINATA. Ypthima ordinata, Butler, P. Z.S. 1880, p. 148, pl. xv. fig. 3. 3 2, between Abbottabad and Kala Pani, 25th September, 1885. Q , between Murree and Tret, 1st October. n 1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 359 * Common on the 25th September about Kala Pani and on the road between Abbottabad and Bugnoter.’—J. W.Y. The incorrect identification of Y. avanta has been given to Major Yerbury for this species ; though common in India, it is a very rare species in European collections, as also is Y. avanta—a smaller Butterfly, more nearly resembling Y. newboldi in form, the under surface of its wings ash-grey, densely striated with brown and distinctly crossed by olive-brown bands ; the ocelli of the secondaries small, oval, and with large silver pupils. The four (unfortunately rather worn) specimens in the present collection, though they differ from one another in minor details, correspond in all their principal features with my type of Y. ordinata. 1]. YprHIMA NAREDA. Satyrus nareda, Kollar in Hig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 451 (1848). 3, Dewal, 26th August, 1885. “Common at Murree in August.”—J. W. YL. 12. YprHiMa SAKRA. Ypthima sakra, Moore, Cat. Lep. E.I. Co. Mus. i. p. 286. n. 508 (1857); Hewitson, Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 3, vol. ii. pl. 18. fig. 18 (1865). 3, Murree, 12th September ; Thundiani, 24th September, 1885. “ Vpthima nikea. Wewal, 26th August. Not uncommon about Murree and towards Thundiani, end of. August and beginning of September. The form Y. sakra (differing in having no intervening yellow bands to the ocelli) was also obtained.’—J. W. Y. The true Y. nikea is unknown to me, but Mr. Moore describes it as having the “ underside grey,” whereas in this species (Y’. sakra) it is distinctly yellow ; he also says that the apical ocelli of the hind wings are ‘‘joined together, though having a yellow band between them,” the only part of this description which is to me unintelligible, but to which Major Yerbury evidently refers as the distinctive character between the two named forms. In the Hewitson cabinet there is a series of five Y. sakra, the smallest specimen, labelled “nikea, M.,” differing in having the two apical ocelli separate though enclosed in an 8-shaped yellow zone: though the under surface is still yellow instead of grey, this may be the typical Y. nikea; if so, it is connected with Y. sakra, of Marshall and De Nicéville, by one of the two specimens now sent, in which the ocelli, though not absolutely confluent, touch one another upon the vein as in Hewit- son’s figure. Hewitson’s type of Y. sakra, therefore, is clearly one of these intermediate specimens. NyMPHALINZ. 13. HypoLIMNAs MISIPPUS. Papilio misippus, Linneus, Mus. Lud. Ulr. p. 264 (1764). 3, Campbellpore, 9th November, 1885. ‘Flew to light at night during R. A. Mess.” ‘ Rare: only four specimens in all taken—3 ¢ and 19. November and December.”’— J.W.Y. 369 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29, 14. SEPHISA DICHROA. Limenitis dichroa, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv..2, p. 429, pl. 8. figs. 1, 2 (1848). 2, Muree, 11th August, 1885. “Not common ; some half-dozen specimens, nearly all damaged, taken at Murree (th and 11th August), all on the trunk of the same tree—a species of willow. Two or three seen on the wing: the flight appears to be particularly rapid.’”—J. W. Y. 15. ATHYMA OPALINA. Limenitis opalina, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 427 (1848). 3, Murree, 5th and 12th August; 2, Ist October, 1885. “Fairly common at Murree in August.”—J. W. ¥. 16. Nepris MAHENDRA. Neptis mahendra, Moore, P. Z. 8S. 1872, p. 560, pl. 32. fig. 3. 3, Murree, 13th August ; 2, 8th September, 1885. “Common at Murree, August and September ; seen as far as Thundiani.”—J. W. Y. The following species was sent under the same number and name (N. mahendra), but is perfectly distinct both in pattern and color- ation, being more nearly allied to N. nandina of Darjiling and Nepal, which it apparently represents in Western India. 17. NEPTIS YERBURIT, sp. 0. 3. Wingsabove of the size, form, and generalaspect of N. mahendra, but the discoidal streak and spot beyond it as in N. duryodana, which it also resembles in having a pale irregular line across the primaries between the discal and submarginal spots, and a pale sub- marginal line on the secondaries. It differs from both species in having a complete submarginal series of white spots on the primaries, and a pale line through the centre of the black belt on the secon- daries ; further, it differs from N. mahendra in the greater obliquity of the subapical discal spots of the primaries: on the under surface the markings are very different, corresponding in almost all respects with those of N. nandina ; the brown colouring, however, is olivaceous instead of rufous, and the brown belt across the secondaries does not taper towards the costa as in the Darjiling insect. Expanse of wings 54 millim. Murree, 16th August, 1885. As we possess Moore’s types of N. nandina, and as this species is certainly confounded with others in at least one large collection, it may be useful to point out that it is more closely allied to ¥. soma (the types of which we also have in the Museum) than to any other named species; in fact it differs from the latter only in its broader and yellower whitish bands and larger spots (of the same colour); the ground-colour below is a shade darker, but of a similar rufous hue. It is a larger, longer-winged species than N. yerburii, has narrower bands and spots on the upper surface, and these markings are of a sordid yellowish tint instead of being snow-white. 1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 361 18. VANESSA CHARONIA. Papilio charonia, Drury, Ill. Ex. Ent. i. pl. 15. figs. 1, 2 (1773). Murree, 22nd August and 10th September ; Dewal, 26th August. “Common at Murree in August and September ; found along this hill as far as Thundiani, also at Dewal. «This butterfly is fond of pitching on the trunks of trees, par- ticularly of the ilex when the tree has been wounded and the sap is exuding. I have taken several in company with Pyrameis indica and a large greenish beetle (Cetonia, sp.?) while thus engaged.” — PW 7X. 19. VANESSA KASCHMIRENSIS. Vanessa kaschmirensis, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 442, pl. 11. figs. 3, 4 (1848). 3 @, Mir Jani above Kalabagh, about 9000 feet, 16th September ; 36, Thundiani, 23rd September, 1885. ‘* Rare in Murree, ten specimens taken end of August ; very common at the top of Thundiani, 23rd to 24th September.” —J. W. YF. Major Yerbury sent us two perfect specimens and one much broken ; in their fresh condition I hardly recognized them as conspecific with the dingy series of very old specimens in the Museum, and I much regret that our good friend did not send as long a series of this species as of Libythea lepita. 20. JUNONIA ALMANA. Papilio almana, Linneus, Mus. Lud. Ulr. p. 272 (1764). Hassan Abdal, 14th October; Campbellpore, 17th November, 1885. * A few in October and November near Campbellpore.”—J. W. Y. 21. JUNONIA SWINHOEI. Junonia swinhoei, Butler, Aun. & Mag. Nat. Hist., Oct. 1885, p- 308. 3, Campbellpore, July; ¢ 2, Murree, 5th August, 1885. “The commonest Butterfly in Campbellpore ; found in May, June, July, October, November, and December. Probably the commonest fly on the Murree hills in August and September.”’— Sein X. 22. PyRAMEIS INDICA. Papilio atalanta indica, Herbst, Natur. Schmett. vii. pl. 180. figs. 1, 2 (1794). Murree, 16th and 26th August and 10th September, 1885. “Fairly common all over the hills in August and September.”’— 4 | ae 23. ARGYNNIS NIPHE. Papilio niphe, Linneus, Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 785. n. 208 (1767). 3d 2, Campbellpore, 23rd May; ¢, Murree, 10th September, 1885. Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XXIV. 24 362 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29, “Common (at Campbellpore) May and June; at Murree in August.”—J. W. Y. 24. ARGYNNIS KAMALA. Argynnis kamala, Moore, Cat. Lep. E. I. Co. Mus. i. p. 156. n. 324 (1857). @ , Thundiani, 23rd September, 1885. “A few at Murree and along the slope of Thundiani in Sep- tember.”—J. W. Y. 25. ARGYNNIS ISSHA. Argynnis issea, Moore, Cat. Lep. E. I. Co. Mus. i. p. 156. n. 328 (1857). Murree, 5th, 23rd, and 28th August, 3rd September ; melanistic var., lst October, 1885. «* Argynnis lathonia apud de Nicéville ; Argynnis issea apud Swin- hoe. Common at Murree, August and September, and found along the hills as far as Thundiani.”—J. W. Y. No lepidoptecrist familiar with A. lathonia of Europe could fail to note the differences which exist between this form and the European one: it is, of course, a local representative of A. lathonia as every species of butterfly is of some other, so far as I have been able to ascertain, but it never really corresponds with European specimens. 26. ATELLA PHALANTA. Papilio phalanta, Drury, Ill. Ex. Ent. i. pl. 21. figs. 1, 2 (1773). 6, Hassan Abdal, 14th October, 1885. 27. MELITHA PERSEA. Melitea persea, Kollar, Denksch. Akad. Wien, math.-nat. Cl. i. p. 52. n. 6 (1850). Campbellpore, Khairabad side near Attock Bridge, 1st November, 1885. “* Melitea robertsii apud de Nicéville ; M. didyma apud Swinhoe. Not uncommon.”’—J. W. Y. This species may readily be distinguished from M. robertsii, apart from other characters, by the black markings on the basal two thirds of secondaries, which do not exist in the Candahar species. After comparing it with our series of thirty-four M. didyma and fifteen M. trivia, I have not the least hesitation in supporting Mr. Kirby’s opinion that it is much more nearly allied to the latter than to the former species. The two specimens sent by Major Yerbury, though not absolutely agreeing with any of our nine typical examples of M. persea, differ only in characters which the series before me proves to be variable, the principal of these characters being the ill-defined submarginal spots on the upper surface of the secondaries and the less perfect row on the under surface of the primaries ; uo two specimens, how- ever, absolutely correspond in these points. 1886. | LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 363 28. CyrESTIS GANESCHA. Amathusia ganescha (part.), Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 430, pl. 7. figs. 3, 4 (1848). 3, Murree, 9th August, 1885. “Rare, only three specimens taken; probably not more than four specimens seen in all.’’—J. Kollar apparently regarded 0. thyodamas as the other sex of this species, and in this error he has been largely followed. If it proves to be a seasonal form or dimorphic representative of that species, it will indicate a similar condition of things as probably existing between C. lutea and C. nivea of Java, which differ precisely in the same way, although in a more marked degree. C. thyodamas is a white species compared with C. ganescha ; the apical area of its primaries is always suffused with blackish, which has the effect of a quadrate apical patch; this character does not appear in Kollar’s figure, which is evidently taken from what [ (on that account) regard as typical C. ganescha—the more or less yellow-tinted form ; but in the description—‘‘ Vor dem Ausseurande ist das Feld ausserhalb der fiinften Linie mehr oder weniger schwarz getriibt ’’—it is evident that both types are included; and the remark, “between male and female I find no other difference than that in the latter the marking is more lively and intense,” shows that C. thyodamas was supposed to be the female, whereas this sex seems to be very much rarer than the male in either of the Indian forms. ERYCINID4. LIBYTHEINZ. 29. LIBYTHEA LEPITA. Libythea lepita, Moore, Cat. Lep. E. I. Co. Mus. i. p. 240. n. 519 (1857). 3 9, 2nd, 12th, 16th, and 23rd August, and 8th September, 1885; a Lumbahdun, 27th November. 3 var. (without hatchet-like termination to discoidal streak), Thundiani, 24th September. ‘Common at Murree in August and September. Only two specimens of this Butterfly were taken in the neighbourhood of Campbellpore—one near Lawrencepore 22nd November, and one at Lumbahdun in the Chittar Pahar, 27th November.” —J. W. Y. Major Yerbury appears to think that L. myrrha exists in his series of this species; the latter, however, is easily recognized by the un- broken tawny stripe on the primaries, intersected by the median vein and its two first branches, and by the larger, entirely tawny, sub- apical spots ; the direction of the tawny stripe on the secondaries differs a little, and it is longer and not zigzag along its outer edge. No lepidopterist possessing examples of the two species could possibly confound them. 24* 364 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29, NEMEOBIINE. 30. TAXILA EUGENES. Dodona eugenes, Bates, Journ. Linn. Soc., Zool. ix. p. 371 (1867). 2, Murree, 10th September, 1885; Thundiani, low down uear Kala Pani, 24th September. “ Dodona dipea: uncommon, a few at Murree in August, and two or three below Thundiani in September.”—J. W. Y. Although Hewitson, in his collection, associated three examples of T. eugenes with his type of 7. dipwa, the two species are so well marked that there ought to be no difficulty in distinguishing them. Though rare, 7. eugenes iscommon compared with 7. dipea : it differs most prominently in the pattern of the under surface of the secon- daries ; these wings in 7’. dipea are of a dingy grey-brown colour, and the bands across it are very narrow and of a creamy yellowish tint ; the short band between the cell and the apex is bounded internally by three dark brown angular spots, and the anal lobe has no tail; in fact, strictly speaking, it is a Dodona, whereas 7’. eugenes is a Tavila’. 31. TaxILA DURGA. Melitea durga, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 441, pl. 13. figs. 3, 4 (1848). 3 2, Murree, 18th, 22nd, and23rd August; Dewal, 26th August ; Bugnoter, 20th September, 1885. “Common at Murree in August and September ; found along the hills to Thundiani ; also at Dewal.’—J. W. ¥. LYCZNID&. 32. PancHaLa? DoDONZA. Amblypodia dodonea, Moore, Cat. Lep. E.1I.Co. Mus. p. 43. n. 65, pl. la. fig. 8 (1857). 3, Thundiani, 23rd September, 1885. This species in Mr. Kirby’s Catalogue is indicated as female of the following ; in our series are both sexes of each species, which are totally different. Major Yerbury’s note refers to both. 33. PANCHALA! RAMA. Thecla rama, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 412, pl. 4. figs. 1, 2 (1848). ; 2, Dewal near Murree, 26th August, 1885. 1 Practically, however, the two genera are synonymous, as, in spite of Scudder’s oversight of the following important facts, I shall now show :—In Doubleday’s List the following species stand under the then undescribed genus Zawila— T. fatua, egeon, erato, cesennia, fyll/a, drupadi, orphna, esther, echerius, tantalus, neophron. This genus was adopted and described by Westwood in the ‘ Genera of Diurnal Lepidoptera,’ the three italicized species being figured in the same order as above; and 7’ orphna (under which name two species are confounded on the plate) is not figured as a Tavila at all, though placed with that genus in the letterpress ; it, moreover, stands last in Mr. Westwood’s notes on the genus; yet Mr. Kirby admits this species alone into the genus Zavila, whilst Scudder oe only TZ. drupadi, an insect in no way brought prominently forward as typical. 1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 365 ““Common at Dewal, a few seen near Murree, and several on the lower slopes of Thundiani (P.dodonea ?) ; two taken 24th September. Prefers ilex trees ; scarcely ever seen on any other tree.’—J. W. Y. 34. PoLYOMMATUS BATICUS. Papilio beticus, Linneus, Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 789. n. 226 (1767). 3, Campbellpore, 29th October, 1885. ‘““Common, May, June, and July.”—J. W. Y. 35. CATOCHRYSOPS CNEJUS. Hesperia enejus, Fabricius, Ent. Syst. Suppl. p. 430 (1798). 3 2, Campbellpore, 31st May, 15th July, and 27th October ; 3, Murree, 5th August. This and the following are mixed up; one of them being identi- fied for Major Yerbury as C. sérabo, an insect to which they are by no means nearly allied. 36. CATOCHRYSOPS HAPALINA. Oatochrysops hapalina, Butler, P. Z. 8. 1883, p. 148, pl. 24. figs. 3, Campbellpore, 27th October; 2, 21st November, 1885. **Comn on on baubul bushes in October.”—J. W. Y. The female was numbered as possibly Zzera putli; but as it was unset, the difference between the two was not so easily seen as might be supposed from the mounted specimens. 37. CATOCHRYSOPS ELLA. Catochrysops ella, Butler, P. Z. S. 1881, p. 606. n. 17. , Campbellpore, 21st November, 1885. One beautiful specimen, confounded with the preceding, from which, however, its brighter colouring above and smoky grey under surface at once distinguish it. 38. EvERES DIPORA. Lycena dipora, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1865, p. 506. n. 108, pl. 31. fig. 8. 2, Murree, 20th August, 1885. * Catochrysops patala? Q, rare.’—J.W.Y. I cannot understand how any lepidopterist can have given to Major Yerbury an identification so wide of the mark as the above; the very colouring of the under surface at once points out to what group of Lycznide the species belongs, apart from all structural distinctions. 39. AZANUS ZENA. Lycena zena, Moore, P. Z.8. 1865, p. 505. n. 107, pl. 31, fig. 9. S$ 2, Campbellpore, 17th and 21st November, 1885. ‘*Common on baubul bushes in October.” —J. W. ¥. 366 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON {June 29 40. AZANUS URANUS, sp. n. (Plate XXXV. fig. 1.) 3. Allied to A. zena, but differing from all specimens in the Museum series, or that of Mr. Moore’s collection, in the much brighter and more uniform lilac colour of the upper surface’, in the brighter blue at the base, the browner tint of the under surface, on which the white-edged markings are consequently less well defined, and in the obsolete character of the black spots, which are either reduced to minute points or wholly absent. Expanse of wings 21-22 millim. Hassan Abdal, 13th October; Campbellpore, 17th and 29th No- vember, 1885. 41. AZANUS UBALDUS. Lycena ubaldus, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iv. pl. 390. figs. L, M (1782). Q, near Attock Bridge, Khairabad side, 15th November, 1885. This species was unidentified, and specimens of A. uranus indi- cated as A. ubaldus, whilst others of the same species were simply recorded as ‘‘ Lycena sp.” 42. TARUCUS NARA. Lycena nara, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 421 (1848). 8, Campbellpore, June; id.? (worn), 17th November, 1885. “ Tarucus theophrastus, very common May and June; it is pro- bable that 7’. nara was also among some of the captures placed under this number.” —J. W. ¥. T. theophrastus is an African species; the Butterflies so named by Col. Swinhoe probably represent two or more new species, of which the following is one :— 43. TARUCUS EXTRICATUS, Sp. n. (Plate XXXV. fig. 2.) Paler than 7’. nara above, varying in size even more than 7. bal- kanica; readily distinguished on the under surface by the much greater regularity of the markings, those of the primaries being arranged nearly as in 7’. theophrastus (i. e. the central stripe is often unbroken, the subcostal spot beyond sometimes confluent with it so as to form a F-shaped marking; the dashes beyond the central stripe placed transversely and always confluent instead of forming an interrupted <-shaped character); the markings of the secondaries vary in colour from rust-red to black, but correspond in character with those of 7. nara. Expanse of wings, ¢ 15-25 millim., @ 28-30 millim. 3, Campbellpore, 31st May, 1885. We have two females of this species from Kurrachee, collected by Col. Swinhoe, and a male collected by Sir John Hearsay at Landoor ; thirteen other specimens also representing the 7. theophrastus of Indian lists, but apparently belonging to another unnamed form, are in our collection. 1 In A. zena it is chiefly confined to the centre of the wings, and has almost the appearance of a brand, 1886. | LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 367 44, CYANIRIS VARDHANA., Polyommatus vardhana, Moore, P.Z.S. 1874, p. 572, pl. 66. fig. 5. 3 2, Murree, 28th August, 3rd and 8th September, 1885. *“Not uncommon at Murree at the end of August; was for a long time passed over as C. calestina.’—J. W. Y. C. vardhana is rather a rare species in collections. 45. CYANIRIS KOLLARI. Lycena kollari, Westwood, Gen. Diurn. Lep. p. 491. n. 69 (1852). Lycena ceelestina, Kollar (nee Eversm.), Hiigel’s Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 423 (1848). 3 2, Murree, 12th August; 2, 28th December, 1885. “Very common, August and September.’—J. W. Y. This species being new to the Museum collection, I cannot question the identification, more especially as Kollar’s description would do just as well for half a dozen other species; at the same time Kollar’s name having been already used by Eversmann, cannot possibly be admitted. C. kollari is more like typical C. pseudar- giolus than any other species known to me, but is smaller; it should probably stand next to C. devettii in collections. 46. ZizERA DILUTA. 3. Lycena diluta, Felder, Reise der Nov., Lep. ii. p. 280. n. 353, pl. 35. figs. 12, 13. Q, Campbellpore, 17th June and 23rd July; ¢, 9th October ; 2, Murree, 2nd, 5th, and 6th August, and 20th September. “ Zizera maha, De N., diluta, Swinh. Common at Murree in August and September.’—J. W. Y. In spite of Felder’s very poor figure of the upper surface, I have never seen any other than this species that could be identified with Z, diluta; it has hardly a feature in common with Z. maha, which is much nearer to Z. chandala. The specimens of this species were all females, with the exception of two worn ones, and one of these was labelled as probably a Moth; the females stand under the numbers 7, 72, 12 a, and 527. 47, ZizERA KARSANDRA. Polyommatus karsandra, Moore, P. Z. S. 1865, p. 505. n. 106, pl ol, fig..7. 3 Q, Campbellpore, 21st May and June; 9, Murree, Ist Oc- tober, 1885. “ Zizera maha and Z, sangra apud de Nicéville; Z. decreta and karsana apud Swinhoe: very common in the grass and_lucerne- fields in May and June; though many of them differed, still they all seemed linked to one another, and I put them all under one number.”—J. W. Y. Major Yerbury was perfectly correct in so doing; I find only males 368 | MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29, and females perfectly norimal in colouring, size, pattern, and every- thing ; amongt those sent to me are no Z. maha, sangra, or decreta. The name ‘“‘harsana” is probably meant for karsandra, to which species the whole series belongs. 48, Cupripo ARIANA. Polyommatus ariana, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1865, p. 504. n. 103, pl. 31. fig. 2. 3 2, Murree, 8th to 11th August, and 3rd September, 1885. Major Yerbury says that he caught this and the following species flying together at Murree in August. 49. CUPIDO NAZIRA. Polyommatus nazira, Moore, P. Z.S. 1865, p. 504. n. 102, pl. 31. fig. 4. 3, Murree, 5th and 11th August, 1885. 50. PLEBEIUS TROCHILUS. Lycena trochilus, Freyer, Neuere Beitrage, v. pl. 440. fig. 1 (1840). 3 2, near Attock, Khairabad side, 8th November, 1885. These are the first Indian examples that I have seen of this species. “Common in stony nullahs near Attock Bridge.’—J. W. Y. 51. PLEBEIUS PUTLI. Lycena putli, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 422 (1848). do. Campbellpore, 18th October and 14th November, 1885. ‘Common in October and November.”’—J. W. Y. 52. CHRYSOPHANUS TIMEUS. Papilio timeus, Cramer, Pap. Exot. ii. pl. 186. figs. E, F (1779). 3, Campbellpore, 4th June; Murree, 9th and 11th August and 24th September, 1885. The Campbellpore specimen was numbered “527” (referring to Zizera maha) ; doubtless an oversight. Major Yerbury says that the species is ‘common at Murree and along the hills to Thundiani in August and September.’’ C. ¢imeus has been identified for him as “ C. phleeas”’; it appears, however, to be a tolerably constant form, so far as I can judge from our present series ; on the upper surface it much resembles C. stygianus of Kandahar, but the darker colour and red band on the under surface of the secondaries at once separate it. 53. ILERDA TAMU. Polyommatus tamu, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 417, pl. 5. figs. 7, 8 (1848). 3 2, Murree, 11th, 12th, and lath August, and 3rd September, 1885. Common, according to Major Yerbury, but certainly not so in 1886.] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 369 European collections; it has been named J. coruscans for him, but is not even nearly allied to that species, of which we possess the types. Kollar’s figure is not good, having been taken from a worn and broken specimen, but the identity of the species is settled by the “sky-blue gloss”’ of the basal half of the wings’; as a matter of fact the colour is ultramarine, but a little inaccuracy in colouring is perhaps admissible in the description of a rubbed insect. Kollar says, ‘‘ We possess only a single example of this beautiful species, and it has suffered severely in transport, so that in fact only the wings are preserved,” and from the description we find that the hind wings, at least, are “‘ badly rubbed.” 54, ILERDA SENA. Polyommatus sena, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 415, pl. 5. figs. 3, 4 (1848). 3, Dewal and Murree, 8th, !6th, and 30th August; Bugnoter, 20th September, 1885. “Rather rare at Murree, very common on the lower slopes. of Thundiani, and as low as Tret and Bugnoter, probably not above 5000 feet.’”—J. W. Y. 55. SPINDASIS HYPARGYROS, sp.n. (Plate XXXV. fig. 3.) Allied to S. acamas and S. epargyros. Larger; the male differing from both in the whitish costal area of primaries and both sexes differing in the darker bands on all the wings ; on the under surface the wings are chalky white instead of cream-colour, all the markings are darker and edged with black; the submarginal band of the secondaries is not angulated as in S. acamas and the secondaries themselves are longer. Expanse of wings, ¢ 36 millim., 2 35-38 millim. 3 9, Campbellpore, 19th, 20th, 25th, 26th, and 28th July, 1885. This is the representative of S. acamas in N.W. India; Col. Swinhoe obtained it at Kurrachee and Chaman; Major Yerbury says that itiscommon?. At the time when I identified it as S. aeamas we did not possess that species, and I supposed that the differences which existed in Klug’s figures were due to inaccuracy of delineation. The Zeller collection has, however, now put us in possession of specimens of the true S. acamas and the allied S. eparygros, and Iam able to see at a glance that here we have a series of those constant local races which constitute the only existing species in the Order Lepidoptera, but which, for that very reason, are always as thorns 1 Tn J. coruscans the colour is shining metallic emerald-green. 2 Another allied species occurs at Suakim ; it has recently been presented to the Museum collection by Surgeon Mandest. It may be called S. bellatrix. This species is smaller than S. acamas, is bright tawny above, with a black marginal stripe and white fringe ; the primaries show dusky indications of the ordinary markings upon the costal half; there is also a whitish spot in the cell and a white subapical costal spot; wings below chalky white, with pale sandy-brownish markings edged with black and enclosing the usual silver streaks and spots; all the bands are a little wider than in S. acamas, the central band of primaries is abbreviated; the subapical band of secondaries more angular and the submarginal band interrupted. Expanse of wings 30 millim. 370 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29, in the sides of those who believe that the species of Butterflies are widely distinct. 56. RAPALA NISSA. Thecla nissa, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 412, pl. 4. figs. 3, 4 (1848). 3 2, Murree, 16th, 18th, and 25th August, 1885. “© Common at Murree.’—J. W. Y. Rare in European collections. 57. DrEuDORYX EPIJARBAS. Dipsas epijarbas, Moore, Cat. Lep. E.I. Co. Mus. i. p. 32. n. 30 (1857). 3 2, Murree, 11th, 12th, and 22nd August, 1885. “ Common at Murree, ay W.Y. PAPILIONID&. PIeRINz. 58. CoLIAS EDUSINA. Colias edusina, Felder, Wien. ent. Mon. iv. p. 100. n. 55 (1860). 3 2, Murree, 2nd, 5th, 11th, 14th, and 18th August; ¢, Campbellpore, 30th May and 17th November; 92, Chittar Pahar, 1500 feet. ‘* Common at Murree up to October; found all along the hills at Campbellpore, common May and June; fairly common October, November, and beginning of December.’”—J. W. Y. This is the normal western type of OC. fieldii; the latter is represented by a species near to C. aurorina, which, though found in the west, extends as far eastward as Assam ; whether the two forms are distinct or not can only be decided by breeding. Of course the present form is generally called C. fieldit in Indian collections ; but if it be that species, it should stand as var. edusina. 59. COLIAS ERATE. Colias erate, var. 2 pallida, Staudinger, Cat. Lep. eur. Faun. p. 3. n. 54 (1861). 3, Murree, 16th August ; Dewal, 26th August ; ¢ 2, Campbell- pore, 29th October, 20th and 21st November, 1885. One male of typical C. erate was obtained at Murree on the same day as the male of var. pallida ; Major Yerbury says that it does not appear to be so common at Murree as the latter; a second fragmentary male from Campbellpore was also sent with specimens of C. pallida. Both Col. Swinhoe and Mr. de Nicéville seem to have wrongly identified the form, though, as C. sareptensis was mixed up with it, I may be mistaken in the case of the former gentleman: Major Yerbury, however, quotes the Soaks as ‘‘ Colias hyale apud de Nicéville, C. sareptensis apud Swinhoe”’ ; he says that at Murree it is not common. He further remarks as follows :—“ When first I arrived in Campbellpore and began to collect, I had no setting- 1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 371 boards ; so I placed all my captures in envelopes and consequently put all the pale clouded-yellows under one number; it was only when my attention was drawn to it, that I discovered that I had two species under the same number. I then went through all the pale forms I had, but only succeeded in finding three specimens of C. erate ; so I presume this species is the rarer of the two. I have taken it in May, June, and November.” 60. CoLIAs SAREPTENSIS. Colias hyale, var. sareptensis, Staudinger, Cat. Lep. eur. Faun. p. 5. n.48 (1871). 3, Campbellpore, 14th November; 9, Murree, 12th August, 1885. This form again seems to be rare as compared with C. pallida, so that not only does my original suggestion that the latter was a hybrid between C. erate and C. sareptensis seem to be probable, but also that the intermediate form thus produced is supplanting both the parent stocks. . 61. TERIAS FIMBRIATA (var. 2). Terias fimbriata, Wallace, Trans. Ent. Soe. ser. 3, vol. iv. p. 323, n. 16 (1867). 3g 2, Attock Bridge, Khairabad side, 15th November, 1885. “ Terias esiope apud de Nicéville, T. fimbriata. apud Swinhoe ; common in October and November.”—J. W. ¥. This species only differs from typical 7. jimbriata in the little pronounced subapical brown dash or stria on the under surface of the primaries ; and as, in some species, this marking certainly does vary in intensity, it is safer to regard the Campbellpore form as a variety, at any rate until we have proof that the difference of pattern is locally constant. The following was placed by Major Yerbury under the same number, but with a note of interrogation. 62. TeRtAS IRREGULARIS. Terias irregularis, Moore, P. Z.S. 1882, p. 253. 3 @, Campbellpore, 9th November, 1885; 13th January, 1886. 63. TERIAS SUAVA. Terias suava, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 670. n. 28 (1836). 3, Campbellpore, 17th June, 1885. « Terias rotundularis (!), a few in June and July.”—J. W. Y. 64. TERIAS PURREBA. Terias purreea, Moore, P. Z.8. 1882, p. 252. 3g, Attock Bridge, 8th November; 2, Campbellpore, 11th November ; Hassan Abdal, 13th October, 1885. The Campbellpore specimens were mixed up with 7. fimbriata, 372 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29, and probably represent the 7. esiope of De Nicéville. Major Yerbury says of it, ‘* Terias rotundularis not uncommon at Murree and along the hills to Thundiani in September. 7. e@stope apud Swinhoe.” I think there must be a slight error in the above note, for Col. Swinhoe knows 7’. purreea quite well; at the same time he may have labelled the insect in haste. J. esiope is not known from India. 65. TeRIAS HECABE. Papilio hecabe, Linneeus, Mus. Lud. Ulr. p. 249 (1764). @ , between Abbottabad and Kala Pani, 25th September, 1885. With this is a male, taken at Bugnoter on the 20th September, and which I think must be a very abnormal specimen of the same species. It wants the black border, and therefore, on the upper surface, resembles 7. ewcavata; certainly, with only one example before me, I do not feel justified in separating it. 66. TERIAS EXCAVATA. Terias excavata, Moore, P. Z.S. 1882, p. 252. 3, Campbellpore, 9th November; 92, Chuttar, 9th October, 1885. This species was mixed up with Z. purreea and T. fimbriata. 67. TERIAS VAGANS. Terias vagans, Wallace, P. Z.S. 1866, p. 357. n. 10. @, Chuttar, 9th October, 1885. We previously only possessed males of this species; it has been incorrectly named 7’. leta for Major Yerbury; he says that it is rare, two specimens having been taken at Chuttar on the Murree and Rawal Pindee road. Terias leta is a species in which the apical area of the primaries and whole of secondaries on the under surface are of a bright rusty-reddish colour ; in the male of 7. vagans they are lemon-yellow, and in the female of a sericeous creamy- whitish tint; in 7’. jegeri they are flesh-tinted in both sexes. 68. 'TERACOLUS PROTRACTUS. Teracolus protractus, Butler, P. Z.S. 1876, p. 137, n. 37. 6 2, Chittar Pahar, Lumbahdun, 2000 feet; 28th November, 1885. The specimens of this species are not perfectly typical, the colouring of the under surface being of a nearly yellow tint instead of flesh-pink ; the third black spot of the primaries, in the male specimens, is expanded so as to reach the inner margin, as in the form from Beloochistan and Kutch ; but the female has three isolated spots as in the type form. “ A single specimen, Campbellpore, 29th June, 1885; found commonly in the Chittar Pahar near Lumbahdun, Kala Dilli, &c., at the end of November and beginning of December.”-—J. W. Y. 1886. | LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 373 69. TERACOLUS FAUSTINUS. Idmais faustina, Felder, Reise der Nov., Lep. ii. p. 190. $ 2, Campbellpore, 17th and 21st November, 13th December ; and Chittar Pahar, Lumbahdun, 2000 feet, 28th November, 1885. With a series of each species before one, it is easy to distinguish this from the Turco-Persian 7’. fausta ; it differs in its superior size and more heavily marked primaries on the upperside (which, as Felder says, more nearly resembles the female of 7. fausta than the male), the much more dusky bases to the wings, blackish body, greyish costa to primaries and interno-basal area to secondaries, altogether duller and darker coloration below, the secondaries being flesh-tinted on basal two fifths and irrorated with grey atoms throughout, the conspicuous clay-coloured spots across the disk, and the white instead of pale sulphur colour of the ventral surface of the abdomen. 70. TERACOLUS FARRINUS. Teracolus farrinus, Butler, P. Z.S. 1876, p. 159. n. 112, pl. 7. fig. 2 (1876). @, between Tret and Barracoo, Murree and Rawal Pindee road, 9th October; Attock Bridge, 8th November; Campbellpore, 14th November, 1885. This was identified for Major Yerbury as “ 7’, etrida?” 71. TERACOLUS BIMBURA. Teracolus bimbura, Butler, P. Z. S. 1876, p. 161. n. 117, pl. 7. figs. 3, 4. , Campbellpore, 27th October; near Attock Bridge, Khairabad side, 8th November; ¢, Chittar Pahar, Lumbahdun, 2000 feet, 28th November, 1885. This and the following are confounded together and labelled doubtfully as Teracolus etridu. Major Yerbury says of them :— “‘Common in June, July, October, and November. There seem to be Butterflies corresponding to the following species under this number, viz. :—purus, etrida, pernotatus, and bimbura ; but I should be doubtful whether, here at any rate, they do not all belong to T. etrida. I have taken these small orange-tips at Hassan Abdal ; (single specimen), on the road between Murree and Rawal Pindee near Barracoo (single specimen), near Attock Bridge, Khairabad side (a few), in the Chittar Pahar between Choi and Lumbahdun (very common), neighbourhood of Campbellpore (common).”’ Taking specimens in so many localities, it is not surprising that three species should be obtained ; as to their being all one, that isa question only to be decided by most careful breeding; they differ far more than our three British White Butterflies Ganoris brassice, rape, and napi, yet there is not the slightest doubt of the distinctness of the latter. 374 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29, 72. TERACOLUS PURUS. Teracolus purus, Butler, P. Z.S. 1876, p. 160. n. 113, pl. 7. figs. 14, 15 (1876). 3, Campbellpore, 26th June and 17th July, 1885. It is interesting to note that whereas this species was obtained in June and July, 7. farrinus and 7. bimbura were caught in October and November ; at the same time we have a specimen of 7. farrinus taken by Col. Swinhoe in July ; so that they cannot be regarded as seasonal forms, as seems to be the favourite plan now-a-days with many allied species. The brown colouring of the underside in 7. bimbura sufficiently distinguishes it from any of its allies to prevent confusion. 73. IXIAS PYGMZA. Ixias pygmea, Moore, P. Z.S. 1882, p. 254, pl. xii. fig. 1. 3 2, Campbellpore, 17th November and 13th December; 2, Chittar Pahar, 1500 feet, 1st December, 1885. ** Ixvias, n. sp. allied to dharmsale, apud Swinhoe. This Jzias is not uncommon near Campbellpore in November; almost all the males taken were caught in this neighbourhood; whilst at Kala Dilli in the Chittar Pahar the females were very common and there were no males. The females were, almost without exception, taken on the same plant (Croton sp.?), a plant with spikes of white labiate flowers and broadish dark green leaves. I have taken this species near Campbellpore in the bed of the Haro ; near Attock Bridge, Khairabad side, two females ; and at Kala Dilli in the Chittar Pahar, all females, very common.” —J. W. Y. The type of this species, from Kangra, is a dwarfed male ; asimilar one is sent to us by Major Yerbury ; the regular size of the species, however, for both sexes is about 59 millim., so that I. pygmea is a misnomer. The species is allied to J. moulmeinensis, but differs in the broad inner black border to the orange belt of the male and the bright sulphur-yellow of the female; the absence of the heavy black bordering to the secondaries removes it from the neighbourhood of I. dharmsale. 74. BELENOIS AURIGINEA, sp. 0. 2. Allied to B. taprobana, but differing in the whiter colour of the primaries on both surfaces, the almost total absence of the grey basal suffusion on these wings, the more oblique and rather narrower discocellular patch, the narrower external border divided by six indistinct pale spots, the abrupt narrowing of this border (so as to leave only a greyish border on the interno-median area); the secondaries, which are either cream-coloured or ochreous, have a much narrower border with zigzag inner edge and enclose four spots of the ground-colour, the grey veins are similar, but the discocellular vein is only partly blackened and the subapical bar uniting the subcostal branches is represented only by greyish scales; on the under surface the whole disk of primaries is white, and the black and brown markings are all much narrower than in B. taprobana, but 1886. | LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 375 the basal and apical areas of primaries and the whole surface of the secondaries are bright ochreous, only a little paler than in that species. Expanse of wings 56 millim. , Campbellpore, 29th and 30th May, 1885. It is evident that this form is regarded by collectors in India as the spring brood of B. mesentina; but, so far as I have been able to ascertain, this is not an ascertained fact, whilst the existence of a species representing it in Ceylon is strong evidence to the contrary. Though apparently commoner in the North-west Provinces, this form does occur in the East ; the male, though very like B. mesentina on the upper surface, has the apical area of the primaries and whole surface of secondaries on the underside of a deep cream-colour more or less tinged with chrome-yellow. 75. BELENOIS LORDACA. Pieris lordaca, Walker, Entomologist, v. p. 48. 3, Campbellpore, 11th June; 2, Chittar Pahar, 2000 to 3000 feet, 28th November, 1885. This is the common form of India, of which it is possible that B. mesentina may be a variety ; the latter, however, differs on the under surface in the great breadth of the brown veins on the apical area of primaries and the whole of secondaries. “Common in May, June, and July, and again in October and November ; a few to be seen in December : the spring brood is much the darkest. The caterpillar feeds on a caper with dark red blossom (Capparis horrida’?).”—J. W. Y. It is a significant fact that the only male sent to us in this collection should not belong to the dark form supposed to be the spring brood. 76. SYNCHLOE DAPLIDICE. Papilio daplidice, Linneeus, Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 760. n. 77 (1767). Campbellpore, 11th and 12th June and 11th July, 1885. 77. GANORIS AJAKA. Pieris ajaka, Moore, P.Z.S8. 1865, p. 490.n. 21, pl. 31. fig. 16. 3 2, Murree, 23rd August and 3rd September, 1885. Rather less strongly marked than usual. ** Mancipium ajaka common at Murree in August under the shade of trees.” —J. W. Y. 78. GANORIS GLICIRIA. Papilio gliciria, Cramer, Pap. Exot. ii. pl. 171. figs. E, F (1779). 2, Campbellpore, 9th June and 14th November; ¢ 2, Murree, 15th and 25th August. ‘Fairly common, May and June ; common, October and Novem- ber.”’-—J. W. ¥. The name of Mancipium canidium has been given to Major Yerbury for this species. Now the name Maneipium was first employed by Hiibner in his ‘Tentamen,’ the publication of which 376 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29, is extremely doubtful, and the genus (in any case) was not described in that list of names; if adopted, it should be used in the Stephen- sian sense (i. e. either for daplidice or cardamines), and Westwood’s action would fix the type as cardamines. Secondly, the identification of Papilio canidia is doubtful, and would probably apply to two or three species with equal accuracy, and therefore I prefer to give this species the name applied to it by Cramer. 79. GANORIS NIPALENSIS. Pieris brassice, var. nipalensis, Gray, Lep. Ins. Nepal, pl. 6. figs. 1 & 3 (1846). 3, Campbellpore, 22nd and 29th May and 12th June, 1885. “Common in May, June, July, October, November, December. The cabbages in my garden are covered at the present time (11th January, 1886) with the caterpillars of some white butterfly’, and there are some half-dozen chrysalides on the walls of the bungalow; they all probably belong to this species.” 80. EvucHLo# Luciiua, sp. nov. (Plate XXXV. fig. 4.) Allied to 2. charlonia of Algeria, from which, however, the following characters readily distinguish it :—Wings above gamboge- instead of lemon-yellow; the discocellular black patch broader, regular, and quadrate; the apical area browner, and, instead of forming a triangular patch, widely excavated and diffused on its inner edge and truncated at its inferior extremity; the yellow streak across it much as in #. charlonia: under surface differing, at a glance, in the absence of the apical grey-green patch of primaries, the yellow instead of grey-green secondaries, the larger pale costal spots, the better marked grey-edged white discocellular spot, and the absence of the pale spots on the median interspaces. Expanse of wings 35 millim. Campbellpore, 27th May, 1885. *“ Anthocaris charlonia : rare, only three specimens taken—the first on the 21st May, the second om the 23rd, and the third on the 27th. ** Nos. 1 and 2 were found on the same plant of Stachys parvifiora, No. 3 taken on the wing about a mile away.”—J. W. Y. I can only suppose that the name A. charlonia was given by Mr. de Nicéville ; yet it would seem strange that a gentleman who claims to be almost an arbiter in questions relating to geographical distribution, should unhesitatingly give the name of an Algerian insect to a species obtained in North-western India. PAPILIONINA. 81. PaprLio CLOANTHUS. Papilio cloanthus, Westwood, Arc. Ent. i. pl. 11. fig. 2 (1841). Murree, 10th September, 1885 (very ragged). '« Black: dorsal line white or yellow, spiral line yellow; yellowish-green irregular A-shaped patches speckled with black running up into the black from the spiral lines, but never reaching the dorsal lines; length about two inches.” 1886. | LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 377 “Rare: only three specimens taken, end of August and beginning of September.”—/. W. Y. 82. PapILIo ERITHONIUS, Papilio erithonius, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iii. pl. 232. figs. A, B (1782). Campbellpore, 18th October, 1885. “A few in June and July ; common in October and November.” —J.W.Y. The single example sent in the present collection belongs to a rather rare sport of the species, in which the usual orange spots on the under surface are replaced by greyish testaceous spots. 83. PApILio ASIATICUS. Papilio machaon, var. asiatica, Ménétriés, Cat. Mus. Petr., Lep. 1. p- 70 (1855). Campbellpore, 9th July ; Murree, lst October, 1885. ‘© A few at Campbellpore in June and July; common at Murree in August ; found commonly on the lower slopes of Thundiani in September 1885.”—J. W. Y. 84. PapiILio ARCTURUS. Papilio arcturus, Westwood, Ann. Nat. Hist. ix. p. 37 (1842). 3, Murree, 13th August, 1885. Major Yerbury sends this and the following under the same number, which accounts for the different identifications received by him from Mr. de Nicéville and Col. Swinhoe. 85. PapiLio POLYCTOR. Papilio polyctor, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. Lép. i. p. 205. n. 18 (1836). 2, between Abbottabad and Kala Pani, 25th September, 1885. Respecting these two species Major Yerbury says :—“ Fairly common at Murree in August ; a few seen along the hills as far as Thundiani in September.’’ It would therefore appear that P. polyctor is amonth later than P. arcturus; only the single specimen of the former sent to us is much worn and must have been quite a month on the wing. HeESPERIIDS. 86. PARNARA MANGALA. Hesperia mangala, Moore, P. Z.S. 1865, p. 792. Murree, 8th and 10th September ; Thundiani, 24th September ; Hassan Abdal, 13th October, 1885. Major Yerbury has received the names of P. bada and P. beavani for this species, and he says:—‘‘ There are two ‘skippers’ under this number: both species were common at Murree in August and September.” Neither of these species is represented amongst the five examples in this collection, all of which are quite typical P. mangala, the row of spots on the secondaries being larger and Proc. Zoou. Soc.— 1886, No. XXV. 25 378 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29, more nearly in line than in either of the above-named species. Whether with a large series it will be possible to unite the three forms remains to be seen; so far they hold their own as tolerably constant types. P. mangala always has the lowest spot on the primaries larger and more quadrate than in the other two. 87. GEGENES KARSANA. Hesperia karsana, Moore, P. Z. S. 1874, p. 576, pl. 67. fig. 6. 3, Campbellpore, 21st July, 1885. “A few in June and July ; common in October and November.” —J. W.Y. As, however, the following is placed under the same number, the later dates probably refer exclusively to it. 88. GEGENES NOSTRODAMUS. Hesperia nostrodamus, Fabricius, Ent. Syst. iii. 1, p. 328. n. 246 (1793). gd, Campbellpore, 29th October ; near Attock Bridge, Khairabad side, 15th November, 1885. The two males now sent are the first Indian examples of G. nos- trodamus that I have seen; it is a tolerably common species in Southern Europe, whereas G. karsana appears to be confined to India. 89. PyRGUs EVANIDUS. Pyrgus evanidus, Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. v. p. 223. 3, Campbellpore, 31st May, 1885. “Uncommon ; a fewseen in June (three specimens taken).’”’— Fs Wa SPHINGID&. 90. Hemaris SAUNDERSII. Sesia saundersii, Walker, Lep. Het. viii. p. 83. n. 7 (1856). ¢, Murree, October 1885. “« Not uncommon in August and September.”—J. W. Y. This is rather a rare species in European collections: only oue of our few specimens is in good condition. 91. MACROGLOSSA STELLATARUM. Sphinx stellatarum, Linnzeus, Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 803. n. 27 (1766). Murree in September. “ Not uncommon in August and September.”—J. W. F. 92. RHOPALOPSYCHE NYCTERIS. Macroglossa nycteris, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 458, pl OsGkeD: Murree in September ; Campbellpore, 20th November, 1885. “Common in August and September.”—J. W. ¥. 1886.] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 379 93. CH#ROCAMPA ALECTO. Sphinx alecto, Linneeus, Mus. Lud. Ulr. p. 357 (1764). 2, Murree in August. “One specimen taken.”—J. W. Y. 94. CH@ROCAMPA CELERIO. Sphinz celerio, Linnzus, Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 800 (1766). 3 2. Campbellpore in May. 95. DEILEPHILA LIVORNICA. Sphinx livornica, Esper, Ausl. Schmett. ii. pp. 87, 196, pl. 8. fig. 4 (1785). 3 2, Campbellpore in May. 96. NEPHILA HESPERA. Sphinx hespera, Fabricius, Syst. Ent. p. 546. n. 33 (1775). 3, Campbellpore, 18th November, 1885. Var. MORPHEUS. Sphinx morpheus, Cramer, Pap. Exot. ii. p. 84, pl. 149. fig. D (1779). 2 , Campbellpore, 18th November, 1885. The differences between these two varieties were supposed at one time to be characteristic of the sexes; but this is not the case, as both sexes occur with and without the silver spots. 97. PROTOPARCE ORIENTALIS. Protoparce orientalis, Butler, Trans. Zool. Soc. vol. x. p. 609. n. 21, pl. xei. figs. 16, 17 (1875). 2, Campbellpore, August 1885. LEUCANIIDA. 98. LrUCANIA EXTRANEA. Leucania extranea, Guénée, Noct. i. p. 77. n. 104. Q, Campbellpore. 99. LrUCANIA COLLECTA. Leucania collecta, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. ix. p. 105. n. 63 (1856). Campbellpore, July 1885. CARADRINID&. 100. CARADRINA SABULOSA. Caradrina sabulosa, Swinhoe, P. Z. 8.1884, p. 516. n. 23, pl. xvii. fig. 6. Campbellpore, 5th, 10th, 28th, and 30th July, 1885. Seven examples were forwarded by Major Yerbury, exhibiting a considerable amount of variation ; as a rule they are much better defined in all their markings than in Col. Swinhoe’s figure. 25* 380 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON {June 29° XYLOPHASIID. 101. PRopENIA CARADRINOIDES. Laphygma? caradrinoides, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. ix. p. 190. n. 8 (1856). , Campbellpore, 27th July, 1885. The single specimen sent appears to belong to this species, but has been so much knocked about on the journey from Campbellpore as to be only just recognizable: it is quite unfit to put into the collection. NocrTuip2. 102. AGROTIS AVERSA. Agrotis aversa, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. x. p. 345. n. 92 (1856). Agrotis certificata, Walker, 1. e. Suppl. vol. ii. p. 697 (1865). Caradrina triturata®, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. x. p. 295. n. 30 (1856). 3, Murree, 9th August, 1885. As indicated by the name given to them, Walker’s types of Caradrina triturata are so much frayed as to be practically unidenti- fiable ; what is left of them, however, indicates close affinity to, if not identity with, dgrotis aversa. 103. AGROTIS ARISTIFERA. Agrotis aristifera, Guénée, Noct. i. p. 266. n. 426 (1852). 3, Campbellpore, 30th July, 1885. 104. AGROTIS SUFFUSA. Phalena-Noctua suffusa, Gmelin, ed. Syst. Nat. i. 5, p. 2541. n. 1028. 9, Kalabagh, 17th September, 1885. 105. OcHROPLEURA TRIANGULARIS. Ochropleura triangularis, Moore, P. Z.S. 1867, p. 55. Murree, 9th August, 1885. ACONTIID&. 106. BANKIA OPELLA. Acontia opella, Swinhoe, P. Z.S. 1885, p. 456. n. 68, pl. xxvii. fig. 16. Campbellpore, 6th July, 1885. 107. XANTHODES INNOCENS. Xanthodes innocens, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. xv. p. 1752 (1858). Campbellpore, 28th July, 1885. Nearly allied to X. graelisii of Europe, but with the curved lon- gitudinal brown stripe on the primaries narrower and greyer; the primaries themselves are also somewhat paler. 1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 381 EvuRHIPID&. 108. PENICILLARIA EXCITANS, Sp. n. Allied to P. geyeri; of the same size, form, and general pattern, but the whole of the whity-brown markings of primaries and basal two thirds of secondaries altered to snow-white ; the testaceous areas replaced by brick-red and the dull brown by pale ash-grey; the collar snow-white excepting at the base, the prothorax edged with white, the thorax reddish, the abdomen greyish towards the base; the under surface white, with black and grey markings instead of pale brown with darker brown markings. Expanse of wings 42 millim. Bugnoter, September 19th, 1885. ToOXOCAMPID&. 109. PLECOPTERA REFLEXA. Plecoptera reflexa, Guénée, Noct. ii. p. 431. n. 1303. Trigonodes’? gammoides, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. xv. p. 1833 (1858). Poaphila? simplex, Walker, l. c. p. 1840 (1858). Campbellpore, 26th and 30th July, 1885. 110. ToxocAMPA ORIENTALIS, Sp. D.- Allied to T. lilacina of Japan ; of the same colours and pattern on the upper surface, but considerably larger and with the fringe of secondaries paler: on the under surface the entire external third excepting the fringe is much darker ; the costa of primaries from the middle is ochraceous, and the basal two thirds of the secondaries brownish white, with a distinct black discocellular spot and an arched dusky stripe across the disk. Expanse of wings 47 millim. Murree, 7th August, 1885. PoLYDESMID&. 111. PANDESMA QUENAVADI. Pandesma quenavadi, Guénée, Noct. ii. p. 438. n. 1310. Campbellpore, 30th June, 6th, 7th, and 25th July, 1885. The specimen last enumerated is unusually dwarfed and dark, but does not appear to differ in any other respect from ordinary examples ; it is a little rubbed, and consequently the black markings are partly obliterated, which may account for its being differently numbered by Major Yerbury. HomMoprTreERID&. 112. ALAMIS UMBRINA. Alamis umbrina, Guénée, Noct. iii. p. 4. n. 1321. Var. Alamis albicincta, Guénée, 1. c. n. 1322. Campbellpore, 29th June and 30th July, 1885. 382 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29, . 113. Homoptera VILIs. Homoptera vilis, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het., Suppl. iii. p. 889 (1865). Campbellpore, 27th July, 1885. The single specimen of this species forwarded by Major Yerbury was much damaged in transit. OPHIUSID2. 114. ACH#ZA MELICERTE. Phalena-Noctua melicerte, Drury, Tl, Ex. Ent. i. p. 46, pl. 23. fig. 1. Campbellpore, 27th July, 1885. Also much damaged. 115. OpHiusA ALBIVITTA. Ophiusa albivitta, Guénée, Noct. iil. p. 271. n. 1707. Campbellpore, July 1885. A good deal rubbed. 116. GRAMMODES STOLIDA. Noctua stolida, Fabricius, Sp. Ins. ii. p. 218. n. 54. $, Campbellpore, 23rd July, 1885. EUCLIDIID&. 117. TRIGONODES HYPPASIA. Phalena-Noctua hyppasia, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iii. p. 99, pl. 250. fig. E (1782). Trigonodes compar, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. xiv. p. 1451. n. 9 (1857). Campbellpore, November 1885. Hy PeEenipDa&. 118. Hypena TATORHINA? Hypena tatorhina, Butler, Ill. Typ. Lep. Het. iii. p. 60, pl. lv. fig. 13 (1879). 6, Kala Pani, 24th September, 1885. One worn and broken specimen, apparently of this species. 119. RuyNcHInNa, sp. n.? Two examples, both broken and therefore unfit for description. Murree, 9th August ; Bugnoter, 19th September, 1885. This species somewhat resembles “ Hypena antiqualis.” PYRALIDS&, 120. AGLOSSA PINGUINALIS. Phalena-Pyralis pinguinalis, Linneeus, Fauna Suecica, p. 1320. Murree, 15th August, 1885. 1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 383 121. SURATTHA ALBIPENNIS, sp. n. Allied to S. invectalis of Ceylon, but the primaries of a more uniformly pale sandy-brown tint, the belt beyond the middle being only flecked with black and white like the interno-basal area, the outer border of this belt also less abruptly angulated ; the external area grey, irrorated with white and with a marginal series of black- tipped fusiform white spots; secondaries white instead of whity brown ; abdomen also paler ; under surface paler. Expanse of wings 22 millim. 3, Campellpore, 30th July, 1885. The genus Surattha was also described by Walker under the names Pindicitora and Calarina; the types belong to one species only. 122. Pyrauis ELacHIA? Pyralis elachia, Butler, Ul. Typ. Lep. Het. iii. p. 70, pl. lviii. fig. 3 (1879). Campbellpore, July ; Murree, August 1885. Two worn examples belonging apparently to this species; they chiefly differ from the type in their slightly darker secondaries. 123. Pyratis inconerua. (Plate XXXV. fig. 5.) Allied to P. glaucinalis and P. yokohame; of the same size as the latter, but in pattern much nearer to P. nannodes ; from the latter it only differs in its superior size and the almost perfectly straight, instead of irregular, whitish stripes across the primaries; from P. glaucinalis and P. yokohame it differs in the much greater width between these stripes in addition to their greater regularity: the colouring in all four species is very similar. Expanse of wings 27 millim. Kala Pani, 24th September, 1885. HERCYNID2. 124. APORODES MELEAGRISALIS. Herbula meleagrisalis, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. xvii. p. 324. n. 11 (1857). Campbellpore, 7th July, 1885. ASOPIID&. 125. SAMEA YERBURII, sp.n. (Plate XXXV. fig. 6.) Allied to S. magna of Japan; of the same colours, but with whitish-centred discocellular lunules, the whitish patches quite differently arranged and not forming bands: primaries with two patches—the first small and oblong, in the middle of the cell, the second transverse quinquefid, between the end of the cell and the dusky discal line, the latter unequally bisinuate, not sharply angulated as in S. magna, less defined and with a pale (not whitish) external edging ; veins whitish towards the outer margin ; fringe with a 384 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29, brown-spotted whitish basal line: secondaries with a small white spot in the cell close to the terminal or discocellular lunule ; a large irregular quadrifid patch beyond the cell and bounded by the discal stripe, which is similar in character to that of the primaries, the projecting part of this stripe (its anterior half) being bounded by five white lunules; fringe with a white basal line: body of the same golden-glossed smoky-grey tint as the wings, the abdomen with whitish edges to the segments: wings below paler than above, silvery, the secondaries almost white. Expanse of wings 37 millim. Murree, 7th and 9th August, 1885. 126. HymeEntIA FASCIALIs. Phalena-Pyralis fascialis, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iv. pl. 398. fig. O (1782). Bugnoter, 19th September, 1875. BorTripipD4&. 127. MrecyNa RUSTICALIS. Pyralis rusticalis, Hiibner, Pyral. p. 26. n. 3, pl. 18. fig. 121. Campbellpore, 5th July, 1885. SCOPARIIDS. 128. STENOPTERYX HYBRIDALIS. Pyralis hybridalis, Hiibner, Pyral. p. 29. n. 20, pl. 17. fig. 114. Murree, 2nd August, 1885. 129, ScopuLA VINCTALIS. Scopula vinctalis, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het., Suppl. iv. p. 1476 (1865). Campbellpore, July 1885. An unusually dark specimen of this widely distributed species. 130. DosaraA C@LATALIS. Dosara celatalis, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. xix. p. 829. n. 1 (1859). Campbellpore, November 1885. Does not differ from Ceylonese specimens. 131. UpDEA FOTALIs. Scopula fotalis, Swinhoe, P. Z. S. 1885, p. 875.-n. 165, pl. lvii. fig. 9. Campbellpore, 30th July, 1885. CHALCOSIID&. 132. AGALOPE BASALIS. Agalope basalis, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. ii. p. 438. n. 1 (1854). 3, 8th September, 1885. “Common in September.”—J. W. Y. 1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 385 Major Yerbury sent three males of this species ; it is perfectly constant in all its characters, and therefore readily separable from the two north-eastern forms. ZYGRHNIDE. 133. ZyGHZNA CASCHMIRENSIS. Zygaena caschmirensis, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. p. 459. n. 1, pl. 19. fig. 6. Murree, 9th August, 1885. * Common in September.”—J. W. Y. ARCTIID&. 134. THyRGoRINA, sp. n.? One worn specimen, too much injured for description, but appa- rently new to science. Murree, 9th August, 1885. This species should be common, and, even if not, it is so conspi- cuous an insect that the only wonder is that it should not exist either in the collections of the British Museum or of Mr. F. Moore ; of course it might have been passed by under the impression that it was some common Spilosoma or Aloa. LITHOSIID&. 135. DEIopKIA THYTER. Detopeia thyter, Butler, Trans. Ent. Soc. London, 1877, p. 361. n. 293. Campbellpore, 5th July, 1885. “Common in May, June, and July.",—J. W. Y. LIpARID&. 136. ARTAXA ANGULIGERA, Sp. 1. Primaries above pale ochreous, crossed beyond the middle by a tolerably broad belt of dark-brown scales crossed by yellow veins, and with a rather acute angle on its outer edge within the second median interspace ; a few scales of the same colour near the base and others in spots on the external border: secondaries much paler than primaries, quite white towards costa: body ochreous; antennz white, with grey pectinations ; under surface wholly whitish. Expanse of wings 25 millim. Murree, 9th August, 1885. 137. ARTAXA SCINTILLANS. Somena scintillans, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. vii. p. 1734 (1855). 3 2 (in coitti), Murree, 12th August, 1885. The female obtained by Major Yerbury differs from the male considerably—a most unusual thing in this genus. The colouring and pattern more nearly resemble those of A. limbata; from the latter it principally differs in its smaller size and uniformly paler 386 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29, tint, the abdomen grey instead of blackish, and the marginal spots of the primaries smaller. 138. CH&ROTRICHE VITELLINA. Liparis vitellina, Kollar in Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 471. n. 4 (1848). Euproctis gamma, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. vii. p. 1731 (1855). Artaxa princeps, Walker, /. c. Suppl. ii. p. 331 (1865). Murree, 7th and 9th August, 1885. 139. PorTHESIA XANTHORRH ZA. Liparis xanthorrhea, Kollar in Hiigel’s Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 470 (1842). db 2, Campbellpore, 24th June, 1885. 140. PoRTHETRIA OBFUSCATA. 3. Lymantria obfuscata, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het., Suppl. ii. p. 367 (1865). 3 @, Sth to 11th August, 1885. The female (which is a cripple) was sent to me, along with its eges, some time ago; it nearly resembles the female of P. japonica excepting that it is smaller. Some of the eggs were hatched about the beginning of May and, by my advice, were placed upon young hawthorn ; upon this and upon oak they have since lived, but their growth has, so far, been very slow; at the present time (June 5th) they are in their second moult and measure 11 millim. in length. Dorsal surface slate-grey, with a central series of seven spots com- mencing on the fourth segment, the fifth of these spots ochreous, the others red; the spots are connected by a slender longitudinal pale line and are bounded on each side by black spots; the subdorsal line is slender and whitish ; the sides and ventral surface ash-grey ; a lateral series of testaceous tubercles crowned with radiating bristles and connected by a very slender blackish line; tubercles of the second and two last segments very prominent and terminating in very long bristles; legs testaceous ; head dark testaceous, the eyes bounded internally by two large fusiform black spots. LASIOCAMPIDS. 141. TRABALA VISHNOU. Gastropacha vishnou, Lefebvre, Zool. Journ. iii. p. 207. 3 2, Murree, 3rd September, 1885. *‘Cocoons very common all along the hills from Murree to Thundiani, August and beginning of September. The males all came out early in September, the females later; the latter appear to remain on their cocoons, as several were taken thus late in September. Cocoon and chrysalis sent.”—J. W. Y. The cocoon of 7. vishnou, which bears some resemblance to a quaint bearded face, is too well known to be worth redescribing here. 1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 387 142. CHILENA sIMILIs ? Chilena similis, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. v. p. 1071. n. 1 (1855). 3 2, Campbellpore, from cocoon, July 1885. The pair forwarded to me are very large for this species, but, so far as can be judged from the much rubbed and frayed specimens, there appears to be no difference of pattern. 143. MEGASOMA VENUSTUM. 2. Megasoma venustum, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. vi. p. 1449. n. 6 (1855). 2, Campbellpore, 20th July, 1885. MUSTILIID&. 144. Musrii1a CoLumBaris, sp.n. (Plate XXXV. fig. 7.) Pale sandy greyish brown ; primaries crossed by two dark greyish lines, the inner one very irregularly sinuated, commencing in a brown costal streak, the second regular, oblique, from inner margin to apex; a brown patch at second third of costa and one or two diffused spots on outer border ; a black spot at end of cell: secon- daries with one irregularly angulated line beyond the middle; costal area whitish ; external area dusky ; a black dot at end of cell: head white: under surface uniform pale sandy brown, reddish towards outer margin, a single straight grey line across the wings. Expanse of wings 61 millim. Murree, 13th August, 1885. 145. CaLiGULA SIMLA. Saturnia sitmla, Westwood, Cat. Orient. Ent. p. 41, pl. 20. fig. 1. Murree, August 1885. One specimen is labelled as “ from chrysalis said to have come from the snows, Cashmere.” All the specimens arrived in a more or less shattered condition. NOTODONTID4. 146. IcHTHYURA CUPREATA, sp. n. Brownish or dust-grey ; primaries darker than secondaries and varied with irregular bands of pale reddish cupreous; the wings crossed by whitish lines forming in large irregular characters the letters VB (left-hand wing); a submarginal series of unequal dust- grey spots is left between the cupreous bands on the disk ; secon- daries pale towards the base, the costa white; thorax dark grey- brown : under surface pale and without markings. Expanse of wings 28 millim. Campbellpore, 26th July, 1885. DREPANULID&. 147. ARGYRIA CINEREA, sp.n. (Plate XXXV. fig. 8.) Pale dove-grey ; primaries darker in the centre; all the wings 388 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29, with a large rounded testaceous central patch edged with dark grey and flecked with black, whitish, and metallic silver scales; submarginal and marginal leaden-grey lines, with a series of spots of the same colour between them ; under surface wholly greyish white. Expanse of wings 33 millim. Campbellpore, 5th July, 1885. Quite unique in the genus. URAPTERYGIDZ. 148. URAPTERYX YERBURII, Sp. n. Nearest to U. clara of the N.E. Himalayas, but differing in the more widely separated and greyer bands across the primaries, the more numerous grey striations on the wings, the paler fringes, the red-centred grey spot in the praecaudal angle of the secondaries, and the narrower tail to these wings ; the abdomen is white (as it probably is in fresh specimens of U. clara). Expanse of wings 56 millim. Murree, 2nd October, 1885. ENNOMID. 149. RumIA MIMULINA, sp. 0D. Nearly allied to R. crategaria of Europe, with almost the same pattern and coloration, but usually larger and always with the chocolate-coloured markings, especially the subapical costal spot of primaries, considerably broader; the form of the so-called “reniform ”’ spot also differs somewhat. Expanse of wings 40—43 millim. Murree, 8th and 12th September, 1885. This species so singularly resembles the European insect that until I had examined a considerable number of specimens of the latter, and thus completely satisfied nyself that no variety approach- ing the Indian insect ever occurred in 2. crateyaria, I was tempted to regard the two specimens sent home by Major Yerbury as sports of the latter species: on looking over Mr. Moore’s collec- tion, I found a third example of the Indian species, above which (but separated by a label) was placed, for purposes of comparison, a specimen of the European species. OxyDIID&. 150. Pyrinta? PH@:NICO-TENIATA. Aspilates phenico-teniata, Kollar in Hiigel’s Kaschm. iv. 2, p- 487 (1842). Murree, 7th August, 1885. This species is new to the collection ; it corresponds so closely with Kollar’s description that I have very little doubt as to the correctness of my identification. 151. HyperyTHRA PHANTASMA. Hyperythra phantasma, Butler, P. Z.S. 1881, p. 614. n. 62. Campbellpore, 11th November, 1885. 1 Til. Typ. Lep. Het. vi. pl. exiii. fig. 6. 1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 389 This species, when fresh, is decidedly greenish, and therefore con- trasts strongly with the allied H. swinhoei, recently captured speci- mens of which are decidedly reddish. BoarRMIID &. 152. BoarMIA ITERATA, Sp. n. Near to B. repandaria of Europe, the basal area of the wings more or less suffused with grey, all the markings much more strongly defined excepting the pale submarginal stripe, which is indistinct and less perfectly dentate-sinuate; the first and second black lines on the secondaries are also twice the width apart; the under surface is greyish white instead of sandy buff, and the primaries are strongly clouded with blackish. Expanse of wings 41 to 47 millim. Murree, 24th and 28th August, 4th September; Kala Pani, 24th September, 1885. Boarmia iterata is a common, though unnamed, Indian species ; it is allied to B. pleniferata, but more nearly to the European insect. 153. GnopHos? OBTECTARIA. Gnophos obtectaria, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het., Suppl. v. p. 1597 (1866); Butler, Ill. Typ. Lep. Het. vi. p. 66, pl. exvi. fig. 8 (1886). 3, Murree, 8th September, 1885. This species should be separated from Gnophos, as the antenne of the male are distinctly bipectinated ; it may perhaps prove to belong to one of the many allied genera already characterized in this family. Only one worn specimen was sent by Major Yerbury. 154. GNopuos? P&RLITA, sp. n. Allied to G. obtectaria: granite-grey, all the ordinary markings on the upper surface indistinct, centre of the wings slightly paler than the remainder of the surface, so as to give the appearance of a dif- fused band, this in the primaries is partly bounded by an abbreviated zigzag blackish line, and on the secondaries by a series of blackish dots on the veins; there is also a blackish spot at the end of each discoidal cell; the external border is slightly ash-coloured, with a faintly indicated paler zigzag inner edging, the fringe is traversed at the base and in the middle by slender pale lines, and the abdominal fringe is white: below pure white, the wings with black discocellular spots and a broad blackish external border; fringe spotted with white; legs greyish above. Expanse of wings 48 millim. Kala Pani, 24th September, 1885. There is a series of this obscure-looking species in Mr. Moore’s collection. 155. GNOPHOS DISPUNCTATA. Gnophos dispunctata, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. xxi. p. 469. n. 28 (1869). Murree, 4th September, 1885. ‘“A single specimen, sitting with open wings on a rock,’’— OY a) od if 390 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON {June 29, 156. GNOPHOS VITREATA. Scotosia vitreata, Moore, P. Z.S. 1867, p. 656. 3, Kala Pani, 24th September, 1885. The single specimen obtained is greener than those in Mr. Moore’s collection, but does not otherwise differ. GEOMETRIDZ. 157. Jopis DETRACTA. Geometra detracta, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. xxii. p. 521. n. 27 (1861). Campbellpore, 30th July, 1885. 158. THALASSODES OPALINA. Thalassodes opalina, Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. vi. p. 214. n. 38 (1880); Ill. Typ. Lep. Het. vi. p. 70, pl. exvil. fig. 9 (1886). Murree, 6th September, 1885. Ip XID. 159. Ipma ornata (local form J. deliciosaria, W1k.). Phalena ornata, Scopoli, Ent, Carn. p. 219. n. 545. Murree, 3lst August, 1885. The markings are a little blacker than in the typical European form. An example of a second species, of this or an allied genus, was found at Murree on 28th August, but as there is only one much broken example I can do nothing with it; it is numbered 29. MACARIID2. 160. MacariA SUFFLATA. Macaria suffata, Guénée, Phal. ii. p. 88. n. 1059, pl. 17. fig. 8 (1857). Barracoo, near Rawal Pindee, 9th October, 1885. New to the Museum collection; the description by M. Guénée is much better than his figure, which is decidedly unsatisfactory. The “ Tephrina incessaria” of Walker is a species of the same group, as also is the ‘‘ Epione brongusaria”’ of the same author. 161. NADAGARA GRISEA. Nadagara grisea, Butler, P.Z.S. 1883, p. 172. n. 140. Murree, 7th September, 1885. FIDONIID#&. 162. STERRHA SACRARIA. Phalena-Geometra sacraria, Linneus, Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 863. n. 220. Murree, 8th, 1]th, and 12th August; Campbellpore, 30th October, 1885. 1886. | LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 391 163. PHyYLETIS HERBICOLENS, var. Delocharis herbicolens, Butler, P. Z.S. 1883, p. 173. n. 141. 2, Murree, 6th September, 1885. Differs from the type in its pale greenish-grey, instead of pinky- white tint, with the bands more distinctly green instead of brown. It is allied to P. stlonaria, and the variation here described seems to be the prevalent type of colouring in the males of this genus. 164. PHYLETIS INCONSPICUA, Sp. n. d . Evidently allied to P. meonaria. Brownish grey ; the primaries crossed at basal third by an indistinct brown line, beyond the cell by a brown-edged band, and at the outer margin by a border of the same width as the band: secondaries with the costal area and base pale buff, a brown discal line parallel to outer margin and a slender blackish marginal line; all the wings with black dis- cocellular dots; fringes plum-coloured at base and testaceous at the tips: thorax grey, antenne and abdomen testaceous: wings below pale buff suffused with rose-red, crossed beyond the middle by a darker, slightly arched line; fringes grey at base, pink at tips; a black discocellular dot in all the wings; primaries with greyish dis- coidal area : body below pale buff tinted with pink. Expanse of wings 32 millim. Murree, 30th August, 1885. The relative number of lines across the wings differs wholly from that of P. meonaria, but the colouring seems very similar. EPIFrIDONIA, gen. nov. Allied to Fidonia (F. concordaria’); differing in its more slender body, less hairy palpi, more slender and less hairy legs, acute sub- faleate primaries, the much longer discoidal cells in all the wings, and in the less angular discocellulars of the secondaries. 1 F. concordaria is a yellow-winged species similar to those of New Zealand. Mr. Meyrick, whose study of the Geometrina appears to have commenced with a Catalogue of the New-Zealand species, has proposed for some of these yellow- winged species the generic name Panthea, a name used five times previously in Zoology. In his opinion the supposed new genus is nearly allied to Larentia, whereas the whole structure of the body is totally dissimilar: the form and neu- ration of the wings bear no near relationship to those of Larentia; in the latter genus the wings are delicate, thinly scaled, much elongated, the veins lying close together, the cells prolonged towards the median vein, the second and third median branches and the radial of secondaries equidistant at their origins, whereas in the New-Zealand /idonie the radial is halfway between the median and subcostal veins. These points should be considered in conjunction with the different structure of the antenne, palpi, legs, and, in fact, whole body, which, however, Mr. Meyrick considers beneath his notice, basing his classifica- tion solely upon neuration, which he indeed believes to have been modified to suit the altered shape of the wings; yet, with singular inconsistency, he states that “the shape of the wing, often employed by superficial observers, is not of the least value, being purely specific.” 392 MR. A. G. BUTLER ON [June 29, 165. Eptriponia sigNnata, sp.n. (Plate XXXV. fig. 9.) Chocolate-brown ; costa and discoidal area of primaries and centre of secondaries more or less suffused with ochraceous, the costal area of the latter wings, excepting at apex, widely bright ochreous; wings striated throughout with black, the primaries crossed in the middle by two well-separated blackish stripes, angulated towards costal margin; an oblique snow-white subcostal spot near apex; secon- daries with a double blackish line from centre of abdominal margin to discoidal cell: body greyish: wings below bright ochreous with broad dark-brown tapering apical borders and a number of scattered black striations; primaries with a discal abbreviated band com- mencing below the white subapical spot; two central black lines; secondaries with an ill-defined central black line; pectus whitish, venter ochraceous. Expanse of wings 29 millim. Murree, 2nd, 9th, and 28th August, 1885. ZERENID &. 166. ABRAXAS FUSCESCENS, sp. n. (Plate XXXV. fig. 10.) Primaries whity brown, speckled and mottled with blackish ; base of costa ochreous ; two widely separated divergent bands of spots, formed by blackish mottling, limiting the central area; a spot ofa similar character on the costa just beyond the middle, an oblique oval spot at the end of the cell, and a spot immediately beyond the outer band at centre of second median interspace: secondaries sericeous creamy white, sparsely speckled with dark grey ; a spot at the end of the cell and a slightly sinuous discal series of the same colour: head, collar, and tegule ochreous spotted with black, remainder of body cream-coloured with dorsal black spots: pri- maries below paler than above, the costa slightly ochraceous; body below yellowish cream-coloured, the venter with four series of black spots. Expanse of wings 48 millim. Kalabagh, 16th September, 1885. 167. ABRAXAS VIRGINALIs, sp. n. (Plate XXXYV. fig. 11.) Wings above pure white; base of primaries ochreous, dotted with black and bounced by an irregular series of brownish dots; an im- perfect band at basal fourth and the costa mottled with pale silver- grey ; an annulus of the same colour closing the cell ; two contiguous sinuous series of annular silver-grey spots across the disk, the inner series with black-dotted ochreous centres; an ochreous streak partly connecting the two series between the third median branch and the inner margin; three larger grey spots and a number of scattered annular dots beyond the discal series; six ocelloid marginal spots extending into the fringe: secondaries almost exactly as in 4. pan- taria; body paler than in the latter species : under surface of wings more strongly marked than above, but without the ochreous tinting. Expanse of wings 44 millim. Murree, 13th August, 1885. 1885. ] LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. 393 LARENTIID4.* 168. MeLaNTHIA RESTITUTA. Melanippe restitutata (sic), Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. xxv. p. 1297 (1862). Campbellpore, July; Murree, 2nd August, 1885. The Melanthia gratulata of Walker, from Vancouver, is Packard’s Rheumaptera brunneicillata. 169. Scorosta DUBIOSATA. Scotosia dubiosata, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. xxv. p. 1352. n. 21 (1862). Murree, 8th September; Bugnoter, 19th September, 1885. “ Not uncommon.’—J. W. Y. 170. ScorostA VENIMACULATA. Scotosia venimaculata, Moore, P. Z. S. 1867, p. 657. Thundiani, 24th September, 1885. The single specimen sent is of a greyish-brown tint, with a pale golden or bronze gloss; it shows no trace of the rosy suffusion com- monly seen on the wings of Darjiling specimens; all the markings are, however, identical, and it is possible that the absence of the reddish colouring may be due to fading or to individual variation. 171. CipARIA PERPULCHRA, Sp. . Allied to C. aurata and C. aliena; nearest to the former, but dif- fering in the dark-grey instead of copper-brown basal area of the primaries, the much more irregular band following it, owing to the different form of the dark postmedian belt; the latter (which is blackish grey instead of brown) commences transversely instead of ‘obliquely, is deeply bisinuated, and forms an angle at the median vein, it is wider than in C. aurata as far as the second median branch, and its anterior edge, instead of being narrowly incised on the lower radial interspace, is cleft so as to form a wide >-shaped incision ; the external border is much less rufous and the pale markings upon it are paler and of twice the width; the secondaries are almost white instead of pale grey-brown; the series of silver spots on the under surface of the secondaries is wanting. Expanse of wings 29 millim. Murree, 8th August, 1885. This species in coloration more nearly resembles C. corylata than either of the two others of the same group. 172. CIDARIA JAMEZA? Cidaria jameza, Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. i. p. 452 (1878); Ill. Typ. Lep. Het. iii. p. 58, pl. lv. fig. 9 (1879). Murree, 20th August, 1885. The single worn specimen in the collection is rather larger than Japanese examples, but I can discover no other difference. 1 The collection contains a Hupithecia, but it is too much worn for identi- fication. Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XXVI. 26 394 ON LEPIDOPTERA FROM WESTERN INDIA. [June 29, 173. CrpARIA ALBIGIRATA 2 Cidaria albigirata, Kollar in Hiigel’s Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 489 (1848). Murree, 12th August, 1885. This agrees tolerably closely with Kollar’s description, but his statement that it belongs to the neighbourhood of Cidaria prunata and suffumata is misleading, if this be his species, since it is closely allied to the European C. picata, and decidedly more closely than to either of the above-mentioned insects; it occurs also in Afghan- istan. 174. PHIBALAPTERYX, sp. n. ? A single specimen, much faded, worn, and without any antenne or palpi, apparently of a new species. Bugnoter, 19th September, 1885. CRAMBIDS. 175. JARTHEZA CHRYSOGRAPHELLA. Chilo chrysographellus, Kollar in Higel’s Kaschm. iv. p. 494 (1848). Campbellpore, 30th July, 1885. 176. APURIMA XANTHOGASTRELLA. Apurima «xanthogastrella, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. xxvii. p. 194. n. 1 (1863). Campbellpore, 28th July, 1885. TORTRICIDE, 177. CERACE TETRAONIS, sp. n. Primaries above black, regularly dotted with pale yellow; costal border crossed by numerous short yellow striee ; a longitudinal sub- costal bright red stripe from base to outer margin: secondaries with the discoidal cell and costal area nearly to apex bright orange ochre- ous, remainder of the wing black; five black costal spots; an ochreous apical spot ; abdominal third of wing spotted all over with ochreous: body blackish, head and collar spotted with yellow, abdomen with ochreous margins to the segments: primaries below without yellow dotting, the red stripe replaced by an ochreous patch filling the discoidal cell and a spot on outer margin; the yellow cclouring on the secondaries paler than above, otherwise similar ; body below whitish. Expanse of wings 28 millim. Murree, 28th August, 1885. Allied to C. onustana of Nepal. CHOREUTID&. 178. TEGNA HYBLEELLA. Tegna hybleella, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het., Suppl. v. p. 1810 (1866). Campbellpore, 20th July, 1885. pac : {ex Lae. ‘ a a ne PZS. 1886. Pl. XXXVI. J.GKeulemans Ith 7 Hanhart imp. PHENICOPTERUS JAMESI. 1886. } ON BIRDS FROM TARAPACA, NORTHERN CHILI. 395 EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXV. Fig. 1. Azanus uranus, p. 366. 2. Tarucus extricatus, p. 566. 3. Spindasis hypargyres, p. 369. 4. Kuchloé lucilla, p. 376. 5. Pyralis incongrua, p. 383. 6. Samea yerburii, p. 383. 7. Mustilia columbaris, p. 387. 8. Argyria cinerea, p. 387. 9. Epifidonia signata, p. 392. 10. Abraxas fuscescens, p. 392. virginalis, p. 392. 9. List of a Collection of Birds from the Province of Tara- paca, Northern Chili. By P. L. Scuarmr, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., Secretary to the Society. [Received June 25, 1886. ] (Plate XXXYI,) Mr. H. Berkeley James, F.Z.S., has placed in my hands for determination a collection of bird-skins made for him by Carlos Rahmer, of the National Museum, Santiago, in the province of Tara- paca, formerly in Peru, but now, I believe, annexed to Chili. The collection, which was made in January and February last, contains 150 skins referable to 53 species, amongst which a new Flamingo, as I shall presently point out, is of special interest. The nearest. fauna to Tarapaca that has received much attention is that of the Desert of Atacama just to the south, which was explored in 1853-4 by Dr. R. A. Philippi, of Santiago’. Prof. Philippi’s list of birds contains 33 species, only 1) or 12 of which are identical with those in the present collection. i But our leading authority on the Birds of Peru, of which Republic the district of Tarapacd until lately formed part, is Taczanowski’s ‘Ornithologie du Pérou.’ I have, therefore, referred throughout to this most useful work except in the case of the following seven species, which are not included by Taczanowski, and are therefore additions to his avifauna, namely :—Sycalis aureiventris, Upucer- thia ruficauda, Synallaxis modesta, Bolborhynchus orbignesius, Phoeni- copterus jamesi, Fulica leucoptera, and Aigialitis occidentalis, Of these seven, one (Bolborhynchus orbignesius) was hitherto only known from Bolivia; two, so far as is yet ascertained, are peculiar to Tarapacd (namely Pheenicopterus jamesi and Aigialitis occidentalis), and the remaining four are Chilian species not hitherto recorded so far north. The species in the present collection from Tarapac4 which have not yet been met with in Chili are 20 in number, namely :-— 7'urdus 1 «Reise durch die Wiiste Atacama,’ &c. v. Dr. R, A. Philippi: Halle, 1860. 20* 396 MR. P. L. SCLATER ON BIRDS [June 29, chiguanco, Phrygilus plebeius, Chrysomitris atrata, Sycalis uropygi- alis, Muscisawxicola albifrons, Centrites oreas, Cinclodes bifasciatus, Bolborhynchus orbignesius, Pheenicopterus andinus, P. jamesi, Me- triopelia aymara, Chamepelia cruziana, Gymnopelia erythrothoraz, Gallinula galeata, Fulica gigantea, F. ardesiaca, Vanellus resplen- dens, Atgialitis occidentalis, Recurvirostra andina, and Tinamotis pentlandi. VICINITY oF TARAPACA CHILI z oi v Huns 4000 OSb 2 30 40 SO The sketch now exhibited (fig. 1) will show most of the different places in which the collection was formed. 1. TurDus CHIGUANCO, d’Orb. et Lafr. Turdus chiguanco, Seebohm, Cat. Birds B. M. v. p. 225; Sel. et Salv. P.Z.S. 1867, p. 984 (Islay). Merula chiguanco, Tacz. Orn. Per. ii. p. 494. Sibaya. One Q: iris brown; feet and beak vellow. Obtained by Whitely near Islay, Peru, in 1867. 1886. ] FROM TARAPACA, NORTHERN CHILI. 397 2. ANTHUS, sp. ine. Sacaya. One <¢: iris brown; feet brown; beak dark horn- colour. A young bird, nearest to A. furcatus, d’Orb. et Lafr. (Tacz. Orn. Pér. 1. p. 459). 3. ATTICORA CYANOLEUCA (Vieill.). Atticora cyanoleuca, Sharpe, Cat. Birds B. M. x. p. 186; Tacz. Om, Péri.p. 244. Huasco. One @ : iris brown; legs brown; feet black. 4. Puryeiius arricers (d’Orb. et Lafr.). Emberiza atriceps, d’Orb. et Lafr. Syn. Av. i. p. 76. Phrygilus atriceps, Tacz. Orn. Pér. ui. p. 34. Sacaya and Lalcalhuay. 5. PuryGitus unIcoLor (d’Orb. et Lafr.). Emberiza unicolor, d’Orb. et Lafr. Syn. Av. i. p. 79. Phrygilus unicolor, Scl. et Salv. Nomenel. p. 31. Phrygilus rusticus, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 38. Huasco. One ¢ : iris dark brown. 6. PuryGiLus PLEBETIUS, Tssch. Phrygilus plebeius, Scl. et Salv. Nomencl. p. 31; Taez. Orn. Pér, iii. p. 39. Huasco, Sitana, and Lalealhuay. 7. PHRYGILUS FRUTICETI (Kittl.). Phrygilus fruticeti, Scl. et Salv. Nomencl. p. 31; Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 37. Sibaya. One 6: iris dark brown; feet yellowish. 8. Curysomitris aTrata (d’Orb. et Lafr.). Chrysomitus atrata, Scl. et Salv. Nomencl. p. 34; Tacz. Orn. Pér, it. p./53. Huasco and Sacaya. Iris very dark brown. 9. Sycauis uropyerAtis (d’Orb. et Lafr.). Sycalis uropygialis, Scl. Ibis, 1872, p. 47; Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. 58. Huasco and Sitana. Three examples, 3 et Q : sexes alike. p. 10. SycaLis AUREIVENTRIS, Ph. et Landb. Sycalis aureiventris, Scl. Ibis, 1872, p. 47, pl. iil. Chumisa. One Q : iris dark brown. 11. Muscisax1coLa ALBIFRONS (Tsch.). Muscisaxicola albifrons, Tacz. Orn. Pér. ii. p. 209. Sacaya. One 9: iris dark brown; feet and beak black. 398 MR. P. L. SCLATER ON BIRDS [June 29, 12. MuscisAxICOLA RUFIVERTEX, d’Orb. et Lafr. Muscisaxicola rufivertex, Tacz. Orn. Pér. ii. p. 216. Huasco. o et Q: iris bright brown; bill and feet black. 13. CeENTRITES OREAS, Scl. et Salv. Centrites oreas, Tacz. Orn. Pér. il. p. 222. Sacaya. One ¢: iris very dark brown ; feet and beak black. 14. Grosirra cunrcuLania (Vieill.). Geosilta cunicularia juninensis, Tacz. Orn. Peér. ii. p. 93. Sacaya and Sitana. ¢ et 9, alike: iris dark brown; feet black ; beak horn-colour. 15. UpucerTHIA RUFICAUDA (Meyen). Ochetorhynchus ruficaudus, Scl. P. Z. 8. 1867, p. 324. Upucerthia ruficauda, Scl. et Salv. Nomencel. p. 62; iid. P. Z.8. 1879, p. 619. Lalealhuay. 6: iris brown; feet and beak black. 16. CINCLODES BIFASCIATUS. Cinclodes bifasciatus, Scl. P. Z.S. 1858, p. 448; Tacz. Orn. Per. li. p. 3. Upucerthia atacamensis, Phil. Reise d. d. Wiiste Atacaina, p. 161, t. iii. Chumisa, Sacaya, and Sibaya. Males: iris dark brown; feet and beak black. 17. CincLopEs ruscus (Vieill.). Cinclodes fuscus, Sc]. et Salv. P. Z.S. 1867, p. 985. Cinclodes rivularis, Tacz. Orn. Pér. ii. p. 112. Chumisa, Cueva negra, and Sacaya. Iris brown ; feet black. 18. LeprastHENURA £GITHALOIDES (Kittl.). Leptasthenura egithaloides, Tacz. Orn. Pér. ii. p. 120. Huasco. Iris dark brown: 19. SyNALLAXxIS MopEsTA, Kyton. Synallaxis modesta, Scl. P. Z. 8. 1874, p. 23. Sacaya and Sitana. Two ¢ et 2: iris dark brown. 20. OREOTROCHILUS LEUCOPLEURUS, Gould. Oreotrochilus leucopleurus, Tacz. Orn. Per. ii. p. 278; Gould Mon. Troch. ii. pl. rt. Chumisa and Lalcalhuay. Two females, with nest and eges. The nest consists of an oblong mass of grey and brown wool (apparently Llama’s), with a few bits of moss intermixed. It is pointed at the lower extremity. In a shallow open depression are two white pyriform eggs ; they measure about 0°7 by 0°45 inch. 2 1886. | FROM TARAPACA, NORTHERN CHILI. 399 21. BoLBORHYNCHUS ORBIGNESIUS. Myicpsitta orbignesia, Bp. Rev. et Mag. de Zool. 1854, p. 151. Bolborhynchus orbignesius, Scl. et Salv. P.Z.S. 1879, p. 635. Bolborhynchus d@ orbigni, Finsch, Papag. ii. p. 129. Lalcalhuay. Males and females: sexes alike; iris dark brown. These specimens agree with Bolivian skins of this little-known species. 22. BuTEO ERYTHRONOTUs (King). Buteo erythronotus, Tacz. Orn. Pér. i. p. 115. Lalcalhuay. @ : iris brown; feet yellow. 23. MILVAGO MEGALOPTERUS (Meyen). Milvago megalopterus, Tacz. Orn. Pér. i. p. 101. Sitana. : iris brown; feet yellow. 24. ARDEA CANDIDISSIMA (Gm.). Ardea candidissima, Tacz. Orn. Peér. iii. p. 393. Sitana. 6: iris yellow; feet black. 25. Pu@nicoprreRrus ANDINUS, Philippi. Pheenicopterus andinus, Philippi, Reise d. d. Wuste Atacama, p. 164, tt. iv., v.; Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 423. Huasco. Two females, in full plumage. “ Iris very dark brown ; feet whitish yellow ; beak, fore part black, hind part whitish yellow ; between the nostrils brick-red ; lowest hinder part of lower mandible and a small spot before the eyes violet.” An egg is of a uniform chalky white, with irregular adherent chalky layers, as in some Cormorants’ eggs. It measures 3°6 by 2:1 inches, and is only slightly more pointed at the small end. 26. PHa@NICOPTERUS JAMESI, sp. nov. (Plate XXXVI.) Ph. albus, capite colloque superiore et alis extus roseo indutis ; cervicis undique, dorsi superioris et pectoris plumarum apicibus cum scapularibus et secundariis externis elongatis et subalaribus sanguineo-rosaceis ; remigibus nigerrimis ; subalaribus longis sanguineis; pedibus rubris; rostri basi flava, apice nigra ; loris nudis in pelle carneis; digito postico nullo: long. tota cire. 36°0, ale 16:0, caude 6°5, tarsi 80. Hab. in Andibus, prov. Tarapacensis. Obs. A Ph. andino cui pedibus tridactylis affinis, forma et pictura rostri, scapularibus et secundariis productis, et pedibus rubris sané diversus. An adult male in full dress and a male and female not in full dress of this new species of three-toed Flamingo were obtained by Rahmer at Sitana, at a height of about 12,000 feet, at the foot of the Volcano Tsluga. In a letter announcing this discovery, Mr. Rahmer has proposed to call the species ‘“‘jamesi,” a name which I adopt with great pleasure. 400 MR. P. L. SCLATER ON BIRDS [June 29, There can be no question about the distinctness of this species from P. andinus. Besides the differences specified above, the confor- mation of the bill is of itself sufficient to render Ph. jamesi distinct in all ages: As will be seen by the sketches now exhibited (figs. 2 Fig. 2. Bill of Ph. andinus. Fig. 3. Bill of Ph. jamesi. and 3), the bill is much shorter and smaller in Ph. jamesi, the naked space at the lores wider and differently shaped, and the upper mandible is much narrower. The very different disposition of the colours will be likewise seen from the figures. In P. jamesi the terminal black portion is much smaller, and is succeeded by an 1886.] FROM TARAPACA, NORTHERN CHILI. 401 orange-yellow which occupies the whole basal portion, while the narrow rim at the front, the lores, and the naked skin round the eve are red, in life (according to Rahmer) “ carmine.’”’ There is besides a red spot terminating the yellow at the front of the upper mandible. In P. andinus the black terminal portion is much more extended ; this is succeeded by a pale or “ whitish yellow” base ; and the part between the nostrils is “ brick-red.”’”. The lower part of the gonys next to the feathering and the narrow naked lores are in the skin of a flesh-colour, in life ‘* violet.”’ In P. jamesi the legs are red, in life ‘‘ carmine ;” in P. andinus ‘* whitish yellow.” In P. jamesi, as will be seen in the figure (Plate XXXVI.), the external secondaries are elongated into filiform plumes, which extend, when the wing is closed, as much as two inches beyond the _ primaries, and scapularies are similarly lengthened. Both these sets of plumes are of abright rosy red. This is also apparent in the two younger specimens of P. jamesi, but nothing of the sort appears to take place in P. andinus. 27. BERNICLA MELANOPTERA (Eyton). Bernicla melanoptera, Tacz. Orn. Peér. iii. p. 467. Sacaya. One adult and two nestlings: iris dark brown with a white rim; feet carmine. 28. ANAS cRisTATA, Gm. Anas cristata, Tacz. Orn. Per. iii. p. 473. Sitana, Sacaya, and Huasco. Examples of both sexes: ‘iris orange.” A series of eight eggs are of the usual colour of Ducks’ eggs, a pale fulvous white ; they measure about 2°6 by 1-7 inch, 29. QuERQUEDULA CYANOPTERA (Vieill.). Querquedula cyanoptera, Tacz. Orn. Peér. iii. p. 475. Sitana and Sacaya. Examples of both sexes: iris orange. 30. QUERQUEDULA OXYPTERA (Meyen). Querquedula oxyptera, Scl. et Salv. P. Z.S. 1876, p. 385 ; Tacz. Orn. Per. iii. p. 477. Sitana, Sacaya, Huasco, and Lalcalhuay. Males and females: iris dark brown. ‘Ten eggs of this Duck accompany the skins ; they are duller and smaller than those of Anas cristata, and measure about 2°3 by 1°5 inch. 31. QuERQUEDULA PUNA (Tsch.). Querquedula puna, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 478; Sel. et Salv. Ex. Orn. pl. xcix. Sitana and Sacaya. Examples of both sexes: ‘‘iris brown.” Five eggs are larger and more pointed than those of Q. oxyptera and of a pale fulvous white. They measure about 2°3 by 1°75 inch. 402 MR. P. L. SCLATER ON BIRDS {June 29, 32. DAFILA spinicauDA (Vieill.). Dafila spinicauda, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 481. Sitana. A pair: “iris brown.” 33. METRIOPELIA MELANOPTERA (Gm.). Metriopelia melanoptera, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 239. Lalealhuay. A od: “iris dark blue; feet black.” 34. MerriopELia AYMARA (d’Orb.). Metriopelia aymara, Tacz. Orn, Pér. iii. p. 240. Huasco and Sitana. Examples of both sexes: iris black or very dark brown ; feet flesh-coloured. 35. MELopetia MELODA (Tsch.). Melopelia meloda, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 241. Pica. A single specimen: “iris brown; feet carmine; beak black.” 36. CHAMPELIA CRUZIANA (d’Orb.). Chamepelia cruziana, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 248. Pica. Examples of both sexes: ‘iris dark red, with white rim ; feet brick-red.” 37. GYMNOPELIA ERYTHROTHORAX (Meyen). Gymnopelia erythrothorax, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 249. Sibaya. A young male: “iris light blue ; feet flesh-colour; naked skin round the eye orange.” 38. GALLINULA GALEATA (Licht.). Gallinula galeata, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 327, Sitana. A single skin: “iris brown.” 39. Furica cieanTea, Eyd. et Soul. Fulica gigantea, Tacz. Orn. Peér. iii. p. 329. Cueva negra near Sacaya. Four examples, all females: ‘iris red- brown ; feet dark brickdust-red ; bill red-brown, with the ridge and point white, and a spot on each side yellow.” Two eggs of this species are of the usual character of this group : they are of a pale stone-colour, sparingly spotted and speckled with two shades of reddish grey, and measure about 2°8 by 1:8 inch. 40. Fuxica arpestAca, Tsch. Fulica ardesiaca, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 328; Scl. et Salv. Ex. Orn. pl. lvii. Huasco. Examples of both sexes, alike: ‘‘iris brown-red ; feet yellowish green ; joints and edges of toes greyish; bill with the ridge and borders of mandible white, the point yellowish green, and a spot near nostrils yellow ; blaze chocolate.” 1886.] FROM TARAPACA, NORTHERN CHILI. 403 41. Funica Leuvcoptera, Vieill. Fulica leucoptera, Scl. et Salv. Ex. Orn. p. 119, pl. Ix. Fulica chloropoides, Landb. Wiegm. Arch. 1862, pt. i. p. 218. Fulica stricklandi, Hart). J. fs O. 1853, Extrah. p. 86. Huasco. One 9: “‘iris red-brown; feet and bill yellowish green ; ridge of bill white; spot near nostrils yellow; spot above the beak chocolate.” 42, VANELLUS RESPLENDENS (Tsch.). Vanellus resplendens, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 336. Sitana and Sacaya. ‘Three males, two females; sexes alike : iris carmine ; beak and feet carmine ; point of beak black. Neither Tschudi nor Taczanowski appear to have noted that there is no hind toe in this species. 43. ARGIALITIS OCCIDENTALIS, Cab. Aigialitis occidentalis, Cab. J. f. O. 1872, p. 158, et 1885, pl. vi. fig. 1 (head). Sitana, Huasco, and Cueva negra. Examples of both sexes: “iris brown ; feet black.” Mr. Seebohm has kindly determined these specimens, and sends me the subjoined remarks :— «* Although Cabanis gives no locality, nor mentions the colour of the legs and feet, there can be no doubt that his name refers to this species. He says it is a larger bird than 4. nivosus, but like it has white lores. He also refers to the rusty hind head and neck. “It appears to be the South-American representative of &. rufi- capillus, which inhabits the coasts of Australia, Tasmania, and occasionally New Zealand.” 44. OREOPHILUS RUFICOLLIS (Wagl.). Oreophilus ruficollis, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 347. Lalealhuay. One &: iris dark brown; bill black; feet carmine. 45. THINOCORUS ORBIGNYANUS, Less. Thinocorus orbignyanus, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 281. Sacaya. Examples of both sexes: iris brown; bill horn-colour ; feet yellow. Three eggs are much pointed, and call to mind those of the Grallz: they are of a shining buffy white, finely speckled with greater and lesser black and blackish specks, and measure about 1-5 by 1-1. 46. PHEGoRNIS MITCHELLI, Fraser. Leptopus mitchelli, Fraser, P. Z. 8. 1844, p. 157. Phegornis mitchelli, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 372. Sitana. One ¢: “iris dark brown, almost black; feet yel- lowish ; beak black.’ 404 ON BIRDS FROM TARAPACA, NORTHERN CHILI. [June 29, A scarce bird, originally described from Chili, where Philippi says it is found on the high Cordillera of the Central Provinces '. The same naturalist also obtained it near Rio Frio in the desert of Atacama (Reise d. d. Wiiste Atacama, p. 163). Jelski met with it on the Lake of Junin, Central Peru. 47. RecuRVIROSTRA ANDINA, Ph. et Landb Wiegm. Arch. 1863, pt. i. p. 131; Harting, Ibis, 1874, p. 257, pl. ix. Three examples of this scarce bird from Huasco. “Iris orange with a yellow rim ; legs bluish grey ; beak black.” 48. TRINGA MACULATA, Vieill. Tringa maculata, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iti. p. 356. Huaseo. “ Iris light brown.’ 49. TrinGa BarrbI (Coues). Tringa bairdi, Tacz. Orn. Pér. ili. p. 359. Huasco, Sacaya, and Cueva negra. ‘“ Iris dark brown.” 50. GAMBETTA MELANOLEUCA (Vieill.). Totanus melanoleucus, Tacz. Orn. Per. iii. p. 365. Sitana. 51, GAMBETTA FLAVIPES (Gm.). Totanus flavipes, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 367. Sacaya. 52. Larus SERRANUS, Tsch. Larus serranus, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 452. Huasco, Sitani, and Cuevanegra. Examples of both sexes: “iris dark brown; bill and feet dark brown-red.” 53. TINAMOTIS PENTLANDI, Vig. Tinamotis pentlandi, Tacz. Orn. Pér. iii. p. 310. Huasco, One ¢: “iris chocolate; legs whitish greenish ; feet black.”’ * “Cat. Ay. Chilenas,” in Anales de la Univers. de Chile, tom. xxxi. p- 272. 1886. ] ON THE COLUMELLA OF ICHTHYOSAURUS. 405 10. Note on the Presence of a Columella (Epipterygoid) in the Skull of Ichthyosaurus. By A. Smira Woopwarp, F.G.S., of the British Museum (Natural History). (Communicated by Professor Frowrr, LL.D., F.R.S., President.) [Received June 3, 1886.] In the skulls of fossil Reptiles and Amphibia it so rarely happens that the bones on the inner side of the temporal fossa, and those between the orbits, are well exposed to view, that even in some of the most familiar genera very little has yet been ascertained regarding the special characters of any of these ossifications. In so conspicuous a form as Ichthyosaurus, for example, there appears to be no published reference to these structures beyond the brief statements of Profs. Huxley, Cope, and Sir Richard Owen, and even these do not afford any very definite information. Prof. Huxley determined’ the presence of a distinct pro-otic, and the doubtful absence of ali- and orbito-sphenoids ; Prof. Cope gives* a diagrammatic outline of the “ columella” ; while Sir Richard Owen appears to have been less successful in his researches, having met with nothing but unsatisfac- tory indications of small “alisphenoids” (? pro-otics), and especially remarking that there is “ no trace or sign of the Lacertian columellar bone” ®. In making the latter statement, the distinguished palzeontologist just mentioned evidently overlooked Prof. Cope’s previous researches upon the osteology of the Ichthyosaurian skull; and having lately discovered that there is no foundation for the assertion in the British Museum specimens, that formed the basis of Sir Richard Owen’s monograph, I venture to offer a few remarks upon the subject, by way of pointing out the mistake. A detailed description of the interesting bone in question may also be acceptable, since Prof. Cope’s materials appear to have been less complete and satisfactory than those now afforded by the fossils from the English Jurassic. The first specimen of interest in this connection is a small slab of Lias from Lyme Regis, exhibiting a number of dislocated cranial bones, which Mr. William Davies long ago recognized as belonging to Ichthyosaurus, but which do not appear, hitherto, to have been submitted to so careful a study as their admirable state of preserva- tion renders desirable. In the middle of the fossil, the basioccipital, basisphenoid, and presphenoid are arranged in irregular series, with their upper aspect exposed ; in front are the remains of the supra- occipital and parietals ; and on either side are scattered a number of 1 'T, H. Husley, ‘ Anatomy of Vertebrated Animals,’ 1871, p. 211. 2 E. D. Cope, “ On the Cranium of the Ichthyopterygia,” Proc. Amer. Assoc. Adv. Sci. vol. xix. (1870), pp 200-203, (For this reference I am indebted to the kindness of Mr. J. W. Hulke, F.R.S.) 3 R. Owen, “ Fossil Reptilia of the Liassic Formations.—ITT.” (Mon. Pal. Soc. 1881), p. 96; also, ‘ History of British Fossil Reptiles,’ vol. iii. (1884), p. 54. 406 MR. A. SMITH WOODWARD ON THE [June 29, other cranial elements in a more or less well-preserved state. Among the latter are two long bones with expanded extremities, lying lengthwise, one on either side of the basi- and presphenoids; and the form and situation of these elements, considered in connection with the evidence of other specimens presently to be noticed, can leave no doubt that they are the homologues of the columella (epipterygoid, Parker) found in Lacertilia, Khynchocephalia, Ano- modontia, Dinosauria’, and Chelonia. ‘The bone on the right shows a side view, while that on the left is seen either from behind or before, and although both are fractured to a certain extent, their boundaries are readily distinguishable. The right columella is 0°045 metre in total length, and is shown of the natural size in fig. 1° (p. 407). The upper end exhibits a tri- angular expansion, which, before fracture, must’ have measured about 0-016 metre in greatest breadth ; and the long terminal upper border thus produced hasa gently arched contour. Immediately below the expanded portion the bone becomes much constricted, having a diameter of only 0°003 metre, and at the distance of 0°019 metre from the lower extremity it commences again to widen, but here in at unsymmetrical manner. From the upper expansion downwards the anterior edge is nearly straight, but at the point just mentioned the hinder edge rapidly curves backwards, until the bone attains a maximum breadth of 0°012 metre, when the border once more descends almost vertically for some distance, and finally curves to the front. The lower end, however, has evidently been much crushed, like the remainder of the bone, and perhaps does not give an exact idea of its original shape. The left columella, presenting only an anterior (or hinder) view, does not add any further details to the foregoing description ; but this side of the fossil is of especial interest, since, as pointed out to me by Mr. G. B. Howes, there appears to be some indication of a downwardly-directed process of the parietal to meet the columella, such as exists in the living Cyclodus*. There is no indication of the fusion of the upper end of the bone with the parietal (or ? “squamosal”’), such as’ Prof. Cope describes (/. e. p. 204) in the American form. In a skeleton of Zchthyosaurus from the collection of the late Prof. Tennant (No. R 44 of the B.M. Register), the postorbital and adjoining bones are so far removed and displaced as to permit an admirable view of the lower end of the right columella, which is uncrushed, and still in contact with the pterygoid immediately behind the orbit. This is shown of the natural size in fig. 2. Its front edge is almost vertical, but curves slightly forwards near the lower termination, and there is a sharp anterior outer ridge along the whole length of the bone. The expanded portion exhibits a 1 See O. C. Marsh, “ Restoration of Brontosaurus,” Amer. Journ. Sci. (3) yol. xxvi. p. 88; “On the Diplodocidex,” zbéd. (3) xxvii. p. 165; ‘The Order Theropoda,” tom. cit. p. 332. : 2 The drawings have been made by Mr. W. H. Hill. 3 T. H. Huxley, ‘ Anatomy of Vertebrated Animals,’ p. 189, fig. 69. 1886.] COLUMELLA OF ICHTHYOSAURUS. 407 long inferior border, decidedly marked off from a short posterior border, but the precise nature of its original articulation is unfortu- nately not apparent. The pterygoid seems to have slipped some- what from its natural position. Fig. 1. Fig. 2. Fig. 1. Right columella of Ichthyosaurus, much erushed ; inner side view. [B.M., No. 2000. 40*.] Fig. 2. Lower portion of right columella of Ichthyosaurus; outer side view : pt, pterygoid ; 0, crushed bones in orbit. [B.M., No. R 44.] Fig. 3. Lower portion of left columella of Ichthyosaurus intermedius ; inner side view. [B.M., No. 2000. 15.] 4, Left columella of Hatteria punctata; outer side view: pt, pterygoid ; qu, quadrate. The fragmentary skull of Zchthyosaurus’ figured by Hawkins in his ‘ Book of the Great Sea-Dragons,’ pl. 19. fig. 1, also exhibits the lower two thirds of the left columella, and this is interesting as 1 This specimen has been identified with Z intermedius, Conyb., by Sir Richard Owen, and bears his MS, label. 408 ON THE COLUMELLA OF ICHTHYOSAURUS. [June 29, displaying an uncrushed inner view: the bone, however, though well shown in Mr. O’Neill’s drawing, is not specially marked, and it is therefore advisable to append a separate sketch, such as is given in the woodcut, fig. 3 (p. 407). The general outline is similar to that of the examples already described, but the additional characters of the inner aspect are well worthy of note. In the constricted portion of the bone, the shaft is compressed to form a sharp ridge, which terminates in an abrupt prominence at the point where the lower expansion commences, and beneath this tke broad surface is divided into two distinct, apparently articular, facettes. The upper and hinder division (a) is slightly hollowed and somewhat triangular in shape ; while the lower facette (4) is more elongated, and is separated from the first in its anterior portion by being more deeply impressed in the bone. Amoug the crushed cranial bones, immediately behind the sclerotic plates, in another specimen of Jehthyosaurus in the National Collec- tion the culumella is also distinctly visible; but this does not supply any additional facts of importance. On comparing the bone under consideration with its homologue among recent Reptiles, none is found to exhibit a more striking similarity than that of Hatteria (fig. 4, p. 407). As Dr. Gunther has pointed out’, the columella in this genus is particularly remarkable for the great expansion of its extremities ; and it is also peculiar from the fact that the lower end articulates not only with the pterygoid, but also with an inward extension of the quadrate. Moreover, so far as can be ascertained from a complete skull, the columella appears to show some signs of contracting this articulation by an overlapping of the two bones in a vertical plane ; and the upper end is connected with cartilage, and not directly in contact with the parietal above. Unfortunately at present it is only possible to compare the form of the element in each of these types. In none of the fossil Ichthyo- saurs 1 have examined are the precise relations of the bone very distinct. As already stated, however, the first fossil is remarkably suggestive of a direct articulation of the upper end of thecolumella with a downward process of the parietal ; and the originals of figs. 2 and 3 exhibit so close a resemblance to the corresponding parts in Hatteria, that there is also strong evidence of the lower articulation being double. But it ought to be remarked that in Ichthyosaurus no inwardly directed extension of the quadrate has hitherto been observed *, and the discovery of more satisfactory specimens must yet be awaited before it is possible to arrive at any definite conclusion. * A. Giinther, “Contribution to the Anatomy of Hatteria (Rhynchocephalus, Owen),” Phil. Trans. 1867, p. 599, pl. xxvi. figs. 3, 4. ° H. G. Seeley, “ Similitudes of the Bones in the Enaliosauria,” Journ. Linn. Soe. (Zoology) vol. xii. (1876), p. 309. re aes aie ae A arts rity btu; , p rat 4 ? ‘4 me ra Maat) eit SRR at An n at ey te rk ie hae Be f. ea) . SAdigity SOOViLVv yyy ssTydng MM duit Jaeut [] Za Lt P:Z.5. 1666 Fl AAR Va W.Purkrss.lith Hanhart imp i BOUMAEA PYGELA . 2. ANTHERAA DOLABELLA. 3 CHRYSOPOLOMA ROSEA. 4,CHRYSOPOLOMA CITRINA. 1886.] ON NEW HETEROCERA FROM TROPICAL AFRICA. 409 11. Descriptions of some new Species of Heterocera from Tropical Africa. By Herserr Druce, F.L.S., F.R.G.S., F.Z.S. [Received June 16, 1886.] (Plates XXXVII. & XXXVIII.) SATURNIIDA. ATTACUS ALBIDUS, sp. n. (Plate XX XVII. fig. 1.) 3. The primaries very similar to A. ploetzi, but the white band is closer to the outer margin, four round white spots between the apex and the anal angle. Secondaries pure white excepting the outer margin, which is narrowly bordered with reddish brown, with black and fawn-coloured lunular markings as in A. ploetzi; the vitreous spot long, narrowly edged with black, bordered on the inner side with yellow. The underside the same as above. Head and thorax reddish brown, a wide white band at the base of the thorax, the abdomen brown banded with white; antennz and legs pale yellowish brown. The female the same as the male, but slightly more reddish in colour, and with all the vitreous spots considerably larger. Expanse, ¢ 7 inches, 2 64 inches. Hab. West Africa, Cameroon Mountains. Mus. Druce. This very fine species comes into the group containing A. vacuna, Westw., A. ploetzi, Weymer, from both of which it is at once distin- guished by the pure white secondaries. ANTHERHA DOLABELLA, sp. n. (Plate XXXVIII. fig. 2, ¢.) 3S. Primaries chrome-yellow, crossed by three irregular black bands, beyond which, along the outer margin, are a series of dusky patches, the base of the wing shaded with pink. Secondaries bright pink, broadly bordered with chrome-yellow, from the apex to the anal angle with several indistinct dusky black patches; nearest the anal angle a wide black band, dividing the two colours, crossing from near the apex to the inner margin; a large round deep yellow ocellus with a wide black border, on the outer edge of the black is a ring of bluish-fawn colour ; in the centre of the ocellus is a very small vitreous spot. Head and thorax and upperside of abdomen bright pink, the underside of abdomen chrome-yellow banded with black ; tegule chrome-yellow; antennz black; legs black and yellow. Expanse 44 inches. Hab. East Central Africa. Mus. Druce. This very beautiful species is quite unlike any other known to me. BuN2#A PYGELA, n. sp. (Plate XXXVIII. fig. 1, 3.) 3. Primaries uniform pale pinkish brown, darkest along the costal margin; the outer and inner margin narrowly edged with pink; underside as above, but shaded with dark yellow from the base to about the middle; a small black spot at the end of the Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XXVII. 7 410 ON NEW HETEROCERA FROM TROPICAL AFRICA. [June 29, cell. Secondaries dark orange-yellow, bordered from the apex to the anal angle and thence along the inner margin to the base with bright pink ; a large central round fawn-coloured ocellus broadly edged with black. The underside uniform pale pinkish brown. Head and thorax orange-yellow ; collar and underside of the thorax pure white ; a wide pink band at the base of the thorax. Abdomen, upperside orange-yellow, underside pale pinkish brown; the anus pink ; antenne brown, deeply pectinated; legs pale brown. Expanse 33 inches. Hab. East Africa, Matebele Country. Mus. Druce. This species is allied to B. pygmea, Maassen, from which it is at once distinguished by not having the black band across the pri- maries and the absence of the white dot at the end of the cell, and difference in the colour of the antenne. LAsIoCAMPID&. STIBOLEPIs SYLVIA, sp. n. Primaries silvery white, brownish black along the costal margin, the apex, and outer margin; the veins from the cell to the onter margin dusky. Secondaries silvery white, with the apex and outer margin narrowly edged with brownish black ; the veins a short way up from the margin dusky. Underside as above, excepting that the primaries have less black at the apex. Head and thorax yellowish white. Abdomen dark yellow; antenne black; legs yellow. Expanse 27 inches. Hab. West Africa, Cameroons (Thompson). Mus. Druce. This beautiful species is allied to Stibolepis nivea, Butler, from which it is at once distinguished by its smaller size and entire absence of the black marginal band of that species. CHRYSOPOLOMA ROSEA, sp.n. (Plate XXXVIII. fig. 3.) Primaries fawn-colour, shaded with pink along the inner margin, crossed beyond the middle by a row of brownish-red spots. Secon- daries pale yellow, the fringe pinkish. The head, thorax, and abdomen pale yellowish-fawn colour ; legs brownish black ; antenna» black. Expanse 1? inch. Hab. Fast Africa, Delagoa Bay. Mus. Druce. This pretty little species is allied to Chrysopoloma obtusa, Walker, also from East Africa. CHRYSOPOLOMA CITRINA, Sp.n. (Plate XXXVIII. fig. 4.) Primaries pale yellow, crossed about the middle, from the costal to the inner margin, by a band of very small brown spots, beyond which is a second band, extending from the apex to the inner margin ; the second band is very much wider, and near the inner margin it has several whitish spots; a submarginal row of minute dots extending from the apex to the anal angle. Secondaries pale yellow, with a central and submarginal row of small brown spots. The fringe of both primaries and secondaries pale yellow; the underside Ty of bay Tie, 5 206 rr - as 4 iy Es ee * Pri Lt. es baat i P.Z.S3. 1886. Pl. XXXIX. FW. Frohawk del et ith. Mintern Bros. ump. 1. IXALUS ASPER . 2. GEOMOLGE FISCHERI. 1886.] BATRACHIANS IN THE NATURAL-HISTORY MUSEUM. 4I1 uniform pale yellow. Head, thorax, and abdomen yellow; legs yellow, banded with brown. Expanse 1] inch, Hab. West Africa, Old Calabar. Mus. Druce, In form this species resembles C. rudis, Walker, but in colour and markings it is very distinct. LECHENOPTERYX FULVIA, Sp. Dl. Primaries pinkish brown, crossed near the outer margin from near the apex to the inner margin by a black line, bordered on the inner side with yellow ; a small white dot edged with black at the end of the cell; secondaries pinkish brown, with the same coloured line extending from the apex to the inner margin close to the anal angle. Underside much paler than above, and the black lines not edged with yellow. Head, thorax, and abdomen pinkish brown ; antennee brown; legs darker brown. Expanse 1? inch. Hab, East Africa; Zanzibar. Magila (Craven). Mus. Druce. EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES. Puate XXXVII. Fig. 1. Attacus albidus, sp.n., 3, p. 409. Puate XXXVITI. 1. Bunea pygela, sp.u., d, p. 409. 2. Antherea dolabella, sp.n., ¢, p. 409. 3. Chrysopoloma rosea, sp. n., p. 410. 4. citrina, sp.n., p. 410. 12. First Report on Additions to the Batrachian Collection in the Natural-History Museum. By G. A. Bov- LENGER. [Received June 28, 1886.] (Plate XX XIX.) The following is a list of all the species of Batrachians added to the National Collection since the publication of the last edition of the Catalogue (1882). To such names as are not mentioned in that work, reference to the original description is appended ; an asterisk iudicates that the type specimen is in the collection. The list is followed by the descriptions of a few new species. ECAUDATA. *)]. Ceratobatrachus guentheri, Blgr. P.Z.8. 1884, p. 212.— Solomon Islands (Guppy). *2. Rana bufoniforms, Blgr. |. c. p. 210.—Solomons (Guppy). *3. Rana sternosignata, Murray, Ann. N. H. (5) 1885, xvi. p- 120. -Sind (Murray). *4. Rana guppyi, Bigy. 1. c. p. 211—Solomons (Guppy). *5. Rana opisthodon, Blgr. 1. c. p. 211.—Solomons (Guppy). 6. Rana septentrionalis, Baird,—Canada (Lataste). 412 MR. G. A. BOULENGER ON BATRACHIANS [June 29, *7, Rana forreri, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1883, xi. p. 343.— Presidio, W. Mexico ( Furrer). *8. Rana macrocnemis, Blgr. P. Z.S. 1885, p. 22.—Brusa (v. Maltzan). 9. Rana iberica, Blgr.—Serra de Gerez, Portugal (Gadow). 10. Rana latastii, Blgr.—Various localities in North Italy (Camerano and de Betta). *11. Rana martensi, Blgr., infra.— Yedo (v. Martens). *12. Rana pustulosa, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1883, xi. p. 343.— Ventanas, W. Mexico (Forrer). 13. Rana nicobariensis, Stol.—Nias (Sandemann). *14, Rana masonii, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1884, xiii. p. 397.— Batavia (Mason). *15. Rana macropus, Blgr., infra.—Loo Choo Islands ( Carpenter). 16. Rana ulcerosa, Bttg.—Nossi Bé (Senckenberg Mus.). 17. Rana granulata, Bttg.—Nosi Bé (Senckenberg Mus.). 18. Rana buergeri, Schleg—Japan (Anderson). 19. Rhacophorus dispar, Bttg.—Nossi Bé (Senckenberg Mus.). *20. Rhacophorus lateralis, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1883, xii. p- 162.—Malabar (Beddome). *21. Ivalus asper, Blgr., infra —Larut, Perak (Wray). *22. Cornufer guppyi, Bigr. P. Z.S. 1884, p. 211.—Solomons (Guppy). *23. Cornufer solomonis, Blgr. 1. ce. p. 212.—Solomons (Guppy). *24. Rappia burtonii, Blgr. Aun. N. H. (5) 1883, xii. p. 163.— Gold Coast (Burton and Cameron). 25. Nyctivalus margaritifer, Blzr. Aun. N. H. (5) 1882, x. p- 35.—Willis Mountains, Java (v. Huegel). *26. Prostherapis femoralis, Blgr. P.Z.S. 1883, p. 635.— Yurimaguas (/Zahnel). 27. Mantella ebenaui, Bttg.—Nossi Bé (Senckenberg Mus.). *28. Dendrobates reticulatus, Blgr. 1. c. p. 635.—Yurimaguas (Hahnel). *29. Dendrobates fantasticus, Blgr. 1. c. p. 636.—Yurimaguas (Hahnel). *30. Dendrobates hahnelii, Blgr. 1. c. p. 636.—Yurimaguas (Hahnel). *31. Hypopachus oxyrrhinus, Blgr. Aun. N. H. (5) 1883, xii. p- 344.— Presidio (Forrer). *32. Microhyla fissipes, Blgr. Aun. N. H. (5) 1884, xiii. p- 397.—Taiwanfoo, Formosa. 33. Rhombophryne testudo, Bttg.— Nossi Bé (Senckenberg Mus.). 34. Cophyla phytiodactyla, Bttg.—Nossi Bé (Senckenberg Mus.). 35. Pseudis mantidactyla, Cope.—Rio Grande do Sul (v. Ihering). Montevideo (Paris Mus.). R. de la Plata (Gairdner). *36. Phyllobates trilineatus, Blgr. P. Z. S. 1883, p. 636.—Yuri- maguas (Hahnel). 37. Hylodes brocchii, Blgr. in Brocchi, Miss. Se. Mex., Batr. p- 60.—Vera Paz (Salvin). 38. Hylodes augusti, Brocchi.—Ventanas (Forrer). 1886.] *39. *40. 41. 42. *43, 44. *45: *46, *47. *60. *61. 62. *63. IN THE NATURAL-HISTORY MUSEUM. 413 Hylodes vertebralis, Blgr., infra.—Intac, Ecuador (Buckley). Paludicola gracilis, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1883, xi. p. 17.— Rio Grande do Sul (v. Ihering). Uruguay. Paludicola falcipes, Hens.—R. Grande do Sul (v. Ihering). Paludicola olfersii, Martens, Nomencl. Rept. Mus. Berol. p- 40.—Brazil (Berlin Museum). Leptodactylus discodactylus, Blgr. P. Z. S. 1883, p. 637.— Yurimaguas (Hahnel). Leptodactylus gracilis, D. & B.—Rio Grande do Sul (v. Ihering). Leptodactylus rhodomystaz, Blgr. |. c. p.637.—Yurimaguas (Hahnel). Leptodactylus diptyx, Bttg. Zeitschr. f. Naturw. 1885, lviii. p. 244.—Paraguay. Limnodynastes olivaceus, De Vis, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. W. 1884, ix. p. 66.—Queensland (Ling Roth). . Hupemphix nattereri, Stdchr.— Paraguay. - Bufo mexicanus, Brocchi.—Ciudad (Forrer). . Bufo andersonii, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1883, xii. p. 163.— Ajmere and Muscat (Blanford). Tatta, Sind. - Bufo formosus, Blgr. P. Z.S. 1883, p. 140.—Yokohama (‘ Challenger ’). . Bufo punctatus, B. & G.—lLa Paz, Cal. (Smithson. Inst.). . Hyla nasica, Cope.—Rio Grande do Sul (v. Ihering). Soriano, Uruguay (Havers). Paraguay. » Hyla glandulosa, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) xii. 1883, p. 164.— Guatemala (Godman). » Hyla macrops, Blgr. 1. c. p. 164.—Treasury Island, Solo- mons (Guppy). . Hyla thesaurensis, Ptrs.—Treasury Island (Guppy). . Ayla stoufferi, Cope.—Guatemala (Godman). . Pternohyla fodiens, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1882, x. p. 326.— Presidio (Horrer). . Phyllomedusa iheringii, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1885, xvi. p- 88.—Rio Grande do Sul (v. Ihering). Phyllomedusa perlata, Blgr. P. Z. 8. 1883, p. 638.—Yurima- guas (Hahnel). Triprion spatulatus, Gthr. Aun. N. H. (5) 1882, x. p- 279.—Presidio (Forrer). Scaphiopus couchii, Baird.—Presidio (Forrer). Megalophrys longipes, Blgr. P. Z.S. 1885, p. 850.-—Perak (Wray). CauDATA. *1. Hynobius lichenatus, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1883, xii. p- 165.—Awomori, Japan (Lewis). *2. Geomolge fischeri, Blgr., infra.—Manchuria (Fischer). 3. Plethodon croceater, Cope.—San Diego, Cal. (Forrer). *4,. Spelerpes peruvianus, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1883, xii. p. 165. —Moyobamba, Peru (Rof). 414 MR. G. A. BOULENGER ON BATRACHIANS _ [June 29, Apopa. *1. Epicrionops bicolor, Blgr. Aun. N. H. (5) 1883, xi. p. 202.— Intac, Ecuador (Buckley). *2. Cecilia buckleyi, Blgr. Aun. N. H. (5) 1884, xii. p. 398.— Intae (Buckley). 3. Dermophis thomensis, Bocage.—S. Thomé (Berlin Mus.). *4, Oryptopsophis multiplicatus, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1883, xi. p- 166.—Seychelles (Giinther). 5. Gymnopis unicolor, A. Dum.—Cayenne (Bavay). *6. Scolecomorphus kirkii, Blgr. Ann. N. H. (5) 1883, xi. p. 48.—Near Lake Tanganyika (Kirk). 7. Chthonerpeton indistinctum, R. & L.—Porto Alegre (Berlin Mus.). RANA MARTENSI, Sp. 0. Allied to R. temporaria. Vomerine teeth in two rather oblique oval groups, extending posteriorly beyond the line of the choane. Head about as long as broad, very similar to that of R. agilis ; nostril equally distant from the eye and the end of the snout; iuterorbital space narrower than the upper eyelids; tympanum rather large, its diameter equalling about two thirds that of the eye, from which it is separated by a space equal to about half its diameter. The first finger extends beyond the second. The tibio- tarsal articulation reaches the eye or the nostril; tibia shorter than the fore limb. Inner metatarsal tubercle rather strong, blunt, oval ; outer tubercle absent, or scarcely marked ; subarticular tubercles of fingers and toes moderate ; toes two-thirds webbed. Skin smooth ; lateral fold rather narrow, moderately prominent. Coloration very similar to that of R. agilis, save that the whitish streak bordering the temporal spot inferiorly does not extend forwards beyond the eye. Male with internal vocal sacs. Yedo; several specimens (4410, 4411) in the Berlin Museum, one of which was obtained for the British Museum. Collected by Dr. E. von Martens (cf. Preuss. Exped. n. Ost-Asien, Zool. i. p-, Lb). RANA MACROPUS. Txalus japonicus, Hallow. Proc. Ac. Philad. 1860, p. 501. Vomerine teeth in two rather indistinct oblique series between the choanee, widely separated in the middle. Snout obtuse, as long as the diameter of the orbit; nostril nearer the end of the snout than the eye; canthus rostralis well marked, curved; loreal region con- cave ; eye large ; interorbital space narrower than the upper eyelid ; tympanum very distinct, measuring not quite half the diameter of the eye. Fingers moderate, slightly depressed, first shorter than second; toes moderate, three-fourths webbed; tips of fingers and toes dilated into well-developed disks, which are much smaller than the tympanum ; subarticular tubercles moderate ; a single, oval, inner metatarsal tubercle ; no tarsal fold. When the fore limb is stretched 1886.] IN THE NATURAL-HISTORY MUSEUM. 415 forwards, the femoro-tibial articulation reaches the shoulder and the tibio-tarsal far beyond the end of the snout; tibia as long as the fore limb. Upper surfaces with small warts intermixed with elon- gate fold-like ones, which form an )(-shaped figure on the scapular region; a strong fold from eye to shoulder. Dark brown above, with darker marblings and regular cross bars on the limbs ; lips with a series of dark brown spots ; lower surfaces white. From snout to vent 34 millim. A single (half-grown?) specimen was obtained at Oho Sima, Loo Choo Islands, and presented to the Museum by Lieut. Alfred Carpenter, R.N., of H.ML.S. ‘ Magpie.’ IXALus ASPER, sp.n. (Plate XXXIX. fig. 1.) Snout rounded, as long as the diameter of the orbit; canthus rostralis very feebly marked; loreal region concave; nostril nearer the tip of the snout than the eye; interorbital space broader than the upper eyelid; tympanum very distinct, nearly as large as the eye. Fingers free, toes three-fourths webbed; disks well deve- loped; subarticular tubercles weak ; a small inner metatarsal tubercle. The tibio-tarsal articulation reaches nearly the tip of the snout. Upper parts rough with small conical warts ; belly granular, throat perfectly smooth. Blackish above and below; the warts of the upper surfaces appearing as white dots; belly marbled with white; flanks, lower surface of limbs, and hinder side of thighs with irregular white network. Male without vocal sac. From snout to vent 35 millim. Two specimens, male and female, presented by L. Wray, Esq. ; caught breeding in the water on Hill Garden, Larut, Perak, at an altitude of 3300 feet. HYLODES VERTEBRALIS, Sp. 0. Tongue oval, entire. Vomerine teeth in two oblique groups con- siderably behind the choanze. Snout rounded or subacuminate, as long as the greatest orbital diameter; canthus rostralis distinct ; nostril nearer the tip of the snout than the eye; fronto-parietals a little concave, their edges slightly prominent, their width equalling once and one third that of the upper eyelid; tympanum distinct, two fifths the diameter of the eye. Fingers moderate, first shorter than second ; toes moderate, quite free, fringed; disks quite as large as the tympanum ; subarticular tubercles moderate; two metatarsal tubercles. The tibio-tarsal articulation reaches the eye. Back smooth, sides with small warts; belly granular. Blackish brown above; one specimen with a whitish vertebral band; lower surfaces yellow, brown-speckled ; groin and sides of thighs with dark-brown network. From snout to vent 38 millim. Two female specimens, from Intac, Ecuador; collected by Mr. Buckley. Distinguished from H. buckleyi by a less stout habit, larger digital expansions, and narrower fronto-parietals. 416 BATRACHIANS IN THE NATURAL-HISTORY MUSEUM. [June 29, GEOMOLGE, g. n. Tongue large, subcircular, free on the sides. Palatine teeth in two arched, slightly angular series, separated by a narrow interspace. Toes five. Tail cylindrical at the base, compressed at the end. Intermediate between Onychodactylus and Ranidens in the pala- tine dentition ; distinguished, besides, from the former by the absence of claws, from the latter by the shape of the tail, which indicates a land animal. GEOMOLGE FISCHERI, sp.n. (Plate XXXIX. fig. 2.) Physiognomy that of Onychodactylus japonicus. Head small, longer than broad, broader than the neck; snout rounded ; eyes large, prominent ; no labial lobes. Body cylindrical, four and a half or five times the length of the head. Limbs in every respect similar to those of Onychodactylus japonicus, save the absence of claws; the male likewise with tibio-tarsal dilatation. Tail longer than head and body, cylindrical in its anterior half, becoming gradually compressed and keeled towards the end, which is obtusely pointed. Anal opening subcruciform, as in Onychodactylus. Skin smooth ; fourteen or fifteen costal grooves; paratoids and gular fold as in Onychodactylus. Brown above, with blackish variegations, most crowded on the sides, which also bear some whitish spots; lower surfaces brownish white. 3. & millim. millim Rtae Vert fan eet ssh or ad OS —' (Bramranonttouventelse ob chao bcd 70 80 Fleadreey Sah eroe ee ain. untae 14 Width vat Gear ie tates 52st. abe. wee 94 10 ore limb: ii peed. eek ae arele 20 Elin glim bette yas oe emcee san 22 22 AD a ee ea OY © Re Se eT —! Two specimens from Chaborowska, on the River Ussuri, Man- churia, collected by Hr. Darries, of Hamburg; they were obtained for the British Museum through Dr. J. G. Fischer, in honour of whom the new species is named. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXIX. Fig.1. Jaalus asper, upper view. la. ——,, lower view. 2. Geomolge fischeri, 3. 2a. ——, side view of head. 26, —— ——., open mouth. OO 1 Tail injured. 2 1886.) THE SECRETARY ON ADDITIONS TO THE MENAGERIE. 417 November 16, 1886. Prof. W. H. Flower, LL.D., F.R.S., President, in the Chair. The Secretary read the following reports on the additions made to the Society’s Menagerie during the months of June, July, August, September, and October, 1886:— The total number of registered additions to the Society’s Mena- gerie during the month of June was 226, of which 24 were by birth, 129 by presentation, 52 by purchase, and 21 were received on deposit. The total number of departures during the same period by death and removals was 120. The following are of special interest :— 1. A Glaucous Macaw (dra glauca), purchased of the Zoological Gardens, Antwerp, June 3rd. Of this near ally of Lear’s Macaw* we have not previously possessed a living specimen. The present species is of nearly the same size and general coloration as A. leari, but is at once distin- guishable by the glaucous blue of the body. 2. Two young Tcheli Monkeys (Macacus tcheliensis), presented by Dr. S. W. Bushell, C.M.Z.S., of Pekin, June 17th, obtained from the mountains near the “ Jung-ling,” or Eastern Mausoleum of the reigning dynasty of China, which is situated some 70 miles east of Pekin. The animals are covered with a thick fur, which fits them to endure the bitterly cold winter of this part of Northern China, where the thermometer frequently goes below zero of Fahrenheit. We are also indebted to Dr. Bushell for former examples of this Monkey. 3. A Bald Ouakari (Brachyurus calvus), 3 , purchased 12th June, of a dealer in Liverpool, new to the Society’s collection. Of the curious Monkeys of the genus Brachyurus, on which our late Prosector, Mr. Forbes, wrote an excellent paper in 1880 (see P. Z. 8. 1880, p. 627), we have already had specimens of B. melanocephalus and B. rubicundus, and we have now for the first time an example of the perhaps still more curious B. calvus, which, according to Castlenau, is confined to the forests on the north bank of the Amazons, between the rivers Putumayo and Japura. The registered additions to the Society’s Menagerie during the month of July were 166 in number ; of these 82 were acquired by presentation, 44 by purchase, 33 by birth, and 6 were received on deposit. One young Pheasant, received during the month, was bred from some eggs laid in the Society’s Gardens and sent into the country to be hatched. The total number of departures during the same period by death and removals was 105. Among the additions may be specially noticed two rare American Parrots—a Lear’s Macaw (Ara leari) and a Lineolated Parrakeet (Bolborhynchus lineolatus), acquired by purchase. 1 See P. Z. 8. 1879, p. 551 Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XXVIII. 28 418 DR. LUTKEN ON CHIROPODOMYs PENICILLATUS. [ Nov. 16 The total number of registered additions to the Society’s Mena- gerie during the month of August was 98; of these 50 were acquired by presentation, 14 by purchase, 15 by birth, 6 were received on deposit, and 5 in exchange. Eight Elliot’s Pheasants, received during the month, were bred from some eggs laid in the Society’s Gardens and sent into the country to be hatched. The total number of departures during the same period by death and removals was 104. The total number of registered additions to the Society’s Mena- ' gerie during the month of September was 80; of these 42 were acquired by presentation, 4 by purchase, 2 by exchange, 19 were bred in the Gardens, and 13 were received on deposit. The total number of departures during the same period by death and removals was 84. The following are of special interest :— A Spot-ringed Snake (Liophis pecilogyrus) from Brazil, presented by Edgell Hunt, Esq., September 9th, new to the collection. Two Elegant Galidias (Galidia elegans) from Madagascar, pre- sented by Burt C. Miiller, Esq., September 16th. The total number of registered additions to the Society’s Mena- gerie during the month of October was 77, of which 11 were by birth, 45 by presentation, 5 by purchase, 6 by exchange, and 10 were received on deposit. The total number of departures during the same period by death and removals was 112. An extract was read from a letter addressed to the President by Dr. Emin Bey, dated Wadilai, Eastern Equatorial Africa, Jan. Ist, 1886. After speaking of the skull of a Chimpanzee and of some skins and skeletons of other Mammals and Birds obtained in Monbottu, which he proposed to send to the Society, Dr. Emin Bey continued as follows :-— “It may be interesting for you to hear that an anthropoid Ape exists in Uganda and Unyoro. I cannot say whether it is identical with the Monbottu Chimpanzee or not. While staying in these countries the negroes told me much about this animal, and in a MS. map which I forwarded to Dr. Petermann I fixed its northern limit at 2° N. lat. Now I hear that this Ape is frequent in the thick forests near Ugoma, and I hasten to beg my friend King Kabrega for some specimens.” A letter was read addressed to the Secretary by Dr. Chr. Liitken, of Copenhagen, F.M.Z.S. Referring to Mr. O. Thomas’s statement (P. Z.S. 1886, p. 78) that Chiropodomys penicillatus was a rare animal in Museums and that its distribution was not certainly known, Dr. Liitken announced 1886.] PROF. FLOWER ON A SPECIMEN OF ARMADILLO. 419 that the Museum of Copenhagen had received in 1878 a specimen of this mammal in spirit from Buitenzorg, Java, forwarded by the late Mr. Kobke, Danish Consul at Batavia, and that he has been informed by Mr. H. Winge that several specimens of it from the same locality were in the Museo Civico of Genoa. A letter was read from Dr. A. B. Meyer, C.M.Z.S., communi- cating the following remarks by Mr. K. G. Henke on a specimen of a hybrid Grouse, in the Dresden Museum, referred to by Dr. Collett in a previous communication :— “Dr. Collett has declared (supra, p. 225, note) a hybrid which I have figured, ‘ Zeitschrift fiir die gesammte Ornithologie,’ 1885, p. 47, pl. iii., ‘to be clearly only a partial albino of Tetrao tetrix fem.,’ but without giving his reasons for this opinion. “TJ will not discuss the question now, whether Tetrao tetriv or Lagopus albus was the father of this specimen, as it is treated and refigured, not as a single example of its kind, but together with others, similar and varying, in Dr. Meyer’s forthcoming work ‘ Unser Auer-,Birk- und Rackelwild,’ which will be illustrated by 15 coloured folio plates. I only wish to remark here, that Dr. Collett’s view of the said specimen does not appear to be correct, as supposing it really were a partial albino, a strong partial melanism would still be present, to account for the many black patches and markings, of which there is no trace in the female T'etrao tetrix —a coincidence which no one will admit, and which never has been observed. Besides, the albino of Tetrao tetriz, fem., has no such regular markings as the specimen in question. ‘‘T therefore cannot agree with Dr. Collett, but am convinced that he is mistaken in declaring the Dresden specimen to be a partial albino.” Prof. Flower exhibited a specimen of an Armadillo, now belonging to the Museum of the Scarborough Philosophical Society, but the origin of which unfortunately appeared to be unknown. It was evi- dently a member of the genus Tatusia, and closely allied to the common T. novemcincta or T. peba, from which it differed mainly in having the whole of the carapace covered with a thick coating of light brown, fine, but rather stiff hair, about an inch and a half in length. The same kind of hair grew on the cheeks, the proximal portion of the limbs, and (though less abundantly and shorter) on the whole under surface of the body. The cephalic shield, the snout, the hands and feet, and the tail (except quite at the base) were bare. The covering of the hair of the back and sides was so thick as completely to conceal the carapace, except near the antero-inferior margin of the scapular region; but the usual scutes and bands were seen to be present on separating the hair, which only grew from the intervals between them. The length of the head was 33, of the body 83, and of the tail 83 inches. Unfortunately nearly the whole of the skull had been removed, but some of the anterior teeth which remained in the jaws were of very small size and appeared to indicate that the animal was young. 28* 420 MR. BLANFORD ON PARADOXURUS JERDONI. [Nov. 16, There was little doubt of the specific identity of the specimen with that belonging to the Vienna Museum, described by Fitzinger under the name of Cryptophractus pilosus’, and also with two specimens from Guyaquil in the Lima Museum, described and figured by Burmeister as Praopus hirsutus”*, if, as was probably the case, the smaller size of the present specimen could be attributed to its not being full-grown. So far as Prof. Flower knew, these were the only published indications of the existence of this somewhat remarkable Species, or at all events very distinct variety, of Armadillo, of which no specimen existed in our National collection. Prof. Bell exhibited and made remarks upon an object (apparently of the nature of an amulet) supposed to have been made from some portion of the skin of a mammal. It had been obtained from the natives at Moreton Bay, and sent to Kew, being supposed to be of vegetable origin. _ Mr. Seebohm exhibited a skin of the Lesser White-fronted Goose, Anser albifrons minutus (Anser erythropus, Linn. Syst. Nat. i. p- 197), which had been shot on the 16th of September last near Holy Island, on the coast of Northumberland, by Mr. Alfred Crawhall Chapman, of Sunderland. It was the first recorded example of the small form of the White-fronted Goose which had been obtained on the coasts of our islands, and it was especially interesting as being a young bird in first plumage. It proved to be a female on dissection, and bore a remarkable resemblance to the young in first plumage of the dark-bellied or typical form of the Brent Goose, Anser brenta; but its much greater expanse of wing (4 feet) and its large legs and feet, which were yellow-ochre in colour when first shot, precluded the possibility of confounding it with that species. Its very small bill, quite as small as that of the Brent Goose, showed it to be a small example of the small form of the White-fronted Goose, but in so young a bird the white forehead had not yet appeared. Mr. W. T. Blanford exhibited a stuffed skin, the first perfect specimen he had seen, of Paradowurus jerdoni, described and figured in the Society’s Proceedings for 1885 (pp. 613, 802, pl. xlix.). For ‘this specimen, which was killed at Kateri (Kartary) on the Nilgiri hills, Mr. Blanford was indebted to Mr. G. F.. Hampson, of Dun- sandle, Ootacamund, who had identified the species from the descrip- tion, and had confirmed the suggestion already made by Mr. Blanford, l.c. p. 618, that this species inhabits the Nilgiri hills as well as the Animalé range. The following papers were read :— 1 Tageblatt, Nr. 32; Versamml. deutsch. Naturf. u. Aerzte, 1856, Nr. 6, 8. 123. I_am only acquainted with this reference through Fitzinger’s subsequent paper, ‘Die natiirliche Familie der Giirtelthiere (Dasypoder),” in Sitz. der k. Akad. der Wissensch., Band lxiv, 1 Abth. (1871). ® Abhandl. naturf. Gesell. Halle, B. vi. p. 147 (1861), ee fy CHG> ee ’ eee ey 2 : ANG res P25 1886. Bae PZ.S.1886.Pl.XLI. W Purkuss ith : Hanhart -imp. NEW INDIAN LEPIDOPTERA . 1886.] COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW = 421 1. On the Lepidoptera of Mhow, in Central India, By Colonel C. Swinnoz, F.L.S., F.Z.S. [Received June 3, 1886.] (Plates XL. & XLL.) I collected Lepidoptera at Mhow from September 1881 until August 1882, with the assistance of a trained native, whose captures were daily recorded. My military duties kept me well employed, and as I also collected birds and took notes on them during the whole of this period, the results of which have since appeared in ‘ The Ibis,’ I had not much time to give to the study of Lepidoptera ; and therefore this paper only professes to contain a list of Lepidoptera taken in Mhow and its immediate neighbourhood for a year, with the addition of a few taken by my subordinates at the sub-stations of Neemuch and Assirghur. I am indebted to Lord Walsingham for working out the specimens of Tortricidee and Tineina. Types of all the new species mentioned in this paper have been presented by me, as usual, to the British Museum. I. RHOPALOCERA. NYMPHALID&. EuPL@iIn&. 1, TIRUMALA LIMNIACE. Pap. limniace, Cramer, Pap. Exot. i. pl. 59. f. D, E (1775). Common from September to July. 2. SALATURA GENUTIA. Pap. genutia, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iii. pl. 206. f. C, D (1779). Common from September to July. 3. LimNas CHRYSIPPUS. Pap. chrysippus, Linn. Syst. Nat. p. 471 (1758). Common everywhere from September to Marci, 4, LIMNAS ALCIPPOIDES. Limnas alcippoides, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1883, p. 238, pl. 31.f. 1. I took one example of this variety at Mhow in June 1882, and one at Panghur near Neemuch in November 1884. 5. CRASTIA CORE. Pap. core, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iii. pl. 266. f. E, F (1780). March and June. Very plentiful in March ; only one example taken in June, 422 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16, SATYRINE. 6. MELANITIS LEDA. Pap. leda, Linn. Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 773 (1767). June, July ; September and October. 7, MELANITIS ISMENE. Pap. ismene, Cramer, Pap. Exot. i. pl. 26. f. A, B (1775). Common during the cold weather from the latter end of October to the beginning of March. I took, however, one example in June 1882. 8. CALYSISME PERSEUS. Pap. perseus, Fabr. Syst. Ent. p. 488 (1775). October and April. Only one example taken in the latter month ; it was fairly common in October 1881. 9. CALYSISME DRUSIA. Pap. drusia, Cramer, Pap. Exot. i. pl. 84. f. C, D (1779). I found one example of this variety of C. mineus, Linn., in a col- lection of Butterflies taken at Mhow in 1881 by Major Yerbury, R.A. It is smaller and paler than the types in the British Museum, but is otherwise identical. Cramer’s type came from China, but I have typical examples in my collection from the Kangra valley and from Darjiling. 10. YrprHiIMA INICA. Ypthima inica, Hewitson, Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 3, vol. ii. p. 285 (1865). Mhow, December ; Depalpore, November. This is said to be an African insect, but the examples taken as above are identical with Hewitson’s type. 11. YpTHIMA ALKIBIE, 0. sp. Upperside dark brown, with the ocelli as in Y. inica, but the general coloration is darker and brighter. Underside pale whitish brown, thickly covered with short delicate pale reddish-brown strigz, which are uniformly disposed, but paler on the costa and margins of the fore wings in most specimens, and both wings with a marginal brown line and submarginal brown, slightly sinuated fascia ; the ocelli as in Y. inica, but one or other of the three minute ocelli on the hind wings is often more or less obsolete. Hind wings with three pale reddish-brown speckled zigzag bands, and can easily be distin- guished from Y. inica because the inner discal band curves outwardly, whereas in the type of Y inica this band curves inwards. Expanse of wings 1;,—1,; inch. Mhow, November to March, very plentiful ; Depalpore, January and February. 1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 423 12. YeTHIMA MAHRATTA, Ypthima mahratta, Moore, Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, vol. liii. pt. 2 no. i. p. 1 (1884). s Mhow, July and November; Neemuch, September to November. 13. YPTHIMA ALEMOLA. Ypthima alemola, Swinhoe, P. Z. 8S. 1885, p. 127. April to July. 14. YprHIMA DEDALEA, 0. sp. Allied to Y. ariaspa, Moore. Upperside dark brown, with the ocelli as in Y. cnica, the one on the hind wing being minute, but with a clear ring of yellow round it. Underside pale grey, marginal lines brown ; both wings covered with short brown strigze, uniformly disposed, with a submarginal whitish fascia, bordered on the outer side by an incomplete brown, slightly zigzag line ; pupils of the ocelli pale blue, metallic; fore wing with one subapical large ocellus, bi-pupilled: hind wing with three light distinct ocelli—one large (slightly smaller than the one on the fore wing), subapical, placed well inside the wing, almost in the disk, and with its upper part overlapping the second subcostal nervule; one a little smaller, in the interspace between the second and third median nervules ; and a third, the smallest, is duplex at the anal angle ; these ocelli are very curious: commencing with the largest one near the apex of the fore wings, they are gradually smaller, and the three first are in a perfectly straight line, the minute duplex one at the anal angle being at an obtuse angle inwards; all the ocelli have broad uniform yellow rings with brown borders, and the duplicate ocellus at the anal angle is distinctly divided with yellow, but not cut between by the brown ring, which borders the outer yellow only, making it a complete duplex ocellus. Expanse of wings 152; inch. Mhow, June 1882. 15. YPTHIMA RARA. Ypthima rara, Butler, P. Z. 8. 1883, p. 145, pl. xxiv. f. 1, May to November, very plentiful; Neemuch, November. 16. YpTHIMA COMPLEXIVA, n. sp. (Plate XL. fig. 2, 9.) Shape, colour, and markings above identical with Y. rara. The underside is, however, quite different, colour pale greyish, covered with dark chocolate-brown strigee, and with an indistinct incomplete submarginal zigzag line, more distinct in parts of the hind wings: fore wings with a large subapical ocellus, bi-pupilled, with a deep yellow ring, bordered with brown, pupils bright blue metallic, and with another smaller blind ocellus just below it, also with a yellow ring round it: hind wings with three black, very minute spots where the ocelli should be placed, as in Y. znica. Expanse of wings 1,5, inch. Depalpore, November. 424 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16, 17. LETHE NEELGHERRIENSIS. Satyrus (Cyllo) neelgherriensis, Guérin, Delessert’s Voy. dans V’Inde, pt. ii, p. 74, pl. 21. f. 1, 1 @ (1843). March, April, and May. ACRAIN&. 18. TELCHINIA VIOLZ. Pap. viole, Fabr. Syst. Ent. p. 460 (1775). Mhow, September (Yerdury). NYMPHALIN&. 19. ATELLA PHALANTA. Pap. phalanta, Drury, Ill. Ex. Ent. i. pl. 21. f. 1, 2 (1773). Common, September to July. 20. PyRAMEIS CARDUI. Pap. cardui, Linn. Faun. Suec. p. 276 (1761). Common from September to December. 21. JUNONIA LEMONIAS. Pap. lemonias, Linn. Mus. Ulr. p. 277 (1764). Common from September to July. 22. JUNONIA HIERTE. Pap. hierte, Fabr. Ent. Syst. Suppl. p. 424 (1798). Common from September to J uly. 23. JUNONIA ORYTHIA. Pap. orythia, Linn. Mus. Ulr. p. 278 (1764). Common from September to July. 24, JUNONIA ASTERIE. Pap. asterie, Linn. Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 769 (1767). Common from September to November. 25. JUNONIA ALMANA, Pap. almana, Linn. Mus. Ulr. p. 272 (1764). October, January, and March. 26. HypaANIS POLINICE. Pap. polinice, Cram. Pap. Exot. iv. pl. 375. f. G, H (1782). October to December. 27. Hypanis SIMPLEX. Hypanis simplex, Butler, P. Z. S. 1883, p. 146, pl. 24. f. 8. Mhow, June, July, and October ; Depalpore, January ; Assir- ghur, September, 1886.] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 425 28. HypoLIMNAs BOLINA. Pap. bolina, Linn. Mus. Ulr. p. 295 (1764). Mhow, July. Neemuch, November; Assirghur, October. 29. HypoLIMNAs AVIA. Pap. avia, Fab. Ent. Syst. iii. 1, p. 111 (1793). Mhow, September and October; Neemuch, September to Novem- ber, in great plenty. This is merely the large form of the preceding. 30. HyPoLIMNAS MISIPPUS. Pap. misippus, Linn. Mus. Ulr. p. 264 (1764). September to February. The females all mimic L. chrysippus. 31. NEPTIS EURYMENE. Neptis eurymene, Butler, P. Z. S. 1883, p. 145, pl. 24. f. 5. February to April. 32. SYMPHZEDRA NAIS. Pap. nais, Forst. Nov. Spec. Ins. p. 73 (1771). Pap. thyelia, Fabr. Ent. Syst. iii. 1, p. 142 (1793). Common from October to July. 33. CHARAXES FABIUS. Pap. fabius, Fabr. Spec. Ins. ii. p. 12 (1781). June and October. 34, CHARAXES AGRARIUS, n. sp. (Plate XL. fig. 3, ¢.) Allied to C. athamus, Drury, and C. hamasta, Moore. Smaller than either; nearest to the latter, but differs in having both wings with the discal transverse band one-fourth narrower in width, the subapical spot on the fore wing is small, whereas in C. hamasta this spot is a lengthened square, and in the male there are two smaller upper apical spots. On the hind wing the submarginal white spots are prominent, but there is no outer marginal row of ochreous lunules. Expanse of wings 2 ;%,—2,6, inches. Mhow, October ; Assirghur, October. LyYcxZ NIDA, 35. PoOLYOMMATUS BZETICUS. Pap. beticus, Linn, Syst. Nat. ii. p. 789 (1766). September to February. 36. CATOCHRYSOPS STRABO. Hesperia strabo, Fabr. Ent. Syst. iii. 1, p. 287 (1793). Lyc. kandarpa, Horsf. Cat. Lep. E. I. C. vol. i. p. 82 (1829). Common from September to July, 426 COU. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16, 37. CATOCHRYSOPS CNEJUS. Hesperia cnejus, Faby. Ent. Syst. v. Suppl. p. 430 (1798). July to October. 38. CATOCHRYSOPS PATALA. Lycena pataia, Kollar, Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 418 (1848). October to February. Very plentiful in October. 39. CATOCHRYSOPS HAPALINA. Catochrysops hapalina, Butler, P. Z. S. 1883, p. 148, pl. 24. f> 2,3: December and January. 40. CarocHRYSOPS ELLA. Catochrysops ella, Butler, P. Z. S. 1881, p. 606. September to November. 41. JAMIDEs BOCHUS. Pap. bochus, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iv. pl. 391. f. C, D (1782). September to November. 42. ZizERA MAHA. Lycena maha, Kollar, Hig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 422 (1848). Mhow, April, May, and June; Manpore, June. 43. ZIZERA CHANDALA. Polyommatus chandala, Moore, P. Z.S. 1865, p. 504, pl. 31. Eh: November, February, April, and May. Mr. Moore, in P. Z. S. 1882, p. 245, has put this 'species as a synonym to the preceding one. This I think isamistake. He had, if I recollect rightly, only two examples, both males, in his collection. They were quite common at Mhow; and I found no difficulty in recognizing them, they are much paler blue than Z. maha. The females are the same colour as the males, instead of brown ‘like Z. maha, and the underside in both sexes has very faint spots onfthe hind wings, each spot having a whitish ring round it. 44, ZizERA KARSANDRA. Polyommatus karsandra, Moore, P. Z.S. 1865, p. 505, pl. 31, £7. October to May. This insect is very variable in colour; the type is brown. Irre- spective of sex, the colour varies from blue to dark brown. I have many examples from Quetta, Metazai, Sukkur, Karachi, the Punjaub, Central India, the Deccan, and also from Aden, of many shades of colour, quite impossible to separate. 1886. | LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 427 45. ZizERA DICRETA. Zizera dicreta, Butler, P. Z. 8. 1883, p. 150. October to May. 46. ZIzERA PYGMZA, Lycena pygmea, Snellen, Tijd. voor Ent. xix. pl. 7. f. 3 (1876). September to December. 47. ZizERA SANGRA. Polyommatus sangra, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1857, p. 772, pl. 41. f. 8. Lycena indica, Murray, Trans. Ent. Soc. 1874, p. 525. October to February. Varies much in size in different localities. I have four definite uniform sizes taken in four different parts of India ; some are slightly paler than others, but otherwise all are identical. The uniform manner in which almost all the different Indian species of Zizera are marked on the wings below is very curious. Z. pygmea has markings peculiar to itself, but all the others mentioned in this paper have the spots below arranged in almost exactly the same manner, Z. sangra differing from the others merely in the absence of the spot inside the cell. 48. NACADUBA ARDATES. Lycena ardates, Moore, P. Z.8. 1874, p. 574, pl. 67. f. 1. November. 49. HVERES PARRHASIUS. Hesperia parrhasius, Faby. Ent. Syst. iii. 1, p. 289 (1793). February and March. 50. CHILADES PUTLI. Lycena putli, Kollar, Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 422 (1848). September to December. 51. CHILADES VARUNANA. Polyommatus varunana, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1865, p. 772, pl. 41. 6. May, September, October, November, and December. 52. CHILADES LAIUS. Pap. laius, Cram. Pap. Exot. iv. pl. 319. f.D, E (1782). November and December. 53. TARUCUS PLINIUS. Hesperia plinius, Fabr. Ent. Syst. iii.1, p. 284 (1793). September to July. 54. TARUCUS NARA. Lycena nara, Kollar, Hiig. Kaschm. iv. 2, p. 421 (1848). September to July. 428 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16, 55. TARUCUS THEOPHRASTUS. Hesperia theophrastus, Fabr. Ent. Syst. iii. 1, p, 281 (1793). September to July. 56. AZANUS UBALDUS. Papilio ubaldus, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iv. pl. 390. f. L, M (1782). January, April, and May. 57. AZANUS ZENA. Lycena zena, Moore, P. Z.8. 1865, p. 505, pl. 31. f. 9. September, October, and November. 58. APHN.ZUS ELIMA. Aphneus elima, Moore, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xx. p. 51 (1877). March. 59. APHN2ZXUS ICTIS. Aphneus ictis, Hewitson, Ill. D. L. p. 61, pl. 25. f. 8, 9 (1865). November to July. 60. APHN&ZUS BRACTEATUS. Aphneus bracteatus, Butler, P. Z. 8. 1883, p. 147, pl. 24. f. 10, 11. October to June. 61. APHNZUS @STIVUS, n. sp. (Plate XL. fig. 1.) Upperside pale reddish grey, with the bands on the underside showing faintly through the wings; marginal line brown, fringe silvery white: hind wings with two brown spots on the anal angle on a slightly reddish ground. Underside pale yellowish cream- colour, bands pale reddish brown with metallic marks: fore wings with two short bands before the middle which do not go below the cell ; a median band broken in the middle, followed by a costal spot like a figure of 8, followed by two more larger spots, one touching the costa and the other below it like a figure of 8 broken off in the middle ; then a submarginal and a marginal band, marginal line dark brown : hind wing with an inner median and discal band, and with a submarginal and marginal band like those on the fore wings ; marginal line brown, and some brown marks on the abdominal margin. All the bands on both wings are margined with dark brown on both sides, and have a peculiar zigzag appearance in con- sequence of the zigzag formation of their borders. Expanse of wings 154; inch. Mhow, May. 62. VIRACHOLA ISOCRATES. Hesperia isocrates, Fabr. Ent. Syst. iii. 1, p. 266 (1793). February, April, and November. 1886.] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 429 63. BasPpA MELAMPUS. Pap. melampus, Cram. Pap. Exot. iv. pl. 362. f. G, H (1782). September to June. 64, NILASERA APELLA, n. sp. (Plate XL. fig. 4, 3.) Allied to N. amantes, Hewitson. Upperside of a brighter and paler blue, but similar to A. amantes in the deep costal band on the fore wings of the male, which is absent in the female, and in the far deeper costal band of the hind wings and marginal band of both wings. The underside is, however, quite different, the ground-colour being of a uniform pale brownish grey with an ochreous tinge, this tinge showing quite distinctly on the brown portions of the fore wings, the costal portion and much of the hind wing being silvery grey. Fore wings with one small spot in the cell near the base, and a larger one also within the cell, a little forward of its centre, the upper portions of both touching the sub- costal vein ; another spot, square and larger at the end of the cell, and a smaller one below this in the angle of the first median inter- space, and below this is a spot elongated into a band running along the interspace for more than half its length below the first median branch, and half filling up that portion of the interno-median inter- space; there is also a discal row of six confluent spots from the costa, commencing with a small one and getting gradually larger and ending on the first median branch at the end of the band; all the spots brown, surrounded with yellowish white, the white borders being clearest round the two spots in the cell and the two outside it. Hind wing with four or five brown spots near the base, a central whirl of spots of the same colour, disconnected, and irregular like a zigzag band, a discal whorl of similar spots but paler, and the space on each side filled in with other bands of spots so pale as to be only here and therevisible. Marginsof both wings brown, diffused inwardly; a black spot at the anal angle, and a white silvery streak on the margin running from this spot to the first median branch, and clouded with dark brown atoms. Tails black, tips white. Expanse of wings 234, inches. Mhow, March. 65. TAsJURIA JEHANA. Tyuria jehana, Moore, P. Z.S. 1883, p. 529, pl. 49. f. 7. September. PAPILIONIDG. PIERINE. 66. TeRIAS LETA. Terias leta, Boisduval, Sp. Gén. i. p. 174 (1836). September to July. The commonest Butterfly in Mhow. 430 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16, 67. TERIAS DRONA. Terias drona, Horsfield, Cat. Lep. E.I.C. p. 137, pl. 1. f. 13 (1829). September, October, and November. 68. TERIAS VENATA. Terias venata, Moore, Cat. Lep. E.I.C. i. p. 65, pl. 2. f. 2 (1857). June, July, September, and October. 69. TERIAS RUBELLA. Terias rubella, Wall. Trans. Ent. Soc. ser. 3, vol. iv. p. 323 (1867). October to April. In great numbers. .70. TeERIAS HECABE. Pap. hecabe, Linn. Mus. Ulr. p. 249 (1764). February, July, and September. 71.. TERIAS HECABEOIDES. Terias hecabeoides, Mén. Cat. Mus. Petr., Lép. i. p. 85, pl. 2. f. 2 (1855). September, October, and November. 72. TERIAS ZSIOPE. Terias esiope, Mén. Cat. Mus. Petr., Lép. i. p. 85, pl. 2. f. 3 (1855). October. 73. TERIAS EXCAVATA. Terias excavata, Moore, P. Z.S. 1882, p. 252. September to December. Very plentiful in December. 74. TERIAS PURREEA. Terias purreea,’Moore, P. Z.S. 1882, p. 252. November to May. 75. TERIAS ASPHODELUS. Terias asphodelus, Butler, P. Z. S. 1883, p. 151, pl. 24. f. 13. December to April. 76. TERIAS NARCISSUS. Terias narcissus, Butler, P. Z. 8. 1883, p. 151. December to February. 77. BELENOIS MESENTINA. Pap. mesentina, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iii. pl. 270. f. A, B (1782). Common all the year round. This is a very variable species ; some of the males are deep yellow 1886.] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 431 on the secondaries below, and many of. both sexes vary much in the depth of the markings above, they also vary much in size. I have a female from Neemuch with the apical portion entirely black, and both males and females identical with and not separable from a pair in my collection taken by Major Yerbury iz copuld at Haithalkim in Arabia, and identical with Walker’s type in the British Museum of B. lordaca from Damascus. Mr. Butler (P. Z. S. 1884, p. 492) says the males sent him by Major Yerbury from Huswah and Haithalkim are smaller than the Damascus type; but I have males both large and small from these localities, and a pair from the Punjaub quite as large as the Damascus insect, the male being a typical B. lordaca and the female only slightly paler in its marginal black borders. 78. HupHINA PHRYNE. Papilio phryne, Fabr. Syst. Ent. p. 473 (1775). September, October, and November. 79. HupHiIna ZEUXIPPE. Pap. zeuxippe, Cram. Pap. Exot. iv. pl. 362. f. E, F (1782). April, May, aud June. 80. HuPHINA CASSIDA. Pap. Danaus cassida, Fabr. Ent. Syst. Suppl. p. 427. n. 595, 596 (1798). November to May. 81. GANORIS RAPHE, Papilio rape, Linn. Faun. Suec. p. 270 (1761). I took a worn female of this species in a garden at Mhow on the 6th of June, 1882, which I have still in my collection ; it is out of place in this list, but as I took it there myself I record it; its chrysalis might have come from England with somebody’s baggage. 82. APPIAS LIBYTHEA. Pap. libythea, Fabr. Syst. Ent. p. 471 (1775). June. 83. APPIAS ARES. Appias ares, Swinhoe, P. Z. 8. 1885, p. 138. January. — 84. DELiAs EUCHARIS. Pap. eucharis, Drury, Ill. Exot. Ent. ii. pl. 10. f. 5, 6 (1773). Common from September to July. 85. NEPHERONIA GAEA. Nepheronia gaea, Felder, Reise Nov., Lep. ii. p. 130 (1865). February and April. 432 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE Nov. 16, 86. CATOPSILIA PYRANTHE« Pap. pyranthe, Linn. Mus. Ulr. p. 245 (1764). Common all the year round. 87. CATOPSILIA PHILIPPINA. Pap. philippina, Cram. Pap. Exot. iv. pl. 361. f. C, D (1782). September to April. 88. CATOPSILIA CROCALE. Pap. crocale, Cram. Pap. Exot. i. pl. 55. f. C, D (1779). July. 89. CATOPSILIA CATILLA. Pap. catilla, Cram. Pap. Exot. iil. pl. 229. f. D, E (1782). Common from September to April. 90. IxIAS MERIDIONALIS. Ivias meridionalis, Swinhoe, P. Z. 8. 1885, p. 140, pl. 9. f. 5, 2. May to August. 91. Ixras DEPALPURA. Ixias depalpura, Butler, P.Z.S. 1883, p. 153, pl. 24. f. 6, 7. Depalpore lakes, November, December, and January. 92. IxIAs KAUSALA. Ixias kausala, Moore, Aun. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 4, vol. xx. p- 49 (1877). Depalpore lakes, November, December, and January. Very plentiful. All the females taken were albinos; the type female in Mr. Moore’s collection is primrose-coloured, and I have a primrose female taken with a male (identical with Mr. Moore’s type) in the Western Jumna canal. 93. TERACOLUS PERNOTATUS. Teracolus pernotatus, Butler, P. Z.S. 1876, p. 159, pl. 7. f. 1. Mhow, September ; Neemuch, September. 94. TERACOLUS BIMBURA. Teracolus bimbura, Butler, P. Z. 8. 1876, p. 161, pl. 7. f. 3, 4. January. This Zeracolus (which was originally named from specimens taken at Bimbur in Cashmir) is the most widely spread of all the genus. I have it from many parts of India. PaPILIONINE. 95. OPHEIDES ERITHONIUS. Pap. erithonius, Cram. Pap. Exot. iii. pl. 232. f. A, wees Common from September to March. 1886.] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 433 96. LAERTIAS PAMMON. Pap. pammon, Linn. Mus. Ulr. p. 189 (1764). 2. Pap. polytes, Lion. Mus. Ulr. p. 186 (1764). Common from September to March. The females taken were all of M. diphilus form. 97. MENELAIDES DIPHILUS. Pap. diphilus, Esper, Ausl. Schmett. pl. 40 B. f. 1 (1785-98). Common from September to March. HESPERIDA, 98. PyRGUS GALBA. Hesperia galba, Fabr. Ent. Syst. ii. 1, p. 352 (1793). July, October, and December. 99. PLESIONEURA INDRANI. Plesioneura indrani, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1865, p. 789. September. 100. TeLicoTa AUGIAS. Pap. augias, Linn. Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 794 (1767). Common from September to July. 101. PapRAONA MSA. Pamphila mesa, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1865, p. 509, pl. 30. f. 9. February to May. 102. PARNARA BEVANI. Hesperia bevani, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1878, p. 688. July. 103. CHAPRA AGNA. Hesperia agna, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1865, p. 791. July. 104. CHAPRA MATHIAS. Hesperia mathias, Fabr. Ent. Syst. Suppl. p. 433 (1798). December to April. 105. SuasTus GREMIUS. Hesperia gremius, Fabr., Butler, Cat. Fabr. Lep. B. M. p. 271, plsankk7, 2. Hesperia divodasa, Moore, Cat. Lep. Mus. E.I. C. i. p. 255. Mhow, May, November, and December, scarce ; Depalpore, January, one taken ; Neemuch, September to November, common. 106. IsoTEINON NILGIRIANA. Isoteinon nilgiriana, Moore, P. Z.S. 1883, p. 533. March. Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XXIX. 29 434 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16, 107. TARACTOCERA SAGARA. Pamphila sagara, Moore, P. Z. S. 1865, p. 792. April to July. 108. IsmENE ALEXIS. Papilio alexis, Fabr. Syst. Ent. p. 533 (1775). July. 109. BADAMIA EXCLAMATIONIS. Pap. exclamationis, Fabr. Syst. Ent. p. 530 (1775). Q. Pap. ladon, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iii. pl. 284. f. C (1782). June and July. II. HETEROCERA. SPHINGID2. 1. CEPHONODES HYLAS. Sphinz hylas, Linn. Mantissa, i. p. 539 (1771). September and December. 2. MACROGLOSSA GYRANS. Macroglossa gyrans, Walker, Cat. Lep. Het. viii. 91 (1856). July, September, and November. Common in September and in great plenty in November. 3. MACROGLOSSA BELIS. Sphinz belis, Cram. Pap. Exot. i. p. 147, pl. 94. f. C (1779). June, September, and November. In great plenty in November. 4, LopHuRA HYAS. Lophura hyas, Walker, viii. 107 (1856). November. 5. CHHROCAMPA ALECTO. Sphine alecto, Linn. Mus. Lud. Ulr. p. 357 (1764). March and September. 6. CHROCAMPA THYELIA. Sphinz thyelia, Linn. Mus. Lud. Ulr. p. 360 (1764). Common from September to November. 7. CHZROCAMPA CELERIO. Sphinx celerio, Linn. Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 800 (1766). Common from September to December. 8. CH#&ROCAMPA OLDENLANDIZ. Sphinx oldenlandie, Fabr. Sp. Ins. ii. p. 148 (1781). July and September. 1886.] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 435 9. DEILEPHILA LIVORNICA. Sphinx livornica, Esper, Ausl. Schmett. ii. pp. 87, 196, pl. 8. f. 4 (1785). June. 10. DAPHNIS NERII. Sphinx nerii, Linn. Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 798 (1766). September, October, and November. 11. PotypericHus DENTATUS. Sphinx dentata, Cram. Pap. Exot. ii. p. 42, pl. 125. f. G (1779). October. 12. LeEvcOPHLEBIA BICOLOR. Leucophlebia bicolor, Butler, P. Z. S. 1875, p. 16, pleDerted. June and July. 13. BASIANA CERVINA. Basiana cervina, Walker, viii. 237 (1856). August (Forsayeth). 14. ACHERONTIA STYX. Acherontia styx, Westwood, Cab. Orient. Ent. p. 88, pl. 42. f. 3 (1847). September. 15. ACHERONTIA MORTA. Acherontia morta, Hiibner, Verz. bek. Schmett. p. 140 (1816). February and September. 16. PROTOPARCE ORIENTALIS. Protoparce orientalis, Butler, Tr. Z. S. 1877, vol. ix. part 10, p- 609. June, July, and September. 17. NEPHELE HESPERA. Sphinx hespera, Fabr. Syst. Ent. p. 546 (1775). Common from September to June. Very plentiful in November. Hawk-Moths were in extraordinary abundance in September 1881 in Mhow. A large thorny tree in my garden remained in full blossom for the greater part of that month, and I spent many evenings sitting under it watching these moths. About half an hour before sunset a few Cephonodes hylas would come, to be followed in a short time by Macroglossa belis and M. gyrans; then would fly by with a rush a single Nephele hespera. He would circle round and fly away, and a minute afterwards thousands of these insects would take possession of the tree. The solitary one always came first, apparently to see that all was safe, then flew away and a minliaiade of 29 436 COL, C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16, them would come, and the Macroglossa and Cephonodes would dis- appear. In about half an hour the Nephele would vanish as suddenly as they came, just about the time it was getting dark; and from then till nine or ten o’clock Cherocampa thyelia, C. celerio, Daphnis nerii, and Protoparce orientalis would be hovering about the flowers, and by ten o’clock the tree would be deserted, and it would remain deserted until just before daybreak, when it always again had a crowd of visitors. They invariably came and went in the same order. I never found any on the tree during the middle of the night. SYNTOMID&. 18. EREssA CONFINIS. Syntomis confinis, Walker, vii. 1592 (1856). April and October. I never saw this insect on the wing; I usually found them lying dead in the early morning in the verandah of my house. 19. SyNTOMIS CysSEA. Sphinx cysseus, Cramer, Pap. Exot. iv. 124, pl. 355. f. B. January to March ; June, September, and November. Flying in swarms over the flowering poppy-fields in February. AGARISTID&. 20. EKUSEMIA AFFLICTA. Eusemia afficta, Butler, Ent. M. M. xii. p. 118 (1875). June. LiTHosiID&. 21. ARGINA CRIBRARIA. Argina cribraria, Clerck, Icones, pl. 54. f. 4. September and October. 22. ARGINA NOTATA. Argina notata, Butler, Trans. Ent. Soc. 1877, part iv. Dec. p. 365. n. 270. September. 23. ARGINA ASTREA, Phalena astrea, Drury, Ul. Exot. Ins. ii. pl. vi. f. 3. September, October, and November. 24. DEIOPEIA PULCHELLA. Tinea pulchella, Linn. Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 884. no. 349. September to March. 25. DEIOPEIA LOTRIX. Phalena lotrix, Cramer, Pap. Exot. ii. 20, pl. 109. f. E. September to March. 1886, ] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 437 26. AAMENE TENEBROSA. Aimene tenebrosa, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1878, p. 34. May and June. 27. LACIDES FICUS. Noctua ficus, Fabr. Ent. Syst. iii. p. 27. no. 62. September and October. ARCTIIDE. 28. ALOPE RICINI. Bombyx ricini, Fabr. Ent. Syst. ii. 1, p. 473 (1793). Alope ocellifera, Walker, iii. 620 (1856). August (Forsayeth). 29. CREATONOTUS INTERRUPTUS. Phalena interrupta, Linn. Syst. Nat. Phal. 116. September. 30. MicroseMYRA PALLIDA. Microsemyra pallida, Butler, P. Z. 8S. 1883, p. 155. October. 31. ALOA PUNCTISTRIGA. Spilosoma punctistriga, Walker, iii. 676 (1855). June and September. 32, ALOA EMITTENS. Creatonotus emittens, Walker, iii. 638 (1855). June. 33. ALOA SANGUINOLENTA. Bombyx sanguinolenta, Fabr. Ent. Syst. iii, 1, p. 473 (1793). September (Forsayeth). LiPaRIpz&. 34. PERINA BASALIS. Perina basalis, Walker, iv. 966 (1855). September and October. 35. CHARNIDAS TESTACEA, Cycnia testacea, Waker, iii. 683 (1855). October, December, and March. 36. EupROcTIS LUNATA. Euproctis lunata, Walker, iv. 837 (1855). September. Both sexes vary much in colour from deep chrome-yellow to pure creamy white. 438 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16, 37. PoRTHESIA MARGINALIS. Luproctis marginalis, Walker, vii. 1731 (1865). June, September, and November. 38. ENOME DETERSA. Lymantria detersa, Walker, xxxii. 365 (1865). September to February. 39. ENOME INCERTA. Lymantria incerta, Walker, iv. 880 (1855). September, December, and February. 40. LyMANTRIA OBSOLETA. Lymantria obsoleta, Walker, iv. 880 (1855). September, November, December, and April. 4]. OLENE FUSIFORMIS. Nioda fusiformis, Walker, v. 1070 (1855). September (Forsayeth). 42. PsaLis SECURIS. Psalis securis, Hiibner, Samml. exot. Schmett. iii. 9, 146. f. 291, 292. August (Forsayeth). 43, CHILENA STRIGULA. Lasiocampa strigula, Walker, xxxii. 563 (1865). September (Forsayeth). NOTODONTID. 44, CETOLA DENTATA. Cetola dentata, Walker, v. 1016 (1855). July and September. 45. ANTHEUA DISCALIS. Antheua discalis, Walker, iii. 767 (1855). Mhow (Yerdury). 46. BrreTa GALBANA, n. sp. (Plate XL. fig. 5.) 3 2. Thorax, fore wings, and antenne yellowish cream-colour ; head reddish brown, a stripe of the same colour down the centre of the thorax. Fore wingssparsely irrorated with black atoms, except in the centre, where they cluster together, forming a slight shade ; three rows of black dots—first just before the middle, consisting of two dots, one on the median vein, and the other close to the hinder margin ; the second discal, one on each nervule; the third marginal, minute but very distinct, one on the extremity of each nervule. Hind wings and abdomen pure white; underside pure white, 1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 439 The spots on the female are generally smaller than those on the male. Expanse of wings 153, inch. June and July. 47. DaBaRITA ICTERICA, n. sp. (Plate XL. fig. 8.) Head, thorax, antennee, and fore wings pale reddish yellow, top of head and collar whitish ; fore wings with two outwardly oblique, thin, yellowish, slightly sinuous lines, rather close together, the first just before the middle, the second beyond the middle; the basal half of the wing the darkest, caused by numerous latitudinal brick-dust coloured minute regular lines or strigule, diffuse and terminating between the two lines. Abdomen pale dirty straw-colour ; hind wings white, semidiaphanous ; underside white, shining. Expanse of wings 1-4; inch. June. 48. IcHTHYURA RESTITURA. Ichthyura restitura, Walker, xxxii. 433 (1865). October. 49. OrR@SIA EMARGINATA. Noctua emarginata, Fabr. Ent. Syst. iii. 2, p. 240. October. LIMACODID2. 50. MrresA ALBIPUNCTA. Nyssia albipuncta, Herr.-Schiff. Lep. Exot. Sp. Ser. i. f. 179. October. 51. CANDYBA PUNCTATA. Candyba punctata, Walker, vii. 1761 (1856). Belgorea subnotata, Walker, xxxii. 497 (1865). June. Walker’s type of C. punctata is said to have come from Central Brazil, but the types of the above two species are identical. 52. NATADA BASALIS. Natada basalis, Walker, v. 1110 (1855). June and July. 53. PARASA LEPIDA. Phalena-Noctua lepida, Cram. Pap. Exot. ii. p. 50, pl. 130. f. E (1779). September. 54, APHENDALA TRIPARTITA. Aphendala tripartita, Moore, Trans. Ent. Soc. 1884, p. 376. June and July. 440 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16, 55. Susica COSMIANA, 0. sp. (Plate XL. fig. 9, 2.) Allied to S. fraterna, Moore. pale reddish ochreous; 9 yrey- ish ochreous, covered with silvery minute speckles, with the head and collar whitish. ¢ 2 with a minute spot at end of cell, more than two thirds of the wing from the base suffused with reddish, bounded by a reddish line curving outwardly from the costa near the apex, stopping short before the outer third of the hinder margin. Hind wings paler, reddish grey in the g, greyish ochreous in the 2. Underside in both sexes pale shining reddish ochreous. Expanse of wings ;8; inch. October to February. BomMBYCID&. 56. TRILOCHA VARIANS. Naprepa varians, Walker, v. 1153 (1855). October and December. LASIOCAMPID. 57. TARAGAMA GANESA. 3. Bombyx ganesa, Lefebvre, Zool. Journ. iii. p. 211 (1827). 9. Bombyx siva, Lefebvre, 7. c. p. 210. August (Yerbury). 58. TRISULA VARIEGATA. Trisula variegata, Moore, Cat. Lep. E.I. C. ii. p.420'pl. 12 a. f. 1 (1858-9). September. 59. TRABALA VISHNU. 2. Gastropacha vishnu, Lefebvre, Zool. Journ. ili. p. 207 (1827). 3. Amydona prasina, Walker, vi. 1417 (1855). September (Forsayeth). 60. LeBrDA BUDDHA. 3. Bombyx buddha, Lefebvre, Zool. Journ, iii. p. 209 (1827). Q. Bombyx brahma, Lefebvre, 1. ¢. p. 208. August (Forsayeth). 61. EupreRoTE IGNAVUS, n.sp. (Plate XLI. fig. 1,3.) Allied to #. mutans, Walker. Male of a soft yellowish-fawn colour, the internal bands being much more deeply bent inwards towards the costa than in 2. mutans ; the insect is also much smaller and of altogether a different colour ; the bands on the hind wings are very distinct and, except at the base, are identical with those on the fore wings, which is not the case with H#. mutans. Antennee, head, thorax, and all the bands and markings rufous-brown ; marginal border of both wings outside the outer double straight band much paler than the rest of the wings, 1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 44] Basal third of the hind wings clothed with long pale hairs. Under- side clear greyish yellow, with the bands and marks as above but aler. : Female of a uniform rufous-brown, coloured somewhat similarly to ¢ £. undata, Blanchard. Bands dark rufous-brown, placed as in the male but much straighter, less toothed and hardly at all bent in towards the costa, and the brown spots outside the outer straight band of the fore wings are wanting in the female; antennee, head, and body dark rufous-brown. Underside pale rufous ; markings as above but much paler. Expanse of wings, ¢ 3%, 24 inches. June. DREPANULIDZ. 62. ARGYRIS EXTRUSATA. Ephyra extrusata, Walker, xxii. 637 (1861). October. . SATURNIIDZ. 63. ANTHERZA NEBULOSA. Antherea nebulosa, Hutton, Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, 1869, p. 16. Common in the jungles below Assirghur from August to October. CossIpD&. 64. PHRAGMATACIA MINOR. Phragmatecia minor, Moore, Desc. Lep. Col. Atkinson, part 1. p- 87. June. 65. BRACHYLIA ACRONYCTOIDES. Brachylia acronyctoides, Moore, P. Z. 8S. 1879, p. 411, pl. 34. f. 4. June. NocrueEs. LEUCANIDA. 66. LEUCANIA EXTRANEA. Leucania extranea, Guénée, Noct. i. 77, 104. April. 67. LEUCANIA AUREOLA. Leucania aureola, Walker, ix. 108. September, in great numbers for about a fortnight. 68. LrUCANIA INFERENS. Leucania inferens, Walker, ix. 105. Mr. Butler identified some Moths I sent him in 1882, taken in September 1881, as this species. I therefore enter it in this list, but I have no Mhow examples in my collection now, neither have I any note in my diary of Lepidoptera of having taken this insect in Mhow. 442 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16, 69. LevCcANIA ByssINA, n, sp. (Plate XL. fig. 6.) Antenne, head, thorax, and fore wings pale greyish white, very slightly tinged with ochreous. Fore wings shining, irrorated with black atoms, a black spot at the end of the cell, another before the middle in the interno-median area, a discal row of black points curving outwardly, deeply bent in towards the costa, and a marginal row of black points. Fringe long, same colour as the wing. Abdomen, hind wings above, and the entire surface below pure shining white. Expanse of wings 1-1,1, inch. June. 70. AXYLIA FURTIVA. Agylia furtiva, Swinhoe, P. Z. 8. 1885, p. 448. September. HELIOTHIDA. 71. ALARIA LANCEOLATA. Alaria lanceolata, Walker, xxxiii. 767. September. 72. PRADATTA BIVITTA. Leucania bivitta, Walker, ix. 108. September. The above two species were together in great numbers in September 1881 for about a week. 73. PRADATTA BEATRIX. (Plate XLI. fig. 5.) Pradatta beatrix, Moore, P. Z. 8S. 1881, p. 365. Antenne, head, thorax, and fore wings bright rosy pink. Fore wings with a cream-coloured stripe from base to outer margin, passing through the whole length of the cell. Abdomen and hind wings silvery white, the latter in some specimens stained here and there with rosy. Underside silvery white, brownish towards the basal centre of the fore wings, and stained with rosy grey here and there on both wings. Expanse of wings 1 inch. September. 74, HELIOTHIS ARMIGERA. Noctua armigera, Hiibner, Noct. pl. 79. f. 370. October, November, and December. 75. HrLiorHis RUBESCENS. Thalpophila rubescens, Walker, xv. 1681. December. 76. HELIOTHIS PELTIGERA. Noctua peltigera, Wien. Verz. 89. 2. June and December. 1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 443 77. HELiorHis SUCCINEA. Heliothis succinea, Moore, P. Z.S. 1881, p. 362. November. 78. ADISURA LEUCANOIDES. Adisura leucanoides, Moore, P. Z. 8S. 1881, p. 368. October. 79. ANTHAECIA SWINHOEI. Anthecia swinhoei, Butler, P. Z.S. 1883, p. 162. Assirghur, October. GLOTTULID&. 80. GLOTTULA DOMINICA. Phalena-Noctua dominica, Cram. Pap. Exot. iv. p. 238, pl. 399. H August (Forsayeth). CYMATOPHORID&. 81. RisoBaA OBSTRUCTA. Risoba obstructa, Moore, P. Z. 8. 1881, p. 328. July. APAMIID. 82. PRODENIA RETINA. Neuria retina, Frivaldsky, Herr.-Schiiff. Eur. Schmett. ii. 292, Noct. pl. 29. f. 145. October. 83. LAPHYGMA EXIGUA. Noctua exigua, Hiibner, Samml. Eur. Schmett., Noct. f. 362. February and March. 84. ILATTIA CEPHUSALIS. Tlattia cephusalis, Walker, xvi. 209. September and October. 85. MAMESTRA DOLOROSA. Mamestra dolorosa, Walker, xxxii. 667. October and November. 86. PERIGIA SERVA. Celeena serva, Walker, xv. 1689. October. 87. PERIGIA CENTRALIS. Perigia centralis, Walker, xi. 734. June, 444 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16, Noctuipz. 88. AGROTIS SEGETUM. Phalena-Noctua segetum, Gmel. ed. Syst. Nat. i.5, p. 2539. 1018. January to April. 89. AGROTIS SUFFUSA. Phalena-Noctua suffusa, Gmel. ed. Syst. Nat. i. 5, p. 2541. 1028. February. 90. AGROTIS ARISTIFERA. Agrotis aristifera, Guénée, Noct. i. 266, 426. April, June, November, and December. 91. AGROTIS LASSA, N. Sp. Allied to 4. repulsa. Antenne, head, thorax, and fore wings dark brownish fawn-colour. Fore wings of the male very narrow ; fore wings of both sexes with some brown marks, like strigulz here and there; on the male the usual stigmata are not visible; on the female the orbicular is represented by a black ring, and the claviform and reniform are both visible, but obscure and black ; and the latter is like a small smudged figure of 8. Hind wings white, semi- hyaline, with the costa and outer border tinged with fawn-colour. Abdomen grey, with the segments marked out with some white hairs. Underside paler, with the thorax, abdomen, and fore and hind wings streaked with silvery-white speckles. Expanse of wings 13 inch. March and April. HADENID2. 92. RADINACRA VARIANA, n. sp. (Plate XL. fig. 10.) Antenne, head, thorax, and fore wings brownish fawn-colour. Fore wings with the lines sinuous, dark brown, one subbasal extending only halfway down from the costa, another before the middle, and one submarginal ; all these complete and bending slightly outwardly ; three yellowish dots on the costa near the apex; the third line runs through the reniform stigma, which is hardly visible, the orbicular is indicated by a faint white spot. Abdomen greyish brown. Hind wings and underside pale brownish grey. Both wings above and below shining, almost gilded. Expanse of wings 1 inch. September. XYLOPHASID. 93. SPODOPTERA CILIUM. Spodoptera cilium, Guénée, Noct. i. 156. 249. March and October. 94, SPODOPTERA INFECTA. Prodenia infecta, Walker, ix. 196, October. 1886.] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 445 ERASTRIIDA. 95. LEPTosIA QUINARIA. Leptosia quinaria, Moore, P. Z.S. 1881, p. 371. April. ACONTIID&. 96. ACONTIA SIGNIFERA. Acontia signifera, Walker, xii. 793. September. 97. ACONTIA NIGRIPALPIS. Acontia nigripalpis, Walker, xxxv. 1965. Assirghur, October. 98. ACONTIA BADIA, 0. sp. Of a uniform pale reddish fawn-colour. Fore wing with whitish lines, thin, sinuous—one antemedian, one postmedian, one sub- marginal, and one marginal; a dark brown central band, stopping short of the costa, and expanding outwardly towards the apex, in some specimens overlapping the second line, in others having this line as its outer border for some distance upwards from the hinder margin ; the inner border of this band is upright, bent inwardly on the centre and well defined, and within this band is a deep black reniform mark, and another black mark beyond. Hind wings slightly darker towards the border, and rather more grey-coloured than the ground-culour of the fore wings. Underside: fore wings greyish brown, with the costa and hinder margin broadly pinkish yellow ; hind wings pale ochreous grey. Expanse of wings 55, inch. October. 99. ACONTIA CROCATA. Acontia crocata, Guénée, Noct. ii. 218, 989. October. 100. ACONTIA INDA. Acontia inda, Felder, Reise Nov. iv. pl. 108. fig. 23. June. 101. ACONTIA QUADRIPARTITA. Acontia quadripartita, Walker, xxxiii. 786. June. 102. ACONTIA EXCISA. Acontia excisa, Walker, MS., Swinhoe, P. Z. S. 1885, p. 455. September. 103. PHOTHEDES VEPRECULA. Phothedes veprecula, Swinhoe, P. Z. 8. 1885, p. 456. June, September, and October. 446 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16, 104. PHOTHEDES FRAUSA, 0. sp. Yellowish cream-colour. Fore wings diffused with pinkish, costa broadly grey ; an indistinct silvery sinuous inner line, which in some specimens is disconnected and in some is wanting; a similar out- ward line from the outer two thirds of the hinder margin up to the apex ; this line in many specimens runs in a brownish-grey shade, and there are streaks and marks of this colour on the costa, on the hinder margin towards the base, and marginal marks ; fringe also of same colour. Hind wings in some examples slightly grey towards the outer border, in others pure pale yellowish cream-colour, paler than the ground-colour of the fore wings. Underside of the same colour but paler, more whitish, shining, and quite unmarked. Expanse of wings +4 inch. July. Quite common for a few days. A somewhat variable-looking insect, because the colours and markings are much stronger in some than in others, the ground-colour in some females being almost pure pinkish. 105. Hiccopa HERBARIA, 0. sp. Upperside, body, and wings white. Fore wings sparsely irrorated with reddish-brown dots and atoms, some marks of the same colour on the costa and outer margin, a sinuous line within a diffused band, from the outer two thirds of the hinder margin to the apex ; a square blackish large spot in the disk within this band; fringe white, marked with black marks. Hind wings with the outer half shaded with pale reddish brown; fringe pure white. Underside whitish, shaded with grey, darkest on the costa. Palpi black, last joint very minute and pure white ; fore tarsi black with white bands. Expanse of wings 58; inch. June and July. 106. TaRACHE NiIvosa, n. sp. (Plate XLI. fig. 14.) Head and thorax snow-white ; antenne and thorax reddish grey, the latter marked with pure white within the segmants, may be altogether white in freshly emerged specimens. Fore wings reddish slate-colour, in some specimens pale brown-pink, a deep snow-white band extending along four fifths of the costa, filling nearly the whole basal area with the dark colour of the wings, forming an elbow upwards in the centre part of the band; a reddish indistinct line crossing the band at the basal third, just before the elbow, a spot at the base within the band, also the orbicular and reniform spots all of the general colour of the wing, clear and distinct ; the dark part of the wing has white marks showing through here and there, and a brownish elbow parallel with the stigmata, giving the appearance of three spots in a longitudinal row ; marginal marks white; fringe white. Hind wings in some specimens white with greyish borders, in others of a uniform pale slaty grey ; fringe white. Underside pale grey, unmarked. 1886.] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 447 Expanse of wings ;8, inch. June and September. A well-marked and pretty little insect. ANTHOPHILIDZ. 107. THALPOCHARES ROSEANA. Thalpochares roseana, Moore, P. Z. 8S. 1881, p. 370. April and May. 108. THALPOCHARES RIVULA. Thalpochares rivula, Moore, Desc. Lep. eol. Atkinson, ii. p. 140 (1882). March. 109. AGROPHILA SULPHURALIS. Phalena-Pyralis sulphuralis, Bergestr. Ins. Suec. i. 16. October. 110. ANTHOPHILA INNUBILA, li. Sp. Upperside of a uniform shining cream-colour, the fore wings rather darker than the hind wings, and tinged with ochreous, especially on the costa. Fore wings sparsely covered with silvery- white freckles, and with a whitish line which extends upwards from the centre of the hinder margin towards the apex and then angles inwards, meeting the costa at the outer two thirds; there is also a faint indication of a similar inner line parallel to this just inside the middle. Eyes black ; antenne ochreous. Underside paler than the upperside, shining, unmarked. Expanse of wings 38; inch. June. 111. EUBLEMMA AMABILIS. Eublemma amabilis, Moore, Lep. Ceylon, iii. p. 54. June. PLUSIIDz. 112. PLusiaA VERTICILLATA. Plusia verticillata, Guénée, Noct. ii. 344. 1168. September. 113. PLUsIA EXTRAHENS. Plusia extrahens, Walker, xii. 929. June and October. 114, PLustA CIRCUMFLEXA. Phalena-Noctua circumflexa, Linn. Syst. Nat. 128. April. 448 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16, 115, Puusta ORICHALCEA. Noctua orichalcea, Fabr. Sp. Ins. ii. 227. 92. October (Forsayeth). HyBLa2ID#. 116. Hypiaa PUERA. Phalena-Noctua puera, Cram. Pap. Exot. ii. 10, pl. 103. f. D, E. Mhow (Yerbury). GONOPTERIDZ. 117. CosMorpHILA XANTHINDYMA. 3. Cosmophila xanthindyma, Boisd. Faun. Ent. Mad. Bourb. et Maur., Lép. p. 94, pl. 13. f. 7 (1833). @ . Cosmophila indica, Guénée, Noct. il. 396. 1256 (1852). July, September, and October ; in great numbers in September. POLYDESMID&. 118. PANDESMA QUENAVADI. Pandesma quenavadi, Guénée, Noct. ii. 438. 1310. May, July, and September. 119. PotypESMA BOARMOIDES. Polydesma boarmoides, Guénée, Noct. ii. 441. 1314. June. 120. PoLYDESMA BREVIPALPIS. Alamis brevipalpis, Walker, xiii. 1051. June and July. 121. BAMRA ACRONYCTOIDES. Bamra acronyctoides, Moore, Desc. Lep. col. Atkinson, ii. p. 160 (1882). Mhow (Yeréury). HomoprprerRiD#&. 122. HoMorrerRA VETUSTA. Homoptera vetusta, Walker, xxxili. 875. June, July, and October. 123. ALAMIS UMBRINA. Alamis umbrina, Guénée, Noct. iii. 4. 132°. July and October. 124. ALAMIS CONTINUA. Alamis continua, Walker, xxxiii. 877. September (Forsayeth). 1886.] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 449 125. GrRPA FRATERNA. Girpa fraterna, Moore, Lep. Ceylon, iii. p. 94 (1884). September and October. 126. GirPA INANGULATA. Hulodes inangulata, Guénée, Noct. iii. 210. 1612. Remigia optativa, Walker, xiv. 1510. Remigia optatura, Walker, xv. 1848. September and October. HyPoGRAMMID&. 127. SELEPA CELTIS. Selepa celtis, Moore, Cat. Lep. E. I. C. ii. p. 353, pl. ix. a. f. 9. October (Forsayeth). 128. SrLEPA OCCULTA. Selepa occulta, Swinhoe, P. Z. S. 1885, p. 461. June. 129. SELEPA CURVIFERELLA. Subrita? curviferella, Walker, xxxv. 1745. September (Forsayeth). CaTEPHID. 130. ERYGIA APICALIS. Erygia apicalis, Guénée, Noct. iii. 50. 1381. November. 131. BrIARDA BOLINOIDES. Briarda bolinoides, Walker, xv. 1802. July. 132. ANOPHIA OLIVESCENS. Anophia olivescens, Guénée, Noct. ili. 48. 1379. June. OMMATOPHORID&. 133. PATULA MACROPS. Phalena-Noctua macrops, Linn. Syst. Nat. ii. 225. June and September. 134. ENTOMOGRAMMA TORSA. Entomogramma torsa, Guénée, Noct. iii. 204. 1605. October. 135. Homa CLATHRUM. Homea clathrum, Walker, xiv. 1334. July. Proc. Zooxu. Soc.—1886, No. XXX. 30 450 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16, HyporyripD&. 136. SprRAMIA HELIGINA. Speiredonia helicina, Hiibner, Samm. exot. Schmett. iii. 14. 219, f. 437, 438. March, June, July, and September. OPpHIDERIDZ. 137, ARGADESA MATERNA. Phalena-Noctua materna, Linn. Syst. Nat. 1i. 840. 17. July. 138. OTHREIS FULLONICA. Phalena-Noctua fullonica, Linn. Syst. Nat. ii. 812. 16. July. OPpHIUSIDZ. 139. OpHIODES SEPARANS. Ophiodes separans, Walker, xiv. 1357. September (Forsayeth). 140. OpHIODES TRIPHZNOIDES. Ophiodes triphenoides, Walker, xiv. 1358. Mhow (Yerbury). 141. SPHINGOMORPHA CHLOREA. Phalena chlorea, Cram. Pap. Exot. ii. p. 12, pl. 104. f. C. September and November. 142. ACHZA MELICERTE. Phalena-Noctua melicerte, Drury, Ins. i. p. 46, pl. 23. f. 1, July to November. 143. ERCHEIA DIVERSIPENNIS. Ercheia diversipennis, Walker, xiii. 1108. September (Forsayeth). 144. OpHIUSA ALBIVITTA. Ophiusa albivitta, Guénée, Noct. iii. 271. 1707. July. 145. OpHIusA JOVIANA. Phalena-Noctua joviana, Cram. Pap. Exot. iv. p. 237, pl. 399. ie B. Depalpore, November. 146. OpHIUSA ARCTOTZENIA. Ophiusa arctotenia, Guénée, Noct. iii. p. 272 (1852). Mhow (Yerdury). 1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 451 147. GRAMMODES AMMONIA. Phalena ammonia, Cram. Pap. Exot. iii. p. 98, pl. 250. f. D. July and September. KucLipiip&. 148. TRIGONODES HIPPASIA. : Ree a hippasia, Cram. Pap. Exot. iii. p. 99, pl. 250. September, October, and November. 149. ACANTHOLIPES AFFINIS. Docela affnis, Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. v. p- 225 (1880). Mhow, October ; Assirghur, October. 150. ACANTHOLIPES ACERVALIS, 0. sp. 3. Cream-colour, sparsely irrorated with brown atoms ; head and collar pure white. Fore wings with a black dot in the cell and one or two in a line beyond it, a short grey longitudinal streak from the end of the cell to the outer border, some short grey streaks on the border, made by the interspaces near the border being nearly filled up with grey color, a black dot near the external angle (this is not present in all specimens); hinder margin grey. Hind wings ochreous grey towards the outer border. Underside white, fore wings suffused with purplish grey, darkest along the costa. Mhow, October. 150A. ANTHOPHILA PULCHRA, 0. sp. Q. Allied to A. purpurina. Cream-colour; head and collar pure white. Fore wings with the costa and outer half suffused with purplish grey, gradually darkening towards the outer border, where there is a white streak running from the apex halfway down the outer margin, and then making a short streak inwards. Hind wings dark grey. Underside similar to the male, the purple on the fore wings rather darker. Expanse of wings 5°, inch. Mhow, November. REMIGIID. 151. REMIGIA FRUGALIS. Noctua frugalis, Fabr. Ent. Syst. iii. 2. 138. Common from July to December. 152. REMIGIA ARCHESIA. Phalena-Noctua archesia, Cram. Pap. Exot. iii. p. 145, pl. 273. f. F, G. July, September, and October. PoOAPHILID, 153. PoAPHILA HAMIFERA. Poaphila hamifera, Walker, xxxiii. 992. July. 30* 452 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Noyv. 16, THERMESIID. 154. AZAZIA RUBRICANS. Ophiusa rubricans, Boisd. Faun. Lép. Mad. p. 106. 11, pl. 16. f. 1. September. 155. MESTLETA BACCALIX, n. sp. (Plate XL. fig. 7.) Pale pinkish cream-colour. Fore wings irrorated with pinkish- brown atoms; with four equidistant parallel whitish oblique lines— subbasal, antemedian, median, and postmedian ; each line nearly straight from hinder margin till near the costa, where it abruptly bends inwards to the costa; each line margined with pinkish brown on its inner side; outer border darker than the rest of the wing, with a whitish subapical line running inwards from the costa for a short distance; fringe pinkish brown with white tips. Hind wings paler than the fore wings, pale pinkish brown towards the outer margin; fringe pinkish grey, with white tips. Underside whitish ; legs marked with pinkish brown ; body dark brown-pink ; fore wings suffused with pinkish brown towards the apex ; fringe of both wings as on the upperside. Expanse of wings 8; inch. December. Foci.uip&. 156. HincGuLa UNICOLORIS, 0. sp. Dark brown ; antenne articulated with white, tips of the palpi white ; head white on the inside of the eyes; wings saturated with pinkish ; fore wings with some black marks on the costa, a black streak at the end of the cell; both wings with black points on the outer margin, and with two irregular, very indistinct black lines across the wings difficult to distinguish. Underside slightly paler than the upperside, in one specimen quite unmarked, in another with faint traces of outer and submarginal lines. Expanse of wings 1 inch. February and September. PLATYDID. 157. EpispaRIs SIGNATA. Episparis signata, Walker, xxxiii. 1032. July. HyPENID&. 158. RayNCHINA PERVULGALIS. : sagas pervulgalis, Swinhoe, P. Z.S. 1885, p. 471, pl. 28. May and September. 159. RHYNCHINA XYLINA, n. sp. Palpi, head, and collar white, speckled with grey, the palpi in 1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 453 some specimens mostly grey ; antenne grey, articulated with white, ciliated in the male, filiform in the female; thorax and fore wings dark grey speckled with white; an antemedian upright sinuous double white line, a median, outwardly oblique, sinuous double white line sharply bent inwards to the costa, round the reniform stigma, which is white and prominent; there is also an orbicular spot of the same colour, smaller and less prominent, some white marks on the costa near the apex, and a submarginal and a marginal brown line with white points. Hind wings and underside pale grey, unmarked; abdomen grey with white segmental lines; male with a prominent grey anal tuft. This little insect varies much in the shade of its general coloration, some specimens being reddish grey, and in many the white pre- dominates. Expanse of wings ;3,—;; inch. June and July ; common in the cotton-fields. 160. HypENA AaBDUCALIS. Hypena abducalis, Walker, xvi. 67. Common in July. This species is very variable ; some are strongly marked like the type, others have merely a whitish curved line on the fore wings from the tip to the base, with a few streaks, and the general colour of the wing is pale and quite different to the type. HERMINIID&. 161. NoDARIA EXTERNALIS. Nodaria externalis, Guénée, Delt. et Pyral. 64. 78. October. 162. APPHADANA MISERA. Apphadana misera, Butler, P. Z. 8. 1883, p. 166. Mhow, October; Assirghur, October. 163. SPADIX VEGETUS. Spadix vegetus, Swinhoe, P. Z. S. 1885, p. 475, pl. 28. f. 14. June and September. 164. ByTuRNA DIGRAMMA. Bocana digramma, Walker, xxxiv. 1170. September and October. 165. LABANDA PAMPHOSALIS. Bocana pamphosalis, Walker, xix. 887. October, 454 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16, GEOMETRITES. ENNOMIIDZ. 166. HypreRYTHRA SWINHOEI. Hyperythra swinhoei, Butler, Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. 5, vol. v. p. 223 (1880). Mhow, February ; Ajnot, November. 167. CHIZALA DECIPIENS. Chizala decipiens, Walker, xx. 263. March. BoarMIID&. 168. HypocHROMA DISPENSATA. Hypochroma dispensata, Walker, xxi. 435. March. 169. BoaRMIA CORNARIA. Boarmia cornaria, Guénée, Phal. i. 254. 390. February and October. 170. PETELIA MEDARDARIA. Petelia medardaria, Herr.-Schiiff. Exot. Schm. pl. 94. f. 534. July. AMPHIDASID. 171. BuzuRA PANTERINARIA. Amphidasis panterinaria, Bremer und Grey, Beitr. zur Schmett.- Fauna des nérdlichen China’s, p. 21. 107. June. GEOMETRIDZ. 172. NEMORIA CARNIFRONS. Nemoria carnifrons, Butler, P. Z.S. 1883, p. 169. September and October. 173. NEMORIA FREQUENS. Nemoria frequens, Butler, P. Z. 8. 1881, p. 616. Mhow, March, April, and November ; Ajnot, November. 174. TIMANDRA DIATOMARIA. Timandra diatomaria, Walker, xxvi. 1616, September, October, and November. EpHyriD2&. 175. EpHyRA CLEORARIA. Acidalia cleoraria, Walker, xxiii. 792. Mhow, February to June, also in October ; Depalpore, November and December, 1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 455 176. EpHyRA INEXACTA. Epione inexacta, Walker, xxvi. 1497. October. IDxHIDA. 177. IDA ADDICTARIA. Acidalia addictaria, Walker, xxii. 749. October. 178. ID#A PATULARIA. Acidalia patularia, Walker, xxxv. 1633. Delapore, November. 179. Ip#A REMOTATA. Acidalia remotata, Walker, xxii. 748. Depalpore, November. 180. IpaA ABSCONDITARIA. Acidalia absconditaria, Walker, xxiii. 757. October, November, and December. 181. Ip#a WALKERI. Idea walkeri, Butler, P. Z.S. 1883, p. 170. Acidalia extimaria, Walker, xxii. 794. October and January. 182. IpmA NEGATARIA. Acidalia negataria, Walker, xxiii. 751. Mhow, December ; Depalpore, November. 183. Ipa#a CHOTARIA. Idea chotaria, Swinhoe, P. Z. 8. 1885, p. 858, pl. 57. f. 14. April and June. 184. Hyria BILINEATA. Hyria bilineata, Butler, P. Z.S. 1883, p. 170. Assirghur, October. CaBERID#. 185. STEGANIA UVIDULA. Stegania uvidula, Swinhoe, P. Z. 8. 1885, p. 860. July. MACARIID. 186. MAcArIA ELEONORA, Phalena eleonora, Cram. Pap, Exot. iii. p. 172, pl. 288, f. E, F, G, July. 456 COL C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16, 187. MACARIA HEBESATA. Macaria hebesata, Walker, xxiii. 931. September. 188. MacariA ZEBRINA. Tephrina zebrina, Butler, P. Z.S. 1883, p. 171. March, April, and May. 189. MAcarIA ARENARIA. Tephrina arenaria, Swinhoe, P. Z.S. 1884, p. 527, pl. 48. f. 13. December. 190. MacariA LITHINA. Tiphrina lithina, Butler, P. Z.S. 1883, p. 171. March and October. I believe these to be females of M. zebrina, though at first sight they do not look like it, having no median bands; but I have never taken a male, and the female of the allied species, M. strenuata, Walker, is often also without bands and is hardly distinguishable from M, lithina. 191. MacariA PEREMPTARIA. Macaria peremptaria, Walker, xxiii. 929. October. 192. MacarRIA GRANITALIS. Tephrina granitalis, Butler, P. Z. 8. 1883, p. 171. September. FIponiip&. 193. STERRAA SACRARIA. Phalena-Geometra sacraria, Linn. Syst. Nat. i. 2, p. 863. 220. February, May, and June. 194, STERRHA PAULULA, n. sp. (Plate XLI. fig. 7.) White ; eyes black ; thorax and fore wings irrorated with ochreous atoms ; fore wings with a reddish-ochreous dot at the end of the cell, and with two oblique outer lines of the same ‘colour close together, from the outer two thirds of the hinder margin, where they are Separate, opening out in their centre and meeting at the apex; abdo- men and hind wings pure white. Underside white ; fore wings pale ochreous towards the costa. Expanse of wings 58, inch. May. LARENTIID2. 195. LycauGEs DEMISSUS, n. sp. Eyes black; top of head pure white; antenne, body, and wings cream-colour, both wings irrorated with brown atoms, which are 1886. | LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 457 densely packed in places, forming bands along the costa and on all the borders of both wings. Fore wings with an oblique central band of the same colour (also irrorated with darker atoms) from the centre of the hinder margin to the apex; a row of brown dots between this band and the outer margin, the dots being connected together with a line of pale atoms; a brown dot at the end of the cell and sometimes one or two more in a row inwards ; fringe white, densely irrorated with brown atoms, making it clearly interlined. Hind wings with a brown dot at the end of the cell, with a central band of the same colour as that in the fore wings, the band being curved inwardly to the costa; an outward row of dots connected together by brownish atoms, and a marginal row of dots; fringe as in fore wings ; in some specimens the outer line of atoms in both wings is double, with the dot on the inside line. Underside like the upperside, but darker and duller. Expanse of wings 5%; inch. February to June; common. 196. NapAGARA GRISEA. Nadagara grisea, Butler, P.Z.S. 1883, p. 172. May. PYRALES. PYRALID. 197. PyRALIS LUCILLALIS. Pyralis lucillalis, Walker, xvii. 268. April and September. 198. PyRALIS UBERALIS. Pyralis uberalis, Swinhoe, P. Z. 8. 1884, p. 523, pl. 48. f. 10. May. 199. CLEDEOBIA HYPOTIALIS. Cledeobia hypotialis, Swinhoe, P. Z. 8. 1885, p. 866. June, September, and October ; in great plenty in June. ENNYCHIID&. 200. PyrausTa STULTALIS. Botys stultalis, Walker, xviii. 669. June and September. 201. RHODARIA JUNCTURALIS. Rhodaria juncturalis, Walker, xxxiv. 1283. September. ASOPIID. 202. HyMENIA FASCIALIS. ee fascialis, Cram. Pap. Exot. iv. p. 236, pl. 398. June, July, and September. 458 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16, 203. CopToBASIs OPISALIS. Desmia opisalis, Walker, xvii. 346. July and September. 204. CorproBASIS ANEALIS. Coptobasis enealis, Swinhoe, P. Z. 8. 1885, p. 867. July. 205. SAMEA INSCITALIS. Aidiodes inscitalis, Walker, xxxiv. 1297. September. 206. LEUCINODES AUXIALIS, n. sp. (Plate XLI. fig. 12.) Head and thorax reddish brown, covered with white marks; abdo- men pure pearl-white, with pale reddish-brown bands in the last four segments. Fore wings pure pearl-white, with a broad reddish-brown band at the base, and another on the outer border, diffused inwardly, and filling up the outer third of the wing ; a white line at the base, and another submarginal, both sinuous, and showing distinctly on the brown bands, which are also covered with white marks as on the thorax ; there are also some pale reddish marks on the costa in the central portion of the wing. Hind wings white, semihyaline, with a discal waved line and an interrupted marginal band diffused inwardly ; both pale reddish brown; fringe of both wings white. Underside white, with the bands and marks pale, showing through the wings. Expanse of wings 74,—,8, inch. April. HypRocaMPID&. 207. PARAPONYX AFFINIALIS. Paraponyz affinialis, Guénée, Delt. et Pyral. 270. 259. October, November, January, March, April, and June; very plentiful. HERCYNIDZ. 208. HersBuLA MELEAGRISALIS. Herbula meleagrisalis, Walker, xvii. 324. April. SPILOMELIDZ. 209. SALBIA PERSPICUALIS. Zebronia perspicualis, Walker, xxxiv. 1347. October. 210. ZEBRONIA AUROLINEATUS. Zebronia aurolineatus, Walker, xvii. 478, Assirghur, October. 1886.] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 459 211. ZEBRONIA GRAPHICALIS, 0. sp. Allied to Z. obrinusalis, Walker. Ochreous ; fore wings with a black dot at the end of the cell and three black dots on the costa—one basal, one before and another beyond the middle, exactly as in Z. aurolinealis and Z. plutusalis, Both fore and hind wings crossed by five dark ochreous, slightly sinuous bands; marginal line dark ochreous ; fringe long, with pale tips. Underside paler ; wings unmarked, except a deep black spot at the end of the cell of the fore wings ; all the legs with black knees ; fore tarsi with three black bands. Expanse of wings ;%—1 inch. February, March, and July. MARGARODID&. 212. PYGOSPILA TYRESALIS. Phalena-Pyralis tyres, Pap. Exot. iii. p. 124, pl. 263. f. C. Pygospila .tyresalis, Guénée, Delt. et Pyral. 312. 340. Mhow (Yerbury). 213. PHAKELLURA INDICA. Eudioptis indica, Saunders, Zool. ix. 3070. September, October, and November. 214, GLYPHODES FESSALIS, n. sp. (Plate XLI. fig. 13.) Palpi unusually long, much longer than the breadth of the head ; antenne, palpi, head, thorax, and abdomen pure white ; a reddish band on each side of the collar, joining a similar band on the costa of the fore wings ; outer border of fore wings with a band of the same colour—in some specimens purplish, margined inwardly with a brown line. Hind wings white, semihyaline, with an outer border slightly paler than that on the fore wings, and which becomes gra- dually attenuated to the anal angle; fringe of both wings white. Underside white, shining, with the bands faintly showing through. Expanse of wings 55; inch. April and May. 215. EucnasTa DEFAMATALIS. Tlurgia defamatalis, Walker, xviii. 544. November. BortipiDz&. 216. Borys AUREA. Botys aurea, Butler, Ill. Typ. Lep. Het. iii. p. 76, pl. 59. f. 11 (1879). October. 217. Borys INCOLORALIS. Botys incoloralis, Guénée, Delt. et Pyral. 332. 369. October. 460 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE (Nov. 16, 218. Borys OBSTRUSALIS. Botys obstrusalis, Walker, xviii. 663. July, September, October, and November. 219. Borys NEOCLESALIS. Botys neoclesalis, Walker, xviil. 635. June, 220. Borys MOLUSALIS. Botys molusalis, Walker, xix. 1409. August (Forsayeth). 221. EBULEA CATALAUNALIS. Botys catalaunalis, Duponchel, Lép. de France, viii. p. 330 pl. 232. f. 8. September, October, and November. 222. ScopuLA DAMASTESALIS. Scopula damastesalis, Walker, xix. 1013. July and September. 223. SCOPULA VINCTALIS. Scopula vinetalis, Walker, xxxiv. 1476. July. 224. SCOPULA STRENUALIS. Botys strenualis, Walker, xxxiv. 1409. August (Forsayeth). STENIIDZ. 225. D1ASEMIA GEOMETRALIS. Lepyrodes geometralis, Guénée, Delt. et Pyral. 278. 271. Assirghur, October. PHYCID2. 226. NrEPHOPTERYX SUFFUSCALIS, 0. Sp. Cinereous brown ; whitish, shining, beneath; palpi stout, pubescent, curving upwards, not rising higher than the vertex, third joint lan- ceolate, short, not one third of the length of the second; antenne rather stout, brown marked with white; top of head whitish ; palpi, thorax, and fore wings cinereous brown, some silvery-white atoms on thorax and on the fore wings near the base ; reniform stigma repre- sented by a whitish spot; four sinuous incomplete black lines across the fore wings—basal, antemedian, postmedian, and submarginal ; marginal points black ; fringe long, greyish brown ; hind wings pale whitish cinereous. Expanse of wings 35; inch. March and April. 1886.] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 461 227. HomamosoMA GRATELLA. Homeosoma gratella, Walker, xxvii. 26. February and April. CRAMBIDE. 228. SCH@NOBIUS BISIGNATUS. Scheenobius bisignatus, Zeller, MS. (col. B.M.), P. Z.S. 1885, p: 878. June and July. 229. CHILO AURIFUSELLUS. Crambus aurifusellus, Walker, xxxv. 1756. June and July. 230. CHILO INTERRUPTELLUS. Chilo interruptellus, Moore, P. Z.S. 1872, p. 581, pl. 34. f. 5. June. 231. CHILO ORTELLUS, n. sp. (Plate XLI. fig. 3.) White ; palpi fawn-colour, porrect, about as long as the breadth of the head, second joiut with large white tufts above, third acutely conical, as long as the second ; antennz white, stout, pectinated in the male, branches reddish, short; top of head pure white; thorax grey, with a black central stripe and a white band on each side; abdomen pure white. Wings white; fore wings with the upper portions suffused with yellowish-fawn colour, and with a broad black longitudinal central stripe from base to outer margin, atten- uated at both ends; marginal points black, and a few black atoms distributed over the surface of the wing: hind wings pure white, unmarked. Underside white, with the stripe and marginal points on the fore wings showing through the wings, and in the male with the costal portions and outer border of the fore wings and costa of hind wings suffused with dirty reddish grey. Expanse of wings, ¢ 14%, Q 1,4; inch. June and July. 232. CHARLTONA KALA. Charltona kala, Swinhoe, P. Z.S. 1885, p. 879, pl. 57. f. 4, 3. June and July. 233. JARTHEZA CHRYSOGRAPHELLA,. Chilo chrysographella, Kollar, Hiigel’s Kasch. p. 494 (1848). February to April, June and October. 234. JARTHEZA CASSIMELLA, 0. sp. (Plate XLI. fig. 4 dg, fig. 6 2.) Allied to J. wylinella. Pale yellowish fawn-colour ; labial palpi porrect, stout, longer than 462 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16, the breadth of the head, last joint minute; maxillary palpi half the length of the labial palpi. Antenne of the male pectinated, branches very short; of the female filiform, with short bristles, colour grey. Top of head and thorax chestnut-brown, latter with a white band on each side; abdomen grey, with white segmental lines. Fore wings yellowish fawn-colour, with two dark brown, diffuse, incomplete longitudinal stripes, one running a short distance out of the centre of the cell towards the outer border, the other from the base on the submedian vein for about two thirds of the length of the wing, each stripe containing a glistening silver-white streak ; a sub- marginal narrow semidentate brown band and black lunular small spots on the veins close to, but not touching, the outer margin ; fringe grey, with a brown line in its centre. Hind wings smoky grey, unmarked ; fringe white. Underside whitish, shining; fore wings suffused with grey; legs fawn-colour, brown on their inner sides ; tarsi with brown bands. Expanse of wings, ¢ 1,2, 2 1%; inch. June and July ; common. 235. CRAMBUS PARTELLUS. Crambus partellus, Swinhoe, P. Z. 8. 1885, p. 879. October. 236. CRAMBUS MULTIVAGELLUS, N. sp. White ; antenne thin; labial palpi slender, as long as the breadth of the head ; maxillary palpi one third of the length of the labial palpi; abdomen extending a little beyond the hind wings; fore wings acute, rather narrow, outer border oblique, costa slightly convex; wings and body above and below pure white, shining, un- marked, Expanse of wings ;®; inch. June, July, and September. 237. UROLA INCLARALIS. Crambus inclaralis, Walker, xxxvii. 166. June and July. 238. EROMENE BELLA. Eromene bella, Hiibner, Tin. f. 69. April and June. 239. SURATTHA INVECTALIS. Surattha invectalis, Walker, xxvii. 76. June. 240. Hyporia ALLALIS, n. sp. (Plate XLI. fig. 2.) White ; fore wings with the costal line and basal third very pale reddish cinereous, an oblique broad pale reddish-brown band beyond 1886. | LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 463 the middle, on the inner margin of which is the reniform stigma, brownish, rather large, lunular; marginal line reddish brown, this line runs round the apex on to the costa and round the hinder angle a little way on the hinder margin; some faint, very pale, reddish marks on the outer third of the wing. Hind wings white, marginal line reddish brown ; fringe on both wings interlined—white, pale reddish brown, and white. Antenne, palpi, and body pure white; a thin brown band on the abdomen near the base, in some specimens like a fine line. Underside white, with the costal portion of the fore -wings suffused with reddish. Expanse of wings +4, inch. Mhow, June. NYCTEOLID. 241. EARIAS FRONDOSANA. Earias frondosana, Walker, xxvii. 204. Assirghur, October. 242, EaRIAS TRISTRIGOSA. arias tristrigosa, Butler, P. Z.S. 1881, p. 614. April. 243. EARIAS SPEIPLENA. Aphusia speiplena, Walker, xii. 770. October and December. TORTRICIDE. 244, PHYCODES HIRUNDINICORNIS. Phycodes hirundinicornis, Guénée, Noct. ii. 389. 1249. Tegna hybleella, Walker, xxxv. 1810. April and September. 245. DicHRORAMPHA SUBSEQUANA. Tortrix subsequana, Haworth; Stephens; Wood, fig. 1021. June and October. TINEID2. 246. ALAVONA BARBARELLA. Alavona barbarella, Walker, xxviti. 515. May and June, in great numbers. 247, ALAVONA COSSUSELLA. Alavona cossusella, Walker, xxxv. 1816. June and July, in great numbers in the former month. 464 COL. C. SWINHOE ON THE [Nov. 16, 248. ALAVONA INDECORELLA ? Alavona indecorella, Walker, xxviii. 515. June. Four male specimens, all more or less rubbed ; they are in size and appearance more like Walker’s type of the above than of any other insect in this genus, but they cannot safely be determined as iden- tical with this species. 249, ALAvONA MINOR, Walsingham, n. sp. (Plate XLI. figs. 10, 11, 5 @-) Palpi dull ochreous, shaded with brownish beneath ; head ochreous; antennz cinereous ; thorax brownish. Fore wings pale whitish fawn, shaded at the base of the costal margin with brownish, a series of brown spots around the apical and outer portions of the costal margins; between these and the end of the cell, in brightly marked specimens, is a second series of similar spots parallel to the apical margin, but turning outward to the anal angle at their lower end; a brownish spot is situated at the upper angle of the cell, another on the outer third of the fold. The markings in this species appear to be frequently almost obsolete, but the marginal spots are nearly always distinguishable. Hind wings slightly paler than the fore wings; abdomen tinged with brownish. Male, expanse 24 millim. The female has no markings, so far as can be judged froma single Specimen in poor condition, but is much smaller than the female of Alavona cossusella, Walker. Female, expanse 26 millim. June and July, common. 250. TINEA SUBOCHRACEELLA, Walsingham, n.sp. (Plate XLI. fig. 9.) Head tufted, bright yellowish ochreous ; labial palpi ochreous, faintly tinged with greyish, short and drooping, not thickly clothed; maxillary palpi as long as the labials. Fore wings shining ochreous, faintly tinged at the base of the costa and about the fringes and apex of the wings with purplish grey. Hind wings greyish ochreous, with a slight coppery tinge; abdomen and legs pale ochreous. Expanse 13 millim. April. A single specimen, received from the Rev. J. H. Hocking, from Dharmsala, by Lord Walsingham, measures 15 millim. in the expanse of the fore wings. Two others of my Mhow specimens Lord Walsingham says are apparently not distinct from this species, although one of them is slightly larger in size (expanse 17 millim.), and is almost entirely devoid of the greyish tinge of the fore wings. The insect has much the appearance of Myrmecocela ochraceella, Tgstr., but differs in the form of the labial palpi. 1886. ] LEPIDOPTERA OF MHOW. 465 251. HapsIrERA DEVIELLA. Drosica deviella, Walker, xxviii. 520. January, June, and July. 252, SETOMORPHA TINEOIDES, Walsingham, n.sp. (Plate XLI. fig. 8.) Palpi pale greyish above, tinged with fuscous beneath; antennze greyish fuscous ; thorax and fore wings spotted and mottled with ill- defined patches of brownish fuscous scales, these are very numerous across the middle of the wing and form a series of spots around the costal, apical, and a portion of dorsal margins. Hind wings greyish, with a faint purplish tinge ; abdomen greyish fuscous. Expanse of wings 14 millim. April, May, and June. CRYPTOLECHIID. 253. DEPRESSARIA SWINHOEI. Depressaria swinhoet, Butler, P. Z. 8S. 1883, p. 174. October. EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES, Puate XL. . Aphneus estivus, nu. sp., p. 428. Ypthima complexiva, 2, n. sp., p. 428. Charaxes agrarius, 3, U. sp., p. 425. . Nilasera apella, 3, n. sp., p. 429. Bireta galbana, un. sp., p. 498. Leucania byssina, n. sp., p. 442. Mestleta baccalix, nu. sp., p. 452. Dabarita icterica, u. sp., p. 489. . Susica cosmiana, 2, nu. sp., p. 440. . Radinacra variana, u. sp., p. 444. Fig. SSO OMI SUH G9 POE — Puate XLI, Eupterote ignavus, 3, 2. sp., p. 440. . Hypotia allalis, n. sp., p. 462. . Chilo ortellus, S, un. sp., p. 461. Jartheza cassimella, $, un. sp., p. 461. Pradatia beatriz, nu. sp., p. 442. Jartheza cassimella, 2, p. 461. . Sterrha paulula, nu. sp., p. 456. . Setomorpha tineoides, n. sp., p. 465. . Tinea subochraceella, n. sp., p. 464. . Alavona minor, S, u. sp., p. 464. , 2, p. 464. . Leucinodes auxialis, n. sp., p. 458. . Glyphodes fessalis, n. sp. p. 459. . Terache nivosa, n, sp., p. 446. Fig. SO OO IS OVE G9 bO peti i=) ell ll od Co bor Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XXXI. 31 466 DR. R. W. SHUFELDT ON Nov. 16, 2. Contributions to the Anatomy of Geococcyx californianus. By R. W. Suuretpt, C.M.Z.S. [Received June 28, 1886.] (Plates XLII.-XLV.) The investigations I am enabled to record in the present paper have been made possible through the kindness of Mr. W. F. Peacock, of Marysville, California. This gentleman on the 23rd of July, 1885, came into possession of a fine male Geococcyx, which had been captured for him alive by a man who had run the specimen down on horseback. Mr. Peacock, having been informed by me that I only desired the skeleton of the species, killed and eviscerated it, and filled the abdominal cavity with powdered charcoal and pyroligneous acid, which preparation brought it safely into my hands after three days’ travel during the most sultry weather. Upon receiving it I at once consigned it to a vessel containing strong alcohol; so that, at this date (May 1886), the specimen is before me in excellent condition. Owing to the fact, however, that it has been eviscerated, I am unable upon the present occasion to say anything about those organs which are situated in the thorax and abdomen, and will confine myself principally to examinations of the muscles of the limbs, the carotids, the trachea (if it be not injured), and the pterylosis. It will be remembered by those who are familiar with my work that I have already published a full account of the skeleton of Geococcyz elsewhere’, and to that paper the present memvir may be considered a second instalment. Just now I am far removed by many thousand miles from the libraries and museums, and in a country where such American forms as might with profit be compared with our present subject do not occur. I have by me, however, an excellent field library, consisting of many of the standard anatomical works, including the collected ‘Scientific Papers”? of Garrod and Forbes. Neither of the last- named anatomists have anything to say about our Ground-Cuckoo, and I am inclined to think that neither of those untiring workers in avian morphology ever came into possession of such material. Further, so far as my memory serves me, no one has yet paid any special attention to the structure of Geococcyx californianus. This being the case, I have reason to hope that my present contributions will not come amiss. Garrod’s investigations upon the anatomy of the Cuculide demonstrated the fact that both of the carotid arteries are present in these birds (Coll. Scientif. Papers, p. 169). His statement to this effect is based upon his having examined the following species :— 1 Journ, of Anat, and Physiology, Lond. vol. xx. pt. 2, Jan. 1886, pp. 244- 266, pls. vii., viii., and ix. on NVYINUOATTVI XAIIOIOAD AO ANOLVNV “wy mUS “P dure qaeyueyy 1886. Pl. XLII. Lo. Py uy) Sa are mg ANATOMY OF GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS, “Manhattan J. Smit Tith . a eas “SANVINNOAITVO XA9900049 JO AWOLYNY aE ls Hest duit queyuey “SQNVINHOALTTVYO XADDOVO4S AO ANOLVNV WL HG‘ SNS eh OB Ge Si ict 1886.] GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS. 467 Cuculus canorus, Cacomantis sepulcralis, Chrysococcys sp., Centropus senegalensis, Guira piririgua, Pheenicophaes sp. The same authority finds the accessory femoro-caudal muscle present in :— Centropus senegalensis, Centropus phasianus, Guira piririgua, Phenicophaes sp., and absent in the following species :— Cuculus canorus, Chrysococcyx sp., Cacomantis sepulcralis. Of this latter peculiarity Mr. Garrod said, “ Amongst the Cuculide, the Ground-Cuckoos (Centropus, Guira, Phenicophaes) differ from Cuculus and its allies in having the accessory femoro-caudal developed, whilst it is absent in the latter, their respective formule being AB. XY., and A. XY. This peculiarity, when added to those in the pterylosis, justifies the division of the family into two subfamilies, which may be termed the Centropodine and the Cuculine ” (oe. cit. . 210). 4 According to this author, the ambiens muscle also being present in the Cuculidee it throws this group into the subclass named by him the Homalogonate ; and Mr. Garrod brings forward his very interest- ing researches upon the plantar tendons in birds to still further support his classification of this particular group. The arrangement of these tendons I will again reter to further on. Cuculidze have the czeca also present and possess a nude oil-gland. To briefly recapitulate, then, the above and a few other structural characters of this group brought to light by this talented investigator, we find that the Cuculide are homalogonatous birds with two carotids; with the sciatic artery the main one in the leg (except Centropus); Ciconine, as regards the presence of the expansor secundariorum muscle (see Garrod’s Coll. Scientif. Papers, pp. 323- 29); and finally, as I say, have a nude oil-gland and the ceca. Forbes examined specimens of Geococcyz affinis, and showed some interesting points in regard to the bursa Fabricii, which in the Cucu- lide he says “ presents a very characteristic shape, the peduncle being long and thin, and the extremity club-shaped, giving the whole somewhat the appearance of a shortened and clumsy antenna of a butterfly. It disappears completely in adult birds” (Forbes’s Coll. Scientif. Papers, p. 11). This author, on the page of the work quoted, presents us with a figure of the cloaca and bursa of Geococcyx affinis. 31* 468 DR. R. W. SHUFELDT ON [Nov. 16, At the present time, the American Ornithologists’ Union place the Cuckoos of this country in an order Coccyges, having three sub- orders, the Cuculi, the Trogones, and the Aleyones, our genus Geococcyx falling into the first under the subfamily Coccygine, there being one other associated with it, the genus Coccyzus. Not long ago I showed some of the peculiarities of the coloration and extent of the naked skin-tracts upon the head of this bird’; I regret to say, however, that I have not at hand an account of the pterylosis of the Cuculidz, so on the present occasion I must content myself with an accurate description of that feature in Geococeyx californianus, and leave the comparisons to be made by others who may be more fortunate in this respect. Of the Pterylosis of Geecoccyx. So carefully have I drawn the two views of our subject, which are presented in Plate XLII., showing the pterylee and their exact limits and extent, that a few words will suffice to complete the description. It will be seen that the “capital area” is quite complete, being broken only by the naked and coloured skin-tracts about the eye and on the back of the head. These latter vermilion-tinted skin areas are divided in the median line behind by a very narrow pteryla, which is directly continuous with the posterior middle strip of an equal width, and which terminates at the root of the neck, where it is somewhat abruptly lost in a central, sparsely scattered tract, just anterior to the spinal pterylosis. This posterior cervical strip is continuous above with the capital area. Upon the anterior cervical region we find the tract quite broad above, where it is continuous with the feather-tracts of the gular space; but as we proceed down the front of the neck this tract bifureates at about halfway between the trunk and the throat, each separate strip thus formed being extended on either side to a point opposite a clavicular head, where it merges into the “ ventral” and ‘‘ humeral tracts.” A “humeral tract ” is but faintly marked in our Ground-Cuckoo ; and it is seen to pass, on the posterior aspect of the brachium, from the shoulder toward the elbow, but is gradually lost before it arrives at the latter point (Plate XLII. fig. 1). The “ventral tracts” are very broad anteriorly, and are bounded mesially by curved lines, which overlie the clavicular limbs. These tracts, on either side, also bifurcate as we proceed in the direction of the abdomen. The outer strip grows gradually narrower, and makes a graceful curve round under the arm-pit, below which it abruptly terminates. The mesial strip formed by the bifurcation of the ventral tract is long and narrow, being gently convex outwards for its entire length. The distal extremities of these strips become extremely slender as they converge towards the vent, around which they pass to merge with each other behind this opening, and with the feather-tract covering the underside of the coceygeal protu- berance (Plate XLII. fig. 2). 1 Ibis, 1885, pp. 286-288, pl. vii. 1886. | GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS, 469 The spinal pterylosis is represented by two broad, longitudinal tracts well separated from each other in the middle line by a naked- skin area overlying the vertebral column. These spinal pteryle gradually converge towards each other as they approach the pelvic region, over which they merge into one feather-space, which becomes pointed behind and terminates just in front of the nude oil- gland. The upperside of the coccygeal protuberance is also sparsely feathered, being divided from a more generously covered area below by the line of horizontally arranged pits for the quill-butts of the rectrices of the tail. An exceedingly narrow tract, on either side, springs from the posterior margin of the outer bifurcation of the ventral tract just below the arm-pit, to run longitudinally down the side, in front of the thigh, to become lost before it arrives at the margin of the vent. This strip seems to be composed simply of a double row of feathers, and might appropriately be termed the lateral tract. The patagium of the arm is very thinly feathered anteriorly, while its dorsal aspect is quite completely covered ; the remainder of the pterylosis of the pectoral limb presents us with nothing of a peculiar nature. The posterior marginal boundary of this “ alar tract’ is, as usual, terminated by the row of quill-butts of the primary feathers of the wing. Passing now to the crural region, we find a posterior limb but sparsely feathered, while a conspicuous ‘‘ femoral tract’ extends obliquely across the dorsal aspect of the thigh, and rapidly narrow- ing, runs along the pubic line, finally merging into the “ caudal tract.’ Geococcyxr shows its best-marked apteria in front, in the mesial space between the inner strips of the ventral tracts, and laterally to the outer side of the spinal pterylosis, where, indeed, for a con- siderable space no feathers may be said to occur at all. A well- marked dorso-longitudinal naked area is also to be seen. In this Ground-Cuckoo we notice a membrane, stretching between the thigh and leg, which corresponds to the patagial fold of the pectoral limb, and fully as well-developed. Before closing this part of our subject it is of interest to observe the general form of Geococcyz, which, now that its feathers have been removed, can be studied to the best advantage. It will be seen how perfectly its figure has come to assume a shape best adapted to the peculiar requirements of the bird. Its pelvic limbs are large, muscular, and consequently powerful, while the pectoral ones are decidedly less so, though by no means weak or inefficient. The body-form of this prince of avian racers is what almost might be called “clipper built,” so admirably fashioned is it to the needs and ends of a rapid running bird of the size of our subject. With these few remarks upon the external organization and appearance of Geococcyz we will now close this part of our discussion, and pass to the consideration of some of the features presented in the structure of the remainder of its economy. 470 DR. R. W. SHUFELDT ON [Nov. 16, On the Mode of Insertion of the Patagial Muscles of the Pectoral Limb. Having considerable faith in the value in classification of the arrangement of the insertional extremities of the tendon of the tensor patagiti brevis muscle, and the forms of the patagial muscles gene- rally, as single characters, it was with no little interest that I carefully removed with my scalpel the integuments over this region, for the first time in my experience in Geococcyx. ‘The late Mr. Garrod’s excellent work in this direction is now familiar to all ornithologists ; but on this occasion I refrained from consulting any of the accurate drawings he has left us illustrating these parts in many groups of birds until I had actually completed my dissection, and my drawing of it, which is shown in Plate XLIII. fig. 2. I then opened his ‘‘ Collected Scientific Papers” and proceeded to compare my figure with his numerous illustrations of the same dissection among other birds. Being familiar with the arrangement of this tendon in a great many North-American birds from my own labours, I was confident that the condition of things in Geococcyx californianus was a marked departure from anything I had previously met; nor did I expect to find anything in Garrod’s illustrations that would prove to be exactly like it. But in this last hope I was very agreeably disappointed, for I find that it corresponds almost exactly with the state of affairs found by this talented anatomist to be present in certain Galbulidee. To satisfy one’s self of this fact it is but necessary to compare my figure with the Jacamar dissected by Mr. Garrod, as shown in his work (plate 23. fig. 1, tendon of tensor patagii brevis in Urogalba paradisea), and the striking resemblance will be at once appreciated. He has simply cleared his tendon more completely of its investing fascia than I have, and still further separated its several slips; while in my figure of Geococcyx the tendon is shown as it presents itself immediately after turning back the integuments, or, in other words, exactly im situ. The liberty taken by Mr. Garrod to still further show these slips and their exact insertions is perfectly permissible, and often resorted to for the purpose named. It will be seen that after the tendon of the tensor patagii brevis arrives over the proximal third of the belly of the extensor metacarpi radialis longior muscle in Geococeyx it trifurcates, one slip passing downwards to become inserted immediately below and on the outer aspect of the extensor carpi ulnaris muscle; the shortest slip at once attaches itself to the extensor metacarpi radialis longior, while the longest division of all passes with the last-named muscle to become inserted with it upon the outer condyle of the humerus. As for the muscular portion of these patagial muscles above in this Ground-Cuckoo, I have represented them with the arm turned somewhat differently than the position Mr. Garrod was wont to give it. It will be seen, however, that the bulk of this muscular portion in he hag as in Urogalba, belongs to the tensor patagit brevis muscle. . 1886. | GEOCOCCYX CALTFORNIANUS. 471 It is still further interesting to compare the arrangement of these tendons in Geococcy« with the similar structures as they were found to exist by Mr. Garrod in Upupa epops and Cuculus canorus, both of which are figured upon the same plate alluded to above. We at once observe that our subject differs considerably in these particulars not only from the Hoopoe, but still more from the Cuckoo. Indeed, so far as Upupa is concerned, it simply lacks the long slip going to the humeral condyle in order to make the arrangement of the insertional extremities of the tensor patagii brevis agree with the corresponding arrangement as found in my specimen of Geococcyx. So far as this one character is concerned, then, it points to the fact that a certain affinity exists connecting our Geococcyax with the Galbulide. europeus. Fig. 2. The same of the left wing of Steatornis. (Both figures after Garrod.) tpb, tensor patagii brevis; ecr, extensor carpi radialis (extensor meta- carpi radialis longior of the present writer); 0, biceps; d, deltoid ; ¢, triceps ; 4, humerus. Further, the marked difference in this particular between Geo- coccyx and Cuculus canorus is not to be overlooked. Now, strange to say, there is still another (and what we must believe to be a widely separated) group of birds that possesses an arrangement of the insertional extremity of the tensor patagii brevis very much as we find it in our present subject. These are no others than the Caprimulgi. I reproduce (figs. 1 & 2) Prof. Garrod’s figures of these parts in Steatornis and Caprimulgus europeus, the better to show this simi- larity. It will be seen in these Caprimulgine birds, however, that the lowest slip merges with the fascia to the outer side of the ulna, while in my specimen of Geococcya it goes to the extensor carpi ulnaris muscle. Garrod pointed out another character of some value, which he 472 DR. R. W. SHUFELDT ON [Nov. 16, discovered during his dissections of the arms of birds ; this was the presence or absence of the expansor secundariorum muscle (Coll. Sci. Papers, p. 323). As this delicate muscle and its tendon is well developed in the Storks, he, for convenience sake, termed it the Ciconine character. He found the Cuculide to be Ciconine birds so far as this structure was concerned, but I find after a very careful search in both pectoral limbs of my specimen of Geococcy« that this character is missing in it. This, then, constitutes another difference between Geococcyx and the Cuculidee. Of the Pectoral Muscles. All three of the pectoral muscles are present in this bird, and all conspicuously developed, although the pectoralis tertius is consider- ably larger in comparison than is usually the case. Their muscular fibres are remarkable for their fine texture and compactness, both of which qualities, added to their pale colour, lend to these structures a very delicate appearance. Nothing of a peculiar nature seems to distinguish either the pectoralis major or secundus, as they both arise and are inserted ina manner common to the majority of the class. On the other hand, the pectoralis tertius, although inserted as we usually find it in birds, has no sternal origin, but arises from the externo-anterior aspect of the sternal extremity of the coracoid, as well as from the side of the shaft of the same bone. Recent dissections of mine, performed upon various species of the Corvidee, go to show that in them this muscle has quite an extensive origin upon the sternum, and its bulk sinks into insignificance when compared with the size of the great pectoral as it exists in all of the species of this latter group which I have examined. On the Myology of the Pelvic Limb in Geococcyx. Quite recently I have completed a very extensive chapter on the muscles of birds, and the MS. of this piece of work, with the nearly one hundred woodcuts that illustrate it, are at hand at the present writing. So with the bird now before us I will, without further explanation, adopt the myological nomenclature which I have proposed in my MS., without discussion of such points as wherein I may differ in homologies or terms with other authorities. Such differences, and I trust they may be few and well sustained, must be left for decision until such time as the work referred to appears in type. It is my aim here to enter quite extensively into the description of the muscles of the pelvic limb of Geococcyx, as they offer us many points of interest. We find the sartorius muscle (Plate XLIV. fig. 1, S) powerfully developed in Geococey#, as are the majority of the muscles of the thigh in this bird. It arises, semitendinous, from the crest of the neural spine of the last vertebra of the dorsal region of the spine, from the summit of the anterior portion of the crista of the sacrum, and from the adjacent surface of the superior aspect of the ilium on the cor- 1886. ] GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS. 473 responding side. The fibres, forming an oblong and rather thick muscle, pass downwards and backwards to the region in front of the knee. Here it becomes inserted by a special slip of fascia that is thrown off and merges with the general fascia surrounding the knee- joint ; and, secondly, by a more carneous insertion into the inner half of the superior rim of the cnemial crest of the tibia and the continuous inner margin of the summit of that bone. The sartorius bounds anteriorly the superficial group of muscles of the thigh; consequently its anterior border is free. Its posterior border above unites quite intimately with the overlapping gluteus primus muscle ; while this border below is sharp and free, although here, too, the gluteus also overlaps it, and a delicate connective tissue binds them together. The gluteus primus (Plate XLIV. fig. 1, gl.pr) constitutes that great and rather complex muscle which makes up the central fleshy portion of the outer aspect of the thigh. It arises by a strong fascia from the summit of the coossified neural spines of the anterior sacral vertebrae, and by carneous fibres from the outer rim and under surface of the whorl-like, overarching portion of the ilium behind ; and finally from the contiguous portion of the pelvis over the anti- trochanter, between these anterior and posterior origins. In front the muscle consists first of a strong layer of semitendinous fascia, which closely overlies the gluteus medius muscle beneath it, and overlaps the sartorius anteriorly. The posterior origin and mid- division become rapidly carneous and more massive as we proceed in the direction of the caudal extremity of the body. So that, where we find it arising from beneath the overarching part of the ilium behind, the muscle fills about one fourth of the convexity there formed, the semitendinosus filling the remainder of this curious cavity. The fibres of the strong, semitendinous, muscular sheet springing from these several origins, or rather along this continuous line of origin, now pass, converging as they do so, towards the anterior aspect of the knee-joint. The semitendinous portion anteriorly be- comes fleshy as it arrives along the outer pelvic margin, with which it is quite intimately connected. The hinder division of the muscle remains thick and carneous until it comes to the knee-joint. Here all the fibres again become tendinous and fascia-like, and, uniting with a similar structure contributed by the ewtensor femoris lying beneath it, the combined sheath thus formed surrounding the well- developed patella, closely invests the front and sides of the knee- joint, and is finally inserted all round the anterior and externo- lateral borders of the summit of the tibia. The most superficial muscles of the leg are the gastrocnemius-and the peroneus longus. As we would naturally expect, the gastrocnemius muscle (Plate XLIV. fig. 1, g) in Geocoecy# is wonderfully well-developed. All three of its heads are strongly defined, and the fleshy belly of the muscle is massive and thick. Its evternal head arises, curiously enough, by two perfectly distinct tendinous slips. One of these, a strong, flat tendon, comes off from 474 DR. R. W. SHUFELDT ON [Nov. 16, the outer surface of the external condyle of the femur, while the second slip, also strong but somewhat more rounded, arises from the back of the external femoral condyle, just above the trochlear surface. Between these two tendons of the external head of the gastrocnemius we find the loop for the diceps and the tendon of that musele itself, the loop being quite intimately attached to the free edge of the outer tendon. Below the loop, these tendons merge with each other and terminate in the commencing fibres that compose the external head of the gastrocnemius proper. The internal head of the gastrocnemius, or what is really the middle head in birds, is quite median in position, and is represented merely by a long, narrow, muscular slip that arises by a delicate, though strong, cord-like, teudon from the middle of the intercondyloid notch of the femur. The ¢ibial head of the muscle under consideration is massive in its dimensions when compared with the divisions of origin of the gastrocnemius already described. It arises fleshy from an extensive surface on the inner aspect of the head of the tibia as high up as the marginal boundary of its summit; and from the muscular fascia surrounding certain of the deep thigh-muscles, which are inserted into the distal end of the femur, and consequently are adjacent to the posterior aspect of the head of the tibia. At a point about opposite the junction of the upper and middle third of the shaft of the tibia the internal and tibial heads of the gastrocnemius merge with each other, while between their free edges above passes the exceedingly delicate tendon of the semimembranosus muscle. All of the fibres of this complicated origin of the gastrocnemius muscle now converge and pass directly down the back of the leg of the bird. They also merge with each other in such a manner that, were we to examine the muscle at about the middle third of the leg, we would find it composed of two well-defined bellies, rather thin, nearly of equal size, united somewhat firmly by an intervening fascia, and each being convex on their superficial aspect and the reverse on their under sides, which concavity accurately moulds itself to the deeper layer of muscles of the leg, which the gastrocnemius com- pletely covers. At the lower fourth of the tibial shaft the fibres terminate in a broad, flat, and glistening tendon, which passes flat-wise over the shallow and longitudinal groove of the ¢isial cartilage, at which point the tendon is considerably thickened. Next, crossing the tibio-tarsal joint, it becomes internally attached to the hinder surface of the hypotarsus of the metatarsal bone, below which protuberance it finally merges into the deeper layer of the podothecal sheath con- fining the flexor tendons. The peroneus longus (Plate XLIV. fig. 1, p./) arises from the entire free margin of the cnemial crest in front of the head of the tibia, and by somewhat specialized, though delicate, tendons, one each from the apices of the pro- and ectocnemial processes of the same part of the bone. These latter tendons pass down on the under surface 1886. ] GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS. 475 of the muscle, which latter must be cut across and reflected in order to discover them. From this origin the peroneus longus as a rather thick, concavo-convex muscle passes down in front of the leg, its outer edge dipping down for attachment between the ¢idialis anticus muscle, which it almost completely covers, and the flexors to its outer side ; its inner edge is free and thin, and overlaps the gastrocnemius. Low down on the outer side of the tibial shaft the fibres of the peroneus longus have converged to terminate in a small narrow tendon. This tendon, just above the condyles of the tibia, bifureates, the short slip of the bifurcation going to the fascia covering the block of cartilage (which I have termed the tibial cartilage) at the back of the tibio-tarsal joint for attachment, while the longer slip passes across the articulation to the bundle of tendons at the back of the tarso-metatarsus to merge with one of the special flexors. Removing this superficial layer of muscles of the pelvic limb and turning our attention once more to the thigh, the following ones are presented to our view for examination :— The gluteus medius muscle (Plate XLIV. fig. 2, gl.m) is found to be strong and tendinous. It, as in all of the birds that I have examined, fills the concavity of the preacetabular portion of the pelvis, and here in Geococcyx extends laterally much beyond the bone, as this bird has a very narrow pelvis anteriorly, while it demands the use of a powerful set of gluteal muscles. The gluteus medius arises by a strong, flat tendon from the superior surface of the outer moiety of the anterior iliac margin, by a dense fascia from the entire line bounding the preacetabular concavity, and finally by fleshy fibres from the upperside of the ilium itself. The fibres of the roundish muscle thus formed converge as they pass to the caput femoris, and, just before arriving at the bone, they terminate in a dense flat tendon, which, passing over a bursa, is inserted at a point on the antero-external aspect of the femoral trochanter. The gluteus minimus (Plate XLIV. fig. 2, g/.min) is a very much smaller muscle than the gluteus medius, and is found immediately beneath it to its outer side. In form it is oblong, and fully three times as long as wide. It arises from the outer superior surface of the fore part of the ilium, and passing obliquely downwards and backwards as a flat narrow band of fibres, it becomes inserted by semitendinous ones on the outer aspect of the upper third of the femur, just below the trochanter. This muscle may also ride over a small bursa, just before it arrives at its insertion. The extensor femoris is readily divisible at its lower half into two parts, the bulkier anterior one representing the erureus (Plate XLIV. fig. 2, er), and the posterior division the vastus externus (Plate XLIV. fig. 2, V.E). As awhole, this powerful extensor of the leg upon the thigh arises from the antero-external aspect of nearly the entire length of the shaft of the femur, and from a portion of the trochanter at its summit. At about its lower fourth it terminates in a broad tendinous expansion, which, as has already been described, is amply reinforced by other insertional portions of the superficial muscles of the thigh. 476 DR. R, W. SHUFELDT ON [Nov. 16, The patella is found encased in front in this great tendinous sheath of the knee-joint, and below the apex of this sesamoid we find the enveloped track of the tendon of the ambiens muscles, as it passes round in front of the femoro-tibial articulation. The combined tendon of the extensor femoris is finally inserted into the cnemial crest of the tibial and the lateral boundaries of the summit of that bone. Some of the superficial muscles on the outer side of the leg are so extended as to take a certain amount of their origin from this great tendinous expansion. In Plate XLIV. fig. 2 I have very thoroughly divided these two sub- divisions of the extensor femoris, in order to show their relative size, as well as their relation to each other and the surrounding structures. The biceps flexor cruris (Plate XLIV. fig. 1; fig. 2, Bi) arises by carneous fibres upon quite an extensive portion of the under surface of the over-curled part of the ilium behind the acetabulum, and by along tendinous slip which comes off from the free anterior margin of this part of the ilium. The fibres converge as they pass downwards, and unite to form a somewhat flattened muscle. Opposite the head of the tibia, the biceps terminates in a round tendon, of cord-like dimen- sions, which passes through a special loop to make its way between some of the muscles at the back of the leg, to become inserted on the tubercle intended for it on the outer side of the superior moiety of the shaft of the fibula. The loop of the biceps (Plate XLV. fig. 1,2) is flat and fashioned like a delicate tendinous ribbon. Its upper end arises from the side of the shaft of the femur above the external condyle, while the lower end comes off from this protuberance just below the insertion of the outer slip of the external head of the gastrocnemius muscle. A branch of the sciatic nerve also passes through this loop in company with the tendon of the biceps. The semitendinosus (Plate XLIV. figs. 1, 2, St; Plate XLV. fig. 1, S¢) isa marvellously well-developed muscle in this form, as is also its accessory head. Its origin fills about three fourths of the nether cavity formed by the posterior overarching portion of the ilium, under which it arises. Posteriorly, the fibres forming its free margin are so arranged as to create a rounded border ; the lower end of its are terminating about opposite the post-pubis of the pelvis. From this origin the fibres of the semitendinosus pass downwards and forwards as a great, though somewhat compressed muscle. When within rather more than a centimetre’s length of the shaft of the femur, they terminate in an oblique tendinous raphe, which latter forms the bounding-line between this muscle and the next. The accessory semitendinosus (Plate XLV. fig. 1, a.s.¢) is com- posed of coarser fibres than the muscle just described. It springs from a longitudinal line occupying the distal half of the shaft of the femur, and from the upper surface of the hinder aspect of the external condyle of that bone. The fibres pass backwards and a little upwards to become inserted into the tendinous raphe just alluded to. The lower extremity of this tendinous raphe terminates, in Geococcyx, in a thin, flat, and delicate tendon, which continues down- 1886. ] GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS. 477 wards and forwards to the inner surface of the head of the tibia, where it becomes inserted, the point of insertion being found above that of the semimembranosus muscle, the insertional tendon of which overlaps it. The semimembranosus (Plate XLIV. figs. 1,2; Plate XLV. fig. 1, Sm) in Geococcyz, though thoroughly developed, is rather a slender and thin muscle, markedly so when we compare it with the massive semitendinosus which overlies it. It arises from the outer surface of the ischium, for its posterior two thirds, on a line situated a few millimetres above the lower free edge of that element of the pelvis. The fibres gradually converge as they pass downwards and forwards, to terminate in a very delicate and thin ribbon-like tendon, which, passing between the broad tibial head of the gastrocnemius and the proximal extremity of the shaft of the tibia, becomes finally thereupon inserted on its internal surface. The hinder margin of the semimembranosus is free, while its border anteriorly is juxtaposed to the posterior edge of the adductors. In the bird before us the ambiens muscle (Plate XLV. fig. 1, amd) is conspicuously developed. It arises from the apex of the prominent prepubic spine of the pelvis, and the fibres passing directly down to the inner side of the femur, and parallel with that bone, form a strong fusiform muscle. As it approaches the patella it terminates in a small flattened tendon, which, piercing the fascial envelop of the knee-joint below the inferior apex of that sesamoid, passes round the joint, to become finally lost to the outer side and opposite the summit of the tibia, where some of its tendinous fibres merge with the fibres of origin of the flexor perforatus digitorum, or, at least, with one of its divisions. The amébiens is overlaid by the sartorius muscle, and in the figure is brought into view only through the aid of a small dissecting-hook and chain, which pull it forwards in order that it may be better seen. The femoro-caudal muscle and the accessory femovro-caudal are both present and fully developed. The femoro-caudal (Plate XLV. fig. 1, fc) arises, tendinous, from the lower posterior border of the pygostyle. It soon becomes fleshy and as a narrow, muscular ribbon passes through the tissues over- lying the lateral group of caudal muscles proper. Opposite the posterior border of the pelvis it expands to form a prettily-shaped and compressed spindle, closely covering the obturator externus muscle and the side of that bone. As it nears the femur it again contracts, receives the fibres of its accessory head, and is finally inserted upon the femoral shaft, at the posterior aspect of its prox- imal third. The accessory femoro-caudal (Plate XLV. fig. 1, a.f-c) arises be- neath the overarching part of the postacetabular portion of the ilium, just behind the acetabulum and beyond. Its fibres pass obliquely downwards and forwards to join with those of the femoro-caudal, and to become inserted with them into the upper part of the femur as already described. The obturator externus (Plate XLV. fig. 1, 0.e) arises from the outer surface of the ischium above the ‘obturator space,” the 478 : DR. R. W. SHUFELDT ON [Nov. 16, muscle being thin and closely pressed to the pelvis. The fibres converge as they near the femur and terminate in a strong, flat tendon which becomes inserted on the outer aspect of the trochanter of that bone, which insertion is slightly overlapped by the tendon of the gluteus medius muscle. The adductors arise from the infero-external margin of the ischium, between the anterior edge of the semimembranosus and the obturator foramen. The adductor longus (Plate XLV. fig. 1, a./) is the more anterior of the two and consequently arises the higher on the pelvis, and comes off in front of the adductor magnus, which it largely overlaps. Its fibres pass obliquely to the posterior aspect of the shaft of the femur, down which they become inserted as far as its middle, along the linea aspera, a line which is well marked in our subject. The adductor magnus (Plate XLV. fig. 1, a.m), like the one just described, is also a broad ribbon-like muscle, arising from the ischium between the semimembranosus and a middle point on the underside of the adductor longus, close up to its semitendinous origin. Anteriorly its margin is free, while posteriorly it is juxtaposed to the anterior border of the semimembranosus. Passing parallel with those of the other adductor, its fibres are inserted into the distal moiety of the linea aspera of the femoral shaft, down to the intercondyloid notch of that bone, where this muscle makes a very substantial insertion. Removing all the muscles of the thigh thus far described, we find that in this region we have the following ones remaining. They are shown in my drawing (Plate XLV. fig. 2), together with a few as yet undescribed muscles of the leg. A very important muscle is the obturator internus (Plate XLY. fig. 2, 0.2), and in Geococcyx it exists as we find it in the majority of the class. Prof. Garrod laid some stress on the point whether this muscle arose from a triangular or an oval area. Here it arises from a decidedly oval one, and as usual this is from the mesial sur- faces of the ischium and the post-pubic element of the pelvis. Its tendon emerges from the obturator foramen, and overlapping the gemellus muscle, passes to the outer aspect of the upper part of the trochanter of the femur, where it is inserted. The gemellus (Plate XLV. fig. 2, ge) is a short, thick, carneous muscle, which arises about the outer rim of the obturator foramen of the pelvis. Its fibres passing obliquely upwards and forwards are in- serted with the tendon of the obturator internus muscle on the tro- chanter of the femur. This bird also has a few of the fibres of its gemellus muscle inserted into the tendon of the obturator externus muscle, at least I found this to be the case in the specimen before me. We find the vastus internus (Plate XLV. fig. 2, v.z) to be a strong, fusiform muscle, that is only fully discovered after we have removed the ambiens and the adductors. it lies on the postero-internal aspect of the shaft of the femur, arising from the linea aspera nearly as high up as the head of that bone, and increasing in bulk as it descends, still making attachment to the linea aspera, it only becomes free just above the condyles. At this point it terminates in a flat tendon, which, crossing the articulation of the knee, becomes inserted into the i886.) GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS. 479 front part of the inner marginal rim of the summit of the tibia. This muscle constitutes a powerful auxillary to the action of the extensor femoris, and it appears to be quite a constant one in the class Aves. The description of the vastus internus completes our account of the musculature of the thigh. A brief recapitulation of them shows us that Geococcyx possesses in this region all of the muscles that we usually find there in birds. The entire group including the ambiens, the femoro-caudal, the accessory femoro-caudal, the semitendinosus, the accessory semi- tendinosus, and the semimembranosus, so ably introduced into taxonomy by Garrod, are all present and wonderfully well developed. Then we have all three glutei represented, with an ample extensor femoris, and its auxiliary the vastus internus, a handsome biceps flewor cruris, with its interesting pulley at the back of the knee. Next, the two obturators and the gemellus; and finally two powerful adductors, the magnus and longus. We may now once more direct our attention to the leg, and investigate the muscles there found in its second layer. First among these stands the ¢ibialis anticus (Plate XLIV. figs. 1, 2, tib.ant). This interesting muscle arises, as most commonly among birds, by two very distinct heads. The under and at the same time the smaller one of these comes off by a tendon from a little pit that is found on the anterior aspect of the external condyle of the femur; the second or larger portion of the muscle completely covers over the first, except of course its tendon, which extends further up. This latter head arises from a line extending all round within the cnemial crest and the pro- and ectocnemial ridges of the tibia. The fibres of the two heads extend directly down in front of the tibial shaft, at the lower third of which they gradually merge with each other, and finally terminate in a strong tendon, which, passing through the oblique fibrous loop, or bridge rather, at the front and lower end of the tibia, pass across the tibio-tarsal joint, to become inserted on the anterior surface of the upper third of the tarso-metatarsus bone, just below its head. The soleus (Plate XLV. fig. 2, so), found at the back of the leg, is another well-developed muscle of this layer in Geococcyz californi- anus. It arises from behind the tibia, on its inner side, and just below the marginal rim of its summit. The fibres at once form a little flat muscle, rather longer in shape than the fish from which it derives its name, and soon terminate at the lower or tail-end in a tendon. This tendon, long and narrow, passes directly down the postero-internal aspect of the leg to become inserted into the dense fascia covering the tibial cartilage at its supero-internal angle. Great care and patience are necessary in the study of the arrange- ment and distribution of the tendons of the flexors and extensors in the leg and foot of a bird, and to this rule Geococcya by no means forms any exception. In describing these I will present them in the order that they most conveniently came under my hand after the removal of the muscles alluded to in the foregoing paragraphs. 480 DR. R, W. SHUFELDT ON [Nov. 16, After we have cut away the ¢ibialis anticus, we find another, and only one other, muscle occupying the anterior aspect of the tibia. This is the extensor longus digitorum. The extensor longus digitorum (Plate XLY. fig. 1, e.l.d) arises from the anterior aspect of the in-half of the tibial shaft as high up as the ¢ibialis anticus muscle, which covers it; it also arises from a tense fascia which comes off from the lower free edge of the pro- cnemial crest of the tibia; and finally from a longitudinal line ex- tending obliquely down the front of the shaft of the tibia to its lower third. This obliquity finally brings the tendon in which the extensor longus digitorum terminates to the middle line. Just above the condyles of the tibia, it here passes through the little bony bridge ; emerging from which it crosses the ankle-joint in front, then passes down the anterior aspect of the tarso-metatarsus bone, overlying the short extensor. At the upper end of this last- named bone, and over the ankle-joint, this tendon is firmly bound down by a fibrous fascia. In some birds we know a special bony span exists for it on the upper part of the tarso-metatarsus, as in certain Owls. When the tendon of this muscle arrives at the anterior aspect of the trochlez of the distal end of the tarso-meta- tarsus, it expands and bifurcates. The tendinous expansion becomes more or less attached to the underlying tissues, while each bifur- cation passes one over the second, and the other over the third toe, for their entire lengths, to become inserted into the upper points of their ungual phalanges. Now from the side of the tendon that goes to the third toe another slip is differentiated off in a very peculiar manner, owing to the reversion of the toe in question. For it not only passes over the top length for insertion of this fourth digit, as in the case of the others, but its slip also splits off to make a separate insertion at the extremity of the basal phalanx of the third digit. I have had the opportunity of dissecting three feet, with the view of studying this point, and I find it to obtain in all of them. The extensor brevis digitorum (Plate XLV. fig. 1, e.b.d). Thisisa muscle I find that, in common with many other authors, I have de- scribed in my MSS. as the ewtensor hallucis brevis, from the fact that its tendon goes to the hallux alone. But here, so extraordinary is its development, that no such term would be either adequate or appro- priate. Even here the short extensor of the hallux has a certain amount of individualization, though it is not fully differentiated from the other part of this ewtensor brevis. It, however, is not attached more than halfway down the anterior aspect of the shaft of the tarso-metatarsus, at which point it terminates in a delicate thread- like tendon; this passes directly over the upper border of the accessory metatarsal, and along the top of the basal joint of the hallux, to become inserted in the usual manner in the base of the claw-joiat. Now the remainder of the extensor brevis digitorum is attached down the shaft of the tarso-metatarsus, as far as the distal trochleze ; the outer portion of it developing a tendon about halfway down, which is concealed by the carneous fibres which overlie it. 1886. ] GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS. 481 This tendon passes round beneath the trochlea for the fourth toe and is really inserted on the underside of the basal joint of this digit at its proximal extremity ; so that in the case of this toe it seems as though it would act almost as a flevor. With the second and third toes, however, the carneous fibres of the muscle under consideration are continued all the way to the trochleze, where they terminate, in either case, in a strong, flat tendon, which passing over the joint is inserted on the upperside of the proximal extremity of the basal joint. Here, of course, the muscle acts (in the case of the second and third toes) as an auxiliary to the long extensor. Not a little room is here open to us for speculation as to how the tendon of this short extensor in the case of this fourth toe exactly came to assume its present point for insertion, as the digit gradually and finally became permanently reversed. Indeed, the high develop- ment of this short extensor in Geococcyx over the vast majority of the class is, too, an interesting fact; and did the reversion of the digit precede or follow the muscular development? No doubt the completeness of the latter, and its perfection for an avian type, has come about as a demand on the part of the habits of the bird itself and its marvellous fleetness of foot. The tibialis posticus (Plate XLV. fig. 1, ib. post) is a very slender muscle in Geococecyx, but closely resembles the same muscle as I have found it in all other birds which I have examined for their myology. My reasons for terming it the ¢idialis posticus are fully given in my MSS. and will appear in due time. It seems to be one of the peronet of the senior Edwards. As in a number of the Passeres, we find it here to arise from the antero-lateral aspect of the shaft of the fibula below the tubercle for the insertion of the biceps flexor cruris, from the interosseous membrane between the leg-bones, from the contiguous surface of the shaft of the tibia, and, finally, from the fascia separating it from the deep flexors of the leg. The fibres pass directly down the outer side of the tibia as a long, slender, fusiform muscle. At the lower fourth of the shaft of this bone they terminate in a small tendon, which, passing in front of the external malleolus, crosses the ankle- joint to become inserted into the supero-external rim of the summit of the tarso-metatarsus. The flexor perforatus indicis secundus pedis (Plate XLIV. fig. 2, J -p,) is even a better developed muscle than I found it to be among typical Corvidee, some of which I have recently dissected, and it is fully as well individualized. It arises from the fascia at the outer side of the knee-joint, and from the contiguous surface of the external condyle of the femur. Here it receives the anastomosing fibres of the extremity of the tendon of the ambiens. The muscle is fusiform in shape and accurately moulded on the flexor it covers at its side. Its tendon in descending the leg is thin and ribbon-like. At the ankle it passes through the tibial cartilage, and crossing the joint goes through, with the second tier of tendons, the cartilaginous cap on the back of the hypotarsus of the tarso-metatarsus. Passing down behind this latter bone, and Proc. Zoot. Soc.—1886, No. XXXII. 32 482 DR. R. W. SHUFELDT ON [Nov. 16, through the annular ligament in the sole of the foot, it proceeds to the underside of the second toe, beneath the second phalanx of which it expands to form a tubular sheath for the passage of the deep flexor, while at the same time it becomes attached to the side of this joint of the toe in question. The carneous portion of this muscle in the leg is to the outer side of the loop for the biceps flexor cruris, and, owing to the fact that it varies in form and size in different birds, it is as well to bear this in mind. The flexor perforatus medius secundus pedis (Plate XLIV. fig. 2, F-p.), a8 in all of the birds I have examined, is one of the best developed perforated tendons at the back of the leg. Its fascia of origin merges with the enveloping fascia about the knee-joint, while it also arises by a strong tendon, common to it and the flewor perforatus indicis secundus pedis, from the external aspect of the outer condyle of the femur. Finally, it is attached more or less by carneous fibres down the shafts of the leg-bones to a point below their middle, or rather the middle of the leg. Below this the muscle terminates in a strong tendon, which, taking an oblique course through the tibial cartilage, passes as usual over the ankle-joint, through the hypotarsus, and down the back of the tarso-metatarsus. In the foot it perforates the more superficial flexor of the basal phalanx of the outermost of the two anterior toes, then the turn bifurcates over the prebasal joint to allow the deep flexor to pass through, these bifurcations becoming the insertions of this muscle, and they are attached to the sides of the shaft of the second joint of the toe alluded to, or the external one of the two in front. The flexor perforatus annularis primus pedis (Plate XLIV. fig. 2, J-p.2) in this bird seems to have acquired a more central position on the back of the leg than in many others that I have dissected, and, moreover, its tendon, as will be seen from the figure, is quite superficial. It arises from between the condyles of the femur by a slight semitendinous slip, and from the side of the flexor longus hallucis. The muscle itself is somewhat of a fusiform outline and rather flat ; it lies to the inner side of the loop for the biceps. About one third the way down the back of the leg it terminates in a small though very long tendon, which, passing quite superficially through the tibial cartilage and over the ankle-joint and hypotarsus, runs in common with the other flexors down the back of the tarso-metatarsus, turns to the rear in the sole of the foot to become inserted on the underside of the distal end of the basal phalanx of the reversed digit. In the specimen before me this insertion is to the outer side of the deep flexor, and the tendon is not slit for its passage. Nothing could be more engaging than the examination of these reversed tendons in the sole of the foot of this Ground-Cuckoo, for the greatest nicety in accommodation has been accomplished as they have gradually come to assume their present position. No doubt some of the departures observed from the more common arrangement of them are due to the reversion of the digit in question. Strong, fibrous bands are so disposed in this plantar region as to 1886. ] GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS. 483 admirably hold the several groups of flexor tendons in place, and at the same time they act as pulleys for their guidance and afford correct application of the force intended to flex the toes. The flexor longus hallucis (Plate XLIV. figs. 2, f.l.A; Plate XLV. figs. 1, 2, f.1.h) has two separate heads, the one coming off from the outer side of the external condyle of the femur, and the other, far more fleshy, arising from the posterior aspect of the same bone between the condyles. Above this muscle is overlapped by the more superficial flexors, while in turn it has beneath it the flexor perforans digitorum profundus. About halfway down the leg it gives way to a strong tendon, which, passing deep in the tibial cartilage, crosses the ankle-joint to pass through the outer canal of the osseous portion of the hypotarsus of the tarso-metatarsus. Down the back of the shaft of this latter bone the tendon exhibits a disposition to develop an osseous rod in its continuity, but this does not actually occur in my specimen. It lies in this region just above the tendon of the deep flexor, and, immediately above the sole, makes a fibrous connection with it of some extent, This fibrous “vinculum”’ is in no way oblique as it is described by Garrod for many birds, but passes directly from one tendon to the other for about 8 millimetres, and were it not known that it as a rule passes obliquely from the fleaor longus hallucis, it would be quite impossible here to designate which tendon was responsible for the connection. In the foot the long tendon of the hallux passes in the usual way to become inserted on the tubercle at the underside of the proximal end of the ungual phalanx. As its name indicates, our next muscle, the flevor perforatus indicis primus pedis (Plate XLV. fig. 1, 7,), has its tendon attached to the nether side of the basal phalanx of the index digit, and consequently aids in bending that toe. Above, as a flat, long muscle, it comes off by a thin tendon from the external surface of the outer femoral condyle, arising with the flexor perforatus medius secundus pedis. We also have in Geococcyx an unusually large flexor perforatus medius primus pedis (Plate XLIV. fig. 2, f,), which here arises by two slips, an outer tendinous one, from the external condyle of the femur, which has a common origin with other muscles there arising and is intimately connected with the dense faseia about the front of the knee-joint ; while the second slip arises from between the femoral condyles, in common with other flexorsthat come off from that point. The two heads are quite independent, but merge with each other before they terminate in their common tendon at the lower third of the tibial shaft. It passes through the tibial cartilage, overlaid by, but in close company with, the far more diminutive and narrower tendon of the flexor perforatus annularis primus pedis. When it arrives under the basal phalanx of the median toe, the outer one of the anterior pair, it bifurcates to allow the other two flexor tendons to pass, while the slips thus formed become attached to the sides of the shaft of this joint close to its distal head. 32* 484 DR. R. W. SHUFELDT ON [Nov. 16, It will at once be seen that Geococcyx californianus, in common with the vast majority of birds, has no special tendon devoted to the flexing of the second or prebasal phalanx of the fourth toe (here the reversed one). Provision is made for this in various ways in different birds. Here, in the subject before us, a special slip is thrown off for attachment from the deep flexor tendon as it passes over the prebasal joint in question, which slip virtually fulfils the function of a flexor perforatus annularis secundus pedis, did such a muscle with an independent tendon exist. The flecor perforans digitorum profundus (Plate XLV. fig. 2, J-p-p). This muscle is deep to all the flexors, and is situated directly on the posterior aspect of the tibia and fibula. It arises by two heads, one from the upper part of the tibia immediately below the overhanging rim of its summit, and the other, smaller, from the back of the head of the fibula. In the Corvide there is a well-developed third head, which comes off from above the fibular notch of the outer condyle of the femur, and in these birds, too, there is no fibular head to this muscle, but two tibial ones instead. Geococcyx agrees however, with most birds in having this muscle attached nearly the whole length of the posterior aspect of the shaft of the tibia by lightly attached carneous fibres. About a centimetre about the tibial cartilage it terminates in a strong subcompressed tendon, which, passing beneath the cartilage referred to, crosses the ankle-joint in front of all the other flexor tendons, and then passes through the inner of the two longitudinal perforations of the hypotarsal apophysis of the tarso-metatarsus. Down the posterior aspect of the shaft of this bone the tendon still maintains its anterior position and exhibits a predisposition to ossify. But this does not actually take place in the specimen before me. Above the distal trochlee, it makes the fibrous connection with the tendon of the flewor longus hallucis already described. This band is shown in the figure. Once within the limits of the post- trochlear space, the tendon of this muscle behaves in a manner common to most birds—that is, it quadrifurcates, and each branch takes a course close up to the joints on their plantar aspects, and running through the slits in the perforated tendons pass in each case to the ends of the toes, where they become attached or in- serted upon the infero-proximal tubercles of the unequal phalanges. The one passing along under the fourth digit sends up a slip which is attached to the underside of the shaft of the prebasal joint, thus making good the deficiency here of what is represented in the other toes by an independent tendon. The tibial head of this muscle at its origin is directly covered by the soleus, while in the aperture existing between the two heads we can discern the popliteus. These flexor muscles, and others on both the front and rear of this limb, are moulded upon each other in a manner that can only be justly appreciated by a personal examination. In some the con- nections are quite feeble, the intervening tissue being easily separable, while in others the intimacy is very close, and great care is 1886. ] GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS. 485 demanded on the part of the investigator to see that the separation is made along the proper divisions. I am convinced from my studies that a greater difference is to be found among the various muscles of birds than we have ever ac- credited them with, and this fact leads me to believe that the day will come when these differences can be called into play in taxon- omy with excellent effect. Perhaps if the myology of the leg is examined as carefully as Prof. Garrod examined the muscles of the thigh in this class, fully as many interesting and valuable distinctions will come to light. The popliteus (Plate XLV. fig. 2, pop) is quite well developed in Geococcyz, where it is seen to arise from an oblique line on the back of the tibial shaft below the head of the bone, and the fibres converging to pass upwards and outwards are inserted by a short tendon into the corresponding aspect of the head of the fibular, close to the superior fibres of insertion of the flexor perforans digitorum profundus. When engaged upon my dissections of the Corvide, recently I ascertained that this muscle was absent at least in the American forms of the group. This was also the case with the two peculiar muscles next to be described. The flexor brevis hallucis (Plate XLV. fig. 2, 7.6.4) is an exceed- ingly interesting little muscle, and one that it has not been my good fortune to have seen in birds before, as I have just said, nor can I find at band any description of it for this class by any previous anatomist. It arises from the side and the lower margin of the inner aspect of the hypotarsus of the tarso-metatarsus, and from some of the shaft of this bone immediately below. The fibres converge to terminate in a small tendon, which, passing down the postero-inter- nal aspect of the shaft, goes to the inner side of the basal joint of the hallux, about which it winds to finally become inserted on its underside, at the proximal extremity of this joint, just a little beyond its articulation with the tarso-metatarsal trochlea. Thus it will be seen that this little muscle is entirely devoted to assist in flexing the hallux. Its mesial fibres meet those of the muscle next to be described, down the mid-longitudinal line of the shaft of the bone which gives it origin. Equally engaging with the last is another still smaller muscle, the extensor brevis annularis (Plate XLV. fig. 2, #.6), on the opposite side of the same bone. Here we find its origin is much the same as for the flexor brevis hallucis, coming off from the external aspect of the hypotarsus and the shaft below. It soon terminates in an extremely delicate little tendon, which, passing directly down to the fourth or reversed toe, becomes inserted on the supero-inner aspect of the basal phalanx of this digit. By its contraction it will act as a direct extensor of this toe, a requirement no doubt made necessary through the feeble manner in which this digit is now served by the slip which goes to it from the common extensor of these phalanges. This tendon of the short extensor gets its leverage by the fascia which circularly binds down all the tendons of the flexors and 486 DR. R. W. SHUFELDT ON [Nov. 16, extensors, just above the sole on the one side, and which passes above the distal trochleze on the other. As we pass the muscles we have described for this limb in review, it will at once be recognized that the list is unusually complete. All the ordinary muscles of the thigh are present as found in birds, and all highly developed. In the leg marked specialization and organization are everywhere evident, while exceptional muscles are here, too, fully represented. This complexity by no means diminishes as we proceed towards the foot, for the arrangement of the tendons as they course down the tarso-metatarsus and the special musculature of this division of the limb is manifestly indicative of high organization. Finally, we have the complex insertional extremities of the intri- cate system above laid before us in the foot; and the most exquisite examples of adaptation, compactness, and final requirements are to be seen throughout the structure on every hand. Notes on the Arterial System. Fortunately the evisceration that had been performed upon my Specimen before it came into my hands has not injured the heart and great vessels. So by a careful dissection I am enabled to state that there are two carotids in Geococcyx californianus, and that their arrangement and the method of their branching at the base of the heart is normal. In other words, the bird in this respect is to be included with the Aves bicarotidine normales, as defined by Garrod. I would remark, however, that the carotids come off from the innominates at points considerably further removed from the heart than that anatomist depicts them in his diagram of this condition. The branching is the same, however, and no doubt Mr. Garrod’s figures were intended to illustrate this point above all others, to which end they serve an excellent purpose. Turning to the arterial system in the pelvic limb, I find that the main artery of the leg is the sciatic. This agrees with the vast majority of birds, and, so far as I am aware, it is only in Centropus phasianus among the Cuculide that the rare condition of the femoral artery being the main one obtains. Of the Bursa Fabricii. As I said at the beginning of this memoir, Forbes has already called our attention to the peculiarity of form of this structure in the young of Geococcysx affinis (P.Z.S. 1877, p. 312), and says that it completely disappears in the adult. I can verify this state- ment so far as the specimen before me is concerned, for in it this bursa is not present, while the region otherwise is characterized as we find it in the adults of the Centropodine. The Trachea. (Plate XLIII. figs. 3 and 4.) For the entire length of this subcylindrical tube, the osseous rings which compose it fail to meet in the longitudinal median line posteriorly. 1886. ] GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS. 487 The interval thus formed, which is not very great, is occupied by a thin membrane which is continuous with the internal tympaniform membrane of the lower larynx. As to shape, the trachea diminishes in calibre gradually from above downwards, and nowhere in its con- tinuity does it present any enlargements or dilatations. This does not apply exactly to the bronchial bifurcations, for each one of them shows a disposition to swell just before arriving at the contracted parts of these tubes, where they impinge upon the lung- tissue. We may reckon either of these bifurcations as being partially sur- rounded by 13 semirings. Of course in this bird, as I say, the entire trachea may be regarded as having only semirings, but had the usual number of these united behind, there would still have remained the 13 semirings to each bronchial tube. An osseous pessulus is not present in Geococcyx, and the internal tympaniform membrane is quite extensive. There does not even seem to be any thickening of this membrane in our subject where this bony little bridge is located in those birds where it exists. As to its myology, the lower larynx is exceedingly simple in arrangement and meagrely supplied. Viewing the inferior part of the trachea and the bronchial tubes from in front, we can see but one pair of muscles, and these are the delicate sterno-tracheales. They are attached on either side to the last five tracheal rings (fig. 3, Plate XLIII.); the insertion seemingly consisting of two slips, the inferior one being attached to the lowermost of the five rings. These muscular slips soon merge with each other; and the muscle itself stretches across in the usual manner, for attachment to the inner surface of the costal process of the sternum. From a near view we discover another pair of muscles; these are the tracheo-laterales (fig. 4, Plate XLIII.). They here extend the whole length of the tracheal tube, on its postero-lateral aspect, rather than fairly on its sides, as in the majority of birds. On either side they are carried down clear to the last bronchial semiring for attachment, 7. e. not reckoning the aforesaid few semideveloped rings which we find at the terminal extremities of these bronchial bifurcations. This position of the tracheo-lateralis muscle is just the reverse of what Garrod found in such a bird as Opisthocomus (Scientif. Mem., p- 466, fig. 1) ; for, according to this authority, these muscles may be seen in the Hoatzin on an anterior view, and, moreover, in it they pass down in front of the sterno-trachealis. Garrod made many excellent examinations of the thoracic extremity of the trachea in the Galline, and among the representatives of this group an extraordinary variety of forms of this part of the bird’s economy was discovered (P. Z.S. 1879, p. 354). As the paper I refer to is profusely illustrated by drawings of the gallinaceous trachea, I have been enabled to compare them with the corresponding parts as I found them to exist in Geococcyx. But of all the types given, I fail to find a single one that in any way resembles the subject before us. This is the less to be looked for, however, when we come to 488 DR. R. W. SHUFELDT ON [Nov. 16, consider how greatly the Galline differ among themselves in this part of their structure. So whatever affinities Geococcyx may have with this group, it is not evident in the form assumed by its trachea nor in the musculature of the lower larynx. Of the Tongue. My memoir upon the skeleton of this bird contains an illustration of the hyoid arches as they are found in it (Journ. of Anat., Jan. 1886, pl. viii. fig. 8), and here it will be of interest to show the form of the tongue itself. It will be seen from the figure of this organ (Plate XLIII. fig. 1) that its tip is rounded, and that its anterior moiety is ensheathed in a horny theca of a jet-black colour; the posterior half, however, is soft and fleshy, with its lateral margins fringed with delicate fleshy spines of a pure white colour and directed backwards. From above downwards it is somewhat compressed, while its form as a whole is that of an isosceles triangle the base of which is rather less than one third of a side, and which exhibits a deep angular notch. The lateral margins of the superior larynx are smooth and sharp, while its hinder edge supports a spine-like fringe, very similar to the one found on the borders of the posterior moiety of the tongue. Immediately back of this we observe the large and capacious entrance to the gullet, a feature which I have also included in my illustration of the parts under consideration. The delicate, backward-extending limbs of the hyoidean apparatus curve up but very slightly behind the cranium in this Ground- Cuckoo. Of the Ossiculum lacrymo-palatinum. Careful search was made for this ossicle in my specimen of Geococcyx, both orbits being included in the examination, but I am confident that no such bone is found in it. This bonelet was first described by Brandt, and is best seen in certain Albatrosses, and I have elsewhere described its location and appearance in Diomedea brachyura. According to Forbes, ‘‘it also occurs in forms so different from these as the Musuphagide, many Cuculide, Chunga and Cariama, as well as in some Laride and Alcida, so that its presence is obviously of no particular taxonomic value” (Coll. Mem. p. 415). It was this account of its occurrence in certain Cuculide that incited me to search for it in our present subject, but, as I have said, it does not possess it. In birds where it exists it is represented, when thoroughly ossified, by a delicate styliform bar connecting the descending limb of the lacrymal bone with the upper surface of the palatine. Conclusions. By the aid of the researches of Garrod and Forbes into the 1886. ] GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS. 489 structure of the Cuculide and allied forms, together with the facts brought to light in the present article, we can arrange in a tabular form a number of the anatomical similarities and differences existing among Geococcyx californianus and the groups with which it is more or less nearly related; so that we may gain some idea as to its probable position in the system, at least as correctly as our present knowledge of its morphology seems to indicate. The group |¢ Sl shale es i Tendo n 7} : a] SS +7 pal or types |8 $ x 8 5 aS = 4 ‘ pas of tensor compared, 3 dis 'g 3 Fis z # 3 gran. | patagii brevis, | |< 2 |< 5 Spore, &e. Geococcyx cali-|-+-|+}+|/+/+) — 2 norm, | Oval. ?| Not tufted.) Differs from Sfornianus. Cuculus, Cuculide ...... +}]+]—|]+]+} peculiar. 2 Triang. ;+| Not tufted.) Lacks the humeral slip. Opisthocomus |+|+|+|+|+| ? 2 Triang. |+] Tufted. Galline......... +yI+)+}+ fe 2 Triang. |+| Tufted. Corvide......... —|+/—|+/+] = { righ a \ Oval. |+| Not tufted.) As [ have already said, in the opinion of the American Ornithologists’ Union, so far as it is expressed in their published Code and Check- List, the genera Geococcyx and Coccyzus are contained in the one and same subfamily Coccyein#. Now a careful examination of the structure of the subject of this memoir undoubtedly demonstrates, beyond cavil, that its anatomical characters are essentially very different from the corresponding ones as we find them in the true Cuckoos. Taking into consideration the weight which we are obliged to attach to important morphological differences in Aves, I can only remark here that these differences are certainly super- generic; in other words, they clearly point to the correctness of Garrod’s suggestions, who proposed that the Cuculide should form two SuBrAMiuiss, the Centropoding and the Cuculine—the first to contain the Ground-Cuckoos, and the latter the true Cuckoos. The studies of the structure of the forms in question demonstrate that this change in classification is a sound one and should be adopted. The classification of the family of North-American Cuckoos would then be :— Family CUCULIDA. Subfamily CroropHaGinz. (Anis.) Genus CROTOPHAGA. Species: C. ant. C. sulcirostris. 490 DR. SHUFELDT ON GEOCOCCYX CALIFORNIANUS. [Nov. 16, Subfamily Centropopinz. (Ground-Cuckoos.) Genus Grococcyx. Species: G. californianus. Subfamily Cucutinz. (True Cuckoos.) Genus Coceyzus. Species: C. minor. C. americanus. C. erythrophthalmus. It is hardly necessary to add, from what we know of the osteology of these subfamilies, that this classification will be strongly supported by a comparison of that part of the anatomy of the several forms. EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES. Puate XLII. Fig. 1. Pterylosis of Geococcyx californianus, ventral aspect. 2. as a Fr dorsal aspect. Puats XLITI. Fig. 1. Tongue, upper larynx, and entrance to esophagus of Geocoecyx cali- fornianus, seen from above. (Life-size, and drawn by the author from the specimen.) 2. Mode of insertion of patagial muscles. 3. Lower larynx, dorsal aspect. 4. Lower larynx, ventral aspect. Prats XLIV. Lettering of this and following Plate. glpr, gluteus primus; gl.m, gluteus medius; gl.min, gluteus minimus; St, semitendinosus; a.s.t, accessory semitendinosus; Cr, crureus; V.Z, vastus externus; v.2, vastus internus; B7, biceps flexor cruris; /, ten- dinous loop of biceps; amb, ambiens; Sm, semimembranosus ; S, sar- torius; a.l, adductor longus; a.m, adductor magnus; fic, femoro- caudal; afc, accessory femoro-caudal; 0.e, obturator externus; 0.2, obturator internus; ge, gemellus; p./, peroneus longus; 7id.ant, tibialis anticus ; 7éb.post, tibialis posticus; g, gastrocnemius; so, soleus; popl, popliteus ; ¢./.d, extensor longus digitorum ; fp, flexor perforatus indicis secundus pedis; f.p, flexor perforatus medius secundus pedis; f;, flexor perforatus indicis primus pedis; f,, flexor perforatus medius primus pedis ; 7.2.4, flexor longus hallucis; 0.2, flexor brevis hallucis; fp.a, flexor perforatus annularis primus pedis ; /.y.7, flexor perforans digitorum profundus; £.b, extensor brevis annularis; ¢.0.d, extensor brevis digitorum. Fig. 1. The outer aspect of the right pelvic limb of Geococcyx californianus ; the integuments have been removed, and the drawing is designed to show the superficial muscles of the part. Life size, by the author from his own dissections. 2. Outer view of the right pelvic limb of Geococcyx californianus, the superficial muscles removed and the next layer being exposed. Life size, by the author from his own dissections. The limb is drawn in a different position from what it is in fig. 1, which will account Hes the shortening of some of the muscles and their change of orm. ce cle ro - mn NS Z P.Z.S. 1886/2 ai! aa ms Hanhart imp. J. Smit lth, { SCELIDOTHERIUM LEPTOCEPHALUM. Hanhart imp likh J. omit )THERIUM BRAVARDI. P.Z.S. 1886. Pl. XLVIII. Hanhart amp . J. Smit kth . SCELIDOTHERIUM CHILIENSE A i a a aol TA ' ive? T y i Te b, ft ; Renee it P. 2.5, 1886. Ph. gain. J.Smit lith bs Hanhart imp 1 SCELIDOTHERIUM BRAVARDIT. 2 » CHILIENSE . 3 » LEPTOCEPHALUM. + » BRAVARDI. 1886. ] MR. R. LYDEKKER ON SCELIDOTHERIUM. 49] Priate XLY. Fig. 1, Outer aspect of the right pelvic limb of Geococeysx californianus showing the third layer of deep muscles, with a dissecting-chain pulling the ambiens into view. Life size, by the author from his own dis- sections. 2. Outer aspect of pelvis and right pelvic limb of Geococcyx californianus. Designed to show the deep muscles of the region, and the bones have been slightly rotated from their normal positions in order to bring them into view. a. Vinculum between deep flexor and flexor longus hallucis. Drawn by the author from his own dissections. 3. Description of three Species of Scelidotherium. By R. Lypexker, B.A., F.G.S., F.Z.8., &. [Received September 20, 1886.] (Plates XLVI.-XLIX.) In the ‘ Zoology of the Voyage of the Beagle,’ published in 1840, Prof. Sir Richard Owen founded the genus Scelidotherium on the evidence of a considerable portion of the skeleton of a large megatherioid Edentate found by Darwin in the Pleistocene of Bahia Blanca, in Patagonia, and applied the specific name of lepto- cephalum. In the following year and in 1842, Lund published in the volumes of the Copenhagen Academy descriptions and figures of more or less imperfect remains of various allied animals from the Brazilian caves, all of which were eventually referred either to Owen’s genus or to the new genus Platyonyx, no less than seven new specific names being applied to these specimens. In 1850 the late Prof. P. Gervais published, in the results of Castelnau’s Voyage (‘ Mammiféres fossiles de Amérique méridionale’), a de- scription and figure of a skull from Buenos Ayres which he referred to the type species of Scelidotherium, and also of a second one from Tarija in Bolivia, which he did not name specifically but thought might be a new species. In 1857 Sir Richard Owen published a second memoir in the ‘Philosophical Transactions,’ in which he described and figured two skulls brought over in 1854 by Bravard from the Pleistocene of the Argentine Republic, both of which he referred to the type species. An important notice of the group was contributed by Dr. H. Burmeister, of Buenos Ayres, in his ‘Description Physique de Ja République Argentine’ * (1879), where he described a skeleton which he likewise referred to the type species, and also gave reasons for adopting Lund’s genus Platyonyx for some of the allied forms. In 1880 Messrs. H. Gervais and Ameghino, ina memoir published under the title of ‘ Mammiféres fossiles de ’Amérique méridionale,’ gave a synopsis of all the previously named species of Scelidotherium and Platyonyx, and applied the new specific name of S. ¢arijense to the above-mentioned skull from Bolivia, figured by P. Gervais ; and also founded a second 1 Vol. i. part iii, pp. 822-345, pl. xiv. There is no copy of the Atlas in any of the London libraries. 492 MR. R. LYDEKKER ON SCELIDOTHERIUM. __[Nov. 16, new species, for which they proposed the name of S. capellini, on the evidence of a lower jaw from the Pleistocene of Buenos Ayres. In 1881 Dr. Burmeister published in the Monatsb. k. preuss. Ak. Wiss. (pp. 374-380) a description with figures of the manus, pes, and knee-joint of a skeleton of Scelidotherium from the Pleistocene of the Argentine Republic, which was referred to S. leptocephalum. In 1885 Dr. Fischer’ described a skeleton lately acquired by the Paris Museum of Natural History, which he refers to S. leptoce- phalum ; while in 1886 Sefor Ameghino* has applied the new name of Scelidotherium? bellulum to a single tooth from Parana. Finally it may be observed that the so-called Scelidotherium ankilosopum, Bravard®, is the same as Mylodon (Grypotherium) darwini, Owen. Other memoirs of minor import, which need not be quoted here, have also been published. It will be seen from the above that no less than eleven specific names have been applied to animals of this group ; six of which are included by Messrs. Gervais and Ameghino, in the memoir cited, in Scelidotherium, while four are referred to Platyonyx, the eleventh being of later date. Among the seven included under the former genus, there is no difficulty in regard to accepting the typical S. lep- tocephalum and S. taryense ; S. capellini, however, as being founded on a specimen which has not yet been figured, must be regarded merely as a nominal species; while S. minutum, Lund, is apparently founded upou immature specimens, and S. del/ulum upon a single unfigured tooth. With regard to S. bucklandi and S. oweni of Lund, the type specimens are so imperfect that they do not appear to me to afford characters of sufficient importance to enable other specimens to be identified with them; and I have therefore been compelled to ignore these names when considering the affinities of the specimens described below. Of the four so-called species ranged by Messrs. Gervais and Ameghino under Platyonyx, the only one that can be regarded as satisfactory is P. brongniarti, which is founded on a nearly complete skull. P. cuviert is founded on a fragment of a mandible which does not afford more satisfactory characters than the one on which S. duchklandi is founded; while P. blainvillei and P. agassizi have been named on still more unsatisfactory evidence, and must certainly therefore be regarded as not of more than nominal value. The object of the present communication is, first, to show that one of the specimens figured by Sir Richard Owen in the memoir in the ‘ Philosophical Transactions,’ already cited, does not belong to S. leptocephalum, which also leads to the conclusion that the specimen described by Dr. Burmeister in his second memoir under the same name is likewise distinct ; and, secondly, to describe a skull belonging to a series of specimens, from the Pleistocene of Chili, recently acquired by the British Museum. In the course of this paper it will be shown that there appears no reason for the retention 1 Comptes Rendus, vol. ci. p. 1291 (1885). 2 Bol. Ac. Nac. Cordoba, vol. ix. p. 184 (1886). 3 In P. Gervais’s ‘Zool. et Pal. Générales,’ sér. i. p. 182 (1867-69). 1886.] MR. R. LYDEKKER ON SCELIDOTHERIUM. 493 of the so-called genus Platyonyx, which is either founded on a misidentification, or on characters which cannot be regarded as of more than specific value. With these few words of introduction, the descriptive portion of the memoir may be commenced. ScCELIDOTHERIUM LEPTOCEPHALUM, Owen. The type species is represented in English collections by the imperfect type skeleton from Patagonia preserved in the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons, and by two imperfect skeletons collected by Bravard in the Argentine Republic and preserved in the British Museum. The skull from the latter country, figured by P. Gervais in the ‘Mammiferes fossiles de l Amérique méridionale ’ (Castelnau’s Voyage), pl. xi. fig. 1, apparently also belongs to this species. The type cranium is considerably damaged, but the two British- Museum erania (Nos. 37308 and 32995), taken together, exhibit nearly all the important features ; the second of these specimens is figured from the lateral aspect by Sir R. Owen in the ‘ Philosophical Transactions’ for 1857, pl. viil. fig. 1. In Plate XLVI. of the present memoir I have figured the former specimen, the occiput being restored from No. 32995. In the figured specimen the greater portion of the nasals is preserved, and its more important characters are as follows :— The facial profile is strongly curved, and presents a well-marked frontal protuberance behind the orbit ; the cranium is of moderate width, and the nasals of great relative length, being when complete at least equal to one half the total length of the frontal aspect of the cranium. In correlation with the elongated nasals the facial portion of the maxilla is lengthened, and a large portion of it appears on the frontal aspect. The lachrymal is not very prominent, and the aperture of its canal looks directly outwards. The anterior border of the zygomatic process of the maxilla is inclined backwards ; the fronto-parietal ridges are widely separated, and the interdental portion of the palate is not excessively narrow. The mandible associated with the figured cranium has an elongated symphysis, the portion in advance of the teeth being nearly twice the length of the whole dental series, and the superior border of the anterior portion of the ramus nearly straight. The more important measurements of the figured skull are as follows :— Length of broken nasals ............ 0°270 Length of facial part of maxilla ...... 0°170 Width of the two occipital condyles.... 0°108 Length from condyle to last tooth .... 0°242 Length of dental series,..s.. cv vesesacns 00013 Length of mandibular symphysis .... 0°156 Interval between hinder border of sym- physis and last tooth.. ........... 0°350 Interval between do. and first tooth.... 0°050 494 MR. R. LYDEKKER ON SCELIDOTHERIUM. [Nov. 16, The only other part of the skeleton to which I wish to call attention is the astragalus, and I have accordingly figured the type specimen in Plate XLIX. fig. 3. It will be seen from this figure that the external trochlear ridge for articulation with the tibia is not prominent, and scarcely projects above the level of the internal tuberosity. The astragalus (B.M. No. 37476) associated with the cranium No. 37308 exhibits precisely similar features, although it is of somewhat larger dimensions. This type of astragalus is very widely different from that of Megatherium (in which the external trochlear ridge is extremely prominent), and apparently indicates that the eversion of the foot was not so great as in that genus. SCELIDOTHERIUM BRAVARDI, 0. Sp. This species is founded on an imperfect skeleton in the British Museum, brought by Bravard from the Argentine Republic, which presents features clearly showing that it cannot belong to the type species, to which it has hitherto been referred. The cranium (B.M. No. 37626), which lacks the whole of the dentition and the greater portion of the nasals, has been figured by Sir R. Owen in the ‘ Philo- sophical Transactions’ for 1857, pl. viii. fig. 2, from the palatal aspect ’, and referred to the type species; an upper view is given in Plate XLVII. of the present memoir. It is extremely unfortunate that the nasals are wanting ; but from the structure of the adjacent bones it can be shown that these bones were certainly much shorter than in S. leptocephalum, since in the first place the superior border of the facial portion of the maxilla forms a much shorter curve than in the latter, while if the nasals were of the same length as in that species they would have projected far in advance of the premaxille. That the nasals were of a shorter type is also evident from a com- parison of the figure with that of S. chiliense (Plate XLVIII.), when it will be seen that the facial portion of the maxilla is not dissimilar in the two species. The whole cranium is, moreover, relatively narrower than in S. leptocephalum, and the frontal profile is quite straight ; while only a narrow moiety of the facial portion of the maxilla appears on the frontal aspect ; and the lachrymal is charac- terized by its extreme prominence, and the partially upward direction of the aperture of its canal. The anterior border of the zygomatic process of the maxilla is nearly vertical, while the fronto-parietal ridges are closely approximated, and the interdental portion of the palate (as is well shown in Sir R. Owen’s figure) is of excessive narrowness. It will also be seen from the following table of dimen- sions that while the width of the occipital condyles is smaller than in S. leptocephalum, the interval between the condyles and the last tooth is considerably greater, which indicates a great difference in the relative proportions of the two crania. The premaxille are well developed. In the mandible * associated with the cranium, while the length of 1 The teeth have been introduced on one side in this figure. 2 This specimen is figured by Owen, op. cit. pl. viii. figs. 4, 5, with the teeth restored ; and apparently in pl. ix. figs. 2, 3, the specimen represented in fig. 2 being erroneously described as belonging to the upper jaw. 1886. ] MR. R. LYDEKKER ON SCELIDOTHERIUM. 495 the symphysis is greater than in S. leptocephalum, the interval between the hinder border of the symphysis and the first tooth is very considerably less. The superior border of that portion of the mandible in advance of the teeth is moreover inclined strongly upwards, The following dimensions may be compared with those of S. leptocephalum :— Length of facial part of maxilla (about) ........ 0°135 Width of the two occipital condyles ...........- 0°095 Length from condyle to last tooth.............. 0°258 Length of upper dental series .............4.. 0°105 Length of mandibular symphysis .............. 0°175 Interval between hinder border of symphysis and dast topline des SUS alae g scaewfarserag’ ts aks Sayer 0°350 Interval between do. and first tooth ............ 0°032 I will now direct attention to the astragalus. Unfortunately the one specimen of this bone, associated with the cranium, is imperfect, although sufficient remains to show that it differs from the corre- sponding bone of the type species by the great prominence of the external trochlear ridge, which projects far above the level of the internal tuberosity. In Plate XLIX. fig. 4, there is represented an astragalus from a cavern in Brazil, which, although of larger size than Bravard’s specimen, agrees precisely in structure, and either belongs to a male of the present form or to an allied species ; and I think a comparison of this figure with that of the astragalus of S. leptocephalum will leave no doubt as to the specific distinctness of the two forms. ‘This astragalus agrees precisely with the corre- sponding bone of a hind foot belonging to a perfect skeleton figured by Dr. Burmeister in the Monatsb. k. preuss. Ak. Wiss. for 1881, plate facing p. 380, fig. 2, and referred (on the authority of Sir R. Owen’s figure of the cranium of the present form) to a large male of S. leptocephalum. A tibia from Brazil, associated with the figured astragalus, presents a structure of its distal surface modified to accord with this peculiar articulation, which is different from that of the tibia of S. leptocephalum ; and there are equally well-marked differences in some of the other bones of the present form to which I shall allude on another occasion. Whether or no the larger bones mentioned above belong to male individuals of the same species as the cranium, I think sufficient evidence has been adduced to show that both the form to which the latter and that to which the former belonged are specifically distinct from S. leptocephalum. Confining, however, attention to Bravard’s specimen, it is quite evident that this form is distinct both from S. tarijense (in which the mandible is of quite a different type) and 8. (Platyonyx) brong- niarti (in which the nasals are very short and the premaxille aborted) ; and since it appears impossible to identify it with either of the ill-defined Brazilian forms mentioned above to which specific names have been assigned, I propose that it should be known as 496 MR. R. LYDEKKER ON SCELIDOTHERIUM. [Nov. 16, S. bravardi. Should, however, any of my fellow workers be able to identify it with either of such forms, I shall be only too happy to relegate this name to the rank of a synonym. The structure of the astragalus of S. dravardi (as Dr. Burmeister remarks in his description of the larger form which I provisionally associate) approximates very strongly to that of Megatherium, although wanting the articular cup for thenavicular ; and it is there- fore probable that the hind foot of this species was more everted than in S. leptocephalum. The shorter nasals of the present species also diverge less widely from the Megatherium type than do those of the last-named species, and this character is still more developed in the following form. ScELIDOTHERIUM CHILIENSE, Nl. Sp. The form to which I propose to apply the above name is repre- sented by a series of specimens purchased during the present year by the British Museum, from a gentleman residing at Lima, which were obtained from the Pleistocene of Tamarugal, in the district of Tarapaca in Chili’. The specimens comprise three more or less imperfect crania, the anterior portion of a mandible, and a consider- able number of vertebree and limb-bones. All that I have to say in regard to the limb-bones is, that the astragalus is intermediate in structure between that of S. leptocephalum and that of S. bravardi, and that the humerus has a well-defined entepicondylar foramen. The least imperfect of the three crania is represented in Plate XLVIII., and shows nearly the whole of the nasals. The most striking feature of this cranium is the extreme shortness and breadth of the latter bones—their length not exceeding one third of the total length of the cranium—while the mandibular symphysis is also equally short, as will be seen by the following measurements. That this form is totally distinct fromm S. leptocephalum is self-evident. It appears more nearly allied to 8S. dravardi, with which it agrees in the prominence of the lachrymal, the narrowness of that portion of the maxilla appearing on the frontal aspect, the straight facial profile, and the narrowness of the interdental portion of the palate; but differs by its greater width, by the still shorter facial portion, by the probable abortion (as will be shown below) of the premaxille, and by the shorter anterior portion and symphysis of the mandible. The mandible is quite unlike that of S. tarijense*, in which the symphysial part is bent upwards very suddenly, nearly the whole of it being above the level of the dental alveoli. The nasals of that species are also much longer than those of the present form. With the skull of the so-called Platyonyx brongniarti from Brazil, figured by Lund in the K. Danske Vid. Selsk. Skr. vol. ix. pl. Xxviil., the present specimens agree very closely in general characters ; but in addition to being of superior size, the cranium is relatively narrower, and lacks the marked expansion behind the nasals, while 1 See map, supra, p. 396. 2 T refer to this species a left mandibular ramus from Brazil in the British Museum (No. 18649 a). 1886. ] MR. R. LYDEKKER ON SCELIDOTHERIUM. 497 the nasals themselves are more pointed posteriorly and wider anteriorly, the width of the anterior expansion being greater than that at the frontal expansion, while the reverse condition obtains in S. brongniarti. The resemblance between the two crania is, how- ever, sufficiently close to render it probable that the two forms were closely allied, and that the premaxille of the present form were similarly aborted. The dimensions of the present form are as follows :— Length of the facial portion of maxilla.......... 0-122 Width of the two occipital condyles ............ 0-099 Length from condyles to last tooth ............ 0-238 Length of upper dental series..............005: 0:093 Length of mandibular symphysis .............. 0-124 Interval between hinder border of symphysis and “CUS Oe a Agen seater dees Mere recog Cte Ant 0°012 Since the present form is decidedly distinct from all the species mentioned above, and since I caunot identify it with either of the other ill-defined forms referred to Scelidotherium and Platyonyx, I can only adopt the course followed in the case of the preceding species ; and I accordingly propose to designate this form as Scelidotherium chiliense, since I shall immediately show that the genus Platyonyx ought to be merged in Scelidotherium. Platyonyzx is stated by Lund (and his view is followed by Dr. Burmeister’) to be distinguished from Scelidotherium by the absence of an entepicondylar foramen to the humerus, and by the more flattened phalangeals; while, according to Messrs. H. Gervais and Ameghino’, the crochet of the last lower tooth is more prominent. Sir R. Owen*, who unites the two genera, is of opinion that the limb-bones referred by Lund to Platyonyz really belong to Glyptodon. I have no means of deciding which of these two views is correct ; but the close general resemblance in the structure of the nasals of Scelidotherium chiliense to those of the so-called Platyonyx brong- niarti leads me to conclude that whether the humerus of the latter was, or was not, provided with an entepicondylar foramen, the species is not entitled to generic distinction from Scelidotherium, the alleged differences in the structure of the phalangeals and of the last lower tooth being characters which are certainly not more than specific ones. Taking the three species, S. leptocephalum, S. bravardi, and S. chiliense together, it will be seen that they form a sequence as here placed in regard to the length of the nasals—sS. chiliense (together with S. drongniarti) being the least, and S. leptocephalum the most removed from the type of cranium obtaining in Mega- therium. Affinities of the Genus. In conclusion, I may observe that Scelidotherium appears to be a 1 Monatsb. k. preuss. Ak. Wiss. 1881, pp. 374-380. 2 a 4s ee aPShi 2 ao) het Ra \ Ari ry ml « ted y nurs Spe tethed ws thre a rth 4e his. i ar LS he nba ak as A Le | : ee la * : Z 45 = 7 : ar mF bls hai bids 5 att eget Sa airtie tek z rae foe % pal! 1 eae aE OY ets eT, ts Suey i wat We. Ne : / ri fe = > 4 mie | (axe arg eae rae rk d mae isi eS Haye Hh tl? ela! ve Me tebr' ng aed i ode eed eo? oe raed int ; = Lagat ere ep? ; or ss # a9, ee es ~ 38 . ck: ei Ree Peat Bet sy 5 ‘ prpa pepe Fi J. Smit del et. hth. P 2.5. 1886. PY. EV, TRL RISAT Mintern Bros . imp. 1886. ] ON SQUALORAJA POLYSPONDYLA. 527 body (Plate LIT. fig. 1) in a later stage. Lettering as in last plate. Fig. 7, 8. ‘Transverse sections through a portion of outer surface of multicel- lular body in a later stage. a, degenerating nuclei ; other lettering as before. 9. Multicellular body from ovum of Protopterus, differing from that illustrated in fig. 1 mainly by the absence of follicular layer. Lettering as before. 10, Portion of secondary follicular layer at point marked with an arrow in preceding figure; more highly magnified. 11, Central mass of a body belonging to same stage as that figured in fig. 9, to show the mass (p) formed by the breaking down of the central cells (¢), the nuclei of which (7) are here and there imbedded in it. 12. One of central cells (Plate LII. fig. 1,c) with a large number of nuclei. 13. Three central cells from Stage I. (fig. 1, 4), to show difference in nuclei. 14-20. Central cells very much enlarged from Plate LII. fig. 1, to show the different stages in degeneration of nuclei. 21. Nest of germinal cells in ovary of Ceratodus at a later stage than that in Plate LIT. fig. 3. Lettering as in that figure. Prare LIV. Fig. 22. A portion of body represented in Plate LIII. fig. 21, more highly magnified. Lettering as in fig. 21. 23. Nest of germinal cells in ovary of Ceratodus at a stage near to that represented in figs. 21 and 22. Lettering as in those figures, 24. Portion of multicellular body in ovary of Protopterus, to show masses of yolk (a), apparently corresponding to areas occupied by fused masses of protoplasm in earlier stages (p in figs. 1, 9, and 11). 25. Multicellular body of Ceratodus at a stage corresponding to that of Protopterus, ilustrated in fig. 1. a, fibrous tissue of stroma-layer ; other lettering as in fig. 1. 26. A portion of central cells of multicellular body of Ceratodus, more highly magnified. Lettering as in fig. 1. 27-31. Central cells of multicellular body of Protopterus at an early stage, to show commencing yolk. 32, 33. Central cells of ditto, to show disintegrating nucleus, 2. On the Anatomy and Systematic Position of the Liassic Selachian, Sgualoraja polyspondyla, Agassiz. By A. Smith Woopwarp, F.G.S., of the British Museum (Natural History). [Received October 18, 1886.] (Plate LV.) SumMary OF Previous RESEARCHES. The prolific fish-beds of the Liassic formation have yielded so much valuable material during recent years, that it is now possible to considerably supplement the original anatomical memoirs of Agassiz, Egerton, and the other pioneers in early Mesozoic ichthy- ology. Many specific types that were at first only known from very 528 MR. A. 8. WOODWARD ON [ Dee. 7, imperfect fragments are already represented by remains as complete as can be expected in a fossil state; and such remains being now forthcoming in the case of the remarkable Selachian, Squaloraja polyspondyla, it is proposed once more to bring this interesting form before the notice of zoologists. The first scientific account of the genus and species under consi- deration was communicated by Dr. H. Riley to the Geological Society in 1833, and subsequently published, with one slight modi- fication, in that Society’s ‘Transactions’*. A fine specimen in the Bristol Museum, displaying the head and vertebral column, with obscure fragments of the appendicular skeleton, formed the subject of this memoir, and notwithstanding the author’s limited means of comparison, he rightly recognized its affinities both with the true Sharks and the Rays, and expressed the circumstance in its generic name. Riley, however, misinterpreted the snout and rostral spine, regarding these as jaws, and originally suggesting the specific name of dolichognatha in allusion to their elongated shape; but Agassiz pointed out to him the error in time for correction in an appended note (J. c. p. 85), and the distinguished author of the ‘ Poissons Fossiles’ again figured and described the specimen in one of the later parts of his third volume*. Agassiz, indeed, was already acquainted with portions of the vertebral column and dermal tubercles of the fish, and had enumerated these in his preliminary manuscript notes under the name of Spinacorhinus polyspondylus ; but Riley’s prior description necessitated the adoption of the generic title Squaloraja, though his withdrawal of ‘ dolichognatha’ allowed the Agassizian specific name to be retained. But although Agassiz’s extensive acquaintance with the Selachian order enabled him to throw further light upon the Liassic genus, and point out its remarkable resemblances to the Pristiophoridze, he still failed to comprehend the precise nature of the curious snout, and it was left to Mr. William Davies, of the British Museum, with still more materials at his disposal, to offer a complete explanation. In an important paper in the ‘Geclogical Magazine’ for April 1872°, he pointed out that the uppermost rostral prolongation was a true spine, homologous with the frontal spine of the male Chimeroid Ischyodus orthorhinus, then made known by Sir Philip Egerton ; and he further demonstrated the absence of the appendage in some individuals, which were naturally regarded as females. Davies, moreover, added some notes on the vertebral column, and Hasse has more recently * published an account of the structure of the vertebrae in great detail. 1 H. Riley, ‘On the Squaloraja,” Trans. Geol. Soe. [2] vol. v. 1833, pp. 83- 88, pl. iv. 2 L. Agassiz, ‘Recherches sur les Poissons Fossiles,’ vol. iii. p. 379, pls. 42, 43. 8 W. Davies, ‘On the Rostral Prolongations of Squaloraja polyspondyla, Ag.,” Geol. Mag. vol. ix. (1872) pp. 145-150, pl. iv. * ©. Hasse, “ Einige seltene palaontologische Funde,” Palsontographiea, yol, xxxi. (1885) p. 4, pl. i. figs. 2, 3. 1886. ] SQUALORAJA POLYSPONDYLA. 529 New SPECIMENS. Up to the present time, therefore, there is no very precise infor- mation in regard to the structural features of Squaloraja beyond the descriptions of dermal appendages, the snout, and the vertebral column. But the British Museum again furnishes materials for an addition to our knowledge (thanks, especially, to a recent purchase from Mrs. Dollin of Lyme Regis, and the acquisition of the Egerton and Enniskillen collections), and it is upon the national fossils that the present contribution is based. All the specimens are from the well-known Lower Lias of Lyme Regis, Dorsetshire ; and, adding Roman numerals for convenience of future reference, they may be briefly enumerated as follows :-— I. The nearly complete skeleton of a male, wanting only a small portion of the caudal region, and shown of the natural size in Plate LV. fig. 1. This specimen exhibits the dorsal aspect, and is parti- cularly interesting on account of the preservation of the limbs and limb-girdles, which have not hitherto been so well displayed. The cranial cartilages are not remarkably distinct, and the dentition is only feebly indicated ; but the form and proportions of the snout and rostral spine are very satisfactorily shown, and the vertebral column, except anteriorly, is in a comparatively good state of preservation. (Brit. Mus. no. p 2276.) II. Portions of the vertebral column and the crushed cranium of an old individual, probably female. (Egerton Collection, Brit. Mus. no. P 2079.) III. Portion of the skeleton of a young female, viewed from the ventral aspect. There are only obscure remains of the cranial cartilages, but the snout and dentition are beautifully exhibited. The caudal region is also well preserved, but all traces of the abdomen have been removed and destroyed. (Enniskillen Collection, Brit. Mus. no. p 3184.) IV. A fine skull of a male individual, seen from above, and exhibiting the form of the head, dentition, and rostral spine. (Brit. Mus. no. 47402.) : V. A detached rostral spine, somewhat smaller and less robust than that figured by Davies (/. ¢. fig. 3), but equally curved, the broadened base of insertion wanting. (Enniskillen Collection, Brit. Mus. no. Pp 3186.) VI. A complete, much-curved rostral spine, exhibiting ouly the superior aspect. (Enniskillen Collection, Brit. Mus. no. p 3187.) VII. The anterior two thirds of a rostral spine, probably belong- ing to an animal even larger than no. II. (Enniskillen Collection, Brit. Mus. no. p 4574.) VIII. An extraordinarily slender and acuminate small rostral spine, seen from the dorsal aspect. (Kgerton Collection, Brit. Mus. no. P 2081.) The specimens numbered I. to LV. are almost certainly referable to the already named species, S. polyspondyla, Ag., and owe their slight variability to differences in age, as indicated by the condition Proc. Zoou. Soc.— 1886, No. XXXV. 35 530 MR. A. S. WOODWARD ON (Dec. 7, of the vertebral column. But the detached spines would appear to afford evidence of two or more forms as yet unrecognized, and the small example, no. VIILI., is particularly distinct. It is very possible, indeed, that when more specimens of the genus are available for study, the characters of the rostral appendage will enter promi- nently into the diagnosis of each species ; but I only venture, on present evidence, to distinguish the possessor of the small spine no. VIII. (Plate LV. fig. 6), and this may be appropriately designated by the name of S. ¢enuispina. The fossil in question is separated from its homologue in the known species by its much more slender and acuminate shape, and possibly, though not certainly, by the slight concavity of the proximal half of its upper surface. During the investigation of these fossils I have had the privilege of discussing the subject with several zoological and palzeontological friends, to whom I am indebted for some valuable suggestions noted in the following pages. I desire especially to return thanks to Prof. W. K. Parker, F.R.S., for much kind assistance in regard to the skull; to Mr. G. B. Howes, for a continuance of the help so freely given on previous occasions ; to Mr. G. A. Boulenger, for the facili- ties afforded in the study of the recent Selachians under his care ; and to my senior colleague, Mr. William Davies, to whose earlier work reference is so frequently made in the sequel. ANATOMICAL DESCRIPTION. External Form.—Commencing the description with a brief notice of the general external form of Squaloraja, attention may be first directed to the beautiful specimen no. I., represented in Plate LV. fig.1. As the shape of the head had already led Agassiz and Davies to suspect, the proportions are found to be very similar to those of the living Pristiophorus. Assuming that about three centimetres are missing from the tail of the specimen, the snout will have occupied one quarter of the entire length of the animal. The body must have been but slightly compressed from above downwards, and the pectoral fins were undoubtedly free, having no connection with the head; the shoulder-girdle, however, is placed relatively nearer to the chondrocranium than is the case either in Pristiophorus or Pristis, though appearances are not improbably deceptive, owing to crushing during fossilization. It is impossible, of course, to deter- mine whether the gill-openings were ventral or lateral, and scarcely any traces of the branchial arches have been preserved. The pectoral fins, as usual, are much larger than the ventrals, and the tail is long and slender, without spine, as admirably shown in no. ITI. (fig. 7). Unfortunately, all sure indications of dorsal and caudal fins are wanting, though it is scarcely likely that these appendages were absent in the living fish. Dermal Structures*.—In regard to the integument and its appen- dages, the new fossils afford some interesting additional information, No less than eight rostral spines are now available for study ; and 1 The dentition will be more conveniently treated in a later section, p. 534, 1836.] SQUALORAJA POLYSPONDYLA. 531 the specimens numbered I. and III. reveal a few hitherto unnoted facts concerning the arrangement of the small prickly tubercles. As already indicated in Davies’s large figure, but still more satis- factorily shown in our Plate LV. fig. 1, a series of the tubercles with especially long recurved hooklets is arranged along either edge of the prenasal (intertrabecular) cartilage ; and these two rows are precisely parallelled in the snout of certain living species of Rhino- batus (e. g. R. granulatus). But immediately at the base of the rostrum, where the cartilage is particularly firm and expanded into two lateral elevations (Davies, fig. 2), the tubercles become densely clustered in a manner not observable in the existing form; and this arrangement is in intimate relation with the overlying spine. The disposition of the tubercles along the trunk, evenif originally regular, is now no longer evident, and none but scattered examples are to be seen; but the slender tail was provided on each side with a longi- tudinal row of comparatively large recurved hooklets, upon inconspi- cuous bases, as is very well shownin the female, no. III. (fig. 7). A small tuft of these dermal structures also occurs at the extremity of each clasper in no. I. (fig. 1, A&), and there are distinct indications of a patch of very minute prickles upon the membranous portion of the (right) ventral fin in the same specimen. In regard to the rostral spine, Davies’s figures and descriptions leave little to be added. The conclusion as to its absence in certain individuals (females) is confirmed in an interesting manner by the fossil no. L1I., which has been so ‘‘ developed’’ on the dorsal aspect that there cannot remain the slightest doubt upon the subject. But a new specimen, from the Enniskillen Collection (no. V. fig. 5), still further demonstrates its prehensile character in the individuals that possess it ; for a number of blunt conical tubercles, without radiated bases, are clustered together upon its inferior aspect (2) to oppose the group of more slender hooklets already described at the base of the snout. When well preserved (as in no. I.), the surface of the spine exhibits the reticulate impressions of the vessels in a once enveloping integument *; and on each side there is a marked longi- tudinal groove (fig. 5, g), which gradually disappears on approaching the distal extremity. The peculiar form of the spine is also worthy of note, more parti- cularly as it is repeated in two other cartilaginous fishes whose remains have been found in the same geological formation ; it differs but little from that of the rostral appendage in the chimeeroid Ischyodus*, and is still more similar to another Liassic spine which there is some reason for suspecting may belong to the remarkable Prognathodus*. The peculiar shape, indeed, taken together with 1 Mr. Boulenger has kindly helped me to determine that the corresponding appendage in the living Chimera monstrosa is likewise covered with skin. 2 Sir P. Egerton, “ On a new Chimeroid Fish from the Lias of Lyme Regis (Ischyodus orthorhinus, 3),’ Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. vol. xxvii. 1871, pp. 275- 278, pl. xiii. 3 Sir P. Egerton, “ Prognathodus Giintheri (Egerton), a new Genus of Fossil Fish from the Lias of Lyme Regis,” Quart. Journ. Geol. Soo. vol. xxviii. 1872, pp. 233-237. 35* 532 MR. A S. WOODWARD ON [ Dec. 7, the fact of its occurrence in more than a single type, leads to an interesting speculation, suggested to me by Professor Parker. Com- pared with the distinct anterior intertrabecular cartilage, which forms the axis of the rostrum in such primitive fishes as the glutinous Hags (Myzine) *, scarcely the slightest difference in form can be noted; and it seems not unlikely that we are here concerned with an admirable illustration of the principle, that the contours-of super- ficial structures appended to the cranium are frequently determined, in the main, by the shape of the fundamental cartilages to which they are attached. The fossils, of course, do not permit a determi- nation of the complete form of the intertrabecular cartilage in any of these types, or of its primitive distinctness ; but the slight glimpses that can be obtained are rather favourable than otherwise to such a conclusion. Of the skin itself in Sgualoraja, only indefinite patches remain, and no small shagreen granules appear to have been developed in it ; but the sharp lateral edge, both of the rostral and caudal regions, is strengthened by a series of minute calcified rings (fig. 1, d), evidently quite similar to those stiffening the boundaries of the snout in the living Pristiophoridee. Cranium and Mandibular and Hyoid Arches.—Nearly all the large fossils under consideration reveal facts of more or less interest in regard to the structure of the skull; nos. I., 11., and IV., with Riley and Davies’s specimens, present the dorsal aspect, while no. III. and the fragment shown in Dayies’s plate, fig. 4, afford some parti- culars as to the conformation of the ventral surface. The palato-trabecular region (figs. 1, 2, pa.ér) extends far forwards in its present crushed condition, and from the centre is produced the long narrow intertrabecular cartilage (¢.¢7) forming the axis of the snout. From each anterior outer angle of this region there also arises a more slender forwardly directed cartilage (pr. pa), which gradually tapers to an incurved point, as admirably shown in the left side of no. IV. (fig. 2). This prolongation evidently served to stiffen the edge of the base of the snout, exactly as its well-deve- loped homologue in the living Pristiophorus; and there can be little doubt that it represents a definite prepalatine element, such as has not hitherto been recognized in the skulls of the Selachian order. Its form is almost identical with that of the corresponding cartilage in the Myxinoids, as will be at once. seen on referring to Prof. Parker’s beautiful figures of Myaine and Bdellostoma”*; in these fishes, indeed, the process serves a similar purpose, being like- wise placed to strengthen the sides of the rostrum. Immediately behind the origin of the prepalatine “ horns,” the lateral boundary of the palato-trabecular region gradually curves inwards for some distance, and then as slowly outwards again until it forms a well-marked antorbital prominence ; but the olfactory capsules, in their fossilized state, are totally unrecognizable, though 1 W. K. Parker, ‘‘On the Skeleton of the Marsipobranch Fishes.—Part I. The Myxinoids,” Phil. Trans. 1883, pl. x. fig. 2. 2 W. K. Parker, oc. cit. pl. x. figs. 1-3 and pl. xvii. figs. 1-3. i 1886. ]} SQUALORAJA POLYSPONDYLA. 533 the two excavations at the base of the rostrum in the fragment shown in Davies’s fig. 4 evidently testify to their normal proportions and situation. Ina line with the prominence is fixed the base of the rostral spine (7.s), quite at the hinder extremity of the ethmoi- dal tract ; and still more posteriorly, the chondrocranium begins to exhibit considerable lateral compression, though finally widening to a slightly broader occiput. Extending backwards from the antorbital process, the slender postpalatine cartilage (pt.pa) is preserved in most specimens (especially in no. IV. fig. 2), but there is some uncertainty as to whether it formed a distinct element. It tapers slightly to its dista! end, and the crushing during fossilization has usually imparted to it the deceptive appearance of connection with the hyomandibular. No postorbital process can be observed, and the circumstances of preservation are probably accountable for the absence of any trace of a fontanelle in the cranial reof; but there is an interesting V-shaped protuberance (a.v) close to the hinder extremity, evi- dently representing a fold round the hollow into which opened the aqueductus vestibuli (or ductus endolymphaticus) of each auditory sac. On the ventral aspect, the parachordal, or “ investing mass” (fig. 3, iv.m), is produced posteriorly into a pair of occipital condyles (oc.c), as already noted by Riley; and there is a well- marked median ridge (7), obviously due to the remains of the primitive notochordal sheath. A median foramen (e.f) is also some- what conspicuous, and, if not the result of accident during fossiliza- tion, is evidently the passage for the united internal carotid arteries proceeding to the pituitary body’. Of the mandibular and hyoid arches, the hyomandibular cartilage (figs. 1, 2, km) is the only portion satisfactorily preserved. In its crushed condition it is seen to extend from each side of the occiput, curving outwards and forwards, and gradually tapering to the distal extremity. In shape it approximates to that of most “ Batoidei,”’ being twice as broad proximally as distally, and its apparent conti- nuity with the cranial roof is probably due to the process of fossili- zation. Not a trace of the pterygo-quadrate and mandibular cartilages appears exposed to view; but the arrangement of the dental plates in the specimen no. III. (fig. 3, ¢) shows that the two rami of the jaw met at the symphysis ina comparatively acute angle, and were not placed in the same straight line, as is the case in so many living Rays. But the most remarkable feature to be noticed in the skull of Squaloraja is preseuted in the two pairs of transversely elongated appendages, with reflected ends, arising from beneath the narrow part of the palato-trabecular region. These curions structures are not well shown in our fig. 1 (cé.a, ci.6), but can be studied in their entirety in the large specimens figured by Riley and Davies. The most anterior (ci.a) is the larger, and is completely displayed on both sides of the last-named fossil ; its total length is equal to three times the width of the skull at the position where it emerges, * See T. J. Parker, ‘ Zootomy,’ 1884, p. 62, fig. 20. 534 MR. A. 8. WOODWARD ON [Deend, and for two thirds of its extent it is directed outwards and ex- hibits only very slight tapering; the distal third rapidly diminishes to a pointed extremity and is fixed at right angles to the rest in a backward direction. The hinder appendage (ci.b) measures only two thirds the length of the first, and is about half as broad; it likewise has an outward and posterior trend, but (in its fossilized state) is much more gradually arched. The relatively great size of these appendages renders them some- what difficult of interpretation, and it is scarcely possible to decide whether they consist of true cartilage or are merely dermal in cha- racter. In position they correspond very closely with the hinder labials of many living Selachians, and also with the supposed homo- logous rods that form the axes of the oral barbels in Myxinoids*. But in the latter group these appended ‘feelers’? never seem to extend outwards to a length much exceeding half the breadth of the head; and the largest cirri witb which I am acquainted in the Sel- achians are scarcely longer than the rami of the jaws. It seems likely, however, that the structures in Sguwaloraja are the gigantic representatives of the latter, which are elongated outgrowths of the cartilages of the nasal valves’. There is no evidence of anterior labials in the specimens of Squa- loraja already known. Dentition.—The dentition of Squaloraja is very remarkable and has not hitherto been correctly noted. Some indications are to be observed in specimens I. and IT., but the teeth are beautifully dis- played both in III. and IV.; moreover, the parts in these two instances are practically identical, showing that there were no vari- ations according to sex, as is the case among certain living Selachians (e.g. Raja). The dentition of both jaws is preserved in no. III. (figs. 3, 4), but only that of the right side of the mandible affords a good view of the grinding-surface. Each ramus bears only a single dental plate, sharply marked off in front from its fellow of the oppo- site side, and exhibiting towards the symphysis a gently tumid prominence. For the anterior two thirds of its length the plate is of nearly uniform breadth, but in the last third the outer border gradually trends inwards, producing a more or less pointed posterior extremity. And the efficiency of the grinding-surface is increased by a series of parallel longitudinal ridges or folds of the enamel, which are distinctly worn down towards the outer functional border. Eleven of these rugze can be counted on no. III. (fig. 4), while fourteen or fifteen are visible in no. lV ; but, except on the under surface of the plate in no. II., there are no traces of any sutures between them, and even in this specimen the evidence is somewhat obscure. — It appears, however, that there were feebly marked longitudinal divi- sions corresponding to the several rugee, and that these became accentuated at the outer edge, allowing of the shedding of the worn- out portions as growth proceeded. 1 W. K. Parker, loc. cit. pp. 385, 399, pls. x., xvii. figs, 1-3. 2 The “ Nasenfliigelknorpel ” of Miiller; see O.Gegenbaur, ‘Das Kopfskelet der Selachier,’ pp. 97-111, pls. xvi., xvii. 1886. | SQUALORAJA POLYSPONDYLA. 535 Vertebral Column.—In the subject of fig. 1 the vertebral column is beautifully shown beyond the shoulder-girdle, though somewhat imperfect in front. As already described by previous writers, the vertebree (fig. 8) are merely slender, concentrically marked rings, of the truly ‘ tectospondylic ”’* type, and in the space just mentioned no less than 340 can be counted; in the abdominal region, sixteen of these occupy the length of a centimetre, while in the tail the proportions are so slightly different that only one more ring is com- prised within the same distance. The obscure portion in front of the pectoral girdle measures one and a half centimetres in length, probably representing about 24 vertebrae ; and if three centimetres are missing from the end of the tail*, this loss will indicate an additional 48. The total number is thus found to be approximately 400, as estimated by Davies in the large specimen described in 1872. In the more aged individuals (e.g., no. II.) the vertebral rings are more robust than those of the apparently young (e. g., no. III.) ; and it is remarkable that in no example is there any trace of the fusion of the elements in the region of the neck. But it is not necessary to add a detailed account of the structure of the vertebrse themselves, for they have already been carefully examined and described by no less an authority than Professor Carl Hasse, of Breslau*. As the result of his researches in this direction, the latter anatomist concludes that in Squaloraqa “we have to do with an ancestral form of the now living Pristidee, a form which, in its development, appears to have advanced beyond the existing Pris- tiophoride, and also beyond the oldest Rhinobatide,’’ which he has deseribed from the upper Oolite of Bavaria. The vertebral arches were not of sufficient consistency to leave the slightest trace in the fossil state. Appendicular Skeleton.—In the subject of fig. 1, as already remarked, the pectoral fins are sufficiently well preserved to exhibit their complete severance from the cephalic region and their corre- spondence in general character to those of the living Pristiophorus. But the remains of the supporting girdle are much less perfect and satisfactory, and the other known specimens do not appear to throw any further light upon the subject. There can be little doubt, how- ever, that the “ girdle’ was complete, as in the Rays proper, and the well-defined cartilage (s.sc) ou the right is evidently the character- istic suprascapula. A faint trace of the posterior boundary of the transverse coracoid bar (cor) is also shown on the same side. The proximal cartilages of the fin are only two in number, and well preserved on both sides of the fossil, though most completely displayed on the left. The preaxial element (pms) is elongated in a transverse direction, and appears of almost uniform breadth, though its exact shape is evidently destroyed by crushing ; it is relatively small, having only about one quarter the size of the postaxial ele- 1 ©. Hasse, ‘Das natiirliche System der Hlasmobranchier,’ allgemeiner Theil (1879), p. 44. 2 The caudal region of the fossil is not completely shown in fig. 1. ° OC, Hasse, “ Minige seltene palaontologische Funde,” Palsontographica, vol, xxxi. (1885) p. 4, pl. i. figs, 2, 3 536 MR. A. S. WOODWARD ON [ Dec. 7, ment. The latter (mép) is triangular in form, and elongated antero- posteriorly ; the foremost border abuts against the hinder edge of the preaxial cartilage, which it equals in transverse extent ; and the inner border curves gradually outwards and backwards to meet the nearly straight external boundary at a posterior apex. Judging from the analogy of living Selachians with fins of a similar type, the posterior of these cartilages may be regarded as the metapterygium ; while the anterior element may represent the coalesced pro- and mesopterygium (as in Pristiophorus’), or it may be wholly meso- pterygial, with a minute, indistinguishable propterygium at its proximal angle (as in Heptanchus and Heaanchus*), Beyond the basal cartilages are arranged the cartilaginous rays of of the fin (7). These are somewhat obscured both in front and behind by remains of the integument, and it is uncertain whether the first attached to the preaxial element is stouter than the remainder; twenty rays, however, can siill be counted on the right side, and there are traces of sixteen on the left; the foremost thirteen are directed almost transversely or outwards, while the following have a more marked backward inclination. The pelvic girdle and its appendages are rather more satisfactorily displayed than the pectoral structures just described. Anteriorly, on each side, the cartilage is prolonged into a remarkably strong prepubic process (p.pb), the base of which occupies one fourth of the entire breadth of the girdle; but the forward extent of the prominence is not determinable, owing to imperfect preservation. Posteriorly, on each side, is a long slender iliac process (2/), especially well seen on the left, and slightly directed outwards; itis much less robust than the prepubic, and appears of almost uniform breadth throughout ; in length it equals twice the width of the transverse pubic cartilage (pub). Arising immediately within the point of union of the pubic and iliac regions is the basal cartilage (4.8) of the pelvic fin, which exhibits no sutural divisions, and (this specimen being a male) is prolonged backwards into a powerful clasper (c/). It curves gradually inwards throughout the whole of its rayed portion, and is of almost uniform breadth. On passing into the claspers, the cartilage becomes more calcified, and perhaps slightly broader. The inner edge is straight, but the outer edge exhibits a gentle sigmoid curve, which results in the widening of the rounded terminal extremity ; and at the end of each clasper (especially the left) a smal] tuft of dermal hooklets (AA) is preserved. The fin-rays (7), which appear to be completely shown on the right, are altogether twelve in number, and the length of the, supporting cartilage is searcely more than one half of that of the appended clasper. There is no distinct evidence of one or more preaxial rays attached to the girdle itself, and the foremost exhibited is no longer than the remainder. 1 St. G. Mivart, “ Fins of Elasmobranchs,” Trans. Zool Soc. vol. x. p. 453, pl. Lxxviii. fig.1. * ©, Gegenbaur, “Schultergiirtel der Wirbelthiere, und Brustflosse der Fische,” Untersuch, yergl. Anat. Wirb. 1865, pl. ix. figs. 1, 2. 1886. ] SQUALORAJA POLYSPONDYLA. 537 AFFINITIES AND SysTeMATIC PosITION. Proceeding, lastly, to a consideration of the systematic position of Squaloraja, it will be observed that the new fossils here described enable us to arrive at a much more definite conclusion than it has hitherto been possible to formulate. Agassiz has pointed out the affinities of the genus with the Pristiophoride; Davies has further indicated some resemblances to the Rhinobatide, and been led, by his discovery of the rostral spine, to speculate at least as to its family distinctness ; while Giinther! has likewise refrained from more than a suggestion that it is nearly allied to the first-named TOUp. That the animal is a true Selachian, there cannot be the slightest doubt ; nor does it require more than a superficial glance to recognize its resemblance both to the Sharks proper and the Rays. But (as already mentioned by Davies) the possession of a prehensile rostral spine by the male distinguishes Sgualoraja from all known members of the order, recent or fossil, and suggests affinities with the Chi- meroids*; while the enormous size of the barbels or cirri seems to have no parallel, at least among living forms. The dentition, too, is evidently unique, so far as our present knowledge. extends, and the marked character of the symphysis is a feature of peculiar interest. Comparing the genus in other points with the various recognized families upon the ‘‘ borderland ” of the two sections of the Selachii, reference may first be made to the Rhinidz. Though agreeing with this group in the very slight depression of the body, it is readily distinguished by the elongation of the snout and the inferior position of the mouth; and the anterior border of the pectoral fin is much less produced forwards, owing to the relatively smaller size of the propterygium. To the oft-mentioned Pristiophoride, Squaloraja bears a remark- able resemblance, both in the structure of the snout and the general form of the body; but there are no traces of teeth on either boundary of the rostrum ; and if the peculiar dental armature of the jaw may be quoted asa family character, this, too, will exclude the genus from the present group. From the family of Pristidee, the Liassic form is still further separated by the characters of the head and its anterior prolongation, though agreeing tolerably well in the shape of the trunk and fins. There are also certain features that prevent its reference to the Rhinobatide. The structure of the pectoral fin in this family is quite distinct from that of the fossil, the propterygial element being pro- longed far towards the head, so that in some cases it is connected by skin with the cephalic region. its distinctness from other families is too obvious to require any special mention, and Squaloraja is thus excluded from all recognized divisions of the order. [t may even represent a hitherto unknown ? A. Giinther, ‘Study cf Fishes’ (1880), p. 335. * We regard the Chimeroidei as a distinct order, following Professor Iualey, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1876, p. 57. 538 MR. P. L. SCLATER ON A NEW PARROT. [ Dec. 7, suborder, but I venture at least to suggest that the genus may be regarded as the type of a new family ; and utilizing, as far as possible, the structural features that commonly enter into the diagnoses of zoologists who study living forms, it may be provisionally defined as follows. Order SELACHII. Suborder TEcTrosPONDYLI. Family S@uaLORAIID&. Body scarcely depressed, elongate. Head produced into along flat rostrum, without lateral teeth. Males with a prehensile spine on the upper part of the snout. Dentition sharply divided at the symphysis. Pectoral fins with smail propterygium, free. EXPLANATION OF PLATE LY. Fig. 1. Skeleton of Squaloraja polyspondyla (male), dorsal aspect. [No. I.] a.v, situation of auditory openings; 0.s, basipterygium of pelvic fin ; ci (a and 8), cirri; c/, clasper; cor, coracoid; d, edge of skin; h&, dermal hooklets; Am, hyomandibular ; zl, iliac process; i¢r, inter- trabecular rostrum; mtp, metapterygium ; oc.c, occipital condyle ; p.pb, prepubic process ; pa.tr, palato-trabecular region ; pms, preaxial basal cartilage of pectoral fin; pr.pa, prepalatine process, pt.pa, postpalatine (antorbital) process; pub, pubic cartilage; 7, cartila- ginous fin-rays; 7.s, rostral spine; s.sc, suprascapula; ¢, dentition ; v, vertebral column. 2. Skull of ditto (male), dorsal aspect. [No.IV.] Refs. as above. 8, Skull of ditto (young female), ventral aspect. [No. III.] c.f, carotid foramen (?) ; iv.m, investing mass ; 7, notochordal sheath. 4, Dental plate of right mandibular ramus of ditto, twice nat. size. No, 1T.] 5. se spine of Squaloruja, sp., side view. [No. V.] 4, hooklets; g, lateral groove. 6. Rostral spine of Squaloraja tenuispina, dorsal view. [No. VIII.] 7. ail of Squaloraja polyspondyla (young female). [No. I1I.] 8. Section of vertebra of ditto. [No. II.] All the specimens are from the Lower Lias of Lyme Regis, and preserved in the British Museum. With the exception of fig. 4, the drawings are of the vatural size. 3. On an apparently new Parrot of the Genus Conurus living in the Society’s Gardens. By P. L. Scuarer, M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S., Secretary to the Society. [Received October 29, 1886. ] (Plate LVI.) On the 29th of April last we purchased of Mr. Cross, of Liverpool, an example of a Parrot of the genus Conurus, which seems to be different from every other species of the genus yet described. The bird, which is still living in the Parrot-house, is at once distinguish- able from its congeners by its red throat and collar, whence I propose to call it J. Smit ith Hanhart imp CONURUS RUBRITORQUIS. 1886.] MR. OGILBY ON AN UNDESCRIBED PIMELEPTERUS. 539 ConvuRUS RUBRITORQUIS, sp. nov. (Plate LVI.) Green: white of throat and collar only slightly apparent ; at the back of the neck bright red; eye-region naked ; billand feet whitish. Whole length 11°5 inches, wing 5:0, tail 4°7. Hab. South America or West Indies. Obs. About the size of C. enops, but distinguished by its red throat and green under wing-coverts. 4, On an undescribed Pimelepterus from Port Jackson. By J. Doveias Ocmsy, Department of Fishes, Aust. Mus. Sydney. (Communicated by F. Day, C.LE., F.Z.S.). [Received November 1, 1886.] PIMELEPTERUS MERIDIONALIS, Sp. Nov. Bown. POS WG-1 iz. A. S/O. V. 1/0 Be Fe. C7." ¥ dat: 57-59. L. tr. 10/19. Cae. pyl. ca. 460. Vert. 11/15. Length of head from 4°85 to 5:15, of caudal fin from 4°66 to 5:00, of pectoral fins from 7:00 to 7:20, height of body from 3:00 to 3°20 in the total length. Eyes: diameter from 4:00 to 4°50 in the length of the head, from 1°60 to 1°75 in that of the snout, and from 2°00 to 2°30 in the convex interorbital space. Body oblong, com- pressed ; a transverse rounded protuberance in front of the eyes. Cleft of mouth small and transverse ; upper jaw rather the longer ; the maxilla reaches to below the anterior margin of the orbit. Pre-, sub-, and interopercles entire. Teeth: a single row of strong curved conical teeth in each jaw, the horizontal portion of which is of equal length with the vertical ; behind these rows are narrow bands of similar but much smaller teeth, which probably are intended to finally replace the outer row; vomer, palatines, and tongue densely crowded with minute teeth’. Fins: dorsal spines of moderate strength, increasing in length to the seventh, which is about one half the length of the head, and much longer than the rays of the dorsal, though only equal to the first anal ray. Pectorals rounded, rather longer than the ventrals, and from two thirds to three fourths the length of the head. Third anal spine longest and strongest; caudal emarginate. Scales feebly ctenoid, extending in front of the eyes; much smaller on the head; 18 between the bases of the ventrals and the lateral line, and 8 between that and the base of the sixth dorsal spine; those below the lateral line larger than those above it. Pseudobranchie well developed. Gill-rakers 20. Colours dull brownish grey, with a silvery shade below; upper part of head darkest ; all the fins dark. Irides a mixture of orange and silver. 1 In connection with the dentition of Pimelepterus, I may mention that Girella tricuspidata has a small patch of palatine teeth. Dr. Ginther (Cat. i. . 427) states that ‘‘in one species there is a short series of palatine teeth,” but i omits mentioning which species possesses this series. 540 MR. G. A. BOULENGER ON [ Dec. 7, The examples from which this species is described measure respectively 25°10, 26°10, and 28°30 inches, and were all taken in Port Jackson, where this species is locally known as the “Drummer” ’. I have never seen a small specimen of this fish. Breeding: only one, the largest of my specimens, showed any signs of breeding ; this was a male with the milt but little developed ; all three were taken during the month of August. As food: not held in any estimation, and commanding no sale in the market, nevertheless it is, in my opinion, quite equal to the other herbivorous Sparoids. Habits: in these it is a true rock-fish, dweiling in the crevices and indentations of our rocky shores, where it finds abundant food and shelter; it is not given to roaming, and is only taken by the trammel, one end of which is attached to the shore, against which the mesh must actually lie, or else the fish would assuredly pass inside, whence it happens that this species is almost always caught within a few feet of the shore. Note.—From Dr. Ramsay’s MS. notes on Australian Fishes, I find that, so far back as 1881, he noticed these differences with regard to the dentition, but never published any communication thereon. 5. On the South-African Tortoises allied to Testudo geometrica. By G. A. BouLencrr. [Received November 2, 1886.] (Plates LVII. & LVIII.) Upon the suggestion of the Rev. Mr. Fisk, of Cape Town, who has enriched the Society’s Menagerie with so many interesting Reptiles, I have undertaken a reexamination of the South-African Tortoises allied to Testudo geometrica, and am able to distinguish as many as seven well-marked species, of which the diagnoses follow. The specimens named 7. ¢rimeni, after the Director of the South- African Museum, and 7’. fiski, were lately exhibited in the Society’s Gardens, and were unrepresented in the Natural History Museum. That named 7’. smithi, after the author of the ‘Illustrations of South-African Zoology,’ is established on a specimen erroneously referred by Gray to 7’. verreauaii. The true 7’. verreauwii being still unrepresented in our collections, its diagnosis is compiled from Smith’s description and figure. ? It shares the name with Girella elevata, Macleay, and Pachymetopon grande, Ginth. In the ‘ Annals and Magazine of Natural History’ for November 1886, Dr. Ginther described Pimelepterus sydneyanus, n.sp., from Port Jackson, and suggested that Pachymetopon grande (Cat. Austr. Fish. i. p. 106) may be Péme- lepterus fuscus, Lacépéde, and that Pachymetopon sqguamosum, Macleay and Alleyne (Proc. Linn. N.S. Wales, i. p. 275, pl. ix. f. 1), may be Pimelepterus cinerascens, Forsk,, or P. tahmel, Riippell. imp. Mintern Bros. J. Smit del et lith TRIMENI. STUDO TE P.Z.S. 1886. Pl. LVI. J. Smit del et lith. Mintern Bros. imp. TESTUDO FISKI. 1886. ] SOUTH-AFRICAN TORTOISES. 541 1. Testupo GEomertrica, L. Beak strongly hooked. No large tubercle on the hinder side of the thigh. Lateral marginal plates not forming an angle with the costals. Nuchal longer than broad. Suture between the gulars longer than that between the anals; suture between the humerals as long as that between the femorals, and much longer than that between the pectorals. Carapace black, with yellow areolze from which yellow rays radiate ; eight or twelve yellow rays on the vertebrals, nine to twelve on the costals, two to four on the marginals, Plastron brown and yellow, the two colours forming more or less ill-defined rays, Common in the Cape Peninsula. 2. Txstrupo TenTortA, Bell. ; Beak strongly hooked. An enlarged tubercle on the hinder side of the thigh. Lateral marginals usually not forming an angle with the costals. Nuchal minute. Suture between the gulars as long as, or shorter than, that between the anals; suture between the humerals longer than that between the pectorals or the femorals. Carapace black, the centre of the areole with a small yellow or orange spot, from which narrow rays of the same colour radiate ; eight to twelve rays on the vertebral, twelve to fourteen on the costals, three or four on the marginals. .Plastron brown in the middle (inner half of abdominal plates), yellow on the sides. Common at Beaufort West. 3. TESTUDO TRIMENI, sp. n. (Plate LVII.) Beak very feebly hooked. No enlarged tubercle on the hinder side of the thighs. Lateral marginals forming an angle with the costals, a convex border with a well-marked longitudinal groove. Nuchal minute. Suture between the gulars as long as, or shorter than, that between the anals ; suture between the humerals not, or but little, longer than that between the pectorals or the femorals. Carapace black, with broad yellow or orange rays radiating from a small sput on the areolee; five or six rays on the vertebral plates, and jour to eight on the costals; a yellow spot or streak at the junction of two plates; one or two rays on each marginal. Plastron dark brown in the centre, with yellow rays, yellow on the sides. Length of carapace of adult 105 millim. Mouth of the Orange River. 4. TESTUDO VERREAUXI, Smith. Beak very feebly hooked. No enlarged tubercle on the hinder side of the thighs. Lateral marginals forming an angle with the costals. Nuchal well developed, a little longer than broad. Suture between the gulars as long as that between the anals; suture between the humerals much longer than that between the pectorals or the femorals. 542 MR. BOULENGER ON SOUTH-AFRICAN TORTOISES. [Dec. 7, Carapace dark brown, each dorsal and costal plate with four or five yellow rays proceeding from the yellow areole. Plastron yellow, dark brown in the middle. Near the sources of the Orange River. 5. TESTUDO SMITHI, sp. n. Beak feebly hooked. A large tubercle on the hinder side of the thighs. Lateral marginals not forming an angle with the costals. Nuchal longer than broad. Suture between the gulars nearly as long as that between the anals; suture between the humerals much longer than that between the pectorals or the femorals. Carapace dark brown, with radiating, narrow, yellow, black-edged rays, meeting in the centre of the areole; plastron yellow, with dark brown rays, the brown predominating in the middle. Length of carapace of adult 115 millim. A single specimen, with the mere indication “8S. Africa.” 6. Tesrupo FIsKI, sp. n. (Plate LVIII.) Ala feebly hooked. A large tubercle on the hinder side of the thigh. Lateral marginals not forming an angle with the costals. Nuchals small, equilateral. Suture between the gulars shorter than that between the anals; suture between the humerals much longer than that between the pectorals or the femorals. Carapace with brownish-yellow and black rays of nearly equal width, radiating from the yellow areole; six black rays on each vertebral and costal plate, and two on each marginal ; the anterior and posterior pair of black rays on the costal and vertebral plates meeting their fellows form three series of ocelli. Plastron dirty yellow, brown in the middle. Length of carapace of adult 75 millim. A single male specimen, from De Aar, not far from Hopetown, was presented alive to the Zoological Society by Mr. Fisk. 7. TESTUDO SEMISERRATA, Smith. Beak strongly hooked. A large tubercle on the hinder side of the thighs. Lateral marginals not forming an angle with the costals ; anterior and posterior marginals forming a strongly serrated edge. Nuchal longer than broad. Suture between the gulars as long as, or longer than, that between the anals; suture between the humerals much longer than that between the pectorals or the femorals. Carapace with brownish-yellow and dark brown or black radiating rays, usually of nearly equal width, six to ten in number on the ver- tebral and costal plates. Plastron yellowish, with dark brown rays. Carapace of adult 115 millim. Common in the districts between Latakoo and the Tropic of Capricorn. 1886.] ON THE SKULL OF THE CHAMELEONS. 543 6. Remarks on Prof. W. K. Parker’s paper on the Skull of the Chameleons. By G. A. BouLencER. [Received November 25, 1886.] I wish to call attention to what I believe to be a serious error in Prof. Parker’s paper on the Skull of the Chameleons, printed in the last volume of the Society’s ‘Transactions’ (vol. xi. p. 77, 1881). The adult skulls of two species are described and figured, viz. that of Chameleo vulgaris (pl. xvi.) and that of C. pumilus (pl. xix.); but, through some error, the skull of a newly born C. pumilus is represented (pl. xv.) as that of the common species; and as the facts derived from this wrongly-identified species are the basis of the author’s arguments, his conclusions receive, in some points at least, a severe shock from this discovery. Any one will, I think, on comparing the figures, recognize the mistake now that attention is drawn to it, and it is incomprehensible that, although Prof. Parker’s paper has often been quoted during the five years which have elapsed since its publication, it should not have been noticed before. No wonder the author states that he knows “ of no skull whatever in which the roof-bones undergo so great a transformation as in this (C. vulgaris)” or that he should be struck by the resemblance of the adult C. pumilus to the young C. vulgaris, regarding the one as representing a sort of arrested development of the other. I have besides no doubt that he is wrong in his interpretation of the three bones forming the roof of the casque. As recently suggested by Baur, the critical bone ‘‘ pa- rietal,”” Parker, should be regarded as the supratemporal, and the ‘*interparietal,” Parker, as the parietal. That the three bones are perfectly distinct in the young C. pumilus is well shown on pl. xv. fig. 3, and it is not surprising that the sutures should have dis- appeared on a skull in which the ossification is so expanded, roofing over, as it does, the supratemporal! fossee, and studded with tubercles, as is the case in the adult C. pumilus. The statement that the skull of the latter species is less aberrant than that of the common one is therefore incorrect. Should further proofs be required, beyond the inspection of Prof. Parker’s own plates, to establish my identification of the species figured, I might add that the separation of the pre- from the post- frontal is a character of C. pumilus, and that the specimen received from Mr. Moore, of Liverpool, was no doubt one of a brood, in the possession of Lady Cust, which was born alive in November 1868, and on which Mr. Moore reported at the time (cf. Proc. Lit. & Phys. Soc. Liverp. xxiii. p. 49). Now, it is well known that C. vulgaris is oviparous, and the fact that C. pumilus is ovovivi- parous was recorded as early as 1825 (cf. Kaup, Isis, 1825, p- 992). 544 MR. O. THOMAS ON LAGORCHESTES FAsciaTus. [ Dec. 7, 7. On the Wallaby commonly known as Lagorchestes fasciatus. By Oupristp THomas, Natural History Museum. [Received November 3, 1886.] (Plate LIX.) One of the earliest known of all the Australian Marsupials was the beautiful little banded Wallaby which was discovered in 1804 on the islands in Shark’s Bay, Western Australia, by Péron and Lesueur, during their famous voyage round the world, and described by them in 1807 under the name of “‘ Kangurus fusciatus’’}. This species was included by all the earlier writers, with the rest of the Macropodide, in the single genus then ‘recognized, whether called Kangurus, Macropus, or Halmaturus. In 1842, however, it was placed by Gould, on the authority of the typical specimens in the Paris Museum, in Gray’s genus Bettongia, although in the same year he described two other specimens of it as ‘‘ Lagorchestes albipilis,” thus referring them to the genus made by him just pre- viously for the true Hare-wallabies, of which Lagorchestes leporotdes is the type. Gould’s two mistakes in referring Péron and Lesueur’s species to the Hypsiprymnine genus Bettongia, and in separating “‘ L. albipilis ” from it, were corrected by Waterhouse in his excellent general work on the Marsupials, where the species was described * under the name of Macropus (Lagorchestes) fasciatus*—an identification accepted by Gould in his ‘Mammals of Australia,’ where the species is figured as Lagorchestes fasciatus, by which name it has since been generally known. The teeth, as well as the external characters, of Z. fasciatus were described and figured by Waterhouse, and their differences from those of the true Hare-wallabies noted; but he does not seem to have at all appreciated the importance of these differences, which appear to me to be so great as to compel me, 80 years after the first description of the species, to form a new and special genus for its reception. This genus I propose to call Lagostrophus*. The differences in dentition between Lagorchestes and Lagostro- phus are not of the trivial and unimportant nature of those charac- teristic of most of the other genera of this very homogeneous family, but are of a kind to show that Lagostrophus fasciatus must have not only different food, but even a different manner of eating it to any of the other members of the subfamily Macropodine. On examining the incisors of any of the ordinary Kangaroos and Wallabies (Plate LIX. figs. 8, 9, and 12), we find that the whole set form a widely open curve, and that the sizes and proportions of the 1 Voy. Terres Austr. i. p. 114, Atl. pl. xxvii. ? Vol. i. p. 87 (1846). 3 Nat. Hist. Mamm. i. p. 87 (1846). 4 Nayws, a Hare, and orpé¢os, a band or belt. it i ——— PS), 1886. PLL Maud Horman-Fisher del et lich Mintern Bros. ump LAGOSTROPHUS FASCIATUS, FIGS. 1-7. LAGORCHESTES .LEPOROIDES, BIGS: 8-12. 4 4 sO ie a iy Ord bya 1886.] MR.O THOMAS ON LAGORCHESTES FASCIATUS, 545 individual teeth are more or less as follows :—i’ is the largest of the three, boldly curved forwards, and descending below the eel of the other two, its tip sharp and gauge-shaped ; i andi* are both much smaller than i’, very narrow transversely, and provided with sharp cutting-edges ; of the two, i° is nearly invariably the larger, On placing the mandible in position, the large sealpriforim lower incisors fit in naturally between the upper ones, not biting vertically upon their edges, but only upon the palate between them (fig. 9). The lower incisors themselves are very wniform in shape, and always provided with sharp cutting-edges along their inner margins (see the section fig. 10), the animals being able, « owing to the laodéneed of the symphysial joint, to separate and approximate these cutting-edges'*, and thus to utilize them as a pair of scissors with which to snip off leaves or grass. Turning, on the other hand, to Lagostrophus fasciatus, we find a very different state of things. First, the two series of upper incisors are close together, meeting at a sharp angle in front and diverging but little behind (fig. 2). Then as to the size of the teeth, i’, instead of being the largest, is the smallest of the three, at least in cross section, and even vertically it is but little longer than the others (figs. 2 and 6); in shape it is conical, scarcely curved forwards, and with a blunt, rounded or flattened tip. TF? and i° are each longer antero-posteriorly than i’ and, when looked at externally, have much the same appearance as those of Lagorchestes, except that i’ is longer than i%, while in ZLagorchestes and in nearly all other Kangaroos the reverse in this case. But when looked at from below (fig. 2), there appears a very remarkable difference ; instead of being narrow and sharp-edged, they are broad and flat-topped, and are evidently not formed for cutting in the true sense at all. The palatal surtace of i? forms an even oblong, its breadth slightly more than half its length ; while the flatness of i’ is only modified by a broad shallow groove running along its centre, and terminating at its postero-external corner, where it forms a notch on the outer edge of the tooth evidently homologous with that found in a similar position in the other Wallabies. Trying now the same experiment as before of placing the lower jaw in position, we see at once what a difference the contraction of the incisor series must make in the manner of using them; for the lower incisors, instead of dropping down between the upper ones, come flat upon the top of them, so that there can only be a grinding- and not a cutting-action between the upper and lower teeth. An examination of the lower jaw of L. fasciatus seems to show that this species, and this alone of the Macropodine, is without the power of using the two rami independently, as the junction between them, instead of being loose and narrow, is broad, close, and firm, the vertical height at the symphysis being so great in proportion to the size of the jaw as to produce a distinct rounded prominence on 1 See Murie and Bartlett, P. Z.S. 1866, p. 28. Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XXXVI. 36 546 MR. O. THOMAS ON LAGORCHESTEs Fascratus. [Dec. 7, its lower side corresponding to the chin, no trace of such a prominence being present in any of the other genera. In natural correlation to this structure of the jaw, the lower incisors themselves have not the sharp inwardly projecting edges ‘characteristic of those of the other Kangaroos, and are merely approximated to each other by their flat inner surfaces; the trans- verse sections of the incisors of the two forms (figs. 4 and 10) show this difference better than any description. The incisors and symphysis thus indicating a difference in the motion and use of the mandible, we should naturally expect an appreciable change in the shape of those parts of it by which it is attached and moved, and we therefore find, first, that the coronoid process possesses the very unusual character of having its anterior edge slightly concave in its upper half, all other Kangaroos having this part evenly convex; and, secondly, the condyle, instead of having its length and breadth much about equal, is very much broader than long, and is provided with a broad, flat, supplementary internal process (compare figs. 5 and 11). Canines, present in Lagorchestes, are, as in the majority of the Macropodide, wholly absent in Lagostrophus. The two premolars of Lagostrophus, i. e. the smaller anterior deci- duous one, pm* of the typical dentition, and the larger permanent one, or pm’ (fig. 7), are both broad and flattened, their posterior decidedly greater than their anterior diameters, with well-developed internal edges, and with four or five shallow vertical grooves on their external surfaces. The premolars therefore correspond with the incisors in being broader and more flattened than is usual ; but the difference, at least in comparison with certain of the broader-toothed species, such as Macropus brachyurus, Quoy and Gaim., or Lagorchestes conspicillatus, Gould, is by no means so striking as in the case of the incisors. The molars appear to be precisely similar to those of Lagorchestes and the other smaller members of the Macropodine. The general shape of the skull (fig. 1) presents nothing very remarkable, except that, owing to the approximation of the two incisor series to each other, the premaxille bearing them are very much narrower transversely than usual, and therefore give a peculiar slender and pointed appearance to the muzzle. With regard to the external characters, we have first to note that the rhinarium, notwithstanding the statements of Gould and Water- house, is really practically naked, as in the Wallabies, and is not hairy as in Lagorchestes’*. The hair, in fact, only grows down the centre of the nose to the level of the superior internal angle of the nostrils, leaving the whole of the front of the nasal septum bare. The hind feet, instead of being short-haired as in Lagorchestes, are covered with long bristly hairs, very much as in Petrogale, these hairs nearly entirely covering up the narrow naked sole, and hiding the short, but strong and conical, central hind claws. * Even in Lagorchestes the hairiness is very variable, L. conspicillatus having @ very much less hairy muzzle than L. deporotdes, the type of the genus. 1886.] MR. 0. THOMAS ON LAGORCHESTES FASCIATUS. 547 Finally, so far as regards colour, the transverse banding of the lower back presents a style of coloration quite unique in this family, and, beyond the Macropodide, only found among Marsupials in Thy- lacinus and Myrmecobius, in which, however, it is far more prom- inent than in the Banded Wallaby. The last point for consideration is the systematic position of Lagostrophus among the other genera of the family, and I have therefore compared its characters with those of the sections and groups into which Prof. Garrod, in his classical paper on Dorcopsis *, has divided the subfamily Macropodine. This comparison shows that the differential characters of Lagostrophus are of distinctly greater systematic importance than are those separating Prof. Garrod’s Section I. from Section II., as these appear to be by no means so persistent or invariable as that author supposed. I cannot therefore consider Lagostrophus, as a group, less than equal in value to all the other genera of the subfamily combined, so that the following is the arrangement that I would propose to substitute for Prof. Garrod’s :— Family MACROPODID&. Subfamily Macroropinz. Section I. A. Genera Macropus, Petrogale, Onychogale, Lagorchestes. B. Genera Dendrolagus and Dorcopsis. Section II. Genus Lagostrophus. Subfamily HypstpRYMNIN2. Section I. Genera Hypsiprymnus, Bettongia, Aepyprymuus, Subfamily HyrsipRYMNODONTIN&. Section I. Genus Hypsiprymnodon. EXPLANATION OF PLATE LIX. Fig. 1. Lagostrophus fasciatus, upper view of skull. 2. —— , palatal view of upper incisor teeth. 3. —— , palatal view of upper incisor teeth, with the lower jaw in position. 4, —— , outline of transverse section of the two lower incisors. 5, —— , right condyle of lower jaw. 6. — , side view of upper and lower incisors. Gs , palatal view of upper and lower incisors. 8. Lagorchestes leporoides, as in fig. 2. hi , as in fig. 3. 10. —— , as in fig. 4. 11. —- , as in fig. 5. 12. , as in fig. 6. Fig. 1 is of the natural size; all the others are magnified three times. 1 p, Z.8. 1875, p. 58. 36* 548 PROF. R, COLLETT ON PHASCOLOGALE VIRGINTE. [ Dec. 7, 8. On Phascologale virginie, a rare Pouched Mouse from Northern Queensland. By Rosertr Coutuert, C.M.Z.S. [Received December 2, 1886.] (Plate LX.) PHASCOLOGALE virGINI&, De Tarragon, 1847. (Plate LX.) Phascologale virginia, De Tarr. Revue Zool. 1847, p. 177. Diagn. Skull with strong sagittal and occipital crests, and distinct processus postorlitales. Incisors almost equal; upper canine very long. First premolar very small; third the largest. Ossa palatina with foramina; pars mastoidea scarcely inflated behind the bullee. Fars large, almost naked; tail as long as the body and head, scantily clothed with adpressed hairs. Hind feet slender, hallux very short; sole of metatarsus naked in the middle line ; tuberculated callosities at the base of the toes. Colour blackish, grizzled with silvery white ; head reddish grey, with a black stripe from nose to between the ears, and trace of another on the side of the snout. Below greyish ; feet pale red, tail reddish grey with black tips’. Measurements, taken from the stuffed specimen :— millim, Length of body (with head) .......... about 125 Length of tail........ a naa aN Meise vide 120 From ipl snpptitolean. 6. , of an inch in diameter would certainly be smaller than the halves of a sphere one twelfth the size. The facts at our disposal seem to point to the conclusion that the epiblast is chiefly derived from the male element, while the female pronucleus is responsible chiefly for the hypo- and greater portion of the mesoblast. If this be true, the transmission of characters peculiar to the male is not so obscure as many have supposed. We must now inquire how it is, that if the female possesses all the secondary sexual characters of the male in a latent manner, what is it that prevents them manifesting themselves. When differentiation of sexes occurs in animals previously hermaphrodite, it involves either the loss of certain characters on the 1886, ] MR, J. B. SUTTON ON ATAVISM. 557 part of the female, or the acquisition of new characters by the male, or at any rate increased functional importance of certain organs possessed, when in the state of hermaphroditism, by all the forms. By natural selection the male would acquire (or, if already in his possession in a functional condition, they would become more developed) means for seizing and retaining the female, such as the claspers of sharks, the callous pads of frogs, &c. Paternal duty requires the male to protect the young and defend the females from harm; hence horns, teeth (as in the musk-ox), spurs, tusks, &c. become more developed in him. The duties of the female require her not only to furnish the material out of which the young are to be formed, but in many cases she is required to provide them with nutrition long after they enter the world. The material which the female thus provides is of the very kind necessary, in many instances, to build up such structures as horns, tusks, teeth, and the like. Further, this material is required by the female at the corresponding period of life in which they become developed in the male, viz. on the advent of puberty. We may state with certainty that a distinct correlation exists between the generative organs of the female and the development of the secondary sexual male characters. The more developed and functional the female reproductive organs become, the less likely is she to manifest the secondary characters of the male. It may be argued, that in some cases the female simulates the male, as in the few examples of female Deer possessing horns. Quite true; but so long as the female is engaged in the duties of reproduction, these secondary characters are never developed to the same extent asin the functional male. It must also be borne in mind, that in cases where sterile females, or those which have ceased to bear young, put on external male characters, they rarely attain such proportions or beauty as in the male; for in the males the general excitement produced upon the system by sexual passion has a most powerful stimulant effect upon the growth and development of these structures, which is wanting inthe female. So that in her attempts to emulate the male she succeeds to a certain degree, but rarely, if ever, attains to so good a condition. Hunter has recorded some experiments which have a bearing on this matter :— ‘*7 wished also to ascertain if the parts peculiar to the male could grow on the female, and if the parts of a female, on the contrary, would grow on a male. ** Although I had formerly transplanted the testicles of a cock into the abdomen of a hen, and they had sometimes taken root there, but not frequently, and then had never come to perfection, yet the experiment could not, from this cause, answer fully the intended purpose ; there is, I believe, a natural reason to believe it could not, and the experiment was therefore disregarded. I took the spur from the leg of a young cock, and placed it in the situation of the spur in the leg of a hen-chicken ; it took root, the chicken grew to a hen, but at first no spur grew, while the spur that was left on the 558 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [ Dec. 21, other leg of the cock grew as usual. This experiment I have repeated several times in the same manner, with the same effects, which led me to conceive that the spur of a cock would not grow upon a hen, and that they were, therefore, to be considered as distinct animals, having very distinct powers. In order to ascertain this, I took the spurs of hen chickens and placed them on the legs of young cocks. I found that those which took root grew nearly as fast, and to as large a size as the natural spur on the other leg, which appeared to be a contradiction to my other experiments. Upon another examination of my hens, however, I found that the spurs had grown considerably, although they had taken several years to do it ; for I found that the same quantity of growth in the spur of a cock, while on the cock, during one year, was as much as that of the cock’s spur on the hen in the course of three or four years, or as three or four to one; whereas the growth of the hen’s spur on the cock was to that of the proper spur of the hen as two to one.” When a female animal belonging to a dimorphic species assumes male characters, it is truly an example of Atavism, or development of transmitted characters normally latent. This part of the matter has been dwelt upon at some length for the following important reason. If we regard the epiblast and the structures developed therefrom as representing the chief cha- racters derived from the male parent, it opens up a field of interesting inquiry in clinical medicine and pathology regarding hereditary diseases, and it demonstrates clearly enough that we have little knowledge concerning the germs of organs which may be latent in an animal; therefore Neogenetic Atavism is, at its best, exceedingly questionable. To assume that such a form of Atavism exists, is to believe in the sudden development of new characters: this is totally opposed to the fundamental principles of Evolution. The question is one of great importance to the pathologist, inasmuch as there is very great probability that many aberrations of organs and tissues are atavistic in their nature. 2. On the Systematic Position and Classification of Sponges. By R. v. Lenpenrerp, Ph.D., F.L.S., Assistant in the Biological Laboratory of University College, London. [Received December 20, 1886.] I. Introductory Remarks, p. 558. IL. Nomenclature of Spicules, p. 559. III. The Systematic Position of Sponges, p. 564. IV. The Classification of Sponges, p. 570. V. Key to the Recent Families of Sponges, p. 589. VI. Appendix. List of Publications, p. 592. I. InrrRopucrory REMARKS. Our knowledge of the development and structure of Sponges is of such recent date that we have hardly had time to utilize it for systematic purposes till now. 1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIF{CATION OF SPONGES. 539 Whilst the anatomical and embryological work of recent authors, particularly of F. E. Schulze and his pupils, has made us acquainted with the structure of Sponges in a satisfactory manner, our know- ledge of species, which was formerly practically confined to those from the Mediterranean and the Atlantic, has been greatly extended by the collections made during the voyages of the ‘Alert’ and ‘Challenger’ in all parts of the world, and by my own labours in the Australian seas. I think, therefore, that the time has now arrived to endeavour to establish a classification of Sponges, and to discuss the position which the Sponges, as a group, occupy in the scale of Nature. In an Appendix to this paper a nearly complete list of publications on Sponges is given. It has been made by interpolating old, new, and omitted papers in D’Arcy Thomson’s (1495) list of 551 papers, the references in which have been verified. I must express my thanks to Mrs. v. Lendenfeld and to Mr. A. Dendy for their share in this work, and also to Mr. Ridley for his kindness in allowing us to use his most valuable MS. notes on this subject. In the section on the systematic position of Sponges, the principal views held on the subject are discussed, and reasons are given for considering the Sponges as the first Phylum of the Grade Ccelentera, which arrangement has been adopted in this paper. The main classification of the Orders is the result of my own anato- mical work, and has been arrived at independently of other authors. It affords me much pleasure to state that this classification is, in the main, similar to that established by Vosmaer (1550), although we have arrived at our results in different ways, and our diagnoses differ accordingly. To that section of this paper which deals with the arrangement of the Families and Subfamilies, and the enumeration of the principal Genera, Mr. A. Dendy has contributed the portions relating to the Suborders Clavulina and Halichondrina with the exception of the Tethyde and Chalininee. The portions relating to the Hexactinellida and Tetractinellida are compiled from the recent papers of Schulze (1369), Sollas (1453), Vosmaer (1550), and Zittel (1639). The remainder is based on my own MS. notes. II. NoMENCLATURE OF THE SPICULES. Various terms for the spicules found in Sponges have been used by different authors. In consequence of this a certain confusion has arisen with regard to the meaning of the terms employed. Vosmaer (1550) made a chivalrous attempt to establish a satisfactory Nomenclature, which, however, has unfortunately not been accepted by recent authors on Sponges except myself, so that it only added to the already existing confusion, Recently Sollas, Ridley, and Dendy have established a new nomen- clature for Monaxonid spicules, which I have agreed to adopt, and which has been used by them and myself. I do not think it perfect, but I am certainly not in a position to replace it by anything better, and therefore adopt and explain it in this paper. Schulze’s nomen- 560 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21, clature of Hexactinellid spicules is here, of course, accepted en b/oc, and his terms will be defined below. Sollas (1453) has used a number of terms in his preliminary report which I do not under- stand and which presumably nobody else understands either. It is, therefore, much to be regretted that the greater part of them are unexplained. In consequence of this I will, for the present, abstain from attempting to compile a nomenclature of Tetraxonid spicules pending the publication of Sollas’s full report, in which, we may hope, he will explain his new terms. The spicules of Sponges are, as a rule, of such shape that they appear as more or less modified geometrical figures with definite axes. The axes are always represented by a non-skeletal rod (the so-called axial canal), round which the silica or lime is precipitated in con- centric layers. There may be one such axis, or there may be more than one. : Hackel (627) drew attention to this crystalline regularity of sponge-spicules, which has been of great importance in studying the skeletal elements of Sponges. We can divide the sponge-spicules, as we do the Sponges, into the two groups Calcarea and Silicea, according to their chemical composition, Withia each group we distinguish series of forms according to the number and position of the axes. The validity of this classification is proved by the correlation of these different kinds of spicules with other orgaus in the Sponges. The following are the different kinds of spicules :— I. Group Spicuta CaLcareEa. Composed chiefly of carbonate of lime. 1, Monaxonia. With one straight or curved axis, rod-shaped. 2. Triaxonia. With three distinct axes which may lie in one plane or not. When one of the rays of this tri-act spicule becomes rudimentary, Diaxonia can theoretically be produced. It is, however, advantageous to consider the Diaxon spicules as part of the Triaxonia. The calcareous triaxon spicules have only three rays—triact. 3. Tetraxonia. With four axes and four rays—tetract. The points form the corners of a triangular pyramid. Generally three axes, or rays, are equivalent (tangential), and one (radial) is differentiated, longer or shorter than the others. II. Group Sercuxa Sinicea. Composed chiefly of silica. 1. Anaxonia. Without definite axes and with numerous rays—polyact. To this group belongs one kind of spicule only, namely the stellate and its derivatives. 1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 561 The following six forms can be distinguished :— A. Regularia. The rays radiating from one point. 1. Oxyaster. With long, slender, pointed rays (e. g. Stelletta). = st, Vosmaer. 2. Euaster. With stout, pointed, conic rays (e. g. Chondrilla).=g/. st, Vosmaer. 3. Spheraster. The rays coalesce to form a solid ball (e. g. Geodia).=gl, Vosmaer. B. Irregularia. The centre extends to form a line which may be curved, circular, ring-shaped, or spiral. 4. Spiraster. A stout spiral with thick spines attached (e.g. Raphyrus). = st’, Vosmaer. When spines terminal, dmphiaster, 5. Corona. A spined ring (e.g. Suberocorona) (?). 6. Spirula. A spiral without spines (e. g. Spiretta). These anaxon spicules never form part of the supporting skeleton, but are invariably flesh-spicules (Microsclera). 2. Monaxonia. With one straight or curved axis, sometimes with lamellar out- growths, A. Supporting Spicules (Megasclera). 1. Strongylus. A cylindrical rod rounded at each end (e.g. Uruguaga). = tr’, Vosmaer. 2. Oxystrongylus, A cylindrical rod abruptly pointed at each end (e. g. Pachychalina). 3. Oxyus. A gradually pointed, spindle-shaped spicule (e.g. Spongilla). = ac, ac, and ac’, Vosmaer. Diact, F. E. Schulze. 4, Tylotus, A cylindrical rod with a knob at each end (e.g. Crella). = tr™, Vosmaer. 5. Tylostylus. A cylindrical rod more or less pointed at one end and knobbed at the other (e. g. Suberites). = tr° ac, Vosmaer. Without knob, Stylus. Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XXXVII. 37 562 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21, B. Flesh-Spicules (Microsclera). 6. Toxius. Curved in the centre, the two ends in astraight line, thus , (e.g. Toxochalina).=f,\, Vosmaer. When in bundles, 7'owodragmata. 7. Sigmata. S-shaped, curved irregularly, not expanded in one plane (e. g. Gel- hodes).= w, Vosmaer. When in bundles, Sigmadragmata. 8. Isochele. Curved spicules with flat expanded ends extending in the surface of a rotation ellipsoid ; both ends equal (e.g. Desmacidonide). =anc’, Vosmaer. Anchorates, auctorum. 9. Anisochele. Curved spicules with flat expanded ends extending in the surface of a rotation ellipsoid ; ends unequal (e. gy. Desmacidonide). =ane, anc, Vosmaer. Anchorates, auctorum. 10. Diankistra. A rod with a hook at each end, divided by a remarkable incision (e. g. Vomerula).= => J Vosmaer. Bundles of hair-like spicules, Trichodragmata. 3. Triazonia. Spicules with three axes and six rays and their derivatives. (For details compare F. E. Schulze’s preliminary report.) 1. Oxyhevact. With six pointed rays, the ends of which form the corners of a double square pyramid. The rays represent the crystalline axes. 2. Oxypentact. One ray rudimentary, representing the axes of a simple square pyramid. 3. Oxytetract. Two rays rudimentary, representing the edges of a square pyramid. 4. Oxydiact. Four rays rudimentary, only two rays lying in one straight line remain. 5. Hezaster. A star with six, generally equal rays :— a. Oxyhexaster, Rays pointed. b. Discohexaster. Rays terminated by disks. ce Floricome. Rays terminated by a bunch of curved branches. 4, Graphiohexaster. Rays much curved. Plumicome. Rays terminated with a number of plumose branches. 6. Pinnule. 5 A star with five or six rays. One of them is particularly highly 1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 563 developed and branched or covered with disks or scales. The oppo- site ray smooth or absent. The other four equal (tangential). 7. Scopule. Fork- or broom-shaped spicules consisting of a long shaft traversed by an axial rod, to the distal end of which some, generally four, slender anaxial rods are attached. 8. Amphidise. A rod with an umbrella-shaped disk at each end. 9. Uncinate. A rod with recurved hooks throughout its entire length. 10. Clavule. A rod pointed at one end and bearing a knob or disk at the other. 4. Tetravonia. With four axes radiating from one point. The ends of the spicules lie in the corners of a square pyramid and their derivatives. A. Tetractina. With four rays. B. Triactina. With three rays. C. Diactina. With two rays. D. Monactina. With one ray. For the reasons given above, I shall abstain from describing the Tetraxonian spicules in detail. I will, however, mention the terms for spicules employed by Sollas in his preliminary report (1453). These, alphabetically arranged, are the following :— Acerate (Monaxon). Globate (Scleraster). Acerella (Monaxon ?). Globules (?). Amphiaster (?). Hispidating Acerate (Monaxonia), Amphiastrella (Spirastrella ?). xOne-pronged (unicellate) Forks. xAmphitetrad. xPorrectate Forks, xAnchors. Pyenaster (?). Anthaster (?). Radical Anchors. Arculus (?). Sigmella (?). *Bifurcated Forks. xSomal Anchor. Calthrops (?). Somatic Anchor. Candelabra. Spinispirule (Spirastrella), Chiaster (?). Spirule (Spirule), Cylindrical spicules (Monaxonia ?). Stellate (?). Echinella (?). *Tetrad. Ectaster (?). ¥Triona. Erdaster (?). Trichite Acerates (Monaxonia), Forks. ¥Trichite Forks. «Forks with trifurcate arms. *Trifid Forks. *Fusiform Acerates (Monaxonia). *xTwo-pronged (dicellate) Forks. The names marked * presumedly apply to Tetraxon spicules. The others probably belong to different groups. 37* 564 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [ Dec. 21, These pages will give a key to the terms of spicules used below. There are, however, a number of other terms which require explanation. The spicules are divided generally into two distinct groups :— (1) Those which together form the supporting skeleton of the sponge: these are called Supporting spicules or Megasclera. (2) Those which lie scattered in the ground-substance and which differ from the former in shape: these are called Flesh-spicules or Microsclera (Tension-spicules of Bowerbank). F. E. Schulze (1369) uses particular terms for spicules according to their position, which have been adopted in this paper so far as the Hexactinellids are concerned. These are alphabetically the following :— Autodermalia. Spicules on the outer surface with free projecting and with centripetal (immersed) differentiated rays. Autogastralia. Spicules on the gastral surface with free pro- jecting and with centrifugal (immersed) differentiated rays. _ Basalia. Spicules of the root-tuft. Comitalia. Spicules accompanying the fibres. Epidermalia. Spicules on the outer surface with free projecting differentiated ray only. Epigastralia. Spicules on the gastral surface with free projecting differentiated ray only. Hypodermalia. Spicules of the outer surface with immersed radial ray only.—Pentact. Hypogastralia. Spicules of the gastral surface with immersed radial ray only.—Pentact. Marginalia, Spicules forming a collar round the osculum. Parenchymalia. Spicules in the interior. Pleuralia. Spicules forming a fur. Principalia, Spicules of the main skeleton. III. Tux Systematic Position or SPonceEs. The opinions of different authors on this subject diverge con- siderably. I shall attempt to reconcile them in the following pages and to prove the correctness of the result at which I have arrived. Aristotle first pointed out that the Sponges were not plants—a fact which seems clear enough now, but which was doubted and combated by most authors of the dismally ignorant middle ages. This we admit as proved. I agree with Hiackel in dividing the organic world into the three groups—Plants, Protista, and Animals.. Among the Protista there are a great majority of forms showing affinities either to animals or to plants, so that it is not unusual to split up the Protista and divide its members among the two other old estab- lished groups. For the sake of simplicity I adopt this course here. ; The Animal Kingdom, in this wider sense, including the animal Protista, is naturally to be divided into Protozoa and Metazoa, of ~ 1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES, 565 which the former consist of similar and equal, undifferentiated, cells, which often remain isolated throughout life, whilst the latter pass through a unicellular stage of short duration only, and consist, when adult, of a number of different cells. There is a vast dif- ference between these two groups: the Protozoa are isocellular, whilst the Metazoa are heterocellular. The Sponges are developed in the same way as all other Metazoa and pass through the same well-known embryonic stages—the Morula, Blastula, &e. They consist, when adult, of a great number of differentiated cells. There are flat epithelial cells all over the outer surface and on the canal- wall; there are collar-cells round the ciliated chambers. There are gland-cells for different purposes, muscular and nervous cells besides ordinary tissue and amceboid cells in the Mesogloea or ground-substance, in which also the ova and spermatozoa are developed. It is therefore quite clear that the Sponges are not Pro- tozoa, but Metazoa, and are, in fact, not similar to Protozoa in any way. The Metazoa are naturally divided into two Groups or Grades— the Ceelentera, with a simple undivided body-cavity, all the parts of which are in direct connection with one another ; and the Ccelo- mata, which have two distinct and entirely separated body-cavities—a gastral cavity and a ccelom or perigastric cavity. The Sponges certainly have a simple and continuous body-cavity and no trace of a ceelom, so.that they must be regarded as Ceelentera. Long before Hertwig established the ccelom theory, Leuckart had already perceived this important fact, and placed the Sponges among the Ccelentera accordingly. Although nobody has ever attempted to regard the Sponges as Ccelomata, there has been great opposition, principally among English authors, to Leuckart’s opinion. I dismiss the arguments of those who, like James Clark (284-294), Carter (166), and Saville Kent (772), regard the Sponges as Protozoa, on the ground that their idea of Protozoa does not harmonize with the generally adopted meaning of the term, for if it did, they could not, as logical thinkers, count the Sponges among them. Their idea of Protozoa comprises the whole Animal Kingdom, because they draw no distinction between isocellular and heterocellular organisms, and of course all Metazoa are, if this distinction be omitted, colonies of unicellular Protozoa. F. E. Schulze (1361) has taken the unnecessary trouble to refute Saville Kent’s (772) statements in detail, and to show that the latter had been guilty not only. of levity in the philosophical treatment of his work, but also of recording incorrect observations. Some very excellent men, particularly Balfour (17), Biitschli (138), and Sollas (1440), are inclined to consider the Sponges as a separate group equal in value to our groups Metazoa and Protozoa. This arrangement was arrived at without regard to the division of the Metazoa into Ccelentera and Ccelomata. They contrast the sub- kingdom Porifera (Parazoa, Sollas) with the subkingdom Metazoa as a whole, With all respect to the most important opinion of Balfour, I still do not see that there is any justification for the establishment of 566 DR. Re VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dee. 21, aspecial Subkingdom for the Sponges. They are evidently Metazoa, and no doubt Coelentera in the sense given above, namely the Grade Ccelentera as opposed to the Grade Ceelomata. I think therefore that the Sponges form part of the Grade Ccelentera, and I do not believe that any one will raise any objection to this statement. Now, however, we have to approach a much more difficult task, and that is, to ascertain what position the Sponges occupy within the Grade Ceelentera. In this Grade we must place, besides the Sponges, one very well- defined group of animals (the Jellyfish, Hydroids, Corals, and Cteno- phora) which is not connected with other animals by any inter- mediate form. There can be no doubt of the comparatively close affinity of all these, and the sharp distinction between them and the Sponges. In a like manuer the Sponges are an exceedingly well circumscribed group, without any transitions in any direction to other animals. The Grade Ceelentera comprises, therefore, two well-defined groups :—(1) the Mesodermalia (910) or Sponges ; and (2) the Epithelaria (910) or Nematopbora (Lankester), Cnidaria (Claus), Telifera (Marshall), as they are variously termed. A. In the Mesodermalia the archenteron communicates with the outer water by numerous small pores through which the water- current enters; and by one or a few larger pores termed oscula or vents, through which the water is expelled. It consists here of a branching canal-system. In the Epithelaria there is no branching canal-system. The anus and mouth are not distinguished, and the mouth or mouths are equivalent to all the openings of the canal-system of sponges. Only exceptionally two different kinds of pores are met with, as in certain Actiniz with terminally open tentacles; but there is no regular current of water through these pores. _ B. The gastrula of the Mesodermalia is generally produced by invagination. The gastrula of the Epithelaria, on the other hand, is generally the result of delamination. C. The Mesodermalia have no movable appendages wherewith to catch their prey. The Epithelaria have such appendages. D. The Mesodermalia are not armed with ecnidoblasts or their homologues. The Epithelaria are defended by cnidoblasts or their homologues. Although these differences are important, yet the principal dis- tinction between these two groups, to which I drew attention at the eee meeting of the British Association (Meeting 1886), is the fol- owing :— E. The Mesodermalia have invariably simple ectodermal and entodermal epithelia, the cells of which are always flat pavement- cells, and never converted into muscular, glandular, sexual, or sensi- tive elements. The muscular, connective, slime-producing glandular, skeleton-producing glandular, sexual, sensitive, ganglionic and amce- 1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES, 567 boid cells met with in the Sponges are invariably modified cells of the mesoglea. This is particularly striking and important in the case of the muscular and sensitive elements. The Epithelaria, on the other hand, have a mesoglea the cells of which remain more or less amceboid and are not differentiated to any extent. The muscular, glandular, sexual, sensitive, ganglionic and defensive nettle-cells are produced in the epithelia, they sink below the outer cell-layer with advancing development and lie on the sur- face of the mesogloea or supporting lamella. By a process of folding and subsequent coalescing of the fold- margins, bundles of muscular cells may become immersed in the mesogloea, and so form a mesodermal structure, which, however, must be considered a secondary mesoderm, as compared to the primary mesoderm represented by the mesogloea and its cells. But they are invariably produced first from the epithelia and immersed afterwards, and always retain their epithelial character in clothing the walls of tubular cavities in the mesogloea. Single muscular cells are never surrounded on all sides by the mesoglcea. Solid bundles of muscular cells do not occur. Exceptionally nettle-cells (Cram- bessa) may be found in the mesogloea, which is also here and there traversed by nerve-fibres (Cycloneurous Meduse). From a common sac-shaped ancestral form with simple ectoderm, simple entoderm, and undifferentiated cells in the intervening meso- gleea, representing the type of the Ccelentera, both Mesodermalia and Epithelaria have been developed. In the case of the Mesodermalia the cells of the mesogloea became differentiated, and produced the organs, whilst the epithelia remained simple. In the case of the Epithelaria the cells of the mesogloea remained unchanged and the organs were produced by the epithelia. I regard this as the principal difference dividing the two groups, and have therefore established the term Epithelaria in contradistinction to Mesoder- malia (J. c.). Having thus described the points of distinction, it remains that we should ascertain their phylogenetic value. There are only two alternatives with regard to the value we may attach to the Sponges as a group. Either we must assume that within the Grade Ccelentera the Phylum Mesodermalia and the Phylum Epithelaria should be distin- guished ; or we may say that there is only one phylum in the Grade Ceelentera, namely the Phylum Ccelentera, and that this should be divided into the two Subphyla Mesodermalia and Epithelaria. It is evident that it comes much to the same thing. In this matter I adopt F. E. Schulze’s opinion (1369), and consider the Sponges a separate phylum. The result of this critical examination is given in the accompanying tabular view. If we express this arrangement in the usual manner, we have :-— DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21, 568 “VUOHIONALD SSB “G ‘WSOGAWOHAANS SSR) “PF *VINVINILOY S8e[ *§ ‘WSOCANOUGAF Ssv[M “| "WIDNOdG Ss8BID ‘sseiQ AUD “plosnpey ‘piodAjog ‘ssv[Q A[UO ‘ssv[Q ATUO SETS Lee "M10 990Yq SALES “G ‘DyaonyAp Steg *T ‘eaqjeowyd GIT ‘eypooegd nou “‘VUOHAONTLY Anoin -z ‘wsoagModaTog dno *T “s]8B[qopruo ynoy}IA pus sMo.-o[pped WqL AA “syse(qoptuo yy proddjog . 7% . ‘VIUNVITHLIaG wy -% yitvynaqaosay wnpyg ‘Tt “erpoqyidg om} FO S[[ao “ea[SOSePT Ol} JO S[Jad wot, pedojeaop suBsIO Lt eSEeS ET pee ree VURINATDD) °Petp 'T : SOT}IAGO gihaeeg a Acheeel “fqravo-fpoq eydus TIAA eof 9, eae eee ee . Saryqng * VOZOLOUd Mopsuryqng *T LAPT Rel aS “e[N][900sT q fetes: UN tec Ni ee ee “WITVIAINY wopsuryy v10I} pedoaaep sULdIO “VLVIVOTDO 9PBID SG 1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 569 Kingdom ANIMALIA. I. Subkingdom PROTOZOA. Animals which are either unicellular, or, if multicellular, isocellular, without archenteron. II. Subkingdom METAZOA. Multicellular, heterocellular animals with archenteron. I. Grade CHELENTERA. Metazoa with simple body-cavity. i. Phylum MresopEeRMALIA. Ceelentera with branching canal-system, and organs developed from cells of the mesogloea or primary mesoderm. No movable appendages. 1. Class SPONGLE. With the characters of the phylum. ii. Phylum EperrHEvARIA. Ceelentera with cecal canal-system. The organs are developed from cells of the epithelia, With movable appendages. 1. Group PoLyromEpusz&. Polypoid Epithelaria with cnidoblasts. i. Series Aphacelle. Polypomedusze without entodermal phacellz. 2. Class HYDROMEDUSA. Aphacellee of polypoid and medusoid character, Meduse cycloneur. ii. Series Phacellote. Polypomedusze with entodermal phacelle. 3. Class ACTINIARIA. Polypoid Phacellotz with funnel and septa. 4. Class SCOYPHOMEDUS. Medusoid Phacellotee developed direct or from a Scyphostoma by strobilation. Toponeur. II. Group Crenopuora. Epithelaria with paddle-rows without enidoblasts. Centroneur. 5. Class CTENOPHORA. With the characters of the group. II. Grade CAXALOMATA. Metazoa with distinct gastral and ccelomic cavities. 570 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE systematic [Dee. 21, IV. Tse CLAssIFICATION OF SPONGES. Having thus ascertained the systematic position of the Sponges as a group, we now approach the second part of our work. Every one will agree that no satisfactory classificatory system of Sponges exists at present. Spongologists are in the habit of approach- ing this subject with great caution, I may say with diffidence. It is a remarkable fact that the leading spongologist of the day, my esteemed teacher Prof. F. E. Schulze, in Berlin, has not attempted to work out a classificatory system of Sponges, whilst others have made some desultory efforts in that direction. It is self-evident that the systems established by Bowerbank, O. Schmidt, Gray, and others, which date from a time when virtually nothing was known about Sponges, have now become obsolete. The most successful attempt at establishing a system of Sponges is doubtless that of Vosmaer (1550), who, however, approaches his task with great diffidence ; everywhere we meet in his work with “ preliminary ” classifications. Some geologists, principally Zittel (1635) and Sollas (1455), have classified the Sponges in a rather high-handed manner, establishing subclasses, orders, &c., without regard to details like families and genera. Zittel particularly attached too much importance to the fossil Sponges. In the groups themselves more satisfactory detail work has recently been done. F. E. Schulze (1369) has worked out the Hexactinellids of the ‘ Challenger’ with results which are as valuable and useful as the material at his disposal was abundant and interesting. Zittel (1626-1629) has in a satisfactory manner dealt with the fossil Sponges belonging to the same group. The Lithistids and Tetractinel- lids, both fossil and recent, have been carefully investigated by Zittel (1639) and Sollas (1453). 1 (888) have, with the aid of the works of Hackel (627-629) and Poldjaeff (1179) at my disposal, established a system of Calcareous Sponges based on my investigations of the rich Australian Sponge-fauna, which appears fairly satisfactory. The Monactinellids have been carefully studied by Vosmaer (1545), Ridley (1261), and Ridley and Dendy (1265-1266), and I have myself devoted much labour to their investigation, and have made (870) an attempt at classifying them, which, however, was unsuc- cessful. The Australian Fauna is exceedingly rich in Monactinellids, and my collection, of over 300 species, has enabled me to work out the classification of some of the groups in detail. No attempt has hitherto been made to classify the Horny Sponges excepting one, contained in a short paper of Vosmaer (1552), establishing five groups, in accordance with the views previously expressed by myself (868), and based on the result of the researches into the structure of horny sponges by F. E. Schulze (1345, 1348, 1349, 1351) and myself (868). The Australian marine fauna is ex- ceedingly rich in horny sponges, so that I have been enabled to work out their relationships in detail. If we review the Sponges as a whole, we shall be struck with the great fundamental difference between the Calcareous and all 1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 571 the other Sponges. Grant (526) was the first to point this out, and he accordingly divided the Sponges into Calcarea and Non- Calearea. Vosmaer (1550) agrees in this point with Grant and uses his terms. I have also (888) adopted the same view. In this paper I intend to alter the term Non-Calcarea, which is misleading, Inasmuch as it might be interpreted as meaning that the group so named consisted of very heterogeneous elements, coinciding with each other only in one, and that a negative character. This is not the case. I divide the Classis Spongiee accordingly into two Subclasses, I. Cal- carea, and II. Silicea. The point of distinction between these two Subclasses is, that all the Calcarea have a skeleton composed of spicules consisting chiefly of carbonate of lime. All the other Sponges, which I comprise under the heading Stilicea, either have a skeleton composed of sili- ceous spicules or have been derived phylogenetically from siliceous Sponges, and have only recently lost their spicules or replaced them with a horny support. O. Schmidt (1305) and also myself (870) were inclined to think that some of the siliceous Sponges had descended from horny ones. I have, however, since abandoned this view (901), and consider that the opposite direction of develop- ment, which Vosmaer (1558) advocates, is the correct one. We have accordingly :— Classis SPONGLAE. Skeleton composed chiefly of Skeleton originally composed carbonate of lime. of siliceous spicules. I. Subclassis CALCAREA. II. Subclassis Srricea. As mentioned above, in the critical introduction to this chapter, I have nothing to add to my system of Calcareous Sponges (888) published some time ago, and I adopt it unchanged in this paper. The Calcarea are a very much smaller group than the Silicea. In this Subclass we only distinguish one Order, the Calcispongize (Blainville); whilst the Silicea must be divided into several Orders, and it is here that we meet with the greatest difficulty in ascertaining the true relationship of the different forms. There are no transitions between the two subclasses. In examining the structure of a great number of Sponges belonging to this second group, the subclass Silicea, I found that they can be arranged in three Groups, which will appear as Orders in my system. These are the Hexactinellida, the Chondrospongix, and the Cornacuspongie. These groups are fairly distinct, and transitional forms connecting them are rare. The Sponges of these Orders are descended from siliceous Sponges, and show the same tendency of development within each group. In the Hexactinellida we invariably meet with a skeleton composed of triaxial spicules; these are often attached to each other by a siliceous cement which greatly strengthens the structure. All authors agree that the Hexactinellida form a well-defined group. ‘The remaining Silicea, however, are a very mixed lot, and before Vosmaer, no satisfactory arrangement of them had been arrived 572 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21, at. The one I propose in this paper, which is similar to that of Vosmaer, is certainly very far from being as perfect as I would like to make it; but I think that at all events it is much more likely to express the relationship of Sponges in a correct manner than any other existing arrangement. The subclass Silicea minus the order Hexactinellida comprises the Sponges with a skeleton composed of tetraxial spicules (the Tetrac- tinellida and Lithistidz of Marshall and other authors), the Sponges with monaxial spicules (the Monactinellida of Zittel and other authors), the Sponges with a horny skeleton and without spicules in the supporting skeleton (the Ceraospongiz or Keratosa of many authors), and, finally, the Sponges without any supporting skeleton at all (the Myxospongic of Hiickel). At first sight all these forms appear connected with each other in every direction by transitional forms to such an extent that it seems hopeless to bring order into this chaotic mass. A careful investi- gation of many forms shows that all the familiar groups Tetracti- nellida, Lithistidze, Monactinellida, Ceraospongize, and Myxospongize run into each other at every point. If one, however, for years endeavours to find some constancy in the varying characters of any chaotic mass of this kind, he at last generally arrives at an idea which seems clear enough when once grasped. And then one only wonders how it was that it had not been conceived a long time ago. So it was also in this case. I found that all these Sponges could be very naturally divided into two Orders—the above-mentioned Chondro- spongiz and Cornacuspongie, the first of which comprises the Lithistids, Tetractinellida, and portions of the Monactinellida, together with most Myxospongiz ; whilst the second contains all the Cerao- spongiz, and the remainder of the Monactinellids and Myxo- spongize. We find that the ground-substance, the mesodermal intercellular substance or Mesogleea, as it is variously termed, is more or less hard and cartilage-like in the Chondrospongiz, and that in these the spi- cules remain isolated. The spicules are either tetraxon or tylostyles, less frequently styles. The monaxon spicules are monact, thereby indicating their closer affinity with the tetraxon spicules. The necessary toughness is given to these Sponges not by a cementing of the spicules, but by a hardening of the ground-substance. In some the spicules disappear altogether, as in Oscarella, which is an aske- letous form of Plakina, and in Chondrosia, which is an askeletous sponge belonging to the Tethya group. In the Cornacuspongiz, on the other hand, there is no tendency towards a hardening of the ground-substance discernible. The ground-substance remains soft and gelatinous, and the necessary toughness is given to the sponge by the formation of a substance not found in other Sponges, which cements the spicules together. This substance is chemically and physically comparable to silk or horn, and is known as Spongin. The spongin may become very voluminous and the spicules scarce and small, They may finally disappear altogether, and then 1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 573 we have Ceraospongiz before us. Transitional forms between the Cornacuspongie with supporting spicules cemented by spongin, and Cornacuspongiz without spicules in their fibres (horny sponges), are not unfrequent. One whole subfamily, the Chalininze, comprising nearly 300 species, is composed of such transitional forms. The supporting spicules met with in the Cornacuspongiz are invariably monaxon without a swelling at one end. Besides these more or less rod-shaped sup- porting spicules, we also find in some of the Sponges belonging to this group so-called flesh-spicules—small, irregular curved or complicated elements scattered throughout the Mesogloea. These occur associated with spicules in the fibrous supporting skeleton and also in those forms which have no spicules in their horny supporting skeleton. To this group also the genera Halisarca and Bayalus belong, which have no skeleton at all, and appear as askeletous forms of the Aplysillide type. The term Cornacuspongize was established by Vosmaer (1550), and used by him in a very similar sense to that in which it is used here. The group Chondrospongie, on the other hand, is in the sense given above a new one; it nearly coincides with Vosmaer’s group Spiculispongiz (1550). In a former paper (889) I had retained the group Myxospongie, for the sake of convenience, preliminarily only, and agreeing at the time with Sollas (1440) that it was unnatural. The manner in which I have distri- buted the members of the Myxospongiz among other groups is in accordance with the view expressed by F. E. Schulze in a letter. We have accordingly to divide the subclass Silicea into three groups in the following manner :— Subclassis SIZLTCHA, Lendenfeld. Mesogleea soft ; support- Mesogleea hard; tough- Mesogleea soft ; support- ingskeleton oftenstrength- | ness achieved by the hard- | ing skeleton strengthened ened withsiliceouscement. | ening of the ground-sub- | by spongin cement; or Spicules triaxon. stance, Spicules tetraxon, | exclusively formed of monaxon, anaxon, or ab- | spongin, with or without sent; generally corticate. | foreign bodies, Spicules monaxon, or absent. 2. Ordo HEXAOTI- 3. Ordo CHONDRO- 4, Ordo CORNACU- NELLIDA, SPONGLA, SPONGLA, O. Schmidt. Lendenfeld. V osmaer. Expressed in the usual manner, the class Spongize would be accordingly divided into four Orders in the following manner :— Classis SPONGIA, auctorum. Ccelentera with branching canal-system, without movable appen- dages ; the organs of which are developed from cells of the mesoglea. With simple epithelia. I. Subclassis CALCAREA, Grant. Spongiz with a skeleton composed of spicules which consist chiefly of carbonate of lime. 074 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SysTeMATIC [Dec. 21; 1. Ordo CALCISPONGIA, Blainville. The only Order, with the characters of the Subclassis. II. Subclassis S7LICEA, Lendenfeld. Spongize with a skeleton composed of siliceous spicules and their descendants with horny aspiculous skeleton and askeletous forms. 2. Ordo HEXACTINELLIDA, O. Schmidt. Silicea with soft mesoglea. Supporting skeleton often strengthened with siliceous cement. Spicules triaxon. 3. Ordo CHONDROSPONGIA, Lendenfeld. Silicea in which the toughness is achieved by the mesogloea or mesodermal ground-substance becoming cartilaginous, whilst the spicules remain isolated. Spicules tetraxon, monaxon (tylostylus), or absent ; generally corticate. 4. Ordo CORNACUSPONGIA, Vosmaer. Silicea with soft mesogloea or mesodermal ground-substance; the supporting skeleton, composed of bundles of monaxonid not tylostyle spicules, is strengthened by spongin, which cements the spicules. These may disappear altogether, and the skeleton is then composed of spongin with or without foreign bodies. The skeleton rarely dis- appears altogether. Having thus divided the Class Spongie into four Orders, we may proceed to the further division of the Orders into Families. I. Ordo CALCISPONGIA, Blainville. This Order has been divided by Hiickel (627-629) into the well- known three families Ascones, Leucones, and Sycones, with seven genera in each. Poléjaeff (1179) has divided the group into two Suborders and replaced Hiickel’s genera by the older and wider genera of Grant and others. I (888) have tried to combine Hickel’s and Poléjaefi’s classifications, and have added three new families to the existing ones, I have retained Poléjaeff’s terms for the two Suborders, but have altered their meaning. In some Caleareous Sponges the whole of the entoderm consists of collar-cells. There are no entodermal pavement-cells in these forms. These constitute my first Suborder Homoceela. In others the collar-cells are found in the ciliated chambers only, while the central gastral cavity is clothed with entodermal pavement-cells. I combine these forms in the Suborder Heteroceela. To the Homoceela belong besides Hiickel’s Asconidze, my families Homodermide and Leucopside. I acknowledge Hickel’s seven genera of the Asconidee. In the Heteroccela, Hiickel’s families Leuconide and Syconidze together with Carter’s Teichonidee and my family Sylleibide are placed. 1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 575 II. Ordo HEXACTINELLIDA, O. Schmidt. Schulze (1369) divides the living Hexactinellida into the two Suborders Lyssacina and Dictyonina of Zittel. In the first, the spicules remain isolated or coalesce secondarily in an irregular manner ; in the second, the main spicules coalesce to begin with in a very regular manner, so as to form a continuous scaffolding. In the first suborder Lyssacina, the families Euplectellidee, Gray, Asconematide, F. E. Schulze, Rossellide, F. E. Schulze, and Hyalonematidee, Gray, are placed. The second suborder, Dictyonina, comprises the families Farreide, Gray, Euretide, F. E. Schulze, Melittionidee, Zittel, Coscinoporide, Zittel, and Meandrospongide, Zittel. To these the fossil families Ventriculitidee, Staurodermide, Callodictyonidee, Cceloptychide, Receptaculitidee, and Monakidee must be added. In the classificatory scheme below, Schulze’s diagnoses are translated. III. Ordo CHONDROSPONGLA, Lendenfeld. As mentioned above, this Order coincides nearly with Vosmaer’s (1550) order Spiculispongie. I divide it into the two groups, Tetraxonia and Monaxonia. The former comprises the Sponges with tetraxon spicules, Tetractinellids and Lithistids ; and the latter those forms which have monaxon spicules, or which have no spicules at all. Sollas (1453) divides the Tetraxonia into two groups :—Choristida, Sollas, without lithistid sclerites; and Lithistida, Zittel, with lithistid sclerites. In the first group the families Plakinide, Pachastrellide, Corticide, Tetillidee, ‘Theneidz, Stellettidee, and Geodine are distinguished. Vosmaer (1550) divides the Lithistide, in accordance with Zittel (1689) and O. Schmidt (1306, 1322), into the families Rhizomori- nide, Megamorinidee, Anomacladinide, Tetracladinidee. The Monaxonia comprise the families Suberitide, Spirastrellidee, Tethyde, and Chondroside. The Clavulina and portion of the Oligosilicina of Vosmaer. IV. Ordo CORNACUSPONGLE, I divide the Cornacuspongie into the two suborders Halichondrina with, and Ceraospongiz without, proper spicules in the supporting skeleton. The Halichondrina comprise the three families Homorhaphide, Heterorhaphide, and Desmacidonide of Ridley and Dendy (1265, 1266). The Ceraospongiz are divided by me into two groups—Macro- camer with large, and Microcameree with small, ciliated chambers. To the former belong the families Aplysillide and Spongelide, and to the latter the Spongide, Aplysinide, and Hircinide. After this general view of the Classification of Sponges, I shall proceed to give a “‘system” of Sponges down to subfamilies, mentioning the principal genera in each group. 576 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21, Classis SPONGLAS, auctorum. Ceelenterata with branching canal-system, the organs of which are developed from cells of the mesoglcea or primary mesoderm. With simple epithelia, with entodermal collar-cells, and without movable appendages and cnidoblasts. I. Subclassis CALCAREA, Grant. Sponges with a skeleton composed of calcareous spicules. I. Ordo CALCISPONGIA, Blainville. The only order, with the characters of the subclass. 1. Subordo Homoca@ a, Poldjaeff, emend. The entodermal epithelium consists exclusively of collar-cells. 1. Familia Asconip#, Hickel. Simple sac-shaped gastral cavity with smooth surface. Leucosolenia, Poléjaeff, Ascetta, Ascissa, Ascilla, Ascaltis, Ascor- tis, Asculmis, Ascandra, Hackel. 2. Familia HomopERMip#, Lendenfeld. The gastral cavity forms cecal outgrowths, which resemble the tubes of Syconidee. Ascaltis canariensis, Hiickel, Ascaltis lamarckii, Hiickel, and Homoderma sycandra, Lendenfeld. 3. Familia Leucorsip#, Lendenfeld. A colony of Ascon-persons which are imbedded in the thick mesoglea. There are narrow inhalant pores and wider exhalant ones. The latter lead into a pseudogaster. Leucopsis, Lendenteld, and some species of Pseudonardorus-forms_ 11. Subordo HETEROCG@LA, Poldjaeff, emend. The entodermal epithelium is differentiated into collar-cells, which are found in the walls of the ciliated chambers only, and into flat pavement-cells, which clothe the walls of the exhalaut canals and gastral cavity. 4. Familia Syconip#, Hickel. With regular, radially disposed cylindrical ciliated chambers, which open direct into the sac-shaped gastral cavity. 1. Subfamilia Syconine, Lendenfeld. The unbranched ciliated chambers remain isolated in their distal part. Sycon, Poléjaeff, the subgenera of Hiickel’s Syconidee which ter- minate with the syllable ‘‘aga.”’ I divide this subfamily according to Hackel’s scheme into the seven genera Sycetta, Sycissa, Sycilla, Sycaltis, Sycortis, Syculmis, and Sycandra. 1886. | POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 577 2. Subfamilia Uteine, Lendenfeld. With simple unbranched ciliated chambers, the distal’ends of which are imbedded in a continuous cortex. Grantessu, Lendenfeld, Ute, Polgjaeff, and Amphoriscus, Poléjaeff, and those subgenera of the Syconide in Hiickel’s system which terminate with the syllable “usa.” 3. Subfamilia Granting, Lendenfeld. With branched ciliated chambers. Grantia, Heteropegma, and Anamixilla, Poléjaeff. 5. Familia SyLterpip#, Lendenfeld. With complicated exhalant canals, leading from the cylindrical ciliated chambers into the gastral cavity. 1. Subfamilia Vosmaerine, Lendenfeld. The ciliated chambers are radially situated, and form a regularly cylindrical zone. They are connected with the gastral cavity by a network of anastomosing exhalant canals. Vosmaeria, Lendenfeld, and Leucetta, Poléjaeff. 2. Subfamilia Polejne, Lendenfeld. The ciliated chambers form a much-folded layer. The exhalant canals are wide, and do not anastomose to form a reticulation. The genera Polejna, Lendenfeld, and Leucilla, Poléjaeff, consti- tute this group. 6. Familia Leuconip#, Hiickel. Heteroccela with ramified canal-system and spherical ciliated chambers. Leucetta, Leucissa, Leucaltis, Leucortis, Leuculmis, and Leu- candra, Hiickel, Leuconia, auctorum, and Leuconia and Pericharaz, Poléjaeff. 7. Familia Te1cHonrp&, Carter. Heterocceela without gastral cavity. The inhalant pores are situated on the one, and the exhalant on the other side of the lamellar sponge ; with spherical ciliated chambers. Teichonella, Carter, and Hilhardia, Poléjaeff. II. Subclassis SIZICEHA, nov. Sponges with a skeleton composed of siliceous spicules and their derivatives ; possessing a horny skeleton or no skeleton at all, but never supported by calcareous spicules. Comprises the Non-Calcarea of Grant and other authors. I. Ordo HEXACTINELLIDA, O. Schmidt. Silicea with triaxon spicules and soft mesogleea. Strengthened by siliceous cement, generally joining the spicules. Proc. Zoou. Soc.—1886, No. XXXVIII. 38 578 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21 1. Subordo Lyssacina, Zittel. The spicules remain isolated or are subsequently cemented together irregularly. i. Tribus Hexasterophora, F. E. Schulze. Hexaster always found in the mesoglea; chambers distinct, thimble-shaped. 1. Familia EuPLECTELLID#, F, E. Schulze. Thin-walled tubes or sacs with sword-shaped hexact hypodermalia, the centripetal rays of which are the longest. 1. Subfamilia Huplectelline, F. BK. Schulze. Tubular, with terminal sieve-plates. The wall regularly perfo- rated. To the centrifugal ray of each hypodermal a floricome is attached. Euplectella, Owen, and Regadrella, O. Schmidt. 2. Subfamilia Holascine, F. E. Schulze. Tubular, wall without perforations, without superficial flori- comes. Holascus and Malacosaccus of F. E, Schulze. 3. Subfamilia Taegerine, F. E. Schulze. Tubular or sac-shaped, wall irregularly perforated. Principalia partially cemented, forming an irregular network. To the distal ray of each hypodermal sword-shaped hexact a floricome is attached. Taegeria and Walteria of F. EK. Schulze. 2. Familia AsconrmatTips#, F. E. Schulze. Pentact or hexact pinnulz in the dermal and gastral surfaces. Hypodermalia and hypogastralia pentact. Discohexaster in the interior. 1. Subfamilia Asconematine, F. E. Schulze. Sessile, sac-shaped, or tubular, with thin soft wall. Asconema, Say. Kent, and Aulascus, F. E. Schulze. 2. Subfamilia Sympagelline, O. Schmidt. Pedunculate, cup-shaped. Principalia hexact and diact. Disco- hexaster in the interior. Sympagella, O. Schmidt, Polyrhabdus, F. E. Schulze, and Bala- nites, F. E. Schulze. 3. Subfamilia Caulophacine, F. E. Schulze. Mushroom-shaped, with long cylindrical hollow peduncle. Caulophacus and Trachyeaulus of F. E. Schulze. 1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 579 3. Familia Rossreiutip#, F. E. Schulze. The dermalia have no centripetal ray. Lanuginella, O. Schmidt ; Polylophus, F. E. Schulze ; Rossella, Carter ; Acanthascus, Bathydorus, Rhabdocalyptus, Crateromorpha, Aulochone, Caulocalyx, and Aulocalyx, F. E. Schulze. ii. Tribus Amphidiscophora, F. E. Schulze. Amphidises in the limiting membranes. Hexaster absent in the interior. A basal tuft is always present. The ciliated chambers appear as somewhat irregular sac-shaped extensions of the membrana reticularis. 4. Familia HyALONEMATIDA, Gray. Numerous pentact pinnule in the dermal and gastral surfaces. 1. Subfamilia Hyalonematine, F. E. Schulze. Calyculate, with a well defined oscula-area on the upper surface. Hyalonema, Gray ; Stylocalyx, F. E. Schulze; Pheronema, Leidy ; and Poliopogon, Wyville Thomson. 2. Subfamilia Semperelline, F. E. Schulze. Without gastral cavity and terminal oscula-area, with root-tuft. Semperella, Gray. To this Subordo the fossil families Receptaculitide and Monakidee belong. 1. Subordo Dictyonina, Zittel. The parenchymal hexacts early coalesce in a regular manuer, so as to form a firm skeleton. i. Tribus Uncinataria, F. E. Schulze. With uncinates. i. Subtribus Clavularia, F. E. Schulze. With radially situated clavule. 1. Familia Farrerpa, F. E. Schulze. The skeleton forms a single layer; from the joining points conical extensions arise, in a direction vertical to the surface of the network. Farrea, Bowerbank. 2. Subtribus Scopularia, F. E. Schulze. With radially situated scopule. 2. Familia Evretipa, F. E. Schulze. Branched and anastomosing tubes. The skeleton-net forms several layers. Eurete, Carter ; Periphragella, Marshall; and Lefroyella, Wyville Thomson. 38* 580 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21, 3. Familia MrexitTionip#, Zittel. Forms branched tubes or calyculate structures. Skeleton honey- combed. Cavities traversed by the reticular membrane. The gastral skeleton without scopule. Aphrocallistes, Gray. 4. Familia Coscinoporip#, Zittel. The wall of the calyeulate or expanded sponge is traversed by funnel-shaped straight canals, which open alternately on the one or the other surface. Covered only by the perforated limiting mem- brane. Chonelasma, F. E. Schulze ; and the fossil genera Leptophragma, Zittel, Guettardia, Michelin, and Coscinopora, Goldfuss. 5. Familia Treropictyip#, F. E. Schulze. With irregular inhalant and exhalant canals, which do not traverse the body transversely, but pass the dense dictyonal skeleton obliquely or longitudinally. Tretodictyum, F. EK. Schulze; Euriplegma, F. BK. Schulze; Cyr- taulon, F. E. Schulze; Fieldingia, Sav. Kent; and Selerathamnus, Marshall. i. Tribus Inermia, F. E. Schulze. Without uncinates and scopule. 6. Familia MranpROSPONGID2, Zittel. The body consists of winding tubes of uniform width. The in- terstices of the tubes form a vestibule space. Dactylocalyx, Stutchbury ; Scleroplegma, O. Schmidt ; Margari- tella, O. Schmidt ; Myliusia, Gray ; and Aulocystis, F. E. Schulze ; and the fossil genera :—Placoscyphia, Reuss; Tremabolites, Zittel ; Etheridgia, Tate; Cystispongia, Roemer; Toulminia, Zittel; and Camerospongia, d’Orb. To this Subordo belong the fossil families Ventriculitide, Stauro- dermidz, Callodictyonide, and Cceloptychide. II. Ordo CHONDROSPONGIA, nov. Silicea in which the toughness is caused by the mesogloea or mesodermal ground-substance becoming cartilaginous, whilst the spicules remain isolated. Spicules tetraxon, monaxon (tylostylus or stylus), or absent. With spherical ciliated chambers. Sponge gene- rally corticate. Comprises the Spiculispongize of Vosmaer, with the exception of the genus Halisarca, Vosmaer. 1. Subordo TeTRAXONTIA, Vosmaer. With tetraxon spicules. 1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES, 581 1. Group LirarsrTipa, Zittel. Body stony, with a central gastral cavity or numerous vertical tubes. Spicules more or less clearly tetraxon, often branched. Besides these, sometimes monaxon spicules and flesh-spicules. The skeleton-spicules are interwoven so as to form a dense skeleton. 1. Familia Rutzomorinip&, Zittel. Spicules irregularly branched ; form irregular fibres, or are loosely interwoven. Forked anchors always present. Arabescula, Carter; Corallistes, Schmidt ; Heterophymia, Pomel ; Seliscothon, Zittel ; MacAndrewia, Gray ; Azorica, Carter ; Leioder- matium, Schmidt ; and the fossil genera :—Cnemidiastrum, Coral- lidium, Hyalotragos, Pyrgochonia, Discostroma, Leiodorella, Episto- mella, Platychonia, Bolidium, Astrobolia, and Chonella of Zittel; Plococonia, Pomel ; Chenendopora, Lamouroux ; Verruculina, Zittel ; Amphithelion, Zittel; Stychophyma, Pomel; Allomera, Pomel ; Pleuromera, Pomel; Perimera, Pomel; Meta, Pomel; Marisca, Pomel; Pomelia, Zittel; Jereica, Zittel ; Calocorypha, Zittel; Scy- talia, Zittel ; Stachyspongia, Zittel; Pachinion, Zittel. 2. Familia ANOMOCLADINID&, Zittel. Spicules rod-shaped with terminal tufts of branches. The approxi- mating ends of the spicules coalesce and form knots. In this way a regular triaxial network is formed. Vetulina, Schmidt; and the fossil genera Mastosia, Cylindrophyma, Melonella, and Protachilleum, Zittel, and Pal@omanon and Astylo- spongia, Roemer. 3. Familia TETRACLADINIDS, Zittel. Spicules tetractinellid with terminal branches. Theonella, Gray ; Rhacodiscula, Zittel ; Discodermia, Bocage ; Ka- liapsis, Bowerbank ; Collectella, Schmidt ; Collinella, Schmidt ; and the fossil genera:—Awulocopium, Oswald; Phymaiella, Aulaxinia, Callopegma, and Trachysycon, Zittel ; Siphonia, Parkinson; Halli- rhoa, Jerea, Lamouroux; Marginospongia, dOrbigny ; Nelumbia, Pomel; Polyjerea, Fromentel; Asérocladia, Zittel ; Bolospongia, Hinde ; Thecosiphonia, Zittel; Calymmatina, Zittel; Turonia, Mi- chelin ; Kalpinella, Thamnospongia, and Pholidocladia, Hinde; Ra- gadinia, Zittel; Plinthosella, Zittel ; Spongodiseus, Zittel ; Phyma- plectia, Hinde; Rhopalospongia, Hinde. To this Subordo also the fossil family Megamorinide belongs. 11. Group CuortistTrpDa, Sollas. With tetraxon spicules of regular shape. i. Tribus Tetradina, Sollas. The chief spicules are tetract, with equal rays and candelabras. i. Subtribus Microcamera, nov. With small chambers, 582 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21, 4. Familia Cortic1p, Vosmaer. With candelabras. Oorticium, Schmidt, and Thrombus, Sollas. 5. Familia PACHASTRELLIDA, Sollas. With simple tetracts, irregularly scattered. Pachastrella, Schmidt, Batéersbya, Bowerbank, and Dercitus, Gray. ii. Subtribus WZacrocamere, nov. With large chambers. 6. Familia PLaKinip#, F. E. Schulze. With scattered diact, triact, and tetract spicules. Plakina, Plakinastrella, and Plakoréis, F. E. Schulze, and Eupalax, Sollas. 7. Familia OscARELLID#&, Lendenfeld. Without spicules. Oscarelia, Vosmaer. i. Tribus Tr7zanina, Sollas. The centres of the tetraxon spicules with one differentiated ray lie in the surface, in which the equal rays extend tangentially. 8. Familia Gropipa, Sollas. A cortex of globate spicules. Chambers small, with small outlets. Erylus, Gray ; Caminus, Schmidt ; Cydonium, Miller ; Synops, Vosmaer ; Isops, Sollas; Geodia, Lamarck ; and Geodissa, Lenden- feld. 9. Familia StELLETTID#, Sollas. With stellate flesh-spicules usually in the cortex. 1. Subfamilia Psammasterina, Sollas. With stellates and spined rods. Psammastra, Sollas. 2. Subfamilia Stryphnina, Sollas. With stellates and amphiastrellee. Stryphnus, Sollas. 3. Subfamilia Sanidasterina, Sollas. With stellate and sanidaster (?) spicules. Tribrachium, Weltner, and Tethyopsis, Stewart. 4, Subfamilia Stellettina, Sollas. With two kinds of stellate flesh-spicules. Antrastra, Dragmastra, Sollas; Stellette, Schmidt. 5. Subfamilia Homasterina, Sollas. With one kind of stellate flesh-spicules. Myriastra, Solias ; Asterella, Sollas; Pilochrata, Sollas. 1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 583 10. Familia THEenEerp&, Sollas. With large outlets to the ciliated chambers, and spirastrellid spicules. Thenea, Gray (Tisiphonia, Wyville Thomson, Dorvillia, Sav. Kent, Wyville-Thomsonia, Wright); Normania, Vulcanella, and Chara- cella, Sollas. 11. Familia TreTILLip#, Sollas. With flesh-spicules which are hamate, spiral, or rod-shaped. Spiretta, Lendenfeld; Tetilla, Schmidt ; Craniella, Schmidt ; Chrotella, Sollas ; Papirula, Schmidt ; Thalassomora, Lendenfeld. 12. Familia TeETHYOPSILLID, nov. Spherical sponges supported by dense masses of large radial monaxonid spicules. A few tetraxonid grapnels are inserted in the surface. Tethyopsilla, Lendenfeld, and Protoleia, Dendy and Ridley. 11. Subordo MoNAXONIDA. 11. Group CLavuLINA, Vosmaer, emend. With monaxonid spicules or without supporting skeleton. Supporting spicules tylostyle, usually radially situated. (Includes the Pseudotetrawonia, Vosmaer.) 1. Familia TetuHyp#, Vosmaer. More or less spherical sponges, with regular subdermal cavities between the thick distally extending radial bundles of spicules. 1. Subfamilia Tethyne, nov. With stellate flesh-spicules. Tethya, Lamarck; Tuberella, Keller (Lethiophena, Schmidt) ; Tethiosphera, Lendenfeld ; Mastigophora, Lendenfeld; T'halasso- dactylus, Lendenfeld. 2. Subfamilia Tethiopsammine, nov. With a sand cortex. Tethiopsamma, Lendenfeld, MS. 3. Subfamilia Tethyorhaphine, nov. With rod-shaped flesh-spicules, without stellates. Tethyorhaphis, Lendenfeld. 4, Subfamilia Tethyamatine, nov. With hamate flesh-spicules (sigmata) without stellates, Tethyamata, Lendenfeld, 584 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SysTEMATIC [Dec. 21, 2. Familia SoLLAsELLID&, Lendenfeld. Digitate forms with radiating spicule-bundles, and distinct ecto- and endochonee. Sollasella, Lendenfeld. 3. Familia SprrastTRELLID#, Ridley and Dendy. With spirastrellid flesh-spicules. Spirastrella, Ridley; Raphyrus, Bowerbank ; Papillina, Schmidt; Cheirella, Lendenfeld ; Awos, Gray ; and Suberocorona, Lendenfeld. Coincides with the family Cheirellidee, Lendenfeld. 4. Familia SUBERAMATIDA, nov. With bamate flesh-spicules (sigmata). Suberamata, Lendenfeld. 5. Familia SuBERITIDZ, Vosmaer, emend. Without flesh-spicules. Suberitella, Lendenfeld ; Suberites, Nardo ; Suberopetros, Lenden- feld ; Plectodendron, Lendenfeld ; Polymastia, Bowerbank ; Tricho- stemma, M. Sars; Tentorium, Vosmaer (Thecaphora, O. Schmidt) ; Stylocordyle, Wyv. ‘Thomson ; Quasillina, Norman; Cliona, Grant; and Poterion, Schlegel. tv. Subordo OLt1GostLicina, Lendenfeld. Without supporting skeleton. Flesh-spicules, when present, anaxon polyactinellid. Chambers small, with narrow outlet. 1. Familia CoonprRiILLIp#, Lendenfeld. With polyactinellid flesh-spicules. Comprises the genus Chon- drilla, O. Schmidt. 2. Familia CoonpRosip#, Lendenfeld. Without flesh-spicules. Comprises the genus Chondrosia, Nardo. III. Ordo CORNACUSPONGIA, Vosmaer, emend. Silicea with soft mesogloea, or mesodermal ground-substance. The supporting skeleton is composed of bundles of monaxonids, which are never tylostyle spicules. The skeleton is strengthened by spongin, which cements the spicules. These may disappear altogether, and the skeleton is then composed of spongin, with or without foreign bodies. Exceptionally, also, this horny skeleton disappears. The ciliated chambers have large outlets. 1. Subordo HanrcHONDRIN‘A, Vosmaer. With siliceous spicules in the supporting skeleton. 1. Familia Spone1Luipa, Carter. Freshwater sponges with gemmule. Spongilla, Lamarck ; Ephydatia, Lamouroux; Tubella, Carter ; 1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES, 585 Uruguaya, Carter; Parmula, Carter ; Meyenia, Bowerbank ; Heée- romeyenia, Potts; Lubomirskya, Dybovsky; Lessepsia, Keller ; Potamolepis, Marshall. 2. Familia Homornapuip4, Ridley and Dendy. Megasclera oxea or strongyla ; no differentiated microsclera except toxia. Marine sponges without gemmule. 1. Subfamilia Renierine, auct. Spicules never completely enveloped in horny fibre. Halichondria, Fleming; Petrosia, Vosmaer, =Schmidtia Balsamo Crivelli; Reniera, Nardo. 2. Subfamilia Chalinine, Ridley and Dendy. A considerable amount of spongin present, forming distinct horny fibres, in which spicules are contained. 1. Group Chalinorhaphine, Lendenfeld. With abundant gigantic spicules axially situated. Chalinorhaphis, Lendenfeld. 2. Group Hoplochalinine, Lendenfeld. With abundant gigantic spicules obliquely situated, and protruding beyond the fibre-surface. Hoplochalina, Lendenfeld. 3. Group Cacochalinine, Lendenfeld. Irregular forms with slender spicules. Cacochalina, Schmidt; Cladochalina, Lendenfeld ; Chalinopora, Lendenfeld ; Chalinella, Lendenfeld ; Chalinopsis, Schmidt. 4. Group Pachychalinine, Lendenfeld. Irregular, digitate, lamellar forms with stout spicules, oxystron- gylus. Chalinissa, Leudenfeld ; Pachychalina, Schmidt; and Ceraochalina, Lendenfeld. 5. Group Plakochalinine, Lendenfeld. Frondose, lamellar forms with stout spicules. Plakochalina, Euplakella, aud Antherochalina, Lendenfeld ; Cribro- chalina, Schmidt ; Tragosia, Gray ; Platychalina, Khlers. 6. Group Siphonochalinine, Lendenfeld. Tubular, pseudogaster with stout spicules. Spinosella, Vosmaer ; Siphonochalina, Schmidt ; Tuba, Duchassaing and Michelotti; Sclerochalina, Ridley; Towochalina, Ridley ; Phylosiphonia, Lendenfeld ; Tubulodigitus, Carter; Patulascula, Carter ; and Siphonella, Lendenfeld. 7. Group Arenochalinine, Lendenfeld. With spicules in the connecting and sand in the main fibres. Arenochalina, Lendenfeld. 586 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [Dec. 21, 8. Group Euchalinine, Lendenfeld. Slender, regularly digitate forms with a fine-meshed network and slender spicules. Chalina, auctorum, and Dactylochalina, Euchalina, Euchalinopsis, and Ohalinodendron, Lendenfeld. 3. Familia HETERORHAPHID#, Ridley and Dendy. Megasclera of various forms; microsclera commonly present, but never chele. Marine sponges, without gemmule. 1. Subfamilia Phleodictyine, Carter. Sponge divisible into body and fistule, with a strong spicular rind. Megasclera oxea or strongyla; microsclera (when present) sigmata. Rhizochalina, Schmidt ; Oceanapia, Norman. 2. Subfamilia Gelliing, Ridley and Dendy. Megasclera oxea or strongyla. Microsclera always present, viz. sigmata. No rind or fistule. Gellius, Gray ; Gelliodes, Ridley. 3. Subfamilia Tedaniine, Ridley and Dendy. Megasclera of two forms: monactinal, styli, forming the main skeleton ; and diactinal, tylota. Microsclera long, hair-like trichites. Tedania, Gray ; Trachytedania, Ridley. 4, Subfamilia Desmacelline, Ridley and Dendy. Megasclera styli to tylostyli. Microsclera sigmata or toxia, or both. Desmacella, Schmidt. 5. Subfamilia Hamacanthine, Ridley and Dendy. Megasclera oxea or styli; microsclera diankistra, to which others may be added. Hamacantha, Gray ; Vomerula, Schmidt. 4. Familia Desmactpon1pH, Vosmaer, auct. Megasclera of various forms. Microsclera chele, to which others may be added. 1. Subfamilia Hsperelline, Ridley and Dendy. Fibre not echinated by laterally projecting spicules. Esperia, Nardo; Esperella, Vosmaer ; Esperiopsis, Carter; Cla- dorhiza, Sars; Asxoniderma, Ridley and Dendy; Chondrocladia, Wyv. Thomson; Desmacidon, Bowerbank ; Homeodictya, Artemi- sina, Vosmaer; Phelloderma, Ridley and Dendy ; Sideroderma, Ridley and Dendy ; Iophon, Gray ; Amphilectus, Vosmaer ; Melonanchora, Carter; Guitarra, Carter. 1886.] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 587 2. Subfamilia Hetyonine, Ridley and Dendy. Fibre echinated by laterally projecting spicules. Myzilla, Schmidt ; Clathria, Schmidt; Rhaphidophlus, Ehlers ; Plumohalichondria, Carter ; Acarnus, Gray ; Echinoclathria, Carter ; Clathrissa, Lendenfeld; Thalassodendron, Lendenfeld; Cerao- spina, Lendenfeld. : 5. Familia AXINELLID#, auct. With large subdermal cavities. Skeleton non-reticulate, consist- ing of ascending axes of fibre, from which arise subsidiary fibres radiating to the surface pervading the subdermal cavity. Fibres plumose. Megasclera chiefly styli, to which oxea and strongyla may be added. Microsclera rarely present, never chele. Dendropsis, Ridley and Dendy; Thrinacophora, Ridley; Hyme- niacidon, Bowerbank ; Phakellia, Bowerbank; Ciocalypta, Bower- bank ; Acanthella, Schmidt ; Awinella, Schmidt ; Raspailia, Nardo ; Spirophora, Lendenfeld. 11. Suborder Kz RATOSA, Bowerbank, emend. Silicea with a supporting skeleton composed of spongin; fibre with or without foreign bodies, but always without proper spicules. Flesh-spicules may be present. Exceptionally, there is no skeleton at all. i. Tribus Microcamer a, Lendenfeld. With small spherical ciliated chambers and opaque ground- substance. 1. Familia Sponeipz, F. E. Schulze. With narrow axial thread in the horny fibres, and without fila- ments. 1. Subfamilia Aulenine, Lendenfeld. Reticulate sponges with vestibules, without flesh-spicules. Halme, Aphroditella, Halmopsis, and Aulena, Lendenfeld ; Psam- maclema, Marshall. 2. Subfamilia Chalinopsilline, Lendenfeld. When dry of light yellow colour, digitate, lamellar, more or less flower-shaped, imitating very closely Chalinine, from which they appear only recently to have developed. Without flesh-spicules, with smooth surface. Chalinopsilla and Antheroplaw, Lendenfeld ; Dactylia, Carter. 3. Subfamilia Spongine, Lendenfeld. Massive, when dry dark brown, with conulated or granulated surface. Vestibules, when present, belong‘exclusively to the inhalant system. Without flesh-spicules, Euspongia, Broun ; Cacospongia, Schmidt ; Hinpospongia, F. E. 588 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE systematic [Dec. 21, Schulze; Coscinoderma, Carter; Spongodendron, Lendenfeld; and many of the species of the genus Spongia, auctorum. 4. Subfamilia Spongissine, Lendenfeld. With flesh-spicules. Spongissa, Lendenfeld, MS. 2. Familia ApLysInip#, Lendenfeld. The skeleton is composed of spongin-tubes, the walls of which are thinner than the diameter of the lumen, which is filled with pith. 1, Subfamilia Aplysinine. Without flesh-spicules. Luffaria, Duchassaing and Michelotti; Aplysina, Nardo; Luffa- rella, Lendenfeld, MS.; Dendrospongia, Hyatt. 2. Subfamilia Aplysissine, Lendenfeld. With flesh-spicules. Aplysissa, Lendenfeld, MS. 3. Familia Hircinrp#, Lendenfeld. With narrow axial canal in the fibres, and filaments in the ground- substance. 1. Subfamilia Hircinine, Lendenfeld. Without proper spicules. Hireinia, Nardo ; Hireinopsis, Nodosina, Aphrotriche, and Sty- phlos, Lendenfeld, MS.; Stematonemia, Bowerbank ; Filifera, Lie- berkiihn ; Sarcatragus, Schmidt ; and Polytherses, Duchassaing and Michelotti. 2, Subfamilia Hircinissing, Lendenfeld. With proper spicules, 1. Group Chalinocinia, nov. With proper spicules in the conuecting fibres. Chalinocinia, Lendenfeld. 2. Group Hircinissa, nov. Without proper spicules in the fibres ; with flesh-spicules. Hircinissa, Lendenfeld, MS. ii. Tribus Macrocamere, Lendenfeld. With large sac-shaped ciliated chambers, and soft, transparent ground-substance. 4. Familia Spongextip#, Lendenfeld. The horny fibres contain slender axial thread and form a reticulated skeleton. 1886. ] POSITION AND CLASSIFICATION OF SPONGES. 589 1. Subfamilia Spongeline, Lendenfeld. Without flesh-spicules. The skeleton consists of distinct horny fibre containing a varying amount of foreign matter. Spongelia, Nardo; Dysidea, Johnston ; and Reteplar, Lenden- feld, MS. 2. Subfamilia Psammine, nov. The skeleton consists of foreign bodies cemented by spongin, which, however, is not distinctly visible; without flesh-spicules. Psammapemma, Marshall; Psammella, Lendenfeld, MS. ; and Holopsamma, Carter. 3. Subfamilia Spongelissine, Lendenfeld. The skeleton is composed of distinct horny fibres containing foreign bodies. With flesh-spicules. Dysideissa, Lendenfeld, MS. 4. Subfamilia Psammopessine, nov. The skeleton consists of cemented foreign bodies without distinct horny fibres. With flesh-spicules. Psammopessa, Lendenfeld, MS.; Phoriospongia, Marshall ; and Haastia, Lendenfelid, MS. 5. Familia ApLysiLLip&, Lendenfeld. The skeleton cousists of spongin-tubes ramified in a dendritic fashion and filled with pith. 1. Subfamilia Aplysilline, Lendenfeld. Cells are found in the pith of the fibres only. Darwinella, Fritz Miller ; Aplysilla, F. E. Schulze ; Verongia, Bowerbank ; and Dendrilla, Lendenfeld. 2. Subfamilia Janthelline, nov. Cells are found in the spongin-sheath of the fibre. Tanthella, Gray. 6. Familia Hauisarcip, Vosmaer. Without skeleton. Halisarca, Schmidt, and Bajalus, Lendenfeld. V. Key Tro THe Recent FAMILIES OF SPONGES. 0 Skeleton calcareous ........sssscessesccnscssccsesees < * ‘No calcareous skeleton. .......00:000s.sessessessenses (2.) Entoderm consists exclusively of collar-cells ... 3. 1. 4 Entoderm consists of collar- and pavement- COIS" | cnarcencnnavedtacteastreteantane sett tects mates (4.) Mesoderm thin, radial cylindrical chambers... 2, Homodermide. \ Mesoderm thin, gastral cavity irregular ...... 1, Asconide. 3. Mesoderm thick, irregular chambers ............ 3. Leucopside. 590 DR. R. VON LENDENFELD ON THE SYSTEMATIC [ Dec, 2], (4.) With cylindrical chambers ........ssscsssseesenees 5. ‘* | With spherical chambers ............56 penoneadaaane (6.) Ohambers radial, opening direct into gastral 5 CEI can posn oe SnnucE ech espanocrosdeneiaoasqer eancsae 4, Syconide. * ) Chambers opening into exhalant canals which lead into the gastral cavity ........:seceeneeeee 5. Sylleibide. Exhalants lead into oscular tubes ............... 6. Leuconide. g,) | Exhalants open direct on one side of the lamei- ) lar sponge; inhalant pores on the other side exclusively \.v...s-svasdesseasccaptacysssenecer 7. Teichonide. With hexact spicules and thimble-shaped 2. Chambers wi cc. tadenc teenies vases veveuedaseeessen er 7. (2:) ) Without hexact spicules, with sac-shaped or spherical chambers ........sccccsssececsseceeaeis (8.) The spicules remain isolated or partly coalesce 7 afterwards irregularly ...........2...cecesseeeees 9. * | The supporting spicules early coalesce in a regular Dictyonid manner ...........:00ecee0e- (10.) 9 Hexaster in the interior ..........secceeseeeeeeeees 11. F { No hexasters, but amphidiscs ............0...0000+ (12.) ( Hypodermaliahexact. sword-shaped, with centri- 11 petal radial ray longest; no pinnule......... 8. Huplectellide. Pinnulz in the gastral and dermal surfaces... 9. Asconematide. Dermalia without centripetal ray; no pinnule 10, Rossellide. (12.) With numerous pinnule ..............cccceseeeeees 11. Hyalonematide. (10.) Wath uricinaties..; cweces.eessssstesse eh sultases 0 VolPxlaieeass Es Sere MarVISBD) pense alles Ome a0: 30 Vols Xe; es 34; .. BD Pee CADTPLGOl he tate kOe 010 O Wolt Kis ess) Os = i. a) une Lsel): <4.. OLS” Ge. 14-0 Volks 2-63 a OT 2 Gans tss2)" So 2 OMl2 FOR 016 O Vole, 825 3 OF ies (OctHlss2ire oa 0 Hb aoe LOS 0 Vola deb toy J483 - Us ass (dane883). 435) 10.427 Oss 016 O Wal Ne ee a LOS, Sten OctawWeb3) i, L012 207 016 0 Vol ack.) 4. LO: Re 1 ey VEL OOD) 35 ee lle Omen Oo, () Vole oll faa 2GNov,eco) 3.) PLL one 292: \-Q Vol axa as 3 6a. 5; WCKeb A886) How ODOM: Onl: "0 Volxih: ,. 2: > (ass (Aptalseb) sas 60) 12. Om 016 =O PROCEEDINGS OF THE COMMITTEE OF SCIENCE AND CORRE- SPONDENCE OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 8vo. 2 vols. To Fellows. To the Public. Parte: -1830-3).. d-vol: Sv0.7). \dicas wane Price 4s. 6d. .. 65.7 Feb emits Fon eae SSIs carbs: deasts sy. WASH OU s tears Tse PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 8vo. 15 vols. and Index. (First Series.) Priceto Price to the Price to Price to the — Fellows. Public. Fellows. Public. Part I. 1833. 1 vol. 8vo. 4s. 6d... 6s. Part IX. 1841. 1 vol. 8vo. 4s. 6d. .. 6s. - II. 1834. fs 4s. 6d. .. 6s. - X. 1842. Ye 4s. 6d... 6s. TLL, 1895.78 ee ae o! XL. 1843, Y |’)? aaa: » IV. 1836 5 As OU 31. OS: >» ATE 1844. Fe, ASi6ts, . 08, 4 V. 1837. ae 4s. 6d. .. 6s. > XITT. 1845. 53 4s. 6d... 68. a val 1838; ey 4s. 6d. .. 6s. » XLV. 1846. i 4s. 6d. .. 6s. 3 VLE 1839: SG 4s. 6d. .--6s: XV. 1847. ia 4s. 6d... 6s. » VIII. 1840. x 4s. 6d. .. 6s. Index 1830-1847. “s 4s. 6d... 6s. * No perfect copies of these volumes remain in stock. + Out of print. 3 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 8vo. 13 vols. and Index. (Second Series.) Letterpress only. With Plates Coloured. To Fellows. To the Publie. To Fellows. To the Public. So. de Fania Part XVI. 1848.1 vol. 8vo.4s. 6d. ... 6s. .. Price 1 0 rar eV. . 1849. Pa Aen Giha yas 405s 5% yee VIL. 11850. : i ; = mr, L851. bs SeiGdhieetae 2OSk ie: 23 NOMS IEB EE 53 AGMGUSs Mite Hes, ME ct Sas MN moxd, 1953. ES Sh Cie As ash ate 35 Pemex Mll...1854. a Ascbdet aia * Os: PeeK LIN.. 1855. a Agi Gale sao w AOS? POLY. . 1856, Nereenck V..1857, peewee) 1858. ; ‘up : eee mT. 1859. - AC! Oils sae. ea GS: » XXVIII. 1860. Pe ASe Ott, OSs Index 1848-1860. a 456d. 2. TGs. — See ee eS OCCCH — v=) DAARDOAROCUOSAOOR Wow nwnnNDaeH—on™s1 S PS NO NS ll el ell ed — ILLUSTRATIONS TO THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON, 1848-60. 8vo. 6 vols. Plates Uncoloured. Plates Coloured. To Fellows. To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public, Hea ae es ie Sip the LL ®: Mammalia. <..506+..... 1 Vole lee oe s6l eck dlO 0 « Price 2 7 <3 ane, 0+ vet 3 aen a cals, ee eat Ounh AO necee On ah geese ao 6 6 OF Reptilia et Pisces ... ji ols we Ol ome dere wel Of el ean PLOrOr LUG CCS ee l 4% Ovlb. 9 sok, OF, Sek, coe 6 110 Of Annulosa et Radiata 1 vol. 111 6..2 2 0. PPD Te OS ae 30 OF PROCEEDINGS OF THE SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. Letterpress only. Plates only. Complete. To Fellows. To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public. Peo Chotha4s: Gd.-5% 26 OSs 65 se «2 BUSHOd A mt Alinta hae BISMOA. = 408. Mees (ASH Od et G8.c6 theo SOSsO de hele eee, sae. BOSA9e . ¢41 498. TEGSsiit,, 48. O05 js 02 OS.) v0.0 2 es DUS AO soa tr hoPelSibs cheno eNO OSAOLER score ie, 1008s 1864, ,, 4s. 6d 7 OSs USN A Gene He eq til Sites fcc iciets GaSe. dns SOS PSGSeEG ee AS OG tc OS"nine ne « SUS sIGe eee we ALS eee sito Sosy tet 45S 1866, ,, 4s. 6d lO Siren 30s. 9d zl ie Oe ee 33s. 9d. 45s With Plates, uncoloured. With Plates, coloured. To Fellows. To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public. EN Mae it AO al Adio Ban Son «Sh Dei Odie as was eo) cacy tae GOSHIAS Gucle ce 4OSs MEUM ot tas etwas be peiCh edicts pata ache OG Os ke es eee iain tere SB CS O Rie Ae ye LiCl hy Senge: stalemate teeaeant tt te Dede aa cm bess ater netcn SB CANT haere: Gye TOU LY See Mara a ak ols a aD Fe Qa ee TOS te aes Oosn ae le tie 408. Index, 1861-1870 .......... AsSGdsc 3. Ges LSA Gear Bene ee Se 95D ser. ch). Woke eaten 338..9d. .... 45s. Pye xan. aad cbavliealctereaha «Se 98 Odie cist 7) OMB Ss be, emits 33s. 9d. .... 45s.§ MEL che wa) OF pate rel oteish sins baer ts: 957 Oday + on Less GaSe IAs ae FOSS Lek AVR itneNe sonciete ciate tens OSE Od. cc. LOS Ns 3087) Onis oslo s\< A8s.§ M7 ee sie tale, alckalonetehvle nc! dha tetves DS OG aor LOR irene eek ae 36s. 0d. .... 48s.§ RAG) hy wigve ate ambctenateuni re ounliens MU Reece EE Pecan cies 36s. Od. .... 48s.§ * No perfect copies of these velumes remain in stock. t Out of print. t Only uncoloured copies of these plates can now be supplied, at 10s, 6d. each volume. § Out of print, but a parts may be obtained. 4, PROCEEDINGS OF THE SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON (continued). With Plates, uncoloured. With Plates, coloured. To Fellows. To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public. NSH, Bi cerineieca sas aks Oe Ode ee a lS a eee 36s. Od. .... 48s Ne Vfeke Wari icwtic: catch shite Rann Ane 9s Od Osh 2 Vash aes! 36s. Od. .... 48s US OMe ete ied e's Shee Os O05 aerte LOSI Hae ator 36s. Od. .... 485 MSBO Bias erin elite itis ee ieselt ore ss QSOs te OU Ae Rede ate 36s. Od. ..... 48s. tote PS/I=TSRON Boa vse 4s)\6d-- oe (GS MAA eines sft her aieneipce. 6 95. 0d) 2 oe TOS aloe, BOs JOUR 48s i882 ctawi taicictitieomtta abides Se, PS UR aera td ACen eM 2 ewe 36s. Od. .... 48s ORES Me aychusc.s told a ole Hebel econ tose OSS Od rae MLDS Rie te eee 36s. Od. .... 48s GAA salen x cistensiaty: shat )erehelsisie Os: Odea cles ates avretays 36s. Od. .... 48s. NSB ambetiis ere woe e alee Shoe iale Oss Othe resin LoS een tidis fe oscters 36s. Od. .... 48s. 1886, part.1 (Jan. & Feb.) ..:-2s. 3d. 50> B8crcies vo e's 9s. Oda le Ws: (Bound in Cloth 3s. extra.) t Out of print, but odd parts may be obtained. LISTS OF THE ANIMALS IN THE SOCIETY’S GARDENS. List of Vertebrated Animals Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. 8yvo. 1862. Price 1s. 6d. List of Vertebrated Animals Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Second Edition.) 8vo. 1863. Price 1s. 6d. List of Vertebrated Animals Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Third Edition.) 8vo. 1865. Price 1s. 6d, List of Vertebrated Animals Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Fourth Edition.) 8vo. 1866. Price 1s. 6d. Reyised List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. 8yo. 1872. Price 2s. Revised List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London.—Supplement, containing Additions received in 1872, 1873, and 1874. 8vo. 1875. Price 1s. List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Sixth Edition.) 8vo. 1877. Price 3s. 6d. List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Seventh Edition.) 8vyo. 1879. Price 3s. 6d. List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London.—First Supplement, con- taining Additions received in 1879. 8vo. 1880. Price ls. 6d. List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Highth Edition.) 8vo. 1883. Price 3s. 6d. These publications may be obtained at the Socrery’s Orrrce (3 Hanover Square, W.), at Messrs. Lonemans’ (Paternoster Row, H.C.), or through any bookseller, LIST OF THE PUBLICATIONS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. Tue scientific publications of the Zoological Society are of two kinds — “ Proceedings,” published in an octavo form, and “Transactions,” in quarto. According to the present arrangements, the “ Proceedings” contain not only notices of all business transacted at the scien- tific meetings, but also all the papers read at such meetings and recommended to be published in the “ Proceedings ” by the Committee of Publication. From fifty to seventy coloured plates and engravings are attached to each annual volume of the “Proceedings,” to illustrate the new or otherwise remarkable species of animals described in them. Amongst such illustra- tions, figures of the new or rare species acquired in a living state for the Society’s Gardens are often given. The “Proceedings” for each year are issued in four parts, on the first of the months of June, August, October, and April, the part published in April completing the volume for the preceding year. The price is 12s. per part for the edition with coloured, and 3s. per part for that with uncoloured Plates. The “Transactions” contain such of the more important communications made to the scientific meetings of the Society as, on account of the nature of the plates required to illustrate them, are better adapted for publication in the quarto form. They are issued at irregular intervals. Fellows and Corresponding Members, upon payment of a Subscription of One Guinea before the day of the Anni- versary Meeting in each year, are entitled to receive all the Society’s Publications for the year. They are likewise entitled to purchase the Publications of the Society at 25 per cent. less than the price charged for them to the Public. A further re- duction of 25 per cent. is made upon purchases of Publications issued prior to 1861, if they exceed the value of five pounds. The following is a complete list of the publications of the Society already issued. They may be obtained at the Society’s Office (3 Hanover Square, W.), at Messrs. Longmans’, the Society’s publishers (Paternoster Row, E.C.), or through any bookseller. {August 2, 1886. ] TRANSACTIONS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. PROCEEDINGS OF THE COMMITTEE OF SCIENCE AND CORRE- SPONDENCE OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 2 Ato. 11 vols. and Three Parts. To Fellows. £ s. d. Vol. I., containing 59 Plates (1833-35) Price 3 13 6, Vol. IL, 55 Aes (8354) 55 ae 00 Vol. IIl., 5 63; eases 3p Ot LBP aS ee Vol. Iv. 53 ite) Se 1851=62)— ,.. <6: (2°908, Vols, Ye; oA G7 Buss (1862-66 ea G2 '8 Y8) Vol. VI, 5 ON; (1866-69 See oer Volovals. 3, LO- was (1869-72 jar Valo Le Ome Vole Vill... * 5, O2aes (872-74). 3, 29 83% Vol. IX., 33 Oo ee (1875=77)7 vs, 12 0PiOrm Vol. X., a D4 ons (US77=79)\ aise LOO RaSie Tndexsp Vols! Me Neat Sieretevess terete atetene’ a xoreecares egies), Vol. XI., part 1, containing 4 Plates(Jan.1880) ,, 012 0. Voli XE, ees % le ey (Aue aIS80)) Se Onleu Ob Volextd” 5, 20: - SP hss (ee ASSL, cope, alae Ome Vol. XI, » 4; - ete CADrARL GSI) wo. @) UU may a Olas Vole XE 530; 5 1S Sy unelssih oy) 0 18s Gee VolieX es 6, a 65) er (Jane l8s2)e = Os1Zar0 x WolsXilion ise. 75 mw OF see (Oct1882)y oe Orla Ore Volpe Xisera ss - WE cosy pCAAT MERC) oP sey oon O loi mene, Vole XE. 43-9; * LOD; (Oct: 188s) yo. OM2y 10, Vol, Xi.5 75, 10; 54 12 ee Ma SSD)ts, L IPGe. Vor. 7 5 e 142 ss) sa(Now, W885) OW 1 ae Vol. XIL., ,, 1, Fe Gee; Hleb:s1S86) ie a5 Oso AO Vol. 2, 5 le esse CAPE S860) 4 esses ORI ee Ole. Voll sail. 4. oO; Bi iss CAMP ORO) eer sy 0) i: aot 8vo. 2 vols. To Fellows. Part I. 1830-31. 1 vol. 8vo. ............ Price 4s. 6d. Fy Ls eB S2: Sota daghlh: ASUS RA tet 53 RAS IGO. eee Tothe Public. Sees Wa: nen coocooocooocoesoooorzo$¢ coonwnwoorOoroOonrrKoo a to nD _ bo oooo To the Public. 6s.T 6s. PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 8vo. 15 vols. and Index. (First Series.) Priceto Price to the Fellows. Public. Price to Price to the Fellows. Publi Cc. I. 1833. 1 vol. 8vo. 4s. 6d. .. 6s. Part IX. 1841. 1 vol. 8vo. 4s. 6d... 6s. II. 1834, 5 4s. 6d. .. 6s. 3 X. 1842. 1 III. 1835. s 45. 6d... 6s. or es 843; IV. 1836 a 4s. 6d. .. 6s. se ES 1844. 55 V. 1837. a 4s. 6d... 6s. >» AIT. 1845. A; VI. 1838. 5 4s. 6d. .. 6s. >» XAIV. 1846. ae VII. 1839. “ 4s. 6d. .. 6s. XV. 1847. x VIII. 1840. 3 4s. 6d. .. 6s.f inde 1830-1847. 35 4s. 6d. .. 6s. 4s. 6d. .. 6s. 4s. 6d... 6s. 4s. 6d. .. 6s. 4s, 6d. .. 6s. 4s. 6d... 6s. 4s. 6d... 6s. * No perfect copies of these volumes remain in stock. t Out of print. 5 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 8vo. 13 vols. and Index. (Second Series.) Letterpress only. With Plates Coloured. To Fellows. To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public. £5 s ; d. Part XVI. 1848. 1 vol. 8vo.4s.6d. .. 6s. .. Price 1 O 6+ oe VT. 1819. By AGO MET te OS. 5.0" 35 0 » XVIII. 1850. = As sGdtma re teme OS Fe atts 8 A XIX. 1851. % Aer Odt dame tOS 0 e XX. 1852. . Ast iOtees MerMOSst 3.) Ls i XXI. 1853. * AS Ouse a emOGs ne) 3s Pe ENT. “1854, é asniigee es 4 LOS e, OXI. 1855. i OTS tant BOSE Seer XIV. 1856. A Ais, Gases 58 Ga, Perey 1857; ‘ SA OSeeeen, eo) eX VIs 1858. e AGE pieces igi ms | 4 PEPAOVLT. 1859. = ASOGS BIOL AGS. Gol Sks },, », XXVIII. 1860. ‘i As Gd ene SAGS5d 8 gers, Index 1848-1860. 5 ARNG ue OS. ILLUSTRATIONS TO THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON, 1848-60. 8vo. 6 vols. — EIN evel pet ad _ Ww NWONNDARhe arin! ‘Se Sat i St et OCOCH — Te) AMROORARODODALOR Plates Uncoloured. Plates Coloured. To Fellows. To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public. Pe Gast ds eee a. PD Near Ss) as Mammalia ............ Ievol> sho. Or alaOr O Price 2 7 3 3) ie PVENE cic ducticaesacess oes vole? vot sardoe: Olas). tet leer Oy ae 0,6 OF veteisees ... Keyol.,, O715° 99,0050" 0* .. fobs 2 (Gi 1-10, OF WSU CC EVOL (pO 15am Ou. Shel COP ese 236 LO} (OF Annulosa et Radiata 1 vol, 111 6..2 2 0 at iD eo ayo: (OT PROCEEDINGS OF THE SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. Letterpress only. Plates only. Complete. To Fellows. To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public. SOU CLOC ASN OGs frei, Sen sieye, o.0e SLURS tat pea W CPi ae ep 33s. 9d. ,... 45s. ROD tS. OGM het OSS helets,o ate 30s: 9d ANS. 18 Senta S Biel Aimer bY PEG p iss ASH OM wee, 4 «OSs ote «) oa, SUSHOD sexcry AL Sitar ete 33s.9d. .... 45s. POOHen a AS. OC Ae TOSS 5, ee US HOG hit. ncePS Lost er ty Sass ouw4os. STNG Ae: (CAG ESRB OS ae GUSs Oem an atiligal eo ters SOS. 90)... 458. BEGG ts) ASOR. ete (OS. eieiets ee SUSHOR ysl A geen etre es te 30s. 9d. .... 45s. With Plates, uncoloured. With Plates, coloured. To Fellows. To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public. MeGgabrarircl cette rete i elaske es Qe Oder e eee ales! Bee ae 33s. 9d. .... 458 BOSE R NaC nda aeie eet m Ds, Odie F Ral Qasr ests 338. 9d. 3... 45s (holt en oe Ore eiO RCE ctor 98: Od. macho “VOseh as cies © 33s. 9d. .... 458 as Foran Waits Bars cde a Te Teeoge els CTO Ys ateeoep es oh L), ie fone Mee 33s. 9d. .... 45s Index, 1861-1870 .......... As: Od. @ «2,5... O8s RO aexereisis ion, ake Sais scien s tes OS Od) cat nis Maes ceeia sere St Ae otcine: BI [I SVAE etc ttaco Bee On One or home ttt NEPAD coe ripe EES: Bic Aiba 33s. 9d. .... 45s.§ WS 7Gins eae Ainlessetpe eee ad 98) 0d i eels Reet te 33s. 9d. .... 45s.§ RE LEd. dois darter shoei Settee OsOds coke Ol OS'S ere,.teas 36s. Od. .... 488.§ tev Aaa Een A 2) Alor eran aoe bs a OTR ae 36s. 0d. .... 48s.§ US 7 Gwes wae ett lores oteltioee t..e 9s. Od. Te crys anes 36s. Od. .... 48s.§ * No perfect copies of these velumes remain in stock. t Out of print. ¢ Only uncoloured coe of these plates can now be supplied, at 10s, 6d. each volume. § Out of print, but odd parts may be obtained. 4. PROCEEDINGS OF THE SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON (continued). With Plates, uncoloured. With Plates, coloured. To Fellows. To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public. IS ATi otsct ate, teeter aaa cae OEOd) +. «Kr loS. = sae 36s. Od. .... 48s. 1S ci cee cai Reg mate eee OS OGG. on hess teats 36s. Od. .... 48s Le VADe Assets, oi 3 een eae Os) dere a Maat e eno SOsi0d4 . Wan 48s. INCISIOD casi tene ene Griicraiencecrohe Ds dee tc LoS ere 36s. Od. .... 488.7 Index, 1871-1880 .......... AG GU. Acre ak OS: SS eee cae tie ke bitters, LOS ULE ie chon ee A, oe ee 365: 0d rl Ss PED 2d cre veo Ree amietos oie 6 DsaQde can las 36s. Od. .... 48s LCSW cere Reve gaeROe hts GOREN Eee Os Odie net Ma Sian cvccnce oe 36s. Od. .... 48s VSS Serer act cee 3. tc, ous etana teh aves EL ONe Multa een UALS a ra 36s. Od. .;.. 48s. Reve ee eee eater, ieee ~ eee steer eee DSO de ee. SUAS its ne toe 36s: Od. . as 48s. LSSG;mpart ol Ganado Heb:)) ie. 28 Odea ves SOS isis) alos 9s: Odi isa es: TS8650 5.82 (iban Apr) Meas ate le oi EOS trace a 9s. Od. 1.7 bos: (Bound in Cloth 3s. extra.) t Out of print, but odd parts may be obtained. LISTS OF THE ANIMALS IN THE SOCIETY’S GARDENS. List of Vertebrated Animals Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. 8vo. 1862. Price 1s. 6d. List of Vertebrated Animals Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Second Edition.) 8vo. 1863. Price 1s. 6d. List of Vertebrated Animals Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Third Edition.) 8vo. 1865. Price 1s. 6d. List of Vertebrated Animals Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Fourth Edition.) 8vo. 1866. Price 1s. 6d. Revised List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. 8vo. 1872. Price 2s. Revised List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London.—Supplement, containing Additions received in 1872, 1873, and 1874. 8vo. (1875. Price 1s. List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Sixth Edition.) 8vo. 1877. Price 3s. 6d. List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Seventh Edition.) 8vo. 1879. Price 3s. 6d. List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London.—First Supplement, con- taining Additions received in1879. 8vo. 1880. Price 1s. 6d. List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Highth Edition.) 8vo. 1883. Price 3s. 6d. These publications may be obtained at the Socrety’s Orricr (3 Hanover Square, W.), at Messrs. Lonemans’ (Paternoster Row, L.C.), or through any bookseller. LIST OF THE PUBLICATIONS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. TuE scientific publications of the Zoological Society are of two kinds — “ Proceedings,” published in an octavo form, ard “ Transactions,” in quarto. According to the present arrangements, the “ Proceedings” contain not only notices of all business transacted at the scien- tific meetings, but also all the papers read at such meetings and recommended to be published in the “ Proceedings ” by the Committee of Publication. From fifty to seventy coloured plates and engravings are attached to each annual volume of the “ Proceedings,” to illustrate the new or otherwise remarkable species of animals described in them. Amongst such illustra- tions, figures of the new or rare species acquired in a living state for the Society’s Gardens are often given. The “Proceedings” for each year are issued in four parts, on the first of the months of June, August, October, and April, the part published in April completing the volume for the preceding year. The price is 12s. per part for the edition with coloured, and 3s. per part for that with uncoloured Plates, The “Transactions” contain such of the more important communications made to the scientific meetings of the Society as, on account of the nature of the plates required to illustrate them, are better adapted for publication in the quarto form. They are issued at irregular intervals. Fellows and Corresponding Members, upon payment of a Subscription of One Guinea before the day of the Anni- versary Meeting in each year, are entitled to receive all the Society’s Publications for the year. They are likewise entitled to purchase the Publications of the Society at 25 per cent. less than the price charged for them to the Public. A further re- duction of 25 per cent. is made upon purchases of Publications issued prior to 1861, if they exceed the value of five pounds. The following is a complete list of the publications of the Society already issued. They may be obtained at the Society’s Office (3 Hanover Square, W.), at Messrs. Longmans’, the Society’s publishers (Paternoster Row, E.C.), or through any bookseller. (October 1, 1886.] 2 TRANSACTIONS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. Ato. 11 vols. and Three Parts. To Fellows. Vol. I., containing 59 Plates 7i #£ s. (1833-35) Price 3 13 4 @ Vol. II. es x (1835-41) ,, 0 Vol. III., 3 O-! Uss 1842-49) , 3 8 Vol. IV. rp isp 1851-62) ,, 6 2 ol. 2V..3 > OP. se 1862-66) , 5 4 Wel. VI. op Dive oe (1866-69) ,, 11 5 Wael WiTs-. 5, 13° ss (1869-72) ~ 3, . B 17 Vol. VIL, >, S2 Gs (1872-74) , 9 8 Vol. IX., op Ss (1875-77) » 12 0 Vol. X., o 94 «CW (1877-79) ,, 10 0 Index, Vols. Tee Xie nd otc tere hate casinercrrele MO) Vol. XI., part 1, containing 4 Plates (Jan.1880) ,, 0 12 Vol. XI., ,, 2, = 7. sj (Aug. 1880), 90,18 Volks 53s > SG (lar Tee Di ot ee Vol. XTi 53: 4, es Be CApEISG) ons, Oe ef) Vol) 00) 0s ea: Calo. TCE tool Ly. OS Vol. XI, ,, 6, ; 6 ,, (Jan. 1882) ,, 012 Volemiseyst Zsa 8 3s 9 ,, (Oct. 1882) ,, 0165 VokXlngt 55 G85 » ll ,, (Jan. 1883) ,, 012 Vola, «379; Bs 10 4, (Oct. 1883) ,, 0 12 Vol. XI., ,, 10, yi le. sem Mayet). sy ok ET Vole sl 2, la (CNovalsse)) i 9 Tt Vols se sme: amass 6 ., (Feb.1886) ,, O 9 Vol: sXolls25 42s eauies 7», (Apr.1886) ,, 012 Voli, 5. aes o 2 Sepa DUS REO) cms ll SH APCOADRODSOSOAARSCSOAWOWOOCwWOUwons Tothe Public. 8s. d. _ cooococoecooooec ro eet et et SOON WOSOHM OH ORR SCOWANKEUADSOdth to “N ~ to ooco PROCEEDINGS OF THE COMMITTEE OF SCIENCE AND CORRE- SPONDENCE OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. Part I. Fy ile 1830-31. 1832. vol! 8vor sires Price 4s. 6d. » 4s. 8vo. 2 vols. eee eeene eeee To Fellows. To the Public. 6d. 6s.T to) Ose PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 8vo. 15 vols. and Index. Priceto Price to the (First Series.) Fellows. Public. I. 1833. 1 vol. 8vo. 4s. 6d. .. 6s. Part IX TI, 1834. a3 4s. 6d... 6s. 3p X. 1842. III. 1835. a9 4s. 6d. .. 6s. = XI. 1843. IV. 1836 Ay 4s. 6d. .. 6s. » XIE. 1844. V. 1837. 0 4s. 6d. .. 6s. » XIII. 1845. VI. 1838. 5 4s. 6d... a >» XLV. 1846. VII. 1839. 5 4s. 6d... XV. 1847. VIII. 1840. “6 4s. 6d... ee t oS 1830-1847. * No perfect copies of these volumes remain in stock. Price to Price to the Fellows. Public. . 1841. 1 vol. 8vo. 4s. 6d. .. 6s. 4s. 6d. .. 6s. 4s. 6d. .. 6s. 4s. 6d... 6s. 4s. 6d. .. 6s. 4s. Gd. .. 6s, 4s. 6d... 6s. 4s. 6d. .. 6s. t Out of print. 3 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 8vo. 13 vols. and Index. (Second Series.) Letterpress only. With Plates Coloured. To Fellows. To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public, side Uses a) Part XVI. 1848. 1 vol. 8vo.4s. 6d. 6s. Price 1 0 9 iid GF < XVII. 1849. of 4s. 6d. GShim; a Le OFE9 legal Gr » AVITI. 1850. 35 4s. 6d. 6s. Peme ty Were oe 118 OF > XIX. 1851. 3 4s. 6d. 6s. a OPT 9 ee a AS XX. 1852. as 4s. 6d. 6s. oy 2 O15: 9 Lise OF 95 XXI. 1853. + ds. 6d. 6s. » O18 O 1 4 OF » AAXIT. 1854. x 4s. 6d. 6s. sy. 2 OL 190.6 1 6 0 >» XXIII. 1855. 5 4s. 6d. 6s. ie 1 8 6 118 OF PeeeIV, 1866.5 ,.:... 4s, 6d: 6s. see aay Te) zai 6+ ra XXV. 1857. 5 4s. 6d. 6s. 40° Pb Oke Lngad 6 Pa emNOV IT. - 1858. Ss 4s. 6d. 6s. cout Tiley 36 22 0 >» XXVII. 1859. on 4s. 6d. 6s. tr, 111 6 Zee OF > XAVIII. 1860, no 4s. 6d. 6s, 5 111 6 Dee 2h 0 Index 1848-1860. e 4s. 6d. 6s. ILLUSTRATIONS TO THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAI, SOCIETY OF LONDON, 1848-60. 8vo. 6 vols. Plates Uncoloured. Plates Coloured. To Fellows. ‘To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public, ws Wid. ts Een® d. ‘sh Pak EE. Sa." as Mammalia ............ Iivol).gat QaiGus.e) MOO ea Brice.2 / 33 3s 3 OF PANGS evath cihaswe ses Qevolsin Oe /) Ouaikos O10) jn 4 V4: 6 6 6 OF Reptilia et Pisces ... 1 vol, 015 9..1 1 O* Soh teri OF 110 OF MVPO MISC... 5+. cccccvess I vol, 015 9..1 1. OF ais tls 2eG 110 OF Annulosa et Radiata 1 vol., 111 6..2 2 0 oT ee oo OF PROCEEDINGS OF THE SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. Letterpress only. Plates only. Complete. To Fellows. To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public. W361, cloth4s. 6d...... 68. 0.055% DUS HID 4S Tee etnk « 33s. 9d. .... 45s. PaO ote ce (AS Ode 284.5 OSs lavaiee:t« Sl Bw Gaeta Ce aioe. Or 335.90. 5... 45s. WsGos 5, ©45. O85 771, plOSs,. os oss DUS OG ares 4 Sal ees 33s.9d. .... 45s. NSG45" = 45: Gas ee Gse oo. S. SUS Od Its eee le tees. cae: 338/9d. .... 45s, PSbo? c,5 “ASOd wy re OSS vente S0SA9E. es ANS a. 33s. 9d. .... 45s. PSGGs O50 492Ods:.. 684 visto NSS IRS oles. Meat. are 33s.9d..... 45s. With Plates, uncoloured. With Plates, coloured. To Fellows. To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public. MGT at Nea aia lciek cals oe 'eieisialese O55 Oda osetia See wren tao 33s. 9d. .... 45s. Mei are sad epnetttee ee atte 8 Odin sist 2B eS ie 33s. 9d. .... 45s. Lele USSR Stale ace. Gs 0d. ok tek became 33s. 9d. .... 45s. 17) DONE SAI A ee ee ee OsnOds saat Laie esis 33s. 9d. .... 45s. Index, 1861-1870 .......... AGHOd Siiuhieh Ose STA pase ete Pe Basen rant ee one he Tse tos so Lose Me aes SOse IG. netic 40S. PSL Qe eta te esteltern teres es. DSSOd sa kas, arma aee 33s. 9d. .... 45s.§ USS atoes ace @Sitinocttts felon Os. 'Od.-. 3 MIDS is 33s. 9d. .... 45s.§ LS PAG pastdwan deel cee Re cM al oS Os (ed ar as) GL osiSe aoe eters 36s. Od. .... 485.§ SPN oo8 sist ia ottbalens DSB Od tL OSs oad bere 36s. Od. ...+ 48s.§ US Gidas, ssabaveuaaeest ers ano savels tales 9s. Od. OL Aerasen to Cae 36s. Od. .... 48s.§ * No perfect copies of these volumes remain in stock. t Out of print. { Only uncoloured copies of these plates can now be supplied, at 10s. 6d. each volume. § Out of print, but odd parts may be obtained. 4, PROCEEDINGS OF THE SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON (continued). With Plates, uncoloured. With Plates, coloured. To Fellows. To the Public, To Fellows. To the Public. Sid he occ crstthe arehes atrwole ses 980d. SSR DSB recrtees 36s. Od. .... 48s. S78 Wiese ach sah gtetialcte’s 93; Odi teas 28 wd. Re 36s. Od. .... 48s SFO Biotec conette hts Gave e vayereee 9s 20d AN OSh, waves 36s. Od. .... 48s SSO Sites aicte cs cfavs there omness 9s) OO eee LOSS rds Parsee 36s. Od. .... 48s. Index, 1871-1880 .......... 4s.6d..... 6s SBM ces: cvatehe x0 ea vatteiersiahs (os Qs Ode LOSS eh ates a6 36s. Od. .... 48s WS BP Pics wrerectte wis loeltrs > siagarers Os) Odea ene Wash d. ck Ole 36s. Od. .... 48s eS EHS IG eRAicto CORPO OAD OS50d > ano SL QSS cide sles cts 36s. Od. .... 48s GREE See ancdeccon oon 7doe DSNOG Seren V2SE, Hse eats 36s. Od. .... 48s. TSS 5 Riis Bas ona besrai phere eens setemetes Ds OR Fee 28 ade shes dae 36s. Od. .... 48s. 1886, part 1 (Jan. & Feb.) .. 28.3d. .... 3S. ws. eee, 9s. Od. .... Qs. 1886, ,, 2 (Mar. & Apr.) .. 28. dd. 1... BS. weceeeee 9s. Od. .... 12s. 1886, ,, 3(May & Jume).. 25. 3d. .... 35. ......., 9s.. Odi .akhe 128: (Bound in Cloth 3s. extra.) t Out of print, but odd parts may be obtained. LISTS OF THE ANIMALS IN THE SOCIETY’S GARDENS. List of Vertebrated Animals Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. 8yo. 1862. Price 1s. 6d. List of Vertebrated Animals Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Second Edition.) 8vo. 1863. Price 1s. 6d. List of Vertebrated Animals Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Third Edition.) 8yo. 1865. Price Is. 6d. List of Vertebrated Animals Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Fourth Edition.) 8vo. 1866. Price 1s. 6d. Revised List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. 8yo. 1872. Price 2s. Revised List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London.—Supplement, containing Additions received in 1872, 1873, and 1874. 8vo. 1875. Price 1s. List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Sixth Edition.) 8vo. 1877. Price 3s. 6d. List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Seventh Edition.) 8vo. 1879. Price 3s. 6d. List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London.—First Supplement, con- taining Additions received in1879. 8vo. 1880. Price 1s. 6d. List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Kighth Edition.) 8vo. 1883. Price 3s. 6d. These publications may be obtained at the Socrety’s Orricr (3 Hanover Square, W.), at Messrs. Lonemans’ (Paternoster Row, E.C.), or through any bookseller. LIST OF THE PUBLICATIONS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. Tux scientific publications of the Zoological Society are of two kinds — “ Proceedings,” published in an octavo form, and “Transactions,” in quarto. According to the present arrangements, the “Proceedings” contain not only notices of all business transacted at the scien- tific meetings, but also all the papers read at such meetings and recommended to be published in the “ Proceedings ” by the Committee of Publication. From fifty to seventy coloured plates and engravings are attached to each annual volume of the “Proceedings,” to illustrate the new or otherwise remarkable species of animals described in them. Amongst such illustra- tions, figures of the new or rare species acquired in a living state for the Society’s Gardens are often given. The “Proceedings” for each year are issued in four parts, on the first of the months of June, August, October, and April, the part published in April completing the volume for the preceding year. The price is 12s. per part for the edition with coloured, and 3s. per part for that with uncoloured Plates, The “Transactions” contain such of the more important communications made. to the scientific meetings of the Society as, on account of the nature of the plates required to illustrate them, are better adapted for publication im the quarto form. They are issued at irregular intervals. Fellows and Corresponding Members, upon payment of a Subscription of One Guinea before the day of the Anni- versary Meeting in each year, are entitled to receive all the Society’s Publications for the year. They are likewise entitled to purchase the Publications of the Society at 25 per cent. less than the price charged for them to the Public. A further re- duction of 25 per cent. is made upon purchases of Publications issued prior to 1861, if they exceed the value of five pounds. The following is a complete list of the publications of the Society already issued. They may be obtained at the Society’s Office (3 Hanover Square, W.), at Messrs. Longmans’, the Society’s publishers (Paternoster Row, E.C.), or through any bookseller. [April 1, 1887.] 2 TRANSACTIONS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. Ato. 11 vols. and Six Parts. To Fellows. Tothe Public. £ s. d. £s. d. Vol. I., containing 59 Plates (1833-35) Price 313 6.... 418 O* Vol. IL., Pe eT s3 (1835-41) , 4 00. 5 6 6* Vol. IIl., iy 63 -,, 1842-49); «$2 31185 She 411 0O* Vol. IV., be itcke ie 1851-62) , 6 2 0. 8 2 6* Vol. V., - Gyn ks 1862-66) 5, 5 4 3 55... s6019C0 Vol. VI., 5 le, (1866-69 go V1 br"0) Soa O Vol. VII., 5, om aise @s69=72)" —, Silo 1116 0 Woll ViILIS* <5 S255; (1872-74). 35: 9°83: 1211 O Vol. IX., 9 99. 5. (1875-77) +655 12 40) 0F 16 0 0 Vol. X., F D4 ss (1877-79) , 19 0 3. eho 7A Index.: Vis; VX eis e:fore te ae oreo aceers eat sce 30 7. 6: oe, LOI Vol. XI., part 1, containing 4 Plates(Jan.1880) ,, O12 0. 016 0 Wool; Xe 35 82; an ue (Aur sie8s0)mess) (OISm0n, 1 4 0 Vol XS 5823; or Sry iran Mash) ih isa Sy abe 110 0 VoluX 1.5 55. 14; Bs Beisel CAPT aL Soli is5ot On yg One 010 O Volcxd., 45.5; Se Sig eee (OMNES Oi © Vest Oh Gun Ore 1 4 0 Wool Xl on 0s - Ges. (dane tSce)* 5. ) Ota. 016 O VoleXt= 25.075 - 90>, (Oct 1882), “45-2015 FOr 100 Vol. XI, ,, 8, Sy Hes 5 iansS8s)iets On 20 016 O Wola s.siu9: a LO) «2,5, (Oct..1883)) 4.) 10,126 OD. 016 0 Voli Xd, 310; i U2 ya (MayeleS5) yess. ll Te Ge. OF ie () Vole. .., Ul, Rs 14> 3, aCNoy. 1885) 5, IG: 20 20 VoloxXa,.., 2 op 6? 7 (Febv isso) 35 0! 9" Om 012 0 Vol. XII, ,, 2, % da BO Apralese) cers. 5 WOrtzraOme 016 O Vol. XIL., ,, 3, 3 Dees (Aum 1886), on" (On4 Gy. 0 6 0 Vol. XII., ,, 4, Fr 12 5 5, ©(Qct.. 1886): ,,. +0 1530. 10 0 Vol. XIL., ,, 5, 5 Danes (DecalSso)p 235, 10) Sp a0 012 0 Vol. XII., ,, 6, ag (imeiss w(Apr. i887)" 5,020 212 0) ee Oa Gee PROCEEDINGS OF THE COMMITTEE OF SCIENCE AND CORRE- SPONDENCE OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 8vo. 2 vols. To Fellows. Tothe Public. Part I. 1830-31. 1 vol. 8vo. .........2-. Price 4s. 6d. .. 65.7 5 live 1832: A eee waitin o% 3 48) Gds ea aGes PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 8vo. 15 vols. and Index. (First Series.) Priceto Price tothe Price to Price to the Fellows. Public, Fellows. Public. Part I. 1833. 1 vol. 8vo. 4s. 6d... 6s. Part IX. 1841. 1 vol. 8vo. 4s. 6d... 6s. 5 Il. 1834. as 4s. 6d... 6s. oe X. 1842. + 4s. 6d. .. 6s. » TIL. 1895, pee Ge: wo XT, 1843, 49? “eee oa! «~ TV." 1986 6 ee aan eiae: » XIE1844. >,” © 4556'S, Gs, = V. 1837. a3 4s. 6d. .. 6s. >» XIII. 1845. a5 4s. 6d. .. 6s. je VS 838: as 45. Gd. 4:0 6s. | » XIV. 1846. = 4s. 6d... 6s. 7 VAT. 1839: “a 4s. 6d... 6s. | XV. 1847. sy 4s. 6d... 6s. , WI1840, ~ 2 ede Gd Gac¥ | Index 1830184700 ><, Aedes! * No perfect copies of these volumes remain in stock. + Out of print. 3 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. 8vo. 13 vols. and Index. Letterpress only. (Second Series.) With Plates Coloured. To Fellows. To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public, i Sone Ge LL ised: Part XVI. 1848. 1 vol. 8vo. 4s. 6d. 6s Price 1 0 9 2) 6# » XVII. 1849. 35 ds. 6d. 65) es ae a eS ee iG eee VL. 1850. 5 4s. 6d. 6s. Premed |} gtetemdh 118 OF = XIX. 1851. 3 4s. 6d. 6s. a JOM aee9 Mae “e Xx... 1852. - 4s. 6d. 6s. Only 9 Tec Bs XXI. 1853. oe ds. 6d. 6s. a 0ntee. 0 4 0F peeewN I. 1854. 3 4s, 6d. 6s. = (OSG 1-65 0 » XXIII, 1855. 5 4s. 6d. 6s. Eee le ele th 118 OF » XXIV. 1856. ie 4s. 6d. 6s. a En eOr.9: 1° Gy Peek. 1857, 5 4s. 6d. 6s. cle Oe, Ll fewG » AXVI. 1858. - 4s. 6d. 6s. ped Sa EN) en 22710 pe eX V IT. 1859: - 4s. 6d. 6s. sa elite 22 OF » XXVIII. 1860. 3 4s. 6d. 6s, ne AG 2. 2s 0 Index 1848-1860. 4s. 6d. 6s. ILLUSTRATIONS ” TO THE PROCEEDINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON, 1848-60. 8vo. 6 vols. Plates Uncoloured. Plates Coloured. To Fellows. To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public, Pree a ees as ssid: Ss hee de Mianininliates:ccsceccss 1) vol. t 2-6, 110° .0 4. Pree 2. 7.3 oe o OT eee... 2 vol. 2 f 3... 3. 3..0-4.-°%, 414.6 6 6 OF Reptilia et Pisces ... 1 vol, 015 9..1 1 O*., 4 1 2 6 110 OF Mollusca............+ levole,, (Ombre Ob cre lee be Ot se ne 2G 110 OF Annulosa et Radiata 1 vol, 111 6..2 2 0 Priigah ey ahs: oe) OF PROCEEDINGS OF THE SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON. Letterpress only. Plates only. Complete. To Fellows. To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public, Wot. cloth4s. Gd. ..... O8..-... 30s. 9d. Bec: In eee ae dass9d. ,,. 14058. MiGs ,, 48. Oda usactOlewc ae « 5 Cm 7 teats | <1 aera 338. 9d. .... 45s. Og gee 7 A ee USc ols mats SU Set te atte: 338.9d. ..., 458. mene, 3, 48) 6d 2 688k BOSI9d. Tease «oer. 338.9d. .... 45s. 1S a AGT Raises 0s pear BUPEA G arrears: | KIC came 388. 9d... 45s. PSOGs 5, A600dsi9" (G8: nr <> BOS OG esc BS Gite 33s.9d. .... 45s. With Plates, uncoloured. With Plates, coloured. To Fellows. To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public. ES VAE ST) sucks) Sia level elnie cis cv Os 985 Od ke ee eis ise 33s. 9d. .... 45s. PSHM Eat stale cheiaveral oltace «ewe ser OS Os Fs ee U28S ac 33s. 9d. 3... 45s. MISES) itn via) okese'oy andl abaya Data (5 DRE Od ig pee Sy wy. lgaesde. sue SOS IE. is: 0sin 408: UD aioe ee Saas Ger Odeo s cere. MES epi wen 33s. 9d. .... 45s. Index, 1861-1870 .........- AghiGai er LOR OMA o rete Sreesanth: 8 wit ike Sal Reepicme OLS ea anen aici. ods. 9d. .,... 45s. Ph cae wa te aie ants ene Ose OME. cea noice ete 33s. 9d. .... 458.§ DAs ane wiretaehla le 6) Hoke e Sioiele's Dos One vatie. Vomaiets sxoitoses 33s. 9d. .... 458.§ SS AS | nin ie fevailatshes aot pl ener yap 95: ORF fact ADS Gigaset 36s. Od. .... 48s.§ SS/ Dims ptsnipt diese & ate) evel tips ies 9s. Od, OL Ee ai iiaa 36s. 0d. .... 48s.§ 1S7G) cates v1 « pivisaleele ote st ear Oe Oe paws seers ete c aes 36s. Od, .... 488.§ * No perfect copies of these velumes remain in stock, + Out of print. { Only uncoloured copies of these plates can now be supplied, at 10s, 6d. each volume, § Out of print, but odd parts may be obtained. 4, PROCEEDINGS OF THE SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON (continued). With Plates, uncoloured. | With Plates, coloured. To Fellows. To the Public. To Fellows. To the Public. LS Chee es pee rien SOUS. ke DS oe es aram 36s. Od. .... 48s [SUSAR tee eae tense ON Ae eR AA Re ke 960d. 92 128: SS ee 36s. Od. .... 48s ES Oe rote Bate cits. stati esp os 95; 08 55 JOR Aare 36s. Od. .... 48s NS SOR ire fotscs soi eceteto ces aueRhas Ds side 2 3 LOS ee ctaes 36s. Od. .... 48s.F Index, 1871-1880 .......... As: 608 s.00 6S USSG Pec toca: cet ol Mtns ve relia "v 9s: Odes: ble WOShr Rita s aces 36s. Od. .... 48s MSO titan oe able emcrtle o GRe OGM em Aan Sean hes eRe 36s. Od. .... 48s MS Gsh Bere SMicrete os eerste ahaa 9s. OG! 3.0.6 LOS eae cass 36s. Od. .... 48s SEO as Seem oetoee oc De iOd aan ee LOS Were. ccres 36s. Od. .... 48s NSB Saeki oie Seah eles hee Ds \Ods ao ram OBe «Mies weirs 36s. Od. .... 48s. 1886, no 1 (Jan. & Feb.) .. 2s. 3d. ..<. 3S. .3...... 9s: Ode. eles 1886, 2)(Mar(GApr.)aepiesioGe seit OS.) ota 95. Ode" 5 che 12s. 1886, ~,, 0 (May & June)... 25. 3d)... 38. .00.-%.- 9s. OU 3..54 W2St 1886; -,, -4:(Nov-& Dec). 2s. dds jean (O55".80.. « 9s, Odie... fe UIZS. (Houde in Cloth 3s. extra.) t Out of print, but odd parts may be obtained. LISTS OF THE ANIMALS IN THE SOCIETY’S GARDENS. List of Vertebrated Animals Living in the Gardens of the Zoological . Society of London. 8vo. 1862. Price 1s. 6d. List of Vertebrated Animals Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Second Edition.) 8vo. 1863. Price 1s. 6d. List of Vertebrated Animals Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Third Edition.) 8vo. 1865. Price 1s. 6d. List of Vertebrated Animals Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Fourth Edition.) 8vo. 1866. Price 1s. 6d. Revised List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. 8yo. 1872. Price 2s. Revised List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London.—Supplement, containing Additions received in 1872, 1873, and 1874. 8vo. 1875. Price 1s. List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Sixth Edition.) 8vo. 1877. Price 3s. 6d. List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Seventh Edition.) 8vo. 1879. Price 3s. 6d. List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London.—First Supplement, con- taining Additions received in 1879. 8vo. 1880. Price 1s. 6d. List of the Vertebrated Animals now or lately Living in the Gardens of the Zoological Society of London. (Highth Edition.) 8vo. 1883. Price 3s. 6d. These publications may be obtained at the Socrery’s Orrice (3 Flanover Square, W.), at Messrs. Lonemans’ (Paternoster Row, LLC), ov through any bookseller. | a PROCEEDINGS OF THE SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS OF THE ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON, | FOR THE YEAR PARY I. . CONTAINING PAPERS READ IN JANUARY ann FEBRUARY. JUNE ist, 1886. PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY, SOLD AT THEIR HOUSE IN HANOVER SQUARE. LONDON: | MESSRS. LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO, . VATERNOSTER-ROW. | , hs to So ae a TP Aa a ee f y : [Price Twelve Shillings. | aS LIST OF CONTENTS. PART L—1886. January 19, 1886. Pag The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie in December 1885 .... The Secretary. Exhibition of Lepidopterous Insects bred in the Tnsect-house during the past season CP Ce ee ee ee se sere tt se ee eseset er eee : ee eh er id Mr. A. Thomson. Report on the Insect-house ee ee ee ee re ror i a} Rey. T. R. R. Stebbing. Notice, and Abstract of a Memoir, on some new Amphipodous Crustaceans from Singapore and New Zealand i ee ie a} Dr. ©. 8. Minot. Letter from, calling attention to the Elizabeth Thompson Science Fund .. - Mr. Howard Saunders. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, an adult specimen of the Sooty Tern (Sterna fuliginosa) caught near Bath 8/0 € Ob 6S (086 06 Sie 08 ew ne) 6 on) on ollOrnl ae laleire eile & 1. On Butterflies of the Genus Parnassius. By H. J. Exwes, F.Z.8. (Plates I-IV.) 2. On the Mammals presented by Allan O. Hume, Esq., C.B., to the Natural History Museum. By O.prinnp Tuomas, F.Z.8. (Plates V. & VI.) Ce ee ee ee ee ee 3. On an apparently new Species of Duck (Da/la) from the Central Pacific. By H. B. Tristram, D.D., F.R.8. (Plate VIT.) Tee Re COPS te O Keene CORE oe seve cc orumeds «es esas Ce ee ee ee ee cd February 2, 1886. Mr. W. B. Tegetmeier, F.Z.8. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a skin of a Pheasant from the Persian borders of Transcaucasia ViPly 0 6 .b se 0 6.2.6 op 0 66% O's 5 see 06 6s uivlee 6 Bible tials Mr. W. H. Dobie. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a specimen of Sabine’s Gull (Xema sabinit), shot at Mostyn, on the coast of Flintshire, North Wales 516: a4 aco) ee binant a! Sele ate Mr. Henry Seebohm. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a specimen of Ross's Gull (Larus rossi), shot near Christianshaab, in Greenland Prof. R. Collett, C.M.Z.8. Notice of a Memoir cont: aining an Account of the External Characters of the Northern Fin-whale . Contents continued on page 3 of wr Contents (continued). Page 1. Notes on Freshwater Entomostraca from South Australia. By Grorce SrewArDson Brapy, M.D., F.R.S., F.L.S., Professor of Natural History in the Durham College of Scierice, Newcastle-upon-Tyne. (Plates VIII.-X.) ee ee er 2. Contribution to a Knowledge of the South-Italian Chiroptera, By Fr. 8. Monrrcexur, D.Sc. (Communicated by Dr. H. Woopwarp, F.R.S., F.G.8.) 0.060. c eee cee cece ee ee ee 93 &. Notes on Specimens in the Hume Collection of Birds. By R. Bowpier Suarrz, F.L,S8., &e. mes clin Cheattavwinen £ramy AthOCKs = dass bisld’ajchsie’eo aod cine t/elaleatedow aavtelsievtemsves 96 4. Preliminary Notice of the Isopoda collected during the Voyage of H.M.S. ‘ Challenger.’— Part IIT. By Frank BE. Bepparp, M.A., F.R.S.E., F.Z.S8., Prosector to the Society... 97 5. On a Variety of Anthocharis eupheno, from Mogador. By J. H. Lescn, F.Z.S. ........ 122 6. On a new Species of Bird of the Genus Copsychus. By R.G. Warpiaw Ramsay, F.Z.S., ; L LLSS) TSR RSS CERES cine GMen Ccigera inp OCistib SAR EG CEOS aoe nice croGunnpioee ravi» eye 123 February 16, 1886. The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie in January 1886...... 124 Mr. Selater. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a specinien of a newly described Paradise BERN (RUTACISOPNIS THLOUPRL)) cin cn cc ow cies civ vines avi view oe seine oeisiese@netos ceemes 125 Mr. L. Taczanowski, ©.M.Z.8. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, a skin of an Owl (Bubo _ blakistoni) from the Ussuri country on the frontiers of Corea ......++-.+++++5205: 125 Mr. Edward Gerrard, Jun. Exhibition of specimens of the heads and skulls of two African Rhinoceroses (Rhinoceros bicormis and BR. simus) .. 1. ssee ce ecee cece eeceer ences 125 Prof. Ray Lankester. Exhibition of a drawing of a restoration of Archeopteryx ........+- 125 1. Notes on a striking instance of Cranial Variation due to Age. By Oupriztp THomas, Natural History Museum. (Plate XT.) ..--...c0c sce scenes eerenee socece ones 125 2. On a new Madreporarian Coral of the Genus Stephanotrochus from the British Seas, with Notes on its Anatomy. By W. L. Scrarer, B.A., F.Z.S., Assistant to the Jodrell Professor of Zoology, University College, London, (Plates XII.-XIV.) ......+-.. 128 LIST. OF PLATES. 1886. PARTE Plate Page ir a Structure and Development cf Parnassius ........++....+05--. 6 TVs Viti nash uma a cmeiactreeen ae esiche aes» sls siete aire ian Oe teh ce aT } 54 VI. Sciuropterus davisoni ..... Sa eee ae Se EN, VIL MA Dasils modestec son a cinese iste Wiersild ick cin o/o eel uoeten aed eae 79 Vill TXS| Now Australian Wntomostraca 22. 02 i jecclcejusincs © 0 0's #0 e eureenente 82 XI; Skulis of Mustela pennantitiry..oc1.s0. 20. stingers ic ela on ele e pees p.4 9 XU. | sepanotts mroseloy anus Weis ek siete Sa UIs oer epee emied 128 XIV. NOTICE. According to present arrangements the * Proceedings’ are issued in four parte, as follows:— Part I. containing papers read in January and February, on June Ist. rT A ‘s » March and April, on August Ist. III. = af », May and June, on October Ist. TVs “ As » November and December, on April Ist. The price is 12s. per part for the edition with coloured, and 3s. per part for that with uncoloured Plates. i PROCEEDINGS OF THE OF THE | SCIENTIFIC MEETINGS ZOOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF LONDON, FOR THE YEAR 1886. PARA. EI. ) CONTAINING PAPERS READ IN MARCH anp APRIL. AUGUST ist, 1886. PRINTED FOR THE SOCIETY, SOLD AT THEIR HOUSE IN HANOVER SQUARE. LONDON : MESSRS. LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO, | | , ) : h PATERNOSTER-ROW. | | On [Price Twelve Shillings. a ee ee ee ee LIST OF CONTENTS PART II.—1886. March 2, 1886. Page — The Secretary. Report on the Additions to the Society’s Menagerie in February 1886 .... 137 Mr. J. G. Millais, F.Z.8. Exhibition of, and remarks upon, specimens of the Ivory Guill (Larus eburneus), shot in Soptland~ 2s: